Grayhill Catalog

Contents: Surface Mount and Thru-Hole DIP Switches
OPEN CLOSED
SURFACE MOUNT SWITCHES
Series
90HBW • Standard DIP Package Outline
Includes PIANO-DIP®
DIP Switches
• Tactile Feedback, Board
90B
Mount Switches
THRU-HOLE DIP SWITCHES

• Consistent High Contact
Pressure With Spring and Ball
76
Contact System
• Standard Base Seal; Optional
Top Tape Seal
• Large Selection of Types and
78 Styles Includes Military
Qualified Switches
• RoHS Compliant
Page
PG_I 49_25REARANDFRONT.EPS
SELECTION CHART .................................................................................... 3
PAGE_J26_ CIRCUIT DIAGRAM_SERIES 19.EPS
PAGE J48 8 & 9 SERIES.EPS
TRSGROUP.TIF Half-Pitch ............................................................. Series 97 ......................... 4
UL.EPS SPST, Low Profile ................................................ Series 90HB .................... 5
TOGGLEGR.TIF SPDT and DPST .................................................. Series 78H ....................... 7
Side Actuated PIANO-DIP® .......................................................... Series 76HP .................... 8
STUDDETA.EPS
TACT GROUP.TIF
STDLIGHT.TIF THRU-HOLE DIP SWITCHES
SLIDEGRO.TIF Machine Insertable MIDIP® .......................................................... Series 90B ....................... 9
SPST Rocker
SERIES 1X4 STANDARD ....................................................... Series 76 ....................... 10
LEGEND.EPS
SPST to 4PST Slide ............................................ Series 78 ....................... 11
SERIES85.TIF SPDT ................................................................... Series 76 & 78 ............... 12
WAVEFORM.EPS DPDT ................................................................... Series 76 & 78 ............... 13
WEBSITE.TIF Specifications ....................................................... Series 76, 78, 90B ......... 14
ORIG SECTION F GLinear
H ILLUS
Action FILES
Tap ................................................. Series 79A & 79C .......... 15
OPENLTPI.TIF Linear Action Coded Output ................................ Series 79B ..................... 16
Right Angle Terminal Option ............................... Series 78C ..................... 17
LOCKWASH.EPS
CUT-A-WA.Y ROTARY DIP SWITCHES
OL_COLOR.EPS Binary Coded ....................................................... Series 94H ..................... 19
OL POWER SUPPLY.EPS
Economical Binary Coded ..................................... Series 94R ..................... 21
OPENDACB.TIF
Options and Accessories ............................................................................. 22
OPENDAC4.TIF
OPENDAC.TIF
DIP
Grayhill, Inc. • 561 Hillgrove Avenue • LaGrange, Illinois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhill.com 2
DIP Switch Selection Chart
Circuitry Description Type of Series No. of Positions No. of Page

Actuation Available Actuators Number
Half-Pitch Top Actuated, Recessed Slide 97 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1/Station 4

Single Pole, Standard DIP Package Top Actuated, Recessed Slide 90 2-10 1/Station 5
Single Throw
Standard DIP Package Side Actuated 76 2-10 & 12 1/Station 8
SPDT, DPST Standard DIP Package Side Actuated, Top Actuated 78 1-5 1/Station 7
Standard, Octal, BCD & Hex Rotary 94 8, 10 & 16 1 20

Complement Code
THRU-HOLE DIP SWITCHES

(Also see Series 76, 78 and 90 Surface Mount DIP Switches)
Circuitry Description Type of Series No. of Positions No. of Page

Actuation Available Actuators Number
SINGLE THROW SWITCHES

Machine Insertable Recessed Slide 90 2–10 1/Station 9
Raised Rocker 76 2-10 & 12 1/Station 10
DIP Switches
Single Pole, Recessed Rocker 76 2-10 & 12 1/Station 10

Single Throw Standard Side Actuated 76 2–10 & 12 1/Station 10
Slide 78 2–10 & 12 1/Station 11
Recessed Slide 78 2–10 1/Station 11
2PST Slide* 78 1–5 1/Station 11
Multiple Pole, 3PST Slide* 78 1–3 1/Station 11
Single Throw 4PST Slide* 78 1&2 1/Station 11
5, 6, 7, 8, or 10PST Slide* 78 1 1/Station 11
MULTIPLE THROW SWITCHES

Circuit Selector 1-of-10 Circuits Linear Action Slide 79 10 1 15
1-of-16 Circuits Linear Action Slide 79 16 1 15
Raised Rocker 76 2–4 1/Station 10
Standard Recessed Rocker 76 2–4 1/Station 10
Single Pole, Toggle 76 2–4 1/Station 10
Multiple Throw Slide 78 1–6 1/Station 10
Raised Rocker 76 1&2 1/Station 13

Double Pole, Standard Recessed Rocker 76 1&2 1/Station 13
Double Throw Toggle 76 1&2 1/Station 13
Slide 78 1&2 1/Station 13
BINARY CODED OUTPUT SWITCHES

Standard Code BCD & Hexadecimal Linear Action Slide 79 10 & 16 1 16
Octal, BCD, & Hex Rotary 94 8, 10 & 16 1 20
Complement Octal, BCD, & Hex Rotary 94 8, 10 & 16 1 20
Grayhill Series 76 DIP switches are covered by one or more of the following patents pending:
4,031,345, Canada 1,035,820 (1978), and Canada 1,055,551 (1979). Series 79 switches are
protected by patent number 4,491,703. Series 90 switches are protected by patent numbers
4,590,344 and 4,670,630.
DIP
3 Grayhill, Inc. • 561 Hillgrove Avenue • LaGrange, Illinois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhill.com
Surface Mount DIP Switches
SERIES 97
Half-Pitch
FEATURES APPLICATIONS
• Half the Size of Standard DIP Used in any DIP application where
Switches space is at a premium such as
• Available in 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10 notebook computers, hand-held
Positions radios, industrial control products, CD-
DIP Switches
• Low Profile ROM drives, cellular base stations
• Less Mass for Easy Vacuum Pick and coin changers.
& Place
Fig. 1 Series 97C DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)

Top View Front View Side View Recommended PC Pad Dimensions
LENGTH
SEE ORDERING .050 (1,27) Pitch
INFORMATION
TAPE THICKNESS .059
.177 .003 (0,08) (1,50)
(4,50)
.291
.030 (0,76) .193 (7,39)
(4,90)
.024 (0,61) .242
.016 .050 (6,15)
(0,41) (1,27) .004
.264 (6,71) (0,10)
Pitch
Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are ±0.008 (0,20)
Fig. 2 Series 97R DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)

Top View Front View Side View Recommended PC Pad Dimensions
A
.047 .057
(1,20) .177±.002 (1,44) .050 (1,27) PITCH
(4,50±0,05) TAPE
.002
(0,05)
ON
.030 .260 .360
(0,76) (6,60) (9,10)
.024
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (0,6) .016 .050 .310
.319 (0,40) (1,27) (7,85)
.024 (8,1) PITCH
(0,6) .004±.004
(0,10±0,10)
SPECIFICATIONS CIRCUITRY
Electrical Ratings perpendicular planes at a cycle of 10-55-10Hz/1
Contact Rating: 25 mA at 24 Vdc switching; minute.
100 mA at 50 Vdc non-switching Operating Temperature Range: -40 to 85°C
Contact Resistance: 100 mΩ max, initially Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 85°C
Insulation Resistance: 100 MΩ minimum at
100 Vdc Materials
Dielectric Strength: 300 Vac for one minute Base and Cover: UL94V-0 Nylon, black Cleaning: Tape sealed versions are capable
Switch Capacitance: 5pF maximum Actuators: UL94V-0 Nylon thermoplastic, white of withstanding washing processes using
Contact Arrangement: SPST Base Contacts: Alloy copper with gold-plating alcohol-based solvents only. Water or other
over nickel water-based solvent washing processes are
Mechanical Ratings Terminals: Brass with gold-plating not recommended. Care should be taken to
Life: 1,000 cycles minimum Tape Seal: Kapton avoid flux adhering to the switch body from the
Operation Force: 500 gF circuit board soldering process. The switch
Mechanical Shock: MIL-STD-202F, Method, Soldering Information should be allowed to cool for at least 3 minutes
213B, Test Condition A. Gravity: 50G's (peak between the end of the solder process and the
Vapor phase and IR-reflow soldering can be
value), 11 m/sec. Direction and times: 6 sides beginning of the wash process. The solvent
applied. With stands 255°C peak temperature.
and 3 times in each direction. stage of the cleaning process is not to exceed
Vibration: MIL-STD-202F, Method 201A. 1 minute and the whole wash process is not to
Passed 6 hours (2 hours in each) of three All DIP switches are shipped in the "ON" position. exceed 3 minutes. Ultrasonic or pressure wash
cleaning is not recommended.
ORDERING INFORMATION
Series: 97C see fig. 1, 97R see fig. 2 Packaging Information
Positions: 02 = .148 (3,76), 04 = .248 (6,30), 06 = .348 (8,84), Tube: 130 pcs/tube (2 positions), 75 pcs/tube
08 = .448 (11,38), 10 = .548 (13,92) (4 positions), 54 pcs/tube (6 positions), 40 pcs/
97C06SRT tube (8 positions), 33 pcs/tube (10 positions).
T= RoHS compliant Tape and Reel: 97C: 4,000 pcs/reel (all
Packaging: Blank = Tube, R = Tape and Reel (see pkg note) positions). 97R: 2500 pcs/reel (all positions).
Seal: Blank = Unsealed, S = Top Tape Seal
DIP
SERIES 90HB
SPST, Low Profile
FEATURES
• Compatible with SMT Assembly,
Including Infrared Reflow and
Vapor-Phase
• Top Seal Withstands High
Pressure Aqueous Cleaning
• Reliable Spring and Ball Contact
DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)
Top View–Gull Wing
SWITCH IS PACKAGED
AS SHOWN HERE
WITH ALL
O N
POSITIONS ON
Gull Wing
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DIP Switches
.020 ± .002
(0,51 ± 0,05) TYP. .160 ± .005
.052 ± .002 .290 (7,37) LENGTH ± .010 (0,25)
MAX. (4,19 ± 0,13) SEE CHART
(1,32 ± 0,13) TYP.
.085 ± .005
(2,16 ± 0,13) TYP. .100 ± .005
CL C (2,54 ± 0,13)
L .395 .012 ± .002 .190 .004
TYP.
± .010 (0,30 ± 0,05) (4,83) (0,10)
Recommended PC Pad Dimensions–Gull Wing (10,03 MAX.
CL CL ± 0,25)
.100 (2,54) TYP.
.070 (1,78) TYP.
J-Bend
.500
(12,7) .250 (6,35) TYP.
TYP.
.320 (8,13)
MAX.
.290 (7,37) .160 ± .005
.125 (3,18) TYP. LENGTH ± .010 (0,25)
MAX. (4,19 ± 0,13) SEE CHART
Recommended PC Pad Dimensions–J-Bend
CL CL
.100 (2,54) TYP. .012 ± .001 .220 .020 ± .002 .004
(0,30 ± 0,03) (5,59) (0,51 ± 0,05) TYP.
.070 (1,78) TYP. (0,10)
TYP. MAX. .100 ± .010
.250 ± .010 (2,54 ± 0,25) TYP.
.085 ± .005
.350 (6,35 ± 0,25)
(2,16 ± 0,13) CL CL
(8,90) .150 (3,81) TYP. TYP.
TYP.
.100 (2,54) TYP.
CIRCUITRY
As viewed from the top of the switch in the
positions shown in the drawing.
DIP
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Ratings Materials and Finishes
Make-and-break Current Rating: 2,000 Environmental Ratings Shorting Member (Ball): Brass, gold-plate
operations per switch position at these resistive Meets all requirements of MIL- S-83504. over nickel barrier.
loads:10 mA, 30 Vdc; or 10 mA, 50 mVdc; 10 Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to + Base Contacts: Copper alloy, gold-plate
mA, 50 mVdc; or 25 mA, 24 Vdc; or 100 mA,6 85°C over nickel barrier.
Vdc. Storage Temperature Range: -40°C to + 85°C Terminals: Copper alloy, matte tin plated over
Contact Resistance: (measured at 10 mA, 50 Moisture Resistance: Per MIL-STD-202, nickel barrier.
mVdc). Initial: 20 mohms maximum, After Life: Method 106. Non-Conductive Parts: Thermoplastic (UL94V-
100 mohms maximum O)
DIP Switches
Insulation Resistance: Minimum, at 100 Vdc Soldering Information
between adjacent closed contacts and also Solderability: Per MIL-STD-202, Method 208 Tape and Reel Packaging
across open switch contacts. Soldering Heat Resistance: Per MIL-S-83504, Tape Seal Integrity: Passes gross leak test
Initial (Mohms): 5,000, After Life (Mohms): 1,000 six second test. using 125°C flourinert for 20 seconds minimum.
Dielectric Strength: Minimum voltage (AC RMS) Recommended Processing Temperature: Reference MIL-STD-202, Method 112
measured between adjacent closed 220°C–230°C (1 pass—260°C maximum) Tape Seal: Polyimide film
contacts and also across open switch contacts. Processing Position: Switch is to be processed
lnitial: 500 volts, After Life: 500 volts with all actuators in the closed (on) position as
Current Carry Rating: 3A maximum rise of shipped.
20°C Fluxing: Per EIA RS-448-2 with flux touching TAPE AND REEL PACKAGING
Switch Capacitance: 2 pF at 1 megahertz switch body.
Cleaning: Passes immersion test using water/ Meets requirements of
Mechanical Ratings detergent. Acceptable solutions include 1-1-1 EIA 481-2 or EIA 481-3
Where Grayhill performance is superior, the MIL trichlorethane, freon, (TF, TE, or TMS), isopropyl 13 INCH
spec is listed in parentheses. alcohol, detergent (140°F maximum). Terpene DIAMETER REEL
Mechanical Life: 2,000 operations per switch acceptable for Series 90 only. Solutions which
position are not recommended include acetone,
Vibration Resistance: Per Method 204, Test methylene chloride, freon TMC.
Condition B , 1mS opening (10 mS allowed)
Mechanical Shock: Per Method 213, Test
Condition A. 1mS opening (10 mS allowed) CONDUCTIVE
Thermal Shock Resistance: Per specification; PLASTIC EMBOSSED
TAPE
no failures; passes contact resistance.
Terminal Strength: Per specification
Thermal Aging: 1,000 hours at 85°C; no failures.
DIRECTION
ORDERING INFORMATION OF FEED
16mm 24mm
TAPE
Series
Terminal Style: W = Gull Wing, J = J-Bend
RoHS compliant
90HBW02PRT
Packaging: R = Tape and reel packaging (750 switches/reel)

Blank = Tube packaging (each tube is 19.5" long) 16mm 32 &
Seal: P = Polyimide Seal 44mm
Blank = No Seal PIN ONE LOCATION TAPE
Number of Positions: 02 through 10

Each reel has a 15.750 inch (390 mm)
minimum leader and a 6.30 inch (160
No. of Length Length Number mm) minimum trailer.
Positions Inches Metric Per Tube
2 .270" 6,9 mm 60
3 .370" 9,4 mm 47
4 .470" 11,9 mm 37
5 .570" 14,5 mm 31
6 .670" 17,0 mm 26
7 .770" 19,6 mm 23
8 .870" 22,1 mm 20
9 .970" 24,6 mm 18
10 1.070" 27,2 mm 16
Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.

For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill. DIP
6
Grayhill, Inc. • 561 Hillgrove Avenue • LaGrange, Illinois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhill.com
SERIES 78H FEATURES

SPDT and DPST • Compatible with SMT Assembly
Vapor-Phase
SPDT, DPST, Top Actuated, Slide Operated Recommended PC Pad Dimensions

.380 ± .010 LENGTH ± .010 (0,25)
(9,65 ± 0,25) SEE ORDER INFO
.023
.055 ± .010 (5,84) .530
(1,40 ± 0,25) REF. .280 (7,11)
.268 ± .010 (13,46)
.025 (0,64) R. TYP.
(6,81 ± 0,25) TYP.
.303 ± .015
.100 ± .005 .295 + .000 – .020 .070 (1,78) TYP.
(7,70 ± 0,38)
.012 ± .001 CL CL (2,54 ± 0,13) TYP. (7,49 – 0,51) .100 (2,54) TYP.
(0,30 ± 0,03) .424 ± .015
(10,77 ± 0,38) TYP. CL CL
TYP.
CIRCUITRY
SPDT 2 Circuits (no common) DPST
Materials and Finishes
1 1 1 1
ON ON Shorting Member: Brass, gold-plated
Dot indicates over nickel barrier.
DIP Switches
active circuit.
Base Contacts: Copper alloy, gold-plated
over nickel barrier.
OFF ON Terminals: Copper alloy, matte tin-plated over
nickel barrier.
SPECIFICATIONS Non-Conductive Parts: Cover is natural color
Electrical Ratings thermoplastic, actuators are white thermoplastic
Make-and-break Current Rating: 2,000 Terminal Strength: Per specification (UL94V-O)
operations per switch position at 1 mA, 5 Vdc; Thermal Aging: 1,000 hours at 85°C; no failures
50 mA, 30 Vdc; or 150 mA, 30 Vdc Thermal Shock: Per specification; no failures;
Contact Resistance: Initial: 30 mohms max. passes contact resistance TAPE AND REEL PACKAGING
After Life: 100 mohms max. (10 mA at 50 Vdc,
open circuit) Environmental Ratings Meets requirements of EIA 481-2 or
Insulation Resistance: Minimum, at 100 Vdc Meets all requirements of MIL- S-83504. Where EIA 481-3
between adjacent closed contacts and also Grayhill performance is superior, the MIL spec is
across open switch contacts. Initial: 2,000 13 INCH
listed in parentheses. DIAMETER REEL
Mohms; After Life: 1,000 Mohms Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to +
Dielectric Strength: Minimum voltage (AC, 85°C CONDUCTIVE
RMS) measured between adjacent closed PLASTIC EMBOSSED
Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to + 85°C TAPE
contacts and also across open switch contacts. Moisture Resistance: Per MIL-STD-202,
4
3
Initial: 750 volts; After Life: 500 volts Method 106

2
1
4
Current Carry Rating: 4 amps, maximum rise

3
2
DIRECTION
of 20°C
1
Soldering Information
4
OF FEED
3
Switch Capacitance: 2 pF at 1megahertz 16 & 24mm

2
Solderability: Per MIL-STD-202, Method 208

1
4
16mm TAPE
3
Soldering Heat Resistance: Per MIL-S-83504,

2
Mechanical Ratings
1
4
six second test

3
1 1 1
Mechanical Life: 2,000 operations per switch
2
Recommended Processing Temperature:

4
position 220°C–230°C (1 pass—260°C maximum)

Vibration Resistance: Per method 204, Test Processing Position: Switch is to be processed
1
2
1
2
1
Condition B. 1 mS opening (10 mS allowed) with all actuators in the closed (on) position as 3 3 3
Mechanical Shock: Per Method 213, Test shipped. 4 4 4
Condition A. 1 mS opening (10 mS allowed)

16mm
ORDERING INFORMATION: Tube Packaging 32 & 44mm
TAPE
PIN ONE LOCATION
No. of Length Length Carrier Width Part Number*
COVER TAPE
Positions (inches) (metric) Dim. A SPDT DPST
DIM. A (SEE ORDER INFO.)
1 0.280" 7,1 mm 24 mm 78HJ01GWT 78HF01GWT
2 0.480" 12,2 mm 24 mm 78HJ02GWT 78HF02GWT
3 0.680" 17,3 mm 32 mm 78HJ03GWT 78HF03GWT Each reel has a 15.750 inch (390 mm)
4 0.880" 22,4 mm 44 mm 78HJ04GWT 78HF04GWT minimum leader and a 6.30 inch (160 mm)
5 1.080" 27,4 mm 44 mm 78HJ05GWT 78HF05GWT minimum trailer.
* Insert "R" before the "T" in the Grayhill part number for tape and reel packaging (500 switches/reel).
Available from your local Grayhill Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
DIP Grayhill, Inc. • 561 Hillgrove Avenue • LaGrange, Illinois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhill.com
7
SERIES 76HP FEATURES

Side Actuated PIANO-DIP ® • Compatible with SMT Assembly
Vapor-Phase
• Easily Accessed when PC Boards
are Racked
DIP Switches
.380 Recommended PC Pad Dimensions`

LENGTH ± .010
± .010 (0,25 (9,65
SEE ORDER INFO .023 ± 0,25)
.055 ± .010 (5,84)
.305 ± .010 (1,40 ± 0,25) REF. .530 .280 (7,11)
(7,75 ± 0,25) .025 (0,64) R. (13,46) TYP.
TYP.
.100 ± .005 .303 ± .015

CL CL (2,54 ± 0,13) TYP. (7,70 ± 0,38) .070 (1,78) TYP.
.012 ± .001
(0,30 ± 0,03) .424 ± .015 .100 (2,54) TYP.
TYP. (10,77 ± 0,38) CL CL
TYP.
CIRCUITRY
Condition B. 1 mS opening (10 mS allowed) over nickel barrier.
As viewed from Mechanical Shock: Per Method 213, Test Base Contacts: Copper alloy, gold-plated,
the top of the Condition A. 1 mS opening (10 mS allowed) over nickel barrier.
switch in the Thermal Shock Resistance: Per specification; Terminals: Copper alloy, matte tin plated
positions shown no failures; passes contact resistance over nickel barrier.
in the drawing. Terminal Strength: Per specification Non-Conductive Parts: Cover is natural color
Thermal Aging: 1,000 hours at 85°C; no failures thermoplastic, actuators are white
thermoplastic (UL94V-O)
Environmental Ratings Tape Seal: Not available with Tape Seal.
SPECIFICATIONS Meets all requirements of MIL- S-83504. Where
Electrical Ratings
TAPE AND REEL PACKAGING
Grayhill performance is superior, the MIL spec is
Make-and-break Current Rating: 2,000 listed in parentheses. Meets requirements of
operations per switch position at 1 mA, 5 Vdc; 50 Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to + EIA 481-2 or EIA 481-3
mA, 30 Vdc; or 150 mA, 30 Vdc 85°C 13 INCH
Contact Resistance: Initial: 30 mohms Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to + 85°C DIAMETER REEL
maximum; After Life: 100 mohms maximum Moisture Resistance: Per MIL-STD-202,
(10 mA at 50 Vdc, open circuit) Method 106
Insulation Resistance: Minimum, at 100 Vdc
between adjacent closed contacts and also Soldering Information
across open switch contacts. Initial: 2,000 Solderability: Per MIL-STD-202, Method 208 CONDUCTIVE
Mohms Tested to EIA Standard RS-448-2. PLASTIC EMBOSSED
TAPE
Dielectric Strength: Minimum voltage (AC Resistance to Soldering Heat: Per MIL-S-
RMS) measured between adjacent closed 83504, six second test
contacts and also across open switch contacts. Recommended Processing Temperature:
Initial: 750 volts; After Life: 500 volts 220°C–230°C (1 pass—260°C maximum)
Carry Rating: 5 amps, maximum rise of 20°C Processing Position: Switch is to be processed DIRECTION
OF FEED
Switch Capacitance: 2 pF at 1 megahertz with all actuators in the closed (on) position as 16 & 24mm
shipped. 16mm TAPE
Mechanical Ratings
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
76HPSB
76HPSB
76HPSB
08GW
08GW
08GW
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
Mechanical Life: 2,000 operations per switch Materials and Finishes

position Shorting Member: Brass, gold-plated
Vibration Resistance: Per Method 204, Test
76HPSB08GW
76HPSB08GW
76HPSB08GW
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
ORDERING INFORMATION: Tape and Reel Packaging (500 switches per reel)
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
No. of Length Length Carrier Width Part

Positions* (inches) (metric) Dim. A Number 16mm 32, 44 &
56mm
2 0.280" 7,1 mm 24 mm 76HPSB02GWRT PIN ONE LOCATION TAPE
4 0.480" 12,2 mm 24 mm 76HPSB04GWRT
COVER TAPE
6 0.680" 17,3 mm 32 mm 76HPSB06GWRT
8 0.880" 22,4 mm 44 mm 76HPSB08GWRT DIM. A (SEE ORDER INFO.)
10 1.080" 27,4 mm 44 mm 76HPSB10GWRT Each reel has a 15.750 inch (390 mm)
* For other lengths, contact Grayhill, Inc. minimum leader and a 6.30 inch (160 mm)
minimum trailer.
Available from your local Grayhill Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local
Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
DIP
Thru-Hole DIP Switches
SERIES 90B FEATURES

Machine Insertable MIDIP • Tested for TO-116 Equipment
• Up to 10 Positions
• High Pressure, Reliable Contacts
• Molded (Sealed) Base and
90B
Optional Top Seal
DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters) CIRCUITRY
As viewed from the top of the switch in the

positions shown in the drawing.
Switch is packaged as shown O N
here with all positions on.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DIP Switches
.290
(7,37) .165 ± .005
(4,19 ± 0,13) LENGTH ± .010 (0,25)
MAX. SEE CHART
CL
.195
.135 ± .010 (4,95)
.375 (3,43 ± 0,25) MAX. .020 ± .002 (0,51 ± 0,05) TYP.
± .010 TYP.
.012 ± .001 (9,53 .100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13) TYP.
(0,30 ± 0,03) ± 0,25) .085 ± .005 (2,16 ± 0,13) TYP.
TYP.
DESIGNED FOR
.100 X .300 (2,54 X 7,62)
ON CENTER HOLES
ORDERING INFORMATION: Tube Packaging (Each tube is 19.5 inches long) Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
No. of Length Length Number Part Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Positions Inches Metric Per Tube Number*
2 .270" 6,9 mm 60 90B02PT
3 .370" 9,4 mm 47 90B03PT
4 .470" 11,9 mm 37 90B04PT
5 .570" 14,5 mm 31 90B05PT
6 .670" 17,0 mm 26 90B06PT
7 .770" 19,6 mm 23 90B07PT
8 .870" 22,1 mm 20 90B08PT
9 .970" 24,6 mm 18 90B09PT
10 1.070" 27,2 mm 16 90B10PT
*The "P"in the part number denotes top tape seal versions. To order without top tape seal, leave the
"P" off the part number when ordering.
DIP
SERIES 76
SPST Rocker
FEATURES
• Raised and Recessed, Rocker
and PIANO-DIP® Styles
• Sealed Base Standard
• Spring and Ball Contact
DIP Switches
• Top Tape Seal Option

Rocker and Recessed Rocker Side Actuated PIANO-DIP® PIANO-DIP® B = .156 ± .010
End Views (3,96 ± 0,25)
TYPICAL
.020 + .005 –.000

(0,51 + 0,13)
LENGTH LENGTH
.281 ± .010
± .010 (±0,25) ± .010 (±0,25) B
(7,14 ± 0,25)
SEE ORDER INFO. SEE ORDER INFO.
TYP.
.012 ± .001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (0,30 ± 0,03)
.380 ± .010
.380 ± .010 .300 + .030 –.000
OPEN (9,65 ± 0,25) CL CL (7,62 + 0,76)
(9,65 ± 0,25)
OPEN Rocker
A = .272 ± .010
(6,91 ± 0,25)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 .020 + .005
A –.000
.295 + .000 (0,51 + 0,13)
–.020
.090 ± .005 (7,49 –0,51)
.090 ± .005 .012 ± .001
(2,29 ± 0,13)
(2,29 ± 0,13) .020 ± .002 .156 ± .010 (0,30 ± 0,03)
.020 ± .002 .100 ± .005 (3,96 ± 0,25)
.100 ± .005 (0,51 ± 0,05) .300 + .030 –.000
(0,51 ± 0,05) (2,5 ± 0,13) TYP. (7,62 + 0,76)
(2,5 ± 0,13) CL CL
See also end view. See also end view. For recessed rockers, delete .295 dimension.
CIRCUITRY
Styles 76SB and 76RSB Style 76PSB Styles 76PRB
UP IS OPEN (OFF) UP IS CLOSED (ON)
Typical circuit diagram with actuator

in the closed position. Actuator shown in the down position. Actuator shown in the down position.
Series No. of Pos. Length (Inches) Length (Metric) No./Tube

Switch Style: SB = Raised Rocker 2 0.280" 7,1 mm 35
RSB = Recessed Rocker 3 0.380" 9,7 mm 27
PSB = Piano-DIP (Up is Off) 4 0.480" 12,2 mm 21
PRB = Piano-DIP (Up is On) 5 0.580" 14,7 mm 18
6 0.680" 17,3 mm 15
76RSB04ST 7 0.780" 19,8 mm 13
8 0.880" 22,4 mm 12
T = RoHS compliant 9 0.980" 24,9 mm 10
Sealed*: S = Tape Seal 10 1.080" 27,4 mm 9
Number of Positions: 02 through 10, 12 12 1.280" 32,5 mm 8
*A top tape seal is required for switches that are Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
machine soldered or heavily cleaned after hand For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
soldering. To order top seal versions, add "S" to Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
the Grayhill part number.
DIP
SERIES 78 FEATURES
SPST To 4PST Slide • Raised and Recessed Slides
• SPST, 2PST, 3PST, 4PST
• Sealed Base Standard
• Top Tape Seal Option
78

Single Pole/Single Throw Switch in Raised and Recessed Slides Typical Multiple Pole Switch with
Raised Slides
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Note: (Switch shown here is 78H02, 4PST)
.380 ± .010 O
N Recessed slides have a dimple for
(9,65 ± 0,25) tool actuation. For recessed slides, 1 2
the .295 dimension does not apply. .380 ± .010 O
N
(9,65 ± 0,25)
Length ± .010 (± 0.25)
See Ordering Information
Length ± .010 (± 0.25)
.060 ± .002 (1,52 ± 0,05) .070 (1,78) REF. See Ordering Information
DIM. B
DIM. B
.295 + .000 –.020 2PST = .100 (2,54
DIP Switches
.020 A (7,49 –0,51) ± .002

3PST = .200 (5,08)
± .002 (± 0,05)
4PST = .300 (7,62)
(0,51 .156 + .015 –.010
± 0,05) (3,96 + 0,38 –0,25) TYP.
.020 ± .002 (0,51 ± 0,05) .050 ± .005 A = .245 + .000 –.020
.090 ± .005 (2,29 ± 0,13) (1,27 ± 0,13) (6,22 + 0,51)
TYP. .180 ± .010 (4,57 ± 0,25)
.100 ± .005 (2,5 ± 0,13)
C C .012 ± .001 (0,30 ± 0,03) .020 ± .002 (0,51 ± 0,05)
L L
.300 + .030 –.000 .090 ± .005 (2,29 ± 0,13)
C
L C
L (7,62 + 0,76)
.100 ± .005 (2,5 ± 0,13)
C
L C
L
CIRCUITRY ORDERING INFORMATION

Single Pole/Single Throw Switch No. of Length Length No./ Raised Recessed
Circuitry Positions Inches Metric Tube Slides* Slides*
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 2 0.280" 7,1mm 35 78B02T 78RB02T
O O
N N
3 0.380" 9,7mm 27 78B03T 78RB03T
4 0.480" 12,2mm 21 78B04T 78RB04T
5 0.580" 14,7mm 18 78B05T 78RB05T
SPST 6 0.680" 17,3mm 15 78B06T 78RB06T
7 0.780" 19,8mm 13 78B07T 78RB07T
8 0.880" 22,4mm 12 78B08T 78RB08T
9 0.980" 24,9mm 10 78B09T 78RB09T
10 1.080" 27,4mm 9 78B10T 78RB10T
12 1.280" 32,5mm 8 78B12T 78RB12T
Typical Multiple Typical Circuit
Pole Switch Diagram 1 0.280" 7,1mm 35 78F01T
2 0.480" 12,2mm 21 78F02T
1 1 2PST 3 0.680" 17,3mm 15 78F03T
O O
N N 4 0.880" 22,4mm 12 78F04T Recessed
5 1.080" 27,4mm 9 78F05T Slides
6 1.280" 32,5mm 8 78F06T Not Available
1 0.380" 9,7mm 27 78G01T
3PST 2 0.680" 17,3mm 15 78G02T
3 0.980" 24,9mm 10 78G03T
4PST 1 0.480" 12,2mm 21 78H01T
2 0.880" 22,4mm 12 78H02T
For switches with 5, 6, 7, 8, or 10PST circuitry,
contact Grayhill. Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
*A top tape seal is required for switches that are Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
machine soldered or heavily cleaned after hand
soldering. To order top seal versions, add "S"
before the "T" in the Grayhill part number.
11
SERIES 76 and 78
SPDT
FEATURES
• Raised and Recessed Rocker,
and Toggle Actuated Styles
• SPDT with a Common Pole, or
SPDT with 2 Isolated Circuits
DIP Switches
• Top Tape Seal Option for
Most Styles
DIMENSIONS: Series 76 In inches (and millimeters) CIRCUITRY: Series 76

Series 76 Raised Rocker Toggle-DIP SPDT with Common
.380 ± .010 True Form C Switching
(9,65 ± 0,25)
1 C1 2 .447 ± .015
.380 ± .010 A = .247 ± .010 (11,35 ± 0,38)
(9,65 ± 0,25) (6,27 ± 0,25) TYP. 1 C1 2 1 C1 2
C2
.020 + .005 –.000 .295 + .000 –.020

A (7,49 –0,51)
(0,51 + 0,13) C2 C2
Recessed Rocker 1 C1 1 C1
.156 + .015 –.010
.050 ± .005 (3,96 + 0,38 –0,25)
(1,27 ± 0,13)
.020 .090 ± .005 .180 ± .010 .247 ± .010
± .002 (2,29 ± 0,13) (4,57 ± 0,25) .012 ± .001 (6,27 ± 0,25)
(0,51 TYP. (0,30 ± 0,03)
± 0,05) .100 ± .005 .300 + .030 –.000
TYP. (2,54 ± 0,13) C C (7,62 + 0,76)
L L
TYP.

Series 78 Slide SPDT, 2 Circuits
(No Commons)
1 2 3 4 5
0.380 ± .005 Dot on cover indicates active terminal when
(9,65 ± 0,13)
slide is on that side of switch. Contact is made
DIM. A with terminal on opposite side.
SEE CHART
.100 ± .002 .070 (1,78) REF. 1 1
(2,54 ± 0,05)
.295 + .000 –.020
.020 A (7,49 –0,51)
± .002
(0,51 .156 + .015 –.010
± 0,05) (3,96 + 0,38 –0,25) TYP.
.020 ± .002 (0,51 ± 0,05) TYP. A = .245 + .000 –.020
.050 ± .005
.090 ± .005 (2,29 ± 0,13) TYP. (1,27 ± 0,13) (6,22 + 0,51)
.100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13) TYP. TYP. .180 ± .010 (4,57 ± 0,25)
C
L C
L .012 ± .001 (0,30 ± 0,03)
.300 + .030 –.000 To create common poles, tie together 2
C C (7,62 + 0,76)
L L adjoining terminals on 1 (either) side of switch.
Circuitry Positions Length Length No./ Raised Recessed Toggle- For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
Inches Metric Tube Type* Rockers* DIP* Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
SPDT 2 0.380" 9,7mm 27 76SC02T 76RSC02T 76STC02T
Form 3 0.580" 14,7mm 18 76SC03T 76RSC03T 76STC03T
C 4 0.780" 19,8mm 13 76SC04T 76RSC04T 76STC04T
SPDT 1 0.280" 7,1mm 35 78J01T — —

2 2 0.480" 12,2mm 21 78J02T — —
Circuits 3 0.680" 17,3mm 15 78J03T — —
4 0.880" 22,4mm 12 78J04T — —
5 1.080" 27,4mm 9 78J05T — —
6 1.280" 32.5mm 8 78J06T
*To order top seal versions, add "S" before the "T" in the Grayhill part number.
Not available on Toggle-DIP.
Grayhill, Inc. • 561 Hillgrove Avenue • LaGrange, Illinois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhill.com DIP
12
SERIES 76 and 78
DPDT
FEATURES
• Raised and Recessed Rocker,
and Toggle Actuated Styles
• DPDT with Common Poles, or
DPDT with 4 Isolated Circuits
• Top Tape Seal Option for
Most Styles

Series 76 Raised Rocker, Double-DIP Toggle-DIP DPDT with Commons
.380 ± .010 True Form D Switching
(9,65 ± 0,25)
C1
.447 ± .015
(11,35 ± 0,38) C1 C1
.380 ± .010 TYP.
1 2 A = .247 ± .010
(9,65 ± 0,25)
(6,27 ± 0,25) 1 2 1 2
C2
C2 C2
.020 + .005 –.000 .295 + .000 –.020
A (7,49 –0,51)
(0,51 + 0,13) 1 C1 2 1 C1 2
DIP Switches
Recessed Rocker
.156 + .015 –.010
.050 ± .005 (3,96 + 0,38 –0,25)
(1,27 ± 0,13) .247 ± .010
.020 .090 ± .005 (6,27 ± 0,25) C2
.180 ± .010 C2
± .002 (2,29 ± 0,13)
(4,57 ± 0,25) .012 ± .001
(0,51 TYP.
(0,30 ± 0,03)
± 0,05) .100 ± .005
TYP. (2,54 ± 0,13) .300 + .030 –.000
TYP. C
L C
L (7,62 + 0,76)

Series 78 Slide DPDT, 4 Circuits
1 2 (No Commons)
.380 ± .005 Dot on cover indicates active terminal when
(9,65 ± 0,25)
slide is on that side of switch. Contact is
.070 (1,78) REF.
DIM. A made with terminal on opposite side.
SEE CHART .295 + .000 –.020
.300 ± .002 .020 A (7,49 –0,51) 1 1
(7,62 ± 0,05) ± .002
(0,51 .156 + .015 –.010
± 0,05) (3,96 + 0,38 –0,25) TYP.
.050 ± .005 A = .245 + .000 –.020
(1,27 ± 0,13) (6,22 + 0,51)
.020 ± .002 TYP. .180 ± .010 (4,57 ± 0,25)
(0,51 ± 0,05) TYP.
.012 ± .001 (0,30 ± 0,03)
.090 ± .005 (2,29 ± 0,13) TYP.
.100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13) TYP. .300 + .030 –.000
C C (7,62 + 0,76)
C L L
L C
L
To create common poles, tie together 2
adjoining terminals on 1 (either) side of
switch.
Circuitry No./ Length Length No./ Raised Recessed Toggle- Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
Positions Inches Metric Tube Type* Rockers* DIP* For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
DPDT 1 0.380" 9,7mm 27 76SD01T 76RSD01T 76STD01T
Form D 2 0.780" 19,8mm 13 76SD02T 76RSD02T 76STD02T
DPDT 1 0.480" 12,2mm 21 78K01T — —

4 Circ. 2 0.880" 22,4mm 12 78K02T — —
A top tape seal is required for switches that are machine soldered or heavily cleaned after hand
soldering. To order top seal versions, add "S" before the "T" in the Grayhill part number. Not available
on Toggle-DIP.
DIP
SPECIFICATIONS: Standard Styles

Ratings 76 78 90B
Mechanical Life: Operations per switch position 2,000 2,000 2,000
Make-and-break Current Rating: Operations
per switch position at these resistive loads
1 mA, 5 Vdc; 50 mA, 30 Vdc; or 150 mA, 30 Vdc: 2,000 2,000 —
10 mA, 30 Vdc; or 10 mA, 50 mVdc: — — 2,000
10 mA, 50 mVdc; or 25 mA, 24 Vdc; or 100 mA, 6 Vdc: — — 2,000
DIP Switches
Contact Resistance: Initially: ≤ 30 mΩ ≤ 30 mΩ ≤ 20 mΩ
After life, at 10 mA, 50 mVdc, open circuit: ≤ 100 mΩ ≤ 100 mΩ ≤ 100 mΩ
Insulation Resistance:
Minimum, at 100 Vdc between adjacent closed
contacts and also across open switch contacts
Initially (Mohms): 5,000 5,000 5,000
After life (Mohms): 1,000 1,000 1,000
Dielectric Strength: Minimum voltage (AC,
RMS) measured between adjacent closed
contacts and also across open switch contacts.
lnitially: 750 V 750 V 500 V
After life: 500 V 500 V 500 V
Current Carry Rating: Maximum rise of 20°C 5A 4A 3A
Switch Capacitance: At 1 megahertz 2 pF 2 pF 2 pF
Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to + 85°C -40°C to + 85°C -40°C to + 85°C
Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to + 85°C -55°C to + 85°C -55°C to + 85°C
Mechanical Ratings Soldering Information Materials and Finishes

Vibration Resistance: Per Method 204, Test Series 90 MIDIP and Series 76 recessed rocker Shorting Member (Ball): Brass, gold-plated
Condition B, 1 mS opening (10 mS allowed) (76RSB style) sealed switches have been tested over nickel barrier.
Mechanical Shock: Per Method 213, Test to EIA Standard RS-448-2. Similar performance Base Contacts: Copper alloy, gold-plated
Condition A. 1 mS opening (10 mS allowed) can be expected from other sealed Series 76 over nickel barrier.
Thermal Shock Resistance: Per specification; and 78 DIP switches. Terminals: Copper alloy, matte tin plated over
no failures; passes contact resistance. Solderability: Per MIL-STD-202, Method 208 nickel barrier.
Terminal Strength: Per specification Resistance to Soldering Heat: 76RSB: Passes Non-Conductive Parts: Thermoplastic (UL94V-O)
Thermal Aging: 1,000 hours at 85°C; no failures. EIA Standard using two, four, and six second Potting Material: Epoxy, 76,78 only.
soldering time. 90: Per MIL-S-83504, six second Protective Cover: 76,78, only-Polycarbonate.
Environmental Ratings test. Tape Seal:
Meets all requirements of MIL- S-83504. Where Fluxing: Per EIA RS-448-2 with flux touching 76, 78: Polyester film
Grayhill performance is superior, the MIL spec is switch body. 90: Polyimide film
listed in parentheses. Cleaning: 76, 78 and 90 series tape sealed Tape Seal Integrity: Passes gross leak test
Moisture Resistance: Per MIL-STD-202, products: Passes immersion test using water/ using 125°C flourinert for 20 seconds minimum.
Method 106. detergent. Acceptable solutions include 1-1-1 Reference MIL-STD-202, Method 112.
trichlorethane, freon, (TF, TE, or TMS), isopropyl
alcohol, detergent (140°F maximum). Terpene
acceptable for Series 90 only. Solutions which
are not recommended include acetone, methylene
chloride, freon TMC.
Recommended Soldering Conditions:
Reflow REFLOW TEMPERATURE PROFILE:

Soldering
MAX 260°
Profile: 255°
230°
(260°C
Peak
150°
Temperature)
Room
Temperature
120-150 sec. 5-10 sec.
60 sec.
WAVE SOLDERING: 260°C maximum solder temperature for 5 seconds max.
Grayhill, Inc. • 561 Hillgrove Avenue • LaGrange, Illinois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhill.com DIP
14
SERIES 79A
Linear Action Circuit Selector
SERIES 79C
Linear Action Tap
FEATURES
• Single-Setting Programming
• Isolated or Bussed Circuits Circuit Selector Tap Switch
• 10 or 16 Positions Isolated Circuits in 10 and 16 Positions SP/10 Positions, and SP/16 Postions
• 125 mA, 6 Vdc, 2000 Cycles Each position is a single isolated circuit, which All contacts on one side of the switch are internally
connects the two terminals across the switch bussed for a common pole. Any terminal on that
package. The movable contact is non-shorting. side may be used as a common, the others may
be clipped. The movable contact is non-shorting.

Circuit Selector
DIMENSION A DIMENSION A
For 10 Position Switch: ± .010 (0,25)
1.180 ± .010 (29,97 ± 0,25)
For 16 Position Switch:
1.780 ± .010 (45,21 ± 0,25) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
.395 ± .010
(10,03 ± 0,25)
.080 ± .005
DIP Switches
(2,03 ± 0,13)
.100 ± .005
.015/.020 .145 + .010 – .015 (2,54 ± 0,13)
(0,38/0,51) (3,68 + 0,25 –0,38)
TYP. TYP. .250 ± .010
(6,35 ± 0,25) Tap Switch
.012 ± .001 .190 ± .010

(0,30 ± 0,03) (4,83 ± 0,25) .020 ± .002 (0,51 ± 0,05) TYP. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
.050 ± .005
TYP.
(1,27 ± 0,13) .100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13) TYP.
.180 ± .010 TYP. CL
(4,57 ± 0,25) .300 + .030 – .000 .140 ± .005 (3,56 ± 0,13) TYP.
CL CL (7,62 + 0,76 – 0,00) CL
SPECIFICATIONS Mechanical Ratings

Electrical Ratings Mechanical Life: 4,000 cycles maximum. Note: Materials and Finishes
Make-and-break Current Rating: 2,000 cycles a cycle is one complete operation, back and Nonconductive Parts: Plastic UL94V-O
at 10 mA, 50 mVdc; 2,000 cycles at 125 mA, 6 forth through all switch positions. Shorting Arm: Phosphor bronze, gold plate
Vdc; 2,000 cycles at 50 mA, 30 Vdc. Vibration Resistance: 10 to 2,000 Hz at 15G over nickel plate
Contact Resistance: (measured at 10 mA, 50 or 0.060" double amplitude, per MIL-STD-202F Base Contacts: Copper alloy, gold plate over
mVdc) Coded Switches: 60 mohms maximum per MIL-5-83504; Method 213, Condition A. No nickel plate
initially. Other Switches: 50 mohms maximum damage and no contact openings exceeding Terminals: Copper alloy, matte tin plated over
initially. After LIfe: 100 mohms maximum 10 mS (Method 204, Test Condition B). nickel barrier.
Insulation Resistance (at 100 Vdc): Shock Resistance: 509, 11 mS, half sine; no Potting Material: Epoxy
Between adjacent isolated contacts: damage and no openings exceeding 10 mS
Initial:5,000 Mohms; 1,000 Mohms minimum (Method 213, Test Condition A). Tape and Seal Packaging
after life. Across open contacts: Initial: 5,000 Seal Strength: Per MIL-STD-202, Method 112.
Mohms; 1,000 Mohms minimum after life. 30 seconds at 125° hot Fluorocarbon
Dielectric Strength: Between adjacent isolated Environmental Rating Solderability: Per MIL-STD-202, Method 208.
contacts and also across open contacts. Initially: Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to Tape Seal: Polyester film
750 Vac: 500 Vac after life +85°C
Contact Carry Rating: 2 Amps with a maximum Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to +85°C Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
contact temperature rise of 20°C Moisture Resistance: 240 hours with For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
temperature cycling and polarization, per MIL- Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
STD-202F, Method 305
Number of Positions Type of Circuit Code Number per Tube Part Number*
10 Circuit Selector 9 79A10T
10 Single Pole 9 79C10T
16 Circuit Selector 6 79A16T
16 Single Pole 6 79C16T
*A top tape seal is required for switches that are machine soldered or heavily cleaned after hand
soldering. To order top seal versions, add "S" before the "T" in the Grayhill part number.
DIP
SERIES 79B
Linear Action, Coded Output
FEATURES
• Reliable Switching, Positive Detent
• Codes in BCD and Hexadecimal
• True Zero Output
• 10 or 16 Positions
• 2000 Cycle Life
DIP Switches
• Up to 60,000 Detent Operations

All dimensions not shown here are the same as those on the facing page.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
BINARY CODES
16 10
0 1 2 4 8 0 1 2 4 8
0
1
2
3
SWITCH POSITIONS
4
5
6
.490 7
.100 ± .005 .100 ± .005
(2,54 ± 0,13) ± .005 8
(2,54 ± 0,13)
CL TYP. CL TYP. (12,45 9
.390 ± .005 ± 0,13) A
.240 ± .005 B
(6.10 ± 0,13) (9,91 ± 0,13)
CL CL C
TYP.
D
E
F
0 1 2 4 8 0 1 2 4 8
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
Dot indicates contact made between
.100 ± .005 .100 ± .005 contact and output terminal.
SEE NOTE A CL CL (2,54 ± 0,13) SEE NOTE A CL CL (2,54 ± 0,13)
TYP. TYP.
NOTE A: All terminals on this side of the switch are bussed internally.
Any one of them may be used as the common terminal.
SPECIFICATIONS contact temperature rise of 20°C.

Electrical Ratings
Make-and-break Current Rating: 2,000 cycles Mechanical Ratings Materials and Finishes
at 10 mA, 50 mVdc; 2,000 cycles at 125 mA, 6 Mechanical Life: 4,000 cycles maximum. Note: Nonconductive Parts: Plastic UL94V-O
Vdc; 2,000 cycles at 50 mA, 30 Vdc. a cycle is one complete operation, back and Shorting Arm: Phosphor bronze, gold plate
Contact Resistance: 100 mohms maximum forth through all switch positions. over nickel plate
after life, measured at 10 mA dc and 50 mV Vibration Resistance: 10 to 2,000 Hz at 15G or Base Contacts: Copper alloy, gold plate over
(open circuit). Initial values are 60 mohms 0.060" double amplitude; no damage and no nickel plate
maximum for coded switches, and 50 mohms contact openings exceeding 10 mS (Method Terminals: Copper alloy, matte tin plated over
for other linear action switches. 204, Test Condition B). nickel barrier
Insulation Resistance (at 100 Vdc): Shock Resistance: 509, 11 mS, half sine; no Potting Material: Epoxy
Between adjacent isolated contacts: Initial: damage and no openings exceeding 10
5,000 Mohms minimum; After Life: 1,000 microseconds (Method 213, Test Condition A). Tape Seal and Packaging
Mohms minimum Tape Seal: Polyester film
Across open contacts: Initial: 5,000 Mohms Environmental Ratings
minimum; After Life: 1,000 Mohms minimum Refer to MIL-STD-202F per MIL-S-83504
Dielectric Strength: Between adjacent isolated Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to +85°C
contacts and across open contacts. Initial: 750 Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to +85°C
Vac; After Life: 500 Vac Moisture Resistance: 240 hours with
Contact Carry Rating: 2 amps with a maximum temperature cycling and polarization, per MIL-
STD-202F, Method 305
Number of Positions Type of Circuit Code Number per Tube Part Number*
10 Binary Code Decimal 9 79B10T

16 Hexadecimal 6 79B16T
*A top tape seal is required for switches that are machine soldered or heavily cleaned after hand For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
soldering. To order top seal versions, add "S" before the "T" in the Grayhill part number. Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
DIP
SERIES 78C
Right Angle Option
Right Angle
• Easy Access Telecommunications, computers and
• SPST Circuitry peripherals, instruments and controls.
• 2-10 and 12 positions available
• Sealed versions available
Series 78C DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)
.059 .100±.004 LENGTH .137

.272 MAX SEE TABLE (3,50)
(1,50) (6,90) (2,54±0,10) .063
.100±.004 (1,60)
(2,54±0,10) ON GH
.039 .389
(1,0) (9,90)
Ø.038±.002 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 .006±.002
(Ø0,97±0,05) (0,15±0,05)
DIP Switches
.055
(1,40)
.023 .100±.024
(0,60) .114 MIN (2,54±0,60)
.244±.024
.100 TYP. (2,90) (6,20±0,60)
(2,54)
Mechanical Electrical
Mechanical Life: 2000 operations per switch. Electrical Life: 2000 operations per switch
Operation Force: 1000gf max. 24VDC, 25mA.
Stroke: 2.0mm Non-Switching Rating: 100mA, 50VDC.
Operation Temp: -20°C to 70°C Switching rating: 25mA, 24VDC. (2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, POS AVAIL)
Storage Temp: -40°C to 85°C Contact Resistance: 50mΩ max. at initial.
Vibration Test: MIL-STD-202F METHOD Insulation Resistance: (at 500VDC) 100mΩ Materials
201A. min.
Frequency: 10-55-10Hz/1 min. Base Contact: Phospher bronze with gold
Dielectric Strength: 500VAC/1 minute.
Directions: X,Y,Z, three mutually plating over nickel
Capacitance: 5pF max.
perpendicular directions. Terminals: Brass with gold plating over nickel
Circuit: Single pole single throw.
Time: 2 hours each direction. Nonconductive Parts: Plastic UL94V-0
High reliability. Soldering and Cleaning Process Potting Material: Epoxy
Shock Test: MIL-STD-202F METHOD 213 B. For best results follow these recommendations: Tape Seal: Polyester film.
CONDITION A. Keep switch contacts in “OFF” position for all
Gravity: 50G (peak value), 11 msec. operations.
Direction and times: 6 sides and 3 Times Wave Sodering: Recommended solder
in each direction. temperature: 500°F (260°C) max 5 seconds.
High reliability. Hand Soldering: Use a soldering iron of 30
Watts or less, controlled at 608°F (320°C)
approximately 2 seconds while applying solder.
Cleaning: Tape sealed versions withstand
cleaning processes.
Series
Number of Positions
RoHS compliant
78C08SRAT
Right Angle
S= Top Tape Sealed, Blank=Unsealed
DIP
TABLE
Grayhill Part Number Length Dimension inches (mm) Packaging
78C02RAT 0.254(6,44) 73 pcs/tube
78C03RAT 0.354(8,98) 52 pcs/tube
DIP Switches
78C04RAT 0.454(11,52) 40 pcs/tube
78C05RAT 0.554(14,06) 33 pcs/tube
78C06RAT 0.654(16,60) 28 pcs/tube
78C07RAT 0.754(19,14) 24 pcs/tube
78C08RAT 0.854(21,68) 21 pcs/tube
78C09RAT 0.954(24,22) 19 pcs/tube
78C10RAT 1.054(26,76) 17 pcs/tube
78C12RAT 1.254(31,84) 14 pcs/tube
78C02SRAT 0.254(6,44) 70 pcs/tube
78C03SRAT 0.354(8,98) 52 pcs/tube
78C04SRAT 0.454(11,52) 39 pcs/tube
78C05SRAT 0.554(14,06) 32 pcs/tube
78C06SRAT 0.654(16,60) 28 pcs/tube
78C07SRAT 0.754(19,14) 24 pcs/tube
78C08SRAT 0.854(21,68) 21 pcs/tube
78C09SRAT 0.954(24,22) 19 pcs/tube
78C10SRAT 1.054(26,76) 17 pcs/tube
78C12SRAT 1.254(31,84) 14 pcs/tube
DIP
Rotary DIP Switches
SERIES 94H FEATURES

Binary Coded • Sealed Construction; No Tape
Seal Required
• Surface Mount or Thru-Hole Style
• Tube or Tape and Reel Packaging
• Octal, BCD, and Hexadecimal
Code
• In Standard or Complement
• Standard and Right Angle Mount
• Flush or Extended Actuators
• Gold-Plated Contacts
DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters) ACTUATOR STYLES

Tolerances are ± .010 inches unless specified otherwise.
4 5
Surface Mount .020 +.004/-.002
3
.060 .100 .005
6 7
Gullwing (1,52) (0,51 + 0,10/0,05) Octal–8 position
(2,54 0,13) 0 1
TYP. TYP.
3
.390 4 5 6
1 2
4 5
2 3
7 8
(9,91) BCD–10 position
0 0.560 9 0 1
DIP Switches
.190 (4,83) PIN #1 2 4

89 89
2 PLACES 67 67
AB
AB
45
C
45
C
CD
Hex–16 position
CD
0.100 TYP
23
23
EF EF
8 1 0.070 TYP 01 01
.380 (9,65)
0.280 Figure 1 Figure 2
Solder pad layout "A" style rotor "F" style rotor
as viewed from the
top of the switch All actuation types are available in octal (8),
.225 (5,72)
.500
binary coded decimal (10), or hexadecimal
.025 (0,64)
(12,7) (16) codes; with either standard or
complement output. Standard code outputs
Surface Mount J-Lead have natural color rotors; complements in a
contrasting color.
3
.390 0.410
1 2
4 5
(9,91) (10,41)
0
2 4 EXTENDED ACTUATOR TYPES
CORNER 0.100
C C
.190 (4,83) CLOSEST (2,54) Typ.
2 PLACES TO PIN #1 8 1 0.050
(1,27) .140 DIA. .270 (6,86) .200
( ∅ 3,56) OR (5,08)
0.240 .170 (4,32)
0.250 (6,10) 4 OR
3
5
[6.35] .090 (2,29)

2
7
1
0
0.315
SEE
[8.00] ORDERING
0.385 INFORMATION
[9.78]
.140 DIA. .270 (6,86) .282
( ∅ 3,56) OR (7,16)
Standard Thru-Hole .040 .005 .100 .005 TYP. .170 (4,32)
(1,02 0,13) 2
(2,54 0,13) 1 OR
3
.090 (2,29)
0
5
7
3 2 4
6
.390
1 2
4 5
C C SEE
(9,91) 0 8 1 ORDERING
INFORMATION
PC board layout
CORNER
as viewed from the Figure 3
.190 (4,83) CLOSEST
top of the switch
2 PLACES TO PIN #1
.380 (9,65) TERMINALS ARE

.020 +.004/-.002
(0,51 +0,10/0,05)
WIDE BY .012 .002
(0,31 0,05) THICK
.146 (3,71) .225 (5,72) .038 DIA. HOLE SIZE
RECOMMENDED
.300 (7,62) TYP.
DIP
19
Rotary DIP Switches
DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters) TAPE AND REEL PACKAGING:

Series 94H
Right Angle Thru-Hole
Meets requirements of EIA 481-2.
.430 (10,92)
.210 (5,33)
.282 (7,16) 13 INCH

DIAMETER REEL
.190 2
1 .145 TERMINALS ARE 1 8
.400 (4,83)
3
(3,68)
0
(10,16) 5 .020 ±.002 (0,51±0,05) C C 4 5

7
6
2 3
6
7
WIDE BY .012 ±.002 4 2 1 0
DIP Switches
(0,31 ±0,05) THICK 4 5
CONDUCTIVE
6
2 3
7
0
PC board layout PLASTIC EMBOSSED

1
.156
(3,96) as viewed from the 4 5 TAPE
6
2 3
7
0
top of the switch

1
PIN #1 .100 ± .005 .100 ± .005

(2,54 ± 0,13) TYP. (2,54 ± 0,13)
ORDERING INFORMATION: Series 94H

Series
Actuator Style: A = Flush, Figure 1 16mm
B = .270, Figure 3 (see page B-21)
C = .170, Figure 3 (see page B-21) PIN #1
E = .090, Figure 3 (see page B-21) CHAMFER
F = Flush, Figure 2
Code: B = Standard (Natural), 0 0 0 0
6 7
6 7
6 7
6 7
1
1
2 3
2 3
2 3
2 3
5
5
94HAB10WRT C = Complementary (Contrasting Color)
4 4 4 4
RoHS Compliant
Packaging: R = Tape and Reel, (Surface Mount Only) DIRECTION
OF FEED
Blank = Tube*
Terminal Style: RA = Right Angle, Thru-Hole 24mm
J = J-Lead
W = Surface Mount Each reel contains the following number of
Blank = Thru-Hole switches with a 15.35 inch (390 mm)
Number of Positions: 08 = Octal, 8 Position minimum leader and a 6.30 inch (160 mm)
10 = BCD, 10 Position minimum trailer.
16 = Hex, 16 Position
94HA style 750 sw/reel
* 27 Pieces per tube for surface mount and thru-hole, 24 pieces per tube for right angle switches. 94HB style 150 sw/reel
94HC style 200 sw/reel
SERIES 94 High Temperature Knobs: For Shaft Extensions 94HE style 300 sw/reel
94HF style 750 sw/reel
.190
(4,83)
.370
(9,40)
1 2 3 4 5
Slotted knobs show switch .210
.040 (5,33) .040
markings. Contact Grayhill .370 (1,02) (1,02)
for other knob material/ (9,40)
marking color combinations
and geometrics. A B
* Use only with Actuator Type B or C
ORDERING INFORMATION: Series 94 High Temperature Knobs*

Knob Style and Height Knob Color Arrow Color Part Number
1A Gray N/A 947706-001
5A Gray Black 947706-005
1B Black N/A 947705-001
1B Gray N/A 947705-012
2B Gray White 947705-004
3B Gray Black 947705-017
4B Gray Black 947705-018
1B Natural N/A 947705-009
4B Black White 947705-010 Available from your local Grayhill
5B Gray Black 947705-019 Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact
a local Sales Office, an authorized local
*Ordered as a separate item. B = Standard (Natural), C = Complementary (Conrasting Color). Distributor or Grayhill.
DIP
Rotary DIP Switches
SERIES 94R
Economical, Binary Coded
FEATURES
• 10,000 Cycles of Operation
• Gold-Plated Contacts
• Sealed Contact System
• Right Angle Mount
• Octal, BCD & Hexadecimal Codes
• Standard or Complement
• RoHS Compliant CODE & TRUTH TABLES:
Series 94H and 94R
Standard CODE OUTPUT CODE OUTPUT Complement
.094 .162 Output 1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8 Output
(2,93) (4,11) 0
.213 .480 1
(5,41)
.443 (12,19) 2
(11,25) 3
.286 4
SWITCH POSITION
(7,26) 5
6
7
.210 (5,33) .689 (17,50) .200 (5,08) 8
.433 9
(11,00) 1.123 (28,52)
DIP Switches
A
B
.044 (1,12) C
DIA. D
Pin #1
E
1 8 .179
C F
C (4,55)
4 2 Dot indicates terminal to common
connection. All switches are continuous
PC board layout .059 rotation.
as viewed from the (1,50) .058 (1,47)
top of the switch DIA. Octal and Octal Complement outputs are
.199 (5,05)
.235 (5,97) 0 thru 7 positions.
Unless otherwise indicated, tolerances are ± .010 (0,25)
BCD and BCD Complement outputs are 0
SPECIFICATIONS: Series 94H and 94R Moisture Resistance: 240 hours with thru 9 positions.
Electrical Ratings temperature cycling and polarization. Passes Hexadecimal and Hexadecimal
Make-and-break Current Rating: 30 mA at 30 insulation resistance and dielectric strength Complement outputs are 0 thru F
Vdc for 10,000 cycles of operation. per MIL-STD-202F, Method 106 following positions.
Carrying Current Rating: 100 mA at 50 Vdc exposure. Standard codes have natural color
Contact Resistance: 50 mohms maximum rotors; complements have rotors in a
initially (measured at 10 mA, 50 mVdc). Materials and Finishes contrasting color.
150 mohms maximum after life. Rotor and Switch Body: Plastic (UL94V-O)
Insulation Resistance:(measured at 100 Vdc Contact Material: Copper alloy plated.
Internal O-ring: Rubber BUNA-N
across open switch contacts) 30 microinches minimum gold over 50
microinches minimum nickel.
Soldering Information
Initial: 5000 Mohms minimum. After Life: 1000 Soldering Temperature: 260° C maximum.
Mohms minimum. Shorting Member: Copper alloy plated.
Cleaning: Acceptable solutions include 1-1-1
Dielectric Strength: (measured across open 30 microinches minimum gold over 50
Trichlorenthane, Freon (TF, TE, or TMS),
switch contacts) Initial: 500 Vac RMS microinches minimum nickel.
Isopropyl Alcohol and detergent (140°F
minimum. After Life: 250 Vac RMS Terminals: Copper alloy, matte tin plated over
maximum). Solutions which are not
nickel barrier.
recommended include Acetone, Methylene
Mechanical Ratings Chloride, and Freon TMC.
Mechanical Life: 10,000 cycles of operation.
One cycle is a rotation through all positions and ORDERING INFORMATION: Series 94R
a complete return through all positions. Continuous Rotation Versions
Mechanical Shock: 1000g's, 0.5 mS, half sine
per MIL-STD-202F, Method 213, Test Condition No. of Standard Code Complement
E. Code Positions Part Number Part Number
Vibration Resistance: 10-2000 Hz at 15G or Octal 8 94RB08CT 94RC08CT
0.060" double amplitude per MIL-STD-202F, BCD 10 94RB10CT 94RC10CT
Method 204, Test Condition B. Hexadecimal 16 94RB16CT 94RC16CT
Operational Torque: 2 to 6 inch-ounces initially
and 1.2 inch-ounces minimum after life. Rotational Stop Versions*
No. of Standard Code Complement
Environmental Ratings Code Positions Part Number Part Number
Operating Temperature Range: -40° to +85°C.
Storage Temperature Range: -40° to +85°C. Hexadecimal 16 94RB16FT 94RC16FT
* Consult Grayhill for 8 or 10 position

21
DIP Switch Options and Accessories
OPTIONS
Position Identification Line Option Other Switch Markings
For Series 76RSB, 76RSC, 76RSD, & 90B For Series 76, 78, & 90
A line can be added to the recessed rocker or We can mark your part number or other wording
Series 90 slide actuator to provide positive on the switch, often at no charge. For some
identification of the actuator position. To order, markings there will be a nominal charge for
add L as a final suffix to the part number. For tooling plus a set-up charge. In addition, there
example, 76RSB08 becomes 76RSB08L; and, is a marking charge per side per switch. Add it
90B08S becomes 90B08SL. to the unit price and discount it accordingly.
DIP Switches
Available from a local Grayhill Distributor. To order, contact Grayhill.
ACCESSORIES
Protective Cover Accessory
For Series 76, & 78 .130 .152 (3,86)
Rigid, clear plastic cover fits all but toggle (3,30) TYP.
TYP.
actuated switches. It provides a top cover for
less strenuous cleaning, serves as a dust cover
in dirty environments, and provides protection .422 .217 SEE NOTE
against accidental actuation. (10,72) (1,20)
REF. REF.
Material: 76,78, only-Polycarbonate.
Purchase as a separate item. Check length of
the desired DIP Switch, and then select from Note: For length, add .042 "(1,07 MM)
to length of DIP switch.
the ordering information on this page.
Available from a local Grayhill Distributor.
DIPSTICK Accessory
For all series
Pen-sized plastic DIPSTICK has a tapered
end for actuating DIP Switches.
Part Number ........................ 90-DIPSTICK
Available from a local Grayhill Distributor
Length Protective Cover
Inches Part Number
0.280 76P02
0.380 76P03
0.480 76P04
0.580 76P05
0.680 76P06
0.780 76P07
0.880 76P08
0.980 76P09
1.080 76P10
1.180 79P10
1.780 79P16
DIP
Optical and Mechanical
Encoders
Contents: Encoders
OPTICAL ENCODERS
• Eliminates Rotary Mechanical
Contacts
• Accurate Resolution up to 1024
Positions
• Logic Compatible
• Selects Menu or Display Items
• Includes Data Input Switch
• Up to 1 Billion Trouble-Free
Cycles
Page
OPTICAL ENCODERS
High Resolution
Ball Bearing, 4-Pin ....................................................... Series 63K ............. 2

Ball Bearing, 5-Pin ....................................................... Series 63R ............. 4

Hollow Shaft ................................................................. Series 63T ............. 6
20mm ............................................................................ Series 63Q ............. 8
Encoders
20mm Absolute Encoding ........................................... Series 63A........ 10
ACCESSORIES
Control Knobs .............................................................. Series 11K ........... 12
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 63K
High Resolution, Ball Bearing,
4-Pin
FEATURES
• 25, 32, 50, 64, 100, 128 and 256
Cycles per Revolution Available
• Sealed Version Available
• Rugged Construction
• Cable or Pin Version
• 300 Million Rotational Cycles
• 5,000 RPM Shaft Rotation
TOP VIEW
.250
(6.35)
.215 .249/.250 DIA
(5.46) (6.32/6.34)
KEYWAY DEPTH .025 X 45˚
1.250 DIA (.64)
(31.75) CHAMFER
.350
.033 (8.89)
(.84) 1/2 - 32
.725.025
.066 (18.41.64) UN-2A
(1.68) THREADS
Encoders
GRAYHILL XXXX X-X XXXX X-X

63KXXX XX
.776.025
(19.71.64)
.650 DIA
(16.51) .501
MOUNTING (12.73) PIN #1
.219 SURFACE
(5.57)
.100
(2.54) .225
.150 (5.71)
(3.81)
.300
(7.62)
TOP VIEW
.250
(6.35)
.215 .249/.250 DIA
(5.46) (6.32/6.34)
1.250 DIA KEYWAY DEPTH .025 X 45˚
(31.75) (.64)
CHAMFER
.350
.033
(8.89)
(.84)
.725.025 1/2 - 32
.066 UN-2A
(1.68) (18.42.64)
THREADS

63KXXX-XXX XX-XXX
.650 DIA
(16.51) .501
MOUNTING (12.73)
.219 SURFACE
(5.57) PIN #1
CONNECTOR IS
MOLEX P/N CABLE LENGTH
14-56-3046 6.000, 25
OR EQUIVALENT
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, DIMENSION TOLERANCES ARE AS FOLLOWS:

LINEAR .010 (.25), DIAMETERS .010 (.025), ANGULAR 5˚
Encoder
Optical Encoders
CIRCUITRY AND WAVEFORM: Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code

PIN #
1 CYCLE
GROUND 1
OUTPUT
OUTPUT B A
2
10 KΩ OUTPUT
B
OUTPUT A 3
CHANNEL A LEADS CHANNEL B BY
10 KΩ 90˚ ± 45˚ IN ALL ROTATIONS FOR
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF SHAFT.
POWER 5V 4
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Ratings Environmental Ratings Materials and Finishes
Operating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 Vdc Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°C Bushing:Zinc diecast
Supply Current: 30 mA maximum at 5 Vdc Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°C Housing: Hiloy 610B
Logic Output Characteristics: Relative Humidity: 90-95% at 40°C for 96 Shaft: Stainless Steel
Output Type: Open collector with integrated hours Code Rotor and Aperture: Chemically etched
Schmitt Trigger and 10 KΩ pull-up resistor Vibration Resistance: Harmonic motion with stainless steel/electroformed nickel
Maximum Sink Current: 16 mA at .40 volts amplitude of 15g, within a varied 10 to 2000 Printed Circuit Board: NEMA Grade FR-4.
Power Consumption: 150 mW maximum Hz frequency for 12 hours per MIL-STD-202, Five microinches minimum gold over 100
Optical Rise Time: 500 nS typical Method 204 microinches minimum nickel over copper

Optical Fall Time: 14 nS typical Shock Resistance: Test 1: 100g for 6 mS, Optical Barrier: Polyphenylene sulfide, 94 V-0
half-sine wave with velocity change of 12.3 ft/s. Backplate: Polyester
Mechanical Ratings Test 2: 100g for 6 mS, sawtooth wave with Header: Phosphor bronze, 200 microinches
Encoders
Mechanical Life: 300 million revolutions velocity change of 9.7 ft/s. tin over 50 microinches nickel (pin version
Time Life: Guaranteed for 10 years of only)
continuous operation (calculated from emitter Infrared Emitter: Gallium aluminum arsenide
degradation data) Photo IC: Planar silicon
Mounting Torque: 20 in-lbs maximum Retaining Ring: Stainless steel
Terminal Strength: 5 lbs terminal pull-out Cable: 26 AWG, stranded/tinned wire, PVC
force minimum coated on .100 (2,54) centers (cable version
Solderability: 95% free of pin holes and voids only)
Operating Torque: 0.5 in-oz maximum (no Connector: Glass-filled PCT, UL94V-0
detents) for unsealed versions
Externally Applied Shaft Force: Axial: 15 lbs Bearing Subassembly
maximum; Radial: 15 lbs maximum Bearing: NSK ABEC 5 (stainless steel)
Preload Collar: 303 (stainless steel)
Series
Style: K = Standard, 4-pin, high resolution
KS = Sealed, 4-pin, high resolution
Cycles: per channel per revolution = 25, 32, 50, 64, 100, 128, 256
63KS256–060
Termination:
Blank (no dash or numbers): pins as described in drawing.
Cable Termination: 060 = 6.0in. Cable is terminated with Molex Connnector P/N 14-56-3046.
Available from your local Grayhill Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 63R
High Resolution, Ball Bearing,
5-pin (Polarized Connection)
FEATURES
• 25, 32, 50, 64, 100, 128 and 256
• Cable or Pin Versions
• 5000 RPM Shaft Rotation
• Index Pulse Available
DIMENSIONS In Inches (and millimeters)
TOP VIEW
.250
.215 (6.35)
(5.46) .249/.250 DIA
KEYWAY DEPTH (6.32/6.34)
.025 X 45˚
1.250 DIA (.64)
(31.75) CHAMFER
.350
.033 (8.89)
(.84) 1/2 - 32
.725.025
Encoders
.066 (18.41.64) UN-2A

(1.68) THREADS

63RXXX XX
.776.025
(19.71.64)
.650 DIA
(16.51) .501
MOUNTING (12.73) PIN #1
.219 SURFACE
(5.57)
.100 .225
(2.54) (5.71)
.200
(5.08)
.400
(10.16)
TOP VIEW
.250
.215 (6.35)
(5.46) .249/.250 DIA
KEYWAY DEPTH .025 X 45˚ (6.32/6.34)
(.64)
1.250 DIA
CHAMFER
(31.75)
.350
.033
(8.89)
(.84)
.725.025 1/2 - 32
.066 UN-2A
(1.68) (18.42.64)
THREADS

63RXXX-XXX XX-XXX
.650 DIA
(16.51) .501
MOUNTING (12.73)
.219 SURFACE
(5.57) PIN #1
CONNECTOR IS
MOLEX P/N CABLE LENGTH
14-56-3056 6.000,25
OR EQUIVALENT
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, DIMENSION TOLERANCES ARE AS FOLLOWS

Encoder
Optical Encoders
CIRCUITRY AND WAVEFORM: Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code

PIN #
1 CYCLE
GROUND 5
NO CONTACT 4 OUTPUT
A
OUTPUT A 3 OUTPUT
10 KΩ B
POWER 5V 2
CHANNEL A LEADS CHANNEL B BY
10 KΩ 90˚ ± 45˚ IN ALL ROTATIONS FOR
CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF SHAFT.
OUTPUT B 1
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Ratings Environmental Ratings
Operating Voltage: 5 ±.25 Vdc Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°C Backplate: Polyester
Supply Current: 30 mA maximum at 5 Vdc Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°C Header: Phosphor bronze, 200 microinches
Logic Output Characteristics: Relative Humidity: 90-95% at 40°C for 96 tin over 50 microinches nickel (pin version
Output Type: Open collector with integrated hours only)
Schmitt Trigger and 10 KW pull-up resistor Vibration Resistance: Harmonic motion with Infrared Emitter: Gallium aluminum
Maximum Sink Current: 16 mA at .40 volts amplitude of 15g, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hz arsenide
Power Consumption: 150 mW maximum frequency for 12 hours per MIL-STD-202, Photo IC: Planar silicon
Retaining Ring: Stainless steel
Optical Rise Time: 500 nS typical Method 204
Cable: 26 AWG, stranded/tinned wire, PVC

Optical Fall Time: 14 nS typical Shock Resistance: Test 1: 100g for 6 mS,
coated on .100 (2,54) centers (cable version
half-sine wave with velocity change of 12.3 ft/s. only)
Mechanical Ratings Test 2: 100g for 6 mS, sawtooth wave with
Encoders
Connector: Glass-filled PCT, UL94V-0
Mechanical Life: 300 million revolutions velocity change of 9.7 ft/s.
Time Life: Guaranteed for 10 years of Bearing Subassembly
continuous operation (calculated from Materials and Finishes Bearing: NSK ABEC 5 (stainless steel)
emitter degradation data) Bushing: Zinc diecast Preload Collar: 303 stainless steel
Mounting Torque: 20 in-lbs maximum Housing: Hiloy 610B
Terminal Strength: 5 lbs terminal pull-out Shaft: Stainless steel
force minimum Code Rotor and Aperture: Chemically
Solderability: 95% free of pin holes and voids etched stainless steel/electroformed nickel
Externally Applied Shaft Force: Printed Circuit Board: NEMA Grade FR-4.
Five microinches minimum gold over 100
Axial:15 lbs maximum; Radial:15 lbs
microinches minimum nickel over copper
maximum
Optical Barrier: Polyphenylene sulfide, 94
Operating Torque: 0.5 in-oz maximum (no V-0
detents) for unsealed versions
Series
Style: R = Standard, 5-pin, high resolution
RS = Sealed, 5-pin, high resolution
63RS256–060
Termination:
Blank (no dash or numbers): pins as described in drawing.
Cable Termination: 060 = 6.0in. Cable is terminated with Molex Connnector P/N
14-56-3056.
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 63T
High Resolution, Hollow Shaft
• Low Profile • Steer by Wire
• Simplified Encoder Attachment • Fractional Horse Power Motors
• Resolutions up to 1024 Lines per • Machine Tool Controls
Revolutions • Material Handling
• Three-Phase Commutation in • Flow Meters
4,6 or 8 Pole Versions
• Conductive Carbon Fiber Housing
• Standard 1.812" (46mm) Bolt
Circle Mounting
• Hollow Shaft Sizes Up to .375" or
10mm in Diameter
• High Noise Immunity
• Cost Competitive with Modular
Encoders
• Industry Standard Line Drivers

Encoders
Top View Bottom View

2.10 (53,34) 18" STRANDED CABLE WITH
100% FOIL SHIELD
1.812 (46,02)
HOLLOW SHAFT
DIAMETERS FROM
0.250" (6,350) UP TO
0.375" (9,525)
30˚ ROTATIONAL
ADJUSTMENT
CONDUCTIVE TWO 4-40 SET
CARBON FIBER SCREWS @ 90˚
COMPOSITE
HOUSING
Side View
1.45 +.01-.00
(36,83 +0,25-00) 0.87 (22,1)
FLEXIBLE MOUNT
WITH INDUSTRY
STANDARD 1.812" (46,02)
BOLT CIRCLE
Encoder
Optical Encoders
WAVEFORM, CIRCUITRY, AND WIRING DIAGRAM Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code
90˚ Electrical Typical

180˚ Electrical ± 10% Wiring
Red = +Vdc Violet - Output U
Output A Output U
Black - Common Gray - Output U'
Brown - Output A Brown/White - Output V
Output A' Output U' White - Output A' Red/White - Output V'
120˚ Electrical Typical Blue - Output B Orange/White - Output W
Output B Output V Green - Output B' Yellow/White - Output W'
Orange - Output Z Black/White - Case Ground
Yellow - Output Z' Drain Wire - Cable Shield
Output B' Output V'
Maximum Z Width 240˚ Electrical
Output Z Output W
Typical Output Circuit
Outputs A, B, Z, U, V & W
Output Z' Output W'
Outputs A', B', Z', U', V' & W'
Clockwise shaft rotation as viewed looking at the encoder face
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Ratings Mechanical Ratings Environmental Ratings
Input Voltage: 5 ± 5% Vdc or 5-26 Vdc Maximum Shaft Speed: 8,000 RPM Operating Temperature Range: -20°C to
Ripple Current: 2% peak-to-peak @ 5 Vdc Hollow Shaft Diameter: 0.250", 0.312", 100°C typical; -20°C to 120°C optional
Output Circuits: AM26LS31 RS422A line 0.375", 6mm, 8mm, 10mm (contact Grayhill for more information)
driver, OL7272 line driver, TTL Radial Shaft Movement: 0.007" Storage Temperature Range: -40°C to
Logic Output Characteristics: (0,178mm) T.I.R. 125°C

Output Type: Quadrature with channel A Axial Shaft Movement: ±0.030"(7,62mm) Relative Humidity: 98% non-condensing
leading channel B for CW rotation with index Housing: Carbon fiber composite (case Vibration: 20G's @ 50-500 CPS
Encoders
centered over A ground via cable) Mechanical Shock: 50g @ 11mS duration
Frequency Response: 200 kHz Housing Volume Resistivity: 10-2 ohm-cm
Symmetry: 180° ±10% typical Termination: OPTIONS
Minimum Edge Separation: 54 electrical Standard: 15-conductor stranded cable, Contact Grayhill for custom terminations, reso-
degrees 28 AWG, 18" (457mm) in length lutions, mounting configurations, and shaft
Commutation Format: Three phase: 4, 6 or Non-commutation and TTL output: couplings and configurations.
8 poles 9-conductor stranded cable, 28 AWG,
Communtation Accuracy: ±1° mechanical 18" in length
Input Current Requirements: 125 mA Mounting: 1.812" (46mm) bolt circle
typical, 5 Vdc plus interface loads Acceleration: 1x105 radians per second2
Moment of Inertia: 1.5 x 10-4 oz-in-s2
Accuracy: ±.8 arc minutes
Series
Resolution: (quadrature cycles per revolution) A = 500, B = 512, C = 1000, D = 1024, E = 256
Voltage: L = 5.0 ± 5% Vdc, H = 5-26 Vdc
Output Option: 1 = AM26LS31 RS422A Line Driver, 2 = OL7272, 5-26 Vdc Line Driver, 3 = TTL,
Output Option: 4 = RS422A, for A, B, Z; Open Collector for U, R, W
Mounting: 1 = Std. 1.812" flex
Mounting: 2 = Size 15 Resolver Mount
63TAL-1-1-4-2-1
Index Gating: 0 = Ungated index; 1 = Gated to A, 180°; 2 = Gated to A and B, 90°

Motor Poles: 4 = 4 pole, 6 = 6 pole, 8 = 8 pole, 0 = no commutation
Hollow Shaft Size: 1 = 0.250", 2 = 0.312", 3 = 0.375", 4 = 6mm, 5 = 8mm, 6 = 10mm
Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local
Distributor, or Grayhill.
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 63Q
High Resolution, 20mm
FEATURES
• Miniature Size, 20mm (0.787") APPLICATIONS
Diameter • Steer by Wire
• Resolutions up to 1024 Lines per • Fractional Horse Power Motors
Revolution • Machine Tool Controls
• Single Ended and Differential • Material Handling
Outputs • Flow Meters
• 1 Billion Rotational Life Cycles
• IP 50 Sealing
• Low Supply Current
Requirements
DESCRIPTION
The Series 63Q is intended for sensing scheme also embodies a much
applications requiring high performance, simplified encoder design, which
high-resolution digital feedback in a very ultimately results in longer service life, and
small package. It provides the resolution less down time due to feedback device
of larger encoder packages but in a failure. The encoder housing is

package only 20mm (0.787") in diameter. constructed of a conductive carbon fiber
Encoders
Outputs can be configured in either single composite that provides the EMI shielding
ended, open collector or internal pull-up of an all metal housing and the
resistor, or with an industrial standard performance of a lightweight robust
RS422A differential line driver. The assembly.
10 POSITION
DUAL ROW
Ø.715 CONNECTOR
Ø.1247
+.0000
-.0004 .888
.365±.020 8.000±.050
.063
.138
1 2
.730
.050 .875 9 10
.500
Ø.787
Ø.438
.925
2-56X.200 DEEP
3 PLCS.
ON Ø.550 BOLT CIRCLE
Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerance is ±.010 (0,25)
Encoder
Optical Encoders
PIN WIRING, CIRCUITRY, AND WAVEFORM STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Ratings Mechanical Ratings Environmental Ratings
Input Voltage: 5.0 ± 5% Vdc or 5-26 Vdc Maximum Shaft Speed: 8,000 RPM Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 70°C

Input Current Requirements: 100 mA Shaft Diameter: 0.125" (3,175) typical; -20°C to 100°C optional (contact
maximum output option 1 and 2, 50 mA Shaft Material: Stainless steel Grayhill for more information)
maximum output option 3; plus interface Bearings: Radial ball bearing, R2 type Storage Temperature Range: -40°C to
Encoders
loads Radial Shaft Load: 2 lbs maximum 125°C
Ripple Current: 2% peak-to-peak @ 5 Vdc Axial Shaft Load: 1 lbs maximum Relative Humidity: 98% non-condensing
Output Circuits: AM26LS31 RS422A line Housing: Carbon fiber composite (case Vibration: 20G's @ 50-500 CPS
driver, OL7272 line driver, TTL ground via connector) Mechanical Shock: 50G @ 11mS duration
Logic Output Characteristics: Housing Volume Resistivity: 10-2 ohm-cm
Output Type: Quadrature with channel A Termination: Two rows of 5 pins on 0.100" OPTIONS
leading channel B for CW rotation with centers. 8" ten conductor ribbon cable with Contact Grayhill for custom terminations, reso-
ungated index pulse true over A and B high 2x5 connector lutions, mounting configurations, shaft cou-
Frequency Response: 200 kHz Mounting: Servo plings and configurations, and absolute posi-
Symmetry: 180° ±10% typical Moment of Inertia: 9.5x10-6 oz-in-sec2 tioning up to 256 positions.
Minimum Edge Separation: 54 electrical Acceleration: 1x105 radians per second2
degrees
Series
Resolution: (quadrature cycles per revolution) A = 500, B = 512, C = 1000, D = 1024
Voltage: L = 5 ±5% Vdc, H = 5-26 Vdc
63QAL-1-P
Termination: C = 8" cable with connector, P = pin (no cable)

Output Option: 1 = RS422A line driver; 2 = OL7272 (5-26 Vdc) line driver; 3 = TTL output
Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor,
or Grayhill.
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 63A
High Resolution, 20mm,
Absolute Encoding
FEATURES
• Miniature Size, 20mm (0 .787")
Diameter
• Single Ended Outputs
• Long Service Life
• IP 50 Sealing
• Low Supply Current
Requirements
• 8-Bit Gray Code or Binary Output
• Single Turn 8-Bit Word
DESCRIPTION
APPLICATIONS The Series 63A is intended for Outputs can be configured in either
• Steer by Wire applications requiring high gray code or binary code. The
• Machine Tool Controls performance, high-resolution digital encoder housing is constructed of a
• Material Handling feedback in a very small package. conductive carbon fiber composite
• Flow Meters The Series 63A encoder provides 8- that provides the EMI shielding of an
Encoders
• Any Application Requiring all metal housing and the performance

bit absolute resolution in a package
Discrete Digital Positioning and
only 20mm (0.787") in diameter. of a lightweight robust assembly.
Angular Detection at Start Up.
2-56 THREADS
.20
( 5,1)
3 PLACES ON A
.550 B.C. Ø.438 ± .002
(14,0 B.C.) (11,11 ± 0,05) PIN #14
Ø.787
(19,99)
PIN #1
+.0000
.1247 -.0003
.888 .731
(22,56) (18,57) ( +.0,000
3,167 -0,007 )
STANDARD 14 POSITION .050
DUAL ROW HEADER (1,27)
FEMALE SPACING = .100 x .100
(2,54 x 2,54)
.365 ± .020
.890 .795 (9,27 ± 0,5)
.925 (22,61) (20,19)
(23,5)
CABLE LENGTH
8.0±.5
(203±13)
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, STANDARD TOLERANCE IS ±.010 [±,26]
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Ratings
Input Voltage: 5.0 ± 5% Vdc or 5-26 Vdc Frequency Response: 50 kHz Termination: 8" 12-conductor ribbon cable
Input Current Requirements: 40 mA Output Count Increase: Clockwise rotation with 2x7 connector
maximum plus interface loads (Option A); counter clockwise rotation Mounting: Servo
Ripple Current: 2% peak-to-peak @ 5 Vdc (Option B) See ordering information. Moment of Inertia: 9.5x10-6 oz-in-sec2
Output Circuits: TTL Compatible Positional Accuracy: ±0.5 LSB maximum Acceleration: 1x105 radians per second2
VOH >3.80v@-8mA, VOL<0.44v@8mA error
VOH >2.50v@-20mA, VOL<0.50v@20mA Environmental Ratings
Output Format: Mechanical Ratings Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 70°C
Gray code or Binary Code: 8-bit, single turn, Maximum Shaft Speed: 8,000 RPM typical; -20°C to 100°C optional (contact
single ended. Gray code option utilizes low Shaft Diameter: 0.125" (3,175mm) Grayhill for more information)
true Chip Enable (CE’) that is pulled down with Shaft Material: Stainless steel Thermal Shutdown: Tambiant max. vs.
internal 10K resistor. Positive TTL signal to Bearings: Radial ball bearing, R2 type input voltage max. 40C°= 25.0v, 60°C =
CE’ will force the 8-bit outputs to tri-state Radial Shaft Load: 2 lbs maximum 20.0v, 80°C = 15.0v, 100°C = 10.0v (Total
condition allowing for shared data paths Axial Shaft Load: 1 lb maximum load currents=30 mA)
between encoders, easing basic Housing: Carbon fiber composite (case Storage Temperature Range: -40°C to
microprocessor bus interfacing. ground via connector) 125°C
Housing Volume Resistivity: 10-2 ohm-cm Humidity: 98% non-condensing
Vibration: 20g @ 50-500 CPS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Mechanical Shock: 50g @ 11mS duration
Gray Binary Gray Binary
Pin# Code Code Pin# Code Code OPTIONS
Contact Grayhill for custom terminations and
1 COM COM 8 G5 25
temperature ratings.
2 +V +V 9 G6 26

3 G0 20 10 G7 27
4 G1 21 11 Case Case
Encoders
5 G2 22 12 CE’ N.C.
6 G3 23 13 N.C. N.C.
7 G4 24 14 N.C. N.C.
Series:
Resolution: 256 Absolute Positions
Voltage: L = 5.0 ±5% Vdc, H = 5-26 Vdc
63A256-L-G-A
Output Count Increase: A = shaft turned clockwise*, B = shaft turned counterclockwise* (*flange side view)
Output Option: B = Binary, G = Gray Code
Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor,
or Grayhill.
Encoder
Control Knob Accessories
CONTROL KNOBS
Ideally Suited for Encoder and
Rotary Switches
FEATURES
• Standard Fit for Grayhill Encoder
and Rotary Switches
• Custom Materials, Styles, Colors
and Markings Available
• Standard Black or Gray
• Choice of Spring Clip (Press-On)
or Metal Insert with Set Screw
Versions
Contact Grayhill for special design

considerations
Encoders
Style 5013 Top View Style 5014 Top View
.620 (15,75)
.593
(15,06)
.335 (8,51) .700
DIA.
(17,78) DIA.
.440
(11,18) .600
DIA. (15,24)
1.330
(33,78)
DIA.
Available in .250 Dia. Shaft only.*
.500
(12,7)
DIA. .440
.894 (11,2)
(22,71)
DIA.
.350
.662 .500
(8,9)
(16,81) (12,7)
DIA.
Available in .125 and .157 (4mm) dia. shaft in spring clip

(press-on) version only.*
.
*See Ordering Information.
Encoder

.315 .393
(8,00) (9,98)
.220 R.
CL OF (5,59)
.220
(5,59) R.
.092 (2,34) .550

.500 TYP. 1.575 DIA. (13,97)
.215
(12,7) (4 PLACES) .660 (40,01) DIA.
(5,46)
DIA. (16,76)
.400
(10,16)
Available in ABS, .250 dia. shaft in spring clip (press-on). The locking clip
is also available, requires a custom shaft.**
1.090
(27,69)
.500
(12,7)
DIA. .500

.710 .730
(12,7)
(18,03) (18,54)
DIA. SPRING CLIP
Encoders
*See Ordering Information. **Contact Grayhill representative
Series
Style*: 5013, 5014, 5015, 5017, 5019, 5020, 5028, 5029
(see dimension drawings for style options)
Shaft Diameter:
J = .125 dia. shaft
E = .157 (4mm) dia. shaft
K = .250 dia. shaft
11K5028-KCNB
Knob Color:
B = Black
G = Gray
Material:
A = ABS (available on the styles 5017 and 5020 only)
N = Nylon
Version:
C = Spring Clip (press-on)
L = Locking Clip (available on the style 5020 only)
M = Metal Insert w/Set Screw(s)
Custom materials, styles and colors are available.

For prices and discounts, contact a local sales office or Grayhill.
Encoder
Encoders
Contents: Encoders
MECHANICAL ENCODERS
• Standard BCD and Multiple
Code Outputs
• As Small as 1/2" Diameter
• Economical Means to Provide Page
Code Output MECHANICAL ENCODERS
Multi-Deck ..................................................................... Series 25 ................ 2
Hex, Gray and Quadrature Code ................................ Series 25L .............. 4
Binary and Gray Code ................................................. Series 26 ................ 6
Binary and Binary Complement Code ........................ Series 51 ................ 7
Binary Code .................................................................. Series 71 ................ 9
ACCESSORIES

Encoders
Encoder
Mechanical Encoders
SERIES 25
Multi-Deck
FEATURES
• Multiple Code and Indexing
Choices
• Reliability Tested to Listed
Specifications
• Less than 1.0" Square
• Termination Choices
• Panel and Shaft Seal Option
• Manufactured to ISO 9001 and
Military Standards
• Custom Configurations Available
.250 ± .015 DIM. A ± .025

(6,35 ± 0,38) (DIM A ± 0,64) .865 ± .015

(21,97 ± 0,38)
.320 ± .010 .365 ± .020
(8,13 ± 0,25) (9,27 ± 0,51)
Encoders
.219 ± .005
(5,56 ± 0,13) PART NUMBER,
DATE CODE, AND
∅ .250 + .001 - .002 PINOUT ID LABEL .865 ± .015
(6,35 + 0,03 - 0,05) (21,97 ± 0,38)
.250 ± .020
(6,35 ± 0,51)
.375 (9,53) 3/8-32

.060 ± .015 UNEF-2A THREAD
(1,53 ± 0,38)
.190 ± .015 .288 ± .015 .200 ± .015
(4,83 ± 0,38) .020 ± .005 (7,31 ± 0,38) (5,08 ± 0,38) Number of Decks Dimension A
CL CL
.050 ± .005 (0,51 ± 0,13)
1 .450 (11,43)
(1,27 ± 0,13) 2 .650 (16,51)
.100 ± .010 3 .850 (21,59)
(2,54 ± 0,25) 4 1.050 (26,67)
TYP.
Encoder
Mechanical Encoders
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Ratings Mechanical Ratings Materials and Finishes
Switching Loads: 150 mA at 120 Vac, Stop Strength: 10 in-lbs minimum Bushing: Die cast zinc alloy, tin-zinc plated
resistive; 150 mA at 28 Vdc, resistive Rotational Torque: 4-20 in-oz, dependent on Mounting Hardware: plated brass
Current Carrying Capacity: 250 mA at 28 Vdc, the number of decks Decks, Deck Separators, End Plate:
resistive Operating Temperature Range: -65°C to Thermoplastic
Contact Resistance: 75 mΩ maximum after +85°C Contacts and Terminals: Gold, silver, nickel-
life Non-Turn Device: Flatted mounting bushing, plated beryllium copper
Insulation Resistance: 1000 mΩ minimum .375" dia. x .320" Shaft, Stop Blades: Stainless Steel
between terminals and shaft Package Size: .865" square Detent Balls: Steel, nickel-plated
Voltage Breakdown: 1000 Vac minimum Termination: PC terminals, .100" on center. Rivets: Brass, zinc-plated
between terminals and shaft Decks are .200" apart.
Life Expectancy: 50,000 cycles at rated loads
Contacts: Shorting
Series 25: Multi-deck

Shaft size: B = 1/4" diameter shaft
Sealed or non-sealed: S = Shaft and panel seal; No letter = no seal
Terminal structure: P = PC, perpendicular to shaft; R = PC, rear facing (one deck
only); F = PC, front facing (one deck only).
Angle of throw (determines the maximum number of positions):

10 = 10°, 36 positions; 11 = 11.25°, 32 positions; 12 = 12°, 30 positions;
15 = 15°, 24 positions; 18 = 18°, 20 positions; 22 = 22.5°, 16 positions;
30 = 30°, 12 positions; 45 = 45°, 8 positions; 60 = 60°, 6 positions;
Encoders
90 = 90°, 4 positions.
25BSP22–Q–1–16 C
Stop arrangement: For switches with maximum positions, add C for continuous rotation;
add F for stop between first and last. No notation required for less than maximum
positions.
Number of positions: Maximum is dependent on the angle of throw. Minimum is two.
Number of decks: One through four possible.
Code output:
B = Binary available in 22.5°
Q = Quadrature
G = Gray available in 22.5°
Specials include 1/8 " diameter shaft, custom angles of throw for binary, binary
complement and gray code outputs. Contact Grayhill Sales for availability.
Control knobs available, see page I-57.
Encoder
Mechanical Encoders
SERIES 25L
Hex, Gray and Quadrature Code
FEATURES
• Price Competitive to Similar • 100,000 Life Cycles
Designs • Less than 1.0" Square
• Quality Construction and Contact • Manufactured to ISO 9001
Materials Standards
• Multiple Code and Indexing
Choices
.925 ± .010 Ø .470 ± .010

(23,50 ± 0,25) (11,94 ± 0,25)
.343 ± .025 .250 ± .015 NON-TURN C
.865 ± .015 (8,71 ± 0,64) (6,35 ± 0,38) L .320 ± .010
TAB
(21,97 ± 0,38) .045 ± .005 (8,13 ± 0,25)
(1,14 ± 0,13) 3/8-32 UNEF-2A
THREAD .400 ± .015
(10,16 ± 0,38)
.025 ± .002 .250 + .001 –.002
(0,64 ± 0,05) (6,35 + 0,03 –0,05)
SQUARE PIN DIA.
.865 ± (3 PLACES)
1.020 ± .015 CL CL
.010 (21,97 ±
(25,91 ± BUSHING
0,38) .500 ± .010
0,25) FLATS
(12,7 ± 0,25) .250 ± .015 .219 ± .004
(6,35 ± 0,38) (5,56 ± 0,10)
CL
.500 ± .015
(12,7 ± 0,38) 90˚
Encoders
NON-TURN TAB .100 ± .005

.590 ± .010 .250 ± .010
Ø .120 ± .005 (3,05 ± 0,13) WIDE (2,54 ± 0,13)
(14,97 ± 0,25) (6,35 ± 0,25)
BY .068 ± .005 (1,73 ± 0,13) THICK TYP.
MOUNTING CL SHAFT
BRACKET LOCK TAB (2) FOR FLAT
MOUNTING BRACKET 25J5155
TRUTH TABLES
Clockwise Rotation Clockwise Rotation Clockwise Rotation
4-Bit Gray Code-16 Position 4-Bit Binary Code Hexadecimal-16 Position Quadrature 2-Bit Code
1/4 Cycle per Detent
Switch Code Output Switch Code Output Switch Output
Position Position 1 2 4 8 Position Position 1 2 4 8 Position "A" "B"
1 0 1 0 1
2 1 2 1 2
3 2 3 2 3
4 3 4 3 4
5 4 5 4
5
6 5 6 5 6
7 6 7 6 7
8 7 8 7 8
9 8 9 8 9
10 9 10 9 10
11 10 11 10 11
12 11 12 11 12
13 12 13 12 13
14 13 14 13 14
15 14 15 14 15
16 15 16 15 16
17
Indicates closed circuit; blank indicates Indicates closed circuit; blank indicates 18
open circuit. open circuit. 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Indicates closed circuit;

blank indicates open
circuit. Code repeats
every 4 positions.
Encoder
Mechanical Encoders
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Ratings Mechanical Ratings Materials and Finishes
Switching Loads: 1.5 mA at 115 Vac, resistive; Rotational Torque: 2 to 6 in-oz Bushing/Housing and Shaft/Rotor: Reinforced
150 mA at 14 Vdc, resistive Operating Temperature Range: -40 C° to +85 C° thermoplastic
Current Carrying Capacity: 250 mA Storage Temperature Range: -65 C° to +85 C° Detent Ball: Stainless steel, nickel-plated
maximum at 28 Vdc, resistive load Continuous Rotation: All standard switches Detent Spring: Tinned music wire
Contact Resistance: 75 mΩ, typical are continuous rotation. Desired stop locations Contacts: Beryllium copper, gold plate over
Insulation Resistance: 1000 mΩ minimum supplied upon request. nickel
between terminals Anti-Rotation Device: Integral non-turn tab, Terminals: Copper alloy, #725, 100% tin plate
Voltage Breakdown: 1000 Vac minimum flatted bushing, .375" diameter, .320 double “D” over nickel plate
between terminals across flats. Output Board: FR-4, copper/nickel-plated
Life Expectancy: 100,000 cycles of operation at Termination: Standard is PC style, parallel to Mounting Nut: Brass, tin/zinc-plated hex nut
rated loads. One cycle of operation is a rotation shaft, facing rear. Options include PC, parallel to Mounting Bracket: Stainless Steel, tin-plated
through all of the active positions and a return to shaft, facing front.
the starting position. Panel Mounting Torque: 10 in-lbs maximum
Series: 25L = Economical, single deck encoder

Housing Color: B = Black housing; R = Red housing
Angle of Throw: 10 = 10°, 36 positions; 11 = 11.25°, 32 positions;
15 = 15°, 24 positions; 18 = 18°, 20 positions;
22 = 22.5°, 16 positions; 30 = 30°, 12 positions;
45 = 45°, 8 positions
25LB10-Q-Z

Mounting Bracket: Z = with bracket, Blank = no bracket
Code Output: H = Hexadecimal available only in 22.5°
G = Gray available only in 22.5°
Encoders
Q = Quadrature (2-bit)
Custom materials, styles, color and markings are available. Custom knobs available, see page I-57.
For Custom codes. Termination, Tirque, Angles of Throw, Call Grayhill for more information.
Encoder
Mechanical Encoders
SERIES 26 AVAILABLE CODES

Binary and Gray Code • Hexadecimal
• Octal
• BCD (Adjusted)
• Quadrative
• Custom (4-Bit, 16 position maximum)
• RoHS Compliant
COMMON TERMINAL
CL OF BUSHING FLATS .300
CL POS. 0 1/4-28 UNF-2A THREAD (7,62)
.150 (3,81)
.125 ± .003 DIA. 2 PLACES CL
(Ø 3,18 ± 0,10)
ANGLE A
1 2
CL
.094 (2,39) 8 C 4
.025 ± .005
(0,64 ± 0,13)
.250 (6,35) 3 PLACES
.203 ± .003
.100 (2,54)
(5,16 ± 0,10)
.180 (4,57) 2 PLACES
ACROSS FLATS
.375 (9,53)
.500 ± .015 .200 (5,08)
(12,7 ± 0,38) DIA. .332 (8,43)
.250 (6,35)
Maximum Switch Angle
Positions A .957
Grayhill part number and date
(24,31)
8 67.5° code marked on label. Customer

REF.
16 33.75° part number marked on request.
Unless specified otherwise, all tolerances are ± .015 ( 0,38)
Encoders
SPECIFICATIONS Shock Resistance: Passes medium CODE AND TRUTH TABLE

Electrical Ratings requirement MIL-S-3785 (MIL-STD-202,
Position
Position
Method 213)
Switch
Rated: 25,000 cycles with logic compatible BCD Output* Gray Output*
Code
loads. Make and break 200 mA. Stop Strength: 5 in-lbs minimum
1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8
Contact Resistance: 500 milliohms maximum Terminals: All switches are provided with
(less than 100 milliohms initially) all 5 terminals, regardless of the number of 1 0
Insulation Resistance: 1000 megohms active positions.
2 1
minimum (10,000 megohms initially) Relative Humidity: 90-95% at 40 oC for 240
Dielectric Strength: 250 Vac minimum hours (MIL-STD-202 Method 103, Test 3 2
Condition A) 4 3
Materials and Finishes 5 4
Panel Seal: Silicone Rubber OPTIONS 6 5
Shaft Seal: Fluorosilicone Adjustable Stop Switches 7 6
Mounting Nut (mounting hardware–one The switch may have continuous rotation, or
per switch): Brass, tin/zinc-plated 8 7
be adjusted to limit the rotation. The panel
Internal Tooth Lockwasher (mounting seal ring can be removed to expose the stop 9 8
hardware–one per switch): Steel, pin holes on the front of the switch. Two stop 10 9
tin/zinc-plated pins and panel seal o-ring are supplied with 11 10
Detent Balls: Carbon steel, nickel-plated the switch. One or both may be used to limit
Detent Spring: Pretinned music wire 12 11
the rotation as desired.
Detent Rotor: Thermoplastic 13 12
Shaft, Stop Arm and Stop Pins: Stainless Shaft and Panel Seal
14 13
steel All switches are provided with a shaft and
panel seal. 15 14
Bushing: Zamak II tin/zinc alloy, zinc-plated
Switch Base: Diallyl phthalate 16 15
Printed Circuit Board: NEMA Grade FR-4. BCD Output–Adjustable Stop *Dot indicates terminal tied to common.
Terminals: Brass, gold-plated over nickel
plate Number of Part Gray Code Output–Continuous Rotation
Contacts: Copper alloy, gold-plated over Positions Number Number of Part
nickel plate 8 Positions 26ASD45-01-1-AJS Positions Number
16 Positions 26ASD22-01-1-AJS 16 Positions 26GSD22-01-1-AJS
Additional Characteristics
Available from your local Grayhill Distributor. 8 Positions 26GSD45-01-1-AJS
Rotational Torque: 4 to 8 oz-in on a new
switch. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
Custom switches with options such as 1/4" shaft
Vibration Resistance: 10 to 55 Hz at Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
diameter, longer shaft or terminals available by
0.060" double amplitude; no damage and contacting Grayhill sales. Custom encoders with
no contact openings per MIL-STD-202, options such as: custom code output, 1/4" shaft
Method 201A diameter, and longer shaft and terminal lengths
are avalable by contacting the Grayhill sales
office.
Encoder
Mechanical Encoders
SERIES 51
Binary or Binary
Complement Code
FEATURES
• PC Mount, 30° Angle of Throw
• 2 to 12 Positions
• .562" Diameter, 200 mA
• Shaft and Panel Seal
• Adjustable Stop Versions
.250 ± .015
(6,35 ± 0,38)
.537 + .020 –.030
(13,64 + 0,51 –0,76) .125 + .015
–.020
(3,18 + 0,38
.375 ± .015 –0,51) Ø .232 (5,89)
.093 ± .005
(9,53 ± 0,38) COMMON CIRCLE COMMON
(2,36 ± 0,13) .035 (0,89)
.250 + .020 – .015 OF CENTERS POLE 1
105¡ REF.
(6,35 + 0,51 –0,38)
6 5
GRAYHILL
COMMON
POLE 2

CL 8 7 COMMON
Encoders
SHAFT Ø .125 ± .002
POLE 3
FLAT (3,18 ± 0,05)
.203 ± .003
(5,16 ± 0,08)
1/4-28 UNF-2A Ø .382 (9,70) TERMINAL
THREAD CIRCLE OF CENTERS
Ø .562 + .025
–.015
(14,27 + 0,64 PC TERMINAL DETAIL PC COMMON DETAIL
– 0,38) .125± .015 .125± .015 .020 ± .003
(3,18 ± 0,38) (3,18 ± 0,38) (0,51 ± 0,08) See circuit
diagrams for
omitted terminals.
Ø .025 ± .002 .020 ± .003 .062 ± .004

(0,64 ± 0,05) (0,51 ± 0,08) (1,57 ± 0,10)
All switches are provided with PC mount terminals.

Grayhill part number and date code marked on label. Customer part number marked on request.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
Switch is viewed from the shaft end and shown Indicates Terminal is present. generate code output.
in switch position number 1, which is decimal Indicates Terminal is omitted. Switch position numbers do not correspond to the
number zero and BCD number zero. Note: Connections must be made on PC board to decimal input or binary output. See Truth Tables.
BCD BCD Complement

TIED TOGETHER TIED TOGETHER
ON PC BOARD ON PC BOARD
4 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT
3 4 2 OUTPUT 3 4 TIED TOGETHER
TIED TOGETHER ON PC BOARD
2 C1 5 TIED TOGETHER ON PC BOARD 2 C1 5
ON PC BOARD
1 6 1 6
ROTATING C2 ROTATING C2
CONTACTS 8 OUTPUT CONTACTS 8 OUTPUT
12 7 12 7
2 OUTPUT
11 8 11 8
C3 C3 TIED TOGETHER
10 9 ON PC BOARD
10 9
COMMON TIED TOGETHER COMMON
ON PC BOARD
Encoder
Mechanical Encoders
TRUTH TABLES OPTIONS

Binary Code Decimal Binary Code Decimal Complement Adjustable Stops
Set and reset stops to limit rotation. All
Dec. Switch 2nd Output Terminal Dec. Switch 2nd Output Terminal
No. Pos'n.* Pin** 1 2 4 8 No. Pos'n.* Pin** 1 2 4 8
dimensions are the same as for fixed stop
switches. Switches are shipped with the stop
0 1 4-5 0 1 12-1 blades located to limit rotation to 11 switch
1 2 5-6 1 2 1-2
positions. For continuous rotation, remove both
2 3 6-7 2 3 2-3
blades. For limited rotation, remove the 2nd
3 4 7-8 3 4 3-4
(clockwise) blade and move it to the hole
4 5 8-9 4 5 4-5
5 6 5-6
located between the positions shown in the
5 6 9-10
6 7 10-11 6 7 6-7
Truth Tables. Removal of a plastic washer
7 8 11-12 7 8 7-8 provides access to the blades and slots.
8 9 12-1 8 9 8-9 Adjustable stop versions are available in
9 10 1-2 9 10 9-10 unsealed styles only.
10 11 2-3 10 11 10-11
11 12 3-4 11 12 11-12 Shaft and Panel Seal
Switches are available in sealed or unsealed
Indicates contact made to common styles. For sealed style, the panel is sealed by
* The switch position number is the terminal location opposite the shaft flat; it is not the same as an o-ring at the base of the bushing. The shaft
the decimal number. is sealed by an o-ring inside of bushing. After
** To limit an adjustable stop switch to the decimal number shown, insert the second pin in the hole the switch is mounted, seals do not alter the
lying between the 2 switch positions indicated. dimensions of the unsealed style.
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Rating Materials and Finishes Additional Characteristics

Rated: To make and break 125 mA 30 Vdc Bases: Thermoset plastic Contact Type: Wiping contacts
resistive load for 25,000 cycles of operation. Detent Rotor: Nylon Shaft Flat Orientation: Switch position is
Encoders
Cycle: (1 cycle = 360° rotation and return) Shaft, Stop Blades, Stop Arm, Thrust defined as that position that is opposite the
Test conditions are standard atmospheric Washer And Retaining Ring: Stainless steel shaft flat. The location of the contacts in
pressure, 25°C and 68% relative humidity. Detent Balls: Steel, nickel-plated relation to the shaft flat is shown on the circuit
Contact Resistance: 20 milliohms initially, Bushing: Zinc, Tin-zinc-plated diagram.
300 milliohms maximum after life Detent Spring: Stainless steel Terminals: Only the active position terminals,
Insulation Resistance: 50,000 megohms Common Terminals and Rings: Brass, gold as shown in the circuit diagram are supplied
initially, 10,000 megohms after life plate .00003" minimum over silver plate .0003" with the switch. All common terminals are
Voltage Breakdown: 500 Vac between minimum supplied.
mutually insulated parts Terminals: Brass with silver contact surface, Stop Strength: 7.5 in-lbs minimum
gold-plated .00003" Rotational Torque: 8 to16 in-oz
Rotor Contact: Berillium copper with silver Bushing Mounting: Required for these
contact surface switches
Shaft And Panel Seal: Silicone rubber Maximum Mounting Torque: 15 in-lbs.
Mounting Hardware: One mounting nut, .089"
thick by .375" across flats, and one internal
tooth lockwasher are supplied with the switch.
Type Of Maximum No. BCD Output BCD Complement
Switch Of Positions Unsealed Sealed Unsealed Sealed
7 513360-7 513374-7 513361-7 513375-7
8 513360-8 513374-8 513361-8 513375-8
Fixed Stop 9 513360-9 513374-9 513361-9 513375-9
10 513360-10 513374-10 513361-10 513375-10
11 513360-11 513374-11 513361-11 513375-11
12 513360-12-F 513374-12-F 513361-12-F 513375-12-F
Continuous Rotation 12 513360-12-C 513374-12-C 513361-12-C 513375-12-C
Adjustable Stop 12 513385 ——— 513384 ———
The -C suffix indicates continuous rotation. The -F suffix indicates a fixed stop between positions 1 and 12.
Encoder
Mechanical Encoders
SERIES 71
Binary Code
FEATURES
• 1/4" or 1/8" Shaft Diameters
• 25,000 Cycles at 125 mA
• Optional Seal Versions
• Adjustable Stop Versions

.312 ± .020 .761 ± .046
0.125" (7,92 ± 0,51) (19,33 ± 1,17)
Diameter CL OF SHAFT
.375 ± .020
Shaft .094 ± .010 FLAT (9,53 ± 0,51) .031 (0,79) .500 ± .015
(2,39 ± 0,25) REF. (12,7 ± 0,38)
.250 ± .020 DIA. Rear mounting
72˚ (6,35 ± 0,51) plate stamping
indicates CODED
GRAYHILL
output terminals,
8
2
.562 ± .015
81073
not decimal
C
CL (14,27 ± 0,38)
OF positions.
1
BUSHING
SHAFT IS FLATS .125 + .001/ –.002
SHOWN (3,18 + 0,03/ –0,05)
IN POSITION 1 .203 ± .005 SEE .750 ± .020
(5,16 ± 0,13) DETAIL A (19,05 ± 0,51)
1/4 32-UNEF-2A
.687 ± .015 THREAD OVER TERMINALS
(17,45 ± 0,38)

0.250"
DIA.
Diameter
CL OF SHAFT 3/8 32-UNEF-2A
Shaft .219 ± .004
THREAD
Encoders
FLAT
(5,56 ± 0,10)
72° Detail A
CL
OF
SHAFT IS BUSHING
SHOWN KEYWAY .034 ± .003
IN POSITION 1 .250 + .001/ –.002 (0,86 ± 0,08)
(6,35 + 0,03/ –0,05) BUSHING KEYWAY .068 ± .005
.066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE (1,73 ± 0,13)
All dimensions and rear view not shown for
BY .036 ± .003 (0,91 ± 0,08)
the .250" diameter shaft type are the same
FROM A .375 (9,53) DIAMETER
as the .125" diameter shaft type.
CODE AND TRUTH TABLE OPTIONS Adjustable Stop Switches

Output Decimal Position Shaft and Panel Seal Adjustable stop switch lets you limit the number
Terminal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Shaft is sealed by o-ring inside the bushing; of positions. Remove and relocate pins in the
panel is sealed by o-ring at the base of the front plate. A sticker holds the pins in place.
1 * * * * * With the exception of holes in the front plate, all
bushing. Seals do not alter dimensions as
2 * * * * dimensions, ratings, and characteristics are
shown in the drawing when switch is mounted.
4 * * * * the same as the other Series 71 coded switches.
Panel seal is silicone rubber. Shaft seal is an
8 * * For diagrams, see Standard Switch.
o-ring per MIL-P-5516B. Shaft and panel seal
l Indicates contact is made to the common. is not available on adjustable stop switch.
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Rating Additional Characteristics
Rated: To make and break 125 mA at 30 Vdc Rotational Torque: 8 to 16 oz-in.
resistive at standard conditions Contacts: Non-shorting wiping contacts ORDERING INFORMATION
Life Expectancy: 25,000 cycles at rated load; Shaft Flat Orientation: As shown in the drawing, Shaft Diameter Part
50,000 cycles mechanical. For ratings at different switch would provide a decimal 1 output. And Description Number
loads and conditions, contact Grayhill. 1/8" Continuous Rotation 71AY23401
Contact Resistance: 100 milliohms maximum Materials and Finishes 1/8" Cont. Rot., Sealed 71AY23402
(50 milliohms initially) Base: Diallyl per MIL-M-14 1/4" Continuous Rotation 71BY23403
Insulation Resistance: As measured between Rotor Mounting Plate: Thermoplastic. 1/4" Cont. Rot., Sealed 71BY23404
mutually insulated parts Rotor Contact: Phosphor Bronze, gold-plated 1/8" Adjustable Stops 71AD36-3118
Initially: 50,000 megohms minimum 30 microinches minimum 1/4" Adjustable Stops 71BD36-3119
After Life: 10,000 megohms minimum Terminals: Brass, gold plate (20 microinches)
Voltage Breakdown: 500 Vac between mutually minimum over silver plate (300 microinches) Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
insulated parts minimum For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
Carry Current: These switches will carry 3 Additional Materials: Other switch materials Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
amperes with a maximum contact temperature and finishes are the same as listed for the
rise of 20°C. standard switch. See Standard Switch.
Encoder
CONTROL KNOBS
Rotary Switches
FEATURES
and Rotary Switches
Versions

considerations
Encoders
.620 (15,75)
.593
(15,06)
.335 (8,51) .700
DIA.
(17,78) DIA.
.440
(11,18) .600
DIA. (15,24)
1.330
(33,78)
DIA.
.500
(12,7)
DIA. .440
.894 (11,2)
(22,71)
DIA.
.350
.662 .500
(8,9)
(16,81) (12,7)
DIA.

.
Encoder

.315 .393
(8,00) (9,98)
.220 R.
CL OF (5,59)
.220
(5,59) R.
.092 (2,34) .550

.500 TYP. 1.575 DIA. (13,97)
.215
(12,7) (4 PLACES) .660 (40,01) DIA.
(5,46)
DIA. (16,76)
.400
(10,16)
1.090
(27,69)
.500
(12,7)
DIA. .500

.710 .730
(12,7)
(18,03) (18,54)
DIA. SPRING CLIP
Encoders
Series
Style*: 5013, 5014, 5015, 5017, 5019, 5020, 5028, 5029
Shaft Diameter:
J = .125 dia. shaft
K = .250 dia. shaft
11K5028-KCNB
Knob Color:
B = Black
G = Gray
Material:
N = Nylon
Version:

Encoder
Encoders
Contents: Encoders
OPTICAL ENCODERS
• Eliminates Rotary Mechanical
Contacts
• Accurate Resolution up to 1024
Positions Page
• Logic Compatible
• Selects Menu or Display Items ENGINEERING INFORMATION .................................................................. 2
• Includes Data Input Switch
• Up to 1 Billion Trouble-Free OPTICAL ENCODERS
Cycles Compact, 1/2" Package ............................................... Series 62S ............. 3
Low Cost, PC Mount .................................................... Series 62P ............. 5
MECHANICAL ENCODERS
1/2" Package ................................................................ Series 62A,V,D ...... 7
• Standard BCD and Multiple
High Torque.............................................................Series 62HS ........ 10
Code Outputs
1/2" Package,Non-Turn Dedicated Shaft ................... Series 62N ........... 12
• As Small as 1/2" Diameter
High Torque, Non-Turn Concentric Shaft ................... Series 62HN ........ 14
• Economical Means to Provide
Concentric Shaft .......................................................... Series 62C ..........16
Code Output
High Torque, Concentric Shaft .................................... Series 62H ..........18
1/2" Package, Redundant Circuitry ............................. Series 62R ........... 20
1/2" Package, Redundant Circuitry, High Torque......Series 62HR ......... 22
1/2" Package, Lighted Shaft ....................................... Series 62F ........... 24
Magnectic Detent ......................................................... Series 62M ........... 26

Push-Pull, High Torque ............................................... Series 62B ........... 28
Thumbwheel ................................................................. Series 62T ........... 30
Encoders
Full Quadrature Cycle Per Detent ............................... Series 61L ............ 32
Price Competitive Solution .......................................... Series 62AG ........ 34
Joystick ......................................................................... Series 60A ........... 36
Multi-Function Joystick.............................................Series 60C............ 38
Custom, Absolute ......................................................... Series 61A ........... 41
High Resolution 4 & 5 Pin ........................................... Series 61K, R ...... 43
Simulated Mechanical Rotary Output ......................... Series 61M ........... 49
Interface
Optical Encoder Interface ............................................ Series 65..............48
ACCESSORIES
Encoder
Optical Encoder Engineering Information
QUADRATURE
All Grayhill encoders use quadrature output In a phototransistor, base current is supplied this application. The device has a higher
code, which is the same as a 2-bit, repeating when light strikes the detector, which effectively threshold, or trigger level, when it is in the “on”
gray code. Quadrature is the most popular and grounds the output. Typically, the detector is state than it does in the “off” state. This hysterisis
cost effective output format because only two operated in saturation. This means sufficient filters any electrical noise, which can cause the
detectors are required. However, quadrature light is provided to completely sink, or ground, output to change state rapidly during the
can only be used in applications where all the current provided by the pull up resistor transition. And since the output from the Schmitt
incremental data is required. Absolute plus that of the interfacing electronics. In the Trigger is a pure digital signal and is isolated
positioning is not possible because the code logic high state, the light is sufficiently blocked from the phototransistor, the signal is basically
repeats every four positions. In other words, by the rotor and the detector functions like an immune to loading problems that can effect
changes in the encoder in magnitude and open circuit. The pull up resistor then provides encoders without the Schmitt Trigger. Schmitt
direction can be determined, but the actual sourcing current to the interfacing electronics. Triggers are available in most popular IC
position of the encoder cannot. In most This “on” or “off” digital arrangement allows the technologies.
applications this is not a problem. open collector to interface with popular integrated
circuit technologies such as TTL, TTL LS, SHAFT AND PANEL SEAL
In a quadrature rotary optical encoder two CMOS, and HCMOS. A shaft and panel seal are available to provide
detectors are used to provide outputs, “A” and water-tight mounting for the Series 61B, 61D,
“B”. The code rotor either blocks the infrared SCHMITT TRIGGERS 61K, 61R and 62 encoders. Sealing is
light or allows it to pass to the detectors. As the To provide signal enhancement it is accomplished by an o-ring shaft seal and a
shaft turns the rotor, the outputs change state to recommended that a Schmitt Trigger be panel seal washer. The panel seal washer in
indicate position. The resulting output is two connected to each output. This device is already the 61B and 61D encoders does not affect the
square waves which are 90° out of phase. included in the Series 61K, 61R, 63K and 63R overall dimensions of the switches. In the 61K
encoders. The Schmitt Trigger “cleans up” the and 61R encoders, the .045" thick washer is
OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUT output into a pure digital signal. It does this by placed over the threads and sits flat on the base
The open collector output is typical of the Series removing the small linear region between the of the bushing. The 61KS and 61RS are also
61B, 61C and 62, and is the simplest form of “on” and “off” states of the detector. During this epoxy-sealed on the bottom of the switch to
output available. The first step in interfacing transition the light is only partially blocked and provide a completely sealed switch.
with open collector outputs is to provide an the output is somewhere between what the
external pull-up resistor from each output to the interfacing circuit might consider to be “on” or
Encoders
power source. These pull-up resistors provide “off”. In other words, the output is not completely
the output with the high-state voltage when the digital. The Schmitt Trigger contains a very
phototransistor is “off”. important feature which makes it attractive for
Open Collector Output Schmitt Trigger

LIGHT
LIGHT PARTIALLY LIGHT
POWER BLOCKED BLOCKED DETECTED
PHOTOTRANSISTOR SOURCE UPPER
AS AN OPEN SWITCH THRESHOLD
EXTERNAL LOWER
CURRENT
PULL-UP FLOW THRESHOLD
HIGH
RESISTOR
OUTPUT INPUT TO
LEVEL SCHMITT
OUTPUT TO NEXT
TRIGGER
STAGE
PHOTOTRANSISTOR OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
FROM LOW HIGH LOW
SCHMITT
TRIGGER
POWER POWER
PHOTOTRANSISTOR SOURCE SOURCE
AS A CLOSED SWITCH
EXTERNAL
CURRENT PULL-UP EXTERNAL SCHMITT
FLOW RESISTOR LOW PULL-UP TRIGGER
OUTPUT RESISTOR OUTPUT
LEVEL
OUTPUT TO NEXT
STAGE
PHOTOTRANSISTOR
PHOTOTRANSISTOR
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 62S
Compact 1/2'' Package
FEATURES • Choices of Cable Length and

• Compact Size, Requires Minimal Terminations
Behind Panel Space
• 1/2 Million Rotations for High APPLICATIONS
Torque • Global Positioning/Driver
• 1 Million Rotational Cycles, Information Systems
3 Million for Non-Detent Styles • Medical Equipment
• Optional Integral Pushbutton
DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters) Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerance is ±.010 (0,25)
.066±.002 .066.002 .125

.152±.002 (1,680,05)
(3,86±0,05) (1,68±0,05) (3,18)
.152.002 .250
(3,860,05) (6,35)
.500
(12,7)
.500
SCALE 0.500 (12,7) SCALE 0.500
.250
(6,35) .050 REF.

.540 (1,27)
.540 .249.002 (13,72)
(6,320,05) Ø.249.002
(13,72) .250 .250 .400 (6,320,05)
(6,35) (6,36) (10,15) .250
.219±.003 (6,35) .219.003
Encoders
(5,56±0,07) (5,560,07)
.312 3/8-32 UNEF-2A .312

(7,92) THREAD (7,92)
.687±.015 3/8-32 UNEF-2A
CONNECTOR IS AMP .687.015 THREAD
(17,45±0,38) P/N 215083-6 (17,450,38)
OR EQUIVALENT
.130
(3,3)
.434.015
(11,020,38)
.290
(7,34) .290
CABLE LENGTH (7,37) PINS ARE
XXX.20 .350.015 .016 SQUARE
(XXX5,1) (8,880,38) (0,41)
.066.002 .066.002 .100 REF.

.152.002 (1,680,05)
(3,860,05) (1,680,05) SCALE (2,54)
0.500 .152.002
(3,860,05)
.500 .670 .630

(12,7) (17,02) .500 .500 (16)
(12,7)
.250 (12,7) SCALE 0.500
(6,35)
.540
(13,72) .249.002 .540
.500 (6,320,05) (13,72) Ø.249.002
.250 .250
(6,35) (12,7) .219.003 .250 .455 (6,320,05)
(6,35) .250
(5,560,07) (6,35) (11,56) (6,35) .219.003
(5,560,07)
.312 4.000.20 3/8-32 UNEF-2A
(7,92) CABLE LENGTH THREAD
IS MEASURED .312
.687.015 (7,92) 3/8-32 UNEF-2A
FROM THE PCB THREAD
(17,450,38) TO THE BOTTOM .687.015
OF THE CONNECTOR (17,450,38)
.230
(5,84)
.574.015
(14,580,38)
.290
(7,37) .290
(7,37)
CONNECTOR IS
AMP P/N 640442-6 .400.015 PINS ARE
OR EQUIVALENT (10,160,38) .025 SQUARE
(0,64)
Encoder
Optical Encoders
CIRCUITRY, TRUTH TABLE, AND WAVEFORM Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code

PIN #
POWER +5V 6
R* Clockwise Rotation
HIGH Position Output A Output B
OUTPUT A 5 OUTPUT
R* A LOW 1
OUTPUT B 4
HIGH
2 •
OUTPUT 3 • •
N.O. 3
B LOW 4 •
PUSH-
BUTTON 1 2 3 4 5 6 • Indicates logic high; blank indicates
SWITCH logic low.
2 POSITION NUMBER Code repeats every 4 positions.
GROUND 1
SPECIFICATIONS AVERAGE ROTATIONAL TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Code Rotor: Delrin 100

Environmental Specifications LOW MEDIUM HIGH Printed Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4,
±0.50 IN-OZ ±1.40 IN-OZ ±1.60 IN-OZ
Operating Temperture Range: -40°C to 85°C 8 POSITION 1.10 1.85 2.75 double clad with copper, plated with gold over
Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°C 12 POSITION 1.00 1.70 2.95 nickel
16 POSITION 1.40 2.35 3.40 Infrared Emiting Diode Chips: Gallium
Humidity: 96 Hours at 90–95% humidity at 20 POSITION 1.35 2.05 2.80
40°C 24 POSITION 1.25 1.95 2.95 aluminum arsenide
Mechanical Vibration: Harmonic motion with 32 POSITION 0.95 1.40 2.15 Silicon Phototransistor Chips: Gold and
amplitude of 15G's, within a varied frequency Torque shall be within 50% of initial value Aluminum Alloys
of 10 to 2000 Hz throughout life Resistor: Metal oxide on ceramic substrate
Mechanical Shock: Test 1: 100G for 6 mS, half Mounting Torque: 15 in-lbs maximum Solder Pins: Brass, plated with tin
sine wave with a velocity change of 12.3 ft/s; Shaft Push-Out Force: 45 lbs minimum Pushbutton Dome: Stainless steel
Shaft Pull-Out Force: 45 lbs minimum Backplate: Stainless steel
Encoders
Test 2: 100G for 6 mS, sawtooth wave with a

Terminal Strength: 15 lbs minimum terminal Cable: Copper stranded with topcoat in PVC
velocity change of 9.7 ft/s
pull-out force for cable or header termination insulation (Cable version only)
Solderability: 95% free of pin holes and voids Connector (.050 Center): PA4.6 with tin over
Rotary Electrical and Mechanical
nickel plated phosphor bronze
Specifications Pushbutton Electrical and
Connector (.100 Center): Nylon UL94V-2, tin
Operating Voltage: 5.00 ±0.25 Vdc Mechanical Specifications plated copper alloy
Supply Current: 30mA maximum at 5Vdc Rating: 10 mA at 5 Vdc
Output: Open collector phototransistor, Label: TT406 Thermal transfer cast film
Contact Resistance: <10Ω
external pull up resistors are required Solder: Sn/Ag/Cu, Lead-Free, No Clean
Life: 3 million actuations minimum
Output Code: 2-Bit quadrature, channel A Lubricating Grease: NYE nyogel 774L
Contact Bounce: <4 ms Make, <10 ms Break
leads channel B by 90° electrically during Hex Nut: Nickel, plated with brass
Actuation Force: 9-950±250 grams, 5-
clockwise rotation of the shaft Lockwasher: Stainless steel
510±110 grams, 4-400±100 grams, 3-300±90
Logic Output Characteristics: Header: Hi-Temp glass filled thermoplastic
grams, 2-200±75 grams
Logic High shall be no less than 3.0 Vdc UL94V-0, phoshor bronze (pinned versions
Logic Low shall be no greater than 1.0 Vdc Shaft Travel: .020±.010 inch
only)
Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA Materials and Finishes Strain Relief: Glass filled thermoplastic (.100
Power Consumption: 150 mW maximum center cable versions only)
Bushing: Zamak 2
Mechanical Life:
Non-Detent 3 Million Cycles Shaft: Aluminum or Zamak 2
Low & Medium 1 Million Cycles Retaining Ring: Stainless steel OPTIONS
High 1/2 Million Cycles Pushbutton Actuator: Zytel 70G33L Contact Grayhill for custom terminations, shaft
1 cycle is a rotation through all positions and Detent Spring: Music wire and bushing configurations, rotational torque
a full return Detent Ball: Stainless steel pushbutton force, and code output. Control
Code Housing: Polyamide polymer, nylon 6/ knobs are also available.
ORDERING INFORMATION 10 alloy UL94HB
Termination
Angle of Throw C = .050 Center Ribbon Cable with Connector
45=45° for Code Change and 8 Detent Positions S = .050 Center Ribbon Cable with .100 Stripped End
30=30° for Code Change and 12 Detent Positions P = .050 Center Pins with .185 Length
22=22.5° for Code Change and 16 Detent Positions CH = .100 Center Ribbon Cable with Connector
18=18° for Code Change and 20 Detent Positions SH = .100 Center Ribbon Cable with .100 Stripped End
6 2 S X X - X X - 040X
15=15° for Code Change and 24 Detent Positions PH = .100 Center Pins with .230 Length
11=11.25° for Code Change and 32 Detent Positions Cable Length
Cable Termination: 040=4.0in or 040in. Cable is
terminated with Amp Connector P/N 640442-6
See Amp Mateability Guide for mating connector details.
Rotational Torque Option
N = Non-detent Pushbutton Option
L = Low Torque (available with 0, 4, 5, 9 pushbutton only) 0 = NO PUSHBUTTON 4 = 400 Grams
M = Medium Torque (available with 0, 5, 9 pushbutton only) 9 = 950 Grams 3 = 300 Grams
H = High Torque (available with 0, 9 pushbutton only) 5 = 510 Grams 2 = 200 Grams
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 62P
Low Cost, PC Mount
FEATURES APPLICATION
• Low Cost • Automotive Controls
• Compact Size • White Goods
• PC Mount • Audio
• No De-Bouncing Required
• Reliable, Up to 2 Million Cycles
• Choice of Detent and
Pushbutton Force
• Available in 16 Positions
• Quadrature Output
±.010 TOLERANCE APPLIES TO ALL DIMENSIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
.730 6 5 4
(18,54) .100
.400 (2,54)
(10,16) .365 .201
.655 (9,27) .250 (5,14)
.525 .200
(16.64) .400 (13,34) (5,08) (6,35)
2 PLCS.
(10,16)

.042
.200 (1,07) .403
(5,08) .403 6 PLCS. (10,24)
(10,24) .064 3 2 1
(1,63) 6 PLCS.
PIN DESIGNATION .625
Encoders
.109 (15,88)
(2,77) .070
.625 .403 4 PLCS. (1,78)
(15,88) (10,24) .263 4 PLCS.
(6,67)
.403
(10,24) .100 .200
6 PLCS. SUGGESTED HOLE LAYOUT DETAIL (2,54)
TOLERANCE: ±.002 .250 2 PLCS. (5,08)
(6,35) .400
.100
.202 (2,54) (10,16)
.655
(5,14)
.250 .250±.004 (16.64)
(6,35) Ø.187±.004
(4,75±0,1) (6.35±0,1) .219±.002
.156±.004 Ø.375 Ø.375 (5,56±0,1)
(3,96±0,1) (9,53) (9,53)
.025 X 45° .025 X 45°
.325 CHAMFER CHAMFER
(8,26) .325
.366 .366 (8,26) .660±.0
.660±.015 (16,76±0
(9,29) (9,29)
(16,76±0,38) .250
.332 .332 .250
(8,43) (6,35) (8,43) (6,35)
.030 .030
(0,76) (0,76)
.220 .220
(5,59) .030 .030 (5,59)
(0,76) Ø.059±.002 Ø.059±.002
(0,76)
.038 (1,5±0,05) (1,5±0,05) .038
.335 .335
(0,96) (0,96)
(8,51) (8,51)
.700 4 PLCS. .080 .700 4 PLCS.
(17,78) .080 (17,78)
(2,03) .805 (2,03)
.805
(20,45) (20,45)
CIRCUITRY
150 *
POWER (+5.0 V) 1
GROUND 2
10K *
OUTPUT B 3
10K *
OUTPUT A 4
PUSHBUTTON 5
PUSHBUTTON 6
*10K EXTERNAL PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED ON PIN 3 AND PIN 4

*150 EXTERNAL RESISTOR REQUIRED ON PIN 1
Encoder
Optical Encoders
WAVEFORM AND TRUTH TABLE Standard Quadrature 2-bit Code
150 *
POWER (+5.0 V) 1
HIGH POSITION OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
GROUND 2 OUTPUT A
#1
10K * LOW
OUTPUT B 3 #2
10K * HIGH #3
OUTPUT A 4
OUTPUT B #4
PUSHBUTTON 5 LOW
POS. POS. POS. POS. POS. POS.

INDICATES LOGIC HIGH CODE REPEATS EVERY FOUR POSITIONS.
PUSHBUTTON 6
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6
*10K EXTERNAL PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED ON PIN 3 AND PIN 4

*150 EXTERNAL RESISTOR REQUIRED ON PIN 1
SPECIFICATIONS Mechanical Ratings Test 2: 100g for 6mS, Sawtooth, 9.7 ft/s
Electrical Ratings Operating Torque: Materials and Finishes
Operating Voltage: 5 Vdc +/-.25 Vdc H: 1.4 in-oz +/- 0.6 in-oz initial Code/Pushbutton Housing: Thermoplastic
Supply Current: 30mA maximum at 5 Vdc L: 0.6 in-oz +/- 0.3 in-oz initial Shaft: Thermoplastic
Logic High: 3.0V minimum N: ∠0.5 in-oz initial Code/Detent Rotor: Reinforced
Logic Low: 1.0V maximum Rotational Life: Thermoplastic
Logic Rise and Fall: less than 30 ms H&L: 500,000 cycles Bushing: Thermoplastic
N: 2 million cycles Terminal Pins: Brass, Tin plated
(1 cycle = 360 degree rotation and return) Detent Spring: Stainless Steel
Pushbutton Switch Ratings
Shaft Push Out Force: Dome: Stainless Steel
Rating: 5.0 Vdc at 10mA resistive
20 lbs minimum Pushbutton Contact: Nickel plated brass

Contact Resistance: less than 10 ohms
Operating Speed: 100 RPM maximum Phototransistor: Planar Silicon
(TTL or CMOS compatible)
Axial Shaft Play: .010 maximum Detent Balls:
Voltage Breakdown: 250 Vac between
Encoders
Environmental Ratings .0625 dia. Stainless Steel

mutually insulated parts
Operating Temperature Range: Infrared Emitter:
Contact Bounce: less than 4 ms at make
-40°C to 85°C Gallium Aluminum Arsenide
and less than 10 ms at break
Storage Temperature Range: Label:
Actuation Life: 3,000,000 operations
-55°C to 100°C White Thermal Transfer Cast Film.
Actuation Force: 6: 600 +/- 200 grams
Relative Humidity: 90-95% at 40°C Adhesive Coated
4: 450 +/- 150 grams
for 96 hours Bracket: Stainless Steel, Tin plated
Shaft Travel: .015 ± .010 inch
Vibration Resistance: Harmonic motion with
Amplitude of 15g, within a varied 10 to 2000
Hz frequency for 12 hours per MIL-STD-202,
Method 204
Mechanical Shock Resistance:
Test 1: Tested at 100g for 6mS, half sine,
12.3 ft/s.
Series
Angle of Throw: 22-16 Position (22°)
Rotational Torque: N - Non-detent
L - Low torque
H - High torque
Pushbutton Force: 0 - No Pushbutton
4 - 450 grams
6 - 600 grams
62PXX-XXX
Shaft Option: Blank - Standard Ø.187 Shaft
S - Ø.250 Shaft Sleeve
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 62A,V,D
1/2'' Package
• Low Cost • Global Positioning/Driver
• Long Life Information Systems
• Available in 3.3 or 5.0 Vdc • Medical Equipment
Operating Voltages
• High Torque Version
to Emphasize Rotational Feel
• Economical Size
• Optically Coupled for More than a
Million Cycles
• Compatible with CMOS, TTL and
HCMOS Logic
• Available in 12,16, 20, 24 and 32
Detent Positions (Non-detent Also
Available)
• Choices of Cable Length and

Terminations
Encoders
Cable Version
.540
(13,72)
.250
(6,35)
.250
.066±.002
(6,35)
(1,68±0,05
.500
(13,26)
.152±.002
(3,9±0,05)
.219±.003
(5,6±0,08)
.390
(9,91)
Ø.250±.002 .250
(6,35±0,05) (6,35)
.375±.015
(9,52±0,38)
.312 3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD

(7,92) THREADS TO BE WITHIN
.030 (0,76) OF SHOULDER.
.510±.015 GRAYHILL
62AXX-XX-XXXC
(12,95±0,38)
.525±.015 XXXX X-X 654321
(12,95±0,38) 28 AWG CABLE
WIRES ON
.050 (1.27)
CENTERS
.320 REF. 4.000

(8,13) ±.20
CONNECTOR IS
AMP P/N (±5,1)
215083-6
Encoder
Optical Encoders

Pin Version
Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerance is ±.010 (0.25)
.540
(13,72)
.250
(6,35)
.066 ±.002
(1,68±0,05)
.250
(6,35)
.500 .602
(13,26) (15,29)
.152±.002
(3,9±0,05) .219±.003
(5,6±0,08)
.522 .100
(2,54)
TYP.
Ø.250 ±.002
(6,32±0,05)
3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD.
THREADS TO BE WITHIN
.030 (0,76) OF SHOULDER.
.375 ±.015 .250

(5,6±0,08) .312 (6,35)
(7,9)
62AXX-XX-P GRAYHILL
XXXX X-X 654321
.797
(20,2) .940±.050
.817
(20,8) (24,0±1,3)
.470±.020
(12,0±0,5)
.450±.010
(11,43±0,3) .140±.015
Encoders
.620
(3,6±0,4) (15,7)
Standard 5.0 Volt (Styles A and D)

PIN # Clockwise Rotation
POWER +5V 6 Position Output A Output B
R* 1
OUTPUT A 5 2 •
OUTPUT B
R* 3 • •
4 4 •
N.O.
PUSH-
3 • Indicates logic high; blank indicates
logic low. Code repeats every 4
BUTTON positions.
SWITCH 2
GROUND 1
3.3 Volt (Style V only)

HIGH
PIN # OUTPUT
POWER +3.3V 6 A LOW
R*
OUTPUT A 100 Ω 100 Ω HIGH
5 5% 5% OUTPUT
R* B LOW
OUTPUT B
4
1 2 3 4 5 6
N.O. 3 POSITION NUMBER
PUSHBUTTON
SWITCH
2
GROUND
1
* External pull-up resisitors required for operation (2.2k Ω)
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SPECIFICATIONS Operating Torque: Detent Spring: Stainless steel

Electrical and Mechanical Ratings Style A and V: 2.0 ±1.4 in-oz. initially Printed Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4
Rating: 5 Vdc, 10 mA, resistive Style D: 3.5 ±1.4 in-oz initially gold over nickel or palladium
Contact Resistance: less than 10 ohms (TTL Non-detent: less than 1.5 in-oz initially Terminals: Brass, tin-plated
or CMOS compatible) Shaft Push Out Force: 45 lbs minimum Mounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-plated
Pushbutton Life: 3 million actuations minimum Mounting Torque: 15 in-lbs maximum nut and stainless steel lockwasher supplied with
Contact Bounce: less than 4 mS at make and Terminal Strength: 15 lbs cable pull-out force each switch. Nut is 0.094 inches thick by 0.562
less than 10 mS at break minimum inches across flats.
Actuation Force: 1000 ±300 grams Operating Speed: 100 RPM maximum Rotor: Thermoplastic
Pushbutton Travel: .010/.025 inch Axial Shaft Play: .010 maximum Code Housing: Thermoplastic
Coding: 2-bit quadrature coded output Pushbutton Dome: Stainless steel
Operating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 Vdc, 3.30±.125 Dome Retaining Disk: Thermoplastic
Vdc (style V only)
Environmental Ratings
Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°C Pushbutton Housing: Thermoplastic
Voltage Breakdown: 250 Vac between mutually Phototransistor: Planar Silicon NPN
insulated parts Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°C
Relative Humidity: 90–95% at 40°C for 96 hours Infrared Emitter: Gallium aluminum arsenide
Supply Current: 30 mA maximum
Vibration Resistance: Harmonic motion with Pushbutton Contact: Brass, nickel-plated
Logic Output Characterisitics:
Logic High: 3.8 Vdc (5.0 Vdc); 2.3 (3.3 Vdc) amplitude of 15G, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hz Flex Cable: 28 AWG, stranded/top coated wire,
minimum frequency for 12 hours per MIL-STD-202, Method PVC coated on .050 or .100" centers (cabled
Logic Low: 0.8 Vdc maximum 204 version)
Rotational Life: 1,000,000 cycles minimum Mechanical Shock: Test 1: 100G for 6 mS, half Header Pins: Phospher bronze, tin-plated
(One cycle is a rotation through all positions sine, 12.3 ft/s; Test 2: 100G for 6 mS, sawtooth, Spacer: ABS
and a full return) 9.7 ft/s Backplate/Strain Relief: Stainless steel
Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA for 5 Vdc; 1.0
mA for 3.3 Vdc
Power Consumption: 150 mW maximum for 5 Materials and Finishes
Vdc; 80 mW for 3.3 Vdc Code Housing: Reinforced thermoplastic
Optical Rise and Fall Times: less than 30 mS Shaft: Zinc or aluminum

maximum Bushing: Zinc casting
Shaft Retaining Ring: Stainless steel
Encoders
Series
Style: A = 1/2" package, 5.0 Vdc Input, D = high torque w/5.0 Vdc input, V = 3.3 Vdc input
Angle of Throw:
Detent Non-detent (Styles A&V only)
11 = 11.25° or 32 positions 01 = 11.25° or 32 positions
15 = 15° or 24 positions 05 = 15° or 24 positions
18= 18° or 20 positions 08= 18° or 20 positions
Pushbutton Option: 01 = w/o pushbutton, 02 = with pushbutton
62A22-01-040S
Termination: S = Stripped cable; .050" centers

SH = Stripped cable; .100" centers
C = Connector; .050" centers
CH = Connector; .100" centers
P = Pin; .100" centers
Cable Length: Cable Terminination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated with
Amp P/N 215083-6. See Amp Mateability Guide for Mating Connector details.
*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins. (Ex: 62A22-02-P).
These switches have Quadrature 2-bit code output and an optional shaft actuated pushbutton switch.
Custom materials, styles, colors, and markings are available. Control knobs available.
Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor.
For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor, or Grayhill.
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 62HS
High Torque
FEATURES
• High Rotational Torque Provides • Available in 8,12 and 16 Detent
Positive Tactile Feedback Positions
• Optically Coupled for More than a • Choice of Cable Length and
Million Cycles Terminations
HCMOS Logic APPLICATIONS
• Avionics

Cable Version Unless otherwise specified, standard
tolerance is ±.010 (0,25).
.236
[ 5,99 ] CONNECTOR IS AMP
.219 ±.002 .110 P/N 215083-6
[ 5,56 ±0,05 ] [ 2,79 ] OR EQUIVALENT
Encoders
.250 ±.002
.066 ±.002 [ 6,34 ±0,05 ]
[ 1,68 ±0,05 ]
.400 .200
[ 10,15 ] [ 5,08 ]
4.000 ±.200
4.000±5,08
.250
[ 6,35 ]
.152 ±.002 .650 .375

[ 3,86 ±0,05 ] [ 16,5 ] [ 9,53 ] .511
.540 [ 12,98 ]
.500 [ 13,72 ] .312
[ 12,7 ] [ 7,92 ]
.750 .250 .530 ±.015
[ 19,05 ] [ 6,35 ] [ 13,46 ±0,38 ]
Pin Version Stripped Version
3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD

.030 (0, 76) OF SHOULDER
.230 .100
[ 5,84 ] [ 2,54]
.690 .015 4.000 ±.200
[ 17,53 0,38 ] 4.000±5,08
WAVEFORM AND TRUTH TABLE
Clockwise Rotation
HIGH Position Output A Output B
OUTPUT
A LOW
1
HIGH
2 •
OUTPUT
B
3 • •
LOW
4 •
1 2 3 4 5 6
POSITION NUMBER
• Indicates logic high; blank indicates
positions.
Encoder
Optical Encoders
CIRCUITRY
PIN #
POWER +5V 6
R*
5 100 Ω
OUTPUT A
R*
OUTPUT B 4
N.O. 3
PUSH-
BUTTON
SWITCH 2
GROUND 1
* External pull-up resistors required for operation (2.2 kΩ).
SPECIFICATIONS
Pushbutton Switch Ratings Operating Torque: 5.0 in-oz +/- 1.5 in-oz Bushing: Zinc casting
Rating: at 5 Vdc, 10 mA, resistive initial Shaft Retaining Ring: Stainless steel
Contact Resistance: less than 10 ohms Shaft Push Out Force: 45 lbs minimum Detent Spring: Stainless steel
(TTL or CMOS compatible) Mounting Torque: 15 in-lbs maximum Detent Ball: Stainless steel
Pushbutton Life: 3 million actuations Terminal Strength: 15 lbs cable pull-out force Detent Section: Hiloy 610
minimum minimum Printed Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4

Voltage Breakdown: 250 Vac between Operating Speed: 100 RPM maximum gold over nickel or palladium
mutually insulated parts Terminals: Brass, tin-plated
Contact Bounce: less than 4 mS at make
Encoders
Environmental Ratings Mounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-plated
and less than 10 mS at break Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°C nut and stainless steel lockwasher supplied
Actuation Force: 1100 ±300g with each switch. Nut is 0.094 inches thick by
Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°C
Vibration Resistance: Harmonic motion with 0.562 inches across flats
Encoder Ratings amplitude of 15G, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hz Rotor: Thermoplastic
frequency for 12 hours
Operating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 Vdc Phototransistor: Planar Silicon NPN
Supply Current: 30 mA maximum@5.0 Vdc Mechanical Shock: Test 1: 100G, 6 mS, half
sine, 12.3 ft/s; Test 2: 100G, 6 mS, sawtooth, Infrared Emitter: Gallium aluminum
Logic High: 3.0 Vdc minimum 9.7 ft/s arsenide
Logic Low: 1.0 Vdc maximum Relative Humidity: 90–95% at 40°C for 96 Flex Cable: 28 AWG, stranded/top coated wire,
Mechanical Life: 1,000,000 cycles minimum hours PVC coated on .050" centers (cabled version)
(One cycle is a rotation through all positions Header Pins: Brass, tin-plated
and a full return) Materials and Finishes Spacer: Hiloy 610
Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA for 5 Vdc Code Housing: Reinforced thermoplastic Shim: Stainless Steel
Power Consumption: 150mW maximum Shaft: Stainless Steel Backplate/Strain Relief: Stainless steel
Output: open collector phototransistor
Logic Rise and Fall: less than 30 mS max
Series
Style: HS = High Torque
Angle of Throw: 45 = 45° or 8 positions,30 = 30° or 12 positions,
22 = 22.5° or 16 positions
62HSXX-XX-XXXX
Termination: S = stripped cable, C = connector, P = pins
Cable Termination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated with
Amp P/N 215083-6. See Amp Mateability
Guide for mating connector details.
*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins. (Ex: 62HS22-H9-P)
Pushbutton Option: 0 = w/o pushbutton, 9 = 1100g
Rotational Torque: H = High Torque
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 62N
1/2'' Package, non-turn, Dedicated Shaft
FEATURES • Available in 12, 16, 24, and 32

• Non-turn Pushbutton to Ensure Detent Positions (Non-detent Also
Pushbutton Text and Orientation Available)
• Seperate Pushbutton Function • Choices of Cable Length and
• Low Cost Terminations
• Economical Size
• Optically Coupled for More than a APPLICATIONS
Million Cycles • Global Positioning/Driver
• Compatible with CMOS, TTL and Information Systems
HCMOS Logic • Medical Equipment
• Cockpit Controls
DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters) • Mixing Boards
Cable Version CONNECTOR STRIPPED CABLE
VERSION
Front View VERSION
DIM. "4.000".20
.100 (2,54)
STRIPPED
AND TINNED
GRAYHILL
654321

.030 OF SHOULDER. CONNECTOR IS AMP P/N 215083-6,
.050 (1,27) CENTERS
P/N 640443-6, .100 (2,54) CENTERS
Encoders
Top View Side View 28 AWG CABLE WIRES ON

.050 (1,27) CENTERS
.066.002 .219.003 .125.002 .250
(1,680,05) (5,60,1) (3,180,05) (6,35)
DIA.
.250
(6,35)
62NXX-XXXC
XXXX X-X
.250
(6,35)
.540
(13,72)
.390 .320
(9,91) (8,13)
.094.003 .250.002 .312 REF.
(2,40,08) (6,350,05) (7,9)
DIA.
.250 .375.015 .375.015
(6,35) (9,50,38) (9,50,38)
.152 .592.015
(3,86) (15,040,38)
.500
(12,7) .670.015
(17,020,38)
Front View
.470.020
(11,90,5)
GRAYHILL
654321
.620
(15,7)
.602 .267.015
(15,29) (6,80,38)
Top View .940.050
.301 (23,81,3)
(7,6) 3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD
.030 OF SHOULDER
.219.003
(5,60,1)
.100 Side View
(2,54)
TYP.
.125.002 .250
.066 .002 (3,180,05) (6,35)
(1,680,05) DIA.
.250
.522 (6,35)
(13,26)
XXXX X-X
.250
(6,35)
62NXX-P
.540
(13,72)
.450.010
(11,430,3)
.152 .250 .002 .312
.094.003 (6,350,05) (7,9)
(2,40,08) (3,86)
DIA.
.250 .375.015 .375 .015
(6,35) (9,50,38) (9,50,38)
.500 .592.015
(12,7) (15,040,38)
.670.015
(17,020,38)
Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerances are ±0.10 (0,25)
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SPECIFICATIONS
Pushbutton Switch Ratings
Rating: at 5 Vdc, 10 mA, resistive Operating Torque: Detent Spring: Stainless steel
Contact Resistance: less than 10 ohms (TTL Detent: 2.0 in-oz ±70% initially Printed Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4
or CMOS compatible) Non-Detent: less than 1.5 in-oz initially gold over nickel or palladium
Pushbutton Life: 3 million actuations Shaft Push Out Force: 45 lbs minimum Terminals: Brass, tin-plated
minimum Mounting Torque: 15 in-lbs maximum Mounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-plated
Voltage Breakdown: 250 Vac between Terminal Strength: 15 lbs cable pull-out force nut and stainless steel lockwasher supplied with
mutually insulated parts minimum each switch. Nut is 0.094 inches thick by 0.562
Contact Bounce: less than 4 mS at make and Operating Speed: 100 RPM maximum inches across flats
less than 10 mS at break Rotor: Thermoplastic
Actuation Force: 1000 ±300g
Pushbutton Travel: .010/.025 inch
Environmental Ratings Code Housing: Thermoplastic
Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°C Pushbutton Dome: Stainless steel
Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°C Dome Retaining Disk: Thermoplastic
Encoder Ratings
Vibration Resistance: Harmonic motion with Pushbutton Housing: Thermoplastic
Coding: 2-bit quadrature coded output
amplitude of 15G, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hz Phototransistor: Planar Silicon NPN
Operating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 Vdc
Supply Current: 30 mA maximum@5.0 Vdc frequency for 12 hours Infrared Emitter: Gallium aluminum arsenide
Logic Output Characterisitics: Mechanical Shock: Test 1: 100G, 6 mS, half Pushbutton Contact: Brass, nickel-plated
Logic High: 3.8 Vdc minimum sine, 12.3 ft/s; Test 2: 100G, 6 mS, sawtooth, 9.7 Flex Cable: 28 AWG, stranded/top coated wire,
Logic Low: 0.8 Vdc maximum ft/s PVC coated on .050 or .100" centers (cabled
Mechanical Life: 1,000,000 cycles minimum Relative Humidity: 90–95% at 40°C for 96 version)
(One cycle is a rotation through all positions hours Header Pins: Phospher bronze, tin-plated
and a full return) Spacer: Thermoplastic
Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA for 5 Vdc Materials and Finishes Endcap: Thermoplastic
Power Consumption: 150mW maximum Non-turn Pin: Stainless steel
Code Housing: Reinforced thermoplastic
Output: open collector phototransistor Backplate/Strain Relief: Stainless steel
Shafts: Aluminum

Logic Rise and Fall Times: less than 30 mS Lockwashers: Stainless steel
maximum Bushing: Zinc casting
Shaft Retaining Ring: Stainless steel Hex Nuts: Stainless steel
Studs: Stainless steel
Encoders
PIN #
POWER +5V 6
R*
OUTPUT A 5 Clockwise Rotation
HIGH
R* Position Output A Output B OUTPUT
OUTPUT B A LOW
4 1
2 • HIGH
N.O.
PUSH-
3 3 • • OUTPUT
B
BUTTON
SWITCH
4
• LOW
2
• Indicates logic high; blank indicates
logic low. Code repeats every 4 positions.
1 2 3 4 5 6
POSITION NUMBER
GROUND 1
Series and Style = 1/2" package, non-turn, dedicated shaft
Angle of Throw: Detent Non-detent
11 = 11.25° or 32 pos. 01 = 11.25° or 32 positions
62N22-040S 30 = 30° or 12 positions 00 = 30° or 12 positions
Termination: S = Stripped cable; .050" centers
SH = Stripped cable; .100" centers
C = Connector; .050" centers
CH = Connector; .100" centers
P = Pin; .100" centers
Cable Termination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector
P/N 215088-6. See Amp Mateability Guide for mating connector details.
*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins (Ex: 62N22-P)
These switches have Quadrature 2-bit code output and an optional shaft actuated pushbutton switch.
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 62HN
High Torque, Non-Turn
Concentric Shaft
FEATURES • Compatible with CMOS, TTL and

• High Rotational Torque Provides HCMOS Logic
Positive Tactile Feedback • Available in 8,12 and 16 Detent
ï Non-turn Pushbutton to Ensure Positions
Pushbutton Text and Orientation • Choice of Cable Length and
• Optically Coupled for More than a Terminations
Million Cycles
• Seperate Pushbutton Function APPLICATIONS
• Avionics
.219 ±.002 .236

Cable Version [ 5,56 ±0,05 ] .110 [ 5,99 ] CONNECTOR IS AMP
P/N 215083-8
[ 2,79 ] OR EQUIVALENT
.066 ±.002 .125 ±.002 .250 ±.002

[ 1,68 ±0,05 ] [ 3,18 ±0,05 ] [ 6,34 ±0,05 ]
Encoders
.490 .200
DIM. 4.000 ± .200
[ 12,45 ] [ 5,08 ] .094 ±.002 .250 DIM. 4.000 ± 5,08
[ 2,39 ±0,05 ] [ 6,35 ]
.250
[ 6,35 ]
.375
.152 ±.002 .740 [ 9,53 ] .691
[ 3,86 ±0,05 ] [ 18,8 ] [ 17,55 ]
.375
.500 .540 [ 9,53 ] .785
[ 12,7 ] [ 13,72 ] [ 19,94 ]
.312
.750 .250 [ 7,92 ]
[ 19,05 ] [ 6,35 ]
Stripped Version Pin Version

.335
.100 [ 8,51 ]
[ 2,54 ]
1.000 ±.015
4.000 ± .200 [ 25,4 ±0,38 ]
4.000 ± 5,08
Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerance is ±.010 (0,25).
CIRCUITRY
POWER 5 V 8
R*
OUTPUT A
DECK A 7
100 100
R*
OUTPUT B
6
DECK A
R*
NO FUNCTION 5
R*
NO FUNCTION 4
PUSHBUTTON 3
PUSHBUTTON 2
GROUND 1
*EXTERNAL 2.2k PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION
Encoder
Optical Encoders
Clockwise Rotation
HIGH
Position Output A Output B
OUTPUT
A 1
LOW
2 •
OUTPUT
HIGH
3 • •
B LOW 4 •
1 2 3 4 5 6
POSITION NUMBER • Indicates logic high; blank indicates
positions.
SPECIFICATIONS
Pushbutton Switch Ratings Shaft Push Out Force: 45 lbs minimum Terminals: Brass, tin-plated
Rating: at 5 Vdc, 10 mA, resistive Mounting Torque: 15 in-lbs maximum Mounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-plated
Contact Resistance: less than 10 ohms Terminal Strength: 15 lbs cable pull-out force nut and stainless steel lockwasher supplied
(TTL or CMOS compatible) minimum with each switch. Nut is 0.094 inches thick by
Pushbutton Life: 3 million actuations Operating Speed: 100 RPM maximum 0.562 inches across flats
minimum Rotor: Thermoplastic
Voltage Breakdown: 250 Vac between Environmental Ratings Pushbutton Dome: Stainless steel
mutually insulated parts Phototransistor: Planar Silicon NPN
Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°C
Contact Bounce: less than 4 mS at make Infrared Emitter: Gallium aluminum
and less than 10 mS at break
Vibration Resistance: Harmonic motion with arsenide
Actuation Force: 1100 ±300g

amplitude of 15G, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hz Flex Cable: 28 AWG, stranded/top coated wire,
frequency for 12 hours PVC coated on .050 centers (cabled version)
Encoder Ratings
Mechanical Shock: Test 1: 100G, 6 mS, half Header Pins: Brass, tin-plated
Encoders
sine, 12.3 ft/s; Test 2: 100G, 6 mS, sawtooth, Spacer: Hiloy 610
Supply Current: 30 mA maximum@5.0 Vdc 9.7 ft/s Shim: Stainless Steel
Logic Output Characterisitics: Relative Humidity: 90–95% at 40°C for 96 Endcap: Thermoplastic
Logic High: 3.0 Vdc minimum hours Non-turn Pin: Stainless steel
Logic Low: 1.0 Vdc maximum Backplate/Strain Relief: Stainless steel
Mechanical Life: 1,000,000 cycles minimum Materials and Finishes Lockwashers: Stainless steel
(One cycle is a rotation through all positions Code Housing: Reinforced thermoplastic Hex Nuts: Stainless steel
and a full return) Shafts: Stainless Steel Studs: Stainless steel
Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA for 5 Vdc
Bushing: Zinc casting
Power Consumption: 150mW maximum
Shaft Retaining Rings: Stainless steel
Logic Rise and Fall Times: less than 30 mS Detent Spring: Stainless steel
maximum Detent Ball: Stainless steel
Operating Torque: 5.0 in-oz +/- 1.5 in-oz Detent Section: Hiloy 610
initial Printed Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4
gold over nickel or palladium
Series
Style: HN = High Torque, Concentric, Non-Turn
62HNXX-XX-040C
Cable Termination: 040= 4.0in. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector
P/N 215083-6. See Amp Mateability Guide for mating
connector details. *Eliminate cable length if ordering
pins. (Ex: 62HN22-H9-P)
pushbutton
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 62C
Concentric Shaft
• Economical Size • Used to Set Radio Frequency, Drill
• Combined Functionality Depth, RPM, Menu Selection,
• Optically Coupled for More than a Parameter Selection for Patient
Million Cycles of Operations Monitoring Devices, etc.
• Compatible with CMOS, TTL, and
HCMOS Logic
• Available with 12, 16, 24, and 32
Detent Positions for Each Code
Section
Terminations
• Available in 3.3 Volt Input.
(Contact Grayhill for details)

Encoders
Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerance are:

Linear ± .025 .230 ± .050
(5,84 ± 1,27)
Diameter ± .010
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
G R AY H I L L
Angle ± 2.0°
Pin Version
3/8-32 UNEF-2A 4.0 ± .20

THREAD. TO BE (4.0 ± 5,08)
WITHIN .030 (0,76)
OF SHOULDER .100 (2,54)
.250 ± .002 STRIPPED
AND TINNED
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(6,35 ± 0,05)
G R AY H I L L
.125 ± .002
(3,18 ± 0,05)
28 AWG CABLE
.250 ± .005 .250 ± .005 WIRES ON
(6,35 ± 0,13) (6,35 ± 0,13) Cable Version
.050 (1,27)
CENTER
CL
.152 ± .005
.066 ± .005 (3,86 ± 0,13)
(1,68 ± 0,13)
.360 ± .010 .312 ± .005
(9,14 ± 0,25) .490 ± .010
.540 (12,45 ± 0,25) (7,92 ± 0,13)
± .010 .375 ± .015
62CXXXX-XX-XXXC
(13,72 (9,53 ± 0,38)

± 0,25)
XXXX X-X
CONNECTOR
CL IS AMP P/N
215083-8
.460 ± .010
(11,68 ± 0,25)
.040 (1.02)
.094 ± .004
.580 .250 ± .005 (2,39 ± 0,1)
(14,73) (6,35 ± 0,13) .933 (23,69) REF.
.375 ± .015
.219 ±.004 (9,53 ± 0,38)
(5,56 ± 0,1)
.250 ± .005
(6,35 ± 0,13)
.500 ±.010
(12,7 ± 0,25)
Encoder
Optical Encoders
CIRCUITRY, TRUTH TABLE AND WAVEFORM: Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code
PIN#
Clockwise Rotation
POWER +5V 8
R*
OUTPUT A 7
1
DECK A
R* 2 •
OUTPUT B
DECK A
6 3 • •
OUTPUT A
R*
5
4 •
DECK B
R* • logic
Indicates logic high; blank indicates
low. Code repeats every 4
OUTPUT B 4
DECK B positions.
N.O. 3 HIGH
PUSHBUTTON OUTPUT
SWITCH A LOW
DECK B
2
HIGH
OUTPUT
B LOW
GROUND 1
* External pull-up resistors required for operation (2.2kΩ) 1 2 3 4 5 6

POSITION NUMBER
SPECIFICATIONS
Pushbutton Switch Ratings Materials and Finishes

Rating: 5 Vdc, 10 mA, resistive Rotational Life: more than 1,000,000 cycles Bushing: Zinc casting
Contact Resistance: less than 10 ohms (TTL of operation (1 cycle = 360° rotation and Shaft: Aluminum
or CMOS compatible) return) Shaft Retaining Ring: Stainless steel
Encoders
Voltage Breakdown: 250 Vac between mutually Shaft Push Out Force: 45 lbs minimum Detent Spring: Stainless steel
insulated parts Mounting Torque: 15 in-lbs maximum Printed Circuit Board: NEMA grade FR-4
Contact Bounce: less than 4 mS at make, less Operating Speed: 100 RPM maximum Terminals: Brass, tin-plated
than 10 mS at break Axial Shaft Play: .010 maximum for each Mounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-plated
Actuation Life: 3,000,000 operations shaft nut and lockwasher supplied with each switch.
Actuation Force: 1000 ± 300 grams (Nut is 0.094 inches thick by 0.562 inches
Pushbutton Travel: .010 / .025 inch Environmental Ratings across flats)
Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°C Rotor: Thermoplastic
Encoder Ratings Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°C Code Housing: Reinforced thermoplastic
Coding: 2-bit quadrature coded output Relative Humidity: 90–95% at 40°C for 96 Pushbutton Dome: Stainless steel
Operating Voltage: 5 ± .25 Vdc hours Pushbutton Housing: Thermoplastic
Supply Current: 50 mA maximum at 5 Vdc Vibration Resistance: Harmonic motion with Pushbutton Contact: Brass, nickel-plated
Logic High: 3.8V minimum amplitude of 15g, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hz Dome Retaining Disk: Thermoplastic
Logic Low: 0.8V maximum frequency for 12 hours per MIL-STD-202, Strain Relief: Stainless steel
Logic Rise and Fall Times: less than 30 mS Method 204 Cable: 28 AWG, stranded/top coated wire,
Operating Torque: 2.0 in-oz ± 1.4 in-oz Shock Resistance: Test 1: Tested at 100g PVC coated on .050 centers
initially for 6 mS, half sine, 12.3 ft/s Test 2: 100g for (cable version only)
6 mS, sawtooth, 9.7 ft/s Header Pins: Phosphor bronze, tin-plated
Insulator: Glass-filled polyester
Spacer: Zinc casting
Series
Style: C = Concentric
Angle of Throw (Deck A): 11 = 11.25° or 32 positions,
15 = 15° or 24 positions, 22 = 22.5° or 16 positions, 30 = 30° or 12 Positions
Angle of Throw (Deck B): 11 = 11.25° or 32 positions,
15 = 15° or 24 positions, 18 = 18° or 20 positions,
22 = 22.5° or 16 positions, 30 = 30° or 12 Positions
62C2211- 02 - 040 C

Cable Termination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector
P/N 215083-6. See Amp Mateability Guide for mating connector details.
*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins. (Ex: 62C2211-02-P)
Pushbutton Option: 01 = w/o pushbutton
02 = with pushbutton
Custom custom shaft, pushbutton actuation force and termination options are available.
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 62H
High Torque, Concentric Shaft
FEATURES
• High Rotational Torque Provides • Available in 8,12 and 16 Detent
Positive Tactile Feedback Positions
• Optically Coupled for More than a • Choice of Cable Length and
Million Cycles Terminations
• Compatible with CMOS, TTL and APPLICATIONS
HCMOS Logic • Avionics
Cable Version .236
.219 ±.002 [ 5,99 ]
[ 5,56 ±0,05 ] .110 CONNECTOR IS AMP
[ 2,79 ] P/N 215083-8
OR EQUIVALENT
.125 ±.002 .250 ±.002 .401

[ 3,18 ±0,05 ] [ 6,34 ±0,05 ] [ 10,19 ]
.527
[ 13,39 ]
.066±.002 4.000 ± .200
.094 ±.002 .250 4.000 ± 5,08
Encoders
[ 1,68 ±0,05 ] [ 2,39 ±0,05 ] [ 6,35 ]

.200
[ 5,08 ] .250
[ 6,35 ]
.375
[ 9,53 ] .817
.375 [ 20,75 ]
.490 ±.002 .740 [ 9,53 ] .878
[ 12,45 ±0,05 ] [ 18,8] [ 22,3 ]
.540 .312
.500 [ 13,72 ] [ 7,92 ]
[ 12,7 ]
.250
.750 [ 6,35 ]
[ 19,05 ]
Stripped Version Pin Version
.335
.100
[ 8,51 ]
[ 2,54 ]
1.126±.015
4.000 ± .200 [ 28,6 ±0,38 ]
4.000 ± 5,08
Clockwise Rotation
HIGH
OUTPUT
A
1
LOW
2 •
OUTPUT
HIGH
3 • •
B LOW 4 •
1 2 3 4 5 6
positions.
Encoder
Optical Encoders
CIRCUITRY
POWER 5 V 8
OUTPUT A
R*
7
DECK A 100 100
R*
OUTPUT B
6
DECK A
R*
OUTPUT A
5
DECK B
R*
OUTPUT B
4
DECK B
PUSHBUTTON 3
PUSHBUTTON 2
GROUND 1
*EXTERNAL 2.2k PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Pushbutton Switch Ratings Operating Torque: 5.0 in-oz +/- 1.5 in-oz Shaft Retaining Rings: Stainless steel
Rating: at 5 Vdc, 10 mA, resistive initial Detent Spring: Stainless steel
Contact Resistance: less than 10 ohms Shaft Push Out Force: 45 lbs minimum Detent Ball: Stainless steel
(TTL or CMOS compatible) Mounting Torque: 15 in-lbs maximum Detent Section: Hiloy 610
Pushbutton Life: 3 million actuations Terminal Strength: 15 lbs cable pull-out force Printed Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4
minimum minimum gold over nickel or palladium

Voltage Breakdown: 250 Vac between Operating Speed: 100 RPM maximum Terminals: Brass, tin-plated
mutually insulated parts Mounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-plated
Contact Bounce: less than 4 mS at make
Encoders
Environmental Ratings nut and stainless steel lockwasher supplied
and less than 10 mS at break with each switch. Nut is 0.094 inches thick by
Actuation Force: 1100 ±300g Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°C
Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°C 0.562 inches across flats
Shaft Travel: .020±.010 inch
Vibration Resistance: Harmonic motion with Rotor: Thermoplastic
amplitude of 15G, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hz Pushbutton Dome: Stainless steel
Encoder Ratings
frequency for 12 hours Phototransistor: Planar Silicon NPN
Mechanical Shock: Test 1: 100G, 6 mS, half Infrared Emitter: Gallium aluminum
Supply Current: 50 mA maximum@5.0 Vdc sine, 12.3 ft/s; Test 2: 100G, 6 mS, sawtooth, arsenide
Logic Output Characterisitics: 9.7 ft/s Flex Cable: 28 AWG, stranded/top coated wire,
Logic High: 3.0 Vdc minimum Relative Humidity: 90–95% at 40°C for 96 PVC coated on .050 or .100" centers (cabled
Logic Low: 1.0 Vdc maximum hours version)
Mechanical Life: 1,000,000 cycles minimum Header Pins: Brass, tin-plated
(One cycle is a rotation through all positions Materials and Finishes Spacer: Hiloy 610
and a full return) Code Housing: Reinforced thermoplastic Shim: Stainless Steel
Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA for 5 Vdc Backplate/Strain Relief: Stainless steel
Shafts: Stainless Steel
Power Consumption: 150mW maximum Lockwashers: Stainless steel
Output: open collector phototransistor Bushing: Zinc casting
Pushbutton Actuator: Zytel 70G33L Hex Nuts: Stainless steel
Logic Rise and Fall Times: less than 30 mS Studs: Stainless steel
maximum
Series
Style: H = High Torque, Concentric
Angle of Throw (Deck A): 45 = 45° or 8 positions,30 = 30° or 12 positions,
Angle of Throw (Deck B): 45 = 45° or 8 positions, 30 = 30° or 12 positions,
62HXXXX-XX-040C
Cable Termination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector P/N 215083-8.
*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins. (Ex: 62H2222-H9-P)
pushbutton
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 62R
1/2'' Package, Redundant Circuitry
FEATURES
• Redundant Circuitry
HCMOS Logic
• Available in 12, 16, 24, and 32
Detent Positions
Terminations
• Ideal for Critical Applications
APPLICATIONS
• Cockpit Controls
• Medical Equipment

Encoders
.230±.050
(5,84±1,27)
GRAYHILL
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Pin Version
4.000±.20
(4.000±5,08)
3/8-32 UNEF-2A
THREAD.TO BE
WITHIN .030 (0,76)
OF SHOULDER
.100 (2,54)
STRIPPED
AND TINNED
GRAYHILL
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.250±.002
(6,35±0,05)
DIA. .250±.005
(6,35±0,13)
Cable Version 28 AWG CABLE
WIRES ON .050
(1,27) CENTER
.152±.005
(3,86±0,13)
.066±.005 .360±.010 .490±.010

(1,68±0,13) .312±.005
(9,14±0,25) (12,45±0,25) (7,92±0,13)
.540±.010
(13,72±0,25)
.815±.015
62RXXXX-XX-XXXC
(20,70±0,38)
XXXX X-X
CONNECTOR
IS AMP P/N
1-215083-0
.460±.010
(11,68±0,25)
.580±.010 .250±.005
(14,73±0,25) (6,35±0,13) .219±.004 .375±.015
(5,56±0,1) (9,53±0,38) .855±.020
(21,7±0,51)
.250±.005
(6,35±0,13)
.933(23,69)
REF.
.500±.010
(12,7±0,25)
.700±.010
(17,78±0,25)
Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerances are ±0.10 (0,25)
Encoder
Optical Encoders

Switch Schematic PIN #
Truth Table (CW Rotation)
DECK B POWER 5V 10 DECK A DECK B
POSITION OUTPUT "A" OUTPUT "B" OUTPUT "A" OUTPUT "B"
DECK A POWER 5V 9
1
R*
DECK A OUTPUT "A" 8 2
R* 3
DECK A OUTPUT "B" 7 4
R*
DECK B OUTPUT "A" 6 INDICATES LOGIC HIGH. BLANK INDICATES
R* LOGIC LOW. CODE REPEATS EVERY 4 POSITIONS
DECK B OUTPUT "B" 5
Wave Form (CW Rotation)
4 HIGH
PUSHBUTTON N.O. OUTPUT "A"
DECK A LOW
3 HIGH
OUTPUT "B"
DECK A GROUND 2 LOW
HIGH
OUTPUT "A"
DECK B GROUND 1 LOW
DECK B HIGH
OUTPUT "B"
* 2.2k EXTERNAL PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION LOW
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6
SPECIFICATIONS mS maximum Terminals: Brass, tin-plated

Pushbutton Switch Ratings Operating Torque: 3.5 ±1.4 in-oz initially Mounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-plated
Pushbutton Rating: 10 mA, 5 Vdc, resistive Shaft Push Out Force: 45 lbs minimum nut and stainless steel lockwasher supplied

Contact Resistance: less than 10 ohms (TTL Mounting Torque: 15 in-lbs max. with each switch. Nut is 0.094 inches thick by
or CMOS compatible) Terminal Strength: 15 lbs cable pull-out force 0.562 inches across flats
Pushbutton Life: 3 million actuations min. min. Rotor: Thermoplastic
Encoders
Contact Bounce: less than 4 mS at make Operating Speed: 100 RPM max. Code Housing: Thermoplastic
and less than 10 mS at break Pushbutton Dome: Stainless steel
Actuation Force: 1000 ±300 grams Environmental Ratings Dome Retaining Disk: Thermoplastic
Pushbutton Travel: .010/.025" Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°C Pushbutton Housing: Thermoplastic
Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°C Phototransistor: Planar Silicon NPN
Switch Ratings Vibration Resistance: Harmonic motion with Infrared Emitter: Gallium aluminum
Coding: 2-bit quadrature coded output amplitude of 15G's, within a varied 10 to 2000 arsenide
Operating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 Vdc Pushbutton Contact: Brass, nickel-plated
Hz frequency for 12 hours
Voltage Breakdown: 250 Vac between Flex Cable: 28 AWG stranded, halogen-free
mutually insulated parts Mechanical Shock: Test 1: 100g, 6 mS, half
sine, 12.3 ft/s; Test 2: 100g, 6 mS, sawtooth, 9.7 polyolefin insulation on .050" centers (cabled
Supply Current: 30 mA maximum@5.0 Vdc
(per deck) ft/s version)
Logic Output Characterisitics: Humidity: 90–95% at 40°C for 96 hours Header Pins: Phospher bronze, tin-plated
Logic High: 3.5 Vdc minimum Spacer: Zinc casting
Logic Low: 1.5 Vdc maximum Materials and Finishes Backplate/Strain Relief: Stainless steel
Mechanical Life: 1,000,000 cycles minimum Shaft: Aluminum Lockwasher(s): Stainless steel
(One cycle is a rotation through all positions Bushing: Zinc casting Hex Nuts: Stainless steel
and a full return) Shaft Retaining Ring: Stainless steel Studs: Stainless steel
Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA Detent Spring: Stainless steel
Power Consumption: 150mW max. (per OPTIONS
Printed Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4
deck) Contact Grayhill for custom terminations, shaft
Output: open collector phototransistor gold over nickel or palladium
and bushing configurations, and resolutions.
Optical Rise and Fall Times: less than 30
Control knobs are also available.
Series
Angle of Throw: 11 = 11.25° or 32 pos., 15 = 15° or 24 pos, 22 = 22.5° or 16 positions,
30 = 30° or 12 Positions
62R22-01-040S
Termination: .050" centers; S = Stripped cable, C = Connector, P = Pin

Cable Length: 040 = 4.0 inches. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector P/N 215083-8.
*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins. (Ex: 62R22-02-P)
Available from your local Component Grayhill Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 62HR
1/2'' Package, Redundant Circuitry
High Torque
• Redundant Circuitry • Cockpit Controls
• 1 Million Rotational Cycles • Medical Equipment
HCMOS Logic
• Available in 12, 16, 24, and 32
Detent Positions
Terminations
• Ideal for Critical Applications

Encoders
SERIES 62HR WITH .050 CENTER RIBBON CABLE SERIES 62HR WITH .050 CENTER TERMINAL PINS
.540 .540
(13,72) (13,72)
.250 .250
(6,35) (6,35)
.066±.002 .066±.002
.152±.002 (1,68±0,05) .152±.002 (1,68±0,05)
(3,86±0,05) (3,86±0,05)
.375 .375
(9,53) (9,53)
.500 .750 .500 .750
(12,70) (19,05) (12,70) (19,05)
.250 .250
(6,35) (6,35)
.490 .490
(12,45) (12,45)
.250±.002 .250±.005 .250±.002 .250±.005

(6,35±0,05) (6,35±0,13) .219±.003 (6,35±0,05) (6,35±0,13) .219±.003
(5,56±0,08) (5,56±0,08)
3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD 3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD
THREADS TO BE WITHIN THREADS TO BE WITHIN
.375±.015 .030 (0,76) OF SHOULDER. .375±.015 .030 (0,76) OF SHOULDER.
(9,52±0,38) (9,52±0,38)
.110 .110
(2,79) (2,79)
.312 .312
(7,92) (7,92)
.751±.015 .751±.015
(19,08±0,38) (19,08±0,38)
.236 .236 1.075±.020
.845±.015 (5,99) .845±.015 (5,99) (27,31±0,50)
(21,46±0,38) (21,46±0,38)
28 AWG CABLE PINS ARE
WIRES ON .016 (0,41)
.050 (1,27) SQUARE
CENTERS
.440 REF. DIM "XXX" .460
(11,18) ±.20 (11,68)
CONNECTOR IS (±5,1)
AMP P/N 1-215083-0 .230±.025
OR EQUIVALENT. (5,84±0,64)
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, STANDARD TOLERANCE IS ±.010 (0,25). UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, STANDARD TOLERANCE IS ±.010 (0,25).
Encoder
Optical Encoders

Switch Schematic PIN #
Truth Table (CW Rotation)
DECK B POWER 5V 10 DECK A DECK B
POSITION OUTPUT "A" OUTPUT "B" OUTPUT "A" OUTPUT "B"
DECK A POWER 5V 9
1
R*
DECK A OUTPUT "A" 8 2
R* 3
DECK A OUTPUT "B" 7 4
R*
DECK B OUTPUT "A" 6 INDICATES LOGIC HIGH. BLANK INDICATES
R* LOGIC LOW. CODE REPEATS EVERY 4 POSITIONS
DECK B OUTPUT "B" 5
Wave Form (CW Rotation)
4 HIGH
PUSHBUTTON N.O. OUTPUT "A"
DECK A LOW
3 HIGH
OUTPUT "B"
DECK A GROUND 2 LOW
HIGH
OUTPUT "A"
DECK B GROUND 1 LOW
DECK B HIGH
OUTPUT "B"
* 2.2k EXTERNAL PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION LOW
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6
SPECIFICATIONS
Pushbutton Switch Ratings Operating Torque: 5.0 in-oz +/- 1.5 in-oz Bushing: Zinc casting
Rating: at 5 Vdc, 10 mA, resistive initial Shaft Retaining Ring: Stainless steel
Contact Resistance: less than 10 ohms Shaft Push Out Force: 45 lbs minimum Detent Spring: Stainless steel

(TTL or CMOS compatible) Mounting Torque: 15 in-lbs maximum Detent Ball: Stainless steel
Pushbutton Life: 3 million actuations Terminal Strength: 15 lbs cable pull-out force Detent Section: Hiloy 610
Encoders
minimum minimum Printed Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4
Voltage Breakdown: 250 Vac between Operating Speed: 100 RPM maximum gold over nickel or palladium
mutually insulated parts Terminals: Brass, tin-plated
Contact Bounce: less than 4 mS at make Environmental Ratings Mounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-plated
and less than 10 mS at break Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°C nut and stainless steel lockwasher supplied
Actuation Force: 1100 ±300g with each switch. Nut is 0.094 inches thick by
Vibration Resistance: Harmonic motion with 0.562 inches across flats
Encoder Ratings amplitude of 15G, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hz Rotor: Thermoplastic
Operating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 Vdc Phototransistor: Planar Silicon NPN
Supply Current: 30 mA maximum@5.0 Vdc Mechanical Shock: Test 1: 100G, 6 mS, half
sine, 12.3 ft/s; Test 2: 100G, 6 mS, sawtooth, Infrared Emitter: Gallium aluminum
Logic High: 3.0 Vdc minimum 9.7 ft/s arsenide
Logic Low: 1.0 Vdc maximum Relative Humidity: 90–95% at 40°C for 96 Flex Cable: 28 AWG, stranded/top coated wire,
Mechanical Life: 1,000,000 cycles minimum hours PVC coated on .050" centers (cabled version)
(One cycle is a rotation through all positions Header Pins: Brass, tin-plated
and a full return) Materials and Finishes Spacer: Hiloy 610
Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA for 5 Vdc Code Housing: Reinforced thermoplastic Shim: Stainless Steel
Power Consumption: 150mW maximum Shaft: Stainless Steel Backplate/Strain Relief: Stainless steel
Logic Rise and Fall: less than 30 mS
maximum
Series
Style: HR = High Torque, Redundant
62HRXX-XX-020X
Cable Length: 020 = 2.0 inches. Cable is terminated with Amp
Connector P/N 1-215083-0. See Amp Mateability Guide for mating
connector details. *Eliminate cable length if ordering
pins. (Ex: 62HR22-H9-P)
pushbutton
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 62F
1/2'' Package, Lighted Shaft
• Integrated Self-Lighting System • Global Positioning/Driver
for Knob Illumination Information Systems
• 1 Million Rotational Cycles • Medical Equipment
• 1/2" Package • Cockpit Controls
• Compatible with CMOS, TTL and • Mixing Boards
HCMOS Logic
Terminations
• Other Customized Solutions
Available
Pin Version
.066 ± .002 .219 ± .003 .010 (0,25)/
.070 .236
(1,68 ± 0,05) (5,56 ± 0,08) .025 (0,64)
(1,78) .312 (7,92) (5,99)
DIA PUSH BUTTON
.250 TRAVEL
(6,35)
.390
GRAYHILL
654321
XXXX X-X
(9,91)
62FXX-XX-P
.540
(13,72)
Encoders
.360
.152 (9,14)
± .002 REF.
.250 (6,35) .250 3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD
(3,86 .375
.250 (6,35) ± 0,05) ± .002 THREADS TO BE WITHIN
(6,35 ± .015 .030 (0,76) OF SHOULDER
(9,53 .525 ± .015
.500 ± 0,05)
± 25,42) (13,34 ± 0,38)
(12,7) DIA.
.448
(11,4)
.293
.490 (7,4)
(12,45) REF
62FXX-XX-P-L
XXXX X-X
GRAYHILL
With
87654321
on-board
lighting
system
.460
.581±.010 (11,68)
(14,8±0,3) .657±.015 REF .087(2,21)
(16,7±0,4)
Cable Version
.070 .066 ± .002 .219 ± .003
(5,56 ± 0,08) 4.00 ± .20 (.040 ± 5,08)
(1,78) (1,68 ± 0,05) .312 (7,92)
DIA
.250
(6,35)
62FXX-01-XXXC
.390
GRAYHILL
(9,91)
6 5 4 3 2 1
XXXX X-X
.540
(13,72 .320
(8,13)
.152 .250 REF
.250 ± .002 .010 (0,25)/
± .005
(6,35) (3,86 .375 .510 ± .015 .025 (0,64) 3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD 28 AWG CONNECTOR .100
(6,35 ± .015 (12,95 ± 0,38) (2,54)
.250 (6,35) ± 0,05) ± 0,13) PUSH- THREADS TO BE WITHIN CABLE IS AMP
STRIP-
(9,52 .525 ± .015 BUTTON .030 (0,76) OF SHOULDER WIRES ON P/N 215083-6 PED
.500 ± 0,38) (13,34 ± 0,38) TRAVEL .050 (1,27)
(12,7) CENTERS AND
.391 TINNED
.500 (10,0)
(12,7) REF
.490
62FXX-XX-XXXC-L
With (12,45)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
XXXX X-X
on-board
GRAYHILL
lighting
system
.581±.010 .657±.015
(14,8±0,3) (16,7±0,4) Connector Stripped
Version Version
Encoder
Optical Encoders

PIN #s
POWER +5 V 8
R*
OUTPUT A 7
R*
OUTPUT B Clockwise Rotation
6 HIGH
OUTPUT Position Output A Output B
POWER +5 V 5 A LOW 1
(LED) 150
5%
4 HIGH
2 •
GROUND OUTPUT 3 • •
B
NORMALLY OPEN 3 LOW 4 •
PUSHBUTTON
SWITCH 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 • Indicates logic high; blank indicates
POSITION NUMBER
GROUND 1
* EXTERNAL PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION (2.2k).
** Circuit shown with on-board lighting system. Versions without on-board lighting **
system do not have LED power connections. Refer to standard 62A series for circuitry.
SPECIFICATIONS Operating Torque: Printed Circuit Boards: NEMA grade FR-4

Pushbutton Switch Ratings Detent: 2.0 ±1.4 in-oz initially gold over nickel or palladium
Rating: 5 Vdc, 10 mA, resistive Non-detent: less than 1.5 in-oz initially Terminals: Brass, tin-plated
Contact Resistance: less than 10 ohms Shaft Push Out Force: 45 lbs minimum Mounting Hardware: One brass, nickel-plated
(TTL or CMOS compatible) Mounting Torque: 15 in-lbs maximum nut and stainless steel lockwasher supplied
Pushbutton Life: 3 million actuations Terminal Strength: 15 lbs cable pull-out force with each switch. Nut is 0.094 inches thick by
minimum minimum 0.562 inches across flats

Contact Bounce: less than 4 mS at make Operating Speed: 100 RPM maximum Rotor: Thermoplastic
and less than 10 mS at break Axial Shaft Play: .010 maximum Code Housing: Thermoplastic
Actuation Force: 500 ±300 grams
Pushbutton Dome: Stainless steel
Encoders
Pushbutton Travel: .010/.025 inch Environmental Ratings Dome Retaining Disk: Thermoplastic
Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°C Pushbutton Housing: Thermoplastic
Switch Ratings Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°C
Coding: 2-bit quadrature coded output Phototransistor: Planar Silicon NPN
Relative Humidity: 90–95% at 40°C for 96 Pushbutton Contact: Brass, nickel-plated
Operating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 Vdc hours
Voltage Breakdown: 250 Vac between Flex Cable: 28 AWG, stranded/top coated wire,
Vibration Resistance: Harmonic motion with PVC coated on .050 or .100" centers (cabled
amplitude of 15G's, within a varied 10 to 2000 version)
Supply Current: 30 mA maximum
Logic Output Characterisitics: Hz frequency for 12 hours per MIL-STD-202, Header Pins: Phospher bronze, tin-plated
Logic High: 3.8 Vdc minimum Method 204 Spacer: ABS
Logic Low: 0.8 Vdc maximum Mechanical Shock: Test 1: 100G for 6 mS, half Backplate/Strain Relief: Stainless steel
Rotational Life: 1,000,000 cycles minimum sine, 12.3 ft/s; Test 2: 100G for 6 mS, sawtooth, Lockwasher: Stainless steel
(One cycle is a rotation through all positions 9.7 ft/s Light Pipe: Thermoplastic
and a full return) LED Housing: Thermoplastic
Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA Materials and Finishes
Power Consumption: 150mW maximum Code Housing: Reinforced thermoplastic
Optical Rise and Fall Times: less than 30 mS
OPTIONS
Shaft: Aluminum Contact Grayhill for custom terminations, shaft
maximum
Bushing: Zinc casting and bushing configurations, and resolutions.
Shaft Retaining Ring: Stainless steel Control knobs are also available.
Detent Spring: Stainless steel
Series
Angle of Throw: Detent Non-detent
11 = 11.25° or 32 pos. 01 = 11.25° or 32 positions
18 = 18° or 20 pos. 08 = 18° or 20 positions
62F22-01-040S-L
LED: blank = no LED, L = supplied with LED

Termination: S = Stripped cable; S-L = Stripped cable, LED;
C = Connector; C-L = Connector, LED; P = Pin; P-L = Pin, LED
Cable Termination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated with Amp P/N 215083-6.
See Amp Mateability guide for mating connector details.
*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins. (Ex: 62A22-02-P)
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 62M
Magnetic Detent
FEATURES Applications
• Ultra Smooth Magnetic Detent • Medical
• 10 Million Rotational Cycles, • Audio
Ten Times the Life of a Mechanical
• Instrumentation
Detent System
• Optional Integrated Pushbutton
• Available in 24 Positions
• Choice of Cable Lengths

Pinned Cable
Version Version Stripped Version
Ø 1.100
[ 27,94 ]
.315 ±.015 .236 ±.004

[ 8±0,38 ] [ 5,99 ±0,1 ]
.570 .255 Ø .249 ±.001
[ 6,48 ] .217 ±.002
[ 14,48 ] [ 5,51 ±0,05 ] [ 6,32 ±0,02 ]
Encoders
3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREADS
1.034 ±.015
[ 26,26 ±0,38 ] .686
CONNECTOR IS
[ 17,42 ]
AMP P/N 640442-6
OR EQUIVALENT 4.000 ±.20
.375
[ 9,53 ] .720 ±.015
[ 18,29 ±0,38 ]
4.000 ±.20
.100
[ 2,54 ]
*TOLERANCES ±.010 U.O.S.
SWITCH SCHEMATIC
POWER (5V) 6
R* 200
OUTPUT A 5
R*
OUTPUT B 4
PUSHBUTTON 3
PUSHBUTTON 2
GROUND 1
*EXTERNAL 2.2k PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION.
Encoder
Optical Encoders
Clockwise Rotation
HIGH
OUTPUT
A LOW
1
OUTPUT
HIGH 2 •
B LOW
3 • •
4 •
1 2 3 4 5 6
• Indicates logic high; blank indicates logic
POSITION NUMBER
low. Code repeats every 4 positions.
SPECIFICATIONS
Environmental Specifications Tolerances: H=1.70 ± 1.00 in-oz, M=1.25 ± Through Bolts: 305 Stainless Steel
Operating Temperature Range: -400 C to 850 C 0.75 in-oz, L=0.75 ± 0.5 in-oz Through Bolts Nuts: Stainless Steel
Storage Temperature Range: -550 C to 1000 C Mounting Torque: 15 in-oz maximum Spacer Washer: Brass
Humidity: 96 hours at 90-95% humidity Shaft Pull-Out Force: 45 lbs minimum Snap Dome: Stainless Steel
at 400 C Terminal Strength: 15 lbs minimum terminal Printed Circuit Boards: Nema Grade FR4,
Mechanical Vibration: Harmonic motion with pull-out force for cable or header termination Double Clad with Copper, Plated with Gold
amplitude of 15 g, within a varied frequency of Solderability: 95% free of pin holes and over Nickel
10 to 2000 Hz voids Infrared Light Emitting Diode Chips:

Mechanical Shock: Gallium Aluminum Arsenide
Test 1: 100 g for 6 ms half-sine wave with a Pushbutton Electrical and Silicon Phototransistor Chips: Gold and
Encoders
velocity change of 12.3 ft/sec Mechanical Specifications Aluminum Alloys
Test 2: 100 g for 6 ms sawtooth wave with a Rating: 10 mA at 5 Vdc Resistor: Metal Oxide on Ceramic Substrate
velocity change of 9.7 ft/sec Contact Resistance: <10 ohms Solder Pins: Brass, Plated with Tin
Life: 3 million actuations minimum Code Rotor: Acetal (Delrin 100)
Rotary Electrical and Contact Bounce: <4 ms make,<10 ms Code Housing: Polyamide Polymer (Nylon
Mechanical Specifications break 6/10 Alloy)
Operating Voltage: 5.00±.25 Vdc Actuation Force: 2=200±75 grams, Backplate Strain Relief: Hiloy-610
Supply Current: 30 mA maximum at 5 Vdc 3=300±90 grams, 4=510±150 grams Cable: Copper Standard with Topcoat in
Output: Open collector phototransistor, Shaft Travel: .25 ± .010 inches PVC Insulation (Cabled Versions Only)
external pull-up resistors are required Connector: PA4.6 with Tin Plated Copper
Output Code: Two-bit quadrature, channel A Materials and Finishes Alloy (Cable/Connector Versions)
leads channel B by 900 electrically during Bushing: Zinc Diecast, Cadmium Plated per Label: TT406 Thermal Transfer Cast Film
clockwise rotation of the shaft QQP-416, Class II, Type II Solder: Sn/Ag/Cu, Lead Free, No Clean
Logic Output Characteristics: Insert Molded into 25% Glass Reinforced Mounting Hex Nut: Tin/Zinc Over 1/2 Hard
Logic high signal shall be no less Nylon Zytel FR-50 Brass
than 3.0 Vdc Shaft: NdFeB XE-3594 over Grilamid Lockwasher: 8-18 Stainless Steel,
Logic low signal shall be no greater LV23H Passivate Finish
than 1.0 Vdc Stator: Powdered Metal per F-0000-20 Pin Header: Hi-Temp Glass Filled Thermo-
Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA plastic UL94V-0, Phosphor Bronze (Pinned
Power Consumption: 150 mW maximum Versions Only)
Mechanical Life: 10 million rotational cycles of
operation. One cycle is a rotation through all
positions and a full return
Series
Angle of Throw: 15 = 150 for code change and 24 detent positions
Rotational Torque: H=High Torque (1.70 in-oz), M=Medium Torque (1.25 in-oz),
L=Low Torque (0.75 in-oz)
Pushbutton Option: 0=Non-Pushbutton, 2 = 200 grams, 3 = 300 grams, 4 =
62MXX-XX-040X 510 grams
Termination: CH =.100 Cable with connector, SH = Cable with Stripped-End, PH = Pin Header
Cable Termination: 040 = 4.0in. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector P/N 215083-6. See Amp
Mateability Guide for mating connector details.
*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins (Ex: 62M22-42-PH)
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 62B
Push-Pull, High Torque
FEATURES
• Multiple Switching Functions Available • Pin, Cable and Connector with Cable
in One Compact Device Termination Options
• Push and Pull Travel Options • Custom Modifications Available
• Pull Shaft Resists Accidental
Actuation APPLICATIONS
• High Rotational Torque for Positive • Use for Menu Scrolling or
Detent Feel and Superior Tactile • Function Selection
Feedback • Avionics
• Long Life, High Reliability • Industrial
• CMOS, HCMOS, and TTL Compatible • Medical
Stripped Version
.430 SHAFT-DETENT POSITION CHART

(10,92) .350
(8,89) # POS DIM "A"
(.050 SPC X 7)
DIM "A" 16 11.25

Pinned Version Connector SEE CHART 32 5.625
Version
Encoders
.219.004
(5,560,1)
*SHAFT SHOWN IN A DETENT POSITION
Ø.687
(17,45) .400 .500
(12,7) Ø .250.001)
(10,16) (6,350,02)
.312
.707 (7,92) 3/8-32 UNEF-2A
(17,96) THREAD
.395.015 .250.004
1.183±.015 (10,030,38) (6,350,1)
(30,05±0,38)
4.000±.20 1.045
CONNECTOR IS (26,54)
AMP P/N 215083-8
OR EQUIVALENT 1.080.015
(27,430,38)
.335
(8,51)
.110
(2,79)
.100 XXX.20
(2,54) SEE ORDERING INFO
*TOLERANCES.010 U.O.S.
SWITCH SCHEMATIC, WAVEFORM, AND TRUTH TABLE

R
OUTPUT A 7
R*
OUTPUT B 6
PULLBUTTON 5
PULLBUTTON 4
PUSHBUTTON 3
PUSHBUTTON 2
GROUND 1
*EXTERNAL 2.2k PULL-UP RESISTANCE REQUIRED FOR OPERATION.
Encoder
Optical Encoders
WAVEFORM AND TRUTH TABLE Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code
Clockwise Rotation
HIGH
OUTPUT "A"
LOW 1
HIGH
2 •
OUTPUT "B" 3 • •
LOW
1 2 3 4 5 6
4 •
logic low.
Code repeats every 4 positions.
SPECIFICATIONS
Environmental Specifications Shaft Push-Out Force: 45 lbs minimum Infrared Light Emitting Diode Chips:
Operating Temperature Range: -400 C to 850 Shaft Pull-Out Force: 20 lbs minimum Gallium Aluminum Arsenide
C Terminal Strength: 15 lbs minimum Silicon Phototransistor Chips: Gold and
Storage Temperature Range: -550 C to 1000 C terminal pull-out force for cable or header Aluminum Alloys
Humidity: 96 hours at 90-95% humidity termination Resistor: Metal Oxide on Ceramic Substrate
at 400 C Solderability: 95% free of pin holes and Solder Pins: Brass, Plated with Tin
Mechanical Vibration: Harmonic motion voids Code Rotor: Delrin 100
with amplitude of 15 g, within a varied Code Housing: Hiloy-610
frequency of 10 to 2000 Hz Pull-Button/Push-Button Electrical Pull Dome Retainer: Ryton R-4
Mechanical Shock: and Mechanical Specifications Pull Actuator: Polyurethane, Isoplast 101
Test 1: 100 g for 6 ms half-sine wave with a Rating: 10 mA at 5 Vdc LGF40 Blk
Cover: Ryton R-4

velocity change of 12.3 ft/sec Contact Resistance: <10 ohms
Test 2: 100 g for 6 ms sawtooth wave with a Life: 3 million actuations minimum Cable: Copper Standard with Topcoat in
velocity change of 9.7 ft/sec Contact Bounce: <4 ms make,<10 ms PVC Insulation (Cabled Versions Only)
Encoders
break Connector: PA4.6 with Tin over Nickel
Rotary Electrical and Actuation Force: 1700±450 g for both push Plated Phosphor Bronze (Cable/Connector
Mechanical Specifications and pull-button Versions)
Shaft Travel: .030±.010 standard travel. Label: TT406 Thermal Transfer Cast Film
Operating Voltage: 5.00±.25 Vdc
.050±.010 long travel Solder: Sn/Ag/Cu, lead-free, no clean
Supply Current: 30 mA maximum at 5 Vdc
Lubricating Grease: Nye Nyogel 774L
Output: Open collector phototransistor,
Mounting Hex Nut: Tin/Zinc Over 1/2 Hard
external pull-up resistors are required Materials and Finishes
Brass
Output Code: Two-bit quadrature, channel A Bushing: Zinc Diecast, Cadmium Plated per
Lockwasher: 8-18 Stainless Steel,
leads channel B by 900 electrically during QQP-416, Class II, Type II
Passivate Finish
clockwise rotation of the shaft Shaft: Aluminum
Pin Header: Hi-Temp Glass Filled Thermo-
Logic Output Characteristics: Detent Cover: Powered Metal per
plastic UL94V-0, Phosphor Bronze (Pinned
Logic high signal shall be no less SS-316N1-25
Versions Only)
than 3.0 Vdc Through Bolts: 305 Stainless Steel
Logic low signal shall be no greater Through Bolts Nuts: 305 Stainless Steel
than 1.0 Vdc Shaft Travel Springs: Carbon Steel,
Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA Oil Dip Finish
Power Consumption: 150 mW maximum Detent Ball: Stainless Steel
Mechanical Life: 1 million rotational cycles of Detent Spring: Tinned Music Wire
operation. One cycle is a rotation through all Spacer/Push Dome Retainer: Ryton R-4
positions and a full return Push Actuator: Zytel 70G33L
Average Rotational Torque: 6.0±1.5 in-oz Snap Dome: Stainless Steel
initially. Torque shall be within 50% of initial Printed Circuit Boards: Nema Grade FR4,
value throughout life Double Clad with Copper, Plated with Gold
Mounting Torque: 15 in-oz maximum over Nickel
Series
Angle of Throw: 22 = 22.50 For Code Change and 16 Detent Positions.
11 = 11.250 For Code Change and 32 Detent Positions.
Push/Pull-Button Travel: S = Standard Travel (.030" Both Directions). L = Long Travel (.050" Both Directions)
Push/Pull Option: P = Pull-Button Only. PP = Push and Pull-Button
Termination: C = .050" Pitch Ribbon Cable with Connector
62BXX-XXX-040X S = .050" Pitch Ribbon Cable with Stripped End
P = .050" Pitch Pin Header
*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins (Ex: 62B22-SP-P)
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 62T
Thumbwheel
• Sealed against dust and particles • Scroll & select equipment in industrial
• Custom bezels that will blend with HMI grips and non-automotive transportation
and control panels applications
• Optional integrated pushbutton with over 3
million actuations
• MIL-STD-202 and MIL-STD-810F Compliant
• Standard panel seal
Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerances are:

Linear ± .025
Diameter ± .010
Angle ± 2.0 0
1.758
[ 44,65 ]
Encoders
Ø .200 ± .005 1.500 ± .005 .327

[ 5,0 ] [ 38,1] [ 8,31] .780
C-BORE [ 19,81]
.265
X2
.020
[ 0,51 ]
Ø.950 CLOCKWISE ROTATION Ø.128 ± .002

[ 24,13] .485 [ 3,25 ] .114 ±.015
[ 12,32 ] THRU HOLE [ 2,9 ]
.830
[ 21,08 ] X2
.125
[ 3,18 ]
OF
WHEEL .020 .515 .650
[ 0,51 ] [ 13,08 ] [ 16,51 ]
4.00 ±.25
.640
AMP CONNECTOR [ 16,26 ]
PN 7-215083-6
.970
[ 24,64 ]
R.250
[ 6,35 ]
Encoder
Optical Encoders
90˚± 45˚
+5Vdc 1
R*
OUTPUT "A" 2 HIGH (3.8-5V) POSITION OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
R* OUTPUT A
OUTPUT "B" 3 LOW (0-.8V) #1
#2
GROUND 4
HIGH (3.8-5V) #3
PUSHBUTTON 5 OUTPUT B
N.O., MOMENTARY #4
LOW (0-.8V)
PUSHBUTTON SWITCH
PUSHBUTTON 6
POS POS POS POS POS POS Indicates logic high; blank indicates logic low.
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 Code repeats every 4 positions.
R* - TWO 2.2K RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION.
SPECIFICATIONS Rotational Torque. 1 cycle is a rotation Detent Balls: Nickel plated stainless steel
Environmental Specifications through all positions and a full return. PC Boards: NEMA grade FR4. Double clad

Average Rotational Torque: with copper plated
MIL-STD-810F Qualified
M: 2.2±.75 in-oz, L: 1.2±0.5 in-oz, N: <0.50 Plated with gold over nickel
Operating Temperature Range: -400 C to 850 C
in-oz. Initially torque shall be within 75% of Pushbutton board is tin plating over copper
Encoders
Storage Temperature Range: -550 C to 1000 C
initial value throughout life. LED: Gallium Aluminum Arsenide
Humidity: 96 hours at 90-95% humidity
Phototransistor: Gold and Aluminum
at 400 C
Pushbutton Electrical and Alloys
Mechanical Vibration: Harmonic motion
Code Section Housing: Reinforced plastic
with amplitude of 15g, within a varied Mechanical Specifications
Detent Housing: Thermoplastic
frequency of 10 to 2000 Hz Rating: 10mA @ 5 Vdc
Code Rotor: Delrin 100 plastic
Mechanical Shock: Contact Resistance: <10W
Dome: Stainless steel
Test 1: 100g for 6 ms half-sine wave with a Life: 3 million actuations minimum
Dome retainer: Delrin 100 plastic
velocity change of 12.3 ft/sec Contact Bounce: <4 ms make, <10ms
Slide Rods: Stainless steel
Test 2: 100g for 6 ms sawtooth wave with a break
Splining Key: Stainless steel
velocity change of 9.7 ft/sec Actuation Force: N – None, 7–700g,
Actuator: Reinforced thermoplastic
10 – 1000g.
Screws: Aluminum or Stainless
Rotary and Mechanical Specifications Thumbwheel Travel: .060 ± .015 in
Wiper Plate: Copper
Operating Voltage: 5.00±0.25 Vdc Materials and Finishes Solder: 63/67 tin-lead, no clean - low
Supply Current: 25mA Max. Face Plate: Plastic
Output: Open collector phototransistor, residue flux
Housing: Nylon 6/6
external pull up resistors are required Side Plate: Reinforced thermoplastic
Output Code: Two-bit quadrature, channel a Wiper: Silicone rubber with adhesive
leads channel B by 90° electrically during Gasket: Silicone rubber with adhesive
clockwise rotation of the thumbwheel Wheel: Plastic
Logic high shall be no less than 3.8 Vdc Shaft: Aluminum
Logic low shall be no greater than 0.8 Vdc Slide Springs: Music wire
Power Consumption: 125 mW Max. Detent Spring: Music wire
Mechanical Life: 1,000,000 cycles of
operation for Low and Non-Rotational
Torque. 500,000 cycles of operation for
Medium
Series
Angle of Throw: 22 = 22.5° for code change and 16 detent positions
Rotational Torque: N = Non-Detent, L=Low Torque, M=Medium Torque
Pushbutton Option: 0=No Pushbutton, 7=700 grams, 10=1000 grams
62T22-XX-040C Termination: C = .050 Center ribbon Cable with connector

Cable Termination: 040=4.0 inches. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector P/N 7-215083-6.
See Amp Mateability Guide for Mating Connector details.
Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor. For pricing an discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 61L
Full Quadrature Cycle Per Detent
• .650 sq. inch package size • Medical Devices
• Optically coupled for 1 million • Test and Measurement
rotational cycles Equipment
• Optional integrated pushbutton • Other Scroll and Select
• Detented and non-detented Applications
versions available
• Available in 24 positions

Linear ± .025
.328 ±.005 Diameter ± .010

Angle ± 2.0 0
.164 [8,33]
[4,17]
Encoders
.066±.002
[1,68±0,05]
.650
[16,51]
SQUARE
.325
[8,26] .152±.002
[3,86]
.325
[8,26] .733
[18,62]
∅.250 ±.002 45˚ X .025

.219 ±.003 [0,64]
[6,35] [5,56]
.250
[6,35] 3/8 UNEF-2A
.360
[9,14] THREAD
.735 ±.015
[18,67]
TERMINAL #1
.518 ±.015
[13,16 ]
.590 ±.015
[14,99 ]
AMP CONNECTOR 4.00 ± .20

7-215083-6
Encoder
Optical Encoders
CIRCUITRY, WAVEFORM AND TRUTH TABLE
DETENT 1 DETENT 2
Indicates logic high; blank indicates logic low.

Code repeats every four cycles.
RANGE OF DETENT
REST POSITION
SPECIFICATIONS
Environmental Specifications Average Rotational Torque: H= 6.0 ± 2.6 in- Detent: Polyamide Polymer, Hiloy 610
Operating Temperature Range: -400 C to 850 C oz, M= 2.7 ± 1.8 in-oz, L= 1.4 ± 0.8 in-oz, N= Rotor Hub: Polyamide Polymer, Hiloy 610
Storage Temperature Range: -550 C to 1000 C <0.50 in-oz. Torque shall be within 50% of Code Rotor: Stainless Steel
Humidity: 96 hours at 90-95% humidity inital value throughout life. Printed Circuit Boards: Nema Grade FR4,
at 400 C Mounting Torque: 15 in-oz maximum Double Clad with Copper, Plated with Gold over
Mechanical Vibration: Harmonic motion with Shaft Push-Out Force: 45 lbs minimum Nickel
amplitude of 15g, within a varied frequency of Shaft Pull-Out Force: 45 lbs minimum Infrared Light Emitting Diode Chips:

10 to 2000 Hz Terminal Strength: 15 lbs minimum terminal Gallium Aluminum Arsenide
Mechanical Shock: pull-out force for cable or header termination Silicon Phototransistor Chips: Gold and
Encoders
Test 1: 100g for 6 ms half-sine wave with a Solderability: 95% free of pinholes and Aluminum Alloys
velocity change of 12.3 ft/sec voids Resistor: Metal Oxide on Ceramic Substrate
Test 2: 100g for 6 ms sawtooth wave with a Solder Pins: Brass, Plated with Tin
velocity change of 9.7 ft/sec Pushbutton Electrical and Tact Switch: Cover - Stainless Steel, contact
Mechanical Specifications Disc - Phosphor Bronze with silver cladding,
Rotary Electrical and Rating: 50 mA at 12 Vdc terminal - brass with silver cladding, base -
Mechanical Specifications Contact Resistance: <10Ω UL94V-0 Nylon 19: High Temp
Operating Voltage: 5.00±.25Vdc Life: 1/2 million actuations minimum Back Plate: Stainless Steel
Supply Current: 30 mA maximum at 5Vdc Contact Bounce: <4 ms make, <10 ms break Spacer: Nomex Type 410
Actuation Force:510 ±150 grams Cable: Copper Standard with Topcoat in PVC
Output Code: Two-bit quadrature, channel A Shaft Travel: .025 ± .015 inch Insulation
leads channel B by 900 electrically during Connector: Glass filled Polyester, Tin/Nickel
clockwise rotation of the shaft. Materials and Finishes Phosphor Bronze
Logic Output Characteristics: Bushing: Zinc Label: TT406 Thermal Transfer Cast Film
Logic high signal shall be no less Shaft: Aluminum Solder: 96.5% tin / 3% silver / 0.5% copper,
than 3.8 Vdc Retaining Ring: Stainless Steel no clean
Logic low signal shall be no greater Detent Spring: Music Wire Lubricating Grease: NYE Nyogel 774L
than 0.8 Vdc Detent Ball: High Carbon Chrome, Nickel Studs: Stainless Steel
Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA finish Lockwasher: Stainless Steel
Power Consumption: 150 mW maximum Code Housing: Polyamide Polymer, Hiloy Hex Nuts: Stainless Steel
Mechanical Life: 1 million cycles of operation 610
for Medium, Low and Non-Detent. 1/2 million Aperture: Stainless Steel
cycles of operation for High. One cycle is a
rotation through all positions and a full return.
Series
Operating Voltage: 5 = 5 Volts
Angle of Throw: 15 = 15° for complete quadrature cycle change and 24 detent positions
Rotational Torque: N = Non-Detent, H=High Torque, M=Medium Torque, L=Low Torque

Pushbutton Option: 0=Non-Pushbutton, 5=510 grams
61L515 -XX-040c
Termination: C = .050 Center ribbon Cable with connector
Cable Termination: 040=4.0 inches. Cable is terminated with Amp Connector P/N7-215083-6.
See Amp Mateability Guide for Mating Connector details.
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 62AG
Price Competitive Solution
• Long Lasting (1 million cycles) • Automotive audio, navigation
• Optional pushbutton & driver information systems
• Available in 16 and 32 Detent • Medical Equipment
Positions • Test & Measurement
• 4 inch cable / connector assembly Equipment
• Audio & Video Equipment

Linear ± .025
Diameter ± .010
Angle ± 2.0 0
Encoders
.152 ±.002 .066 ±.002

[3,86 ] [1,68 ]
.500
[12,70]
.580
[14,73]
Ø.249 ±.002
[ 6,32 ] .219 ±.004
SHAFT [ 5,56 ]
.250
.312 [6,35]
[ 7,92 ]
.687
[ 17,45 ]
3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD NOTE: GRAYHILL ALLOWS
THREADS TO BE WITHIN MULTIPLE ORIENTATIONS FOR
.030 [0,76] OF SHOULDER THE GRAYHILL TEXT ON THE
BACKPLATE.
CONNECTOR IS AMP
P/N 7-215083-6
OR EQUIVALENT
.512
.532 ±.015 [13,00 ]
[ 13,51 ] 4.000 ± .2000
[101,60]
Encoder
Optical Encoders
POWER (+5.0 V) 6 HIGH

R* POSITION OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
OUTPUT A
OUTPUT A 5
LOW #1
R*
OUTPUT B 4 #2
HIGH #3
PUSHBUTTON 3
OUTPUT B #4
PUSHBUTTON 2 LOW
INDICATES LOGIC HIGH; BLANK INDICATES LOGIC LOW.
GROUND 1 POS. POS. POS. POS. POS. POS. CODE REPEATS EVERY FOUR POSITIONS.
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6
*EXTERNAL 10k PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION *CLOCKWISE SHAFT ROTATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Environmental Specifications Mechanical Life: 1,000,000 cycles of Light Pipe: Lexan, GE
Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to operation. 1 cycle is a rotation through all Code Rotor: Delrin 100
85°C positions and a full return. Housing, Lower: Nylon 6/6 25% glass
Storage Temperature: -43°C to 38°C Mounting Torque: 15in-lbs. maximum reinforced. Zytec FR-50
Humidity: 96 Hours at 90-95% humidity at Shaft Pushout Force: 45 lbs. minimum Pushbutton Actuator: Reinforced nylon.
40°C Terminal Strength: 15 lbs. Cable pull out Zytel 70G33L. UL 94

Mechanical Vibration: Harmonic motion force minimum Pushbutton Dome: Stainless Steel
with amplitude of 15g within a varied Solderability: 95% free of pin holes and Printed Circuit Board: NEMA Grade FR4,
frequency of 10 to 2000 Hz for 12 hours
Encoders
voids Double clad with copper, Plated with gold
Mechanical Shock Maximum rotational speed: 100 rpm. over nickel
Test 1: 100g for 6 ms half-sine wave with a Infrared Emitting Diode: Gallium Arsenide
velocity change of 12.3 ft/s. Pushbutton Electrical and Phototransistor Diode: NPN Silicon
Test 2: 100g for 6 ms sawtooth wave with a Mechanical Specifications Resistor: Metal oxide on ceramic substrate
velocity change of 9.7 ft/s. Spacer: Pet plastic
Rating: 10 mA @ 5 Vdc
Rotary Electrical and Mechanical Contact Resistance: <10 W (Compatible Backplate: Stainless Steel
Specifications with CMOS or TTL) Label: TT406 thermal transfer cast film.
Operating Voltage: 5.00±0.25 Vdc Life: 1 million actuations minimum Solder: 96.5% tin / 3% silver / 0.5% copper.
Supply Current: 30 mA maximum at 5 Vdc. Contact Bounce: <4 ms make, <10ms No clean.
Logic Output Characteristics: break Hex Nut: Brass, Plated with nickel
Logic high shall be no less than 3.0 VdcLogic Actuation Force: 510±150 grams Lockwasher: Stainless steel
low shall be no greater than 1.0 Vdc Shaft Travel: .017 ± .008 INCH Cable: Copper Stranded with topcoat in PVC
Minimum sink current: 0.5 mA for 5 Vdc. insulation
Materials and Finishes Connector (.050 center): PA4.6 with tin/
(Preliminary)
Bushing: Zamak 2
Power Consumtpion: 150 mW maximum nickel plated phosphor bronze.
Shaft: Zamak 2
for 5 Vdc
Detent Rotor: Reinforced Nylon Zytel
Output: Open Collector Phototransistor
70G33L UL 94
Optical Rise Time: 30ms maximum.
Detent Spring: 303 Stainless Steel
Optical Fall Time: 30ms maximum.
Housing, Upper: Nylon 6/6 25% glass
Average Rotational Torque:
2.0±1 4 in-oz before life. 50% of initial reinforced. Zytec FR-50
value after 1 million cycles.
Series
Angle of Throw: 22 = 22.5° for code change and 16 detent positions
11 = 11.25° for code change and 32 detent positions
Pushbutton Option: 01=No Pushbutton, 02=With Pushbutton
62AGXX-XX-040C
Termination: C = .050 Center ribbon Cable with connector
Cable Termination: 040=4.0 inches.Cable is terminated with Amp Connector P/N215083-6 .
See Amp Mateability Guide for Mating Connector for details.
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 60A
Joystick
• Optical Encoder, Pushbutton, and • Global Positioning/Driver
Joystick in One Shaft Information Systems
• Long Life, High Reliability • Medical Equipment Control
• Compatible with CMOS, HCMOS, • Radio Control
and TTL Logic • Robotics
• Choices of Cable Length and • Commercial Appliances
Termination
• Customized Solutions Available
Pin Version Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerance are:

Linear ± .025
.650 Diameter ± .010
(16,51) .210±.020 Angle ± 2.0°
(5,33)
.408
(10,36)
Encoders
.265±.020
(6,73)
HEADER IS SAMTEC P/N
MTMS-108-58-T-S-485
OR EQUIVALENT
Ø.050±.003 .040 ± .003

(1,27±0,07) .708 ± .015
(1,02 ± 0,07) CONNECTOR IS (17,98 ± 0 ,38)
LOCATING PIN AMP P/N 0-215083-8
OR EQUIVALENT
.380±.003 .580 ± .015
(9,65±0,07) .250 4.000 ± .200
(14,73 ± 0 ,38) 4.000 ± (5,08)
(6,35)
.615±.003
(15,62 ±0,07)
Ø.250±.002 .219 ± .003

Ø.810 (6,35±0,05) (5,56 ± 0 ,07)
(20,57) .598 ± .015
M17X1 THREAD .205 ± .001 PIVOT POINT
Ø1.000±.015 (15,19 ± 0 ,38) (5,21 ± 0 ,02)
(25,4±0,38)
CIRCUITRY AND JOYSTICK OPERATION Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code
JOYSTICK
X DIRECTION 8
JOYSTICK
Y DIRECTION
7 Y HIGH*
POWER +5.0V 6
R*
OUTPUT A 5
R*
OUTPUT B 4 X LOW 2.5V X HIGH
NORMALLY OPEN 3
PUSHBUTTON
SWITCH 2
GROUND 1 Y LOW
*EXTERNAL PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION (2.2k Ω). * DEFINED BY LOCATING PIN ON TOP OF HOUSING
Encoder
Optical Encoders
Clockwise Rotation
HIGH
OUTPUT "A"
LOW 1
HIGH
2 •
OUTPUT "B" 3 • •
LOW
1 2 3 4 5 6
4 •
SPECIFICATIONS
Rotary Electrical and Mechanical Joystick Electrical and Mechanical Resistors: Metal oxide on ceramic substrate
Ratings Ratings Solder Pins: Brass, Plated with tin
Operating Voltage: 5.00 ± 0.25 Vdc Supply Current: 5 mA maximum Shaft: Polyamide polymer (nylon 6/10 alloy)
Supply Current: 20 mA maximum at 5 Vdc Output Code: 2-Bit with stainless steel insert
Output: Open collector phototransistor. Logic Output Characteristics: Detent Balls: Carbon steel plated with nickel
External pull up resistors are required Neutral: 2.5 ± 0.5 Vdc Detent Springs: Music wire plated with tin
Output Code: 2-Bit quadrature, channel A High: > 4.5 Vdc Code Rotor: 33% Glass reinforced nylon 66
leads channel B by 90° electrically during Low: < 0.5 Vdc Pushbutton Dome: Stainless steel
clockwise rotation of the shaft Angle of Throw: 8° ± 2° in all directions Pushbutton Dome Retainer: Polycarbonate
Logic Output Characteristics: Life: 500,000 actuations in each direction Joystick Housing: Polyamide polymer
High: No less than 3.5 Vdc (nylon 6/10 alloy)
Joystick Contact: Stainless steel, silicone

Low: No greater than 1.0 Vdc Environmental Ratings
Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA rubber, brass with silver cladding, high-temp
Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to
Power Consumption: 100 mW maximum thermoplastic, phosphor bronze with silver
85°C
Encoders
Mechanical Life: 1 million rotational cycles cladding
Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to
of operation (1 cycle is a rotation through all Cable: Copper stranded with plating in PVC
100°C
positions and a full return) insulation
Relative Humidity: 96 hours at 90-85%
Average Rotational Torque: 2.0 ± 1.0 in- Connector: PA 4.6 with tin over nickel plated
humidity at 40°C
oz initially, torque shall be within 50% of phosphor bronze
Vibration: Harmonic motion with amplitude
initial value throughout life Lockwashers: Stainless steel with passivate
of 15g, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hz
Mounting Torque: 15 in-lbs. maximum finish
Shaft Push-Out Force: 45 lbs minimum Hex Nuts: 303 Stainless steel
Mechanical Shock:
Shaft Pull-Out Force: 45 lbs minimum Label: TT406 Thermal transfer cast film
Test 1: 100g for 6ms half-sine wave with a
Terminal Strength: 15 lbs terminal pull-out Solder: Sn/Ag/Cu, Lead-Free, No Clean
force minimum for cabled and header Mounting Nut: Polyurethane
Test 2: 100g for 6ms sawtooth wave with a
termination Lubricating Grease: Nye nyogel 774L
Solderability: 95% free of pin holes and voids
Materials and Finishes OPTIONS
Pushbutton Electrical and Assembly Studs: 305 Stainless steel Contact Grayhill for custom terminations,
Mechanical Ratings Detent Housing: Polyamide polymer (nylon rotational torque, number of positions, shaft
Rating: 10 mA at 5 Vdc resistive 6/10 alloy) configurations, and resolutions. Control knobs
Contact Resistance: less than 10 ohms Printed Circuit Boards: Glass cloth epoxy are also available.
Life: 1 million actuations minimum double clad with copper gold over nickel
Contact Bounce: < 4 mS make, 10 mS plated
break Infrared Emitting Diode Chips: Gallium
Actuation Force: 400 ± 150 grams force aluminum arsenide
Shaft Travel: 0.020 ± 0.010 inches Silicon Phototransistor Chips: Gold and
aluminum alloys
Series
Angle of Throw: Detent: 18 = 18° or 20 positions; Non-detent: 08 = 18° or 20 positions;
Non-Turn: 00 = Joystick and Pushbutton only
Joystick Contacts: 2 = 2 Discrete Contacts
4 = 4 Discrete Contacts
60A18-4-040S 8 = 4 Contacts in 8 possible directions
Termination: S = Stripped cable; .050" centers; C = Connector; .050" centers; P = Pin; .050" centers
*Eliminate cable length if ordering pins (Ex: 60A18-4-P)
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 60C
Multi-Function Joystick
• Three-in-One Optical Encoder, • Automotive Navigation &
Pushbutton, and Joystick Infotainment Equipment
• Compact Packaging • Avionics
• Choices of Cable Length and • Medical Equipment
Termination
• Customized Solutions Available

Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerance are:
Linear ± .025
Diameter ± .010
Angle ± 2.0°
.012
[ 0,30]
Ø.585 1.150 .250

[ 29,21 ] .375 ±.008 .240 .075
[ 14,86 ] [ 6,35 ] [ 9,53 ±0,20 ] [ 6,10] [ 1,91]
Ø.849
[ 21,56 ]
Encoders
.431±.009
[10,95 ±0,22 ]
.067
[ 1,70 ]
.080
[ 2,03 ]
.661 ± .016 3.984±.200
[16,79 ±0,40 ] [25±5,08]
.120
[ 3,05]
30.0°
.453 35.0°
[11,51 ] Ø.069
.233 [ 1,75 ]
[5,92 ] .300 Ø.069
Ø.079 ±.002
[ 2,01±0,05 ] [7,62] [ 1,75 ] Ø.749
2 PLACES 3 PLACES FOR MOUNTING .200 [19,02 ]
[5,08]
1.000
[ 25,40 ]
R .100
30.0° [ 2,54 ]
45.0° 55.0°
67.0°
.404
[ 10,25 ] .429 3 PLACES FOR MOUNTING
[ 10,90 ]
1.000
[ 25,40 ]
Encoder
Optical Encoders
FRONT AND REAR MOUNTING
FRONT MOUNTING REAR MOUNTING

MOUNTING PANEL
TO HAVE Ø .110 .831
[ 2,79 ] .070 [ 21,10]
MOUNTING PANEL
3 PLACES [ 1,78 ] TO HAVE Ø .889 .635
[22,58 ] [16,13 ]
MOUNTING PANEL
TO HAVE Ø.110
[ 2,79 ]
.371 5 PLACES
.635
.801 [ 9,43 ] [16,13 ]
[ 20,35 ] .070
[ 1,78 ]
.233
[ 5,91 ]
.051
.050 [ 1,29 ]
.371
[ 9,43 ] [ 1,28 ]
.403
.801 [10,23 ]
[ 20,35 ]

CIRCUITRY AND JOYSTICK OPERATION
Encoders
Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code
POWER
+5.0 v 10
10k 200 68
ENCODER OUTPUT A 9
10k
SCHMITT TRIGGER
ENCODER OUTPUT B 8
10k
JOYSTICK BIT 1 7
10k
JOYSTICK BIT 2 6
10k 4 5 2
JOYSTICK BIT 3 5
10k
JOYSTICK BIT 4 4
PUSH BUTTON 3
P
PUSH BUTTON 2
GROUND 1
OUTPUT FOR JOYSTICK OPERATION OUTPUT FOR ROTARY ENCODER OPERATION
POSITION BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 POSITION OUTPUT A OUTPUT B HIGH

OUTPUT A
1 #1
LOW
#2
2
#3 HIGH
3 #4 OUTPUT B
4 LOW
5 POS. POS. POS. POS. POS. POS.

#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6
INDICATES LOGIC HIGH INDICATES LOGIC HIGH
CODE REPEATS EVERY FOUR POSITIONS. CODE REPEATS EVERY FOUR POSITIONS.
Encoder
Optical Encoders
Joystick and Mechanical Ratings Lightpipe, 16 pos: Thermoplastic

SPECIFICATIONS Supply Current: 35mA at TYP at 5 Vdc Centering Profile: Thermoplastic
Rotary Electrical and Mechanical Output Code:2-Bit quadrature, channel A Shaft Inner: Aluminum
Ratings leads channel B by 90° electrically during Barbed Rivet: Stainless Steal
Operating Voltage: 5.00 ± 0.25 Vdc clockwise rotation of the shaft Silicon Phototransistor Chips: Planar
Supply Current: 35mA at TYP at 5 Vdc Logic Output Characteristics: Resistors: Carbon film
Output: Direct output from converting Neutral: 2.5 ± 0.5 Vdc Solder Pins: Stainless steel
Schmidt trigger High: > 4.5 Vdc Shaft Outer: Thermoplastic
Output Code: 2-Bit quadrature, channel A Low: < 0.5 Vdc Slider Plate: Thermoplastic
leads channel B by 90° electrically during Angle of Throw: 7° ± 2° in all directions Detent Balls: Carbon steel 100 with nickel
clockwise rotation of the shaft Life: 500 thousand actuations in each finish
Logic Output Characteristics: direction Centering Balls: Carbon steel 100 with nickel
High: No less than 3.5 Vdc finish
Low: No greater than 1.0 Vdc Environmental Ratings Detent Springs: Music wire plated with tin
Minimum Sink Current: 2.0 mA Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to Centering Springs: Music wire plated with tin
Power Consumption: XXX mW maximum 85°C Schmidt Trigger: RoHS Compliant TSSOP,
Mechanical Life: 500 thousand rotational Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to 14 pin
cycles of operation (1 cycle is a rotation 100°C Pushbutton Rocker: Thermoplastic
through all positions and a full return) Relative Humidity: 96 hours at 90-95% Pushbutton Actuator: Thermoplastic
Average Rotational Torque: 2.0 ± 1.0 in- humidity at 40°C Pushbutton Dome: Stainless steel
oz initially, torque shall be within 50% of Vibration: Harmonic motion with amplitude of Label: TT406 Thermal transfer cast film
initial value throughout life 15g, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hz frequency Solder: 95.5% Sn/ 4% Ag/ 0.5% Cu
Mounting Torque: 15 in-lbs. maximum for 12 hours
Shaft Push-Out Force: 20 lbs minimum Mechanical Shock: OPTIONS
Shaft Pull-Out Force: 20 lbs minimum Test 1: 100g for 6ms half-sine wave with a Contact Grayhill for custom terminations,
Terminal Strength: 15 lbs terminal pull-out velocity change of 12.3 ft/s rotational torque, number of positions, shaft
force minimum for cabled and header Test 2: 100g for 6ms sawtooth wave with a configurations, and resolutions. Control knobs
termination velocity change of 9.7 ft/s are also available.
Solderability: 95% free of pin holes and voids Thermocycle: 4 hours cycling between
Encoders
-40°C to 80°C
Pushbutton Electrical and
Mechanical Ratings Materials and Finishes
Rating: 10 mA at 5 Vdc resistive Bushing: Thermoplastic
Contact Resistance: less than 10 ohms Upper Housing: Thermoplastic
Life: 500 thousand actuations minimum Infrared Emitting Diode Chips: Gallium
Contact Bounce: < 4 mS make, 10 mS break aluminum arsenide
Actuation Force: 600 ± 150 grams force Backplate: Thermplastic
Shaft Travel: 0.020 ± 0.010 inches Lightpipe, Joystick: Thermoplastic
Series
Angle of Throw: 22 = 22.5° or 16positions
Rotation Torque: L = Low torque, M = Medium torque, H= High torque
Pushbutton: 3= 300 grams
Joystick: 4 = Four directions
60C22-L3-4-040S
Termination: S = Stripped cable; .050" centers; C = Connector; .050" centers;

Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 61A
Custom, Absolute
FEATURES
• Absolute Position Sensing
• 3, 4, or 5-Bit Custom Output Coding
• 8 to 32 Positions
• Fixed Stops Only
• Angles of Throw to 45° (Design
Specifications Will Dictate the Angle
of Throw)

.320±.005
(BUSHING FLATS)
Encoders
.218±.005
.875±.005
SQUARE
.562
3 PLACES
.331
.248/.250
3/8-32 UNEF 2A
.250 THREAD
.093
MOUNTING
SURFACE
.688
3 PLACES
.780±.025
CONNECTOR IS 6.000±.300
MOLEX P/N
14-56-2074
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, DIMENSION TOLERANCES ARE AS FOLLOWS: LINEAR ±.010 (0,25), DIAMETERS ±.010 (0,25), ANGULAR ±5
Encoder
Optical Encoders
CIRCUITRY TRUTH TABLE
+5 VOLTS 7 3 BIT, 8 POSITION 5 BIT, 32 AND 24 POSITION

R* Position B2 B3 B4 Position B0 B1 B2 B3 B4
1 1
BIT 0 6 2 2
3 3
R* 4 4
5 5
BIT 1 5 6 6
7 7
R*
8 8
INDICATES LOGIC HIGH 9
BIT 2 4
BLANK INDICATES LOGIC LOW 10
R* 11
12
BIT 3 3 13
4 BIT, 16 POSITION 14
R* 15
Position B1 B2 B3 B4 16
BIT 4 2 1 17
2 18
3 19
4 20
GROUND 1
5 21
6 22
* EXTERNAL PULL-UP RESISTORS REQUIRED FOR OPERATION (4.7k) 7 23
8 24
9 25
10 26
11 27
12 28
13 29
14 30
15 31
16 32
INDICATES LOGIC HIGH INDICATES LOGIC HIGH
BLANK INDICATES LOGIC LOW BLANK INDICATES LOGIC LOW
Encoders
SPECIFICATIONS
Ratings Environmental Aperture: Chemically etched stainless steel with
Operating Voltage: 5 ±.25V DC Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to +85°C black oxide finish
Supply Current: 85 mA maximum at 5V DC Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to +100°C Rotor: Electroformed nickel and chemically
Life: 1 million cycles of operation; 1 cycle is Vibration: MIL-STD 202, method 204, condition B etched stainless steel with black oxide finish
rotation through all positions and a full return Mechanical Shock: 100 g’s, 6 ms, half Sine Detent Springs: Tinned music wire
Rotational Torque: 1.5 in-oz (Initial) 12.3 ft/s and 100 g’s, 6 ms, sawtooth, 9.7 ft/s PC Boards: NEMA grade FR-4
Output High: 3.8V minimum for CMOS & Humidity: 90-95% Relative humidity at Through Bolts: Stainless steel, unplated
HCMOS; 2.7V minimum for TTL 40°C for 96 hrs. Through Bolt Nuts: Stainless steel
Output Low: 0.8V maximum Mounting Hardware: One brass, tin/zinc-plated
Shaft Push Out Force: 25 lbs. Materials and Finishes nut and one stainless steel, zinc-plated
Mounting Torque: 10 in-lb maximum Detent Housing: Stainless Steel lockwasher supplied with each switch. Nut is
Load Current: 5 mA maximum per channel Bushing: Brass, tin/zinc plated 0.094 inches thick by 0.562 inches across flats.
Logic Rise and Fall Times: 30 mSec typical Shaft: Stainless steel
Detent Balls: Steel, nickel-plated
Code Housings: Nylon 6/10
Backplate: Nylon 6/10
Series
Style: A = unsealed
Number of positions: 32 = 32 positions with 10" of throw
16 = 16 positions with 18" of throw
8 = 8 positions with 26" of throw
61A32-060
Termination: Cable Termination: 060=6.0 inches.Cable is terminated with Molex connector P/N 14-56-2074.
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 61K
High Resolution, 4-Pin
FEATURES
• 25, 32, 50, 64, 100, 128 and 256
• Cable or Pin Versions
• 10 Million Rotational Life Cycles
Pin Version
.152 Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerance are:

(3.86)
1.250 DIA KEYWAY DEPTH
Linear ± .010
(31.75) Diameter ± .025
Encoders
Angle ± 2.0°
.033
(.84)
.066
(1.68)
.550 DIA
(13.97)
MOUNTING
SURFACE
.219
(5.57)
.249/.250 DIA
(6.32/6.34)
.025 X 45˚
(.64)
CHAMFER
.350
(8.89)
.725.025 3/8 - 32
(18.42.64) UNEF-2A
THREADS
.250
(6.35)

61kXXX XX
.776.025
(19.71.64)
.501
(12.73) PIN #1
.100 .225
(2.54) (5.71)
.150
(3.81)
.300
(7.62)
Encoder
Optical Encoders
Cable Version 1.250 DIA .152

(3.86) UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, DIMENSION TOLERANCES ARE AS FOLLOWS:
(31.75) LINEAR .010 (.25), DIAMETERS .010 (.25), ANGULAR 5˚
KEYWAY DEPTH
.033
(.84)
.066
(1.68)
.550 DIA
(13.97)
MOUNTING
SURFACE
.219
(5.57) .249/.250 DIA
.025 X 45˚ (6.32/6.34)
(.64)
CHAMFER
.350
(8.89)
.725.025 3/8 - 32
(18.42.64) UNEF-2A
THREADS
.250
(6.35)

61KXXX-XXX XX-XXX
.501 PIN #1
(12.73)
Encoders
CONNECTOR IS
MOLEX P/N
14-56-3046 CABLE LENGTH
OR EQUIVALENT 4.000,25
(4.000, 7)
CIRCUITRY, TRUTH TABLE, AND WAVEFORM: Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code

PIN #
90˚ ± 45˚
GROUND 1
OUTPUT
A
OUTPUT B 2
OUTPUT
10 KΩ B
OUTPUT A 3 1 CYCLE
10 KΩ CHANNEL A LEADS CHANNEL B BY

90˚ ± 45˚ IN ALL ROTATIONS FOR
POWER 5V 4 CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF SHAFT.
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Ratings
Operating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 Vdc degradation data) amplitude of 15g, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hz
Supply Current: 30 mA maximum at 5 Vdc Mounting Torque: 20 in-lbs maximum frequency for 12 hours per MIL-STD-202,
Logic Output Characteristics: Shaft Push Out Force: 100 lbs Method 204
Output Type: Open collector with integrated Terminal Strength: 5 lbs terminal pull-out Mechanical Shock: Test 1: 100g for 6 mS, half-
Schmitt Trigger and 10K ohms pull-up resistor force minimum sine wave with velocity change of 12.3 ft/s. Test
Maximum Sink Current: 16 mA at .40 volts Solderability: 95% free of pin holes and voids 2: 100g for 6 mS, sawtooth wave with velocity
Power Consumption: 150 mW maximum Operating Torque: 1.5 in-oz maximum (no change of 9.7 ft/s.
Optical Rise Time: 500 nS typical detents) for unsealed versions
Optical Fall Time: 16 nS typical
Environmental Ratings
Mechanical Ratings Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°C
Mechanical Life: 10 million revolutions Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°C
Time Life: Guaranteed for 10 years of Relative Humidity: 90-95% at 40°C for 96 hours
continuous operation (calculated from emitter Vibration Resistance: Harmonic motion with
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 61R
High Resolution, 5-Pin
(Polarized Connection)
FEATURES
• 25, 32, 50, 64, 100, 128 and 256
• Cable or Pin Version
• Index Pulse Available
Pin Version .152 Unless otherwise specified, standard tolerance are:

(3.86)
1.250 DIA KEYWAY DEPTH Linear ± .010
(31.75)
Diameter ± .025
.033 Angle ± 2.0°
Encoders
(.84)
.066
(1.68)
.550 DIA
(13.97)
MOUNTING
SURFACE
.219
(5.57)
.249/.250 DIA
(6.32/6.34)
.025 X 45˚
(.64)
CHAMFER
.350
(8.89)
.725.025 3/8 - 32
(18.42.64) UNEF-2A
THREADS
.250
(6.35)

61RXXX XX
.776.025
(19.71.64)
.501
(12.73) PIN #1
.100 .225
(2.54) (5.71)
.200
(5.08)
.400
(10.16)
Encoder
Optical Encoders
Cable Version 1.250 DIA .152

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, DIMENSION TOLERANCES ARE AS FOLLOWS:
(31.75) (3.86)
KEYWAY DEPTH
.033
(.84)
.066
(1.68)
.550 DIA
(13.97)
MOUNTING
SURFACE
.219
(5.57) .249/.250 DIA
(6.32/6.34)
.025 X 45˚
(.64)
CHAMFER
.350
(8.89)
.725.025 3/8 - 32
(18.42.64) UNEF-2A
THREADS
.250
(6.35)

61RXXX-XXX XX-XXX
PIN #1
.501
(12.73)
Encoders
CONNECTOR IS
MOLEX P/N
CABLE LENGTH
14-56-3056
6.000, 25
OR EQUIVALENT
(6.000, 7)
CIRCUITRY, TRUTH TABLE, AND WAVEFORM: Standard Quadrature 2-Bit Code

PIN #
GROUND 5
90˚ ± 45˚
NO CONTACT 4 OUTPUT
A
OUTPUT
OUTPUT A 3 B
10 KΩ
1 CYCLE
POWER 5V 2 CHANNEL A LEADS CHANNEL B BY
90˚ ± 45˚ IN ALL ROTATIONS FOR
10 KΩ CLOCKWISE ROTATION OF SHAFT.
OUTPUT B 1
SPECIFICATIONS Operating Torque: 1.5 in-oz maximum (no

Electrical Ratings Mechanical Ratings detents) for unsealed versions
Operating Voltage: 5.0 ±.25 Vdc Mechanical Life: 10 million revolutions
Supply Current: 30 mA maximum at 5 Vdc Time Life: Guaranteed for 10 years of Environmental Ratings
Logic Output Characteristics: continuous operation (calculated from emitter Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to 85°C
Output Type: Open collector with integrated degradation data) Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to 100°C
Schmitt Trigger and 10K ohms pull-up resistor Mounting Torque: 20 in-lbs maximum Relative Humidity: 90-95% at 40°C for 96 hours
Maximum Sink Current: 16 mA at .40 volts Shaft Push Out Force: 100 lbs Vibration Resistance: Harmonic motion with
Power Consumption: 150 mW maximum Terminal Strength: 5 lbs terminal pull-out force amplitude of 15g, within a varied 10 to 2000 Hz
Optical Rise Time: 500 nS typical minimum frequency for 12 hours per MIL-STD-202,
Optical Fall Time: 16 nS typical Solderability: 95% free of pin holes and voids Method 204
Encoder
Optical Encoders
Shock Resistance: Test 1: 100g for 6 mS, half- Printed Circuit Board: NEMA Grade FR-4.
sine wave with velocity change of 12.3 ft/s. Test Five microinches minimum gold over 100
2: 100g for 6 mS, sawtooth wave with velocity microinches minimum nickel over copper
change of 9.7 ft/s. Optical Barrier: Polyphenylene sulfide, 94 V-0
Backplate: Polyester
Materials and Finishes Header: Phosphor bronze, 200 microinches tin
Bushing: Aluminum over 50 microinches nickel (pin version only)
Code Housing: Hiloy 610B Infrared Emitter: Gallium aluminum arsenide
Shaft: Stainless steel Photo IC: Planar silicon
Retaining Ring: Stainless steel Cable: 26 AWG, stranded/tinned wire, PVC
Code Rotor and Aperture: Chemically etched coated on .100 (2,54) centers (cable version
stainless steel/electroformed nickel only)
Series
Style: K = Standard, 4-pin, high resolution
KS = Sealed, 4-pin, high resolution
R = Standard, 5-pin, high resolution
RS = Sealed, 5-pin, high resolution
61RS256 – 060

Cable Termination: 060 = 6.0in. Cable is terminated with Molex Connector P/N
14-56-3056.
Encoders
Available from your local Grayhill Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Dstributor or Grayhill.
ACCESSORIES
Non-Turn Washer Shaft and Panel Seal
The Series 61 bushing is 3/8 inches in diameter For shaft and panel seal version, the shaft is
and has a non-turn keyway to prevent rotation sealed by an o-ring inside the bushing. The
of the switch body when the panel is cut to fit. panel is sealed by a flat gasket .045" thick at the
Another way to keep the switch from turning is base of the bushing. The panel seals will increase
to use a non-turn washer. The washer is the behind panel dimension by .020" to .040",
cadmium-plated brass. when the switch is mounted. The panel seal is
Part number: 12C1087-1 silicon rubber.
Part number: SHH694-11, 302-2B stainless
steel, no plating

.625 ± .010 DIA. .625 ± .010
.032 ± .002 .032
(15,89 ± 0,25) (15,88 ± 0,25) DIA.
(0,81 ± 0,05) ± .002
(0,81
± 0,05)
90˚ ± 1˚
90˚ ± 1˚
.437 + .010 –.000 .530 ± .005
(11,10 + 0,25 –0,00) .005 ± .003
(13,46 ± 0,13) .030 (0,76)
(0,38 ± 0,08)
CL RADIUS RADIUS MAX.
.125 ± .010 .120 ± .003 .110

(3,16 ± 0,25) (3,05 ± 0,08) ± .003
.120 ± .003 (2,79
(3,05 ± 0,08) ± 0,08)
Part Number: 12C1087-1 Part Number: SHH694-11
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 65
Optical Encoder Interface
FEATURES
• Interfaces with all Grayhill and • Simplified Microprocessor Interface
Most Standard Quadrature Optical Reduces Design Time
Encoders • Debounces Encoder Integral
• Power Reduction of Up to 75-90% Pushbutton Switch
in Optical Encoder Use Through • Ideal for Battery Powered
Power Management Feature Applications that Include Optical
• User Selectable Output Modes: Encoders
Magnitude/Direction, Up/Down,
Standard Quadrature
DESCRIPTION
The GH65C11-X is designed to receive input (especially advantageous in battery powered modes are: magnitude and direction, up and
from standard quadrature optical encoders. systems). Sample rate is a nominal 4K per down count, and standard quadrature.
The power management feature allows power second allowing high speed quadrature input. Debouncing of an integral pushbutton switch
to the encoder to be applied only during The optical encoder interface can operate in 1 within the optical encoder can also be
sampling intervals, thus conserving power of 3 user-selectable output modes. These accomplished.
Name Type* Description

Encoders
M0, M1 I Mode selection input pins

VDD P 3–6 Vdc power source
SOIC/DIP SSOP
RES I Reset pin, normally connected to VDD
M0 1 18 ØBO/DN/DR M0 1 20 ØBO/DN/DR
VSS P GND, 0v nominal power return M1 2 17 ØAO/UP/MG M1 2 19 ØAO/UP/MG
ØAI, ØBI I Phase A and B quadrature input pins VDD 3 16 RC VDD 3 18 RC
SWI I Switch input pin RES 4 15 NC RES 4 17 NC
VSS 5 14 VDD VSS 5 16 VDD
SWO O Debounced switch output pin ØAI 6 13 PW VSS 6 15 VDD
NC O No connect, this pin must be left unconnected ØBI 7 12 PW ØAI 7 14 PW
SWI 8 11 PW ØBI 8 13 PW
PW O Power source for encoder power management SWO 9 10 PW SWI 9 12 PW
RC I/O RC oscillator pin SWO 10 11 PW
ØBO/DN/DR O Phase B, down, direction, mode conditional output pin
ØAO/UP/MG O Phase A, up, magnitude, mode conditional output pin
* Pin Types: I = Input, O = Output, P = Power.
GH65C11-X-YY
Temperature: Packaging:
C = Commercial (0° C to 70° C) PD = 18 lead 300 mil wide Plastic DIP
N = Industrial (-40° C to 85° C) SO = 18 lead 300 mil wide gull wing SOIC
SS* = 20 lead SSOP
* The SS package style is not available in the -40°C to 85°C temperature range.
For additional information about the use of the

GH65 interface chips with optical encoders
request Grayhill Application Note #719.
Encoder
Optical Encoders
SERIES 61M
Optically Coupled for Simulated
Mechanical Rotary Switch Output
FEATURES Applications
• Optical Alternative to Rotary • Avionics
Contacts • Any application requiring rotary
• One Pulse Per Detent Position switch output and the increased
Per Rotation reliability of an optical device
• Long Life of a Million Cycles
• With or Without Pushbutton
• Continuous Rotation and Fixed
Stops Available
• 8, 10 and 12 Positions Available

.524
13,31
Encoders
.445
11,30
.022 DIA
0,56
16 PLACES
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
11 12 PB +5 G PB 1 2
DETAIL “A”
.590 PINOUT
14,99
SEE DETAIL A
.079
2,01
14 PLACES .094
2,38
.375 ± .02
.202 9,52 ± 0,50
5,13
.010 X 45°
.312
7,92
1/4"
32-UNEF-2A
.750 ± .020 THREAD
19,05 ± 0,50
.250 ± .010
6,35 ± 0,25
61M12-02-01 -01
XXXX X X
.046
1,17
.579 .031
14,71 0,79
.687
17,45
Encoder
Optical Encoders
POSITION
PIN NUMBER
SWITCH SCHEMATIC P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12

1 •
R1 R1 R1 R1 R1 R1
2 •
3 •
4 •
5 •
6 •
7 •
PIN
#
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 •
+5 G 9 •
10 •
N.O. PUSHBUTTON 11 •
12 •
Note: External pull-up resistors required for operation. 20ký is suggested. Note:
Blank Indicates high state
• Indicates low state
Code repeats every 12 positions
SPECIFICATIONS
Pushbutton Ratings Switch Ratings Materials and Finishes

Operating Voltage: 5 Vdc, 60mA maximum, Output: One pulse per position per rotation Code Housing: Nylon (Red) Hiloy 610
Encoders
resistive (360 degrees CW/CCW) Detent Housing: Stainless Steel

Contact Resistance: Less than 10 Ohms Operating Voltage: 5.0 ± .25 Vdc Rotor: Reinforced Thermoplastic, 30% Glass
Voltage Breakdown: 250 Vac between Supply Current: 60mA maximum at 5 Vdc Filled Polyester
mutually insulated parts Logic High: 3.8V minimum Bushing: Zinc Die Cast, Cadmium Plated
Contact Bounce: Less than 4 mS at make Logic Low: .8V minimum Shaft: Stainless Steel
and less than 10 mS at break Logic Rise and Fall Time: 30mS Typ. Detent Balls: 302 Stainless Steel
Actuation Life: 3,000,000 operations Through Bolts: 305 Stainless Steel
Actuation Force: Maximum actuation force Through Bolt Nuts: Stainless Steel
of 650 grams and a minimum force of 300 Environmental
Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to Printed Circuit Boards: NEMA Grade FR-4
grams
Pushbutton Travel: .010/.025 +85°C Terminals: Copper Alloy
Storage Temperature Range: -55°C to + Aperture: Chem Etched Stainless Steel and/
Mechanical Ratings 100°C or Electroformed Nickel
Life Expectancy: 1 million cycles of Vibration: MIL-STD 202, Method 204, Dome Retainer: Thermoplastic
operation; (1 cycle=360° rotation and return) Condition B Mounting Hardware: One Brass, cadmium-
Rotational Torque: 10 in-oz. ±3 in-oz. Mechanical Shock: 100g’s, 6 ms, Half Sine, plated nut and lockwasher supplied with each
customs also available. 12.3 ft/s and 100g’s, 6 ms, Sawtooth, 9.7 ft/s switch
Shaft Pushout Force: 50 lbs. minimum Humidity: 90-95% Relative Humidity at
Mounting Torque: 20 in-lbs. maximum 40°C for 96 hours OPTIONS
Contact Grayhill for customer application needs.
Series
“M” Style
Angle of Throw: Detent
08 = 45° or 8 positions
61MXX-XX-XX
Termination: 01 = without terminal pins, 02 = with terminal pins

Pushbutton Option: 01 = without P.B., 02 = with P.B.
Encoder Grayhill, Inc. • 561 Hillgrove Avenue • LaGrange, Illinois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhill.com
50
CONTROL KNOBS
Rotary Switches
FEATURES
and Rotary Switches
Versions

considerations

Encoders
.620 (15,75)
.593
(15,06)
.335 (8,51) .700
DIA.
(17,78) DIA.
.440
(11,18) .600
DIA. (15,24)
1.330
(33,78)
DIA.
.500
(12,7)
DIA. .440
.894 (11,2)
(22,71)
DIA.
.350
.662 .500
(8,9)
(16,81) (12,7)
DIA.

.
Encoder

.315 .393
(8,00) (9,98)
.220 R.
CL OF (5,59)
.220
(5,59) R.
.092 (2,34) .550

.500 TYP. 1.575 DIA. (13,97)
.215
(12,7) (4 PLACES) .660 (40,01) DIA.
(5,46)
DIA. (16,76)
.400
(10,16)
1.090
(27,69)
.500
(12,7)
DIA. .500
.710 .730
(12,7)
(18,03) (18,54)
DIA. SPRING CLIP
Encoders
Series
Style*: 5013, 5014, 5015, 5017, 5019, 5020, 5028, 5029
Shaft Diameter:
J = .125 dia. shaft
K = .250 dia. shaft
11K5028-KCNB
Knob Color:
B = Black
G = Gray
Material:
N = Nylon
Version:

Encoder
System 50
SYSTEM 50
System 50
Contents: System 50
SYSTEM 50
• MicroDAC
• MicroDAC LT
• Promux
• Microlon
• Various I/O Racks
Page
SYSTEM 50 RACKS OVERVIEW ................................................................ 3

Racks
4 Channel ...................................................................................................... 4
8 Channel ...................................................................................................... 6
16 Channel .................................................................................................. 11
24 Channel (In-Line) ................................................................................... 18
24 Channel .................................................................................................. 22
32 Channel .................................................................................................. 25
32 Channel Parallel Controller Board for 72-PMX-32D ............................ 27
Controllers
MicroDAC (Optomux) .................................................................................. 29
System 50
MicroDAC LT (Optomux) ............................................................................. 31
Network Interfaces
Promux (Optomux) ...................................................................................... 33
Parallel Bus Interface .................................................................................. 35
Communication Converters ........................................................................ 37
Accessories ................................................................................................. 38
System 50
System 50
SYSTEM 50 RACKS OVERVIEW Replacement Fuses

I/O Racks Part Number Explanation All I/O locations on standard and mini I/O
racks are fused with five amp Littelfuse 251-
Series Number 005 or Bussman GFA5 fuses. Logic supply on
70MRCK16–HL 24 and 32 position standard and mini I/O racks
are fused with one amp Littelfuse 251-001 or
Input Connection/Mounting Bussman GFA1 fuses. Logic supply on 16, 24
Blank = Edge Card Connector Only for Std. I/O (Note 1) and 32 position G5 I/O racks are fused with
EC = Edge Card Connector only for Mini I/O (Note 1) 5 x20mm glass fuses rated one amp or five
HL = Header Connector: long ejector levers (Note 2) amps.
HS = Header Connector: short ejector levers (Note 2)
DIN = DIN Rail Mount Custom I/O Racks and
48 = 48-pin Euro DIN Connector (Note 3) Termination Assemblies
For applications where our standard I/O racks
Number of Modules or Rack Positions
do not fit your application, we offer custom I/
4 = 4 Modules
O racks and termination assemblies. We have
4R = 4 Modules, Positive or Negative True Logic
provided custom I/O racks with the following
8 = 8 Modules
features:
16 = 16 Modules
• Special control logic connectors
16T= Terminal Blocks for Control and Field Wiring
• DIN rail mounting
16I = Terminal Blocks for Control and Field Wiring:
• Depluggable terminal strips
Positive or negative true logic
• Options for sinking and/or sourcing of field
24 = 24 Modules
power
32 = 32 Modules
• 19” Rack for mounting options
Mounting Rack Type • Signal conditioning and transient protection
K = 1 Row of Modules in Line
Q = 2 Rows of Modules (Mini racks replace Quad racks) Our application engineers are ready to help
M = Special 32 Position G5 Rack for MicroDAC you design your I/O termination assembly. If
P = Special 32 Position G5 Rack for Parallel you have a unique application, give us a try.
Controller Board
RC = Mounting Rack I/O Module and Fuse Sockets
We recommend customers designing their
Module Type own mini, standard or G5 I/O racks use Mill-
L = OpenLine® I/O Modules Max part number 0355-0-15-01-02-01-10-0
G = G5 I/O Modules sockets or equivalent for the I/O module leads
M = Mini I/O Modules and Mill-Max part number 0660-0-15-01-20-
Blank = Standard I/O Module 02-10-0 or equivalent for Littelfuse pico fuse
Note 1– 50-pin card edge mates with 3M part number 3415-0001 or equivalent. leads. Custom OpenLine® I/O racks should
Note 2– Racks with long ejector levers mate with ribbon cable connectors with strain relief (Molex part number use Crane connectors for the input and for the
15-29-9350 or equivalent) or discrete wire connectors (Molex part number 22-55-2502 or equivalent).
Note 3– Racks with 48-pin Euro DIN connector are special 16 position OpenLine© racks for OpenDAC© controllers. output.
Not all combinations are valid, see Ordering Information on each page.
Logic Supply
I/O Racks To power an I/O rack, connect a power supply
G5 Mounting Racks to the 2 position logic supply terminal block,
I/O racks are passive backplanes into which G5 mounting racks are designed to
I/O modules can be installed and removed. I/O taking care that the polarity is correct.
accommodate G5 modules, which incorporate
racks connect one of the “logic side” terminals Alternately, the I/O rack may be powered
a status LED in the module. The G5 output
System 50
from each module to an associated pin on the through the 50-pin connector. Pin #49 on all
modules also have an integral fuse. This
logic side connector for interface to the controller. other racks is +Vcc. Installation of a jumper or
eliminates the need for module fuses and LED
I/O bases have an integral processor and dual fuse may be necessary on the I/O rack to
status indicators on the rack. The G5 modules
port memory chip. The I/O handles scanning complete this connection. See details on the
are slightly thinner than the standard modules.
and storage of the I/O information which can be following pages.
When used with the MicroDAC or Microlon®
accessed over the bases address/databus. controllers, analog and digital I/O modules can
Up to 8 racks can be stacked along a DIN rail. be intermixed on the same G5 rack. Field Terminal Block-
Wire Size Quantity per Terminal
Standard Mounting Racks Miniature-Sized Racks AWG
Mounting racks provide a convenient method Our mini racks are much smaller than the I/O Rack Type 10 12 14 16
of connecting to I/O modules. Most racks have industry standard racks. In addition to saving
Mini – – 1 2
the option of a card edge or header connector precious panel space, mini racks save
G5 1 1 2 3
for the logic signals. Field wires are connected installation time by replacing the individual
OpenLine ® – – 1 2
to open or closed terminal blocks. module screws with a single hold down bar
which is installed with two thumb screws.
The modules are plugged into receptacle cups
or connectors and are held in place by hold UL Recognition/CSA Certification
down screws, bars or clips. An LED indicates Those I/O racks indicated as UL and CSA
the status of each digital module. A five amp certified are listed in UL file E94540 and CSA
replaceable fuse protects the outputs from file LR38763.
short circuits.
System 50
System 50
RACKS
4 Channel
FEATURES
• Use for Isolating and Coverting Signal Types to
Standard Logic Voltages
• Terminal Block Connection for Input and Output
• Available for Standard and G5 I/O Modules
• Panel and DIN Rail Mount Versions
• UL, CSA Certified
4 CHANNEL RACK: Standard

Part No. 70RCK4
STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 ( 3,8),DIA.
Dimensions are shown in inches (4 PLACES) 9 POSITION TERMINAL
(and millimeters). CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREW STRIP FOR GROUND
All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25) AND LOGIC SIGNALS
unless otherwise specified. MODULE SHOWN FOR

REFERENCE ONLY
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
STATUS LED
Y
B AC OUTPUT
AC INPUT
3.00
3.3K RESISTOR (76,2)
3.50
W DC INPUT
R
(88,9)
DC OUTPUT
NOTE: MAXIMUM 5 AMP FUSE 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TERMINAL SCREW
TORQUE NOT TO
EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
0.25 (6,4) 0.25 (6,4)
TERMINAL STRIP FOR
FIELD WIRING 4.00 (101,6)
4.50 (114,3)
2.20 (55,9)
MAX.
0.75 (19,1)
4 CHANNEL RACK: G5
System 50
Part No. 70GRCK4
Dimensions are shown in inches
(and millimeters).
3.25 (82,55)
All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25) .25 2.75 (69,85)
unless otherwise specified. (6,35)
9 POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TERMINAL .76 (19,30)
STRIP FOR
FIELD WIRING
SWAGED 4.27
(108,46)
R DC OUTPUT
B AC OUTPUT
STANDOFF
THRU HOLE 4.70
2.75
.15 (3,81) DIA. (119,38)
(69,85)
3.36 (4 PLACES)
5,34) 4.00 (CLEARANCE
W DC INTPUT
Y AC INTPUT
(101,6) FOR #6 SCREW)

.75
(19,05)
9 POSITION
TERMINAL
STRIP FOR
CONTROL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LOGIC
DIN-RAIL CARRIER NOTE: MAXIMUM TERMINAL

SCREW TORQUE NOT TO
EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
DIN-Rail
Panel Mount Mount
System 50
System 50
SCHEMATICS: Part No. 70RCK4

70RCK4 For Negative True Logic Only 70RCK4R For Negative or Positive True
Logic
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL STRIP FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL STRIP
N/C FUSE FUSE

1 N/C
5A 1 5A
2 2
3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
3
4 4
5 MODULE 5 MODULE
POSITION POSITION
3.3K 3.3K
TERMINAL STRIP TERMINAL STRIP

FOR LOGIC AND FOR LOGIC AND
GROUND SIGNALS GROUND SIGNALS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+VCC
GND
LOGIC
GND
LOGIC
GND
LOGIC
GND
LOGIC
GND
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
SCHEMATICS: Part No. 70GRCK4
70GRCK4 and 70GRCK4-DIN For Negative True Logic Only 70GRCK4R and 70GRCK4R-DIN For Negative
or Postive True Logic
NC
NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BARRIER STRIP BARRIER STRIP
FOR FIELD WIRING FOR FIELD WIRING
OF MODULE OF MODULE
1
INPUT/OUTPUT
1
2 2
MODULE MODULE
3 0 1 2 3 3 0 1 2 3
4 LOCATION 4 LOCATION
5 5
PULL-UP PULL-UP
RESISTOR RESISTOR
3.3 KΩ 3.3 KΩ
CONTROL CONTROL
BARRIER BARRIER
STRIP STRIP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+VCC
GND
LOGIC
GND
LOGIC
GND
LOGIC
GND
LOGIC
GROUND
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
System 50
ORDERING INFORMATION (modules ordered separately)

.
Part Number I/O Description UL CSA Style
Available from your local Grayhill Distribu-
70RCK4 4 Negative true logic X X Standard tor. For prices and discounts, contact a local
70RCK4R 4 Positive or negative true logic* X X Standard Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor, or
70GRCK4 4 Negative true logic X X G5 Grayhill.
70GRCK4R 4 Positive or negative true logic* X X G5
70GRCK4-DIN 4 Negative true logic–DIN rail mount X X G5
70GRCK4R-DIN 4 Positive or negative true logic*– X X G5
DIN rail mount
*Note: Positive True Logic applies to output modules only.
System 50
System 50
RACKS
8 Channel
FEATURES
• For use with System 50 Style Controllers
• Available for Standard Miniature and
OpenLine® Modules

Part No. 70RCK8 NOTE: MAXIMUM TERMINAL
SCREW TORQUE NOT TO
Dimensions are shown in inches EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
(and millimeters).
All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)
unless otherwise specified.
8.00 (203,2)
7.50 (190,5) STANDOFF I.D.
CARD EDGE OR HEADER 0.15 (3,8) DIA.
CONNECTOR FOR LOGIC (4 PLACES)
SIGNALS. (SEE NOTES) TERMINAL STRIP TERMINAL STRIP FOR CLEARANCE
FOR LOGIC SUPPLY FIELD WIRING FOR #6 SCREW
0.45
25/49
(11,4)
+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
+
KEY
SLOT
1.40 PINS
(35,6) 5/7
+
1
3.00
2.60 (76,2) 3.50
DC OUTPUT
AC OUTPUT
(66,0)
DC INPUT
0.30
AC INPUT
(88,9)
(7,6)
PIN 1
+
1
W
R
Y
B
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
System 50
USER INSTALLABLE JUMPERS 0.25 (6,4)
0.40 (10,2) FOR +VCC (3 PLACES) 0.25 (6,4)
2.20 (55,9)
MAX.
0.75
(19,1)
System 50
System 50
8 CHANNEL RACK: DIN Rail Mount
Part No. 70LRCK8-DIN

(and millimeters).
DIN CARRIER 3.7 (92.96)
PCB 3.5 (89.15)
M0 M1 M2 M3
50-PIN
50
49
STRAIGHT A B
HEADER
DIN CARRIER CONNECTOR REMOVABLE JUMPER
4.7 (119.13) CONNNECTS GND
TO PLATED HOLE
FOR GROUNDING
PCB
4.3 (108.46)
3.15A FUSE
PIN 1
2
1
FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL STRIP
NOTE: MAXIMUM
TERMINAL SCREW
TORQUE NOT TO
EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
3.8
(95.81)
+5 +5 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 REF
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
2.2
(56.49)
LOGIC SUPPLY TERMINAL STRIP

System 50
TOP ROW: + LOGIC SUPPLY

BOTTOM ROW: GND
System 50
System 50
8 CHANNEL RACK: Miniature
Part No. 70MRCK8 0.40 6.00 (152,4)

Dimensions are shown in inches (10,2)
5.20 (132,1) 0.25 (6,35)
(and millimeters). 0.45 LOGIC SUPPLY FIELD WIRING
All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25) (11,4) TERMINAL STRIP TERMINAL STRIP NOTE: MAXIMUM
TERMINAL SCREW
unless otherwise specified. TORQUE NOT TO
EXCEED 5 IN-LBS
+–
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1.40
(35,6) KEY SLOT
2.60
66,0) PINS 5/7 3.50
3.00
(76,2) (88,9)
PIN 1
W
R
B
Y
DC OUTPUT
DC INPUT
AC OUTPUT
AC INPUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5A FUSE STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 (3,8) DIA.

(4 PLACES) CLEARANCE FOR
CARD EDGE OR HEADER CONNECTOR #6 SCREW
FOR LOGIC SIGNALS (SEE NOTES) STATUS LED
MODULE HOLD DOWN

STRIP WITH THUMB SCREWS
2.20 (55,9)
MAX.
0.75
(19,1)
8 CHANNEL RACK: G5
Part No. 70GRCK8 NOTE: MAXIMUM
TERMINAL
Dimensions are shown in inches SCREW TORQUE
NOT TO EXCEED
(and millimeters). 5 IN-LBS.
All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25) 6.00 (152,4)
unless otherwise specified. .620 (15,75) 5.125 (130,18)
LOGIC SUPPLY .250 (6,35)
TERMINAL STRIP
+–
HOLES FOR USER
INSTALLED JUMPER
System 50
(22 AWG) COPPER
WIRE
2.750
(69,85) 3.250
(82,55)
PIN 1
50 PIN STRAIGHT
HEADER CONNECTOR
STANDOFF I.D.
FUSE STATUS LED 0.15 (3,8) DIA.
PULLER ON THE MODULE (4 PLACES)
CLEARANCE
FOR #6 SCREW
3.40
(86,4)
MAX.
.75
(19,1)
.093 (2,36) REF.
System 50
System 50
8 CHANNEL RACK: OpenLine® System 50

Part No. 70LRCK8
Dimensions are shown in inches 3.5 (88.90)
(and millimeters). .24 (6.05)
All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25) .25
(6.35) 3.0 (76.20)
M0 M1 M2 M3
50-PIN
STRAIGHT
50
49
A B
HEADER
CONNECTOR
REMOVABLE JUMPER
CONNNECTS GND
3.8 TO PLATED HOLE
(96.52) FOR GROUNDING
4.3
(108.46)
3.15A FUSE
PIN 1
2
1
FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL STRIP
STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 NOTE: MAXIMUM

(3.81) DIA. (4 PLACES) TERMINAL SCREW
CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREW TORQUE NOT TO
EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
3.4
LOGIC SUPPLY (85.93)
TERMINAL STRIP MAX
+5 +5 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
TOP ROW: + LOGIC SUPPLY
BOTTOM ROW: GND .75
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 (19.05)
REF
SCHEMATIC: Part Nos. 70RCK8, 70MRCK8
LOGIC SUPPLY – 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FIELD

TERMINAL STRIP
System 50
+ WIRING
TERMINAL
STRIP
1 5A FUSE
2
• • • 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4
26 25 50 49 5
24 23 48 47
22 21 46 45 MODULE
20 19 44 43
18 17 42 41 POSITION
16 15 40 39
14 13 38 37
12 11 36 35
10 9 34 33
8 7 N/C 32 31 N/C
6 5 N/C 30 29 N/C
4 3 N/C 28 27 N/C
2 1 26 25
24 23 N/C
22 21 N/C
20 19 N/C
26-PIN EDGE 18 17 N/C
CONNECTOR 16 15 N/C
FOR LOGIC 14 13 N/C
SIGNALS 12 11 N/C
10 9 N/C
8 7 N/C 3.3K
6 5 N/C
4 3 N/C
2 1
50-PIN EDGE
OR HEADER
CONNECTOR USER INSTALLABLE JUMPERS
FOR LOGIC FOR +VCC (3 PLACES)
SIGNALS
System 50
System 50
SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70GRCK8
LOGIC SUPPLY
TERMINAL STRIP
–
+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FIELD
WIRING
TERMINAL
STRIP
USER INSTALLABLE
JUMPER FOR +VCC 1
2
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4
50 49 5
48 47
46 45
44 43 MODULE
42 41 POSITION
40 39
38 37
36 35
34 33
32 31 N/C
30 29 N/C
28 27 N/C
26 25 N/C
24 23 N/C
22 21 N/C
20 19 N/C
18 17 N/C
16 15 N/C
14 13 N/C
12 11 N/C
10 9 N/C
8 7 N/C
6 5 N/C
4 3 N/C 3.3K
2 1 N/C
50 PIN HEADER
CONNECTOR FOR
LOGIC SIGNALS
SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70LRCK8
–
LOGIC
SUPPLY –
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
TERMINAL + FIELD
STRIP + WIRING
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 TERMINAL
STRIP
1
2
3
4
M0 M1 M2 M3
MODULE
LOCATION
5
50 49 6
48 47 7
46 45
44 43 8
42 41 9
40 39
38 37
36 35
34 33
32 31 N/C
30 29 N/C
28 27 N/C
26 25 N/C
System 50
24 23 N/C
22 21 N/C
20 19 N/C
18 17 N/C
16 15 N/C
14 13 N/C
12 11 N/C PULL-UP RESISTOR
10 9 N/C NETWORK 10K OHM
8 7 N/C
6 5 N/C
4 3 N/C
2 1 N/C

Available from your local Grayhill
Part Number I/O Description UL CSA Style Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact
70RCK8 8 Card edge X X Standard a local Sales Office, an authorized local
70RCK8-HL 8 50-pin header with ejector levers X X Standard Distributor or Grayhill.
70MRCK8-EC 8 Card edge X X Mini
70MRCK8-HL 8 50-pin header with ejector levers X X Mini
70GRCK8-HL 8 50-pin header with ejector levers X X G5
70LRCK8-HL 8 50-pin header with ejector levers Pend Pend OpenLine®
70LRCK8-DIN 8 50-pin header with DIN rail mount Pend Pend OpenLine®
System 50
System 50
RACKS
16 Channel
FEATURES
• Available for Standard, Miniature, G5 and
OpenLine® Modules

Part No. 70RCK16
(and millimeters).
unless otherwise specified. NOTE: MAXIMUM
TERMINAL SCREW
TORQUE NOT TO
EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
14.05 (356,9)
13.55 (344,2) 0.25

(6,4)
0.40 50 PIN EDGE CARD OR HEADER
(10,2) CONNECTOR FOR LOGIC SIGNALS 5A
(SEE NOTES) FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL STRIP FUSE
LOGIC SUPPLY
TERMINAL STRIP
0.45 (11,4)
+– 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
3.50
(88,9)
2.60 (66,0)
3.00
(76,2)
Y AC INPUT
B AC OUTPUT
W DC INPUT
R DC OUTPUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
System 50
KEY
SLOT PIN 1 STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 (3,8) DIA.
PINS (4 PLACES) CLEARANCE 0.25 (6,4)
USER INSTALLABLE
11/13 JUMPER FOR +VCC (2 PLACES) FOR #6 SCREWS
STATUS LED
2.20
(55,9)
MAX.
0.75 (19,1)
System 50
System 50
Part No. 70MRCK16

(and millimeters).
All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25) NOTE: MAXIMUM
TERMINAL SCREW
unless otherwise specified. TORQUE NOT TO
EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
0.40 10.00 (254,0)

(10,2)
9.35 (237,5) 0.2 (5,1)
.45 LOGIC SUPPLY FIELD WIRING
1,4) TERMINAL STRIP TERMINAL STRIP 5A FUSE
+ –
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
KEY 3.50
SLOT
.60 PINS 11/13 3.00 (88,9)
6,0) (76,2)
PIN 1 Y AC INPUT
B AC OUTPUT
W DC INPUT
R DC OUTPUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
USER INSTALLABLE JUMPER STATUS LED 0.25 (6,4)

FOR +VCC (2 PLACES)
STANDOFF I.D
CARD EDGE OR HEADER CONNECTOR 0.15 (3,8) DIA.
FOR LOGIC SIGNALS (SEE NOTES) (4 PLACES)
MODULE HOLD DOWN CLEARANCE
STRIP WITH THUMB SCREWS FOR #6 SCRE
2.20 (55,9)
MAX.
0.75
(19,1)
16 CHANNEL RACK: G5
Part No. 70GRCK16 NOTE: MAXIMUM

TERMINAL SCREW
Dimensions are shown in inches TORQUE NOT TO
(and millimeters). EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.

unless otherwise specified. 10.00 (254,0)
9.125 (231,8) 0.2 (5,1)

LOGIC SUPPLY FIELD WIRING
+–
System 50
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
3.25
2.75 (82,6)
(69,9)
PIN 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 (3,8) DIA. 0.25 (6,4)

(4 PLACES) CLEARANCE STATUS LED
FOR #6 SCREW ON THE MODULE
3.39
(86,1)
MAX.
.093 (2,36) REF.
0.75
(19,1)
System 50
System 50
16 CHANNEL RACK: G5 Control and Field Connection Terminal Blocks

Part No. 70GRCK16T
(and millimeters).
NOTE: MAXIMUM
TERMINAL SCREW
TORQUE NOT TO
EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
9.500 (241,3)
9.000 (228,6)
.250 (6,35)
32 POSITION TERMINAL STRIP
FOR FIELD WIRING .250 (6,35)
SWAGED STANDOFF THRU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
HOLE .15 (3,81) DIA. (4 PLACES)
FIELD
(CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREW)
SPARE FUSE 3.250

(82,55)
CONTROL
2.750
(69,85)
2 POSITION
TERMINAL STRIP
FOR CONTROL
LOGIC +VCC –
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
RES. 3.3 KΩ/.25W KNURL 32 POS. TERMINAL

(2 PLACES) FASTENER STRIP FOR CONTROL
(16 PLACES) LOGIC STRIP
3.392
(86,16)
REF.
.750
(19,05)
REF. 1.687
(42,85)
16 CHANNEL RACK: G5 Channel-to-Channel Isolation
Part No. 70GRCK16I and 70GRCK16I-DIN

(and millimeters).
DIN CARRIER
9.160 ± .020 (232,66 ± 0,51)
PANEL MOUNT
9.000 ± .010 (228,6 ± 0,25)
8.500 ± .010 (215,9 ± 0,25)
32 POSITION TERMINAL STRIP
FOR FIELD WIRING
System 50
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
FIELD
PANEL
MOUNT
4.270
± .010
(108,46
3.500 ± .010 ± 0,25)
(88,9 ± 0,25)
DIN
CARRIER
4.800
NOTE: MAXIMUM ± .020
CONTROL
TERMINAL SCREW (121,92

TORQUE NOT TO ± 0,51)
EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
RES. 3.3 KΩ/.25W KNURL 32 POS. TERMINAL

(16 PLACES) FASTENER STRIP FOR CONTROL
(16 PLACES) LOGIC STRIP
4.00
(101,6)
REF.
2.125
(53,98)
System 50
System 50
16 CHANNEL RACK: OpenLine® for System 50

Part No. 70LRCK16-HL
(and millimeters).
All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25) 5.5 (139.70)
unless otherwise specified. .24
(6.05) .25
(6.35) 5.0 (127.00)
M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7
50-PIN
STRAIGHT
HEADER
50
49
A B
CONNECTOR
REMOVABLE JUMPER
CONNNECTS GND
3.8 TO PLATED HOLE
(96.52) FOR GROUNDING
5A FUSE
4.3
(108.46) PIN 1
2
1
FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL STRIP
NOTE: MAXIMUM
TERMINAL SCREW
TORQUE NOT TO
STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
(3.81) DIA. (4 PLACES)
CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREW
3.4
(85.93)
.75 MAX
TOP ROW: + LOGIC SUPPLY +5 +5 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
BOTTOM ROW: GND (19.05)

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
REF
16 CHANNEL RACK: OpenLine® w/ DIN Rail Mount for System 50

(and millimeters). DIN CARRIER
All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25) 5.7 (143.76)
PCB
unless otherwise specified. 5.5 (139.70)
M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7
50-PIN
STRAIGHT
50
49
A B
HEADER
System 50
CONNECTOR
DIN CARRIER
REMOVABLE JUMPER
4.7 (119.13)
CONNNECTS GND
TO PLATED HOLE
5A FUSE FOR GROUNDING
PCB
4.3 (108.46) PIN 1
FIELD WIRING
2
1
TERMINAL STRIP
NOTE: MAXIMUM
TERMINAL SCREW
TORQUE NOT TO
EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
LOGIC SUPPLY
TERMINAL STRIP
TOP ROW: + LOGIC SUPPLY 3.8
BOTTOM ROW: GND +5 +5 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 (95.81)
REF
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
2.2
(56.49)
System 50
System 50
SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70GRCK16

LOGIC SUPPLY
TERMINAL STRIP
–
1 A FUSE
+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 FIELD
WIRING
TERMINAL
STRIP
USER INSTALLABLE
JUMPER FOR +VCC 1
2
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
4
50 49 5
48 47
46 45
44 43 MODULE
42 41 POSITION
40 39
38 37
36 35
34 33
32 31
30 29
28 27
26 25
24 23
22 21
20 19
18 17
16 15 N/C
14 13 N/C
12 11 N/C
10 9 N/C
8 7 N/C 3.3K
6 5 N/C
4 3 N/C
2 1
50 PIN HEADER
CONNECTOR FOR
LOGIC SIGNALS
SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70GRCK16T

System 50
SCHEMATIC: Part Nos. 70GRCK16I AND 70GRCK16I-DIN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
BARRIER STRIP
FOR FIELD WIRING
OF MODULE
1
2
MODULE
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
4 LOCATION
5
PULL-UP
RESISTOR
3.3 KΩ
CONTROL
BARRIER
STRIP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
+VCC
LOGIC
GND
System 50
System 50
SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70LRCK16-HL, -DIN
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
FIELD
– 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 WIRING
LOGIC TERMINAL
SUPPLY – STRIP
TERMINAL +
STRIP + 1
2
3
4
M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7
MODULE
LOCATION
5
50 49 6
48 47 7
46 45
44 43 8
42 41 9
40 39
38 37
36 35
34 33
32 31
30 29
28 27
26 25
24 23
22 21
20 19
18 17
16 15 N/C
14 13 N/C
12 11 N/C
10 9 N/C
8 7 N/C
6 5 N/C
4 3 N/C
2 1 N/C
SCHEMATIC: Part Nos. 70RCK16 and 70MRCK16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 FIELD
LOGIC SUPPLY – WIRING
TERMINAL STRIP + TERMINAL
STRIP
USER INSTALLABLE
JUMPER FOR +VCC 1 5A FUSE
(2 PLACES) 2
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
4
50 49 5
48 47
46 45
44 43 MODULE
42 41 POSITION
40 39
System 50
38 37
36 35
34 33
32 31
30 29
28 27
26 25
24 23
22 21
20 19
18 17
16 15 N/C
14 13 N/C
12 11 N/C
50 PIN EDGE 10 9 N/C
8 7 N/C 3.3K
OR HEADER 6 5 N/C
CONNECTOR FOR 4 3 N/C
LOGIC SIGNALS 2 1
System 50
System 50

70RCK16 16 Card edge X X Standard Available from your local Grayhill
70RCK16-HL 16 50-pin header with ejector levers X X Standard Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact
70MRCK16-EC 16 Card edge X X Mini a local Sales Office, an authorized local
70GRCK16-HL 16 50-pin header with ejector levers X X G5
70LRCK16-HL 16 50-pin header with ejector levers X X OpenLine®
70LRCK16-DIN 16 50-pin header with DIN rail mnt. X X OpenLine®
70GRCK16I 16 Positive or negative true logic*
–Panel Mount X X G5
70GRCK16I-DIN 16 Positive or negative true logic*
–DIN rail mount X X G5
70GRCK16T 16 Negative true logic*–Panel Mount X X G5
* Positive true logic applies to output modules only.
System 50
System 50
System 50
RACKS
24 Channel (In-Line)
FEATURES
• Available for Standard, Miniature, G5 and
OpenLine® Modules

Part No. 70RCK24
Dimensions are shown in inches (and millimeters).
Tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25) unless indicated otherwise.
NOTE: MAXIMUM 18.75 (476,3)

TERMINAL SCREW
TORQUE NOT TO 16.50 (419,1)
EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
11.00 (279,4)
5A FUSE
STANDOFF I.D.
FIELD WIRING 0.15 (3,8) DIA. (8 PLACES) 5.50 (139,7)
TERMINAL STRIP CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREWS
1.12
(28,4)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
4.50
(114,3)
4.00
(101,6)
System 50
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
– + Y AC INPUT
B AC OUTPUT
W DC INPUT
R DC OUTPUT
1A FUSE KEY SLOT 50 PIN EDGE CARD OR HEADER CONNECTOR

0.25 0.40 FOR LOGIC SIGNALS (SEE NOTES)
(10,2) PINS 23/25
(6,4) SOCKETS FOR 8.08 (205,2)
OPTIONAL 1A FUSE 2.60 (66,0)
LOGIC SUPPLY 1.00 (25.4) (2 PLACES)

TERMINAL STRIP
2.20 (55,9)
MAX.
0.75
(19,1)
System 50
System 50

Part No. 70MRCK24
All tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25) unless otherwise specified.
13.45 (341,6)
NOTE: MAXIMUM 12.00 (304,8)
TERMINAL SCREW 8.00 (203,2) FIELD WIRING TERMINAL
TORQUE NOT TO 0.35
STRIPS (3 PLACES) (8,9)
EXCEED 5 IN-LBS. 0.73 (18,5) 4.00 (101,6)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
5A FUSE
3.75
(95,3)
3.05
STATUS (77,5)
LED
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Y AC INPUT
B AC OUTPUT
– + W
R
DC INPUT
DC OUTPUT
SOCKETS
LOGIC FOR OPTIONAL PIN 1
SUPPLY 1A FUSE 0.40 (10,2) STANDOFF I.D.
TERMINAL KEY SLOT 0.15 (3,8) DIA.
STRIP 1A FUSE PINS 23/25 50 PIN EDGE CARD OR (8 PLACES)
HEADER CONNECTOR CLEARANCE
5.42 (137,7) 2.60 FOR LOGIC SIGNALS FOR #6 SCREWS
(66,0) (SEE NOTE)
MODULE HOLD DOWN STRIP
WITH THUMB SCREWS
2.20 (55,9)
MAX.
0.75 (19,1)
24 CHANNEL RACK: OpenLine®

Part No. 70LRCK24
7.500
(190,5)
0.250 7.000
(6,3) (177,8)
M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11
A B
50
49
50-PIN
System 50
REMOVABLE JUMPER
STRAIGHT
CONNECTS GND
HEADER
TO EARTH GROUND
4.270 CONNECTOR
(108,5)
3.800
(96,5) PIN 1
1
2
NOTE: MAXIMUM
5A FUSE TERMINAL SCREW
FIELD WIRING TORQUE NOT TO
0.238 STANDOFF I.D. (3,81) DIA. TERMINAL STRIP EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
(6,0) (4 PLACES) CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREW
3.383
+5 +5 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
(85,9)
MAX.
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
0.750 (19,0)
REF.
TOP ROW: + LOGIC SUPPLY BOTTOM ROW: GROUND
System 50
System 50
24 CHANNEL RACK: OpenLine® DIN Rail Mount for System 50

Dimensions are shown in
inches (and millimeters).
DIN CARRIER
7.7 (194.56)
PCB 7.5 (190.50)
M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11
50-PIN
50
STRAIGHT
49
A B
DIN CARRIER HEADER REMOVABLE

4.7 (119.13) CONNECTOR JUMPER
CONNECTS
GND TO
PLATED HOLE
PCB FOR GROUNDING
4.3 (108.46)
PIN 1
2
1
FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL STRIP
NOTE: MAXIMUM
5A FUSE TERMINAL SCREW
TORQUE NOT TO
EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
LOGIC SUPPLY
TERMINAL STRIP
TOP ROW:
+ LOGIC SUPPLY
BOTTOM ROW: GND 3.8
+5 +5 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
(95.81)
REF
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
2.2
(56.49)
SCHEMATIC: Part Nos. 70RCK24 and 70MRCK24
LOGIC SUPPLY
TERMINAL STRIP
–
FIELD
+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 WIRING
1A TERMINAL
STRIP
OPTIONAL 1 5A
1A FUSE 2
System 50
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
4
50 49 5
48 47
46 45
44 43
42 41 MODULE
40
38
39
37
POSITION
36 35
34 33
32 31
30 29
28 27
26 25
24 23
22 21
20 19
18 17
16 15
14 13
12 11
10 9
8 7
6 5
4 3
2 1
50 PIN EDGE
CARD OR
HEADER 3.3K
CONNECTOR
FOR LOGIC
SIGNALS
System 50
System 50
SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70LRCK24
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
LOGIC – FIELD
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 WIRING
SUPPLY –
MOUNTING POST + TERMINAL
FOR EARTH GROUND TERMINAL
+ 1 STRIP
CONNECTION STRIP 2
3
4
M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11
MODULE
LOCATION
5
50 49 6
48 47 7
46 45
44 43 8
42 41 9
40 39
38 37
36 35
34 33
32 31
30 29
28 27
26 25
24 23
22 21
20 19
18 17
16 15
14 13
12 11
10 9
8 7
6 5
4 3
2 1
PULL-UP RESISTOR
NETWORK 10K OHM
(3 PLACES)
Part Number I/O Description UL CSA Style Available from your local Grayhill Distribu-
tor. For prices and discounts, contact a local
70RCK24 24 Card edge X X Standard
Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor, or
70RCK24-HL 24 50-pin header with ejector levers X X Standard
Grayhill.
70MRCK24-EC 24 Card edge X X Mini
70LRCK24-HL 24 50-pin header with ejector levers X X OpenLine ®
70LRCK24-DIN 24 50-pin header, DIN rail mount X X OpenLine®
System 50
System 50
System 50
RACKS
24 Channel
FEATURES
• Available for Miniature, G5 and
OpenLine® Modules
Part No. 70MRCQ24

(and millimeters).
Tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25)
0.40 8.00 (203,2)
(10,2) 0.25 (6,4)
7.50 (190,5)
(POSITIONS 0-11)
1A FUSE + –
NOTE: MAXIMUM
TERMINAL SCREW
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
SOCKETS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1.70 FOR TORQUE NOT TO

(43,2) EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
OPTIONAL
1A FUSE
40
KEY SLOT 6.00

PINS 23/25 (152,4)
10 13
11 12
2.60
0 23
1 22
2 21
3 20
4 19
5 18
6 17
7 16
8 15
9 14
(66,0)
5.50
(139,7)
PIN 1
1
System 50
W
R
B
Y
DC OUTPUT
DC INPUT
AC OUTPUT
AC INPUT
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
5A
STATUS LED FUSE 0.25 (6,4)
FIELD WIRING STANDOFF I.D.

50 PIN EDGE CARD OR TERMINAL STRIPS
HEADER CONNECTOR FOR 0.15 (3,8) DIA.
(POSITIONS 12-23) (4 PLACES)
LOGIC SIGNALS (SEE SCHEMATIC)
CLEARANCE
FOR #6 SCREWS
MODULE HOLD DOWN
STRIP WITH THUMB SCREWS
2.20 (55,9)
MAX.
0.75
(19,1)
System 50
System 50
24 CHANNEL RACK: G5 24 Channel Racks

Part No. 70GRCQ24
(and millimeters).
7.50 (190,5)
7.00 (177,8) .25 (6,4)
HOLES FOR USER NOTE: MAXIMUM

INSTALLED JUMPER TERMINAL SCREW
(22 AWG) COPPER TORQUE NOT TO
WIRE EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
50 PIN STRAIGHT 6.25

HEADER CONNECTOR (158,8)
5.75
PIN 1 (146,1)
1.675
(42,55)
.075 .25 (6,4)

(1,91) STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 (3,81) DIA.
(4 PLACES) CLEARANCE
FOR #6 SCREW
3.380
(85,85)
.093 (2,36) NYLON STANDOFF

REF. (1 PLACE) .750 (19,05) REF.
System 50
System 50
System 50
SCHEMATIC: PART NO. 70MRCQ24 AND 70GRCQ24
LOGIC SUPPLY
TERMINAL STRIP
+ – 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL STRIP
1 A FUSE
5A FUSES
1
(MINI RACKS ONLY)
OPTIONAL 2
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1A FUSE
4
5
49 MODULE
POSITION
47
45
43
41
39
37
35
33
31
29
27
25
LED STATUS
INDICATORS
(MINI RACKS ONLY)
ALL
EVEN PULL UP RESISTOR
PINS NETWORK 3.3 KW
2-50 (3 PLACES)
LED STATUS
INDICATORS
23
21 (MINI RACKS ONLY)
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
50 PIN 5
MODULE
CONNECTOR POSITION
4
23 3 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
2
1 5A FUSES
(MINI RACKS ONLY)
System 50
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
Part Number I/O Description UL CSA Style Available from your local Grayhill Distribu-
tor. For prices and discounts, contact a local
70MRCQ24-EC 24 Card edge X X Mini Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor, or
70MRCQ24-HL 24 50-pin header with ejector levers X X Mini Grayhill.
70GRCQ24-HL 24 50-pin header with ejector levers X X G5
System 50
System 50
RACKS
32 Channel
FEATURES
• For Use with MicroDac or PAMUX
Controllers
• Available for G5 I/O Modules
32 CHANNEL RACK: G5
Part No. 70GRCM32

Dimensions are in inches (and millimeters).
unless indicated otherwise.
10.000 (254,00)
9.500 (241,3) .250 (6,35)
LOGIC SUPPLY FIELD WIRING .250 (6,35)

FUSE 5A
0Ω JUMPER
49
50 PIN STRAIGHT 6.500

HEADER CONNECTOR (165,1)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 6.000
(152,4)
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
1
STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 (3,81) DIA.

FOR #6 SCREW
System 50
NOTE: MAXIMUM
TERMINAL SCREW
TORQUE NOT TO
EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
3.338
(84,79)
REF.
.750 (19,05)
REF.
System 50
System 50
SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70GRCM32
LOGIC SUPPLY
TERMINAL STRIP
FIELD
5A + – 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 WIRING
FUSE TERMINAL
STRIPS
USER INSTALLABLE (POSITIONS
1
JUMPER FOR +VCC 0-15)
2
49 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
4
5
47
45
43
41
39 MODULE
37 POSITION
35
33
31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
50
48
46
44
42
40
38
36
34 3.3KΩ
32
30 RESISTOR
28
26
NETWORKS
24
22
20
18
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16 MODULE
5 POSITION
50 PIN EDGE 4
OR HEADER 3
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
2
CONNECTOR 1
FOR LOGIC
SIGNALS FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL STRIPS
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 (POSITIONS 16-31)
System 50
Part Number I/O Description UL CSA Style For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
Office, an authorized local Distributor, or Grayhill.
70GRCM32-HL 32 50-pin header with ejector levers X X G5
System 50
System 50
RACKS
32 Channel Parallel
Controller Board for
72-PMX-32D
FEATURES
32with
• For Use Module
PAMUX Racks and Bases
Controllers
• Available for G5 I/O Modules
Part No. 70GRCP32

(and millimeters).
10.50 (266,7)
10.00 (254,00) .250 (6,35)
.250 (6,35)
+5V GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
POWER
ON LED
FUSE 2A 7.00
70GRCP32-HL
(177,8)
6.50
(165,1)
50 PIN STRAIGHT
HEADER CONNECTOR
RES NET 8 PIN WITH

SOCKET (3 PLACES)
System 50
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 (3,81) DIA.

FOR #6 SCREW
NOTE: MAXIMUM
TERMINAL SCREW
TORQUE NOT TO
EXCEED 5 IN-LBS.
3.40 3.87
(86,36) (98,3)
REF. MAX.
.750 (19,05)
REF
System 50
System 50
SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70GRCP32
TERMINATION RESISTOR
+5V SOCKETS. (3 PLACES)
FIELD WIRING SEE NOTE.
TERMINAL STRIPS
+5V GND (4 PLACES)
+ – 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
50 PIN HEADER GND
CONNECTORS
FOR PARALLEL
2A 1 NETWORK
FUSE 2
3 MODULE
4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
5
POSITION
39 1 1 1
40 3 3 3
41 5 5 5
42 7 7 7
43 9 9 9
44 11 11 11
45 13 13 13
46 15 15 15
47 17 17 32
RED 48 19 19 30
49 21 21 28
LED 50 23 23 26
51 25 25 24
52 27 27 22
53 29 29 20
54 31 31 18
33 33 16
19 35 35 14
21 37 37 12
+5V 23 TO 72-PMX--32D 39 39 10
41 41 8
25 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BRAIN BOARD 43 43 6
45 45 4
27 47 47 2
49 49 17
29
31
33 R1 R2 2 2
34 4 4
GND 35 6 6 TO
36 R1 R2 8 8 GND 72-PMX-32D
37 PULL UP RESISTOR 10 10
38 12 12 BRAIN
NETWORK 3.3K½ 14 14
(4 PLACES) 16 16 BOARD
18 18
TO 72-PMX-32D 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 20 20
BRAIN BOARD TO 72-PMX-32D 22 22
24 24
BRAIN BOARD 26 26
28 28
30 30
70 32 32
69 34 34
68 36 36
67 38 38
66 40 40
65 42 42
64 44 44
63 46 46
62 48 48
61 50 50
60
59
58
57
56
55
5
4 MODULE GND
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
3 POSITION
2
1
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
NOTE: TERMINATION RESISTORS ARE PROVIDED ON EVERY I/O RACK.

THEY ARE ONLY REQUIRED ON THE LAST RACK IN THE NETWORK.
System 50
Part Number I/O Description UL CSA Style Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
70GRCP32-HL 32 50-pin header with ejector levers X X G5
System 50
I/O MODULES
I/O Modules
Contents: I/O Modules
I/O MODULES
• Mix Digital and Analog
Modules on the Same
Rack
• Choice of Standard,
Miniature, Fusible G5
Package or Dual Point
OpenLine® Styles
• Companion Racks for All
Packages Provide Mounting
and Wiring Termination
Solutions Page
• Combine with Controller
Boards in a Distributed I/O ENGINEERING INFORMATION, DIGITAL I/O MODULES ................................ 2
System or Stand Alone
Configuration SELECTION CHART, DIGITAL I/O MODULES .................................................. 5
DIGITAL I/O MODULES

AC Output Modules .............................................................................................. 6
WARRANTY
All products in this section are DC Output Modules .............................................................................................. 8
covered by a limited two-year Dry Contact and Electromechanical Relay Output Modules ............................ 10
warranty from the date of purchase. Manual Override Output Modules ...................................................................... 12
All digital I/O and OpenLine® analog AC Input Modules ............................................................................................... 14
I/O are covered with a lifetime AC/DC Input Modules ........................................................................................ 16
warranty.
DC Input Modules ............................................................................................... 18
Contact Closure Input Modules ......................................................................... 20
ENGINEERING INFORMATION AND SELECTION CHART,

ANALOG I/O MODULES ................................................................................... 21
ANALOG I/O MODULES

Voltage and Current Output Modules ................................................................ 25
Voltage Input Modules ....................................................................................... 27
Current Input Modules ........................................................................................ 30
Thermocouple Input Modules ............................................................................ 32
I/O Modules
RTD Input Modules ............................................................................................ 34
I/O
Digital I/O Module Engineering Information
I/O MODULES
Our line of pluggable input and output modules transients, and have built-in RC snubber Standard 22.2 No. 14-95M and are documented
provide a low cost, versatile method for networks for increased capability with inductive in CSA file LR38763. Additionally, OpenLine®
interconnecting real world analog and digital loads. modules were tested and passed CSA 22.2
signals to data acquisition, monitoring, or control No. 213-M1987 Class I, Div. 2 Groups A, B, C
systems. All modules provide an optically DC output modules can operate DC loads over and D. Parts bearing the CE logo indicate
isolated barrier between sensitive a wide voltage range and have built-in voltage conformance with EN50082-2 and EN50081-2
microprocessor or digital logic circuits and spike protection. (89/336/EEC EMC directive) as well as EN60950
field power devices. (61010-1) for the low voltage directive. Contact
DIGITAL INPUT MODULES Grayhill for copies of our Declaration of
In the G5 and OpenLine® packages, analog Digital input modules are used to monitor the Conformity or visit out website. Parts bearing
and digital I/O modules are available with the status of a load or a sensor (such as a limit the TÜV logo indicate that they were the agency
same pin-out. This gives the flexibility of mixing switch, pressure switch, or temperature which performed the EN60950 evaluation.
and matching module types on the same switch). The output of these modules is a logic
mounting rack or base; making them perfect level signal which corresponds to the status of CONSTRUCTION AND LIFETIME
in applications which require interface to a the device being monitored. A high level output
variety of different sensors and loads. WARRANTY
signal indicates the load is off (the switch is All of our I/O modules are hard potted with
open). A low level output signal indicates the thermally conductive epoxy to withstand harsh
The case color of the single point modules load is on (the switch is closed). Input modules
identify their function. The industry standard industrial environments. The modules provide
are designed to give fast, clean switching by optical isolation, immunity to mechanical shock
for single point I/O module case colors is: providing filtering and hysteresis.
Digital AC Output Module = Black Case and vibration, and operate over a wide
Digital DC Output Module = Red Case temperature range. The module cases are a
Input and output modules are compatible in solvent resistant thermoplastic which meets
Digital AC Input Module = Yellow Case that the output of one can drive the input of the
Digital DC Input Module = White Case UL94-V-0 rating. The terminal pins are a tin-
other. plated copper wire. Component selection and
surface mount construction allow low operating
DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULES junction temperatures for long life. Superior
Digital output modules are used to switch AC UL, CSA AND CE APPROVALS design, rigorous testing, and field data give us
and DC loads such as solenoids, motors, or As one of the world's leading manufacturers of the confidence to back our I/O modules with
lamps from logic signal levels. Their inputs are I/O modules, we strive to assure that our the industry's first lifetime warranty.
directly compatible with TTL or CMOS interface products comply with all of the applicable
circuitry. international standards. In doing so, we believe
your products will also be readily accepted and I/O MODULE WIRING
AC output modules have zero voltage turn-on easily certified. All modules shown in this Analog and digital modules can be placed at
of the load to greatly reduce generated EMI section have been tested to UL Standard 508 any I/O location, however, to minimize the
and RFI. They are highly immune to electrical and are documented in UL file number E58632. possibility of crosstalk and noise pickup it is a
Similarly, they have been tested to CSA good practice to group similar module types
together. 14 or 16 gauge wire is typically used
to wire the field devices to the I/O rack terminal
block.
PART NUMBER EXPLANATION: Digital I/O Modules
Module Type
70 = Digital Module, Standard Package
70G = Digital Module, G5 Package
70L = Digital Module, OpenLine® Package
70M = Digital Module, Mini Package
I/O Modules
Function
OAC = Digital Output AC
ODC = Digital Output DC
IAC = Digital Input AC
70M-ODC5A IDC = Digital Input DC
Suffix
AC Inputs: Blank = 120 Vac A = 220 Vac
DC Inputs: Blank = 3-32 Vdc B = Fast Switching NP = 15-32 Vac/10-32 Vdc
G = 35-60 Vac/Vdc D = 2.5–28 Vdc K = 2.5-16 Vdc
L = Inductive loads S = Dry Contacts
AC Outputs: Blank = 120 Vac A = 220 Vac A-11 = Non-Zero Cross
MA = 120 Vac, Manual Override A-5 = Normally Closed
AMA = 240 Vac, Manual Override
DC Outputs: Blank = 3-60 Vdc Fast A = 4-200 Vdc R = Dry Contact
MA = 3-60 Vdc, Manual Override B = 3-60 Vdc, Low Leakage
Logic Supply Voltage or Range
Digital Modules: Blank = 4.5-28 Vdc (OpenLine®)
5 Vdc, 15 Vdc, 24 Vdc = Logic Supply Voltage (Standard, Mini, G5)
Analog Modules: 4.75-5.25 Vdc
I/O
Digital I/O Modules Engineering Information
DIMENSIONS: OpenLine® Digital Modules

Dimensions shown in inches (and millimeters).
Tolerances are ± .010 (0,25) unless indicated otherwise.
Module Type Output Input

I/O Module Pin # Function Function
1 Output A+ Input A+
2 Output A- Input A-
3 Output B+ Input B+ FUSE HOLDERS
4 Output B- Input B- (OUTPUTS ONLY) GREEN STATUS
5 Logic Gnd Logic Gnd LEDS
6 Vcc Vcc
7 Ch. A Input Ch. A Status
8 Ch. B Input Ch. B Status DATE
9 Module ID Module ID CODE
.025 2.49
(0,635) (63,25)
SQ. 2.23
.51 .34 (56,64)
2.09 (53,09) (8,64)
(12,95)
.19
(4,83) .22 .10 .03
(5,59) (2,54) (0,76) .38
(9,65)
PIN 1
PIN 2
PIN 3
PIN 4
PIN 5
PIN 6
PIN 7
PIN 8
PIN 9
.14 .24 (6,10)

(3,56)
2.70 (68,58)
Note: For PC board layout information, request Bulletin #745
DIMENSIONS: G5 Digital Modules

Input Modules Ouput Modules
1.90 (48,3) 1.90 (48,3)
.46 .46
(11,7) (11,7)
GREEN STATUS LED
I/O Modules
GREEN FUSE HOLDER
STATUS LED
4-40 X 2-1/2" PHILLIPS HOLD-

DOWN SCREW INCLUDED
WITH EACH MODULE
MAXIMUM TORQUE = 5 FT-LB
2.55
(64,8)
2.20
O .040/.042 2.20
(55,9) O .040/.042
(1,02/1,07) (55,9)
(1,02/1,07)
5 4 3 2 1 .235 (5,97) 4 3 2 1 .235 (5,97)

.20 (5,1)
.20 (5,1)
.40 (10,2)
.40 (10,2)
.90 (22,9) .20 (5,1) .20 (5,1)
.90 (22,9)
1.15 (29,2) .15 (3,8) .15 (3,8)
1.15 (29,2)
1.35 (34,3)
1.35 (34,3)
1.55 (39,4)
I/O
Digital I/O Modules Engineering Information
DIMENSIONS: Standard and Miniature Digital Modules

Standard Module Miniature Module

1.00 (25,4)
.60 (15,2)
4–40 X 1-1/2" PHILLIPS HOLD- .40 (10,2)

DOWN SCREW INCLUDED
WITH EACH MODULE
1.70 (43,2)
1.70 (43,2)
1.25 Ø .040/.042
(31,8) 1.00
(1,02/1,07) Ø .040/.042
.235 ± .02 (25,4)
(1,02/1,07)
(6,0 ± 0,52)
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
.20 (5,1) .235 ±.020

(6,0 ± 0,52)
.30 (7,6)
.30 (7,6) .30 (7,6)
.10 (2,5)
.40 (10,2) .40 (10,2)
.90 (22,9) OUTPUT .90 (22,9) OUTPUT
MODULES MODULES
1.10 (27,9) HAVE ONLY 1.10 (27,9) HAVE ONLY
1.30 (33,0) TERMINALS TERMINALS
NUMBER 1-4 1.30 (33,0) NUMBER 1-4
WIRING DIAGRAM: Digital I/O Modules
LOAD HOT
DIGITAL 2 1 AC SUPPLY
AC OUTPUT
NEUTRAL
DIGITAL LOAD +
DC OUTPUT 2 1 DC SUPPLY
–
I/O Modules
HOT
DIGITAL 2 1 AC SUPPLY
AC INPUT
NEUTRAL
+
DIGITAL 2 1 DC SUPPLY
DC INPUT
–
DIGITAL
CONTACT 2 1
CLOSURE
I/O
Digital I/O Module Selection Chart
I/O MODULE SIZE
Miniature Standard G5 OpenLine®

Saves 35% Space Compatible Industry Size Fused Outputs, Two Channel,
Integral LED Fused Outputs,
Integral LED
FUNCTION
(Check Specifications for Input and Output combinations, Feature or Option availability.)
Load Control Vcc Unique Options

Digital 120 Vac 5 Vdc Random Turn-on
220 Vac 15 Vdc Normally Closed
AC Output 24 Vdc Manual Override
4.5-28 Vdc Inductive Load
Load Control Vcc Unique Options

60 Vdc 5 Vdc Dry Contacts
Digital 200 Vdc 15 Vdc Manual Override
DC Output 24 Vdc
4.5-28 Vdc
Supply Vcc Input Voltage Unique Options

5 Vdc 120 Vac High DC
Digital 15 Vdc 220 Vac Voltage
AC Input 24 Vdc Input
4.5-28 Vdc
Supply Vcc Input Voltage Unique Options
I/O Modules
5 Vdc 3 to 32 Vdc 10 to 32 Vdc/
Digital 15 Vdc 15 to 32 Vac
DC Input 24 Vdc 8 KHz Switching
4.5-28 Vdc 35 to 60 Vac/Vdc
Contact Closure
Module Calibrator/Programmer
Test Digital The field programmer can be used to test, digital I/O modules. The programmer connects to
I/O Modules calibrate and transfer data to smart OpenLine® a PC through an RS-232 serial port. Software is
modules. On-board switches also allow testing of included to communicate with smart I/O modules.
Part Number Description
Programmer/Calibrator
70L-PROG Field programmer/calibrator for OpenLine® I/O
I/O
AC Output Modules
FEATURES
• Transient Protection: Meets the
requirements of IEEE 472, “Surge
Withstanding Capability Test”
• SPST, Normally Open
• Zero Crossing Turn-On
• UL, CSA, CE, TÜV Certified
• Optical Isolation
• OpenLine® and G5 Modules
Provide Replaceable 5x20 mm
Glass Fuses
• Built-in Status LED
• Lifetime Warranty
70L-OAC 70G-OAC 70-OAC 70M-OAC
DIMENSIONS 4 Maximum Current Versus

STANDARD, G5 PACKAGES
LOAD CURRENT (AMPS)
For complete dimensional drawings, see pages MINIATURE PACKAGE

Ambient Temperature
L-4 or L-5. 3 The chart indicates continuous current to limit
the junction temperatures to 100°C. Information
OPENLINE PACKAGE/CH
FUSES 2 is based on steady state heat transfer in a 2
cubic foot sealed enclosure.
G5 Fuses are 5 Amp Littelfuse part number
217005 or equivalent. OpenLine® fuses are 1
3.15 Amp Littelfuse part number 2173.15.
-40˚ -20˚ 0 20˚ 40˚ 60˚ 80˚ 100˚

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (˚C)
CIRCUITRY Figure 1
Standard, Mini, G5 OpenLine®
TYPICAL WIRING FOR MODULE 0
LOAD 1 I/O MODULE
PIN #
VAC GND 5
SNUBBER
CHANNEL A
Vcc 6 1 1 LOAD
LOAD 2
A OPTICAL SNUBBER
ISOLATION
TRIGGER CH. A CONTROL 7 2 2

CIRCUIT
3 3
B OPTICAL SNUBBER
ISOLATION
Rx
+ 3 CH. B CONTROL 4 4 LOAD
CHANNEL B
DC CONTROL 2.15K
– 4 TERMINAL
MODULE ID RACK
OR BLOCK #
MODULE BASE
Fuse and status LED in G5 and OpenLine modules only.
I/O Modules
SPECIFICATIONS: By Package Style

Package Style Std (70-) Mini (70M-) G5 (70G-) OL (70L-)
Specifications Units
1
Load Current Range A rms 0.03 to 3.5 0.03 to 3.0 0.03 to 3.5 0.03 to 2.0/CH
Maximum 1 Cycle Surge 2 A rms 80 80 80 30
Maximum Turn-On-Time (60 Hz)3 mSec 8.33 8.33 8.33 8.33
Maximum Turn-Off Time (60 Hz) mSec 8.33 8.33 8.33 8.33
Static dv/dt7 V/µsec 3000 3000 3000 3000
Typ. Power Dissipation W/A 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Isolation Voltage 4 V rms 4000 4000 4000 2500
Vibration5 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 IEC68-2-6
Mechanical Shock6 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 MIL-STD-202 IEC68-2-27
Storage Temp. Range °C -40 to 125 -40 to 125 -40 to 125 -40 to 100
Operating Temp. Range °C -40 to 100 -40 to 100 -40 to 100 -40 to 85
Warranty Lifetime Lifetime Lifetime Lifetime
1
See Figure 1 for derating.
2
Maximum 10 cycle surge is 50% of 1 cycle surge. Application of maximum surge may not be repeated until module temperature has returned
to its steady state value.
3
Except 70-OAC5A5 which is 200 µSec and 70-OAC5A-11, 70M-OAC5A-11, and 70G-OAC5A-11 which are 100 µSec.
4
Field to logic and channel-to-channel if Grayhill racks are used.
5
MIL-STD-202, Method 204, 20 , 10-2000 Hz or IEC68-2-6, 0.15 mm/sec2, 10-150 Hz.
6
MIL-STD-202, Method 213, Condition F, 1500G or IEC68-2-27, 11 mS, 15g.
7
Except part numbers with -L suffix which have a dv/dt rating of 200 V/µSec.
I/O
AC Output Modules
SPECIFICATIONS: By Part Number

Standard and Miniature Modules
Type/Function Grayhill Part Number
Miniature, Normally Open, Random Turn-on 70M-OAC5A-11
Miniature, Normally Open, Zero Voltage Turn-on (ZVT) 70M-OAC5 70M-OAC5A 70M-OAC15 70M-OAC15A 70M-OAC24 70M-OAC24A
Miniature, Normally Open, ZVT, Inductive Load 70M-OAC5-L 70M-OAC5A-L
Standard, Normally Closed, Random Turn-on 70-OAC5A5
Standard, Normally Open, Random Turn-on 70-OAC5A-11 70-OAC24A-11
Standard, Normally Open, ZVT 70-OAC5 70-OAC5A 70-OAC15 70-OAC15A 70-OAC24 70-OAC24A
Standard, Normally Open, ZVT, Inductive Load 70-OAC5-L 70-OAC5A-L
Nominal Line Voltage Vac 120 240 120 240 120 240
Load Voltage Range Vac 24-140 24-280 24-140 24-280 24-140 24-280
Minimum Peak Blocking Voltage Volts 400 600 400 600 400 600
Maximum Off-state Leakage @ 60Hz mA, rms 2 4 2 4 2 4
Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 15 15 24 24
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 2.5-10 2.5-10 10-18 10-18 15-30 15-30
Max. Logic Supply Current @ Nominal Vcc mA 16 16 9 9 9 9
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 240 240 1800 1800 2700 2700
Minimum Drop Out Voltage Vdc 1 1 1 1 1 1
Maximum Reverse Logic Voltage Vdc -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5
G5 Modules
G5 Fusible, Normally Open, ZVT 70G-OAC5 70G-OAC5A 70G-OAC15 70G-OAC15A 70G-OAC24 70G-OAC24A
G5 Fusible, Normally Open, ZVT, Inductive Load 70G-OAC5-L 70G-OAC5A-L 70G-OAC15-L 70G-OAC15A-L 70G-OAC24-L 70G-OAC24A-L
G5 Fusible, Normally Open, Random Turn-on 70G-OAC5A-11
Nominal Line Voltage Vac 120 240 120 240 120 240
Load Voltage Range Vac 24-140 24-280 24-140 24-280 24-140 24-280
Minimum Peak Blocking Voltage Volts 400 600 400 600 400 600
Maximum Off-state Leakage @ 60Hz mA, rms 2 4 2 4 2 4
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4-6 4-6 8-20 8-20 18-32 18-32
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) W 100 100 1000 1000 2700 2700
Minimum Drop Out Voltage Vdc 1 1 1 1 1 1
Maximum Reverse Logic Voltage Vdc -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5
I/O Modules
OpenLine® Modules
Dual, Fusible, Normally Open, ZVT 70L-OAC 70L-OACA Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Dual, Fusible, Normally Open, ZVT, Inductive Load 70L-OAC-L 70L-OACA-L
Nominal Line Voltage Vac 120 240
Load Voltage Range Vac 24-140 24-280
Minimum Peak Blocking Voltage Volts 600 600
Maximum Off-State Leakage @ 60 Hz mA, rms 2 4
Nominal Logic Voltage Vdc 5 5
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-28 4.5-28
Max. Logic Supply Current @ Nominal Vcc mA 7/CH 7/CH
Module ID Resistance to Logic Ground Ω 2.15K 2.15K
Minimum Drop Out Voltage Vdc 1 1
I/O
DC Output Modules
FEATURES
requirements of IEEE 472, "Surge
Withstanding Capability Test"
• UL, CSA, CE, TÜV Certified
• OpenLine® and G5 Modules
Provide Replaceable 5x20mm
Glass Fuses
70L-ODC 70G-ODC 70-ODC 70M-ODC
DIMENSIONS 4
STANDARD, G5 PACKAGES
Maximum Current Versus
LOAD CURRENT (AMPS)
For complete dimensional drawings, see pages Ambient Temperature

MINIATURE PACKAGE
L-4 or L-5. 3 The chart indicates continuous current to limit
the junction temperatures to 115°C. Information
FUSES OPENLINE PACKAGE/CH is based on steady state heat transfer in a 2
2
G5 Fuses are 5 Amp Littelfuse part number cubic foot sealed enclosure.
217005 or equivalent. OpenLine® fuses are 1
200 VDC STYLE
3.15 Amp Littelfuse part number 2173.15.
Fuse kits available, see page L-104.

-40˚ -20˚ 0 20˚ 40˚ 60˚ 80˚ 100˚
Figure 1
CIRCUITRY
Standard, Mini, G5 OpenLine ®
TYPICAL WIRING FOR MODULE 0 I/O MODULE
+ LOAD 1
PIN #
VOLTAGE GND 5
VDC SPIKE
PROTECTION +
Vcc 6 CHANNEL A 1 1 LOAD
A
– LOAD 2 OPTICAL
ISOLATION
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
CH. A – DC
CONTROL 7 2 2 SUPPLY
DRIVER +
CIRCUIT DC
3 3 SUPPLY
B OPTICAL DRIVER
ISOLATION CIRCUIT
CH. B CHANNEL B –
Rx 8 4 4 LOAD
+ 3 CONTROL
DC CONTROL 2.15K
I/O Modules
MODULE ID 9 TERMINAL
– 4 BASE
OR BLOCK #
RACK
Fuse and status LED in G5 and OpenLine modules only.

1
Load Current Range A 0.02-3.5 0.02-3.0 0.02-3.5 0.02-2.0/CH
Surge Current for 1 Sec. A 5 5 5 5
Maximum Reverse Logic Voltage Vdc -5 -5 -5 -5
Isolation Voltage2 Vrms 4000 4000 4000 2500
1
See Figure 1 for derating.
2
3
MIL-STD-202, Method 204, 20 G, 10-2000 Hz or IEC68-2-6, 0.15 mm/sec2, 10-150 Hz.
4
MIL-STD-202, Method 213, Condition F, 1500 G or IEC68-2-27, 11 mS, 15g.
I/O
DC Output Modules

Miniature, Normally Open 70M-ODC5 70M-ODC5A 70M-ODC5B 70M-ODC15 70M-ODC15B 70M-ODC24 70M-ODC24B
Standard, Normally Open 70-ODC5 70-ODC5A 70-ODC5B 70-ODC15 70-ODC15B 70-ODC24 70-ODC24B
Maximum Line Voltage Vdc 60 200 60 60 60 60 60
Load Voltage Range Vdc 3-60 4-200 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-60
Max. Off-State Leakage @ Max. Line mA 1.5 0.01 0.01 1.5 0.01 1.5 0.01
Maximum Turn-On Time µSec 20 75 75 20 75 20 75
Maximum Turn-Off Time µSec 50 750 500 50 500 50 500
Typ. Power Dissipation W/A 1 1.5 1 1 1 1 1
Clamping Voltage Vdc 80 360 80 80 80 80 80
Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 5 15 15 24 24
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 2.5-10 2.5-9 2.5-10 10-18 10-18 15-30 15-30
Maximum Logic Supply Current
@ Nominal Vcc mA 14 18 14 9 9 9 9
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 300 220 300 1800 1800 2700 2700
Minimum Drop Out Voltage Vdc 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
G5 and OpenLine® Modules

Fusible, Normally Open 70G-ODC5 70G-ODC5A 70G-ODC5B 70G-ODC15 70G-ODC15B 70G-ODC24 70G-ODC24B
Maximum Line Voltage Vdc 60 200 60 60 60 60 60
Load Voltage Range Vdc 3-60 4-200 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-60
Max. Off-State Leakage @ Max. Line mA 1.5 0.01 0.01 1.5 0.01 1.5 0.01
Maximum Turn-On Time µSec 20 75 75 20 75 20 75
Maximum Turn-Off Time µSec 50 750 500 50 500 50 500
Typ. Power Dissipation W/A 1 1.5 1 1 1 1 1
Clamping Voltage Vdc 80 360 80 80 80 80 80
Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 5 15 15 24 24
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4-6 4-6 4-6 10-20 10-20 18-32 18-32
@ Nominal Vcc mA 13 13 13 9 9 9 9
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 150 150 150 1500 1500 2700 2700
Minimum Drop Out Voltage Vdc 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
OpenLine® Modules
Type/Function Grayhill Part Number Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
Dual, Fusible, Normally Open 70L-ODC 70L-ODCA 70L-ODCB Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
I/O Modules
Maximum Line Voltage Vdc 60 200 60
Load Voltage Range Vdc 3-60 4-200 3-60
Max. Off-State Leakage @ Max. Line mA 1.5 .01 .01
Maximum Turn-On Time µSec 20 75 75
Maximum Turn-Off Time µSec 50 750 500
Typ. Power Dissipation WA 1 1.5 1
Clamping Voltage Vdc 80 360 80
Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 5
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-28 4.5-28 4.5-28
@ Nominal Vcc mA 7/CH 7/CH 7/CH
Module ID Resistance to Logic
Ground Ω 2.15K 2.15K 2.15K
Minimum Drop Out Voltage Vdc 1 1 1
I/O
Dry Contact and Mechanical Relay Output Modules
FEATURES
• 1500 Vac Optical Isolation
• G5 and OpenLine® Modules Provide
Replaceable 5x20mm Glass Fuse
• Switch AC or DC with the Same
Module
• Very Low Off-State Leakage Current
for AC loads
• No Off-State Leakage Current for
DC loads 70L-ODC5R 70G-ODCR/OACRLY 70-ODCR/OACRLY 70M-ODCR
CIRCUITRY
LOAD 1
VAC/VDC 1 5
LOAD 2
AMP
2 6
+VCC 7
3
AMP
3 8
INPUT
4
AMP
9
GROUND 4
5
Fuse and status LED in G5 modules only.

I/O Modules
SPECIFICATIONS BY PACKAGE STYLE

Package Style Std (70-) Mini (70M-) G5 (70G-) OpenLine® (70L-)
1
Isolation Voltage Vrms 1500 1500 1500 1500
1
2
3
I/O
Dry Contact and Mechanical Relay Output Modules
SPECIFICATIONS BY PART NUMBER

Miniature, Normally Open 70M-ODC5R 70M-ODC24R
Standard, Normally Open 70-ODC5R 70-OAC5RLY 70-ODC24R
Maximum Line Voltage Vdc/Vac 100/120 110/250 100/120
Load Voltage Range Vdc/Vac 0-100/0-120 0-110/0-250 0-100/0-120
Maximum Contact Rating W 10 90 10
Maximum Switching Current1 A 0.5 3.0 0.5
Maximum Carry Current1 A 1.0 5.0 1.0
Minimum Life Expectancy
@ 10 Vdc/10 mA Cycles 200 x 106 — 200 x 106
@ 48 Vdc/100 mA Cycles 500 x 103 — 500 x 103
@ 120 Vac/80 mA Cycles 500 x 103 — 500 x 103
@ 30 Vdc or 230 Vac/3A Cycles — 100 x 10 6 —
Maximum Contact Resistance mΩ 250 250 250
Maximum Off-State Leakage mA .002 .002 .002
Maximum Turn-On Time2 mSec 1 11 1
Maximum Turn-Off Time2 mSec 1 11 1
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.8-6.0 4.8-6.0 20-30
@ Nominal Vcc mA 10 26 16
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 500 200 1700
Minimum Drop-Out Voltage Vdc 2.5 4.8 23
Maximum Reverse Logic Voltage Vdc -5 -5 -5
G5 and OpenLine® Modules

G5 Fusible, Normally Open 70L-ODC5R 70G-ODC5R 70G-OAC5RLY 70G-ODC24R
Maximum Line Voltage Vdc/Vac 200/200 100/120 110/250 100/120
Load Voltage Range Vdc/Vac 0-200/0-200 0-100/0-120 0-110/0-250 0-100/0-120
Maximum Contact Rating W 10 10 90 10
Maximum Switching Current1 A 0.5 0.5 3.0 0.5
Maximum Carry Current1 A 1.5 1.0 5.0 1.0
Minimum Life Expectancy
@ 1Vdc/10 mA Cycles 1000 x 106 — — —
@ 10 Vdc/10 mA Cycles — 200 x 106 — 200 x 106
@ 48 Vdc/100 mA Cycles — 500 x 103 — 500 x 103
@ 120 Vac/80 mA Cycles 500 x 103 500 x 103 — 500 x 103
@ 30 Vdc or 230 Vac/3A Cycles — 100 x 106 —
I/O Modules
Maximum Contact Resistance mΩ 300 250 250 250
Maximum Turn-On Time2 mSec 1 1 11 1
Maximum Turn-Off Time 2 mSec 1 1 11 1
Max. Off-State Leakage @ Max. Line mA .002 .002 .002 .002
Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 5 24
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-6.0 4.8-6.0 4.8-6.0 18-32
Max. Logic Supply Current
@ Nominal Vcc mA 30 max./channel 10 26 23
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 167 500 200 1200
Minimum Drop-Out Voltage Vdc 4.5 1 1 23
1
Inductive loads require diode suppression or RC network. Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
2
Times include debounce. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
I/O
Manual Override Output Modules
FEATURES
• Integral Three Position Manual
On/Manual Off and Automatic
Control Toggle Switch
• G5 Modules Provide Replaceable
5x20 mm Glass Fuse
CIRCUITRY
Maximum Current Versus
AC Outputs DC Outputs
Ambient Temperature
The chart indicates continuous current to limit
the junction temperatures to 100°C. Information + LOAD 1
LOAD 1
is based on steady state heat transfer in a two VOLTAGE
cubic foot sealed enclosure. VAC SNUBBER VDC SPIKE
PROTECTION
LOAD 2
– LOAD 2
4
G5 PACKAGE
LOAD CURRENT (AMPS)
TRIGGER
3 CIRCUIT
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
2
Rx
+ 3 Rx
DC CONTROL OFF + 3
1
DC CONTROL OFF
– 4
AUTO
ON
– 4
AUTO
5 ON
5
-40˚ -20˚ 0 20˚ 40˚ 60˚ 80˚ 100˚
Figure 1
Maximum Peak Surge Current FUSES

Versus Surge Duration (AC Outputs)
G5 Fuses are 5 Amp Littelfuse part number
Information is based on a supply frequency of
217005 or equivalent.
60 Hz sinusoidal and a resistive or inductive
load. Application of maximum surge current
I/O Modules
may not be repeated until the module

temperature has returned to its steady state
value.
300
PEAK SURGE CURRENT (AMPERES)
200
100
80
60 STA
NDA
40 RD,
30 MINI,
G5
20 OPE
NLI
NE
10
6
4
3
1
1
1 2 3 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 1000
NUMBER OF FULL CYCLES AT 60 HERTZ
Figure 2
I/O
Manual Override Output Modules
SPECIFICATIONS: All Modules*

Output Specifications for AC outputs. 50 µSec maximum for DC Mechanical Shock: 1500 G's 0.5 mS half-
Load Current Range (rms): 0.03 to 3.5 outputs. sine per MIL–STD–202, Method 213,
Amps, Maximum current is derated as shown ON State Voltage Drop (peak): 1.5 volts Condition F
in Figure 1. max. Storage Temperature Range:
Maximum Surge Current (peak): 80 Amps Power Dissipation: 1.0 Watt/Amp typical -40°C to +125°C
at 60 Hz, 1 cycle as qualified by Figure 2 for Operating Temperature Range:
AC outputs. 5 Amp maximum for 1 second for General Characteristics -40°C to +100°C
DC outputs. Isolation Voltage Field to Logic: 4000 Vac
Turn-on Time (60 Hz): 8.3 mSec maximum (rms) minimum
for AC outputs. 20 µSec maximum for DC Vibration: 20 G's peak or .06” double amplitude
outputs. 10–2000 Hz per MIL–STD–202, Method 204,
Turn-off Time (60 Hz): 8.3 mSec maximum Condition D
*Specifications apply over operating temperature range unless noted otherwise.

AC Outputs
G5, Zero Voltage Turn On, Manual Override 70G-OAC5MA 70G-OAC5AMA 70G-OAC24MA 70G-OAC24AMA
Nominal Line Voltage Vac 120 240 120 240
Load Voltage Range Vac 24-140 24-280 24-140 24-280
Minimum Peak Blocking Voltage Volts 400 600 400 600
Maximum Off-state Leakage @ 60Hz mA, rms 2 4 2 4
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4-6 4-6 18-32 18-32
Max. Logic Supply Current @ Nominal Vcc mA 20 20 8 8
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 100 100 2700 2700
Minimum Drop-Out Voltage Vdc 1 1 1 1
Maximum Reverse Logic Voltage Vdc -5 -5 -5 -5
Maximum Zero Voltage Offset (Vpeak) 8 8 8 8
Frequency Range (Hz) 25-70 25-70 25-70 25-70
DC Outputs
Type/Function Grayhill Part Number For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
G5 Manual Override 70G-ODC5MA 70G-ODC24MA Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Maximum Line Voltage Vdc 60 60
Load Voltage Range Vdc 3-60 3-60
Maximum Off-state Leakage @ 60 Vdc mA 1.5 1.5
I/O Modules
Maximum Turn-on Time µSec 20 20
Maximum Turn-off Time µSec 50 50
Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 24
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4-6 18-32
@ Nominal Vcc mA 13 9
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 150 2700
Minimum Drop-Out Voltage Vdc 1 1
Maximum Reverse Logic Voltage Vdc -5 -5
Maximum Clamping Voltage Vdc 80 80
I/O
AC Input Modules
FEATURES
• UL, CSA, CE, TÜV Certified (TÜV
not available on OpenLine)
• OpenLine® and G5 Modules have
Built-in Status LED
70L-IAC 70G-IAC 70-IAC 70M-IAC
CIRCUITRY
I/O MODULE TYPICAL WIRING FOR MODULE 70
+ Rx PIN #
1
6 Vcc
VDC A
2 INPUT
DEVICE 1 1 FILTER
7 CH. A STATUS
OPTICAL HYSTERESIS
ISOLATION 5 GND
2 2
+VCC INPUT
3 VOLTAGE
HYST. CIRC. INPUT
DEVICE 3 3 FILTER
B
8 CH. B STATUS
CURRENT OPTICAL HYSTERESIS
OUTPUT REGULATING * ISOLATION
4
4 4
GROUND
5 TERMINAL BASE 9 MODULE ID
BLOCK # OR 0Ω
RACK MODULE
Status LED in G5 modules only. * Separate supplies may also be used.

I/O Modules
Output Current Range mA 1-50 1-50 1-50 1-50
Minimum Output Breakdown Voltage Vdc 50 50 50 50
Maximum Turn-On Time mS 20 20 20 20
Maximum Turn-Off Time mS 20 20 20 20
Isolation Voltage 1 Vrms 4000 4000 4000 2500
Storage Temp. Range °C -40 to +125 -40 to +125 -40 to +125 -40 to +100
Operating Temp. Range °C -40 to +100 -40 to +100 -40 to +100 -40 to +85
1
2
3
I/O
AC Input Modules

Miniature 70M-IAC5 70M-IAC5A 70M-IAC15 70M-IAC15A 70M-IAC24 70M-IAC24A
Standard 70-IAC5 70-IAC5A 70-IAC15 70-IAC15A 70-IAC24 70-IAC24A
Nominal Input Voltage Vac 120 240 120 240 120 240
Input Voltage Range1 Vac/Vdc 90-140 180-280 90-140 180-280 90-140 180-280
Input Current @ Maximum Input Voltage mA, rms 8 6 8 6 8 6
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 22K 60K 22K 60K 22K 60K
Maximum Pick-Up Voltage (Output Low) Vac 90 180 90 180 90 180
Minimum Drop-Out Voltage (Output High) Vac 25 50 25 50 25 50
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 3-6 3-6 8-18 8-18 15-30 15-30
G5 Modules
G5, Status LED 70G-IAC5 70G-IAC5A 70G-IAC15 70G-IAC15A 70G-IAC24 70G-IAC24A
Nominal Input Voltage Vac 120 240 120 240 120 240
Input Voltage Range1 Vac/Vdc 90-140 180-280 90-140 180-280 90-140 180-280
Input Current @ Maximum Input Voltage mA, rms 8 6 8 6 8 6
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 22K 60K 22K 60K 22K 60K
Maximum Pick-Up Voltage (Output Low) Vac 90 180 90 180 90 180
Minimum Drop-Out Voltage (Output High) Vac 25 50 25 50 25 50
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-6 4.5-6 10-18 10-18 17-30 17-30
OpenLine® Modules
Dual, Status LED 70L-IAC 70L-IACA Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Nominal Input Voltage Vac 120 240
Input Voltage Range1 Vac/Vdc 0-140 0-280
Input Current @ Max. Input Voltage mA, rms 8 6
I/O Modules
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 22K 64K
Max. Pick-Up Voltage (Output Low) Vac 90 180
Min. Drop-Out Voltage (Output High) Vac 25 50
Max. Logic Supply Current @ Nominal Vcc mA 6/CH 6/CH
Module ID Resistance to Logic Ground Ω 0 0
1
For input voltages in the range of 15-32 Vac, or 35-60 Vac, see DC input Modules with the NP
or G suffix.
I/O
AC/DC Input Modules
FEATURES
Withstanding Capability Test”*
• Non-Polarized Types Provide
Inputs For AC or DC
• UL, CSA, CE , TÜV Certified (TÜV
not available on OpenLine)
Built-in Status LED
70L-IDC 70G-IDC 70-IDC 70M-IDC
CIRCUITRY
I/O MODULE
+ Rx TYPICAL WIRING FOR MODULE 0
PIN #
1
VDC 6 Vcc
+/- A
2 INPUT
DEVICE 1 1 FILTER
7 CH. A STATUS
OPTICAL HYSTERESIS
ISOLATION 5 GND
+/-
2 2
+VCC INPUT
3 VOLTAGE
HYST. CIRC. +/-
INPUT B
DEVICE 3 3 FILTER
8 CH. B STATUS
CURRENT DC
OPTICAL HYSTERESIS
OUTPUT REGULATING SUPPLY * ISOLATION
+/-
4 4 4
GROUND 9
5 TERMINAL BASE MODULE ID
OR
BLOCK # RACK MODULE 0Ω
Status LED in G5 modules only. * Separate supplies may also be used.

I/O Modules
Min. Output Breakdown Voltage Vdc 50 50 50 50
Isolation Voltage 1 Vrms 4000 4000 4000 2500
Storage Temp. Range °C -40 to +125 -40 to +125 -40 to +125 -40 to +100
Operating Temp. Range °C -40 to +100 -40 to +100 -40 to +100 -40 to +85
1
2
3
I/O
AC/DC Input Modules

Miniature, Non-Polarized 70M-IDC5G 70M-IDC5NP 70M-IDCI5NP
Standard, Non-Polarized 70-IDC5G 70-IDC5NP 70-IDC15NP 70-IDC24NP
Maximum Input Voltage Vac/Vdc 60 32 32 32
Input Voltage Range1 Vac/Vdc 35-60 15-32/10-32 15-32/10-32 15-32/10-32
Input Current @ Max. Input Voltage mA 6 18 18 18
Maximum Turn-on Time mSec 10 5 5 5
Maximum Turn-off Time mSec 10 5 5 5
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 10K 1.8K 1.8K 1.8K
Maximum Pick Up Voltage (Output Low) Vac/Vdc 35 15/10 15/10 15/10
Minimum Drop Out Voltage (Output High) Vac/Vdc 9 3 3 3
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 3-6 3-6 8-18 15-30
@ Nominal Vcc mA 10 10 10 10
G5 Modules
G5, Non-Polarized, Status LED 70G-IDC5G 70G-IDC5NP 70G-IDC15NP 70G-IDC24NP
Maximum Input Voltage Vac/Vdc 60 32 32 32
Input Voltage Range1 Vac/Vdc 35-60 15-32/10-32 15-32/10-32 15-32/10-32
Input Current @ Max. Input Voltage mA 6 18 18 18
Maximum Turn-on Time mSec 10 5 5 5
Maximum Turn-off Time mSec 10 5 5 5
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 10K 1.8K 1.8K 1.8K
Maximum Pick Up Voltage (Output Low) Vac/Vdc 35 15/10 15/10 15/10
Minimum Drop Out Voltage (Output High) Vac/Vdc 9 3 3 3
Logic Voltage Range: Std & Mini Vdc 4.5-6 4.5-6 10-18 17-30
@ Nominal Vcc mA 10 10 10 10
OpenLine® Modules
Dual, Non-Polarized, Status LED 70L-IDCG 70L-IDCNP Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
I/O Modules
Maximum Input Voltage Vac/Vdc 60 32
Input Voltage Range1 Vac/Vdc 35-60 15-32/10-32
Input Current @ Max. Input Voltage mA 6 17
Maximum Turn-on Time mSec 10 5
Maximum Turn-off Time mSec 10 5
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 10.6K 1.9K
Maximum Pick Up Voltage (Output Low) Vac/Vdc 35 15/10
Minimum Drop Out Voltage (Output High) Vac/Vdc 9 3
@ Nominal Vcc mA 6/CH 6/CH
1
For input voltages in the range of 90 to 140 Vdc, use AC input modules 70-IAC5, 70M-IAC5, 70G-IAC5
or 70L-IAC. For input voltages in the range of 180 to 280 Vdc, use AC input modules 70-IAC5A,
70M-IAC5A, 70G-IAC5A or 70L-IACA.
I/O
DC Input Modules
FEATURES
• Fast Switching Polarized Input
Types
• UL, CSA, CE, TÜV Certified (TÜV
not available on OpenLine ®)
Built-in Status LED
70L-IDC 70G-IDC 70-IDC 70M-IDC
CIRCUITRY
+ Rx I/O MODULE TYPICAL WIRING FOR MODULE 0
1 PIN #
VDC 6 Vcc
+ A
2
INPUT
DEVICE 1 1
7 CH. A STATUS
OPTICAL
FILTER ISOLATION HYSTERESIS
5 GND
–
2 2
+VCC INPUT
3 VOLTAGE
HYST. CIRC.
+
INPUT B
DEVICE 3 3
CURRENT + 8 CH. B STATUS
REGULATING OPTICAL
OUTPUT DC FILTER ISOLATION
HYSTERESIS
4 SUPPLY
– –
GROUND 4 4
5
TERMINAL BASE 9 MODULE ID
OR 0Ω
BLOCK # RACK MODULE
Status LED in G5 modules only.

I/O Modules

Minimum Output Breakdown Voltage Vdc 50 50 50 50
Isolation Voltage1 Vrms 4000 4000 4000 2500
1
2
MIL-STD-202, Method 204, 20G, 10-2000 Hz or IEC68-2-6, 0.15 mm/sec2, 10-150 Hz.
3
MIL-STD-202, Method 213, Condition F, 1500G or IEC68-2-27, 11 mS, 15g.
I/O
DC Input Modules

Miniature, Polarized 70M-IDC5 70M-IDC15 70M-IDC24
Standard, Non-Polarized 70-IDC5 70-IDC5B 70-IDC5K 70-IDC15 70-IDC24
Maximum Input Voltage Vdc 32 32 16 32 32
Input Voltage Range1 Vdc 3-32 3-32 2.5-16 3-32 3-32
Input Current @ Maximum Input Voltage mA 18 18 30 18 18
Maximum Turn-On Time mSec 0.20 0.050 0.025 0.20 0.20
Maximum Turn-Off Time mSec 0.40 0.075 0.030 0.40 0.40
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 1.8K 1.8K 500 1.8K 1.8K
Maximum Pick-Up Voltage (Output Low) Vdc 3 3 2.5 3 3
Minimum Drop-Out Voltage (Output High) Vdc 1 1 1 1 1
Nominal Logic Voltage (Vcc) Vdc 5 5 5 15 24
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 3-6 3-6 3.5-6 8-18 15-30
Max. Logic Supply Current @ Nominal Vcc mA 10 18 18 10 10
G5 Modules
G5, Polarized, Status LED 70G-IDC5 70G-IDC5B 70G-IDC5D 70G-IDC5K 70G-IDC15 70G-IDC24
Maximum Input Voltage Vdc 32 32 28 16 32 32
Input Voltage Range1 Vdc 3-32 3-32 2.5-28 2.5-16 3-32 3-32
Input Current @ Maximum Input Voltage mA 18 18 23 30 18 18
Maximum Turn-On Time mSec 0.20 0.050 0.050 0.025 0.20 0.20
Maximum Turn-Off Time mSec 0.40 0.075 0.075 0.030 0.40 0.40
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 1.8K 1.8K 1.2K 500 1.8K 1.8K
Maximum Pick-Up Voltage (Output Low) Vdc 3 3 2.5 2.5 3 3
Minimum Drop-Out Voltage (Output High) Vdc 1 1 1 1 1 1
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-6 4.5-6 4.5-6 4.5-6 10-18 17-30
OpenLine® Modules
Dual, Polarized 70L-IDC 70L-IDCB Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
I/O Modules
Maximum Input Voltage Vdc 32 32
Input Voltage Range1 Vdc 0-32 0-32
Input Current @ Max. Input Voltage mA 18 18
Maximum Turn-on Time mSec 0.20 0.05
Maximum Turn-off Time mSec 0.40 0.075
Nominal Input Resistance (Rx) Ω 1800 900
Maximum Pick-Up Voltage (Output Low) Vdc 3 3
Minimum Drop-Out Voltage (Output High) Vdc 0.9 0.9
@ Nominal Vcc mA 6/CH 6/CH
1
For input voltages in the range of 90 to 140 Vdc, use AC input modules 70-IAC5, 70M-IAC5,
70G-IAC5 or 70L-IAC. For input voltages in the range of 180 to 280 Vdc, use AC input modules
70-IAC5A, 70M-IAC5A, 70G-IAC5A or 70L-IACA.
I/O
Contact Closure DC Input Modules
FEATURES
• Wire Dry Contact Sensors Directly
to Module, Eliminate External
Power Supply
• 2500 Vac Isolation
• Built-In Status LED
• UL, CSA, CE Mark, TÜV Certified
(TÜV not available on OpenLine®)
• Simplifies Field Wiring
70L-IDL 70G-IDC
CIRCUITRY: Negative True Logic

G5 OpenLine ®
I/O MODULE TYPICAL WIRING FOR MODULE 0
+1 PIN #
6 Vcc
VDC 2 A
+
INPUT
DEVICE 1 1
7 CH. A STATUS
OPTICAL
TRANSFORMER FILTER ISOLATION HYSTERESIS
5 GND
ISOLATION –
2 2
CONTACT
DEBOUNCE
+VCC +
INPUT B
DEVICE 3 3
3 + 8 CH. B STATUS
OUTPUT 10KΩ DC FILTER
OPTICAL HYSTERESIS
OUTPUT
SUPPLY ISOLATION
4 DRIVER –
GROUND CIRCUIT – 4 4
5
TERMINAL BASE 9 MODULE ID
OR 0Ω
BLOCK # RACK MODULE
SPECIFICATIONS: OpenLine®
Specifications apply over operating per MIL–STD–202, Method 213, Condition F
Vibration: .15mm, 10 to 50 Hz per IEC68-2-6
temperature range unless noted otherwise. Storage Temperature Range:
Mechanical Shock: 50 G's, 0.5 mS, sinsoidal
All Modules -40°C to +125°C
per IEC68-2-27
Output Specifications Operating Temperature Range:
Storage Temperature Range:
Output Current Range: 1-50 mA 0°C to +60°C
-40°C to +100°C
Breakdown Voltage: 50 Vdc minimum Operating Temperature Range:
Off State Leakage Current: 1 µA maximum -40°C to +85°C
On State Voltage Drop: 0.45 Vdc at 50 mA Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
maximum For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
G5 Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
I/O Modules
General Characteristics Vibration: 20 G's peak or .06" double amplitude

Isolation Voltage Field to Logic: 10–2000 Hz per MIL–STD–202, Method 204,
2500 Vac (rms) minimum Condition D
Mechanical Shock: 1500 G's 0.5 mS half-sine

G5, Dry Contact 70L-IDC5S 70G-IDC5S 70G-IDC24S
Maximum Dry Contact Voltage Rating Vdc 25 25 25
Minimum Dry Contact Current Rating mA 5 5 5
Maximum Turn-on Time mSec 10 3.0 3.0
Maximum Turn-off Time mSec 10 3.0 3.0
Contact Resistance (Output Low) Ω ≤ 1.25K ≤ 1.25K ≤ 1.25K
Contact Resistance (Output High) Ω 25K 25K 25K
Logic Voltage Range: G5 Vdc 4.5-5.5 4.5-6 15-30
Max. Logic Supply Current mA 1201 41 41
@ Nominal Vcc
1
WHEN BOTH CHANNELS ARE ACTIVATED
I/O
Analog I/O Modules Engineering Information and Selection Chart
ANALOG I/O MODULES

Analog output modules are used in proportional 12-bit value that is right justified and packed in Start Pulse: High for 6.4 µS Min., then low
control of devices such as valves, motors, and a 16-bit word that represents the equivalent for 3.2 µS
heaters. Analog input modules are used in data analog value sensed. Data Packet: Each bit is 12.8 µS long.
gathering and proportional control applications. High for first 3.2 µS of the bit.
OpenLine® thermocouple inputs linearize the Middle 6.4 µS determines the value of the
All modules are potted for industrial thermocouple reading and returns degrees to data bit (High = 1, Low = 0).
environments. They operate under high the controller. Low for last 3.2 µS of the bit.
vibration (IEC68-2-6; 0.15 mm/sec2 at 10- Stop Pulse: Low for 500 µS minimum
150Hz) mechanical shock (IEC68-2-27; 11 Openline® Analog Output Times shown are ± 10%, except minimums.
mS, sinusoidal 30 gS) and high relative humidity For analog output modules, the output of these SERIAL DATA FORMAT**
(IEC68-2-3; 5-95% non-condensing). They modules is zero scale on power up, then it is
feature a high level of noise immunity and the analog equivalent of the 12-bit value sent G5 Analog Input
accuracy. All models provide isolation from to the module over the communication lines. G5 voltage or current input modules are actually
field to logic, field to power supply and module
frequency converters. The input to these
to module.
G5 Analog Output modules is a signal from a sensor. The output
The output (voltage or current level) of these from these modules is a squarewave whose
OpenLine® Analog modules varies proportionally to the 12-bit frequency varies linearly from 14.4 to 72 KHz
®
OpenLine analog modules communicate serial data string sent to them by a control and is proportional to the input signal. The
serially with the controller. Each module has a circuit. The data string is typically 213.2 µSec. controller must be able to measure this
separate transmit and receive line that operates long as detailed in Figure 1. Once a data string frequency and convert it back to a signal level.
at 115,200 baud with no parity bits, 8 data bits, is received, the output is set and remains
and 1 stop bit (115.2K,N,8,1). The command constant until another data string is sent. G5 thermocouple modules pass through the
structure and responses for all modules are Therefore, the output level of the module could thermocouple reading and do not linearize the
detailed in Bulletin No. 743. Each module has be changed almost 4700 times a second. signal. Linearization must take place within the
a microcontroller and non-volatile serial controller.
EEPROM memory. The calibration data is For more information on programming Grayhill
stored within the EEPROM, and may be analog output modules, request a copy of Agency Approvals
changed using the appropriate commands Bulletin No. 581. OpenLine® analog modules are EN50082-2
and the 70L-PROG field calibration unit. The and EN50081-2 compliant and meet the
software provided with the calibration unit requirements of 89/336/EEC EMC directive.
communicates with the modules through the They are also EN60950 (61010-1) compliant.
serial port of a PC. Calibration equipment is not Meeting these requirements allows the modules
START 12 BIT DATA END
provided. to bear the CE mark. Additionally, the modules
are CSA certified to CSA 22.2 No. 14-95M and
OpenLine® Analog Input Modules 9.6µS 153.6µS 500µS
CSA 22.2 No. 213-M1987 Class I, Div. 2
Upon request, analog input modules return a Figure 1 Groups A, B, C and D and are UL recognized
to UL 508.
PART NUMBER EXPLANATION: Analog I/O Modules
Module Type
73G = Analog Module, G5 Package, Single Channel
73L = Analog Module, OpenLine® Package, Dual Channel
Function
OV = Analog Output, Voltage II = Analog Input, Current
I/O Modules
OI = Analog Output, Current IT = Analog Input, Temperature
IV = Analog Input, Voltage
73G-IV50M
Suffix
Analog Modules: 5 = 0–5 Vdc 10 = 0 - 10 Vdc 50M = 0–50 mV
5B = -5–5 Vdc 10B = -10 - 10 Vdc 100M = 0–100 mV
1 = 0–1 Vdc 020 = 0 to 20 mA R100 = RTD
CJ = J type TC 420 = 4 to 20 mA R3100 = 3 Wire RTD
CK = K type TC 5000 = 0 to 5 A R4100 = 4 Wire RTD
CR = R type TC AC120 = 28 to 140 Vac
CT = T type TC AC240 = 28 to 280 Vac
I/O
DIMENSIONS: OpenLine® Modules
I/O Module Pin # Output Function Input Function

1 Output A+ Input A+
2 Output A- Input A-
3 Output B+ Input B+
4 Output B- Input B-
5 Logic Gnd Logic Gnd DATE CODE
6 Vcc (+5V dc) Vcc (+5V dc)
7 Serial In Serial In
8 Serial Out Serial Out
9 Module ID Module ID
2.23
.51 .34 (56,64)
2.09 (53,09) (8,64)
(12,95)
.19
(4,83) .22 .10 .03
(5,59) (2,54) (0,76) .38
(9,65)
PIN 1
PIN 2
PIN 3
PIN 4
PIN 5
PIN 6
PIN 7
PIN 8
PIN 9
.24
.14 (6,10)
(3,56)
2.70 (68,58)
DIMENSIONS: OpenLine® Thermocouple Modules
I/O Module Pin # Function

1 N/C
2 N/C
3 N/C THERMOCOUPLE
4 N/C CONNECTOR
5 Logic Gnd
6 Vcc (+5V dc)
7 Serial In
8 Serial Out DATE CODE
9 Module ID
B A
I/O Modules
2.93
2.09 (53,09) XXX-XXX (74,42)
THERMOCOUPLE
.19
INPUT
(4,83) 2.23
(56,64)
.51
(12,95) .22 .10 .03
(5,59) (2,54) (0,76) .38
(9,65)
PIN 1
PIN 2
PIN 3
PIN 4
PIN 5
PIN 6
PIN 7
PIN 8
PIN 9
.34
(8,64)
.14 .24 (6,10)

(3,56) 2.70 (68,58)
I/O
DIMENSIONS: OpenLine® 3-Wire and 4-Wire RTD Modules
A3 A1 B3 B1
4-WIRE
PTXXX
A4 A2 B4 B2
DATE
CODE
2.09
(53.09) A B
.19 .51
(4.83) (12.95)
XXX-XXX 2.57
DUAL 4-WIRE PTXXX RTD
XXßC TO XXßC (65.28)
PIN 1
PIN 2
PIN 3
PIN 4
PIN 5
PIN 6
PIN 7
PIN 8
PIN 9
.38
.34 .10 (9.65)
(8.64) (2.54)
.22
(5.59)
2.70 (68.58) .03

MIN. (.76) .24
(6.11)
DIMENSIONS: G5 Analog Modules

1.90 (48,3)
MALE AND FEMALE RTD
CONNECTOR (INCLUDED)
.46 4-40 X 2-1/2" PHILLIPS HOLD-

DOWN SCREW INCLUDED
(11,7) WIRE LENGTH MALE
WITH EACH MODULE
IS 5.5 (139,7) THERMOCOUPLE
MINIMUM CONNECTOR
(INCLUDED)
I/O Modules
3.20
(81,3)
2.20
(55,9) O .040/.042
(1,02/1,07)
5 4 3 2 1 .235 (5,97)
.20 (5,1)
TYPE R THERMOCOUPLE AND THERMOCOUPLE
.40 (10,2) RTD MODULES MODULES ONLY
.90 (22,9) .20 (5,1)
1.15 (29,2)
.15 (3,8)
1.35 (34,3)
1.55 (39,4)
I/O
WIRING DIAGRAM: Analog I/O Modules
+
ANALOG LOAD
VOLT/CURRENT 2 1 ANALOG
– THERMOCOUPLE 2 1
OUTPUT
INPUT
+
ANALOG VOLT SENSOR LOOP
Y VOLT/CURRENT 2 1 OR 4-20 mA
– SUPPLY ANALOG
INPUT TRANSMITTER RTD 2 1
INPUT
FUNCTION
(Check Specifications for Input and Output combinations, Feature or Option availability.)
Supply Vcc Voltage Range Current Range

Analog
5 Vdc 0 to 5 Vdc 4 to 20 mA
Output -10 to 10 Vdc
Supply Vcc Voltage Range Temperature

5 Vdc 50 or 100 mV J Type
1, 5, or 10 Vdc K Type
-5 to +5 Vdc R Type
Analog
-10 to +10 Vdc T Type
Input 28 to 140 or 280 Vac RTD
Current Range
4-20 mA
0-5 A
I/O Modules
I/O
Analog Voltage and Current Output Modules
FEATURES
• Standard Package and Pin-out
• Single 5V Power Supply
• 12-Bit Resolution
• Intermix With Digital Modules on
the Same Rack
• Meets the Requirements of IEEE 472
• UL, CSA, CE Certified (OpenLine® only)
73L-OV 73G-OV
CIRCUITRY: Voltage Output

G5 OpenLine ®
I/O MODULE
+ PIN #
1
Vcc 6 ISOLATED VS +
AMP OUTPUT
–2 10KΩ DC/DC CHANNEL A 1 1 DEVICE
CONVERTER
GND 5 –
VS – 2 2
D/A
10K
DC/DC VS TXD 7
+5V 3 CONVERTER
VS- OPTICAL
ISOLATION µP D/A + OUTPUT
2KΩ 3 3 DEVICE
RXD 8 CHANNEL B
VS
SERIAL ISOLATION –
4 4
INPUT 4 BUFFER 5.23K
DATA MODULE ID 9
TERMINAL
BLOCK #
GROUND 5

®
G5, OpenLine 73G-OV5, -OV5B 73G-OV10, -OV10B 73L-OV5, -OV5B 73L-OV10, -OV10B
Number of Outputs 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E.
Resolution bits 12 12 12 12
mV/count -OV5: 1.22 -OV10: 2.44 -OV5: 1.22 -OV10: 2.44
-OV5B: 2.44 -OV10B: 4.88 -OV5B: 2.44 -OV10B: 4.88
Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C1, 2 0.3% of full scale 0.3% of full scale 0.08% of full scale 0.06% of full scale
Accuracy Drift w/Temp.2
Maximum Offset PPM/°C +/- 45 +/- 45 +/- 25 +/- 25
I/O Modules
Maximum Gain (0 to 60°C) PPM/°C +/- 150 +/- 150 +/- 100 +/- 100
Serial Data Format 12-bit packet 12-bit packet Left-justified, 16-bit Left-justified, 16-bit
Serial Data Packet — — 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2
Step Response Time mS 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8
Output Noise Ripple mV rms — — 1.5 max. 3.7 max.
Output Voltage Range Vdc -OV5: 0-5 -OV10: 0-10 -OV5: 0-5 -OV10: 0-10
-OV5B: -5-5 -OV10B: -10-10 -OV5B: -5-5 -OV10B: -10-10
Maximum Load Ω 250 1000 250 500
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-5.5 4.5-5.5 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25
Maximum Logic Supply Current @ 5Vdc mA/Ch. 140 140 105 105
Power Up Status Output @ min. value Output @ min. value Output @ min. value Output @ min. value
Short Circuit Protection Yes Yes Yes Yes
Module ID (Pin 9) KΩ N/A N/A 5.23 5.23
Isolation Voltage
Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500
Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500
Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500
Channel A to Channel B N/A N/A None None
Environmental Conditions
Operating Temperature °C 0-60 0-60 -40-85 -40-85
Storage Temperature °C -25-85 -25-85 -40-100 -40-100
1
Includes offset, gain, non-linearity and repeatability error terms.
2
Accuracy and drift graphs are available in Bulletin #753.
I/O
Analog Voltage and Current Output Modules
CIRCUITRY: Current Output

G5 OpenLine ®
I/O MODULE
PIN #
Vcc 6 Vs
+ ISOLATED Vs +
OUTPUT
1 DC/DC 1 1 DEVICE
CONVERTER
GND 5 –
AMP Vs – 2 2
–2 10KΩ
CHANNEL A
ISOLATION
D/A 10K
5Ω
DC/DC VS
+5V 3 CONVERTER TXD 7
VS- Vs
OPTICAL
ISOLATION
µP D/A + OUTPUT
2KΩ 3 3
RXD 8 DEVICE
VS
SERIAL –
INPUT 4 4
4 BUFFER
5.23K
DATA CHANNEL B
MODULE ID 9
GROUND 5 TERMINAL
5Ω BLOCK #

G5, OpenLine® 73G-OI420 73G-OI020 73L-OI420 73L-OI020 73L-OI024
Number of Outputs 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E.
Resolution bits 12 12 12 12 12
µA/count 3.9 4.9 3.9 4.9 5.9
Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C1
Maximum Offset PPM/°C +/- 45 +/- 45 +/- 50 +/- 50 +/- 50
Maximum Gain (0 to 60°C) PPM/°C +/- 150 +/- 150 +/- 100 +/- 75 +/- 100
Serial Data Format 12-bit packet 12-bit packet Right Justified, Right Justified, Right Justified,
16-bit 16-bit 16-bit
Serial Data Packet — — 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2
Step Response Time µS 0.5 0.5 500 500 500
Max. Loop Resistance3 Ohms 330 330 500 500 500
Output Current Range mA 4-20 0-20 4-20 0-20 0-24
Maximum Load Ω 250 1000 Continuous short Continuous short Continuous short
circuit circuit circuit
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-5.5 4.5-5.5 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25
@ 5V dc mA/Ch. 140 140 80 80 100
Power Up Status Output @ min. Output @ min. Output @ min. Output @ min. Output @ min.
value value value value value
I/O Modules
Short Circuit Protection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Module ID (Pin 9) KΩ N/A N/A 5.23 5.23 5.23
Isolation Voltage
Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
Channel A to Channel B N/A N/A None None None
Operating Temperature3, 4 °C 0-60 0-60 -40-85 -40-85 -40-85
Storage Temperature °C -25-55 -25-55 -40-100 -40-100 -40-100
1
Includes offset, gain, non-linearity and repeatability error terms. Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
2
Accuracy and drift graphs are available in Bulletin #753. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
3
External loop supply can increase maximum loop resistance rating. Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
I/O
Analog Voltage Input Modules
FEATURES
• Wide Variety of Input Ranges
• Optical Isolation from Input to Output
• Intermix With Digital Modules on the
Same Rack
• Meets the Requirements of IEEE 472
• UL, CSA, CE Certified (OpenLine only)
73L-IV 73G-IV

G5 I/O MODULE
OpenLine ®
PIN #
+1 SIGNAL CHANNEL A 5.23K
ISOLATION
+ CONDITIONING
TWISTED 1 1 AND 9 MODULE ID
CURRENT FILTER & PAIR
INPUT FILTER
˜ SOURCE RX BUFFER
DEVICE
– 2 –
2 2
8 RXD
AMP CH. A
A/D µP OPTICAL
CH. B ISOLATION
VS 7 TXD
DC/DC
+5V 3 CONVERTER
V/F 10K
VS- + SIGNAL
VS TWISTED CONDITIONING
PAIR
3 3 AND
INPUT FILTER CHANNEL B
SQUARE- 10KΩ Vs 6 Vcc
DEVICE – ISOLATED
WAVE 4 DC/DC
OUTPUT 4 4 CONVERTER
5 GND
Vs –
GROUND 5 TERMINAL
BLOCK #

G5, OpenLine® 73G-IV1 73G-IV5 73G-IV10 73L-IV1 73L-IV5 73L-IV10
Number of Inputs 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E.
Resolution bits 12 12 12 12 12 12
µV/count 244.1 1221 2441 244.1 1221 2441
Absolute Accuracy@25°C1, 2 % of full scale +/- 0.1 +/- 0.1 +/- 0.1 0.075 0.075 0.075
Maximum Offset PPM/°C +/- 50 +/- 50 +/- 50 +/- 35 +/- 25 +/- 25
I/O Modules
Maximum Gain (0-60°C) PPM/°C +/- 55 +/- 55 +/- 55 +/- 75 +/- 75 +/- 75
Serial Data Format 12-bit packet 12-bit packet 12-bit packet Right Justified, Right Justified, Right Justified,
16-bit 16-bit 16-bit
Serial Data Packet N/A N/A N/A 115.2Kb,N,8,2 115.2Kb,N,8,2 115.2Kb,N,8,2
Step Response Time4 mS 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Input Resistance (Rx) Mohm 1 1 1 2.2 2.2 2.2
Input Voltage Range Vdc 0-1 0-5 0-10 0-1 0-5 0-10
Maximum Overload V — — — +/- 30 +/- 30 +/- 30
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-5.5 4.5-5.5 4.5-5.5 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25
Maximum Logic Supply
Current @ 5Vdc mA/Ch. 150 150 150 38 38 38
Module ID (Pin 9) KΩ N/A N/A N/A 5.23 5.23 5.23
Isolation Voltage
Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
Channel A to Channel B — — — None None None
Operating Temperature3 °C 0 to 60 0 to 60 0 to 60 -40 to 85 -40 to 85 -40 to 85
Storage Temperature °C -25 to 85 -25 to 85 -25 to 85 -55 to 100 -55 to 100 -55 to 100
1
2
3
Start up temperature greater than -25°C.
I/O

G5, OpenLine® 73G-IV5B 73G-IV10B 73L-IV5B 73L-IV10B
Number of Inputs 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E.
mV/count 2.44 4.88 2.44 4.88
Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C1, 2 % of full scale +/-0.1 +/- 0.1 0.075 0.075
Serial Data Format 12-bit packet 12-bit packet Right Justified, 16-bit Right Justified, 16-bit
Serial Data Packet — — 115.2Kb, N, 8,2 115.2Kb, N, 8,2
Step Response Time3 mS 2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5
Input Resistance (Rx) Mohm 1 1 2.2 2.2
Input Voltage Range Vdc -5 to 5 -10 to 10 -5 to 5 -10 to 10
Maximum Overload V — — +/- 30 +/- 30
Maximum Logic Supply Current@5Vdc mA/Ch. 150 150 38 38
Isolation Voltage
Channel A to Channel B — — None None
Operating Temperature °C 0 to 60 0 to 60 -40 to 85 -40 to 85
Storage Temperature °C -25 to 55 -25 to 85 -55 to 100 -55 to 100

®
G5, OpenLine 73G-IV50M 73G-IV100M 73L-IV50M 73L-IV100M
Number of Inputs 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E.
µV/Count 12.2 24.4 12.2 24.4
Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C 1, 2 % of full scale +/- 0.1 +/- 0.1 0.07 0.07
Serial Data Format 12-bit packet 12-bit packet Right Justified,16-bit Right Justified,16-bit
Serial Data Packet — — 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2
Step Response Time 3 mS 2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5
I/O Modules
Input Resistance (Rx) Mohm 1 1 2.2 2.2

Input Voltage Range mV 0-50 0-100 0-50 0-100
Maximum Overload V — — +/- 30 +/- 30
Maximum Logic Supply Current@5Vdc mA/Ch. 150 150 30 30
Isolation Voltage
Channel A to Channel B N/A N/A None None
Operating Temperature °C 0 to 60 0 to 60 -40 to 85 -40 to 85
Storage Temperature °C -25 to 85 -25 to 85 -55 to 100 -55 to 100
1
2
3
Start up temperature greater than -25°C.
I/O

Type/Function Grayhill Part Number For prices and discounts, contact a local
G5 73G-IVAC120 73G-IVAC240 Distributor, a local Sales Office or Grayhill.
Number of Inputs 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff.
Resolution bits 12 12
mV/Count 27.34 65.52
Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C1 % of full scale +/- 0.3% +/- 0.3%
Accuracy Drift w/Temp.
Maximum Offset PPM/°C +/- 150 +/- 150
Maximum Gain (0 to 60°C) PPM/°C +/- 150 +/- 150
Serial Data Format 12-bit packet 12-bit packet
Step Response Time2 mS 2.5 2.5
Input Resistance Mohm 1 1
Input Voltage Range Vac 28 to 140 28 to 280
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-5.5 4.5-5.5
@ 5V dc mA/Ch. 150 150
Isolation Voltage
Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500
Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500
Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500
Operating Temperature3 °C 0 to 60 0 to 60
Storage Temperature °C -25 to 85 -25 to 85
1
2
Time required for output frequency to change to within 1% of final reading.
I/O Modules
I/O
Analog Current Input Modules
FEATURES
• Wide Variety of Input Ranges
• Optical Isolation from Input to
Output
the Same Rack
• Meets the Requirements of IEEE
472
73L-II 73G-II

G5: 0-5A G5: 4-20mA
1 +1
RECTIFY, VOLTAGE
CURRENT FILTER, CONTROLLED CURRENT FILTER &
SOURCE AMPLIFY OSCILLATOR ˜ SOURCE RX BUFFER
2 – 2
5A SECONDARY
TRANSFORMER AMP
OPTICAL
ISOLATION
VS
DC/DC
+5V 3 CONVERTER
V/F
VS-
VS
+5 V 3
OUTPUT SQUARE- 10KΩ
SQUARE- 10KΩ
WAVE DRIVER WAVE 4
4 CIRCUIT
OUTPUT OUTPUT
GROUND 5 5
GROUND
OpenLine®
I/O MODULE
PIN #
SIGNAL CHANNEL A 5.23K
ISOLATION
+ CONDITIONING
+ TWISTED 1 1 AND 9 MODULE ID
PAIR
LOOP 4-20mA FILTER
I/O Modules
SUPPLY TRANSMITTER
– 133Ω
– 2 2
8 RXD
CH. A
A/D µP OPTICAL
CH. B ISOLATION
7 TXD
10K
+ SIGNAL
TWISTED CONDITIONING
+ PAIR
3 3 AND
LOOP 4-20mA FILTER CHANNEL B
SUPPLY TRANSMITTER – Vs
ISOLATED
6 Vcc
133Ω
– 4 4 DC/DC
CONVERTER
5 GND
Vs –
TERMINAL
BLOCK #
I/O
Analog Current Input Modules

G5, OpenLine® 73G-II020 73G-II420 73G-II5000 73L-II020 73L-II420 73L-II222
Number of Inputs 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff. 1 Ch., Diff. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E. 2 Ch., S.E.
Resolution bits 12 12 12 12 12 12
µA/Count 4.88 3.91 1221 4.88 3.91 4.88
Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C1, 2 % of full +/- 0.2 +/- 0.2 +/- 0.3 0.075 0.075 0.075
scale
Maximum Offset PPM/°C +/- 50 +/- 50 +/- 150 +/- 25 +/- 25 +/- 25
Maximum Gain (0 to 60°C) PPM/°C +/- 55 +/- 55 +/- 150 +/- 75 +/- 75 +/- 75
Serial Data Format 12-bit 12-bit 12-bit Right Justified, Right Justified, Right Justified,
packet packet packet 16-bit 16-bit 16-bit
Serial Data Packet — — — 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2 115.2Kb, N, 8,2 115.2Kb, N, 8,2
Step Response Time3 mS 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Input Resistance (Rx) ohms 133 +/- 1% 133 +/- 1% .020 +/-.02% 133/- 1% 133 +/- 1% 133 +/- 1%
Input Current Range mA or A 0-20mA 4-20mA 0-5A TRMS 0-20mA 4-20mA 2-22mA
Maximum Overload V — — — 6 6 6
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-5.5 4.5-5.5 4.5-5.5 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25
Maximum Logic mA/Ch. 150 120 160 38 38 38
Supply Current@5Vdc
Module ID (Pin 9) KΩ N/A N/A N/A 5.23 5.23 5.23
Isolation Voltage
Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
Channel A to Channel B — — — None None None
Operating Temperature3 °C 0 to 60 0 to 60 0 to 60 -40 to 85 -40 to 85 -40 to 85
Storage Temperature °C -25 to 85 -25 to 85 -25 to 85 -55 to 100 -55 to 100 -55 to 100
1
2
Accuracy and drift graphs are available in Bulletin #753. For prices and discounts, contact a local
3
Time required for output to change to within 1% of final value. Distributor, a local Sales Office or Grayhill.
I/O Modules
I/O
Thermocouple Input Modules
FEATURES
• Wide Variety of Input Types
Output
• Cold Junction Temperature
Compensated Connector Included
• Intermix With G5 Digital Modules
on the Same Rack
• Meets the Requirements of IEEE
472
73L-IT 73G-IT
CIRCUITRY
G5 G5: Connector
Wiring
T
THERMO- COLD
COUPLE REFERENCE
T
AMP
1 N/C + –
OMEGA
2 N/C CONNECTOR
TYPE SMP
V/F
INCLUDED
DC/DC VS
+ –
+5V 3 CONVERTER MODULE
VS-
SQUARE- VS
10KΩ Thermocouple Wire Colors
WAVE 4
OUTPUT Type + –
GROUND 5 J White Red
K Yellow Red
T Blue Red
R Black Red
I/O Modules
OpenLine ® OpenLine ®:
Connector Wiring
I/O MODULE
CH. A CH. B
PIN # – + – +
5.23K
ISOLATION
NC 1 1 9 MODULE ID
SIGNAL
CONDITIONING
8 RXD
NC 2 2 COLD + –
JUNCTION A/P µP OPTICAL OMEGA
TEMP. ISOLATION
COMP. CONNECTOR
7 TXD TYPE SMP
INCLUDED
NC 3 3 10K + –
SIGNAL
CONDITIONING MODULE
Vs 6 Vcc
ISOLATED
COLD
DC/DC Thermocouple Wire Colors
NC 4 4 JUNCTION
CONVERTER
TEMP.
COMP. – 5 GND Type + –
TERMINAL Vs
BLOCK # J White Red
K Yellow Red
T Blue Red
R Black Red
I/O
Thermocouple Input Modules

G5 73G-ITCJ 73G-ITCK 73G-ITCR 73G-ITCT
Number of Inputs 1 Ch. 1 Ch. 1 Ch. 1 Ch.
°C/count 0.18 0.25 0.23 0.10
Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C1, 2 °C +/- 3.0 +/- 3.0 +/- 3.0 +/- 3.0
Serial Data Format 12-bit packet 12-bit packet 12-bit packet 12-bit packet
Serial Data Packet — — — —
Step Response Time3 mS 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
Input Temperature Range °C (°F) 0 to 700 -100 to 924 0 to 960 -200 to 224
(32-1292) (-148-1695) (32-1760) (-328-435)
Maximum Overload V — — — —
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5 to 5.5 4.5 to 5.5 4.5 to 5.5 4.5-5.5
Current @ 5V dc mA/Ch. 150 150 150 150
Module ID (Pin 9) KΩ — — — —
Isolation Voltage
Channel A to Channel B — — — —
Operating Temperature3 °C 0 to 60 0 to 60 0 to 60 0-60
Storage Temperature °C -25 to 85 -25 to 85 -25 to 85 -25-85

®
OpenLine 73L-ITCJ 73L-ITCK 73L-ITCT
Number of Inputs 2 Ch. 2 Ch. 2 Ch.
Resolution bits 12 12 12
°C/count 0.34 0.36 0.16
Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C 1, 2 °C +/- 1.0 +/- 1.0 +/- 0.4
Maximum Offset PPM/°C +/- 50 +/- 50 +/- 50
Maximum Gain (0 to 60°C) PPM/°C +/- 100 +/- 100 +/- 100
Serial Data Format Right Justified,16-bit Right Justified,16-bit Right Justified,16-bit
I/O Modules
Serial Data Packet 115.2 Kb, N, 8, 2 115.2 Kb, N, 8, 2 115.2 Kb, N, 8, 2
Step Response Time 3 mS 100 100 100
Input Temperature Range °C (°F) -210 to 1200 (-346 to 2192) -100 to 1372 (-148 to 2502) -240 to 400 (-400 to 752)
Maximum Overload V +/- 6 +/- 6 +/- 6
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.75 to 5.25 4.75 to 5.25 4.75 to 5.25
Current @ 5V dc mA/Ch. 38 38 38
Module ID (Pin 9) KΩ 5.23 5.23 5.23
Isolation Voltage
Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500 2500
Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500 2500
Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500 2500
Channel A to Channel B None None None
Operating Temperature3 °C -40 to 85 -40 to 85 -40 to 85
Storage Temperature °C -55 to 100 -55 to 100 -55 to 100
1
2
3
Time required for output to change within 1% of final reading. Distributor, a local Sales Office or Grayhill.
I/O
RTD Input Modules
FEATURES
Output
the Same Rack
• Meets the Requirements of
IEEE 472
• OpenLine® has 2-wire, 3-wire and
4-wire versions
73L-ITR3100 (4100) 73L-ITR100 73G-ITR
CIRCUITRY
G5 G5: Connector
Wiring
2 WIRE RTD 3 WIRE RTD 4 WIRE RTD
T BLACK BLACK BLACK
SIGNAL
T CONDITIONING
RTD
T AMP BLACK BLACK BLACK
RED RED RED RED
1 N/C
– + G – + G G
2 N/C OMEGA OMEGA OMEGA
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
DC/DC VS TYPE MTP TYPE MTP TYPE MTP
+5V 3 CONVERTER
V/F
MALE AND MALE AND MALE AND
VS-
FEMALE FEMALE FEMALE
SQUARE- VS (INCLUDED) (INCLUDED) (INCLUDED)
10KΩ
WAVE 4
OUTPUT
73G-ITR100 73G-ITR100 73G-ITR100
GROUND 5
I/O Modules
OpenLine®: 2 Wire RTD
2.5V
I/O MODULE 4.53K 5.23K
PIN # SIGNAL
9 MODULE ID
+ CONDITIONING
CHANNEL A
1 1 AND
FILTER
– 8 RXD
2 2 CH. A
A/D µP OPTICAL
ISOLATION
CH. B
ISOLATION
7 TXD
2.5V
4.53K 10K
SIGNAL
+ CONDITIONING
3 3 AND Vs 6 Vcc
ISOLATED
FILTER CHANNEL B
DC/DC
CONVERTER
4 4 – 5 GND
Vs
TERMINAL
BLOCK #
I/O
RTD Input Modules
CIRCUITRY
OpenLine®: 3 or 4 Wire RTD
Circuits connected on 3-wire version
B4 B3 B2 B1 A4 A3 A2 A1 100µA
5V
– + – + 5.23K
9 MODULE ID
SIGNAL CHANNEL A
CONDITIONING
AND
FILTER
8 TXD
CH. A
OPTICAL
A/D µP
ISOLATION
CH. B
7 RXD
ISOLATION
NC 1 1 100µA
5V
NC 2 2 10K
SIGNAL
CONDITIONING
NC 3 3 6 Vcc
CHANNEL B Vs
AND
ISOLATED
FILTER
DC/DC
NC 4 4 CONVERTER
5
– GND
Vs
OpenLine®: Connector Wiring

3 WIRE RTD 4 WIRE RTD
PHOENIX CONTACT G – + NC G – + S
CONNECTOR A4 A3 A2 A1 A4 A3 A2 A1
(INCLUDED) B4 B3 B2 B1 B4 B3 B2 B1
73L-ITR3100 73L-ITR4100

®
G5, OpenLine 73G-ITR100 73L-ITR100 73L-ITR3100/73L-ITR4100
Number of Inputs 1 Ch. 2 Ch. 2 Ch.
Resolution bits 12 12 12
°C/count 0.10 0.098 0.098
I/O Modules
Absolute Accuracy @ 25°C1, 2 +/- 0.8 +/- 0.3 +/- 0.3
Full Range Deflection DIN 43760 standard DIN 43760 standard DIN 43760 standard
Temperature Coefficient 0.00385 (European) 0.00385 (European) 0.00385 (European)
Serial Data Format 12-bit packet Right Justified, 16-bit Right Justified, 16-bit
Serial Data Packet — 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2 115.2Kb, N, 8, 2
Step Response Time3 mS 2.5 42 42
Input Temperature Range °C (°F) -50-350 (-58-662) -50-350 (-58-662) -50-350 (-58-662)
RTD Type 100 ohm platinum 100 ohm platinum 100 ohm platinum
Maximum Overload V — +/- 6 +/- 6
Logic Voltage Range Vdc 4.5-5.5 4.75-5.25 4.75-5.25
Max. Logic Supply Current@5Vdc mA/Ch. 150 38 38
Module ID (Pin 9) KΩ N/A 5.23 5.23
Isolation Voltage
Field to Logic Vrms 2500 2500 2500
Field to Power Vrms 2500 2500 2500
Module to Module Vrms 2500 2500 2500
Channel A to Channel B — None None
Operating Temperature °C 0 to +60°C -40 to +85°C -40 to +85°C
Storage Temperature °C -40 to +85°C -55 to -100°C -55 to +100°C
1
2
3
Time required for output to change to within 1% of final reading. Distributor, a local Sales Office or Grayhill.
I/O
System 50
SYSTEM 50
System 50
Contents: System 50
SYSTEM 50
• MicroDAC
• MicroDAC LT
• Promux
• Microlon
• Various I/O Racks
Page
SYSTEM 50 RACKS OVERVIEW ................................................................ 3

Racks
4 Channel ...................................................................................................... 4
8 Channel ...................................................................................................... 6
16 Channel .................................................................................................. 11
24 Channel (In-Line) ................................................................................... 18
24 Channel .................................................................................................. 22
32 Channel .................................................................................................. 25
32 Channel Parallel Controller Board for 72-PMX-32D ............................ 27
Controllers
MicroDAC (Optomux) .................................................................................. 29
System 50
MicroDAC LT (Optomux) ............................................................................. 31
Network Interfaces
Promux (Optomux) ...................................................................................... 33
Parallel Bus Interface .................................................................................. 35
Communication Converters ........................................................................ 37
Accessories ................................................................................................. 38
System 50
System 50
CONTROLLERS
MicroDAC (Optomux)
FEATURES
• Each Unit Controls/Monitors up to
32 Analog (G5 Only) and/or Digital
I/O Modules
• Executes On-Board Programs
Created With Borland C
• Network up to 64 MicroDACs per
Host Serial Port, Each Separated
by as Much as 4000 Feet
• Communicate Over RS-422/485 at
Speeds From 1200 Bd to 115.2 KB
• 100% Optomux™ Compatible, With
Expanded Command Set
• I/O Update Rates of 500 µSec per
32 Digital I/O, and 10 mS per
Analog Input or 2 Analog Outputs
• BASIC and C Drivers for the PC
• DIN Rail or Panel Mountable Metal
Enclosure
• Hardware Expansion With SBX Port
• Real Time Clock Option (Y2K
Compliant)
APPLICATIONS COMMUNICATIONS
The host PC and MicroDAC(s) communicate Libraries and the appropriate download utility are
Stand Alone Control serially over one or two pair of twisted wires per included with the ECP Programmers Manual.
RS-422/485 in either a multi-drop or repeat
Local Control & I/O configuration. They use Optomux™ ASCII format SOFTWARE
to code the command and the response Software drivers are available which simplify the
Remote I/O messages. Application programs running on the task of interfacing host programs written in Visual
host PC issue commands and then await Basic or C. Sample programs, set-up and debug
Distributed I/O responses from the MicroDAC. The utilities are included on the disk with the drivers.
communications speed is selectable between Interface drivers for most third party software
SCADA 1.2 and 115.2 KBaud. Each controller on the packages are available through their distributors.
network is assigned a unique base address. You Our MicroDAC DDE Server dramatically
RTU can separate units from one another by as much simplifies data sharing between MicroDACs and
as 4,000 feet. Windows applications, such as Microsoft Excel
(see Optomux Software). Our DLL will assist you
ANALOG & DIGITAL I/O EMBEDDED CONTROL in building custom Windows Man-Machine
System 50
A 50 conductor ribbon cable is supplied to connect Interfaces or control programs using Visual Basic,
MicroDACs to any 8,16,24, or 32 module PROGRAMS
Visual C/C++, or Borland compilers.
mounting rack. If connected to a G5 rack, any By specifying MicroDAC(s) with the optional
combination of analog and digital I/O modules 64KB of flash memory, you can develop and
download C language programs to any of the
OTHER FEATURES/OPTIONS
may be used. OpenLine®, standard and mini The RS-232 serial port provides a connection for
racks permit only a combination of digital modules. networked controllers.
remote RS-232 devices. You can use this port to
MicroDACs can be networked to a PC which read information from input devices such as bar
runs programs that monitor the input signals and Even while an Embedded Control Program (ECP)
code readers or keyboards or to write information
control the outputs. In addition to simple ON/OFF is running on MicroDAC, any Optomux ™
to output devices such as operator interfaces,
instructions, commands are included which command it receives from the host will be
intelligent displays or printers.
permit you to: processed as usual, which allows you to delegate
• Sample analog signals at 10 mS per input some or all of the control and data acquisition
The optional real time clock permits ECP routines
• Flag values above or below prescribed levels responsibility from the host PC. This reduces
to be executed based on date or time of day. It
• Capture min/max values communications time and improves system
also allows data that is collected to be time
• Calculate the average input signal levels response.
stamped and stored in battery backed RAM
• Provide linearized thermocouple and memory.
RTD temperature values For embedded or stand-alone applications,
• Determine the width of input pulses downloaded ECP routines can be initiated on
• Count pulses at frequencies up to 1000 Hz power-up. Where redundant control or process
• Detect rising or falling edges shutdown procedures are vital, ECP initiation can
• Latch momentary input events be tied to the communications watchdog timer. In
• Set the level of analog outputs the event the host computer goes off line, the ECP
• Provide delayed-on or delayed-off outputs automatically begins executing.
System 50
System 50
9 PIN D-SUB FOR RS-232

CONNECTION
7.885 (200,28)
THUMB SCREW FOR COVER
5.745 (145,92) REMOVAL (2 PLACES)
T
RO
CO
RC
XM
ER
ATTACHES TO
35 MM DIN RAIL
EN50022
6.370
(161,80)
5.105
(129,67) D A T A A C Q U I S I T I O N A N D C O N T R O L
3.857
(97,97)
2.402
(61,01)
.560 DIN RAIL CLIP

.632 PANEL MOUNTING HOLES I.D. 0.18 (4,6) DIA. (2 PLACES)
(14,2) 6.755 ± .005
(16,05) MOUNT WITH #8 SCREWS 0.75 (19,05) LONG MIN.
(171,58 ± 0,13)
CONNECTION
FOR
RS-422/485
2.843 0.719 WIRES
(72,21) (18,26)
Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are ± .010 (0,25).
SPECIFICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION

Power Supply: 4.75 to 5.25 Vdc Part Number Description
Supply Current (less modules): 1A maxi-
MicroDAC Controllers
System 50
mum
Operating Temperature: 0 to 60°C
72-MDC-32ADC Analog/Digital MicroDAC with RS-232 and SBX ports, 64K batt.
Humidity: 95% non-condensing
backed RAM, 64K flash for C ECP storage, and real time clock.
Housing Material: Anodized Aluminum
Microprocessor: V25 @ 10 MHz
Connections: MicroDAC User's Manuals and Software
RS-422/485: 12 position terminal block
RS-232 (DCE or DTE): 9-pin D-Sub (male) 72-UMM Introduction to MicroDAC
SBX: 36-pin dual row (female) 72-UMM-D Driver development and protocol definition. Includes driver source code
Rack: 50-pin male header 72-UMM-DDE Optomux DDE Server for Windows 3.1
Serial Data: 72-UMM-DLL Optomux DLL for Windows 3.1
Format: 10-Bit ASCII, 1 Start, 1 Stop, 8 Data 72-UMM-DLL32 Optomux DLL for Windows 95/98/NT
Integrity: Message Checksum or 4 Pass + CS 72-UMM-E C language ECP manual with libraries
Range of Network: Compliant with EIA/TIA 72-UMM-H Programmers manual with Basic and C host drivers & examples
RS-485-A (1 standard load per controller). 72-UMM-IL Hardware installation and set-up. Includes set-up and debug programs.
Operates in multi-drop or repeat mode. 64 DIP 7W-UM-MDL32 Windows ECP download Utility
switch selectable addresses. May require
RS485 repeaters for lengths over 4,000 feet Available from your local authorized For prices and discounts, contact your local
or more than 32 controllers in multi-drop Grayhill Distributor. sales office, an authorized Distributor, or
mode. Consult factory for special configura- Grayhill.
tions.
System 50
System 50
CONTROLLERS
MicroDAC LT (Optomux)
FEATURES
32 Analog (G5 Only) and/or Digital
I/O Modules
• Executes On-Board Programs
Created With Borland C
• Network up to 64 MicroDAC LTs
per Host Serial Port, Spanning as
Much as 4000 Feet
• Communicate Over RS-422 /485 at
Speeds From 1200 Baud to
115.2 KB
• 100% Optomux Compatible, With
32 Digital I/O, and 10 mS per
Analog Input or 2 Analog Outputs
• 64-Bit Floating Point Math
APPLICATIONS
and control the outputs. In addition to simple Even while an Embedded Control Program
ON/OFF instructions, commands are included (ECP) is running on MicroDAC LT, any
which permit you to: Optomux™ command it receives from the host
• Sample analog signals at 10 mS per input will be processed as usual, which allows you to
• Flag values above or below prescribed levels delegate some or all of the control and data
• Capture min/max values acquisition responsibility from the host computer.
• Calculate the average input signal levels This reduces communications time and
• Provide linearized thermocouple and improves system response.
RTD temperature values
• Determine the width of input pulses For embedded or stand-alone applications,
• Count pulses at frequencies up to 1000Hz downloaded ECP routines can be initiated on
• Detect rising or falling edges power-up.
• Latch momentary input events
• Set the level of analog outputs Libraries and the appropriate download utility
GENERAL DESCRIPTION • Provide delayed-on or delayed-off outputs are included with the ECP Programmers
MicroDAC LT is a low cost version of MicroDAC Manual.
System 50
for customers who don't need all of the features COMMUNICATIONS

of MicroDAC. Missing are the battery back-up The host computer and MicroDAC LT(s) SOFTWARE
for the RAM memory, real-time clock, RS-232, communicate serially over one or two pair of Software drivers are available which simplify
and SBX ports. The DIN Rail Mountable metal twisted wires per RS-422/485 in a multi-drop the task of interfacing host programs written in.
enclosure is optional. ECP routines written for configuration. They use Optomux ™ ASCII Visual Basic or C to the MicroDAC network.
MicroDAC can be easily transferred to format to code the command and the response Sample programs, set-up and debug utilities
MicroDAC LT and vice versa. By combining messages. Application programs running on are included on the disk with the drivers.
MicroDAC, MicroDAC LT and ProMux the the host computer issue commands and then Interface drivers for most third party software
cost/performance of a distributed control or await responses from the MicroDAC. The packages are available through their
data acquisition network is optimized for price communications speed is selectable between distributors. Our MicroDAC DDE Server
and performance. 1.2 and 115.2 KBaud. Each controller on the dramatically simplifies data sharing between
network is assigned a unique base address. MicroDACs and Windows applications, such
ANALOG & DIGITAL I/O The entire network can span 4000 feet. as Microsoft Excel (see Controller Software).
MicroDAC LT connects directly to any 8,16,24, Our DLL will assist you in building custom
or 32 module mounting rack with a 50-pin EMBEDDED CONTROL PROGRAMS Windows Man-Machine Interfaces or control
header. If connected to a G5 rack, any By specifying MicroDAC LT(s) with the optional programs using Visual Basic, Visual C/C++, or
combination of analog and digital I/O modules 64KB of flash memory, you can develop and Borland compilers.
may be used. Standard and Mini racks permit download C language programs to any of the
only a combination of digital modules. MicroDAC networked controllers. 1
With optional enclosure.
LTs can be networked to a host PC which
execute programs that monitor the input signals
System 50
System 50
STANDOFF I.D.
0.15 (3,8) DIA.
CLEARANCE 4.975 0.725
FOR #6 SCREW (126,37) (18,42)
ATTACHES TO
35 MM DIN RAIL
EN50022
+5V
GND
FH+ 3.000
4.25 2.80
FH- (76,2)
(107,95) (71,12)
TH+
TH-
FO+
FO-
TO+
TO-
0.725 .758
0.20 (19,25)
(5,08) (18,42) .758
(19,25)
4.875 0.625
(123,83) (15,88)
1.385
(35,18)
2.20
PLUG CONNECTOR
(55,9)
MATES DIRECTLY
WITH A RACK
Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are ± .010 (0,25).
System 50
Power Supply: 4.75 to 5.25 Vdc
Supply Current (less modules): 300 mA Part Number Description
Operating Temperature: 0 to 70°C MicroDAC LT Controllers
Microprocessor: V25 @ 10 MHz 72-MDL-32ADC Analog/Digital with 64K flash for C ECP storage
Housing Material: Painted steel
Connections: MicroDAC LT User's Manuals and Software
RS-422/485: 10 position terminal block
Rack: 50-pin female plug 72-UMM Introduction to MicroDAC
Serial Data: 72-UMM-D Driver development and protocol definition. Includes driver source code
Format: 10-Bit ASCII, 1 Start, 1 Stop, 8 Data 72-UMM-DDE Optomux DDE Server for Windows 3.1
Integrity: Message Checksum or 4 Pass + CS 72-UMM-DLL Optomux DLL for Windows 3.1
Range of Network: Compliant with EIA/TIA 72-UMM-DLL32 Optomux DLL for Windows 95/98/NT
RS485-A (1 standard load per controller). 72-UMM-E C language ECP manual with libraries
Operates in multi-drop mode. 64 DIP switch 72-UMM-H Programmers manual with Basic and C host drivers & examples
selectable addresses. May require RS485 72-UMM-IL Hardware installation and set-up. Includes set-up and debug programs
repeaters for lengths over 4000 feet or more
than 32 controllers. Consult factory for special Available from your local authorized Gray- For prices and discounts, contact your local
configurations. hill Distributor. sales office, an authorized Distributor, or
Grayhill.
System 50
System 50
NETWORK INTERFACES
ProMux® (Optomux)
FEATURES
• Each Board Controls Up to 24
Standard, Mini, G5 or OpenLine®
Digital Modules
• Up to 256 Addressable ProMux®
Boards Separated by 4,000 Feet
• 100% Optomux Compatible,
Plus Extra Commands
• Communications at Speeds From
300 Baud to 38.4 KBaud.
• Transient Protection on
Communications Lines
• Direct Plug-In or Ribbon
Cable Interconnection
• BASIC and C Drivers for the PC
APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE
• Count pulses at frequencies up to 400Hz Software drivers are available which simplify
Stand Alone Control the task of interfacing programs written in
• Detect rising or falling edges
• Latch momentary input events Visual Basic or C to the ProMux® network.
Local Control & I/O • Turn outputs ON or OFF individually or in Sample programs and the set-up and debug
groups utilities are included on the disk with the drivers.
Remote I/O • Pulse-width modulate outputs Interface drivers for most third party software
• Provide delayed-on or delayed-off outputs packages are available through their
Distributed I/O • Generate pulses or squarewaves distributors.
SCADA
COMMUNICATIONS OTHER FEATURES
All ProMux® boards are thoroughly tested and
RTU The host computer and ProMux ® boards
shipped in static proof boxes.
communicate serially over two pair of twisted
System 50
wires per RS-422/485 in either a multi-drop or

Because space inside your enclosure can be
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS repeat configuration. They use an industry
limited, we offer numerous rack plug-in
The ProMux® network interface mates with standard ASCII string format to code the
configuration options. For applications requiring
any of our 8, 16, or 24 digital module racks. command and response messages.
even more mounting flexibility, the ProMux®
Plug Grayhill OpenLine®, standard, miniature, Application programs running on the host
boards can be connected to racks with a
or G5 digital I/O modules into the racks. They computer issue commands and then await
ribbon cable up to six feet long.
can be mixed in any combination. Connect the responses from the ProMux ® boards. The
ProMux® boards serially to a host computer communications speed is selectable between
If you do not have an RS-422 or RS-485 serial
and then issue commands to monitor the 300 baud and 38.4 KBaud. Each controller on
port on your PC, we offer a variety of RS-232
inputs or control the outputs. Commands are the network is assigned a unique base address
to RS-422/485 converters.
included which permit you to: from 0 to 255. You can separate boards from
• Read the ON/OFF status of inputs one another by as much as 4,000 feet.
• Determine the width of input pulses
System 50
System 50
0.25 3.50 (88,9) 2.25 (57,1)

0.275 (6,4) CONNECTION
(7,0) STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 (3,8) DIA. FOR RS-422/485
CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREW WIRES
1.5 (38,1)
2.625 4.00
(66,68) (101,6)
NOTE: FRONT LEGS ARE
INSTALLED ONLY ON 72-PMO-3
4.50
(114,3)
1.35 PLUG CONNECTOR ON 72-PMO-1

(34,29) MATES DIRECTLY WITH A RACK
0.55 (13,97) PIN 1

HEADER CONNECTOR ON 72-PMO-3
0.67 (17,0) 2.66 (67,5) MATES WITH A RIBBON CABLE
4.00 (101,6)
Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,25).

Supply Voltage: 4.5 to 5.5 Vdc
Supply Current (less modules): 300 mA Part Number Description
max.
Operating Temperature: 0° to 70°C Network Interfaces
Humidity: 95% non-condensing 72-PMO-1 Plug connector for direct rack connection
Microprocessor: 68HC11 @ 7.4 MHz 72-PMO-3 Header connector for ribbon cable to rack connection
Connections:
RS-422/485: 12 position terminal block User’s Manuals and Software
Rack: 50-pin female plug connector or 50-pin
72-UMO Manual with no software, for evaluating boards for purchase
male header connector
System 50
72-UMO-C Manual with Basic and C software drivers and utilities
Serial Data:
72-UMM-DDE Optomux DDE server for Windows 3.1
Format: 10-Bit ASCII, 1 Start, 1 Stop, 8 Data
72-UMM-DLL Optomux DLL for Windows 3.1
Integrity: Message Checksum or 4 Pass + CS
72-UMM-DLL32 Optomux DLL for Windows 95/98/NT
Range of Network: Compliant with EIA/TIA
RS485-A (1 standard load per controller). Available from your local authorized Gray- For prices and discounts, contact your local
Operates in multi-drop or repeat mode. 256 hill Distributor. sales office, an authorized Distributor, or
DIP switch selectable addresses. May require Grayhill.
RS485 repeaters for lengths over 4,000 feet or
more than 32 controllers in multi-drop mode.
Consult factory for special configurations.
System 50
System 50
NETWORK INTERFACES
Parallel Bus
FEATURES
• Each Board Controls Up to 24 or 32
I/O Modules
• Scans 512 Digital I/O Points in
Less Than 200 µSec.
• Compatible With Parallel Controller
Boards From Other Manufacturers
• DIP Switch Selectable Address
and Options
• Up to 32 Addressable Boards Over
500 Feet
• On-Board Terminating Resistors
• On-Board Communications
Watchdog Timer
APPLICATIONS SPEED
The parallel bus is high speed. The host PC Three LEDs on the controller boards assist in
can read or write eight digital I/O modules in troubleshooting problems. They indicate when
Stand Alone Control
less than 3 microseconds which means that power is being applied, when messages are
512 digital I/O modules can be scanned in less being received, and when the watchdog timer
Local Control & I/O than 200 microseconds! Each group of eight has timed out.
I/O modules are accessed through a separate
Remote I/O I/O port register on the host PC or controller. THE 72-PC28 ADAPTER CARD
In assembly language, an IN or OUT instruction
Distributed I/O In applications where the host computer is a
is used to read or write this information. In C
PC, the 72-PC28 adapter card is an IBM PC/
language, an inp or outp function call is used.
SCADA XT/AT bus to parallel bus interface which
In BASIC, an INP or OUTP instruction is used.
occupies a single half slot in the computer. The
bus ribbon cable plugs into it's 50-pin male
RTU WATCHDOG TIMER header connector. Each adapter card can
Each controller board has an on-board drive up to thirty two 72-PMX-24D controller
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS communications watchdog timer which boards, sixteen 72-PMX-32D controller boards
The 72-PMX-24D controller board mates with monitors communications between the host or sixteen 72-PMX-32AD controller boards
any of our 8, 16, or 24 digital module racks. The and controller board. A timer value between over a total distance of 500 feet. Up to four 72-
0.5 seconds and 12 seconds is selected for PC28 adapter cards can be installed in one PC.
System 50
72-PMX-32D or 72-PMX-32AD controller

board mates with special rack part number each board. On power up, the timer begins The base address for the card and wait states
70GRCP32-HL which accepts up to 32 G5 counting down. Whenever a message from are DIP switch selectable.
analog or digital I/O modules. Connections are the host is received, the timer is restarted.
made between the PC (or other type of host) Should the timer time out, all of the output Each 72-PC28 includes a complete User's
parallel port and the controller boards via a 50 modules being controlled by the board will be Manual and a software setup/test utility
pin flat ribbon cable. The cable can be up to 500 set to one of four DIP switch selectable program. This program graphically shows you
feet in length. The cable from the host is conditions (ie. all off). dip switch, jumper and termination resistor
connected to the first controller board on the settings for the system configuration you
bus and then daisy chained to additional OTHER FEATURES decided. You can then use the program to
controller boards. Up to 32 controller boards One of the control lines on the parallel bus is configure and manipulate any I/O on the parallel
with 16 module racks (or 16 controller boards called RESET. The RESET line can be used to bus.
with 24 or 32 module racks) can be added simultaneously turn off all of the output modules
anywhere along the cable. The maximum being controlled by each of the boards on the All controller boards are thoroughly tested
number of I/O per parallel port is 512. bus. prior to shipment.
System 50
System 50
Part No. 72-PMX-24D
6.00 (152,4)
5.50 (139,7) LOGIC

STANDOFF I.D. 0.15 (3,8) DIA. SUPPLY
CLEARANCE FOR #6 SCREWS TERMINAL
(38,1)
STRIP
1.50
POWER LED
ADDRESS LED DIP SWITCH
0.25 (6,35)
WATCHDOG LED
– +
4.50
(114,3)
50 PIN RIBBON
CABLE CONNECTORS
FOR PARALLEL BUS
PLUG
CONNECTOR
TO MOUNTING
TERMINATION RACK
RESISTOR PACKS
0.50
(12,7)
Part No. 72-PMX-32AD or 72-PMX-32D
Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are ± 0.010 (0,35).
System 50
Supply Current (board only): 1.5A maximum Part Number Description
Operating Temperature: 0° to 60°C Controller Board
Connections (72-PMX-24D): 72-PMX-24D Parallel controller board for up to 24 digital I/O modules
Parallel bus: Two 50-pin male header 72-PMX-32AD Parallel controller board for 32 G5 analog or digital I/O modules
connectors 72-PMX-32D Parallel controller board for 32 G5 digital I/O modules
Rack: 50-pin female plug connector
Connections (72-PMX-32D or 72-PMX-32AD): Adapter Card
Parallel bus: Two 50-pin male header 72-PC28 IBM PC parallel port plug-in board, includes 72-UMP manual
connectors located on rack 70GRCP32-HL
Rack: 70-pin female plug connector User’s Manual
Parallel Data: 72-UMP Manual with utility software and sample programs
Format: 8-Bit Parallel
Range of Network: For finished ribbon cable assemblies, see “Controller Accessories”
Multi-drop: Up to 500 feet total cable length,
with (32) 72-PMX-24D or (16) 72-PMX-32D or
72-PMX-32AD boards maximum Available from your local authorized Gray- For prices and discounts, contact your local
hill Distributor. sales office, an authorized Distributor, or
Grayhill.
System 50
System 50
COMMUNICATION
CONVERTERS
RS-232 to RS-422/485
FEATURES
• Selectable RTS operation for 2
wire applications
• Transient Protection on the
RS-422/485 Lines
´ On-Board Power Supply With
Jumper Selectable 110/220 Vac
Operation
• Optical Isolation Between RS-232
and RS422/485
• DIP Switch Selectable DTE/DCE
Setting
• Multiple Mounting and Connector
Options handshaking can be controlled from either end of type terminal strip. RS-422 signals are on a
the communication link. Typical applications separate terminal strip or a female DB-9
involve connecting a host computer to remotely connector. 72-CNV-12 has a DIN rail card
located serial devices such as printers, control carrier which permits the assembly to snap on
GENERAL DESCRIPTION equipment, or data acquisition devices distributed a DIN rail. AC power and RS-422 signals are
The 72-CNV-XX family of converters offer a throughout an office or factory. brought in to two screw-type terminal strips. A
flexible and reliable solution to the challenge of female DB-25 connector transfers the RS-232
interfacing devices conforming to different serial The multiple mounting and connector options signals for all three versions.
communication standards. Grayhill converter allow for many installation possibilities. All three
products are designed for industrial versions conform to a Eurocard 3U size (160 mm SPECIFICATIONS
environments. All communication lines have x 100 mm). 72-CNV-10 will mount in a DIN 41494 Supply Voltage Range (Vps): 110/220 Vac
transient protection which other commercially card cage. AC power and the RS-422 signals are (jumper selectable)
available converters lack. The converters allow brought out to a DIN standard 41612 15-pin Maximum Supply Current (Ips): 120 mA
an RS-232 device (ie. PCs, PLCs, Embedded connector (Harting p/n 09061152911 or Isolation Voltage: 4000 Vac
Controllers) to communicate reliably over long equivalent). 72-CNV-11 has standoffs to facilitate Transmission Rate: 300 to 115,200 Baud
distances to multiple devices utilizing the RS- panel mounting. AC power comes in to a screw- Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 60°C
422/485 standard. Reliability is an inherent benefit 95% relative humidity, non-condensing
of the differential mode communication of RS- ORDERING INFORMATION Indicators: TX, RX, CTS, RTS and Power
422/485. Noise introduced onto the RS-422/485
link affects both the positive and negative side Part Number Description
equally, preserving the integrity of the differential 72-CNV-10 RS-232 to RS-422/485 converter for DIN card cage (Pictured)
signal between them. Long distances and multiple 72-CNV-11 RS-232 to RS-422 converter for panel mount
slave devices are supported by the converters. 72-CNV-12 RS-232 to RS-422/485 converter for DIN rail mounting
In half-duplex (2-wire) RS-485 mode,
System 50
72-CNV-2, 72-CNV-4 AND 72-CNV-5 72-CNV-4 and 72-CNV-5 convert serial operates only in an RS-422 mode at a maximum
communications from RS-232 to RS-485 in rate of 19.2 KB.
both directions. The converter simply plugs Supply Voltage:
into any male RS-232 DB-25 connector and +8 to +15 Vdc (-2 and -4 versions)
converts the transmit and receive signals to +5Vdc (-5 version)
RS-485 (RS-422) levels at speeds to 115.2 Supply Current:
KB. The converters are configured for DTE 62 mA plus output load (-2 version)
(default) or DCE operation. 30 mA plus output load (-4 and -5 version)
Operating Temperature Range: 0-60°C
The 72-CNV-2 is similar to the 72-CNV-4
except that it provides optical isolation and
72-CNV-2 RS-232 to RS-422 converter with optical isolation
72-CNV-4 RS-232 to RS-422/485 converter with 8 to 15V operation
72-CNV-5 RS-232 to RS-422/485 converter with 5V operation
Office, an authorized Distributor, or Grayhill.
System 50
System 50
ACCESSORIES
CABLE ASSEMBLIES Several standard cable assem- TEST MODULES Modules for use in system set up
blies to connect controllers to our and testing may be ordered. Mod-
I/O module mounting racks may ules 70M-ISW1and 70G-ISW1
be ordered. The 72-CHH cable simulates an input; 70M-OSW1
has a 50-pin header connector on switch simulates an output.
each end to mate with those on
mounting racks. The 72-CHE cable
has a 50-pin header connector on
one end and a 50-pin edge card
connector on the other.
FUSE KITS
Fuse and fuse holder Replacement kits of 10
Cable Assemblies can be ordered directly from Grayhill.
72-CHH-1 Ribbon cable assembly, header to header, 1 foot long
72-CHH-2 Ribbon cable assembly, header to header, 2 feet long Controller Boards, I/O Modules, Module
72-CHH-4 Ribbon cable assembly, header to header, 4 feet long Racks, and Accessories are available
72-CHH-6 Ribbon cable assembly, header to header, 6 feet long through Authorized Grayhill Industrial Dis-
72-CHE-2 Ribbon cable assembly, header to edge card, 2 feet long tributors. For prices and discounts, contact
72-CHE-4 Ribbon cable assembly, header to edge card, 4 feet long your local sales office, an authorized Industrial
72-CHE-6 Ribbon cable assembly, header to edge card, 6 feet long Distributor, or Grayhill.
Test Modules
70L-ISW Input module test switch, OpenLine® package
70G-ISW1 Input module test switch, G5 package
70M-ISW1 Input module test switch, mini package
70M-OSW1 Output module test switch, 3 amp, mini package
Fuses
70-FUSE-3AC Fuse, 3.15A, 5x20mm, used on all AC Digital Output Modules
70-FUSE-3DC Fuse, 3.15A, 5x20mm, used on all Solid State OpenLine ®
DC Digital Output Modules
70-FUSE-H Fuse holder for Output Modules, used on all Digital Output Modules
SYSTEM 50 JUMPER BARS DIMENSIONS: Jumper Bars

Grayhill jumper bars are available for
applications that require common G5 .032
DIM. L ± .010 (0,25)
(0,81)
terminals to be bussed together on .500 (12,7) TYP. .180
digital I/O mounting racks. Jumper .240 .100 (2,54) (4,57)
System 50
(6,10) .655 (16,64)
bars are available for both our Mini
and G5 racks. Grayhill jumper bars
are made from .032” thick tin-plated .087
(2,21)
brass. The jumper bars are insulated
with a molded sleeve for excellent
dielectric properties. Mini DIM. L ± .010 (0,25) .032
(0,81)
.400 (10,16) TYP. .180
.240 .080 (2,03) (4,57)
(6,10)
.555 (14,10)
.087
(2,21)
ORDERING INFORMATION: Jumper Bars for Grayhill G5 and Mini Series I/O Racks
Part Number Description Dimension “L” in. (mm) Use on Grayhill I/O Rack
70G-JUMP8 8 position jumper for G5 I/O racks 3.60 (91,44) 70GRCK8-HL, 70GRCK16-HL, 70GRCM32-HL,
70GRCP32-HL, 70GRCK16I, 70GRCK16T
70G-JUMP12 12 position jumper for G5 I/O racks 5.60 (142,24) 70GRCQ24-HL
70M-JUMP6 6 position jumper for Mini I/O racks 2.08 (52,83) 70MRCQ24-HL
70M-JUMP8 8 position jumper for Mini I/O racks 2.88 (73,15) 70MRCK8-HL, 70MRCK16-HL, 70MRCK24-HL
System 50
OpenDAC® I/O System
OPENDAC®
OPENDA
I/O SYSTEM
Contents: OpenDAC
OpenDac® I/O System
OPENDAC® I/O SYSTEM

Low Cost Remote I/O System
FEATURES
• Compatible with Present
Systems
• Communicates within third
party hardware and software
• Ethernet Version
Page
Network Interfaces
OpenDAC® for Ethernet .............................................................................................. 2
OpenDAC® for Modbus .............................................................................................. 4
OpenLT (Optomux) ..................................................................................................... 6
OpenDAC® for Profibus ............................................................................................. 8
Racks
16 Channel ............................................................................................................... 10

The OpenDAC® family is a compact, low cost
and flexible I/O system that is used for remote
data requisition and control. Each network
interface is capable of interfacing with one or
two OpenDAC® I/O racks that allow a
maximum of 32 channels of OpenLine® I/O
modules. With the exception of the OpenLT™,
they do not have the capability of running
embedded control programs (ECPS). If this
is a requirement, please review the OpenLine®
Control System. OpenDAC® I/O racks are
not compatible with the OpenLine ®
Controllers.
OpenDAC
NETWORK INTERFACES
OpenDAC® for Ethernet
FEATURES
• Use Ethernet to Control/Monitor up
to 32 Analog and/or Digital I/O
Channels using OpenLine® I/O
Modules
• Network Multiple OpenDACs®
• 10Base-T and 100Base-TX Support
• Extremely Fast Response Times
over Network
• Support Modbus/TCP Protocol
and HTTP
• Use Web Browser for Configuration,
Monitoring and Control of I/O
modules
• Diagnostic LEDs
• CE Certified ETHERNET UNIT ON OPENDAC® SYSTEM
• DIN Rail Mounting
• Modbus TCP
APPLICATIONS GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The OpenDAC® for Ethernet network inter- Each OpenDAC® incorporates a communication
Stand Alone Control face is a remote slave that responds to watchdog timer that monitors communication
Modbus/TCP commands that it receives over from the Modbus/TCP master. When the
Local Control & I/O the network. The status and configuration of watchdog is enabled and the slave does not
up to 32 OpenLine® analog or digital I/O chan- receive a valid Modbus/TCP message within a
Remote I/O
nels is stored and constantly refreshed. specified time, the OpenDAC® will set all output
OpenDAC® for Ethernet is self-configuring. On modules to the stored fault-state values. Should
Distributed I/O
power up, the controller will identify the types a valid message be received, the timer is reset
of I/O modules present. The unit will then con- and communication resumes. All configuration
SCADA
tinuously scan and update the digital and ana- parameters are displayed and modified using a
log modules. Digital input channels can be web browser. The configuration parameters
RTU
setup for latching operation. The OpenDAC® are password protected to provide security
for Ethernet supports the OpenLine® Smart against unauthorized access.

Module Protocol (SMP) that allows field cali-
bration and parameter setup of I/O modules.
ANALOG & DIGITAL I/O
Each OpenDAC® or third party device on the
MODULES
network is assigned a unique IP address. There
OpenDAC® for Ethernet connects directly to
are three methods of assigning the internet
one or two 16 channel racks. Any combination
protocol address -BOOTP, DHCP, and a static
of analog and digital I/O modules may be used.
method. The controller is shipped with the default
On power up, the OpenDAC® scans and stores
IP address of 128.0.0.1. The IP address can be
the I/O configuration and makes the information
changed using a web browser. The web browser
available to the master.
can also be used to select BOOTP or DHCP to
assign the IP address. Communication data
In addition to simple On/Off instructions, the
rates are either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps.
OpenDAC® allows you to:
OpenDAC® automatically detects whether it is
• Read linearized thermocouple and RTD
connected to a 10Base-T or 100Base-TX
temperature values
network, eliminating switch settings and
• Detect rising or falling edges
simplifying set up. Network and controller status
• Latch momentary input events
can be monitored by status LEDs.
• Set the level of analog outputs
OpenDAC
4.1(104,26)
3.9 (99,56)
for Ethernet
OpenDAC
DEFAULT
CONFIG
POWER
RESET
STAT
DIN RAIL LATCH
LINK
2.6
(65.48)
2.3 (57.17)
PIN 1 TO CENTERLINE OF
DIN RAIL CHANNEL

Supply Current (less modules): 1.0 amp Part Number Description
max. Ethernet Network Interface
Operating Temperature: -40 to 85°C
Humidity: 5-95% non-condensing 72-ETH-T000 Analog/Digital OpenDAC® for Ethernet
Housing Material: ABS/Polycarbonate blend
Ethernet User’s Manual and Software
CPU: Net+ARM 40
Connections: 72-UM-OETH OpenDAC® for Ethernet user’s manual
Network: RJ-45 72-UM-ETH OpenLine® for Ethernet user’s manual
Passive Rack: 48-Pin Euro DIN (male) 72-UOL OpenLine®/OpenDAC® configuration and product data
Range of Network (without repeaters): 72-UME-DLL32 Ethernet/Modbus DLL for Windows 95/98/NT
100 meters with CAT 5 UTP
Compatible Components

®
OpenDAC I/O Racks Analog OpenLine® I/O Modules
Digital OpenLine® I/O Modules Power Supply
Available from your local authorized

Grayhill Distributor. For prices and discounts,
contact your local sales office, an authorized
Distributor or Grayhill.
OpenDAC
NETWORK INTERFACES
OpenDAC® for Modbus
FEATURES
32 Analog and/or Digital I/O using
OpenLine® Modules
• Network up to 247 OpenDACs® per
Host PC, Each Separated by as
much as 4,000 Feet
• Communicate Over RS-422/485 at
Speeds from 9600 Baud to 56.7 KB
• 100% Modbus ASCII or Modbus
RTU Compatible
• CE Certified
• DIN Rail or Panel Mount
MODBUS UNIT ON OPENDAC® SYSTEM

OpenDAC® for Modbus is an inexpensive, format to code the command and the response
Stand Alone Control flexible interface to 32 analog or digital messages. Application programs running on
OpenLine® I/O. As one of 247 slave devices on the host computer issue commands and then
Local Control & I/O a Modbus network, OpenDAC® for Modbus await responses from the OpenDAC®. The
constantly scans and stores the current status communications speed is switch selectable
Remote I/O of each I/O. Upon command from the host between 9600 and 56700 baud. The entire
device, the controller will change the status of network can span 4000 feet.
Distributed I/O an output or return the value of an input. The
slave address is switch selectable. Diagnostic FAULT TOLERANCE
SCADA LEDs provide troubleshooting assistance. Each OpenDAC® for Modbus has an internal
communications watchdog timer to minimize
RTU the impact of a broken Modbus link between the
ANALOG & DIGITAL I/O

OpenDAC® for Modbus connects directly to two controller and the master device. If activated,
16 channel racks. Any combination of analog the timer must be reset by an incoming message
and digital I/O modules may be used. On power within the prescribed period of time. If not, the
up, the OpenDAC® scans and stores the I/O controller will force it’s outputs into a default
configuration and makes the information state.
available to the master for query.
SOFTWARE
In addition to simple On/Off instructions, Modbus Software drivers are available which simplify
commands allow you to: the task of interfacing host programs written in
• Read linearized thermocouple and RTD Visual Basic or C to the Modbus network. Sample
temperature values programs, set-up and debug utilities are included
• Count pulses at frequencies up to 1000Hz on the disk with the drivers. Interface drivers for
• Detect rising or falling edges most third party software packages are available
• Latch momentary input events through their distributors. Our DLL will assist
• Set the level of analog outputs you in building custom Man-Machine Interfaces
using Visual Basic, Visual C/C++, or Borland
COMMUNICATIONS compilers running on Windows 95, 98 or NT.
The host computer and OpenDAC® for Modbus
communicate serially over one or two pair of
twisted wires per RS-422/485 in a multi-drop
configuration. They use Modbus ASCII or RTU
OpenDAC
4.1(104.26)
1.1
3.9 (99.56) (28.22)
DIN RAIL LATCH
1.0
(25.86)
3.0
(75.69) 2.6
(65.48)
2.3 (57.17)
DIN RAIL CHANNEL

Supply Current (less modules): 1 amp @ 5 Part Number Description
Vdc max. OpenDAC® Network Interface
Operating Temperature: 0 to 60°C
Humidity: 95% non-condensing 72-MOD-4000 Analog/Digital OpenDAC® for Modbus
Microprocessor: V25 @ 10 MHz
Housing Material: ABS/Polycarbonate blend OpenDAC® User’s Manual and Software
Connections:
RS-422/485: 5 position depluggable connector 72-UM-OMOD OpenDAC® for Modbus user’s manual
Passive Rack: 48-pin Euro DIN (male) 72-UME-DLL32 Ethernet/Modbus DLL for Windows 95/98/NT
Serial Data: 72-UOL OpenLine® configuration and product data
Format: 10 Bit ASCII: 1 Start, 1 Stop, 8 Data

Integrity: Message Checksum Compatible Components
Range of Network: Compliant with EIA/TIA ®
OpenDAC I/O Racks
RS485-A (1 standard load per controller).
Digital OpenLine® I/O Modules
Operates in multi-drop mode. 247 DIP switch
Analog OpenLine® I/O Modules
selectable addresses. May require RS485
Power Supply
repeaters for lengths over 4000 feet or more
than 32 controllers. Consult factory for special
configurations. Available from your local authorized Grayhill
Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact
your local sales office, an authorized Distributor,
or Grayhill.
OpenDAC
NETWORK INTERFACES
OpenLT™ (Optomux)
FEATURES
• Each Unit Controls/Monitors up to 32
Analog and/or Digital I/O using OpenLine®
Modules
• Executes On-Board Programs Created
With Borland C
• Network up to 64 OpenLTs per Host Serial
Port, Spanning as Much as 4000 Feet
• Communicate Over RS422 /485 at
Speeds from 9600 Baud to 115.2 KB
• 100% Optomux Compatible, With
• I/O Update Rates of 500 µSec per 32
Digital I/O, and 2 mS per Analog Input OPENLT® UNIT ON OPENDAC® SYSTEM
or 2 Analog Outputs
• 64-Bit Floating Point Math
• DIN Rail or Panel Mountable
• CE Certified
APPLICATIONS ANALOG & DIGITAL I/O EMBEDDED CONTROL PROGRAMS

OpenLT® connects directly to one or two By specifying OpenLT(s)® with the optional 64
Stand Alone Control OpenLine® racks (part number 70LRCK16-48). KB of flash memory, you can develop and
Any combination of OpenLine® analog and digital download C language programs to any of the
Local Control & I/O I/O modules may be used. OpenLTs™ can be networked controllers.
networked to a host PC which execute programs
Central Processing: Remote I/O that monitor the input signals and control the Even while an ECP is running on OpenLT®, any
outputs. In addition to simple ON/OFF Optomux™ command it receives from the host
Distributed Processing: Remote I/O instructions, commands are included which will be processed as usual, which allows you to
permit you to: delegate some or all of the control and data
SCADA • Sample analog signals at 2 mS per input acquisition responsibility from the host computer.
• Flag values above or below prescribed levels This reduces communications time and improves
RTU • Capture min/max values system response.
• Calculate the average input signal levels

• Provide linearized thermocouple and For embedded or stand-alone applications,
GENERAL DESCRIPTION RTD temperature values downloaded ECP routines can be initiated on
The OpenLT™ Optomux™ controller is a remote • Determine the width of input pulses power-up.
slave that responds to Optomux™ commands • Count pulses at frequencies up to 1000Hz
from the master or host PC. The 72-OPT-4100 • Detect rising or falling edges Libraries and the appropriate download utility
version has memory for Embedded Control • Latch momentary input events are included with the ECP Programmers Manual.
Programs (ECPs) which are control or data • Set the level of analog outputs
acquisition routines which run locally on the • Provide delayed-on or delayed-off outputs
OpenLT™ and off-load some responsibilities
SOFTWARE
from the host. ECP routines written for MicroDAC Software drivers are available which simplify
COMMUNICATIONS the task of interfacing host programs written in
can be easily transferred to OpenLT™ and vice The host computer and OpenLT(s) ™
versa. By combining MicroDAC, OpenLT™ and Visual Basic or C to the Optomux network.
communicate serially over one or two pair of Sample programs, set-up and debug utilities
ProMux® the cost/performance of a distributed twisted wires per RS-422/485 in a multi-drop
control or data acquisition network is optimized are included on the disk with the drivers. Interface
configuration. They use Optomux™ ASCII format drivers for most third party software packages
for price and performance. to code the command and the response are available through their distributors. Our
messages. Application programs running on Optomux DDE Server dramatically simplifies
the host computer issue commands and then data sharing between OpenLTs™ and Windows
await responses from the OpenLT™. The applications, such as Microsoft EXCEL (see
communications speed is selectable between Controller Software). Our DLL will assist you in
9.6 and 115.2 KBaud. Each controller on the building custom Windows Man-Machine
network is assigned a unique base address. Interfaces using Visual Basic, Visual C/C++, or
The entire network can span 4000 feet. Borland compilers.
Diagnostic LEDs show traffic on the network.
OpenDAC
4.1(104.26)
1.1
3.9 (99.56) (28.22)
DIN RAIL LATCH
1.0
(25.86)
3.0
(75.69) 2.6
(65.48)
2.3 (57.17)
DIN RAIL CHANNEL

Supply Current (less modules): 300 mA max. Part Number Description
Operating Temperature: 0 to 60°C OpenLT® Network Interface
Microprocessor: V25 @ 10 MHz 72-OPT-4000 Analog/Digital OpenLT®
Housing Material: ABS/Polycarbonate blend 72-OPT-4100 Analog/Digital OpenLT® with 64K flash for C ECP storage
Connections:
RS-422/485: 5 position pluggable terminal block OpenLT® User’s Manuals and Software
Rack: 48-pin Euro DIN (male)
Serial Data: 72-UMM-D Driver development and protocol definition (includes driver source code)
Format: 10-Bit ASCII, 1 Start, 1 Stop, 8 Data 72-UMM-DDE Optomux DDE server for Windows 3.1
Integrity: Message Checksum or 4 Pass + CS 72-UMM-DLL Optomux DLL for Windows 3.1

Range of Network: Compliant with EIA/TIA 72-UMM-DLL32 Optomux DLL for Windows 95/98/NT
RS485-A (1 standard load per controller). 72-UMM-E C language ECP manual with libraries
Operates in multi-drop mode. 64 DIP switch 72-UMM-H Programmer’s manual with Basic and C host drivers and examples
selectable addresses. May require RS485 72-UM-OOPT Hardware installation and setup. Includes setup and debug programs
repeaters for lengths over 4000 feet or more 72-UOL OpenLine® configuration and product data
than 32 controllers. Consult factory for special 7W-UM-MDL32 Windows ECP download Utility
configurations.
Compatible Components
OpenDAC® I/O Racks

Digital OpenLine® I/O Modules
Analog OpenLine® I/O Modules
Power Supplies
Available from your local authorized Grayhill

your local sales office, an authorized Distributor or
Grayhill.
OpenDAC
NETWORK INTERFACES
OpenDAC® for Profibus
FEATURES
32 Analog and/or Digital I/O using
OpenLine® Modules
• Network up to 127 OpenDACs®
per Host PC
• Communicate at Speeds
Up to12 MB
• Auto Baud Rate Detect
• 100% Profibus DP Compatible
(PTO Tested and Approved)
32 Digital and 1 mS per Analog
Module (2 Channels)
• Diagnostic LEDs PROFIBUS UNIT ON OPENDAC® SYSTEM
• CE Certified
• DIN Rail Mount

The OpenDAC® for Profibus network interface Each OpenDAC® or third party device on the
Stand Alone Control is a remote slave that responds to Profibus DP network will occupy 1 of 127 unique addresses.
commands that it receives over the network. Communication between the master and slave
Local Control & I/O The status and configuration of up to 32 devices takes place at baud rates from 50 KB to
OpenLine® analog or digital I/O channels is 12 MB. OpenDACs® automatically detect the
Remote I/O stored and constantly refreshed. baud rate, eliminating switch settings and
simplifying set up. Network traffic and controller
Distributed I/O OpenDAC® for Profibus is self-configuring. On status can be monitored by status LEDs on the
power up, the controller will read the ID of each controllers. Diagnostic information is routinely
SCADA I/O module and build an internal database. exchanged between master and slave devices.
During the master configuration the controller
RTU will compare this configuration with the stored Each OpenDAC® incorporates a communication
configuration. If there is a match, the master will watchdog timer that monitors communication
allow exchange of information to occur. from the Profibus master. When the watchdog
is enabled and the slave does not receive a valid
Profibus message within 100 mS, the OpenDAC®
will set all output values to zero. Should a valid
message be received, the timer is reset and
communication resumes.
OpenDAC
4.20 (106,68)
DIN RAIL LATCH 3.90 (99,06)
1.0 (25,4)
2.90
(73,66)
2.60
(66,04)
PIN #1 2.31 (58,75)

TO CENTERLINE
OF DIN RAIL
CHANNEL

Supply Current (less modules): 0.5A max. Part Number Description
Operating Temperature: -40 to 85°C Profibus Network Interfacer
Humidity: 5-95% non-condensing
Housing Material: ABS/Polycarbonate blend 72-PRO-4000 Analog/Digital OpenDAC® for Profibus DP
CPU: AM 188ES @ 24 MHz
Connections: Profibus User’s Manual and Software
Profibus: 9-Pin D-Sub (female) 72-UM-PRO OpenDAC® for Profibus DP user’s manual

Passive Rack: 48-Pin Euro DIN (male) 72-UOL OpenLine® configuration and product data
Serial Data:
Format: 11 bits: 1 start, 1 stop, 1 parity (even), Available from your local authorized For prices and discounts, contact your local
8 data Grayhill Distributor. sales office, an authorized Distributor, or
Integrity: Frame checksum Grayhill.
Range of Network (without repeaters):
1200 meters for entire network below 93 KB;
600 meters at 187.5 KB; 200 meters at 500 KB
OpenDAC
RACKS
16 Channel
FEATURES
• Automatically Detects OpenLine®
I/O Module Types
• Provides Direct Interface for the I/O to
OpenDAC® Network Interfaces
• Multiple Termination Options
• Stack up to Two Racks for the
32 I/O channels
• Small Footprint
• DIN Rail Mount
• UL, CSA, CE (See Engineering Info, p. L-6)
16 CHANNEL RACK: OpenDAC® Rack

Part No. 70LRCK16-48
(and millimeters).
PIN 1 J4
2.8
(72.21)
6.2
(156.87)
5.9
(149.66) J1 TOP ROW: +5V
BOTTOM ROW: GND
(WP VERSION SOLD
70LRCK16-48P WITH PLUGS)
3.9
(99.85) I/O BUS
PIN 1 J4
4.4
(111.56)
2.8
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
+5 +5 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 (72.21)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
DIN RAIL CLIP

J1 TOP ROW: +5V
BOTTOM ROW: GND
70LRCK16-48
OpenDAC
SCHEMATIC: Part No. 70LRCK16-48
+5 +5 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
FIELD
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 WIRING
TERMINAL
STRIP
J2 1
B1 2
B2 3
B14
4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MODULE J3
LOCATION B3
B15
J2 5 B16
B3 6
B15 7 J3
B16
8 B1
9 B2
B14
J2 J2 J2 J3
C9 A9 C1 C8
C10 A10 C2 C7
C11 A11 C3 C6
C12 A12 C4 C5
C13 A13 C5 C4
C14 A14 C6 C3
C15 A15 C7 C2
C16 A16 C8 C1
A1 A8
A2 A7
J3 J2 J3 A3 A6
C9 B6
/CS1 A9 A4 A5
A5 A4
C10
C11
B7
B8
ISCLK A10
A11 A6 A3
A7 A2
C12
C13
B10
B11
IDI A12
A13 A8 A1
C14 B12 A14 B4 B13
C15 B13 A15 B5 B12
B9 B4
C16 /ICONV MODULE A16
/CS2
J3 ID
B5 DETECT
B6
B7
/IDOR
B8
B9
IDO
B10
B11
IEOC
ORDERING INFORMATION (MODULES ORDERED SEPARATELY)

16 Channel Racks
70LRCK16-48 16 48-pin Euro DIN logic signal connector. DIN rail mount. X X OpenDAC®
70LRCK16-48C 16 48-pin Euro DIN logic signal connector. DIN rail mount with X X OpenDAC®
cage clamp style terminal blocks
70LRCK16-48P 16 48-pin Euro DIN logic signal connector. DIN rail mount with X X OpenDAC®
pluggable terminal blocks
70LRCK16-48WP 16 48-pin Euro DIN logic signal connector. DIN rail mount with X X OpenDAC®
pluggable terminal blocks, plug included

Available from your local Grayhill
a local Sales Office, an authorized local
OpenDAC
Standard Keypads
SERIES 96
Conductive Rubber
FEATURES
• Quality, Economical Keyboards
• Easily Customized Legends
• Matrix Circuitry
• Backlit and Shielded Options
Available
• Termination Mates With Standard
Connectors
Keyboards and Keypads

• Tactile Feedback to Operator
• 1,000,000 Operations per Button
• Compatible With High Resistance
Logic Inputs
The Series 96 is Grayhill's most economical 3x4

and 4x4 keypad family. The contact system
utilizes conductive rubber to mate the
appropriate PC board traces. Offered in matrix
circuitry, with shielded and backlit options. Built
with quality component parts, the Series 96 is
subjected to our rigid statistical process control
to insure that it meets our reliability standards.
3x4 Front Mount Keyboard Standard Versions Shielded/Backlit Versions
.030 .340 ± .015 .030 .340 ± .015

2.000 ± .015 (0,76) (8,64 ± 0,38) (0,76) (8,64 ± 0,38)
(50,8 ± 0,38)
.500
(12,7) .025 ± .002 .025 ± .002
1.000 .150 (3,81) R. (0,64 ± 0,05) SQ. PIN (0,64 ± 0,05) SQ. PIN
(25,4) 4 CORNERS .550 .350
.500 .600 (15,24) 1.100 (27,94)
(13,97) (8,89)
(12,7)
.600 10 9 8765432 1
(15,24)
1 2 3 .150 .150
.500
(12,7) 2.700 (3,81) (3,81)
4 5 6 1.500 ± .015 2.400 2.400
(38,1) (68,58 (60,96) (60,96)
7 8 9 ± 0,38)
10 11 12 GRAYHILL INC GRAYHILL INC
1.000
(25,4)
SWITCH POSITION .075 (1,91) LABEL LABEL
IDENTIFICATION BUTTON .100 (2,54) .100 (2,54)
HEIGHT DIA. 4 PLS. DIA. 4 PLS.
.308 (7,82) SQ.
FRONT
BUTTON 12 PLS. .020 (0,51) 1.700 .150 1.700 .150
PANEL
HIGH (43,18) (3,81) (43,18) (3,81)
MOUNT 1.700 .125
BUTTON
CUTOUT (43,18) (3,18)
GUARD .100 (2,54) REF. .100 (2,54) REF.
.250 (6,35) TERMINAL TERMINAL
4 PLS. PIN HEADER PIN HEADER
.062 (1,57) R.
.200 (5,08) TERMINAL PIN
2 PLS. TERMINAL PIN
2.400 IDENTIFICATION
IDENTIFICATION
(60,96)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.125 (3,18) MAXIMUM

PANEL THICKNESS .100 (2,54) TYP. .100 (2,54) TYP.
RECOMMENDED .098 (2,49) .098 (2,49)
.125 (3,18) DIA. REF. TERMINAL REF. TERMINAL
2 PLS. PIN HEADER PIN HEADER
Keypads
Standard Keypads
3x4 Rear Mount Keyboard Standard Versions Shielded/Backlit Versions

.030 .340 ± .015 .030 .340 ± .015
2.200 ± .015 (0,76) (8,64 ± 0,38) (0,76) (8,64 ± 0,38)
(55,88 ± 0,38) .150 (3,81) R.
2.000 (50,8) 4 PLS.
.025 ± .002 .025 ± .002
.600 (15,24) .750 (0,64 ± 0,05) SQ. PIN (0,64 ± 0,05) SQ. PIN
1.000 (19,05)
.500 (12,7)
(25,4) .650
.600 (15,24) .700 (17,78) 1.100 (27,94) .500 (12,7)
.500 (12,7) (16,51)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2.690 1 2 3 .200 .200

.500
+ .000 .595 (12,7) (5,08) (5,08)
4 5 6
–.005 (15,11) 1.500
(68,33 7 8 9 (38,1)
+ 0,00
–0,13 10 11 12 GRAYHILL INC GRAYHILL INC
1.000
(25,4)
.495 (12,57) SW. POS. ID .062 (1,57) LABEL LABEL
.100 (2,54) R. .100 (2,54) R.
.308 2.800 (71,12) .200 (5,08)
.093 (2,36) 4 PLS. .093 (2,36) 4 PLS.
(7,82) SQ.
3.000 ± .015 .075 (1,91) DIA. 4 PLS. DIA. 4 PLS.
BUTTON
(76,2 ± 0,38) BUTTON
12 PLS.
1.990 + .000 –.005 HEIGHT
(50,55 + 0,00 –0,13) .100 (2,54) REF. .100 (2,54) REF.
.020 (0,51)
REAR HIGH TERMINAL TERMINAL
2.000 (50,8) .050
PANEL BUTTON PIN HEADER PIN HEADER
(1,27)
MOUNT GUARD TERMINAL PIN
TERMINAL PIN
CUTOUT .150 + .000 IDENTIFICATION
IDENTIFICATION
–.005 R.
2.800 (3,81 + 0,00 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2.700
(71,12) –0,13) (68,58)
4 PLS. .100 (2,54) TYP. .100 (2,54) TYP.
.062 (1,57) MAXIMUM .098 (2,49) .098 (2,49)
PANEL THICKNESS REF. TERMINAL REF. TERMINAL
RECOMMENDED PIN HEADER PIN HEADER
.093 (2,36) DIA., 4 PLS. OR

2-56 X .250 (6,35) LONG STUD
4x4 Front Mount Keyboard Standard Versions Shielded/Backlit Versions

.030 .340 .030 .340
2.500 ± .015 (0,76) ± .015 (0,76) ± .015
(63,5 ± 0,38) (8,64 (8,64
.500 1.500 ± 0,38) ± 0,38)
(12,7) (38,1) .025 ± .002 .025 ± .002
1.000 .150 (3,81) R. (0,64 ± 0,05) SQ. PIN (0,64 ± 0,05) SQ. PIN
(25,4) 4 CORNERS .750 1.200 .700
.500 .700 (17,78)
(19,05) (30,48) (17,78)
(12,7)
.600 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(15,24)
1 2 3 4 .150 .150
.500
(12,7) 2.700 (3,81) (3,81)
5 6 7 8 1.500 ± .015 2.400 2.400
(38,1) (68,58 (60,96) (60,96)
9 10 11 12 ± 0,38)
13 14 15 16 GRAYHILL INC GRAYHILL INC
1.000
(25,4)
SWITCH POSITION .075 (1,91) LABEL LABEL
IDENTIFICATION BUTTON .100 (2,54) .100 (2,54)
HEIGHT DIA. 4 PLS. DIA. 4 PLS.
FRONT .308 (7,82) SQ.
BUTTON 12 PLS. .020 (0,51)
PANEL HIGH 2.200 .150 2.200 .150
MOUNT 2.200 .125 BUTTON (55,88) (3,81) (55,88) (3,81)
CUTOUT (55,88) (3,18) GUARD
.100 (2,54) REF. .100 (2,54) REF.
.250 (6,35)
TERMINAL TERMINAL
4 PLS.
.062 (1,57) R. PIN HEADER PIN HEADER
.200 (5,08)
2 PLS. TERMINAL PIN
2.400 TERMINAL PIN
IDENTIFICATION
(60,96) IDENTIFICATION
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.125 (3,18) MAXIMUM
PANEL THICKNESS
.100 (2,54) TYP. .100 (2,54) TYP.
RECOMMENDED
.098 (2,49) .098 (2,49)
.125 (3,18) DIA. REF. TERMINAL
REF. TERMINAL
2 PLS. PIN HEADER
PIN HEADER
Keypads
Standard Keypads
4x4 Rear Mount Keyboard Standard Versions Shielded/Backlit Versions
.030 .340 .030 .340

2.700 ± .015 (0,76) ± .015 (0,76) ± .015
(68,58 ± 0,38) .150 (3,81) R. (8,64 (8,64
2.500 (63,5) 4 PLS. ± 0,38) ± 0,38)
.600 (15,24) 1.500 .025 ± .002 .025 ± .002
(38,1) .750 (0,64 ± 0,05) SQ. PIN (0,64 ± 0,05) SQ. PIN
1.000 (19,05)
.500 (12,7) .700 .900 (22,86) 1.200 .700 (17,78)
(25,4) .650
(16,51) (17,78) (30,48)
.500 (12,7)
1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2.690 1 2 3 4 .200 .200

.500
+ .000 .595 (12,7) (5,08) (5,08)
5 6 7 8

–.005 (15,11) 1.500
(68,33 9 10 11 12 (38,1)
+ 0,00
–0,13 13 14 15 16 GRAYHILL INC GRAYHILL INC
1.000
(25,4)
.495 (12,57) SW. POS. ID .062 (1,57) LABEL LABEL
.100 (2,54) R. .100 (2,54) R.
.308 2.800 (71,12) .200 (5,08)
.093 (2,36) 4 PLS. .093 (2,36) 4 PLS.
(7,82) SQ.
3.000 ± .015 .075 (1,91) DIA. 4 PLS. DIA. 4 PLS.
BUTTON
(76,2 ± 0,38) BUTTON
12 PLS.
REAR 2.490+ .000 –.005 HEIGHT
PANEL (63,25 + 0,00 –0,13) .020 (0,51) .100 (2,54) REF. .100 (2,54) REF.
MOUNT HIGH TERMINAL TERMINAL
CUTOUT 2.500 (63,5) .050
BUTTON PIN HEADER PIN HEADER
(1,27) GUARD TERMINAL PIN
TERMINAL PIN
.150 + .000 IDENTIFICATION
IDENTIFICATION
–.005 R.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2.800 (3,81 + 0,00 2.700
(71,12) –0,13) (68,58)
4 PLS. .100 (2,54) TYP. .100 (2,54) TYP.
.062 (1,57) MAXIMUM .098 (2,49) .098 (2,49)
PANEL THICKNESS REF. TERMINAL REF. TERMINAL
RECOMMENDED PIN HEADER PIN HEADER
.093 (2,36) DIA., 4 PLS. OR

2-56 X .250 (6,35) LONG STUD
CODE AND TRUTH TABLES

Dots in the chart indicate connected terminals when switch is closed.
Terminals are identified on the keyboard.
12 Button Keypads 16 Button Keypads
MATRIX CODES MATRIX CODES

3x4 4x4
Standard Shielded/Backlit Standard Shielded/Backlit
1 • • • • Shielded keypad = Shielded 1 • • • • Shielded keypad = Shielded
2 • • • • Backlit keypad = NC 2 • • • • Backlit keypad = NC
3 • • •• Shielded and backlit keypad = 3 • • • • Shielded and backlit keypad =
BUTTON LOCATION
BUTTON LOCATION
4 • • • • Shielded 4 • • •• Shielded
5 • • • • Shielded keypad = NC
6 • • • • Backlit keypad = EL Panel 1
6 • • • • Backlit keypad = EL Panel 1
7 • • • • Shielded and backlit keypad =
7 • • • • Shielded and backlit keypad =
8 • • • • EL Panel 1
8 • • • • EL Panel 1
9 • • • • 9 • • • •
11 • • • • Backlit keypad = EL Panel 2 11 • • • • Backlit keypad = EL Panel 2
12 • • • • Shielded and backlit keypad = 12 • • • • Shielded and backlit keypad =
5 6 7 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 1 9 10 EL Panel 2 13 • • • • EL Panel 2
TERMINAL LOCATION 14 • • • •
15 • • • •
16 • • • •
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 1 10 11
TERMINAL LOCATION
Keypads
Standard Keypads
SPECIFICATIONS Shielding Effectiveness SHIELDING EFFECTIVENESS OF

dB SERIES 96 E.L. KEYPADS
Rating Criteria Results shown are typical for a standard Grayhill 100
Rating at 12 Vdc: 5 milliamps for .5 seconds Series 84S keyboard. A conductive gasket will
generally increase the shielding, depending on 80
Contact Bounce: < 12 milliseconds
Contact Resistance: < 300 milliohms max. the size and shape of the gasket and its material. 60
Voltage Breakdown: 250 Vac between Data derived for E-Field Radiation.
components 40
Mechanical Operation Life: 1,000,000 Test Method:
20
operations per key Measurements were made with the keyboard
Insulation Resistance: > 1012 ohms @ 500 Vdc mounted to a brass plate, which in turn was 0
Push Out Force Per Pin: 5 lbs. mounted to a shielded enclosure containing the 0.1 10 100 400 800 2000 6000 10000 18000
receiving equipment. A signal generator provided MHz
the frequency source that was radiated from the Represents shielding effectiveness
Operating Features greater than or equal to line.
Travel: .040 minimum transmitting antenna to the enclosed receiving
Operating Force: 175 ± 40 grams antenna. The spacing between antennas was
Operating Temperature: -30°C to +80°C maintained constant throughout the frequency Frequency Rating
range. The effectiveness rating is determined M Hz in dB
by establishing a reference reading without 0.1 ≥ 66.2
Material and Finishes obstruction between the two antennas and 10 ≥ 94.8
Terminal Pin: Phosphor bronze determining the difference between that reading 100 90.5
PC Board: FR-4 glass cloth epoxy and the test setup reading. 400 64.2
Keypad: Silicone rubber, durometer 50 ± 5
800 42.3
Housing: ABS, cycolac FR15 Note: 2,000 40.5
Housing Color: Black When measured in actual equipment, shielding 6,000 33.1
effectiveness is determined by many factors. 10,000 34.4
This method accurately represents the shielding 18,000 37.0
effectiveness of the Grayhill Series 84S under
Ideal test conditions.
STANDARD LEGENDS
Available through Grayhill Distributors To order one of the configurations below, use the dash number shown here; select the keypad
size and code, and order the part number with the appropriate legend dash number.
ABC DEF ABC DEF

1 2 3 1 2 3 A 1 2 3 1 2 3 A
GHI JKL MNO GHI JKL MNO

4 5 6 4 5 6 B 4 5 6 4 5 6 B
PRS TUV WXY PRS TUV WXY
7 8 9 7 8 9 C 7 8 9 7 8 9 C
OPER OPER
0 0 D 0 0 D
-102 -006 -152 -056
Grayhill Series Number For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
Keyboard Size: A = 3x4, B = 4x4 Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Circuitry: B2 = Matrix (terminal pin header)
96AB2-102-FS-EL
E.L. Panel Backlighting Option
EL = Backlit, Blank = Non-backlit
EMI/RFI Shielding Option
S = Shielded, Blank = Non-shielded
Mounting Option: F = Front panel mount, R = Rear panel mount
Standard Legend Choices
12 Position legends
102 = Black legends on a white button
152 = White legends on a black button
16 Position legends
006 = Black legends on a white button
056 = White legends on a black button
Keypads
Piezo Keypads
SERIES 37F
Keypads
FEATURES
• Fully Sealed
• Virtually Indestructible
• Vandal Resistant
• Indoor and Outdoor Use

3x4 Keypad
3.071
2.874 (78,00) .071 2.323
(73,00) 2.323 (1,8) (59,00)
2.480 (59,00) 2.677 3.189
(63,00) .158 X 45 (68,00) .158 X 45
(4,00 X 45) (81,00) (4,00 X 45)
1 2 3 1 2 3
3.661 3.819
(93,00) 4 5 6 (97,00) 4 5 6 .748
.748 3.110 3.110
(19,00) (79,00) (19,00) (79,00)
3.268
(83,00) 7 8 9 R1 C3 3.425 7 8 9 R1 C3
(87,00)
* 0 # * 0 #
.748 .354
.748 .354 (9,00)
(19,00) (9,00) .165 DIA. (19,00) .165 DIA.
.177 (4.2 DIA.) 2.441 .106 (4.2 DIA.)
(4,50) (62,00) (2,7)
FRONT MOUNT OPT- #1 REAR MOUNT OPT- #3
3.071
2.874 (78,00) .071 2.323
(73,00) 2.323 (1,8) (59,00)
2.480 (59,00) 2.677 3.189
(63,00) .158 X 45 (68,00) .158 X 45
(4,00 X 45) (81,00) (4,00 X 45)
4
4
1
7
1
7
3.661 3.819
(93,00) (97,00)
5
2
5
2
8
8
.748 3.110 .748 3.110

(19,00) (79,00) (19,00) (79,00)
3.268 R1 C3
3.425
R1 C3
6
3
6
3
9
9
(83,00) (87,00)
0
#
0
#
*
*
.748 .748 .354

.354 .165 DIA. (9,00)
(19,00) (9,00) (19,00) .165 DIA.
.177 (4.2 DIA.) 2.441 .106 (4.2 DIA.)
(4,50) (62,00) (2,7)
FRONT MOUNT OPT- #2 REAR MOUNT OPT- #4
Keypads
Piezo Keypads
4X4 Keypad
3.661 SQ. 3.819 SQ.

(97,00) .236 X 45 .158 R.
3.425 SQ. (6,00 X 45) (4,00 R.)
3.268 SQ. .236 X 45 (87,00) .118 R.
(6,00 X 45) .071
(3,00 R.) (1,8)
1 2 3 A 1 2 3 A
4 5 6 B .748 4 5 6 B .748
(19,00) 3.110 SQ. (19,00) 3.110 SQ.
R1 C4 (79,00) 7 8 9 C R1 C4 (79,00)
7 8 9 C .787
(20,0)
* 0 # D * 0 # D
.748 .748 .354

(19,00) .354 Ø.165 (19,00) (9,00)
(Ø4,2) Ø.165
(9,00) .788 .106 (Ø4,2)
.177 (2,7)
(4,50) (20,0)
3.189 SQ. REAR MOUNT OPT- #3
FRONT MOUNT OPT- #1 (81,00)
CONNECTORS In inches (and millimeters)
CONNECTOR
FC-10
2
SAME CONNECTOR USED

FLAT CABLE FOR 3X4 AND 4X4 KEYPAD
30cm
12"
3X4 Connector Pin Number 4X4 Connector Pin Number

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
SWITCH POSITIONS
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
SWITCH POSITIONS
10 10
11 11
12 12
13
14
15
16
Keypads
Piezo Keypads
SPECIFICATIONS
Rating Criteria Switch Capacitance: 25pF Lifecyle: >50 million
Rated Voltage: 0 – 24V AC/DC Switch Functioning: One Shot EMI or RFI Effect: None
Rated Current: 0 – 2 Amps. Activation Force: 3-5N Typ. Housing Material: Aluminiun
Resistance “ON”: <10 Ohms. Operating Temperature: -40°C to 85°C Protection System: IP68
Resistance “OFF”: >5 megohms (40° to 125°C upon requested) according to IEC 529.

Grayhill Series Number
Mounting OptionsOption
3x4 (1, 2, 3, 4)
4x4 (1, 2)
Keypad Size
A - 3x4, B - 4x4
Circuitry Option
B2 - Matrix, C2 - Common Bus
37F1-AB2 - AC1
Housing Material: Aluminum

Electrical Spec:
AC - Cable and Connector, AP - AP Terminal Pins
Keypads
Sealed Keypads
SERIES 37F
PIEZO Pushbutton Switches
FEATURES
• Fully Sealed
• Virtually Indestructible
• Vandal Resistant
• Indoor and Outdoor Use
DIMENSIONS

In inches (and millimeters)
Ø 1.102 .118 .118 Ø 1.102

(Ø 28,00) (3,00) (3,00) (Ø 28,00)
Non-Illuminated
Single Button
.748 .768
(19,00) (19,50) .039 x 45 CHAMFER
MA1 (1,00 x 45 CHAMFER)
MA2
Ø .815 Ø .815
.197 (Ø20,70) .197 (Ø 20,70)
(5,00) (5,00)
M22 x 1.5
THREAD M22 x 1.5
THREAD
Illuminated
Single Button
.055 (1,40) M22 x 1.5
.443 Ø .886 .055 (1,40)
THREAD Ø 22,50) Ø 1.102 .443
(11,25) .118 (3,00) .118 M22 x 1.5 THREAD
(Ø 28,00) (11,25)
(3,00)
.059 R. .059 R.
(1,50 R.) (1,50 R.)
Ø 1.102 Ø .815 Ø .787 Ø .815 Ø .886
(Ø 20,70) (Ø 20,00) (Ø 20,70) Ø 22,50)
ML1 (Ø 28,00) ML2 Ø .118
Ø (3,00)
.276 Ø .118 .236 .276 .236 (6,00)

(7,00) Ø (3,00) .748 (6,00) (7,00) .748 (19,00)
(19,00) .039 X45
(1,00 X 45)
ORDERING INFORMATION, 37FMA AND 37FML
Grayhill Series Wire Colors Change

Housing Type with Electrical Spec
MA1, MA2 Option
ML1*, ML2* 18"
Circuitry
A - N.O., B - N.C.
Electrical Specifications BLUE
RED
AW - V Max: 24V, I Max: 0.2 A AC/DC, Term: Red wire
37FMA1-AAP11N BW - V Max: 24V, I Max: 0.2 A AC/DC, 150 Transient, YELLOW
Term: Purple wire WIRE FUNCTION
CW - V Max: 24V, I Max: 1.0 A AC/DC, 150 Transient
RED 24V AC/DC
Term: Orange/White wire
EW - V Max: 24V, I Max: 0.2 A AC/DC, Term: Green wire, RED 0.2A SWITCH
}
N.C. Circuitry Option Only BLUE LED (-)
AP - V. Max: 24V, I Max 0.2 A AC/DC, Term: PIN YELLOW LED (+)
5V DC
}
CP** - V Max: 24V, I Max: 1.0 A AC/DC, Term: PIN
Housing Color: N - Natural
Housing Material: 1 - Aluminum
*LED Option
LED: 1- Red, 2 - Green, 3 - Yellow, 4 - Red/Green
**This Option Not Available
with LED Housing ML1
or ML2
***Only Available with

Housing Types ML1
and ML2.
Special colors, S.S. and

legends available. Contact
Grayhill for more information.
Keypads
Standard Keypads

.039
Ø .984 (1,00) .079
(Ø 25,00) (2,00) .295
.055 .032
M22 x 1.5 .100 (7,50)
(1,40) (0,80)
THREAD (2,54)
Ø .787
(Ø 20,00)
.878 Ø1.220 Ø.984
(22,30) (Ø31,00) (Ø25,00)
Ø .591
(Ø 15,00)
.276
.835 .984 12.000.800
ILUMINATED RING (7,00) ILUMINATED RING
(21,20) (25,00) (30020)
.787 M27 X 1,50 THREAD
BR1 (20,00) BR3
PIEZO
PIEZO
LED
RED
12V DC MAX 40mA LED
RED
1.24V AC/DC 12V DC MAX 40mA
MAX 0.2A (+) 1.24V AC/DC
(-)
MAX 0.2A (+) (-)
PIN # 1
PIN # 1
.039
Ø .984 (1,00) .079
(Ø 25,00) (2,00) .295
.055 .032
M22 x 1.5 .100 (7,50)
(1,40) (0,80)
THREAD (2,54)
Ø .787
(Ø 20,00)
.878 Ø1.220 Ø.984
(22,30) (Ø31,00) (Ø25,00)
Ø .591
(Ø 15,00)
.276 .984 12.000.800
ILUMINATED RING (7,00) .835 ILUMINATED RING (25,00) (30020)
.787 (21,20) M27 X 1,50 THREAD
BR2 (20,00) BR4
PIEZO
PIEZO
RED LED
12V DC MAX 40mA RED LED
1.24V AC/DC 12V DC MAX 40mA
MAX 0.2A 1.24V AC/DC
(+) (-) MAX 0.2A (+) (-)
PIN # 1
PIN # 1
ORDERING INFORMATION, 37FBR
Grayhill Series
Special colors, S.S. and
Housing Type
BA1, BA2
legends available.
BF1, BF2 Contact Grayhill for more
Switch Type information.
C - Continuous, T - Toggle
Circuitry
A - N.O., B - N.C.
Electrical Specification
AW: 10-24V, .15A AC/DC,
Wire: 1 - Black, 1 - Brown, 2 - Blue
37FBA1-CAAW1N
Housing Color: N - Natural
Housing Material: 1 - Aluminum
Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor
or Grayhill.
Special configurations and legends available. Contact Grayhil for more information.
Keypads Grayhill, Inc. • 561 Hillgrove Avenue • LaGrange, Illinois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhill.com
52
Sealed Keypads

Ø .866
Ø 1.102 (Ø 22,00)
.118 .118 .059 R.
.039 (Ø 28,00) .039 R. (3,00) (1,50 R.)
(3,00) (1,00) (1,00 R.)
.055 .039 .055

1.378 (1,00) (1,40) 1.378
(1,40)
(35,00) (35,00)
BA1 BF1
Ø .787 Ø .630
(Ø 20,00) .276 (Ø 16,00)
.276 (7,00)
(7,00)
Ø .886 Ø .732
(Ø 22,50) (Ø 18,60

M22x1.5 THREAD M22x1.5 THREAD
Ø .866
Ø 1.102 (Ø 22,00)
(Ø 28,00)
.020 .039 .020 .059 R.
.039 (1,00)
(0,50) .059 R. (0,50) (1,50 R.)
(1,00)
(1,50 R.)
.118 .055 .118 .055

(3,00) 1.378 1.378
(1,40) (3,00) (1,40)
(35,00) (35,00)
BA2 BF2
Ø .787 Ø .630
(Ø 20,00) .276 (Ø 16,00)
.276 (7,00)
(7,00)
Ø .886 Ø .732
(Ø 22,50) (Ø 18,60
M22x1.5 THREAD M22x1.5 THREAD
SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Voltage: 0-24V AC/DC Activation Force: 3-5N Typ. Lifecycle: >50 million
Rate Current: 0-24 amps. Switch Action: Operating Temp: -40°C- 85°C
Resistance “ON”: <10 Ohms Momentary: 120 Msec. Pulse type standard. (-40°C- 125°C upon request)
Resistance “OFF”: >5 megohms Continuous: Circuit is closed as long Storage Temp: -40°C- 125°C
Switch Capacitance: 25pF as switch is pressed, 30 sec. max. EMI or RFI Effect: None
Toggle: Switch changes position at Protection System: IP68 according to
each activation. IEC529
LED: 5Vdc, 1 max, 10 mA
Housing Material: Aluminum
ORDERING INFORMATION, 37FBR
Grayhill Series
Housing Type
BA1, BA2
BF1, BF2
Switch Type
C - Continuous, T - Toggle
Circuitry
A - N.O., B - N.C.
Electrical Specification
AW: 10-24V, .15A AC/DC,
Wire: 1 - Black, 1 - Brown, 2 - Blue Special colors, S.S. and
37FBA1-CAAW1N legends available.
Housing Color: N - Natural Contact Grayhill for more
Housing Material: 1 - Aluminum information.
or Grayhill.
Keypads
Standard Keypads
SERIES 84R
Sealed, Low Profile
FEATURES
• Metal Keys
• Easily Customized Legends
• Sealed Construction
• Choice of Dome Contacts or
Carbon Pill
• 3,000,000 Operations per Button

DESCRIPTION
Custom legends and colors are available at a
nominal cost. The Series 84R is offered with a
choice of matrix or single pole/common bus
circuitries.
3x4 Keyboard Single Pole/Common Bus
.585
.513
.375
.750
.159
Ø.180
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
4.530
3.660
.750
* 0 # 2.265
.435
.435 1.590 1.590

2.910
3.780 .600
Preliminary Specification
Keypads
Standard Keypads

The chart indicates the relationship of the terminal pins to each key switch.
The dot indicates a closed switch. Terminals are identified on the keyboard.
12 Button Keypads 16 Button Keypads
CODES CODES
3x4 4x4
Matrix Single Pole/Common Bus Matrix Single Pole/Common Bus
1 • • • • 1 • • • •
2 • • • • 2 • • • •
3 • • • • 3 • • • •
BUTTON LOCATION
BUTTON LOCATION
4 • • • • 4 • • • •
5 • • • • 5 • • • •
6 • • • • 6 • • • •
7 • • • • 7 • • • •
8 • • • • 8 • • • •
9 • • • • 9 • • • •
10 • • • • 10 • • • •
11 • • • • 11 • • • •
12 • • •• 12 • • • •
C B A G F E D E C B F D A N K H M L J G 13 • • • •
TERMINAL LOCATION 14 • • • •
15 • • • •
16 • • ••
A B C D E F GH D B A C H F E G K M L J P R Q N S
TERMINAL LOCATION
SPECIFICATIONS Operating Temperature: -55°C to 85°C Materials and Finishes

Life Expectancy: 3 million operations/button Terminal Pins: Copper alloy CDA 725
Rating Criteria
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms PC Board: FR-4 glass cloth epoxy
Rating at 24 Vdc: ≤ 10 milliamps resistive
Contact Bounce: 4 milliseconds maximum at Dome Retainer/Rear Seal Sheet: Polyester
make; 10 milliseconds, at break Operating Features Housing: Die cast aluminum, anodized
Contact Resistance: MOS, TTL, and DTL Pre-Travel: .030 inches minimum Keys: Die cast aluminum, anodized with engraved
compatible. (10 ohms maximum for dome Operating Force: 20 ± 4 ounces epoxy filled legends
contacts; 300 ohms maximum for carbon pill Humidity: 0 to 98% (no condensation)
version) Minimum Push Out Force Per Pin: 5 pounds
STANDARD LEGENDS
Available through Grayhill Distributors To order one of the configurations below, use the dash number shown here; select the keypad
size and code, and order the part number with the appropriate legend dash number.
1 2 3 1 2 3 C
4 5 6 4 5 6 D
7 8 9 7 8 9 E
0 A 0 B F
-112 -014
CUSTOM LEGENDS HEADER CONNECTORS
Any reasonable legend can be printed in the will be matched as closely as possible. Allow Compatible with:
key area. Fax a sketch of your requirements 3 to 4 weeks for custom legend delivery. A Samtec, Inc. Header Series
to Grayhill. Legends will be coordinated in nominal charge, depending on the total quantity BCS, BSW, CES, ESW, ESQ,
keeping with concepts of good design. Or, if of keypads ordered and the complexity of the SLW, SSW, SSQ, IDSS and
required, the details of your submitted artwork legend, will be assessed. IDSD or equivalent.
ORDERING INFORMATION Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.

Grayhill Series Number For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
Office, an authorized local distributor or Grayhill.
Size Option
A = 3x4 B = 4x4
Circuitry Option
B2 = Matrix in-line pins C2 = Single pole/common bus
84R-AB2-112-PD
D = Metal domes, R = Conductive rubber
P = Terminal pins, C = Locking connector
3x4 Size, choose -112
Keypads
Standard Keypads
CUSTOM LEGENDS HEADER CONNECTORS

Any reasonable legend can be printed in the submitted artwork will be matched as closely Compatible with:
key area. Fax a sketch of your requirements as possible. Allow 3 to 4 weeks for custom Samtec, Inc. Header Series
to Grayhill. Printing and symbols will be legend delivery. A nominal charge, depending BCS, BSW, CES, ESW, ESQ,
coordinated in keeping with concepts of good on the total quantity of keypads ordered and SLW, SSW, SSQ, IDSS and
design. Or, if required, the details of your the complexity of the legend, will be assessed. IDSD or equivalent.
Grayhill Series Number Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
Shielded or Non-Shielded Option For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
R = Shielded Office, an authorized local distributor or Grayhill.
RN = Non-Shielded
Size Option

A = 3x4 B = 4x4
Circuitry Option
B2 = Matrix in-line pins C2 = Single pole/common bus
84R-AB2-112-PD
D = Metal domes, R = Conductive rubber
P = Terminal pins, C = Locking connector
1x4 Size, choose -301 or -302
Keypads
Pushbutton Switches
Contents: Pushbutton Switches
PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES
• Large Selection of Types and
Styles
• Wiping, Butt, and Snap Action
Contacts
• SPST, SPDT, DPDT Circuitry
and 4PST Joystick Action
• Space Saving Miniature Sizes
• Bushing or Bezel Mounting
• RoHS Compliant
Page
ENGINEERING INFORMATION .................................................................. 2
Pushbutton Switches
SELECTION CHART .................................................................................... 3
BUTT CONTACT PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES

Miniature Surface Mount ..................................... Series 38BM ................... 4
Miniature Horizontal PC Mount ........................... Series 38BT .................... 6
Miniature Vertical PC Mount ............................... Series 38BT .................... 7
Snap Action Miniature Pushbutton ..................... Series 38C ...................... 8
Alternate Action Pushbutton ............................... Series 38D .................... 13
Sealed Snap Action Miniture Pushbutton .......... Series 38E .................... 18
Subminiture Pushbutton ..................................... Series 38F ..................... 23
Sealed Subminiture Pushbutton ......................... Series 38G .................... 27
Sealed Surface Mount Subminiture Pushbutton Series 38H .................... 31
SPST and SPDT, Stackable with LED ............... Series 32 ....................... 35
SPST and SPDT, 1/4 Amp ................................. Series 39 ....................... 37
SPST, 150mA ...................................................... Series 39 ....................... 38
Miniature Limit ..................................................... Series 39 ....................... 40
SPST, 150 mA to 1/2 Amp ................................. Series 39 ....................... 41
SPST, 1 and 5 Amp ............................................ Series 30 ....................... 43
4PST .................................................................... Series 04 ....................... 47
Snap-In Panel Mount .......................................... Series 30 & 46 .............. 48
Snap-In Panel Mount .......................................... Series 30 ....................... 49
Decorator Line ..................................................... Series 30 & 46 .............. 51
WIPING CONTACT PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES

SPDT and DPDT, 1/4 Amp ................................. Series 46 ....................... 54
SPST, 1/4 Amp ................................................... Series 23 ....................... 57
SPST, 1 and 3 Amp ............................................ Series 10 & 4000 .......... 58
SNAP ACTION CONTACT PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES

SPST and SPDT, 10 Amp .................................. Series 7 & 2000 ............ 59
OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Sealed Terminals and Wire Leads ..................... Series 23, 30, 39 & 46 ..... 60
Accessories
Pushbutton
Engineering Information
Ratings, operating environments and switch Wiping Contacts are self-cleaning and usually Snap Action switches are basically butt contact
selection are discussed in detail on pages E-3 provide a low resistance in circuits where switches with a spring mechanism which
thru E-5. This information is applicable to contact resistance is critical. However, the provides the make and break. The mechanism
pushbutton switches as well as rotary and DIP wiping action creates mechanical wear and controls both the operating point and the rate of
switches. conductive wear products. operation, but adds to the wear of the switch.
Pushbutton switches are selected not only by Butt Contacts have less wear than wiping The rapid rate of make and break means that
their ratings, but also by their contact type. contacts and therefore, have a longer life. They these switches are appropriate for high current
While nearly all rotary switches and DIP switches are also smaller. Butt contacts are not self- loads. They usually have a slight wiping action
have wiping contacts, pushbutton switches may cleaning, so their contact resistance can vary and contact surfaces made of precious metals
have either wiping or butt contacts (see internal from operation to operation. to minimize their disadvantages.
views below).
INTERNAL VIEWS OF PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES
Butt Contact
Wiping Contact
ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR ACTUATOR
BUSHING
SHORTING
Pushbutton Switches
BAR
BUSHING
SHORTING
INTERNAL
BUTTON
BAR
SHORTING RETURN RETURN
BAR SPRING SHORTING SPRING
RETURN BAR
SPRING FIXED CONTACTS FIXED CONTACTS
Pushbutton Joystick Action
FIXED CONTACTS
ACTUATOR
.312 .550 (13.97) .550 (13.97) .550 (13.97)
(7,92)
.187 A = .063 (1,60)
(4,75) B = .094 (2,39)
1.125 (28,58)
Snap Action BUSHING
1.250 (31,75) 1.250 (31,75)
.312
(7,92) OVERSPRING
.312 (7,92)
A B .937 (23,80) FIXED
.375 (9,53) DIA.
CONTACTS
.500 (12,7) DIA.
#8-32 UNC-2A THREAD
HEX NUTS .344 (8,74) #8-32 UNC-2A THREAD MOVABLE
ACROSS FLATS, HEX NUTS .344 (8,74) ACROSS CONTACT
.125 (3,18) THICK FLATS, .125 (3,18) THICK
SWITCH TERMINOLOGY
Actuator: The part of the switch to which an Make-Before-Break Switch (MBB): A double N.O., Normally Open: Switch in which the
external force is applied to operate the switch. throw switch in which the contacts makes circuit is open without actuation (with actuator in
connection with the second circuit before the "normal" position).
Alternate Action (Push-Push) Switch: A breaking contact with the first; also called
switch in which the operable position is shorting switch. Overtravel: The distance or angle between the
maintained after the first actuation, and then operating position and the extreme position to
disengaged with the second operation. Maintained Contact Switch: A switch in which which the actuator may be moved.
the actuator remains in a position until it is
Break-Before-Make Switch (BBM): A double actuated to another position where it also remains Pole: An electrically isolated circuit within a
throw switch in which the moving contact breaks until actuated. Example: Push-Pull Switch. switch; a common terminal and all the selected
the connection with the first circuit before terminals to which it connects.
making contact with the second; also called Momentary Contact Switch: A switch in which
non-shorting switch. the shorting bar returns from its operated Pretravel: The distance or angle through which
position to its normal or free position when the the actuator moves from its free position to its
Double Throw Switch: A switch which has a actuating force is removed. electrical operating position.
normally open as well as a normally closed
circuit per pole. Operating Position or Point: The position of Single Throw Switch: A switch which has only
the actuator when the desired electrical action one normally open or one normally closed circuit
Joystick Action Switch: (From Joystick, the (make or break of contact) occurs. per pole.
control for an airplane). A lever switch which
operates with momentary action in 4 directions, N.C., Normally Closed: Switch in which the Throw: See Single Throw and Double Throw.
and is disengaged in the upright position. circuit is closed without actuation (with actuator
in the "normal" position).
Pushbutton
Pushbutton Switch Selection Chart
Rating Maximum
(Amps at Operations Width***
Circuitry* 115 Vac Res.) At Rating inch (mm) Features Series Page
BUTT CONTACT
N.O. or N.C. 5 6,000 3/8 (9,53) UL Listed 30 E-17
N.O. or N.C. 1 1,000,000 3/8 (9,53) Momentary, Terminal Seal, (Wire Leads Optnl.) 30 E-17
N.O. 1 500,000 3/8 (9,53) Overtravel, Terminal Seal, (Wire Leads Optnl.) 30 E-19
N.O. 1 200,000 11/16 (17,46) Positive Feel, Overtravel, Terminal Seal, (Wire 30 E-19
Leads Optional)
On or Off 1 100,000 11/16 (17,46) Push/Pull Action (Maintained) 30 E-19
N.O. or N.C. 1 250,000 1/2 (12,7) Watertight, Terminal Seal, (Wire Leads Optnl.) 30 E-18
N.O. 1 1,000,000 11/16 (17,46) Square & Round Bezels 30 E-26
N.O. or N.C 1 1,000,000 1+ (25,4) Square Bezel Panel Mount 30 E-26
N.O. 1 200,000 11/16 (17,46) Pos. Feel, Overtravel, Square & Round Bezels 30 E-26
N.O. 1 200,000 11/16 (17,46) Pos. Feel, Overtravel, Sq. Bezel Panel Mount 30 E-26
N.O. .020** 80,000 5/16+ (8,13) Miniature, Surface Mount 38 E-5
N.O. .020** 80,000 5/16+ (8,13) Miniature, Horizontal PC Mount 38 E-7
N.O. .020** 80,000 5/16+ (8,13) Miniature, Vertical to PC Mount 38 E-8
N.O. or N.C. .250 100,000 1/4 (6,35) Sealed Plunger, Stackable with LEDs 32 E-9
N.O. .500 1,000,000 1/4 (6,35) Miniature 39 E-11
Pushbutton Switches
N.O. .500 500,000 1/2 (12,7) Overtravel, Miniature Limit Switch, (Wire Leads 39 E-14
Optional)
SPST N.O. .500 100,000 1/2 (12,7) Overtravel, Miniature, (Wire Leads Optional) 39 E-12
N.O. .500 250,000 5/16 (7,94) Watertight Seal, Miniature, (Wire Leads Optional) 39 E-14
N.C. .250 250,000 1/4 (6,35) Miniature (Wire Leads Optional) 39 E-15
N.C. .250 100,000 5/16 (7,94) Watertight Seal, Miniature, (Wire Leads Optnl.) 39 E-15
N.C. .250 100,000 1/2 (12,7) Actuator Seal, Miniature Limit Switch (Wire 39 E-14
Leads Optional)
N.O. .150** 1,000,000 1/4 (6,35) PC Mount, Miniature, Sealed 39 E-11
N.O. .150** 1,000,000 1/4 (6,35) PC Mount, Miniature, Right Angle, Cap Seal 39 E-12
N.O. .150** 100,000 1/4 (6,35) PC Mount, Miniature, Overtravel 39 E-12
N.O. .020, .150** 1,000,000 3/8 (9,53) Economical Contact Plating 30 E-16
N.O. .020, .150** 1,000,000 3/8 (9,53) Econ. Plating, Square Bezel Panel Mount 30 E-26
N.O. .020, .150** 1,000,000 1/4 (6,35) Economical Contact Plating 39 E-14
N.O. .020, .150** 100,000 1/2 (12,7) Actuator Seal, Overtravel, Miniature Limit 39 E-14
Switch, (Wire Leads Optional)
BBM .250 100,000 1/4 (6,35) SPST AND SPDT, Stackable w/LEDs 32 E-9
SPDT BBM .250 500,000 1/2 (12,7) PC Mount, 2 Circuits, Right Angle, Total Seal 39 E-11
BBM .020** 80,000 5/16 (8,13) Miniature, Surface Mount 38 E-5
* BBM is Break-Before-Make (Non-Shorting). MBB is Make-Before-Break (Shorting).
WIPING CONTACT
N.O. or N.C. 3 6,000 13/16 (20,6) Decorator Line 4000/10 E-31
SPST N.O. or N.C. 1 100,000 13/16 (20,6) Momentary Action & Positive Feel Types 4000/10 E-31
N.O. .250 100,000 1/2 (12,7) Momentary Action & Terminal Seal Types 23 E-30
N.O. .4VA 40,000 .177 (4,5) Process Sealed, Subminiture 49 E-32
BBM or MBB .250 250,000 7/16 (11,11) Momentary Action 46 E-21
BBM or MBB .250 250,000 1+ (25,4+) Square Bezel Panel Mount 46 E-26
BBM or MBB .250 100,000 1/2 (12,7) Watertight Seal 46 E-23
SPDT BBM .250 250,000 11/16 (17,46) Square & Round Bezels 46 E-26
BBM .250 250,000 11/16 (17,46) Alternate Action, Square & Round Bezels 46 E-26
BBM .250 250,000 1+ (25,4+) Alternate Action, Square Bezel Panel Mount 46 E-26
N.O. .4VA 40,000 .177 (4,5) Process Sealed, Subminiature 49 E-32
BBM or MBB .250 100,000 5/8 (15,88) Momentary Action 46 E-22
BBM .250 250,000 13/16 (20,6) Environmental Seal/Wire Leads 46 E-23
DPDT BBM or MBB .250 100,000 11/16 (17,46) Watertight Seal 46 E-23
BBM .250 250,000 11/16 (17,46) Square & Round Bezel & Positive Feel Types 46 E-26
BBM .250 250,000 11/16 (17,46) Alternate Action, Square & Round Bezels 46 E-26
BBM or MBB .250 250,000 1+ (25,4+) Alternate Action, Square Bezel Panel Mount 46 E-26
JOYSTICK BUTT CONTACT

4PST BBM .250 500,000 7/8 (22,23) 4-Way Action, 3 Actuator Choices 04 E-21
SNAP ACTION CONTACT

SPST N.O. or N.C. 1, 3 25,000 7/8 (22,23) SPST, 1 and 3 Amp 4000/10 E-31
SPDT BBM 5, 10 25,000 7/8 (22,23) Audible Click 2000/7 E-33
** Rated for 28 Vdc and/or 5 Vdc (.150 A) and 20 Vdc (.020 A).
*** Maximum width behind panel or above PC board rounded to next highest 1/16" (1,59 mm).
Pushbutton
Butt Contact Pushbutton Switches
SERIES 38BM AND 38BC

Sub-Miniature Surface Mount
FEATURES
• Surface Mount Process Compatible
• Sealed Construction
• SPST and SPDT, Momentary Contact
• Extended or Flush Plunger
• Drop-In Replacement for Industry Standard
SPECIFICATIONS

38BM PC Mounting
Pushbutton Switches
.320 .162 .105 (2,67)

.070
(8,13) DIM "A" (4,11) TYP.
(1,78)
.040 .040
.128
(1,02) .143 (1,02)
(3,25)
.200 TYP. (3,63) TYP.
TYP.
CL TYP.
(5,08) .024
(0,61)
.100 (2,54) .075 .020 (0,51)

.030 TYP. .368 .080 .080 (2,03)
.410 (10,41) DIA. (1,91) (0,76) (9,35) (2,03) TYP.
MAX. .125
.180 (4,57) (3,18) .289 .200.010
DIA. (7,34) (5,080,25)
SPST .150 (3,81)
TYP.
38BC .320 STANDOFF PADS

(8.13)
.200.010 .105
.070
(1.78)
(5,080,25) (2,67) .040
(1.02)
TYP. .143
.162 .100 (6.63)
.125 (4,11) (2,54)

(3,18) .024 90˚ .080
(0,61)
SPDT .200 .368 .128 (3,25)
(9.35)
(2,03)
(5.08) .080 (2,03) .150

(3.81)
"A" 1 2 3 TERMINAL ID
.030 .040
.075 (0,76) .410 (10,41) (1.02)
DIM "A" (1,91) MAX. TERMINAL PADS
.289
(7 34)
Rating Criteria
Operating Life: 80,000 make-and-break cycles Base and Cover: Thermoplastic (UL 94V-0)
at full load Plunger: Thermoplastic (UL 94V-0), with
Contact Rating (resistive load): standard internal o-ring seal
Gold Contacts: 0.4 VA maximum at 20 Vac or Terminals: Copper alloy, gold plate over nickel
Vdc maximum plate
Silver Contacts: I.O. Amps maximum at 120 Vac Spring: Plated Music Wire
or 28 Vdc Contact System: Copper alloy, gold or silver
Contact Resistance: Below 20 milliohms typical plate (as specified) over nickel plate
initial at 2-4 Vdc, 100 mA Switch Support: Brass, tin-plated
Insulation Resistance: 1000 megaohms min.
Voltage Breakdown: 1000 Vrms minimum at
sea level
Operating Temperature: -30°C to +85°C Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
Solderability: Per MIL-STD-202F, Method 208D, For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
or EIA RS-186E Method 9 (1 hour steam aging) Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Pushbutton
SERIES 38BM AND 38BC

Sub-Miniature Surface Mount
CIRCUITRY TAPE AND REEL PACKAGING
SWITCHES AND COVER TAPE

NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY
DIRECTION
OF FEED
SPST–N.O.
1.260±.012
(32.00±
N.C. 0.3MM)
TERM. 1 .630±.004
COMM
TERM. 2 (16.00±0.1MM) 13
N.O. POCKET
38BM-4-H-1-S INCH
TERM. 3 CENTER
SHOWN FOR REEL
REFERENCE LINES
SPDT–N.O.
Pushbutton Switches
Series: 38BM = SPST, Momentary, Surface Mount
38BC = SPDT, Momentary, Surface Mount
Dimension "A":
0 = 0.020" 4 = 0.215"
38BX-0-H-3-S
Seal: S = O-Ring Seal
Contact Material:
1 = Solder Dip over Gold
2 = Solder Dip over Silver
3 = Gold - RoHS Compliant
4 = Silver - RoHS Compliant
Orientation:
H = Horizontal to PCB
Pushbutton
SERIES 38BT and 38BH

Sub-Miniature Horizontal PC Mount
FEATURES
• Drop-In Replacement for Industry
Standard
• Sealed Plunger Option
• Printed Circuit Board Mount

38BT CL .125 .215 .162 .320 (8,13)
(3,18) (5,46) (4,11) PC Mounting
.025 .043 (1,09)
.249 (0,64) .130 .200
CL DIA. TYP.
(6,32) (5,08)
(3,30)
Pushbutton Switches
.100 (2,54) .125 .200

DIA. (3,18) (5,08)
.030 .180 (4,57) .165 (4,19) .030 (0,76) TYP. .020
(0,76) .200 DIA. (0,51) .200
.015 (0,38) TYP.
TYP. (5,08) .200 (5,08) TYP. (5,08)
SPST
38BH C DIM. "A" .320
L .162 (8.13) PC Mounting
(4.11) .025
(0.64) .043 (1.09)
DIA. TYP. .100
.249 .200 (2.54)
C
L .130 (5.08)
(6.32) TYP.
(3.30)
1 2 3
.180 .125 TERMINAL
.030 .100
(4.57) (3.18) IDENT-
(0.76) (2.54) .030
DIA. .020 IFICATION
TYP. .200 DIA. .165 (0.76) .200
TYP. (0.51)
(5.08) (4.19) TYP. (5.08) .200
.200 (5.08)
.015 (5.08)
(0.38)
SPDT TYP.
SPECIFICATIONS
Rating Criteria Materials and Finishes
Operating Life: 80,000 make-and-break cycles Insulation Resistance: 1000 megaohms Base and Cover: Thermoplastic (UL 94V-0)
at full load minimum Plunger: Thermoplastic (UL 94V-0), (S versions
Contact Rating (resistive load): Voltage Breakdown: 1000 Vrms minimum at include an internal o-ring seal)
Gold Contacts: 0.4 VA maximum at 20 Vac or sea level Terminals: Copper alloy, gold or silver plate (as
Vdc maximum Operating Temperature: -30°C. to +85°C. specified) over nickel plate
Silver Contacts: 1.0 Amp maximum at 120 Vac Solderability: Per MIL-STD-202F, Method Spring: Plated Music Wire
or 28 Vdc 208D, or EIA RS-186E Method 9 (1 hour steam Contact System: Copper alloy, gold or silver
Contact Resistance: Below 20 milliohms typical aging) plate (as specified) over nickel plate
initial at 2-4 Vdc, 100 mA Switch Support: Brass, tin-plated

Series: 38BT = SPST, Momentary, Thru Hole
Series: 38BH = SPDT, Momentary, Thru Hole
SPST–N.O. Dimension A: 0 = 0.020" 4 = 0.215"
SPST N.O.
38BX-4-H-3-N
Seal: S = O-Ring Seal, N = No Seal

Contact Material: 1 = Solder Dip over Gold
N.C. 2 = Solder Dip over Silver
TERM. 1
COMM 3 = Gold - RoHS Compliant
TERM. 2 4 = Silver - RoHS Compliant
N.O.
TERM. 3 Orientation: H = Horizontal to PCB
SPDT–N.O.
Available from your local Grayhill Distributor For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
Office, an authorized local distributor, or Grayhill.
Pushbutton
SERIES 38BT and 38BC

Sub-Miniature Vertical PC Mount
FEATURES
• Actuates at Right Angle to Printed Circuit
Board
Standard
• Sealed Plunger Option

38BT .200
Dim. (5,08)
A
.190 (4,83) .200 .320

DIA. (5,08) (8,13)
Pushbutton Switches
.100 (2,54)
DIA.
.177 .020 (0,51)
.180 (4,57) (4,50) SQUARE
SPST DIA. .527 (13,39) .130 (3,30) TYP.
38BC
DIM "A" .527(13,39)
.180 .320 .200
.177 (8,13) (5,08)
(4,57) (4,50)
DIA.
1
.200
.100
.190 (2,54)
(4,83) .130
DIA. DIA. (3,30) .020 (0,51)
SPDT TYP. .100 SQ. TYP.
(2,54)
TYP.

SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Life: 80,000 make-and-break Insulation Resistance: 1000 megaohms Base and Cover: Thermoplastic (UL 94V-0)
cycles at full load minimum Plunger: Thermoplastic (UL 94V-0), (S
Contact Rating (resistive load): Voltage Breakdown: 1000 Vrms minimum at versions include an internal o-ring seal)
Gold Contacts: 0.4 VA maximum at 20 Vac or sea level Terminals: Copper alloy, gold or silver plate
Vdc Operating Temperature: -30°C. to +85°C. (as specified) over nickel plate
Silver Contacts: 1.0 Amp maximum at 120 Solderability: Per MIL-STD-202F, Method Spring: Plated music wire
Vac or 28 Vdc 208D, or EIA RS-186E, Method 9 (1 hour Contact System: Copper alloy, gold or silver
Contact Resistance: Below 20 milliohms steam aging) plate (as specified) over nickel plate
typical initial at 2-4 Vdc, 100 mA, for both
silver and gold-plated contacts

Series: 38BT = SPST, Momentary, Thru-Hole
Series: 38BC = SPDT, Momentary, Thru-Hole
SPST–N.O. Dimension A: 0 = 0.020" 4 = 0.215"
38BT-4-V-3-S
SPST N.O.
Seal: S = O-Ring Seal, N = No Seal

Contact Material: 1 = Solder Dip over Gold
N.C. 2 = Solder Dip over Silver
TERM. 1
COMM 3 = Gold - RoHS Compliant
TERM. 2 4 = Silver - RoHS Compliant
N.O.
TERM. 3 Orientation: V = Vertical to PCB
SPDT–N.O.
Pushbutton
Snap Action Miniature Pushbutton Switches
SERIES 38C
Miniature Pushbutton Switches
FEATURES
• SPDT and DPDT Circuitry
• Choice of Bushings, and
Terminations
• Caps and Frames Available
• UL Recoginized
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)
.205
Ø.122 (5.20)
Pushbutton Switches
(Ø3.10) .431
SPDT KEYWAY (10.95) .030 KEYWAY
(0.76) THIS SIDE
.270 .250
(6.86) (6.35) 3 NC
.500 2 NO
(12.7)
1 COMM.
.185
(4.70)
01COMM.
SCHEMATIC .218 MODEL NO. SWITCH POSITION
(5.54) EPOXY SEAL SP7 ON (ON)

NC 3 NO 2 .040 ()=MOMENTARY TERM. COMM. 1-3 1-2
(1.02)
.256
Ø.122 (6.50)
(Ø3.10) .390
.030 .040
FLAT .225 (9.93)
(0.76) (1.02)
(5.72)
DPDT .250
(6.35) 6 3 NC
.500 5 2 NO
(12.7)
4 1 COMM.
.185
(4.70) .190
.450 .218 (4.83)
(11.43) (5.54) EPOXY SEAL
.040
(1.02) .051
01COMM. 4
(1.30)
MODEL NO. SWITCH POSITION
SCHEMATIC
DP7 ON (ON)
NC 3 2 NO NC 6 5 NO
()=MOMENTARY TERM. COMM. 1-3, 4-6 1-2, 4-5
BUSHING OPTIONS IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)

B10 Thd Std 1/4-40 UNS-2A B11 Thd Std 1/4-40 UNS-2A
B20 Non-Thd B21 Non-Thd
.040 .270 .250 .272 .250
(1.02) (6.90) (6.35) (6.90) (6.35)
.028 .225
(0.72) (5.72)
.040
.040 (1.02)
(1.02)
Pushbutton
TERMINATION OPTIONS IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)
M1 Solder Lug (Std) M2 P. C. Mount M3 P. C. Mount, Quick WX Wire Wrap

Connect
DIM."A"
EPOXY SEAL EPOXY SEAL EPOXY SEAL
.250 .189 .250
.108 .205 .189 (6.35) (4.80)
(5.20) (4.80) (6.35) EPOXY
(2.75)
SEAL
.075
(1.91)
.050
.050 (1.27)
.080 .062
(2.03) (1.27) (1.57) OPTION
CODE DIM."A"
.047 W1 .750(19.05)
(1.19) THK. .030 (0.76) .030 (0.76) THK. W2 .964(24.48)
W3 .425(10.80)
THK. .030 (0.76)
W4 1.062(26.97)
Pushbutton Switches
M6 Right Angle P. C. Mount, Horizontal
Ø.073 .185
.202 .200 (Ø1.85) (4.69)
.500 (5.12) .270 (5.08)
(12.7) EPOXY (6.86)
.125 SEAL
(3.17)
SPDT 1 2 3
.500
Ø.122
.185 (12.7)
(Ø3.10) .050
(4.70) (1.27) .200
(5.08) P.C. MOUNTING
.298
.030 (7.57) .500 .048
(0.76) (12.7) (1.22)
.202
(5.12) .185
.200
.185 (4.70)
.500 (5.08)
Ø.122 EPOXY (4.70)
(12.7)
(Ø3.10) SEAL
.125
(3.18) .450
DPDT
4 5 6
(11.43) 1 2 3
.500
1 4
(12.7)
.296
.030 (7.53) .050 .200 .150
(0.76) .500
(12.7) (1.27) (5.08) (3.81)
.185
(4.70) .150 .048 P.C. MOUNTING
(3.81) (1.22)
M7 Right Angle P.C. Mount, Vertical
.270
(6.86) .202 .500
(5.12) EPOXY SEAL
(12.7)
.125
(3.18) 3
.150
.500 (3.81)
2
SPDT (12.7)
1
1 2 3
Ø.122 Ø.073
(Ø3.10) .200 (Ø1.85)
.050 .296 (5.08)
.030 .048
(1.27) (7.53) P.C. MOUNTING
(0.76) (1.22)
.150 .200
.500 (3.81) (5.08)
(12.7)
Pushbutton
TERMINATION OPTIONS (CONT.) IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)
M7 Ø.122 .150
.450 (Ø3.10) (3.81)
(11.43) .185
.500 .202 EPOXY SEAL .500
(5.12) (12.7) (4.70)
(12.70) .125
.125 (3.18) 6 3
DPDT (3.17)
5 2
4 1
4 5 6
.200 Ø.073
.296
.048 (5.08) (Ø1.85)
(7.53)
.030 (1.22)
.050
.500
(1.27) .200
(12.7) .150
.185 (5.08)
(3.81)
(4.70)
V2-V3 Vertical Bracket, P. C. Mount
Ø.122 .290 .125
(Ø3.10) (7.37) (3.18)
Pushbutton Switches
OPTION
DIM. "A" DIM."A" .185
CODE
(4.70)
SPDT .460
V2 (11,68)
.202 .620
(5.12) (15.75)
.630
V3 (16,00)
1 2 3
.048 EPOXY SEAL

(1.22) .020 Ø.073
.185
(0.51) .030 (Ø1.85)
(4.70)
.125 (0.76)
.185 P.C. MOUNTING
(3.18)
(4.70)
.320 .620
(8.13) (15.75)
Ø.122 .290
(Ø3.10) (7.37) .125
.460 (3.18) .185
(11.68) (4.70)
DPDT
.202 .620
.450 (5.12) (15.75)
(11.43)
4 5 6
EPOXY SEAL Ø.073
.048 .020 (Ø1.85)
(1.22) (0.51) .030
.185 (0.76) .190
.125 (4.70) .185 (4.83)
(3.18) (4.70)
.320 .620 P.C. MOUNTING
(8.13) (15.75)
Ø.122 .290 .202 .250
(Ø3.10) (7.37) (5.12) (3.18)
OPTION
DIM."A" .185
CODE
DIM."A" (4.70)
.185 .460
V4
SPDT (4.70) (11,68)
.750
V5
.630 (15.75)
(16,00)
1 2 3
.020 EPOXY SEAL

.048
(1.22) (0.51) .030
.250 Ø.073
.185 (0.76) (Ø1.85)
.360 (6.35) (4.70) .750
(9.14) (19.05) P.C. MOUNTING
Pushbutton

V4-V5
.202 .190
.290 (5.12) (4.83)
Ø.122 (7.37) .250
(Ø3.10) OPTION (3.18)
DIM."A"
CODE .185
DIM."A" (4.70)
.185 .460
V4 (11,68)
DPDT (4.70) .750
.630 (15.75)
V5 (16,00)
4 5 6
.020 EPOXY SEAL

.048
(1.22) (0.51) .030
.250 Ø.073
.185 (0.76) (Ø1.85)
.360 (6.35) (4.70) .750
(9.14) (19.05) P.C. MOUNTING
Snap-in Termination Options
Pushbutton Switches
(Snap-in termination options have the same PC layout as M2, M6 and M7 options)
S2 S6

FOR PANEL MOUNTING
AP1 Cap Only
.460
AP2 Cap and Frame (11.70)
.079
.060
(2.00)
(1.52) INCREASE TO .620/.625(15.75/15.88)
FOR .091/.125(2.32/3.18) THK. PANEL
.618
SPDT (15.70)
R.005
(R.130)
.284 .600
.500
.763 .047 TO .125 (7.20) (15.24)
(1.19 TO 3.18) (12.74)
(19.40) PANEL LAYOUT
PANEL THICKNESS 2 EPOXY SEAL
1 3
.460
.060 (11.70)
(1.52) .079
INCREASE TO .620/.625(15.75/15.88)
(2.00)
FOR .091/.125(2.32/3.18) THK. PANEL
DPDT
.618
(15.70)
R.005
(R.130)
.284
(7.20) .600 .500
.763 .047 TO .125 (15.24)
(1.19 TO 3.18) (12.74)
(19.40) PANEL LAYOUT
PANEL THICKNESS 5 EPOXY SEAL
4 6
Pushbutton

FOR PANEL MOUNTING
AP3 Cap Only

AP4 Cap and Frame
.460 .079
SPDT (11.70) (2.00) INCREASE TO .620/.625(15.75/15.88)
FOR .091/.125(2.32/3.18) THK. PANEL
.618
(15.70)
R.005
(R.130)
.284
(7.20) .600 .500
.763 (15.24) (12.74)
(19.40)
.047 TO .125 1 2 3 EPOXY SEAL
PANEL LAYOUT
(1.19 TO 3.18)
Pushbutton Switches
PANEL THICKNESS
DPDT .079
.460
(2.00) INCREASE TO .620/.625(15.75/15.88)
(11.70)
FOR .091/.125(2.32/3.18) THK. PANEL
.618
(15.70)
R.005
(R.130)
.284
(7.20) .600 .500
.763 (15.24) (12.74)
(19.40)
.047 TO .125 4 5 6 EPOXY SEAL
PANEL LAYOUT
(1.19 TO 3.18)
PANEL THICKNESS
SPECIFICATIONS
RATINGS Contact Resistance: 20 milliohms max. MATERIALS
Contact Rating: Q & G option - 3A with initial @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mA Case: Diallyl phthalate (DAP) (UL94V-0)
resistive load @ 125 VAC or 28 VDC; 1.5A Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms Plunger: Glass filled nylon or glass filled
with resistive load @ 250 VAC. R option - 0.4 minimum polyester
VA max @ 20 Vmax (AC or DC) Dielectic Strength: 1,000 V RMS @ sea Bushing: Brass, nickel plated
Electrical Life: 50,000 make-and-break level Housing: Stainless steel
cycles at full load Operating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C Terminal/Switch Support: Brass, electrotin
Travel: .050 ± .010 plated
Terminal Seal: Epoxy
SERIES MODEL NO. PLUNGER BUSHING TERMINATION CONTACT SEAL
38C SP7 B10 M1 Q T
38C = Options: Options: Options: Options: M1, R = Copper T = Lead
Miniature SP7, DP7 Blank=std AP1, AP2, M2, M3, M6, alloy, gold Free and
Pushbutton (see models as shown AP3, AP4, M7, S2, S6 plate over RoHS
Switches for in dwg B10, B11, V2, V3, V4, nickel plate. Compliant
switching 0 = 0.0 B21, B21 V5, W1, W2,
positions) (Flush) (see W3, W4 (see Q = Copper
1 = .205 bushing termination alloy, silver
(5.02) options) options) plated
2 = .079
(2.00) G=Gold
plate over
silver plate
Pushbutton
Alternate Action Pushbutton Switches
SERIES 38D
Alternate Action
Pushbutton Switches
FEATURES
• SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, 4PDT Circuitry
• Choice of Plunger Length, Bushings,
and Terminations
• UL Recognized
MODELS IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)
.156
.419 (3.96)
SPDT KEYWAY (10.65) .030 .080
Pushbutton Switches
(0.76) (2.03)
.270 .303
(6.86) (7.70)
3
.500
2
(12.7)
1
.185
Ø.114 .280 (4.70)
02COMM. (Ø2.90) (7.11) EPOXY MODEL NO. SWITCH POSITION
SCHEMATIC SEAL SP1 ON NONE ON
TERM. COMM. 2-3 OPEN 2-1
1 3
.156
(3.96) .080
.419 (2.03)
KEYWAY .030
DPDT (10.65) (0.76) .040
(1.02)
.303
(7.70) 6 3
.500 5 2
(12.7)
4 1
.185
Ø.114 .280 (4.70) .190
.450 (Ø2.90) (7.11) (4.83)
(11.43) EPOXY
SEAL
02COMM. 05COMM. MODEL NO. SWITCH POSITION
DP1 ON NONE ON
SCHEMATIC
TERM. COMM. 2-3,5-6 OPEN 2-1,5-4
1 3 4 6
.571
.080
.475 (14.50)
(2.03)
(12.06) .030
(0.76) .040
KEYWAY (1.02)
.303
(7.70)
9 6 3
.500 8 5 2
(12.7)
7 4 1
3PDT .185
Ø.114 .280 (4.70)
.650 (Ø2.90) .190
(7.11) EPOXY SEAL
(16.51) (4.83)
.156
02COMM. 05COMM. 08COMM. (3.96) 3P1 ON NONE ON
TERM. COMM. 2-3,5-6 OPEN 2-1,5-4
SCHEMATIC 8-9 8-7
1 34 67 9
Pushbutton

.571
(14.50) .080
.475 (2.03)
4PDT (12.06) .030
(0.76) .040
KEYWAY (1.02)
.303
(7.70)
9 6 3
.500 11 8 5 2
(12.7)
4 1
.185
Ø.114 (4.70)
.850 (Ø2.90) .280 .190
(21.59) (7.11) EPOXY SEAL (4.83)
02COMM. 05COMM. 08COMM. 11COMM. .156 4P1 ON NONE ON
SCHEMATIC (3.96) TERM. COMM. 2-3,5-6

8-9,11-12
OPEN 2-1,5-4
8-7,11-10
1 3
34 67 9 10 12
()=MOMENTARY
Pushbutton Switches
PLUNGER OPTIONS IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)

1 2 3 4 Ø.242
Ø.114 (Ø6.15)
Ø.188
(Ø3.00) Ø.188 (Ø2.90)
(Ø3.00)
.276
(7.00)
.299 .244
.335
(7.60) (6.20) NO. 4 PLUNGER MUST
(8.50)
BE USED WITH BD
BUSHING

B10 Thd Std B11 Thd Std BD
.260
B20 Non-Thd (6.60) B21 Non-Thd
1/4-40 UNS .260 1/4-40 UNS 15/32-32UNS
.040
(6.60)
(1.00)
.075
(1.90)
.305
.069 .222 .036
(7.75) .069
(1.76) (5.65) (0.91)
.069 .305 (1.76)
(1.75) (7.75) .553
(14.05)
M1 Solder Lug (Std) M2 P. C. Mount WX Wire Wrap
DIM."A"
EPOXY SEAL
.205 EPOXY SEAL EPOXY
(5.20) .250 SEAL
.189 (6.35) .075
(4.80) (1.91)
.050
(1.27) THK. .030 (0.76)
CODE DIM."A"
.080 W1
.050
(2.03) W2 .964(24.48)
(1.27)
W3 .425(10.80)
W4 1.062(26.97)
THK. .030 (0.76) THK. .030 (0.76)
Pushbutton
M6 Right Angle, P. C. Mount, Horizontal Ø.073

(Ø1.85) .185
.280 .095 (4.69)
.278 .200
(7.11) (2.42)
(7.06) (5.08)
.069
.515 .185
(1.76)
(13.08) (4.69)
SPDT 1 2 3
EPOXY
.500
.030 Ø.114 SEAL
(12.7)
(0.76) (Ø2.90)
.050 .200
(1.27) (5.08) P.C. MOUNTING
.303
.132 (7.70) .500 .048
(3.34) (12.7) (1.22)
.280 .185
.200
(7.11) (4.70)
.500 (5.08)
Pushbutton Switches
(12.7) EPOXY .185
SEAL (4.70)
.125
DPDT (3.18) .450
(11.43)
.500
Ø.114 .200 (12.7)
(Ø2.90) .050 (5.08) .150
.030 .303 (1.27) (3.81)
(0.76) .048
(7.70) .150 (1.22) P.C. MOUNTING
.500 (3.81)
(12.7)
M7 Right Angle, P. C. Mount, Vertical

.270
.303
(6.86)
(7.70)
Ø.114 EPOXY SEAL .500
(Ø2.90) (12.7)
.106 .150
.125 3
(2.69) (3.81)
.500 (3.18)
2
SPDT (12.7)
1
Ø.073
.280 .200 (Ø1.85)
.050 (7.11) .030 (5.08)
.048
(1.27) .500 (0.76) P.C. MOUNTING
(1.22)
(12.7) .200
.150 (5.08)
(3.81)
.150
.303 .500 (3.81)
.450 (7.70) (12.7)
(11.43) Ø.114 .500 .190
(Ø2.90) EPOXY SEAL (12.70) (4.83)
.106 .125
6 3
(2.69) (3.18)
5 2
4 1
DPDT
.280 .200 Ø.073
(7.11) (5.08) (Ø1.85)
.048
.050 (1.22) P.C. MOUNTING
(1.27)
.190 .500 .200
(4.83) (12.7) .030 (5.08)
.150 (0.76)
(3.81)
Pushbutton

M7 .150
.303 (3.81)
Ø.114 (7.70) .500
(Ø2.90) (12.7) .190
.650 EPOXY SEAL (4.83)
(16.51)
.125
9 6 3
(3.18) 8 5 2 .500
3PDT 7 4 1
(12.7)
.280 .200 Ø.073

(7.11) (5.08) (Ø1.85)
.050
(1.27) .565 .048 P.C. MOUNTING
.030
(14.35) (1.22)
.190 (0.76)
(4.83) .150
(3.81) .200
(5.08)
.150
.303 (3.81)
.850 (7.70) .500
Pushbutton Switches
Ø.114 .190
(16.51) (12.7) (4.83)
(Ø2.90) EPOXY SEAL
12 9 6 3
11 8 5 2 .500
4PDT 10 7 4 1 (12.7)
.280 .200
(7.11) (5.08) Ø.073
.565 .125 (Ø1.85)
.050 .048
(14.35) (3.18)
(1.27) (1.22)
.190 .150 .200 P.C. MOUNTING
(4.83) (3.81) (5.08)
.030
(0.76)
V2-V3
Vertical
Bracket,
P. C.
Mount
SPDT
DPDT
Pushbutton
SPDT
Pushbutton Switches
DPDT
SPECIFICATIONS
RATINGS Contact Resistance: 10 milliohms max. MATERIALS
Contact Rating: Q & G option - 6A @ 125 initial @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mA Case: Diallyl phthalate (DAP) (UL94V-0)
VAC or 28 VDC or 28 VDC; 3A @ 250 VAC. Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms Plunger: Glass filled nylon or glass filled
R option - 0.4 VA max @ 20 Vmax (AC or minimum polyester
DC) Dielectic Strength: 1,500 V RMS @ sea Bushing: Zinc, nickel plated
cycles at full load Operating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C Terminal Seal: Epoxy
38D SP1 1 B10 M1 Q T
38D = Options: Options: Options: Options: M1, R = Copper T = Lead
Alternate SP1, DP1, 1, 2, 3, 4 B10, B11, M2, M6, M7, alloy, gold Free and
Action 3P1, 4P1 (see B20, B21, S2, S6 V2, plate over RoHS
Pushbutton (see models plunger BD (see V3, V4, V5, nickel plate. Compliant
Switches for options) bushing W1, W2, W3,
switching options) W4 (see Q = Copper
positions) termination alloy, silver
options) plated
G=Gold
plate over
silver plate
Pushbutton
Sealed Snap Action Miniature Pushbutton Switches
SERIES 38E
Sealed Snap Action Miniature
Pushbutton Switches
FEATURES
• Choice of Bushings, and
Terminations
• UL Recognized
• IP-68 Degree of Protection
• RoHS Compliant
.185
(4.70) .030
Ø.114 (0.76)
Pushbutton Switches
.260 (Ø2.90)
SPDT (6.60)
3
Ø.236
.500 (Ø6.00) 2
(12.7)
1
.185
(4.70)
.276 .050
EPOXY SEAL (1.26)
01COMM. (7.00) .663
SCHEMATIC
(16.85) MODEL NO. SWITCH POSITION
WSP7 ON (ON)
3 2
()=MOMENTARY TERM. COMM. 1-3 1-2
.185
(4.70) .030
(0.76) .050
Ø.114
DPDT .449 (1.26)
(Ø2.90)
(11.40)
6 3
.500 5 2
(12.7)
4 1
.185
(4.70) .190
Ø.205 .260 (4.83)
EPOXY SEAL
(Ø5.20) (6.60)
.663
(16.85)
01COMM. 04COMM.
SCHEMATIC
WDP7 ON (ON)
3 2 6 5
()=MOMENTARY TERM. COMM. 1-3, 4-6 1-2, 4-5
PLUNGER OPTIONS IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)
Ø.114
Ø.114 (Ø2.90)
(Ø2.90)
OPTION OPTION
DIM."A" DIM."A"
CODE CODE
DIM."A" DIM."A"
1 .173(4.40) 1 .276(7.00)
FOR B1 2 .220(5.60) FOR B4 2 .327(8.30)
BUSHING 3 .087(2.20)
BUSHING 3 .193(4.90)
Pushbutton
BUSHING OPTIONS IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS) TERMINATION OPTIONS IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)
M1 Solder Lug (Std) M2 P. C. Mount B1 B4
Pushbutton Switches
M6 Right Angle P. C. Mount, Horizontal Ø.073
(Ø1.85)
.276 .185
(4.70) .200 .185
(7.00)
.663 (5.08) (4.69)
(16.85) .260 .030
.500 (6.60) (0.75)
SPDT (12.7) EPOXY
SEAL
Ø.236
(Ø5.20)
1 2 3
.050 .030 .500

Ø.114 .050 (0.75) (12.7)
(1.26)
(Ø2.90) (1.26)
.185 P.C. MOUNTING
.200 .500
(12.7) (4.70)
(5.08)
.663 .200 .185
.185 (5.08) (4.70)
(16.85)
(4.70)
.260
.500 (6.60) EPOXY
DPDT (12.7) SEAL
4 5 6 .449
1 2 3
(11.40)
.500
.200 Ø.114 (12.7)
.050
(5.08) (Ø2.90) .150
(1.27) .030
(0.75) (3.81)
.050 .150
(1.26) .500
(12.7)
M7 Right Angle P.C. Mount, Vertical
.663
.260 (16.85)
.050 .500
(6.60) EPOXY SEAL (1.26) (12.7)
.276
SPDT (6.60) 3
.150
.500 2 (3.81)
(12.7)
1
Ø.236
(Ø6.00) Ø.114 Ø.073
(Ø2.90) .030 .200 (Ø1.85)
.200
(5.08) (0.76) (5.08)
.500
.050 (12.7)
(1.26) .150 P.C. MOUNTING
(3.81)
Pushbutton
M7 .663 .500
(16.85) .190 (12.7)
.449 (4.83)
(11.40) EPOXY .150
SEAL .050 (3.81)
.260 (1.26)
(6.60)
DPDT .500
(12.7)
Ø.205 Ø.114
(Ø5.20) (Ø2.90) .190
.200 Ø.073
.200 (Ø1.85) (4.83)
.030 (5.08)
(5.08) (0.76)
.500
(12.7)
(1.26) (3.81)
V2-V3 Vertical Bracket, P. C. Mount .276

Ø.114 (7.00)
.125
(Ø2.90)
Pushbutton Switches
(3.18)
OPTION
DIM."A" .185
CODE
DIM. "A" (4.70)
SPDT V2
.460
(11,68)
.620
.630 (15.75)
.230 V3 (16,00)
(5.85)
.050 EPOXY SEAL

.020
(1.26) (0.50) .073 DIA.
.030 (Ø1.85)
.125 (0.75)
(3.18) .185
.321 (4.70) .620 P.C. MOUNTING
(8.15) (15.75)
.260
Ø.114 (6.60) .125
(Ø2.90) (3.18)
OPTION .190
DIM."A"
CODE (4.83)
DIM. "A"
DPDT V2
.460
(11,68) .185
(4.70)
.230 .630
V3 (16,00)
(5.85) .620
(15.75)
.050 EPOXY SEAL
.020
(1.26) (0.50) .030
.125 (0.75) Ø.073
(3.18) .185 (Ø1.85)
(8.15) .620
(15.75)
V4-V5 Vertical Bracket, P. C. Mount .276

Ø.114 (7.00)
.230 .250
(Ø2.90) (5.85) (3.18)
OPTION
DIM."A"
CODE .185
DIM."A" (4.70)
.460
SPDT V4 (11,68)
.750
.630 (15.75)
V5 (16,00)
.020 EPOXY SEAL

.050
(1.26) (0.51) .030
.250 Ø.073
.185 (0.76) (Ø1.85)
.362 (6.35) (4.70) .750
(9.20) (19.05) P.C. MOUNTING
Pushbutton

V4-V5 .260 .190
(6.60) .250 (4.83)
Ø.114 .230 (3.18)
(5.85) OPTION
(Ø2.90) DIM."A"
CODE .185
.460 (4.70)
DIM."A" V4 (11,68)
.750
.630 (15.75)
DPDT V5 (16,00)
.020 EPOXY SEAL

.050 Ø.073
(1.26) (0.51) .030
.250 (Ø1.85)
.185 (0.76)
.362 (6.35) (4.70)
.750 P.C. MOUNTING
(9.20)
(19.05)
Pushbutton Switches
S6
S7
S2-S3
S4-S5
Pushbutton
SPECIFICATIONS
RATINGS MATERIALS
Contact Rating: Q & G option - 1A with Contact Resistance: 10 milliohms max. Case: Glass filled Nylon 6/6 (UL94V-0)
resistive load @ 125 VAC or 28 VDC. initial @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mA Plunger: Glass filled nylon or glass filled
R option - 0.4 VA max @ 20 Vmax (AC or Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms polyester
DC) minimum Bushing: Brass, nickel plated
Electrical Life: 50,000 make-and-break Dielectic Strength: 1,500 V RMS @ sea Housing: Stainless steel
cycles at full load level Terminal/Switch Support: Brass or steel,
Travel: .040 ± .010 Operating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C electrotin plated
38E WSP7 1 B1 M1 Q T
38E = Options: Options: Options: Options: R = Copper T = Lead
Sealed WSP7, 1, 2, 3 (see B1, B4 M1, M2, M6, alloy, gold Free and
Snap WDP7 plunger (see M7, S2, S3, plate over RoHS
Action (see models options) bushing S4, S5, S6, nickel plate. Compliant
Pushbutton Switches
Pushbutton for options) S7 V2, V3,

Switches switching V4, V5, (see Q = Copper
positions) termination alloy, silver
options) plated
G=Gold
plate over
silver plate
Pushbutton
Subminiature Pushbutton Switches
SERIES 38F
Sub-Miniature
Pushbutton Switches
FEATURES
• Save Space and Weight
• Choice of Actuators, Bushings, and
Terminations
• UL Recoginized
SPST
.155 .200
FLAT 10-48UNS .200
Ø.240 (3.94) (5.08)
Pushbutton Switches
(5.08)
(Ø6.10)
Ø.100 .321 .059

.173 (Ø2.54) .020
(4.39) (8.16) (1.52)
.214 (0.51)
(5.45) .110
SCHEMATIC .282 (2.79)
(7.18) MODEL NO. SWITCH POSITION
()=MOMENTARY SP9 OFF (ON)
SPDT
.155 .200
FLAT 10-48UNS .200
Ø.240 (3.94) (5.08)
(5.08)
(Ø6.10)
Ø.100 .321 .059

.173 (Ø2.54) .020
(4.39) (8.16) (1.52)
(0.51)
.214
(5.45) .160
(4.06)
2COMM.
.282
SCHEMATIC (7.18) .110 MODEL NO. SWITCH POSITION
ON (ON)
N.C.1 3 N.O. (2.79) SP8
()=MOMENTARY TERM. COMM. 2-1 2-3

B5 B6
Pushbutton
BUSHING OPTIONS (CONT.) IN INCHES (AND MILLIMETERS)
B7 B8
Ø.122
(Ø3.10)
Ø.100
.310
Ø.187 (Ø2.54) .225
.220 (7.87)
(Ø4.75) (5.72)
(5.59) Ø.187
(Ø4.75)
.200
(5.08)
Ø.314
(Ø8.00)
.020 1/4 40NS
.020 (0.51)
(0.51)
B9 B0
Ø.122
(Ø3.10)
.310
Pushbutton Switches
Ø.200 .225 (7.87)

(Ø5.08) (5.72)
Ø.100
(Ø2.54)
.200
(5.08)
Ø.314
(Ø8.00)
.130 .020
(3.30) .020 (0.51)
(0.51)
M1 Solder Lug M2 P. C. Mount (Std)

.040
(1.02) .040 .130
.060 (1.02) (3.30)
.110
(2.79) (1.53)
.060 .030
.160 (1.52) (0.76)
(4.06) .030 THK. .020 (0.51)
(0.76)
THK. .020 (0.51)
M6 Right Angle, P. C. Mount .128 .321

Ø.187 (3.26) .577 (8.16)
.200
(Ø4.75) (14.65) .020 (5.08) Ø.043
Ø.100 .362 (0.51) (Ø1.09)
.173 (Ø2.54) (9.20)
(4.39)
SPST
Ø.240
FLAT (Ø6.10) .200
.152 .020 .199 (5.08)
.200 (3.86) (0.51) (5.04)
.016 .134
.036 (0.41) (3.40)
(0.90) .200
(5.08) .034
(0.86)
Pushbutton

M6 .137 .321 .200
Ø.187 (3.50) (8.16) (5.08)
.577 Ø.043
(Ø4.75) .020
Ø.100 (14.65) (Ø1.09)
(Ø2.54) (0.51)
.173 .362
(4.39) (9.20)
SPDT Ø.240
FLAT (Ø6.10) .200
.152 .199 (5.08)
.200 .020
(3.86) (5.04)
(5.08) (0.51)
.016 P.C. MOUNTING
.036 .134
(0.41)
(0.90) (3.40)
.200
(5.08) .034
(0.86)
.220
M7 Right Angle, (5.59) Ø.043
Ø.240 .128 .320 (Ø1.09)
P. C. Mount (Ø6.10) (3.26) (8.13)
FLAT Ø.100 .356 .200
.020
(Ø2.54) (9.04) (5.08)
(0.51)
Pushbutton Switches
.016 .030
.173 (0.41) (0.76)
SPST (4.39) .152 .400
(10.16) .200
(3.86) .130
Ø.187 .200 (5.08)
(Ø4.75) (5.08) .200
.030 (5.08)
(0.76)
.220 Ø.043
(5.59) .320 (Ø1.09)
Ø.240 (8.13) .200
(Ø6.10) .137 (5.08)
(3.50) .356 .200
FLAT (9.04)
.020 (5.08)
(0.51)
.030
SPDT .173 Ø.100 .016 (0.76)
(4.39) (Ø2.54) (0.41)
Ø.187 .152 .130 .100
(Ø4.75) (3.86) .200 (3.30) (2.54)
.030 (5.08) .200 P.C. MOUNTING
.400
(0.76) (5.08) (10.16)
Ø.100
V2 Vertical (Ø2.54)
(3.26)
.128 Ø.043
Bracket, P. C. Ø.187 (Ø1.09)
Mount (Ø4.75)
.173
(4.39)
.020 .236
(0.51) (6.00)
.200
.338 (5.08) .400
.200 (8.60) .200 (10.16)
SPST (5.08) .017 (5.08)
.030 .130
(3.30) .400 .020
(0.76) (0.51)
(10.16)
Ø.100 .128
(Ø2.54) (3.26) Ø.043
Ø.187 (Ø1.09)
(Ø4.75)
.173
(4.39)
SPDT .020 .236

(0.51) (6.00) .100
(5.08) .400
.338 (10.16)
(8.60) .020
.200 .017 (0.51)
(5.08) (0.42) P.C. MOUNTING
.130
(3.30) .100
.030 .400 (2.54)
(0.76) (10.16)
Pushbutton

S2 S6 S7
SPECIFICATIONS
RATINGS Contact Resistance: 20 milliohms max. initial MATERIALS
Contact Rating: Q & G option - 1A with @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mA Case: Diallyl phthalate (DAP) (UL94V-0)
resistive load @ 125 VAC or 28 VDC; Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms Plunger: Polyester
Pushbutton Switches
R option - 0.4 VA max @ 20 Vmax (AC minimum Bushing: Brass, nickel plated
or DC) Dielectic Strength: 1,000 V RMS @ sea Housing: Stainless steel
Electrical Life: 30,000 make-and-break level Terminal/Switch Support: Brass, electrotin
cycles at full load Operating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C plated
Travel: .030 ± .010 Terminal Seal: Epoxy
SERIES MODEL NO. BUSHING TERMINATION CONTACT SEAL

38F SP8 B5 M1 Q T
38F = R = Copper T = Lead

Sub- Options: SP8, SP9 Options: Options: M1,
(see models for B5, B6, B7, M2, M6, M7, alloy, gold Free and
Miniature plate over RoHS
Pushbutton switching positions) B8, B9, B0 V2, S2, S6,
(see S7 (see nickel plate. Compliant
Switches
bushing termination
options) options) Q = Copper
alloy, silver
plated
G=Gold
plate over
silver plate
Example Part Number: 38FSP8B5M1QE
or Grayhill.
Pushbutton
Sealed Subminiature Pushbutton Switches
SERIES 38G
Sealed Subminiature
Pushbutton Switches
FEATURES
Standard
• Choice of Terminations
• Printed Circuit Board Mount
• SPST, DPST and SPDT Momentary
Contact
• Sealed Per IP67
Pushbutton Switches
M6
Ø.177 .217 .362

Ø.100 EPOXY .327
(Ø4,50) 5,50) (8,30)
(Ø2,54) SEAL (8,30)
SPST .177
.200 .016
(0,40) .034 .200
.030 (5,08) (0,85)
(0,76) .020 (5,08)
.158
(4,00) (0,50)
.100
.200 (2,54)
(5,08)
M7
SPST
Pushbutton
SERIES 38G
M7
DPST
Pushbutton Switches
SPDT
V2
SPST
DPST
Pushbutton
SERIES 38G
V2
Ø.100
Ø.177 (Ø2,54) .161 Ø.043
(Ø4,50) (4,10) (Ø1.09)
.366
(9,30)
SPDT .217
(5,50)
.100
(2,54)
EPOXY SEAL .400
.201 (10.16)
.020
(5,10) .016 (0.50)
.030 .100
Pushbutton Switches
(0,76) (2,54)
.400
(10.16)
Snap-in Termination Options (Same P.C. mounting as V2, M6, M7 but with snap-in bracket)
S2 S6 S7
Circuitry
SPST DPST SPDT

MODEL NO. SWITCH POSITION MODEL NO. SWITCH POSITION MODEL NO. SWITCH POSITION
WSP9 OFF (ON) WDP9 OFF (ON) WSP8 ON (ON)
()=MOMENTARY TERM. COMM. 2-1 2-3 TERM. COMM. 2-1 2-3
()=MOMENTARY ()=MOMENTARY
2COMM.
SCHEMATIC
SCHEMATIC N.C.1 3 N.O.

SCHEMATIC
Pushbutton
SERIES 38G
SPECIFICATIONS
Rating Criteria Insulation Resistance: 1000 megaohms Terminals: Copper alloy
Operating Life: 30,000 make-and-break cycles minimum Spring: Plated Music Wire
at full load Voltage Breakdown: 1500 Vrms minimum at Contact System: Copper alloy
Contact Rating (resistive load): sea level Switch Support: Brass, tin-plated
R Option: 0.4 VA maximum at 20 Vac or Vdc Operating Temperature: -30°C. to +85°C.
maximum
G Option: 1A max at 125 Vac or 28 Vdc Materials and Finishes
Contact Resistance: 20 milliohms max initial at Case: Glass filled Nylon 6/6 (UL 94V-0)
2-4 Vdc, 100 mA Plunger: Thermoplastic Polyester(UL 94V-0)
(with internal o-ring seal)
Pushbutton Switches
38G WSP8 M7 R T
Subminiature Options: Options: R = Copper T = Lead
Sealed WSP8, M6, M7, S2, alloy, gold Free and
Pushbutton WSP9, S6, S7, V2 plate over RoHS
Switches WDP9 (see nickel plate. Compliant
(see models termination
for options) G=Gold
switching plate over
positions) silver plate
Pushbutton
Sealed Surface Mount Subminiature Pushbutton Switches
SERIES 38H
Sealed Surface Mount Subminiature
Pushbutton Switches
FEATURES
ï Surface Mount Process Compatible
ï Sealed Construction
ï Solder-Coated Terminals
ï Tape and Reel Packaging
ï SPST and SPDT Momentary Contact
• Sealed Per IP67
SERIES 38H
Pushbutton Switches
M7
.548
.342 (9,30) .242
(5,80) .420 (4,10)
Ø.177 EPOXY SEAL
Ø.102 (7,10)
(Ø4,50)
(Ø2,60)
.030
.177 .242 (0,50)
.024
(3,00) (4,10) (0,40)
.300 .325
.045 (5,08) (5,50)
(0,76)
SPST
.173
(4,39)
.125
(3,18)
.079
(2,00)
.221
(5,60)
.063
.120 .325 (1,60)
(3,00) (8,27)
.125
(3,18)
.561
(14,25)
Pushbutton
SERIES 38H
M7
.366
(9,30)
.161
(4,10) .161
EPOXY SEAL (4,10)
Ø.177
(Ø4,50) Ø.102 .228
(Ø2,60) (5,80)
.020
(0,50) .280
.118 .030 (7,10) .016
(3,00) (0,76) (0,40)
.100 .217
(2,54) (5,50)
.173
SPDT (4,39)
Pushbutton Switches
.125
(3,18) .079
(2,00)
.221
(5,60)
.100
(2,54) .063
.120 (1,60)
(3,00) .325
(8,27)
.125
(3,18)
.561
(14,25)
S6
.228
(5,80) .161 .161
.319 (4,10) (4,10)
.102
(8,10) .226
(2,60) .280
(5,75) EPOXY SEAL
(7,10)
Ø.177
(Ø4,50) .016 .020
.142 (0,40) .030 (0,50)
(3,60) (0,76) .200
.353
(5,08)
(8,97)
.040
.143 (1,02)
(3,63)
SPST
.128 .080
(3,25) (2,03) .421
(10,70)
.032
(0,80)
.079
(2,00)
.200
(5,08)
Pushbutton
SERIES 38H
S6
.228
(5,80) .161 .161
.319 (4,10) (4,10)
.102
(8,10) .226
(2,60) .280
(5,75) EPOXY SEAL
(7,10)
Ø.177
(Ø4,50) .016 .020
.142 (0,40) .030 (0,50)
(3,60) (0,76) .200
.353
(5,08)
(8,97)
.040
.143 (1,02)
Pushbutton Switches
(3,63)
SPDT
.128 .080
(3,25) (2,03) .421
(10,70)
.032
(0,80)
.079
(2,00)
.200
(5,08)
Circuitry
SPST SPDT
MODEL NO. SWITCH POSITION MODEL NO. SWITCH POSITION
WSP9 OFF (ON) WSP8 ON (ON)
TERM. COMM. 2-1 2-3
()=MOMENTARY
()=MOMENTARY
2COMM.
SCHEMATIC
SCHEMATIC
N.C.1 3 N.O.
Pushbutton
SERIES 38H
SPECIFICATIONS
Rating Criteria Voltage Breakdown: 1500 Vrms minimum at Contact System: Copper alloy
Operating Life: 30,000 make-and-break cycles sea level Switch Support: Brass, tin-plated
at full load Operating Temperature: -30°C. to +85°C.
Contact Rating (resistive load):
R Option: 0.4 VA maximum at 20 Vac or Vdc Materials and Finishes
maximum Case: Glass Filled Nylon 4/6, UL94V-)
Q & G Options: 1A max at 125 Vac or 28 Vdc Plunger: Thermoplastic Polyester(UL 94V-0)
Contact Resistance: 20 milliohms max initial at (with internal o-ring seal)
2-4 Vdc, 100 mA Terminals: Copper alloy
Insulation Resistance: 1000 megaohms Spring: Plated Music Wire
minimum
SERIES MODEL NO. TERMINATION CONTACT SEAL

Pushbutton Switches
38H WSP8 M7 R T
Sealed Options: Options: R = Copper T = Lead
Surface Mount WSP8, M7, S6 alloy, gold Free and
Subminiature WSP9 (see plate over RoHS
Pushbutton (see models termination nickel plate. compliant
Switches for options)
switching G = Copper
positions) alloy, Gold
plate over
silver plate
Q = Copper
alloy, Silver
Plate
Pushbutton
SERIES 32
SPST and SPDT,
Stackable with LED
FEATURES
• Stackable, Provides Custom Switch
Arrangements
• .200" Centers When Stacked
• SPST–N.O., SPST–N.C. Circuitry in
the Same Package
• Process Compatible, Internally
Sealed Plunger
• Status/Reset or Press-to-Test
Functions with Companion LED
Pushbutton Switches
SWITCH DIMENSIONS (In inches and millimeters)
E.I.A.
Rating at Operations
XXXX DATE
28 Vdc at Rated Part
GRAYHILL
GRAYHILL
GRAYHILL
GRAYHILL
GRAYHILL
CODE
Resistive Load Number
150 mA 100,000 32-01
Action Total Travel
Momentary .050 (1,27) Approx.

.200 (5,08) .220 (5,59)
.120 (3,05) .100 (2,54)
TYP. .100 (2,54) .084 (2,13) DIA.
.180
(4,57)
.272 (6,91)
.110 (2,79)
.090 (2,29)
.070 (1,78) .050 (1,27) .030 ± .002

.050 (1,27)
(0,76 ± 0,05)
.100 ± .004 DIA. 4 PLS.
.100 ± .004 (2,54 ± 0,10) TYP. .100 ± .004
BTWN. PINS OF STACKED (2,54 ± 0,10) TYP. (2,54 ± 0,10) .100 ± .004
SWITCHES BTWN. PINS OF .200 (5,08) (2,54 ± 0,10)
SAME SWITCH REF. .190 (4,83)
.400 (10,16)
Unless otherwise stated, linear dimension tolerances are ± .010 (0,25); diameters are ± .005 (0,13)
LED DIMENSIONS (In inches and millimeters) SWITCH CIRCUITRY

2 Circuits Per Switch
Actuator
N.C. N.C.
SPST N.C.
.220 (5,59) .100 (2,54) SPST N.O.

.200 (5,08) REF. N.O. N.O.
.230 (5,84)
.100 (2,54)
.118 (3,0)
DIA.
.110
C Alternate Wiring
.272 (2,79)
(6,91) Actuator
GRAYHILL N.C.
.180 SPDT
.010 (4,57) BREAK BEFORE C
.050 (1,27) (0,25) MAKE
.190 .020 (0,51)
.100 (2,54) CATHODE
(4,83) SQ. 2 PLS. CONNECT PINS N.O.
ON PC BOARD
Unless otherwise stated, linear dimension tolerances are ± .010 (0,25); diameters are ± .005 (0,13)
Pushbutton
E-9
SPECIFICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION: Individual Units

Rating Criteria
Contact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximum
on a new switch 32-01 Switch, 10 microinches gold plating, black button, red body
Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac between 32-02 Switch, 30 microinches gold plating, black button, red body
mutually insulated parts 32LED-RED Red LED and holder, red body
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms 32LED-GRN Green LED and holder, red body
minimum 32LED-YEL Yellow LED and holder, red body
Switch and LED Operating Temperature:
-40°C to +85°C Grayhill or your local Distributor will assemble stacks of switches, LEDs or combinations.
Materials and Finishes Assemblies of Switches or Switches and LED Combinations

Switch Base, LED Base, Button and Cover:
Polyester Example Part Number
Shorting Bar: Phosphor bronze, gold-plated
over nickel Basic switch part number (see Ordering Information)
Switch Terminals: Brass, gold-plated over Number of ganged elements (2 thru 6)
nickel
LED Terminals: Steel, tin-plated 32-01-6-AARGYA
Spring: Tinned Music Wire
Pushbutton Switches
Arrangement definition (left to right, front view)

LED Information A = Switch
MCD* Viewing
R = Red LED
Color Min. Max. Angle G = Green LED
Red 0.8 5.0 60°
Y = Yellow LED
Green 0.8 3.2 60°
Yellow 0.8 3.2 60° Example part number describes a stack of 6 elements consisting of two switches, a red
*MCD = Millicandellas at 2 mA LED, a green LED, a switch and a yellow LED. Shorter stacks will have fewer letters in
the arrangement definition. Contact Grayhill for stacks of more than six elements.
Recommended Current: 2mA
Current limiting resistor is not supplied.
Assemblies of LEDs Only

Example Part Number
Basic identification for LEDs

Number of ganged elements (2 thru 6)
32LED-3-RYG
Arrangement definition (left to right, front view)

R = Red LED
G = Green LED
Y = Yellow LED
Available from your local Grayhill Distributor. Example part number describes a stack of 3 LEDs, arranged red, yellow and green from
For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales left to right. Maximum number of stacked LEDs in this part numbering scheme is six.
Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill. Contact Grayhill for stacks of more than six elements.
Pushbutton
SERIES 39
SPST and SPDT, 1/4 Amp
FEATURES
• Fully Protected During Flux
Cleaning Operations
SPDT–PC Mount
Large Button Style
.500 ± .015
39-261* (12,7 ± 0,38) Rating at Rating at Rating at Operations Partial
.187 ± .010 (4,75 ± 0,25) DIA. 28 Vdc 115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated Part
Resistive Resistive Resistive Load Number
1 1
39-251*
.328 ± .015 .270 (6,86) REF. 150 mA /4 Amp /8 Amp 500,000 39-261*
(8,33 ± 0,38)
Action Total Travel Actuating Force (oz.)

.125 ± .010 (3,18 ± 0,25)
Pushbutton Switches
.068 ± .010 (1,73 ± 0,25) .090 + .010/ – .015
Momentary 10 ± 3 oz.
.100 ± .010 (2,54 ± 0,25) (2,29 + 0,25/ – 0,38)
.030 ± .002 (0,76 ± 0,05) DIA.
.250 ± .010 (6,35 ± 0,25) DIA. .250 ± .015 (6,35 ± 0,38)

Small Button Style
.084 ± .005 (2,13 ± 0,13) DIA. .060 (1,52) REF.
39-251*
.050 ± .005
(1,27 ± 0,13) .100 ± .015 (2,54 ± 0,38)
END OF BUTTON HAS A .200 (5,08) SPHERICAL RADIUS
.250 ± .010 (6,35 ± 0,25) DIA. .200 ± .015 (5,08 ± 0,38)
.400 ± .015
(10,16 ± 0,38) E .084 ± .005 (2,13 ± 0,13) DIA.
.060 (1,52) REF.
.050 ± .005 (1,27 ± 0,13) .100 ± .015 (2,54 ± 0,38)
.340 ± .015 .090 .100 ± .010 (2,54 ± 0,25)
(8,64 ± 0,38) ± .010
(2,29 C CL .100 ± .010 (2,54 ± 0,25)
.050 ± .005 L .400 ± .015
± 0,25)
(1,27 ± 0,13) TYP. (10,16 ± 0,38)
.300
± .010
(7,62
± 0,25) .100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13)
.340 ± .015 .090
.100 ± .010
(8,64 ± 0,38) ± .010
(2,54 ± 0,25)
.050 ± .005 (2,29
C CL
(1,27 ± 0,13) TYP. ± 0,25) L .100 ± .010
GRAYHILL
.300 (2,54 ± 0,25)

N.C.
± .010
N.O. (7,62
XXXX ± 0,25)
E.I.A. DATE
CODE
CIRCUITRY SPECIFICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION

Rating Criteria *Complete
2 Circuits Per Switch Contact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximum on Part Number Description
Actuator a new switch
N.C. N.C. 39-251 RED Small Red Button, SPDT
SPST N.C. Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac between
39-251 BLK Small Black Button, SPDT
39-261 RED Large Red Button, SPDT
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms
39-261 BLK Large Black Button, SPDT
SPST N.O. minimum
N.O. N.O. Operating Temperature: -40°C to +125°C Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
Materials and Finishes Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Alternate Wiring Actuator
Button: Nylon
N.C. Base and Cover: Polyester, red in color
SPDT Shorting Bar: Phosphor bronze, gold-plated
BREAK BEFORE C over nickel
MAKE
Terminals: Brass, gold-plated over nickel
CONNECT PINS N.O. Spring: Tinned music wire
ON PC BOARD O-Ring: Fluorosilicone
Pushbutton
SERIES 39
SPST, 150 mA
FEATURES
• 1/4" Diameter
• Up to 1,000,000
Cycles of Operation
• PC Mount
SPST–Normally Open, Without Nut

39-405*
Rating at Operations *Complete

Button
Pushbutton Switches

Color
39-405 RED Red
150 mA 1,000,000
39-405 BLK Black
Total Actuating
Action
Travel Force (oz.)
.035 ± .015 +4
Momentary 4
(0,89 ± 0,38) –2
SPST–Normally Open, With Nut

39-401*

Button
Color
39-401 RED Red
150 mA 1,000,000
39-401 BLK Black
Total Actuating
Action
Travel Force (oz.)
.035 ± .015 +4
Momentary 4
(0,89 ± 0,38) –2
SPST–Normally Open, With Overtravel

39-424*
Button
Color
39-424 RED Red
150 mA 100,000
39-424 BLK Black
Total Over Actuating

Action
Travel Travel Force (oz.)
.130 ± .025 .015 (0,38)
Momentary 5±3
(3,30 ± 0,64) Min.
Pushbutton
Right Angle, SPST–Normally Open

39-501*
.175 +.025/ –.020
39-503* .110 (2,79) (4,45 +0,64/ – 0,51) .315 ± .010
± .010 (0,25) DIA. (8,00 ± 0,25)
.300 ± .005
(7,62 ± 0,13)
A = .125 ± .010 A .600 E.I.A.
(3,18 ± 0,25) (15,24) DATE
B REF. CODE C
B = .215 ± .015
(5,46 ± 0,38) LABEL*
.100 (2,54) REF. .089 .075 ± .010

.250 + .010/ –.005 (2,26) (1,91 ± 0,25)
(6,35 + 0,25/ – 0,13) DIA. MIN.
.300 (7,62)
REF.
.050 ± .010 *Label increases
(1,27 ± 0,25) C = .060 ± .005 nominal diameter
(1,52 ± 0,13) to .255 (6,48)
.050 (1,27) .140 ± .015

Pushbutton Switches
REF. (3,56 ± 0,38) Button
.200 ± .005 Color
(5,08 ± 0,13)
39-501 RED Red
39-501 BLK Black
150 mA 1,000,000
39-503 RED Red
.100 .050 (1,27) 39-503 BLK Black
Mounting Footprint .300
(2,54) (7,62)
Total Actuating
Action
Travel Force (oz.)
Momentary .035 ± .015 4 +4

(0,89 ± 0,38) –2
.200 .100 (2,54)
(5,08) HOLES FOR Protective cap (included with 39-503 RED and 39-503 BLK)
.020 (0,51) seals switch during wave soldering.
SQUARE PINS (4)
CIRCUITRY ACCESSORIES ORDERING INFORMATION

Part No. Type & Button Color
SHH1699
30B1012-5 39-401 RED N.O., Red
30B1012-8 39-401 BLK N.O., Black
30B1012-9 39-405 RED N.O., No Nut, Red
SPST N.O. 39-405 BLK N.O., No Nut, Black
See page E-36 for dimensions. 39-424 RED N.O., Overtravel, Red
39-424 BLK N.O., Overtravel, Black
SPECIFICATIONS 39-501 RED N.O., Right Angle, Red
Rating Criteria Materials and Finishes 39-501 BLK N.O., Right Angle, Black
Contact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximum Bushing/Housing: Brass, tin zinc 39-503 RED 39-501 Red & Cap Seal
on a new switch Standoff: (39-501 and 39-503) Brass, tin plated 39-503 BLK 39-501 Blk & Cap Seal
Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac between over nickel
mutually insulated parts Base and Button: Thermoplastic Accessory
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms Shorting Bar: Brass, gold-plated over nickel Part Number Description
minimum plate for 39-501and 39-503; fine silver, gold-
Operating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C plated for others 30B1012-5 Red Accessory Cap
Terminals: Brass, gold-plated over nickel 30B1012-8 White Accessory Cap
Spring: Tinned music wire 30B1012-9 Black Accessory Cap
Mounting Nut: (39-401 and 39-424) Brass, SHH1699 Cap Seal Only, Black
zinc trivalent chromate-plated Accessory cap may be used with part numbers
39-405, 39-401, 39-424, 39-501, 39-503.

Pushbutton
SERIES 39
Miniature Limit
FEATURES
• Adjustable Location Setting
• Plunger Sealed Version
SPST–Normally Open, E.I.A. DATE CODE .136 ± .005 (3,45 ± 0,13) DIA.
With Overtravel 5/16-32 UNEF-2A
THREAD
39-101 A Rating at Rating at
HEX. NUT (2) Operations Part Button
.093 (2,36) THICK XXXX
115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated Number Color
.287 (7,29) .437 (11,10) ACROSS .650 .837 Resistive Resistive Load
MAX. B
FLATS ± .032 (21,26) 1
/2 Amp 1
/4 Amp 500,000 39-101 Nat. Nylon
(16,51 REF.
A = .187 ± .015
± 0,81) Total Over Actuating
(4,75 ± 0,38) Action
B = .450 ± .015 Travel Travel Force (oz.)
Mounting Hole (11,43 ± 0,38) .187 ± .015 .060 (1,52) Min. +3
.068 ± .015 (1,73 ± 0,38) Momentary 5–2
.339 (8,61) Diameter .072 ± .005 (4,75 ± 0,38) from top of bushing
‘D’ shape per above. (1,83 ± 0,13)
Pushbutton Switches
Terminals are not oriented to bushing flat
SPST–Normally Open, SPST–Normally Open, Rating at Rating at Operations Part

115 Vac Button
With Overtravel, Sealed Actuator 220 Vac at Rated
With Extended Overtravel Resistive Resistive Load
Number Color
39-102 39-701 150 mA 75 mA 30,000 39-102 Nat. Nylon
.110 ± .005
39-103 .110 ± .005 (2,79 ± 0,13) DIA.
(2,79 ± 0,13) DIA. 150 mA 75 mA 100,000 39-701 Nat. Nylon
E.I.A. DATE
E.I.A. DATE CODE 1
/2 Amp 1
/4 Amp 30,000 39-103 Nat. Nylon
CODE A
A 5/16-32
5/16-32 UNEF-2A
UNEF-2A XXXX Total Over Actuating
XXXX THREAD .987 Action
THREAD 1.050 .800 (25,07) Travel Travel Force (oz.)
.800 (26,67) B
B ±.032 REF.
±.032 REF. A = .187 ± .015 (20,32 Momentary .250 ± .015 39-102 and 39-103:
A = .250 ± .015 (20,32 (4,75 ± 0,38) ± 0,81) (6,35 ± 0,38) .200 (5,08) Nominal. 6.8 ± 5
(6,35 ± 0,38) ± 0,81) from top of bushing
B = .600 ± .015
B = .600 ± .015 (15,24 ± 0,38)
(15,24 ± 0,38) .187 ± .015 39-701:
Momentary .060 (1,52) Min. 8±4
(4,75 ± 0,38)
.068 ± .015 (1,73 ± 0,38) from top of bushing
.072 ± .005 .068 ± .015 (1,73 ± 0,38) .072 ± .005
(1,83 ± 0,13) (1,83 ± 0,13)
Mounting Nuts per above.
E.I.A. DATE CODE .110 ± .005 (2,79 ± 0,13) DIA.

SPST–Normally Closed, 5/16-32 UNS-2A
Sealed Actuator THREAD
A Rating at Rating at Operations
A = .165 +.035 –.015 XXXX Part Button
39-702 115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated
(4,19 +0,89 –0,38) .775 Number Color
.610 Resistive Resistive Load
B = .410 ± .015 B
± .032 (19,69) 1 1
(10,41 ± 0,38) (15,5 REF. /4 Amp /8 Amp 100,000 39-702 Nat. Nylon
± 0,81)
Mounting Nuts per above. Total Over Actuating
Action
Travel Travel Force (oz.)
.100 (2,54) MAX.
.020 (0,51) REF. .042 ± .010
.100 ± .005 (2,54 ± 0,13) Momentary None 8±4
.040 (1,02) REF. (1,07 ± 0,25)
.060 ± .005 (1,52 ± 0,13)
CIRCUITRY STANDARD OPTIONS

Materials and Finishes Optional plating: gold-plated contacts for dry circuit
Bushing and Mounting Nuts: Brass, tin zinc conditions, contact Grayhill.
Insulation Sleeve: Molded polyester for
39-101, 39-102, 39-103 and 39-701: phenolic
SPST N.O. SPST N.C.
per MIL-M-14 type CFG for 39-702
Base: Thermoset plastic ORDERING INFORMATION
Terminals: Commercial bronze, gold plated
over nickel for 39-101, 39-102, 39-103 and 39- Part
SPECIFICATIONS No. Description
701; silver for 39-702
Rating Criteria Springs: Tinned music wire 39-101 SPST, N.O. With Overtravel
Contact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximum Contacts: Commercial bronze, gold-plated for 39-102 SPST, N.O. With Extended Overtravel
on a new switch 39-101, 39-102, 39-103 and 39-701; fine silver 39-103 SPST, N.O. With Extended Overtravel
Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac between for 39-702 39-701 SPST, N.O. With Overtravel, Sealed
mutually insulated parts Button: Thermoplastic 39-702 SPST, N.C. Sealed
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms O-Ring: (39-701 & 39-702) Silicone
minimum Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
Operating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
Office, an authorized local Distributor or
Grayhill.
Pushbutton
SERIES 39
SPST, 150 mA to 1/2 Amp
FEATURES
• Requires an Absolute Minimum of Space
• Molded-In Terminals in SPST–N.O.
• Solder Lug Terminals
Normally Open–SPST Economy and Standard Version Economy Version

39-1 Operations *Complete
Electrical Button
at Rated Part
39-3 Ratings
Load Number
Color
39-601* At 5 Vdc At 20 Vdc 39-601 RED Red
.110 ± .005 1,000,000
150 mA 20 mA 39-601 BLK Black
(2,79 ± 0,13) DIA.
8-40 UNS-2A Total Actuating Mtg.
A Action
THREAD Travel Force (oz.) Hole
Pushbutton Switches
H B Momentary .035 ± .015 4 +4 11/64"
H = HEX MTG NUT E.I.A. .615 (15,62) (0,89 ± 0,38) -2 (4,37) DIA.
.063 ± .010 (1,59 ± 0,25) C REF.
THICK DATE
.219 ± .010 (5,56 ± 0,25) CODE
D
Standard
ACROSS FLATS LABEL*
.072 ±.005 Operations Complete
Electrical Button
(1.83± 0,13) .250 + .010/ –.005 at Rated Part
.068 ±.005 Ratings Color
(6,35 + 0,25/ – 0,13) Load Number
.036 ±.005 (1,73 ± 0,13) DIAMETER At 115 Vac At 220 Vac 39-1 Red
(0,91 ± 0,13) A = .175 + .025/ –.020 (4,45 + 0,64/ – 0,51) 1 1,000,000
/2 Amp Res. 1/4 Amp Res. 39-3 Black
*Label increases B = .125 ± . 010 (3,18 ± 0,25)
nominal diameter C = .215 ± .015 (5,46 ± 0,38)
Total Actuating Mtg.
to .255 (6,48) D = .100 ± .020 (2,54 ± 0,51) Action
Travel Force (oz.) Hole
.035 ± .015 4 +4 11/64"
Momentary
(0,89 ± 0,38) –2 (4,37) DIA.
Normally Open–SPST with Sealed Bushing and Button

39-351*
.110± .005 DIA.
(2,79 ± 0,13)
#8-40 UNS-2A THREAD Rating at Rating at Operations *Complete
A = .175 +.025/ –.020 A 115 Vac Button
220 Vac at Rated Part
(4,45 +0,64/ – 0,51) HEX MTG. NUT Resistive Color
B = .125 ± .010 O .0625 (1,59) TYP.
B 39-351 RED Red
(3,18 ± 0,25) THICK AND 1
/2 Amp 1
/4 Amp 250,000
C = .250 ±.015 .650 39-351 BLK Black
.218 (5,54) TYP.
(6,35 ± 0,38) (16,51) ACROSS FLATS
D = .100 ± .020 C REF. Total Actuating
O = O RING Action
(1,54 ± 0,51) XXXX Travel Force (oz.)
E.I.A. .068 ± .005 (1,73 ± 0,13) .035 ± .015
D Momentary 16 ± 8
DATE (0,89 ± 0,38)
CODE
.312 ±.005 .036 ± .005 (0,91 ± 0,13)
(7,92 ±0,13) Button is O-Ring
ACROSS sealed internally. .072 ± .005 (1,83 ± 0,13)
FLATS
Normally Open–SPST with Overtravel

.110 .005
39-12 (2,79 0,13) DIA.
8-40 UNS-2A
39-24 THREAD Rating at Rating at Operations Complete
A 115 Vac Button
H 220 Vac at Rated Part
Resistive Color
B
H = HEX MTG NUT E.I.A. 39-12 Red
.063 .010 (1,60 0,25) DATE .755 (19,18) 1
/2 Amp 1
/4 Amp 100,000
REF. 39-24 Black
THICK CODE C
.219 .010 (5,56 0,25) LABEL*
ACROSS FLATS Total Over Actuating Mtg.
D Action
Travel Travel Force (oz.) Hole
.250 + .010/ – .005
(6,35 + 0,25/ – 0,13) 11/64"
.130 ± .025 .015 (0,38)
DIAMETER Momentary 5±3 (4,37)
(3,30 ± 0,64) Min.
A = .175 + .025/ –.020 (4,45 + 0,64/ – 0,51) DIA.
*Label increases B = .125 .010 (3,18 0,25)
nominal diameter C = .355 .015 (9,02 0,38)
to .255 (6,48) D = .100 .020 (2,54 0,51)
Pushbutton
Normally Closed–SPST .105 ± .005

(2,67 ± 0,13) DIA.
39-2
8-40 UNS-2A
THREAD Rating at Rating at Operations
A Part Cap
H 115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated
Number Color
B Resistive Resistive Load
H = HEX MTG NUT E.I.A. .780 (19,81)
1 1
.063 ± .010 (1,60 ± 0,25) DATE REF. /4 Amp /8 Amp 250,000 39-2 Black
THICK CODE C
.219 ± .010 (5,56 ± 0,25) LABEL* Total Actuating Mtg.
ACROSS FLATS Action
D
.042 ± .010 +4 .172
.100 ±.010 .250 +.010/ –.005
Momentary
(1,07 ± 0,25)
4 –2
(4,37) DIA.
(2,54 ± 0,25)
(6,35 +0,25/ – 0,13)
DIAMETER
.060 ± .010 A = .175 ± .025 (4,45 ±0,64)
(1,52 ± 0,25) *Label increases B = .125 ± . 010 (3,18 ± 0,25)
nominal diameter C = .390 ± .010 (9,91 ± 0,25)
to .255 (6,48) D = .100 (2,54) MAX.
Normally Closed–SPST with Sealed Bushing and Button

39-352*
Pushbutton Switches
.110± .005 DIA.

(2,79 ± 0,13) #8-40 UNS-2A THREAD
A
A = .165 +.035/ –.015 H
(4,19 +0,89/ – 0,38) Rating at Rating at Operations *Complete
B 115 Vac Button
B = .125 ± .007 O-RING 220 Vac at Rated Part
(3,18 ± 0,18) Resistive Color
.819 Resistive Load Number
C = .429 ±.015 (20,80) H = HEX MTG. NUT 39-352 RED Red
1 1
(10,90 ± 0,38) REF. E.I.A. .0625 (1,59) TYP.
/4 Amp /8 Amp 100,000
39-352 BLK Black
D = .100 (2,54) MAX. C DATE
THICK AND
E = 10˚ TO 40˚ CODE
.218 (5,56) TYP. Actuating
APPROX. LABEL* Action Total
ACROSS FLATS Force (oz.)
Travel
D .100 (2,54) MAX. .042 ± .010
Momentary 8±4
E (0,17 ± 0,25)
.250 +.010/ –.005 .100 ± .010 (2,54 ± 0,25)
.312 ±.005 (6,35 + 0,25/ – 0,13)
.060 ± .010 (1,52 ± 0,25)
(7,92 ±0,13)
ACROSS Button is o-ring
FLATS sealed internally. *Label increases nominal diameter to .255 (6,48)
CIRCUITRY
Mounting Nut: Brass, tin zinc
Housing: Aluminum, clear anodized for
39-351 and 39-352; Brass, zinc trivalent ORDERING INFORMATION
SPST N.O. chromate-plated for others Part Number Description
SPST–N.O. WITH OVERTRAVEL
Button: Thermoset plastic 39-1 N.O., Red Button
Base: Thermoset plastic 39-2 N.C., Black Button
Shorting Bar: Fine silver for 39-2 and 39-352; 39-3 N.O., Black Button
brass, gold-plated over nickel plate for 39-601; 39-12 N.O., Overtravel Red Button
fine silver, gold-plated for others 39-24 N.O., Overtravel Black Button
Terminals: Fine silver for 39-2 and 39-352; 39-351 RED N.O., Sealed, Red Button
SPST N.C. commercial bronze with gold-plated fine silver 39-351 BLK N.O., Sealed, Black Button
contact surface for others 39-352 RED N.C., Sealed, Red Button
Spring: Tinned music wire 39-352 BLK N.C., Sealed, Black Button
O-Rings: (39-351 and 39-352) Internal ring is 39-601 RED N.O., Economy, Red Button
SPECIFICATIONS silicone; external ring is buna ‘N’ 39-601 BLK N.O., Economy, Black Button
Rating Criteria
Contact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximum Accessory cap may be used with all switches
on a new switch shown except 39-2.
Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac between
ACCESSORY
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms Button Cap Accessory
minimum Part No. 30B1012 Part Number Description
Operating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C For use with part numbers 30B1012-5 Red Button Cap
Mounting Torque: 2 inch-pounds 39-351 and 39-352. 30B1012-9 Black Button Cap
(Fasten to button with 30B1012-8 White Button Cap
Cyanoacrylate Adhesive)
See page E-XXfor dimensions. Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
Pushbutton
SERIES 30
SPST, 1 and 5 Amp
FEATURES
• Reliable
• Economical
• Large Selection
• UL Recognized
• CSA Certified
• Sealed Bushing and
Pushbutton Option
Normally Open–SPST Standard, Economy and UL Recognized
Pushbutton Switches
30-1
30-1UL
.162 ± .005
30-3 (4,11 ± 0,13)
30-3UL
30-601* A
1/4-32 UNEF-2A
B THREAD
HEX MOUNTING NUT
.992
.375 (9,53) ACROSS FLATS
(25,20) C .109 (2,77) THICK Standard
REF.
LABEL* Rating at Rating at Operations Part Button
A = .150 ± .015 115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated
D (3,81 ± 0,38) Number Color
Resistive Resistive Load
.186 B = .250 ± .010
(6,35 ± 0,25) 30-1 Red
(4,72) 1 Amp 0.5 Amp 1,000,000
CL CL C = .370 ±.015 30-3 Black
REF.
*PART NUMBER (9,40 ± 0,38)
.375 D = .222 ± .020 Total Actuating Mtg.
AND E.I.A. DATE Action
CODE LABEL ± .005 (5,64 ± 0,51) Travel Force (oz.) Hole
(9,53 ± 0,13) .062 ± .010 17/64"
Momentary 10 ± 4
(1,57 ± 0,25) (6,75)
Economy Version UL Recognized

Operations *Complete Rating at Rating at Operations
Electrical Button Part Button
at Rated Part 120 Vac 220 Vac at Rated
Ratings Color Number Color
Load Number Resistive Resistive Load
At 5 Vdc At 20 Vdc 30-601 RED Red 30-1UL Red
1,000,000 5 Amp 2.5 Amp 6,000
150 mA 20 mA 30-601 BLK Black 30-3UL Black
Total Actuating Mtg. Total Actuating Mtg.

Action Action
Travel Force (oz.) Hole Travel Force (oz.) Hole
.062 ± .010 17/64" .062 ± .010 17/64"
Momentary 10 ± 4 Momentary 10 ± 4
(1,57 ± 0,25) (6,75) (1,57 ± 0,25) (6,75)
Pushbutton
Normally Closed–SPST and UL Recognized Normally Closed–SPST

30-2 Rating at Rating at Operations Part Button
115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated
30-2UL Resistive Resistive
Number Color
Load
30-6
.162 ± .005 30-2 Black
30-6UL (4,11 ± 0,13) DIA. 1 Amp 1
/2 Amp 1,000,000
30-6 Red
A
1/4-32 UNEF-2A Total Actuating Mtg.
THREAD Action
B
HEX MOUNTING NUT .065 + .010/ - .015 17/64"
Momentary 8±4
.375 (9,53) ACROSS FLATS (1,65 + 0,25/ - 0,38) (6,75)
1.005
.109 (2,77) THICK C (25,53)
REF. UL Recognized
A = .150 ± .015
(3,81 ± 0,38) LABEL* D Rating at Rating at Operations
B = .250 ± .010 Part Button
120 Vac 220 Vac at Rated
(6,35 ± 0,25) Number Color
Resistive Resistive Load
C = .375 ±.015 .230 REF.
(9,53 ± 0,38) (5.8) *PART NUMBER 30-2UL Black
D = .230± .020 5 Amp —– 6,000
AND E.I.A. DATE 30-6UL Red
(5,84 ± 0,51) .375 CODE LABEL
± .005 Total Actuating Mtg.
(9,53 ± 0,13) Action
.065 + .010/ - .015 17/64"
Pushbutton Switches
Momentary (1,65 + 0,25/ - 0,38) 8±4 (6,75)
Normally Open–SPST With .375± .010 DIA.

Sealed Bushing and Button (9,53
SNAP ON CAP
± 0,25)
30-251*
E
A = .209 ± .015 F A
(5,31 ± 0,38) Rating at Rating at Operations *Complete
Button
B = .250 ± .010 T O 115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated Part
B Color
(6,35 ± 0,25) HEX MTG NUT Resistive Resistive Load Number
C = .410 ±.015 .312 (7,92)
1.091
(10,41 ± 0,38) (27,71) 1 30-251 RED Red
ACROSS FLATS 1 Amp /2 Amp 250,000
D = .222 ± .020 C REF. 30-251 BLK Black
.062 (1,57)
(5,64 ± 0,51) THICK
E = .187 ±.010 LABEL* Total Actuating Mtg.
Action
(4,75 ± 0,25) D Travel Force (oz.) Hole
F = .100 ± .010
.062 ± .020 17/64"
(2.54 ± 0,25) .015 (0,38) Momentary 30 ± 8
T = 1/4-32 (1,57 ± 0,51) (6,75)
.186 REF. UNEF-2A
(4.7) THREAD
*PART NUMBER O = O RING
AND E.I.A. DATE .437
CODE LABEL ± .010
(11,10 ± 0,25)
ACROSS FLATS OF HEX
.505 (12,83) REF.
ACROSS CORNERS
Normally Closed–SPST With

Sealed Bushing and Button .375 ± .010 DIA.
(9,53
30-252* ± 0,25)
SNAP ON CAP
A = .209 ± .015
(5,31 ± 0,38)
E Rating at Rating at Operations *Complete
B = .250 ± .010 F Button
A 115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated Part
(6,35 ± 0,25) Color
C = .415 ± .015 Resistive Resistive Load Number
T O
(10,54 ± 0,38) B
HEX MTG NUT 1 Amp 1
/2 Amp 250,000 30-252 RED Red
D = .230 ± .015 .312 (7,92) 1.104
30-252 BLK Black
(5,84 ± 0,38) ACROSS FLATS (28,04)
E = .187 ±.010 C REF.
.062 (1,57) Total Actuating Mtg.
(4,75 ± 0,25) THICK Action
F = .100 ± .010 Travel Force (oz.) Hole
(2.54 ± 0,25) LABEL* D .065 ± .010 17/64"
Momentary 12 ± 4
.230 REF. (1,65 ± 0,25) (6,75)
(5.8) T = 1/4-32
.437 UNEF-2A
*PART NUMBER ± .010 THREAD
AND E.I.A. DATE (11,10 ± 0,25) O = O RING
CODE LABEL ACROSS FLATS OF HEX.
.505 (12,83) REF.
ACROSS CORNERS
Pushbutton
Normally Open–SPST With

Overtravel
30-15
30-37 .162 ± .005
(4,11 ± 0,13)
A 1/4-32 UNEF-2A Rating at Rating at Operations Part Button

THREAD 115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated Number Color
1.077 B Resistive Resistive Load
(27,36) 1 30-15 Red
REF. HEX NUT 1 Amp /2 Amp 500,000
30-37 Black
(SEE H)
C
Total Actuating Mtg.
A = .150 ± .015 Action
(3,81 ± 0,38) Travel Force (oz.) Hole
LABEL*
B = .250 ± .010 Momentary .125 + .020/ - .010 17/64"
D (6,35 ± 0,25) 8±4
.020" Overtravel (3,18 + 0,51/ - 0,25) (6,75)
C = .455 ±.015
.186 REF.
(11,56 ± 0,38)
H = HEX NUT (4.7)
D = .222 ± .020
3/8 ± .010 (9,53 ± 0,25) (5,64 ± 0,51)
ACROSS FLATS
3/32 ± .010 (2,38 ± 0,25) .375 *PART NUMBER
THICK ± .005 AND E.I.A. DATE
Pushbutton Switches
(9,53 ± 0,13) CODE LABEL
Normally Open–SPST With .390 ± .010

Positive Feel (9,91 ± 0,25)
30-17* 15/32-32
A UNS-2A
E THREAD
Rating at Rating at Operations *Complete
1.35 HEX NUT (2) Button
115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated Part
(34,3) (SEE H) Color
B Resistive Resistive Load Number
REF.
A = .392 ± .015 1 30-17 RED Red
(9,96 ± 0,38) 1 Amp /2 Amp 200,000
30-17 BLK Black
C B = .421 ± .015
(10,69 ± 0,38)
LABEL* Total Over Actuating Mtg.
C = .315 ±.015 Action
D (8,00 ± 0,38) Travel Travel Force (oz.) Hole
.186 REF D = .222 ± .020 Momentary .156 ± .015 .046 (1,17) 31/64"
(4.7) 18 ± 4
(5,64 ± 0,51) Pos. Feel (3,96 ± 0,38) Min. (12,30)
H = HEX NUT E = .205 (5,21)
9/16 ± .010 (14,29 ± 0,25) REF.
ACROSS FLATS
3/32 ± .010 (2,38 ± 0,25) THICK *PART NUMBER
AND E.I.A. DATE
CODE LABEL
Normally Open–SPST With

Push-Pull
.187 ± .005
30-16* (4,75 ± 0,13)
15/32-32
A UNS-2A Rating at Rating at Operations *Complete
THREAD Button
115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated Part Color
1.45 HEX NUT (2) Resistive Resistive Load Number
(36,8) (SEE H)
B 30-16 RED Red
REF. 1 Amp 1
/2 Amp 100,000
A = .493 ± .015 30-16 BLK Black
(12,52 ± 0,38)
C B = .421 ± .015 Total Actuating Mtg.
(10,69 ± 0,38) Action
LABEL* Travel Force (oz.) Hole
C = .315 ±.015
D .145 ± .015 31/64"
(8,00 ± 0,38) Push-to-Make 56 ± 16
.186 REF D = .222 ± .020 (3,68 ± 0,38) (12,30)
(4.7) (5,64 ± 0,51)
H = HEX NUT
9/16 ± .010 (14,29 ± 0,25) *PART NUMBER
ACROSS FLATS AND E.I.A. DATE
3/32 ± .010 (2,38 ± 0,25) THICK CODE LABEL
Pushbutton
Normally Closed–SPST With

1.87 ± .005
Push-Pull (4,75 ± 0,13)
30-32 15/32-32
A UNS-2A
THREAD Rating at Rating at Operations Part Button
115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated Number
1.36 Color
HEX NUT (2) Resistive Resistive Load
(34.5) (SEE H)
B
REF. 1 30-32 RED Red
A = .493 ± .015 1 Amp /2 Amp 100,000
(12,52 ± 0,38)
30-32 BLK Black
C B = .421 ± .015
(10,69 ± 0,38) Total Actuating Mtg.
LABEL* Action
C = .225 ±.015 Travel Force (oz.) Hole
D
(5,72 ± 0,38)
.145 ± .015 31/64"
.230 REF D = .222 ± .020 Pull-to-Make 56 ± 16
(5,64 ± 0,51)
(3,68 ± 0,38) (12,30)
(5.8)
H = HEX NUT *PART NUMBER
9/16 ± .010 (14,29 ± 0,25) AND E.I.A. DATE
ACROSS FLATS CODE LABEL
3/32 ± .010 (2,38 ± 0,25) THICK
Pushbutton Switches
Rating Criteria Base: Thermoset plastic

For UL recognized switches, see individual Button: Polyester for 30-16 and 30-32; Phenolic
switch chart. File number is E35289. for 30-17, 30-1UL, 30-2, 30-2UL, 30-3UL, 30-6
Contact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximum and 30-6UL; Polycarbonate for all others.
on a new switch Shorting Bar: Brass with gold over nickel plating
for 30-601; brass with fine silver contact surface SPST N.O. SPST N.C.
Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac between
mutually insulated parts for all others.
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms Terminals: Brass with gold over nickel plating
minimum for 30-601; commercial brass with fine silver
Operating Temperature: -40° to +85°C contact surface and silver-plated for all others.
Mounting Torque: 2 inch-pounds Spring: Tinned music wire
Button Cap: Nylon for 30-17; Polyethylene for
Switch Materials and Finishes 30-251 and 30-252.
Mounting Nut and Cover Bushing: Brass, tin Detent Balls: Carbon steel, nickel-plated
zinc Terminal Type: Solder lug Part Description
O-Ring Seal: (30-251, 30-252) Nitrile per Number and Button Color
MIL-P-5516
ACCESSORIES 30-1* N.O., Standard, Red
30-2* N.C., Standard, Black
30-3* N.O., Black
30-6* N.C., Red
30-15 N.O., Overtravel, Red
30-16 BLK Push to Make, Black
Accessory Cap
30-16 RED Push to Make, Red
30B1012-5 30C1023-1 30-17 BLK N.O., Positive Feel, Black
30B1012-8
07C1040-1 30-17 RED N.O., Positive Feel, Red
30B1012-9
Button Guard 30-32 BLK Pull to Make, Black
Decorative Mounting Nuts
10C1015-1 30-32 RED Pull to Make, Red
See page E-36 for dimensions. 30-37 BLK N.O., Overtravel, Black
30-251 BLK N.O., Sealed, Black
Decorative Mounting Nuts Button Cap and Guard 30-251 RED N.O., Sealed, Red
Part Number 30C1023-1 is made for switches The button cap is available in 3 colors: part 30-252 BLK N.C., Sealed, Black
with 1/4" (6,35) inch diameter bushings. It may number 30B1012-5 is red; part number 30-252 RED N.C., Sealed, Red
be used with the following Series 30 switches: 30B1012-8 is white; and part number 30B1012- 30-601 BLK N.O., Economy, Black
30-1, 30-1 UL, 30-2, 30-2 UL, 30-3, 30-6, 30-15, 9 is black. It may be fastened to the button with 30-601 RED N.O., Economy, Red
30-37, 30-251 BLK, 30-251 RED, 30-252 BLK, adhesive. It may be used with the following
30-252 RED, 30-601 BLK and 30-601 RED. Series 30 switches: 30-1, 30-1UL, 30-2, 30- Accessory
2UL, 30-3, 30-3UL, 30-15, 30-37, 30-601 BLK, Part Number Description
Part Number 07C1040-1 is made for switches and 30-601 RED.
30B1012-5 Accessory Cap, Red
with 15/32" (11,91) inch diameter bushings. It
30B1012-8 Accessory Cap, White
may be used with the following Series 30 switches: The button guard, part number 10C1015-1 is
30B1012-9 Accessory Cap, Black
30-16 BLK, 30-16 RED, 30-17 BLK, 30-17 RED, made to be used with 15/32" (11,91) inch
30C1023-1 Accessory Nut
30-32 BLK and 30-32 RED. diameter switches to prevent unintentional
07C1040-1 Accessory Nut
For the dimensions, materials and finishes of actuation. It may be used with the following
10C1015-1 Button Guard
these decorative mounting nuts, see page Series 30 switches: 30-16 BLK, 30-16 RED,
E-36. 30-17 BLK, 30-17 RED, 30-32 BLK, and 30-32 *Add “UL” suffix to part number for UL recognized
RED switches.
STANDARD OPTIONS For the dimensions, materials and finishes of Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
Decorative mountings, see pages E-24 to E-26. the button cap and guard, see page E-36. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
Pushbutton
SERIES 04
4PST
FEATURES
• Joy Stick Action
• Position Locator On CRT Screens
• Moves Cursor On Menu Display
Basic Switch Bat Handle

04A 04A-B01 .375 ± .005
Pushbutton Switches
(9,53 ± 0,13) DIA.
.187 ±.010
.188 ± .005 (4,75 ± 0,25)
(4,78 ± 0,13)
DIAMETER
.469 ± .010
.460 ± .010 (11,91 ± 0,25)
(11,68 ± 0,25)
.850 (21,59) 1.219 ± .020
SQUARE (30,96 ± 0,51)
.550 ± .010
(13,97 ± 0,25)
.125 (3,18) RADIUS

4 PLACES E.I.A.
DATE .020 ± .010 Keycap
.150 ± .010 (0,51 ± 0,25)
CODE
(3,81 ± 0,25) 04A-K01 .725 ± .010
.040 (1,02) DIA. (18,42 ± 0,25) SQUARE
5 PLACES
.487 ± .010
.046 +.000/ –.001 (12,37) ± 0,25)
Recommended Interface (1,17 + 90/ – 0,03)
For customers who prefer to purchase or design
separate keycaps, Grayhill recommends the 1.315 ± .020
dimensions shown here to acquire parts which will .195 ± .005 (4,95 ± 0.13) (33,40 ± 0,51)
mate well with the basic switch, part number 04A.
Rated: Make and break 250 mA at 115 Vac or Base, Cover and Switch Actuator: Polyester .250 ± .010
Footprint (6,35 ± 0,25)
125 mA at 220 Vac resistive load for 500,000 (Black)
operations Terminals: Brass, gold-plated over nickel
Contact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximum Shorting Bar: Phosphor bronze, gold-plated
.500 (12,7) TYP.
on a new switch over nickel
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms at 100 Spring: Tinned music wire
Vdc Keycap: ABS or equivalent COMMON
Dielectric Strength: 500 Vac RMS minimum Bat-Handle: ABS
Operating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C
Description Part No.
Basic Switch 04A
Switch with Arrowhead Keycap 04A-K01
Switch with Bat-Handle 04A-B01*
*Shipped with bat handle permanently attached.

Pushbutton
SERIES 30 and 46
Snap-in Panel Mount
FEATURES
• Sleek Black Matte Bezel
• Convenient Snap-In Front Mount
• Choice of 6 Button Colors
• SPST, SPDT or DPDT Circuitry
• Alternate Action, Positive Feel
and Overtravel Versions
• Printed Button Option
.485 (12,32) SQ. DIM. A SEE CHART

± .015 (0,38)
.800 .063 (1,60)
(20,32)
Pushbutton Switches
SQ.
Hex nut for

30-017-A IS .527 (13,39)
DIM. B For bottom views and
9/16" (14,29)
.600 (15,24) SEE CHART terminal markings, see
across flats
± .040 (1,02) Series 30 and 46 switches
and .094 (2,38)
thick. without bezels.
LABEL*
.180 (4,57)
TYP.
.738 (18,75)
*PART NUMBER
1.016 (25,81) REF. AND E.I.A. DATE
CODE LABEL
Tolerances are ± .010 (0,25) unless otherwise specified.
CIRCUITRY
N.C. N.O.
Switches have momentary action unless
otherwise indicated in the chart below. C1
N.C.
N.O. C.
N.C. N.O.
N.O.
C. N.C. N.C.
C2 N.C.
N.O. C.
SPDT - BBM SPDT MBB C.
N.O.
DPDT BBM DPDT MBB
ADDITIONAL DIMENSIONS AND PART NUMBERS

Dim. A: Dim. B:
Circuitry and Button Height Behind Panel Total Actuating Partial
Features (± .015) Length (± .040) Travel Force Part No.*
Butt Contact Switches - Series 30

SPST-N.O. .205 (5,21) 1.119 (28,42) .062 ± .010 (1,57 ± 0,25) 10 ± 4 oz. 30-001-A-*
SPST-N.O., Overtravel .205 (5,21) 1.204 (30,58) .125 ± .020 (3,18 ± 0,51) 8 ± 4 oz. 30-015-A-*
SPST-N.O., Overtravel & Positive Feel Adjustable** Adjustable** .156 ± .015 (3,96 ± 0,38) 18 ± 4 oz. 30-017-A-*
SPST-N.O., Economical .205 (5,21) 1.119 (28,42) .062 ± .010 (1,57 ± 0,25) 10 ± 4 oz. 30-601-A-*
SPST-N.C. .205 (5,21) 1.132 (28,75) .065 ± .015 (1,65 ± 0,38) 8 ± 4 oz. 30-002-A-*
Wiping Contact Switches - Series 46
SPDT, BBM .205 (5,21) 1.417 (35,99) .180 (4,57) min. 1.1 ± .25 lbs. 46-102-A-*
SPDT, MBB .205 (5,21) 1.417 (35,99) .180 (4,57) min. 1.1 ± .25 lbs. 46-111-A-*
SPDT, BBM, Alternate Action .293 (7,44) 1.448 (36,78) .180 (4,57) min. 1.5 ± .25 lbs. 46-502-A-*
DPDT, BBM .205 (5,21) 1.448 (36,78) .180 (4,57) min. 2.2 ± .5 lbs. 46-200-A-*
DPDT, MBB .205 (5,21) 1.448 (36,78) .180 (4,57) min. 2.2 ± .5 lbs. 46-201-A-*
DPDT, BBM, Alternate Action .293 (7,44) 1.448 (36,78) .180 (4,57) min. 1.8 ± .5 lbs. 46-402-A-*
*Partial part number, complete part number by adding a dash for **Adjustable from Dim. A .170 (4,32) minimum, Dim. B 1.285 (32,64)
button color: white -01; red -03; green -04; blue -05; yellow -06 maximum to Dim. A .290 (7,37) maximum, Dim. B 1.165 (29,59)
or black -07, see Ordering Information. minimum with hex nut below bezel.
Pushbutton Grayhill, Inc. • 561 Hillgrove Avenue • LaGrange, Illinois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhill.com
48
SERIES 30
Snap-in Panel Mounting
FEATURES
• Convenient Snap-in Panel
Mounting
• Choice of 6 Button Colors
• SPST (Momentary Contact)
• Gold Plated Contacts
• Sealed
• Butt Contact System
Pushbutton Switches
Ø.690
.240
.160
Ø.596 / .602
YYWW GH
.540
.200
RECOMMENDED PANEL CUT-OUT
SCALE: 1 TO 1 SCALE 2.000
PANEL THICKNESS WITH "O" RING: .098-.106
PANEL THICKNESS WITHOUT "O" RING: .140-.144
(Unless otherwise noted, standard tolerances are +/- .020)
MATERIAL RATINGS
• Button, Housing, Base and Plunger: Nylon, 45% • Cycles: 500,000 Actuations
Glass-filled • Operating Temperature: -40o C to +80o C
• Terminal: Brass, gold-plated over nickel • Shock: 100 G’s/ 6 Milliseconds
• Shorting Bar: Brass, gold-plated over nickel • Rating at 24 VDC: 150 Milliamps
• Internal Seal: Silicon Rubber • Voltage Breakdown: 1000 Vac between mutually
• O-ring Seal: Silicon insulated parts
• Spring: Tinned music wire • Contact Resistance: 25mý max on new switch
• Travel: .090 Nominal • Insulation: 1,000 megohms minimum
• Travel Before Make: .035 Nominal
ORDERING INFORMATION CIRCUITRY

30-100 Black
30-101 Red
30-102 Green
30-103 Yellow
30-104 Orange
30-105 White
SPST N.O.
SPST N.O.
Pushbutton
49
MOUNTING
Easy Snap-In Mounting
PANEL CUTOUT
Recommended Panel Cut
Switch will fit panels .049" (1,24) to .125" (3,18)
thick. Recommended panel thickness is 18
gauge.
.005 (0,13)
MAXIMUM RADIUS
.750"
Just snap into Plastic wings lock (19,05)
pre-cut panel hole. switch in place. SQUARE
SPECIFICATIONS
Pushbutton Switches
Life Limiting Criteria–Series 30 & 46 Materials and Finishes–Series 30 Materials and Finishes–Series 46
Contact Resistance: Less than 25 milliohms Bezel: Nylon Bezel: Nylon
on a new switch Button Cap: ABS plastic Button Cap: ABS plastic
Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac between Switch Bushing: Brass, tin zinc Switch Bushing: Brass, zinc trivalent
mutually insulated parts Base: Thermoset plastic chromate-plated.
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms Spring: Tinned music wire Base: Thermoset plastic
minimum Plunger: Polycarbonate Spring: Tinned music wire
Shorting Bar: Plunger: 46-402/502 Nickel-plated brass
Ratings–Series 30 30-601 Brass, gold-plated over nickel All Others Polycarbonate
Current Rating: All Others Brass with fine silver contact area Shorting Bar: Phosphor bronze, silver-plated
30-601 150 mA, 5 Vdc resistive and Base Contacts: Base Contacts: Phosphor bronze with silver
20 mA, 20 Vdc resistive 30-601 Brass, gold-plated over nickel contact area
All others 1 A, 115 Vac resistive, or 0.5 A, 30-002 Brass with fine silver contact area Terminals: Phosphor bronze,tin/silver plating
220 Vac resistive All Others Bronze with fine silver contact area Covers (46-200/201): Brass, zinc trivalent
Life Expectancy: Terminals: chromate-plated
30-015 500,000 operations 30-002 Brass, silver-plated
30-017 200,000 operations 30-601 Bronze, gold-plated over nickel
All others 1,000,000 operations All Others Bronze, silver-plated
Nut: Provided only on 30-017; allows button
Ratings–Series 46 height adjustment. Brass, zinc trivalent
Current Rating: 250 mA, 115 Vac resistive chromate-plated.
or 125 mA, 220 Vac resistive
Life Expectancy: 250,000 operations
STANDARD OPTIONS LEGENDING OPTION ORDERING INFORMATION

Epoxy-sealed terminals and wire leads, see Contact Grayhill
page E-35. A button legend can be printed in epoxy ink Use the partial part number you have
which bonds to the surface of the button cap. selected from the Dimensions and Part
Any type style or design which can be Number chart, and add the button color
photographed can be used to produce the suffix. Example:
legend.
Color: 01, 03, 04,
There is a per-button printing charge. A nominal 05, 06, 07
set up charge per legend applies to orders of 1 46-200-A-03
to 99 pieces. Non-standard legends are subject
to one time artwork and tooling charges. Consult 01 = White 03 = Red 04 = Green
Grayhill for help with actual legend. 05 = Blue 06 = Yellow 07 = Black
Pushbutton
SERIES 30 and 46
Decorator Line
FEATURES
• Attractive Front Panel Bezels (6 choices)
• Space-Saving: Only 5/8" Diameter
(SPST & SPDT) and 3/4" Diameter (DPDT)
Round Bezels
• SPST with Option of Positive Feel
• SPDT, DPDT with Momentary Contact or
Alternate Action
• Sturdy Metal Sleeve or Bushing and Nut
Provide Secure Mounting
• UL Recognized Version

SPST–Normally Open SPDT–Break Before Make DPDT–Break Before Make
30-05-01-502-* 46-05-05-502-* 46-05-08-502-* (UL)**
B
Pushbutton Switches
30-05-04-502-* 46-05-07-502-* B = .375 ± .010 46-05-09-502-* B
C (9,53 ± 0,25) B = .375 ± .010
B DIA. C (9,35 ± 0,25)
B = .375 ± .010 C = .625 ± .005 DIA.
D
C (9,53 ± 0,25) (15,88 ± 0,13) D C = .750 ± .005
DIA. E DIA. (19,05 ± 0,13)
C = .625 ± .005 E DIA.
D D = .255 ± .032
(15,88 ± 0,13) F (6,48 ± 0,81) D = .255 ± .032
F
E DIA. E = .093 ± .010 (6,48 ± 0,81)
D = .255 ± .032 (2,36 ± 0,25) F = SEE CHART
(6,48 ± 0,81) DIM A ± .015 (0,38)
F ± .015 F = .355 ± .015 DIM A
DIM A E = .093 ± .010 E = .093 ± .010
(0,38) (9,02 ± 0,38) ± .015
± .020 (2,36 ± 0,25) (2,36 ± 0,25)
(SEE CHART) G = .150 ± .010 (0,38)
(0,51) F = .355 ± .015 G = .150 ± .010
(3,81 ± 0,25) (SEE CHART)
(SEE CHART) (9,02 ± 0,38) (3,81 ± 0,25)
G = .220 ± .025 1/2-32 UN-2A
LABEL* LABEL* 5/8-32 UN-2A
(5,59 ± 0,64) THREAD
G LABEL* THREAD
G INSULATING INSULATING
.186 1/2-32 UN-2A BARRIER G
(4,72) THREAD BARRIER
CL CL REF. .187 ± .015
(4,75 ± 0,38) .187 ± .015
.100 ± .005 (4,75 ± 0,38)
.430 ± .005
NO
NC
(2,54 ± 0,13) .430 ± .005

(10,92 ± 0,13) .555 ± .005
NC
(10,92 ± 0,13)
C
NO
ACROSS FLATS (14,10 ± 0,13)
C
*PART NUMBER ACROSS FLATS *PART NUMBER C
NO
NC
AND E.I.A. DATE AND E.I.A. DATE *PART NUMBER ACROSS FLATS
CODE LABEL CODE LABEL AND E.I.A. DATE
CODE LABEL
Terminals are marked on switch. Terminals are marked on switch.
Partial Dim. Partial Dim. Partial Dim. Dim.
Feature Part No. A Feature Part No. A Feature Part No. A F
Momentary 30-05-01-502-* .710 (18,03) Momentary 46-05-05-502-* .992 (25,20) Momentary 46-05-08-502-* 1.001 (25,43) .314 (7,98)
Pos. Feel 30-05-04-502-* .910 (23,11) Alt. Action 46-05-07-502-* 1.278 (32,46) Alt. Action 46-05-09-502-* 1.130 (28,70) .355 (9,02)
CIRCUITRY
N.C.
C1
N.C.
N.O.
C.
N.C.
N.O. C2
SPST N.O. SPDT - BBM
N.O.
DPDT BBM
RECOMMENDED PANEL CUTOUT AND MOUNTING HARDWARE

SPST AND SPDT VERSION DPDT VERSION Mounting Hardware
Note: All switches fit panels For 46-05-08-502 & 46-05-09-502:
.440 (11,17) MIN. .565 (14,35) MIN. up to .250 (6,35) thick, except
ACROSS FLATS ACROSS FLATS 46-05-08-502 which fits One internal tooth lockwasher
panels up to .187 (4,75) thick. One knurled ring nut .765 ± .010 (19,43 ± 0,25) Dia.
Front and back panel access .094 ± .010 (2,39 ± 0,25) Thk.
required for installation.
For SPST & SPDT switches
One internal tooth lockwasher
.516 (13,10) .641 (16,28) One knurled ring nut .640 ± .010 (16,26 ± 0,25) Dia.
MIN. DIA. MIN. DIA.
.094 ± .010 (2,39 ± 0,25) Thk.
*Partial part number; complete part number by adding a dash for button color: white -01; red -03;
green -04; blue -05; yellow -06 or black -07, see Ordering Information.
** Contact Grayhill for part number.
Pushbutton
SERIES 30 and 46
Decorator Line
FEATURES
• Attractive Front Panel Bezels (6
choices)
• Space-Saving: Only 11/16" Square
• SPST with Option of Positive Feel
• SPDT, DPDT with Momentary
Contact or Alternate Action
• Sturdy Metal Sleeve or Bushing and
Nut Provide Secure Mounting
SPST–Normally Open SPDT–Break Before Make DPDT–Break Before Make

Pushbutton Switches
30-01-01-500-* 46-01-05-500-* 46-01-08-500-*

30-01-04-500-* 46-01-07-500-* 46-01-09-500-*
.281 ± .032
.255 ± .032 (7,14 ± 0,81)
.255 ± .032
(6,48 ± 0,81) .093 ± .010
(6,48 ± 0,81)
.093 ± .005 (2,36 ± 0,25)
.093 ± .005
(2,36 ± 0,13) (2,36 ± 0,13)
.590 ± .003 .590 ± .003 .605 (15,37)

(14.99 ± 0,08) (14.99 ± 0,08) WILL FIT
WILL FIT PANEL 1.194 SQUARE MAX.
SQUARE SQUARE ± .031
PANEL .020 (0,51)
DIM. A .020 (0,51) DIM. A MIN. TO (30,33
± .015 (0,38) ± 0,79) .187 ± .015
± .015 (0,38) MIN. TO .125 (3,18)
SEE CHART (4,75 ± 0,38)
SEE CHART .125 (3,18) MAX.
MAX. 1/2-32 UN-2A INSULATING BARRIER
THREAD
.220 ± .025 LABEL* 1/2-32 UN-2A
(5,59 ± 0,64) THREAD LABEL*
.150 ± .010 WILL FIT PANEL

.187 ± .015 .150 .010 (0,25) MIN.
*PART NUMBER (3,81 ± 0,25)
AND E.I.A. DATE .100 ± .005 (4,75 ±, 0,38) ± .010 TO .218 (5,54) MAX.
*PART NUMBER NO
CODE LABEL (2,54 ± 0,13 ) C INSULATING (3,81
AND E.I.A. DATE NC ± 0,25) E.I.A. DATE
CODE LABEL BARRIER
CODE LABEL
MOUNTING SLEEVE
Terminals are
marked on switch.
Terminals are marked on switch.
Partial Dim. Partial Dim. Partial
C
Feature Part No. Feature Part No. A NO Feature Part No.

A NC
Momentary 30-01-01-500-* .880 (22,35) Momentary 46-01-05-500-* 1.174 (29,82) NC Momentary 46-01-08-500-*
Pos. Feel 30-01-04-500-* 1.037 (26,34) Alt. Action 46-01-07-500-* 1.264 (32,11) NO Alt. Action 46-01-09-500-*
C
CIRCUITRY
N.C.
C1
N.C.
N.O.
C.
N.C.
N.O. C2
SPST N.O. SPDT - BBM
N.O.
DPDT BBM
FRONT VIEWS AND MOUNTING

.485 ± .010 Mounting Hardware
RECOMMENDED PANEL CUTOUT
(12,32 ± 0,25) For 46-01-08-500 & 46-01-09-500
FOR SQUARE BEZEL SWITCHES
.687
(See drawing above–mounting hardware shipped
.610 ± .004
(17,45) .610 ± .004 loose.)
(15,49 ± 0,02)
MAX. (15,49 ± 0,02) Sq.
.031 (0,79) Wide Slot For SPST & SPDT switches
MAX. RADIUS
SINGLE STACKED One internal tooth lockwasher
One knurled ring nut .640 ± .010 (16,26 ± 0,25) DIA.
Note: All switches fit panels up to .250 (6,35) thick.
Front and back panel access required for installation. .094 ± .010 (2,39 ± 0,25) Thk.
*Partial part number; complete part number by adding a dash for button color: white -01; red -03;
green -04; blue -05; yellow -06 or black -07, see Ordering Information.
Pushbutton
SPECIFICATIONS RATINGS
Material and Finishes Electrical Ratings Series 30 Series 46
Lockwasher (Round Bezel): Steel, zinc trivalent Contacts Butt type Wiping type
chromate-plated
Behind Panel Plate (Square Bezel): Steel, Rating at 115 Vac Res. 1 Amp 0.25 Amp
zinc trivalent chromate-plated Rating at 220 Vac Res. 0.5 Amp 0.125 Amp
Mounting Sleeve and Screws (46-01-08-500,
Circuitry SPST–N.O. (Standard); SPDT, DPDT
46-01-09-500 only): Steel, zinc trivalent
SPST–N.O. (w/Overtravel), Break Before Make
chromate-plated. Base: Phenolic per MIL-M-
SPST–N.O. (w/Positive Feel)
14, Type CFG
Square Bezel: ABS (SPST, SPDT), thermoset Life Expectancy SPST–N.O. (Standard): 250,000
plastic (DPDT) 1,000,000 operations operations
Mounting Nut, Bushing, and Round Bezel: SPST–N.O. (w/Positive Feel):
Brass, tin zinc 200,000 operations;
Button Cap: ABS (UL version is PPS) SPST–N.O. (w/Overtravel):
Shorting Bar: Series 30–Fine silver contact 500,000 operations
area Contact Resistance 25 milliohms or less on a new switch
Series 46–Phosphor bronze, silver-plated
Terminals: Series 30–Fine silver contact area Voltage Breakdown 1000 Vac between mutually insulated parts
with silver-plated terminal ends Insulation Resistance 1000 megohms minimum
Series 46–Silver contact surface with tin/silver
Pushbutton Switches
clad terminal ends Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C
Spring: Tinned music wire
Plunger: Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) for 30- LEGENDS
01-01-500-X and 46-01-05-500-X. Nickel-plated All button caps can be printed in epoxy ink. Any There is a per-button impression charge. A
brass for 46-01-07-500-X, 46-05-07-502-X, 46- type style or design can be used to produce the nominal set up charge per legend applies to
01-09-500-X and 46-05-09-502-X. Zinc trivalent legend. If News Gothic Condensed style is orders of 1 to 99 pieces. (Non-standard legends
chromate-plated brass for 46-01-08-500-X. used, limits can be approximated from the chart are subject to a one time tooling charge. Contact
Polycarbonate for all others. below; actual limits depend on specific legend. Grayhill for more specifics.)
Operating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C Grayhill Type Square Button Round Button
Character
Sample Style
Identification Height Character and Line Character and Line
and Sizes
No. (Typ.) Limitation Limitation
ALTERNATE ACTION (PUSH-PUSH)
OPERATING SEQUENCE .083 6 Char. 3 Char.
4GH088 ABCDEFGHIJ TAB OFF
Part Number* 46-05-07-502, 46-05-09-502, (2,1) 2 Lines LOCATE 1 Line
46-01-07-500, 46-01-09-500
Alternate action (Push-Push) switches provide
a maintained actuated position until the button
is pushed again to release. 1GH125 .138 5 Char. 3 Char.
ABCDEFGHIJ INDEX TAB
13/64 (5,16)
(3,5) 1 Lines 1 Line
Approx. 3/32 (2,38)
Approx.
3GH187 .207 3 Char. 2 Char.

UP POSITION PUSH TO LOCK DOWN (5,3) ABCDEF 1 Line OFF 1 Line 15
C. & N.C. ACTUATE POSITION
SHORTED C. & N.O.
N.O. OPEN SHORTED
N.C. OPEN
.276 2 Char.
STANDARD OPTIONS
2GH250
(7,0) ABCD 1 Line 15 N/A N/A
Epoxy-sealed terminals and wire leads, see
page E-35.
ORDERING INFORMATION & OPERATING FEATURES
Square Round Circuitry Feature Total Bottoming Actuating Overtravel
Bezel Bezel Travel Force Force
30-01-01-500-* 30-05-01-502-* SPST–N.O. Momentary .080 ± .015 —— 10 ± 4 oz. ——
Butt
Contact (2,03 ± 0,38)
Positive Feel & .156 ± .015
30-01-04-500-* 30-05-04-502-* SPST–N.O. Overtravel (3,96 ± 0,38) —— 18 ± 4 oz. .046 Min.
46-01-05-500-* 46-05-05-502-* SPDT Momentary .180 min. (4,57) 1.1 ± .25 Lbs. —— ——
.210 ± .015
Wiping 46-01-07-500-* 46-05-07-502-* SPDT Alternate Action 1.5 ± .25 Lbs. —— ——
(5,33 ± 0,38)
Contact 46-01-08-500-* 46-05-08-502-* DPDT Momentary .180 min. (4,57) 1.6 ± .5 Lbs. —— ——
.210 ± .015
46-01-09-500-* 46-05-09-502-* DPDT Alternate Action 1.8 ± .5 Lbs. —— ——
(5,33 ± 0,38)
*Partial part number; complete the part number by adding a dash for button color: Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
white –01; red –03; green –04; blue –05; yellow –06 or black –07. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
Pushbutton
Wiping Contact Pushbutton Switches
SERIES 46
SPST and DPDT, 1/4 Amp
FEATURES
• Long Wipe Contact Assures
High Reliability
Single Pole/Double Throw Double Pole/Double Throw

46-101* (BBM) 46-102* (BBM) 46-200* (BBM)
46-110* (MBB) 46-111* (MBB) 46-201* (MBB)
.375 ± .010
Pushbutton Switches
.187 ± .010
(4,75 ± 0,25) .187 (9,53 ± 0,25) DIA.
.125 ±.005
(3,18 ± 0,13) DIA. ± .010 .375 ± .010
(4,75 SNAP ON
(9,53 ± 0,25) .391 C BUTTON CAP
1/4-32 UNEF-2A ± 0,25) DIA. (9,93)
THREAD
REF.
SNAP ON 1/4-32 UNEF-2A
A HEX MOUNTING NUT .391 BUTTON THREAD
.375 (9,53) (9,93) CAP A
1.327
ACROSS FLATS REF. 1,56 HEX MOUNTING NUT
(33,7)
.109 (2,77) (39,6) .375 (9,53)
REF. .703
THICK REF. ACROSS FLATS
(17,86)
.109 (2,77)
MAX. A = .250 ± .005 B THICK
(6,35 ± 0,13)
A = .250 ± .005
LABEL* (6,35 ± 0,13)
LABEL* B = .734 (18,64)
*PART LABEL* REF.
NUMBER C = .187 ± .010
.187 ± .015 .437 ± .010 AND E.I.A. (4,75 ± 0,38)
(4.75 ± 0,38) (11,10 ± 0,25) DIA. DATE CODE .187 ± .015
LABEL (4,75 ± 0,38) .625 ± .015
NC NO (15,88 ± 0,38)
*PART NUMBER
C
AND E.I.A. DATE
CODE LABEL NC NO
.453 ± .015
*PART NUMBER C C
AND E.I.A. DATE NO NC (11,51 ± 0,38)
Rating at Rating at Operations *Complete Button CODE LABEL
115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated Part or Cap
Resistive Resistive Load Number Color
46-101 RED Red
46-101 BLK Black Rating at Rating at Operations *Complete
Part Cap
46-102 RED Red 115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated
Number Color
46-102 BLK Black Resistive Resistive Load
1 1
/4 Amp /8 Amp 250,000
46-110 RED Red 46-200 RED Red
46-110 BLK Black 1
/4 Amp 1
/8 Amp 250,000 46-200 BLK Black
46-111 BLK Black 46-201 BLK Black
Total Bottoming Mtg. Total Bottoming Mtg.

Action Action
.180 (4,57) 17/64" .180 (4,57) 17/64"
Min. (6,75) Min. (6,75)
CIRCUITRY
N.C. N.O.
C1 N.C.
N.C. N.O. N.O. C.

C. N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O. C. N.C.
SPDT - BBM SPDT MBB C2
C.
N.O.
DPDT BBM DPDT MBB
Pushbutton
SERIES 46
SPST and DPDT, 1/4 Amp
FEATURES
• Bushing and Button Seal
• Environmentally Sealed
Sealed Bushing and Button Sealed Bushing and Button
Pushbutton Switches
Single Pole/Double Throw Double Pole/Double Throw
46-150* (BBM) 46-270* (BBM) .375 ± .010
.375 ± .010
46-151* (MBB) (9,53 ± 0,25) DIA. 46-271* (MBB) (9,53 ± 0,25) DIA.
SNAP ON SNAP ON
.391 C BUTTON CAP .391 C BUTTON CAP
(9,93) (9,93)
REF. 1/4-32 UNEF-2A REF. 1/4-32 UNEF-2A
THREAD THREAD
A O A O
HEX MOUNTING NUT HEX MOUNTING NUT
1.62 .312 (7,92)
(41,15) .375 (9,5)
ACROSS FLATS 1.62 ACROSS FLATS
REF. (41,15) .062 (1,57)
.109 (2,8)
B THICK A = .250 ± .005 REF. B THICK
A = .250 ± .005
(6,35 ± 0,13)
(6,35 ± 0,13)
B = .770 ± .015
LABEL* LABEL* B = .770 ± .015
Terminals are (19,56 ± 0,38) Terminals are
(19,56 ± 0,38)
marked as shown C = .187 ± .010 marked as shown
C = .187 ± .010
in bottom view of (4,75 ± 0,25) in bottom view of
(4,75 ± 0,25)
SPDT switch on *PART NUMBER DPDT switch on
previous page. AND E.I.A. DATE previous page.
.580 (14,73) MAX. ACROSS
CODE LABEL .187 ± .015 FLATS OF HEX
.187 ± .015 .450 (11,43) MAX. (4,75 ± 0,38) *PART NUMBER .650 (16,51) REF. ACROSS
(4,75 ± 0,38) ACROSS FLATS OF HEX AND E.I.A. DATE CORNERS
.505 (12,83) REF. ACROSS O = O RING CODE LABEL
O = O RING
CORNERS
Rating at Rating at Operations *Complete Rating at Rating at Operations *Complete

Cap Cap
115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated Part 115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated Part
Color Color
Resistive Resistive Load Number Resistive Resistive Load Number
1 1 46-150 BLK Black 1 1 46-270 BLK Black
/4 Amp /8 Amp 100,000 /4 Amp /8 Amp 100,000
46-151 BLK Black 46-271 BLK Black
Total Bottoming Mtg. Total Bottoming Mtg.

Action Action
.180 (4,57) 17/64" .180 (4,57) 17/64"
Min. (6,75) Min. (6,75)
CIRCUITRY
N.C. N.O.
C1 N.C.
N.C. N.O. N.O. C.

C. N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O. C.
C2 N.C.
SPDT - BBM SPDT MBB
C.
N.O.
DPDT BBM DPDT MBB
Pushbutton
Environmentally Sealed
Double Pole/Double Throw
46-260* (BBM) .375 ± .010
(9,53 ± 0,25) DIA.
SNAP ON BUTTON CAP

.390 ± .010 C
(9,90 ± 0,25) O-RING SEALED .641 ± .005
D
3/8-32 UNEF-2A (16,28 ± 0,13)
THREAD TO .060 (15,24) MAX.
.281 ± .010 (7,14 ± 0,25) FROM SHOULDER
.812 ± .005
HEX MOUNTING NUT (20,62 ± 0,13)
O
R
.562 (14,2) ACROSS FLATS DIAMETER
.094 (2,40) THICK
A = 1.14 (29,0)
A MAX.
B = 22.00 (558,8)
MAX.
C = .187 ± .010
(4,75 ± 0,25)
BR
BL
G
Y
D = .125 ± .005
Rating at Rating at Operations *Complete
(3,18 ± 0,13) Cap
115 Vac 220 Vac at Rated Part
Pushbutton Switches
Resistive Number Color

Resistive Load
SWITCH AND 46-260 RED Red
1 1
B WIRE LEADS /4 Amp /8 Amp 250,000
46-260 BLK Black
ENCAPSULATED
Total Bottoming Mtg.
Action
.250 ± .010 .180 (4,57) 25/64"
(6,35 ± 0,25) Momentary Approx. 45
Min. (9,92)
CIRCUITRY ACCESSORY
Decorative Mounting Nut
N.C.
Part No. 30C1023-1
C1
Fits .250" (6,35) Bushing
N.O. For dimensions, materials and
finishes, see page E-36.
N.C.
C2
Description Part No.
N.O.
DPDT BBM
SPDT, BBM, Red Button 46-101 RED
SPDT, BBM, Black Button 46-101 BLK
SPDT, BBM, Red Cap 46-102 RED
SPDT, BBM, Black Cap 46-102 BLK
SPECIFICATIONS SPDT, MBB, Red Button 46-110 RED
Rating Criteria SPDT, MBB, Black Button 46-110 BLK
Contact Resistance: Less than 25 milliohms O-Ring Seal: Nitrile per MIL-P-5516, class B SPDT, MBB, Red Cap 46-111 RED
at the switch initially. Less than 4 milliohms/inch Seal Adapter and Hex Nut (46-260): Brass, SPDT, MBB, Black Cap 46-111 BLK
of wire. zinc trivalent chromate-plated SPDT, BBM, Red Cap 46-150 RED
Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac between Wire Leads (46-260): Per MIL-W-16878 type E. SPDT, BBM, Black Cap 46-150 BLK
mutually insulated parts #26 AWG, insulated teflon, copper stranded SPDT, MBB, Red Cap 46-151 RED
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms wire SPDT, MBB, Black Cap 46-151 BLK
minimum DPDT, BBM, Red Cap 46-200 RED
Operating Features DPDT, BBM, Black Cap 46-200 BLK
Materials and Finishes Break-Before-Make: Rest position to N.C. break DPDT, MBB, Red Cap 46-201 RED
Cover, Bushing, Mounting Nut: Brass, .020" (0,51) minimum. Rest position to N.O. DPDT, MBB, Black Cap 46-201 BLK
tin zinc Make .140" (3,35) maximum. DPDT, BBM, Red Cap 46-270 RED
Shorting Bar: Phosphor bronze, silver-plated. Make-Before-Break: Rest position to N.O. make DPDT, BBM, Black Cap 46-270 BLK
Terminals: Phosphor bronze, silver contact .065" ± .015 (1,65 ± 0,38). Rest position to N.C. DPDT, MBB, Red Cap 46-271 RED
surface. Terminal ends are tin/silver break .130" ± .015 (3,30 ± 0,38). DPDT, MBB, Black Cap 46-271 BLK
Base or Potting Shell: Phenolic per MlL-M- Operating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C DPDT, BBM, Sealed, Red 46-260 RED
14, type CFG DPDT, BBM, Sealed, Black 46-260 BLK
Spring: Tinned music wire ACCESSORY
STANDARD OPTIONS
Button Cap: Polyethylene
Epoxy sealed terminals and wire leads, see Decorative Nut 30C1023-1
Button: Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) for 46-
page E-34 and E-35.
200 and 46-201. Polycarbonate for all other
unsealed versions. Aluminum for all sealed
Decorative mountings, see pages E-24 to E-26. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
versions.
Pushbutton
SERIES 23
SPST, 1/4 Amp
FEATURES
• Momentary Contact
DIMENSIONS In Inches (and millimeters) CIRCUITRY
Pushbutton Switches
Normally Open–SPST
.187 ± .005
23-1 (4,75 ± 0,13)
23-4 DIA.
A
5/16-32 UNEF-2A
SPST N.O.
1.059 B THREAD
(26,90)
REF. A = .146 ± .015
(3,71 ± 0,38)
C B = .250 ± .010
(6,35 ± 0,25)
LABEL*
C = .476 ±.015
ACCESSORY
D (12,09 ± 0,38)
D = .187 ± .015
(4,75 ± 0,38)
.468 Decorative Mounting Nut
± .010 *PART NUMBER
(11,89 ± 0,25)
Part No. 23C1024
AND E.I.A. DATE
DIA. CODE LABEL
SPECIFICATIONS
Rating Criteria ORDERING INFORMATION
Rated: To-Make-and-Break: 1/4 Amp at 115 Terminals: Brass, silver-plated. Description & Button Color Part No.
Vac, or 1/8 Amp at 220 Vac resistive. Spring: Tinned music wire
Contact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximum Shorting Bar: Phosphor bronze, silver-plated. SPST, N.O., Red 23-1
on a new switch. Operating Temperature: -40° to +85°C SPST, N.O., Black 23-4
Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac between Accessory Nut 23C1024-1
mutually insulated parts. Operating Features
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms Total Button Travel: .095 ± .010 (2,41 ± 0,25) Available From Your Local Grayhill Distributor.
minimum. Overtravel: .005 (0,13) minimum For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
Actuating Force: 16 ± 4 ounces Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Materials and Finishes Mounting Hole: 21/64" (8,33)
Mounting Nut and Cover Bushing: Brass, tin
zinc
Base: Phenolic per MIL-M-14, Type CFG.
Button: Polycarbonate
Pushbutton
SERIES 10
SERIES 4000
SPST, 1 and 3 Amp
FEATURES
• Momentary or
Momentary With Positive Feel
• UL Recognized at 3 Amps
DIMENSIONS In Inches (and millimeters) CIRCUITRY

4001(UL)
10-09 (UL) .312 + .000 – .012
(7,92 – 0,30) DIA.
10-100
4002 (UL)
10-10 (UL) B 15/32-32 UNS-2A THREAD
SPST N.O.
10-101 HEX MOUNTING NUT
Pushbutton Switches
C .094 (2,39) THICK

.563 (14,30) ACROSS FLATS
D A = N.O. 1.500 (38,1) REF.

N.C. 1.490 (37,8) REF.
SPST N.C.
LABEL* B = N.O. .160 ± .015 (4,06 ± 0,38)
N.C. .150 ± .015 (3,81 ± 0,38)
C = .375 ± .010 (9,53 ± 0,25)
E D = .668 ± .015 (16,97 ± 0,38)
E = .297 ±.020 (7,54 ± 0,51)
ACCESSORIES
Dimension across bushing flats
is .406 ± .010 (10,31 ± 0,25). .800 ± .015 *PART NUMBER AND E.I.A.
(20,32 ± 0,38) DATE CODE LABEL
The inside distance between terminals DIA.
is .359 (9,12) at the switch base.
Decorative
Mounting Nut
Oper. at Rating at Rating at
Rated 115 Vac 220 Vac Actuating Part No. 07C1040-1
Action Part No. Circuitry Load Resistive Resistive Force
1
Momentary 4001 SPST-N.O. 100,000 1 Amp /2 Amp 22 oz. ± 8
10-09
1
Momentary 4002 SPST-N.C. 100,000 1 Amp /2 Amp 23 oz. ± 7
10-10
Pos. Feel 10-100 SPST-N.O. 100,000 1 Amp 1
/2 Amp 35 oz. ± 8 Button Guard
Pos. Feel 10-101 SPST-N.C. 100,000 1 Amp 1
/2 Amp 35 oz. ± 10 Part No. 10C1015-1
Underwriters Laboratory Recognized
Momentary 4001 UL SPST-N.O. 6,000 3 Amp —– 22 oz. ± 8

10-09 UL
Momentary 4002 UL SPST-N.C. 6,000 3 Amp —– 23 oz. ± 7
10-10 UL

Rating Criteria Materials and Finishes Description & Button Color Part No.
Rated: See chart above Mounting Nut: Brass, tin zinc
Contact Resistance: 25 milliohms or less on a Mounting Bushing and Cover: Zinc, zinc SPST, N.O., Red 4001
new switch trivalent chromate-plated SPST, N.O., Black 10-09
Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac between Button and Base: Thermoset plastic SPST, N.O., UL, Red 4001UL
mutually insulated parts Shorting Bar: Brass, silver-plated SPST, N.O., UL, Black 10-09 UL
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms Spring: Tinned music wire SPST, N.O., Positive Feel, Red 10-100
minimum Contact Terminals: Berylium copper, silver- SPST, N.C., Positive Feel, Black 10-101
plated .0003" to .0005" SPST, N.C., Red 10-10
Additional Characteristics SPST, N.C., Black 4002
Total Travel: Normally open .140 ± .032 (3,56 SPST, N.C., UL, Red 10-10 UL
± 0,81). Normally closed .110 + .010/ - .020 SPST, N.C., UL Black 4002 UL
(2,79 + 0,25/ - 0,51). STANDARD OPTIONS Accessory Nut 07C1040-1
Overtravel: Normally open .020 (0,51) minimum Epoxy sealed terminals are not available through Accessory Button Guard 10C1015-1
Pretravel: Normally closed .010 (0,25) minimum distributors.
Operating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
UL Recognition: See chart above for rating. UL For terminals bent at 90°, contact Grayhill. For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
file number is 35289. Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Pushbutton
SERIES 07
SERIES 2000
SPST and SPDT, 10 Amp
FEATURES
• Momentary Contact • 25,000 Cycles of
• Extremely Fast Make-and-Break Operation
• Audible Click
SPDT Solder Lug Terminal SPST–Solder Lug Terminals SPST–Faston Terminals

.312 ± .005
07-26* (7,92 ± 0,13) 2201 07-21
KEYWAY 2202 07-22
A
.068 (1,72) WIDE 07-7
15/32-32 UNS-2A 07-8
THREAD
Pushbutton Switches
B HEX MOUNTING
NUTS (2)
1.966 .094 ± .010 All dimensions All dimensions
(49,94) (2,39 ± 0,25) THICK not shown are not shown are
REF. .562 ± .010 same as same as
C (14,27 ± 0,25) part no. 7-26. part no. 7-26.
ACROSS FLATS 1.903 1.910
(48,34) (48,51)
LABEL* REF. REF.
LABEL* LABEL*
.95 (24,13) MAX.
D
OVER PIN HEADS
.880 ± .010 DIA. .380 ± .015 .387 ± .015

(22,35 ± 0,25) (9,65 ± 0,38)
A = .273 ±.020 (9,83 ± 0,38)
N.C.
(6,93 ± 0,51)
B = .454 ± .015 *PART NUMBER
(11,53 ± 0,38) *PART NUMBER TERMINALS TO *PART NUMBER
AND E.I.A. DATE AND E.I.A. DATE
C = .796 ± .015 .O. C. CODE LABEL ACCOMMODATE AND E.I.A. DATE
N CODE LABEL
(20,22 ± 0,38) 1/4 INCH PUSH-ON CODE LABEL
D = .443 ± .015 TERMINATION
(11,25 ± 0,38)
CIRCUITRY
N.C.
C.
N.O.
SPDT - BBM SPST N.C.
SPST N.O.
SPECIFICATIONS
Rated: To make and break 10 Amps at 115 Vac, Housing, Button and Internal Bridge: ORDERING INFORMATION
or 5 Amps at 220 Vac resistive load for 25,000 Thermoset plastic *Part Description
operations Mounting Nuts, Bushings, and Internal Number Circuitry Button Terminal
Contact Resistance: 25 milliohms or less on a Bracket: Brass, tin zinc
new switch Fixed and Moving Contacts: Fine silver 2201 SPST–N.O. Red Solder
Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac between Internal Spring, Link and Contact Carrier: 07-7 SPST–N.O. Black Solder
mutually insulated parts Beryllium, copper 07-21 SPST–N.O. Red Faston
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms Cover-to-Base Mounting Pins: Brass 2202 SPST–N.C. Black Solder
minimum Faston Terminals: Brass, tin over nickel 07-8 SPST–N.C. Red Solder
Solder Lug Terminals: Brass, 07-22 SPST–N.C. Black Faston
Operating Features zinc trivalent chromate-plated 07-26 RED SPDT–BBM Red Solder
Total Button Travel: .065 (1,65) approximately 07-26 BLK SPDT–BBM Black Solder
Overtravel: .008 (0,20) approximately
Actuating Force: 24 ounces approximately Part Accessory
Mounting Hole: 31/64" (12,30) inches ACCESSORIES Number Description
Terminal Type: Solder Lug/Faston 07Z1047-1 BLK Black Button Cap
Operating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C 07Z1047-2 RED Red Button Cap
07C1040-1 Decorative Nut
Available from your local Grayhill Distributor. 10C1015-1 Button Guard
Decorative
For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Button Cap Mounting Nut Button Guard
Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill. Part No. 07Z1047 Part No. 07C1040-1 Part No. 10C1015-1
Pushbutton
Pushbutton Options and Accessories
SEALED TERMINAL AND

WIRE LEAD OPTIONS
OPTION -E AND -EW
FEATURES
• 1/4, 1/2, and 1 Amp Option -EW,
Potted Base & 6"
• Limit, Overtravel, or Panel Seal Wire Leads
• Butt or Wiping Contact
• Normally Open or Normally Closed
• Momentary or Push/Pull Option -E
Epoxy-Sealed
• Series 23, 30, 39 and 46 Terminals
SPECIFICATIONS Length Behind Panel

Rating Criteria Standard Standard In inches (and millimeters)
Choices
Make and Break Current Rating: See page Part Number Part Number of Standard Switch -EW Style
for standard part number
Pushbutton Switches
Red Button Black Button Suffix & Terminals Body

Contact Resistance: 25 milliohms maximum
on a new switch. Less than 4 milliohms per inch 23-1 23-4 -E 0.665 (16,89) ––––
of wire for wire lead option styles. 30-1 30-3 -E, -EW 0.592 (15,04) 0.645 (16,38)
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms 30-15 30-37 -E, -EW 0.679 (17,25) 0.728 (18,49)
minimum between mutually insulated parts 30-17 RED 30-17 BLK -E, -EW 0.958 (24,33) 1.007 (25,58)
Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac minimum 30-16 RED 30-16 BLK -E, -EW 0.958 (24,33) 1.007 (25,58)
between mutually insulated parts 30-251 RED 30-251 BLK -E, -EW 0.632 (16,05) 0.685 (17,40)
30-252 RED 30-252 BLK -E, -EW 0.645 (16,38) 0.700 (17,78)
30-32 RED 30-32 BLK -E, -EW 0.867 (22,02) 0.896 (22,76)
30-6 30-2 -E, -EW 0.605 (15,37) 0.640 (16,26)
Potting Sleeve (Series 39): Thermoset Plastic
30-601 RED 30-601 BLK -E, -EW 0.592 (15,04) 0.645 (16,38)
Wire Leads: #26AWG, (.99mm diameter)
39-1* 39-3* -EW** 0.315 (8,00) 0.440 (11,18)
insulated Teflon, Copper stranded wire, per –––– 39-2 -E,- EW 0.490 (12,45) 0.575 (14,61)
MlL-W-16878,Type E. Ends are stripped 39-12* 39-24* -EW** 0.455 (11,56) 0.575 (14,61)
0.250" (6.35) and solder dipped. For other 39-101 –––– -EW** 0.650 (16,51) 0.775 (19,69)
specifications, see Page References. 39-351 RED 39-351 BLK -EW** 0.350 (8,89) 0.450 (11,43)
39-352 RED* 39-352 BLK* -E, -EW 0.529 (13,44) 0.630 (16,00)
39-601 RED 39-601 BLK -EW* 0.315 (8,00) 0.440 (11,18)
39-701*** –––– -EW** 0.800 (20,32) 0.925 (23,50)
39-702*** –––– -E, -EW 0.510 (12,95) 0.750 (19,05)
46-101 RED 46-101 BLK -E, -EW 0.890 (22,61) 0.957 (24,31)
46-102 RED 46-102 BLK -E, -EW 0.890 (22,61) 0.957 (24,31)
46-110 RED 46-110 BLK -E, -EW 0.890 (22,61) 0.957 (24,31)
46-111 RED 46-111 BLK -E, -EW 0.890 (22,61) 0.957 (24,31)
46-150 RED 46-150 BLK -E, -EW 0.957 (24,31) 1.024 (26,01)
46-151 RED 46-151 BLK -E, -EW 0.957 (24,31) 1.024 (26,01)
46-200 RED 46-200 BLK -E 0.921 (23,39) ––––
46-201 RED 46-201 BLK -E 0.921 (23,39) ––––
46-270 RED 46-270 BLK -E 0.957 (24,31) ––––
46-271 RED 46-271 BLK -E 0.957 (24,31) ––––
*Epoxy potting sleeve enlarges the diameter of the -EW style to 0.300 (7,62).
**Sealed terminal (-E) option is not necessary; terminals have sealed construction.
***Natural Color Button
†Adjustable from 1.214 (30,84) to 1.334 (33,88) dependent on button height, see switch pages.
Pushbutton
ORDERING INFORMATION Standard Part Number Standard Length Behind Panel

Use the Selector Charts at the beginning of the Without Options Part Number Choices In inches (and millimeters)
section to select a series. Use the pages listed Choice of Button Choice of of
there or referenced here to select a switch. Color Standard Switch -EW Style
Button Color Options
To order epoxy sealed terminals, add the suffix - (see switch pages) (see switch pages) & Terminals Body
E to the selected part number as allowed in the –––– 30-001-A-XX -E, -EW 1.119 (28,42) 1.172 (29,77)
chart. Example: 30-1-E. –––– 30-002-A-XX -E, -EW 1.132 (28,75) 1.167 (29,64)
To order the epoxy-potted version with 6-inch –––– 30-015-A-XX -E, -EW 1.204 (30,58) 1.253 (31,83)
wire leads, use the suffix -EW as allowed in the –––– 30-017-A-XX -E, -EW Adjustable† Adjustable†
chart. Example: 39-1-EW 30-01-01-500-XX 30-1-1-50-XX -E, -EW 1.100 (27,94) 1.153 (29,29)
30-01-04-500-XX 30-1-4-50-XX -E, -EW 1.257 (31,93) 1.310 (33,27)
Available From Your Local Grayhill 30-05-01-502-XX 30-5-1-52-XX -E, -EW 0.930 (23,62) 0.983 (24,97)
Distributors. For prices and discounts, contact 30-05-04-502-XX 30-5-4-52-XX -E, -EW 1.130 (28,70) 1.183 (30,05)
a local Sales Office, an authorized local –––– 30-601-A-XX -E, -EW 1.119 (28,42) 1.172 (29,77)
Distributor or Grayhill. 46-01-05-500-XX 46-1-5-50-XX -E, -EW 1.361 (34,57) 1.428 (36,27)
46-01-07-500-XX 46-1-7-50-XX -E, -EW 1.451 (36,86) 1.518 (38,56)
46-01-08-500-XX 46-1-8-50-XX -E 1.381 (35,08) ––––
46-01-09-500-XX 46-1-9-50-XX -E 1.381 (35,08) ––––
46-05-05-502-XX 46-5-5-52-XX -E, -EW 1.179 (29,95) 1.246 (31,65)
46-05-07-502-XX 46-5-7-52-XX -E, -EW 1.465 (37,21) 1.532 (38,91)
Pushbutton Switches
46-05-08-502-XX 46-5-8-52-XX -E 1.188 (30,18) ––––
46-05-09-502-XX 46-5-9-52-XX -E 1.317 (33,45) ––––
–––– 46-102-A-XX -E, -EW 1.417 (35,99) 1.484 (37,69)
–––– 46-111-A-XX -E, -EW 1.417 (35,99) 1.484 (37,69)
–––– 46-200-A-XX -E 1.448 (36,78) ––––
–––– 46-201-A-XX -E 1.448 (36,78) ––––
CIRCUITRY: Series 46
N.C. *Epoxy potting sleeve enlarges the diameter of the -EW style to 0.300 (7,62).
C1 (YELLOW)
**Sealed terminal (-E) option is not necessary; terminals have sealed construction.
(RED)
***Natural Color Button
N.O.
(GREEN) †Adjustable from 1.214 (30,84) to 1.334 (33,88) dependent on button height, see switch pages.
SPDT
WIPING CONTACTS
Pushbutton
ACCESSORIES
For Pushbutton Switches
Button
Caps
Decorative
Mounting Nuts Pendant Housing
Button
Guard

.75 (19,1)
Decorative Mounting Nuts ACROSS
.44 (11,2) .50 (12,7) FLATS
ACROSS 30C1023-1 ACROSS
23C1024-1 07C1040-1
FLATS FLATS
.77
.46 .52 (19,6)
Pushbutton Switches
(11,7) (13,2) DIA.

DIA. DIA.
Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated for
for 1/4" (6,35) for 5/16" (7,93) 15/32" (11,9) bushing.
bushing. bushing.
.12 (3,1)
.09 (2,3) .09 (2,3)
Button Caps and Guard .89 (22,6)

DIA.
30B1012 07Z1047 10C1015-1
Thermosetting plastic (Fasten to

.19 button with cyanoacrylate
(4,8) .09 adhesive) black, red or white. Thermoplastic, black or red
(2,3) color.
For use with all Series 30 and 39 .34 (8,6)
.25
(6,4) switches except part number For use with Series 2000 and Brass, zinc trivalent
DIA. 39-101. See switch pages. 1.00 Series 7 switches. See switch chromate-plated for 15/
pages. .41 32" (11,9) bushing.
(25,4)
(10,4)
DIA.
.59
Remote Switching Accessories .33 (8,4) (15,0)
REF. .08 (2,0)
Pendant Housing and Caps .08 (2,03)
07Z4950 .25
07Z5051 2.45 (62,23)
Housing Flat Cap (6,4) Recessed Cap
.89 1.19
(22,6) (30,2) .89 1.04
(22,6) 1.19 (30,2)
1.19 (26,4)
1.03
.42 (10,67) (30,2)
(26,16)
.48 (12,2)
.48 (12,2)
Application:
All grayhill pushbutton switches with 15/32-32 bushings: catalog numbers 2201,
.27 (6,86) DIA. Material: Thermoplastic 2202, 07-7, 07-8, 07-21, 07-22, 07-26, 4001, 4002, 10-9, 10-10, 10-100, 10-101,
Specials: other colors available on 30-16, 30-17 and 30-32. any other switch with 15/32-32 bushing if it fits housing.
special order.
ORDERING INFORMATION:
Mounting Nuts, Button Caps, and Guards Pendant Housing and Caps Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
Part Part For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
Number Color Number Description Office, an authorized local Distributor, or Grayhill.
07C1040-1 Decorative Nut 07Z4950 RED Red Flat Cap & Housing
23C1024 Decorative Nut 07Z4950 BLK Black Flat Cap & Housing
30C1023-1 Decorative Nut 07Z5051 RED Red Rcssd Cap & Housing
07Z1047-1 BLK Black Button Cap 07Z5051 BLK Black Rcssd Cap & Housing
07Z1047-2 RED Red Button Cap
10C1015-1 Button Guard Sold only as sets of one housing and one cap.
30B1012-5 Red Cap
30B1012-8 White Cap
30B1012-9 Black Cap
Pushbutton
PICTURE
Rocker and Paddle Switches
G-1 Grayhill, Inc. • 561 Hillgrove Avenue • LaGrange, Illinois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhill.com
Contents: Rocker Switches
DIP Switches
ROCKER SWITCHES
• SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, and

4DPT Circuitry
• Choice of Actuators, Bushings
and Terminations
• PC and Panel Mount Versions
Page
ROCKER AND PADDLE SWITCHES
Miniature .............................................................. Series 47A ...................... 3
Sealed Miniature ................................................. Series 47B ...................... 9
Sub-Miniature ...................................................... Series 47C .................... 15
Sealed Sub-Miniature ......................................... Series 47D .................... 18
Slide DIP Switches

Typical Applications:
• Computers and Peripherals
• Instrumentation
• Telecommunications
• Test and Measurement Equipment
Rocker
Selection Chart
ROCKER AND PADDLE SWITCHES
Series 47A 47B 47C 47D
Page Number 2 9 15 18
Size Miniature Miniature Sub-Miniature Sub-Miniature
Circuitry SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, 4PDT SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT SPDT, DPDT SPDT, DPDT
Max Contact Rating 5A 5A 3A 3A

Process Sealed Yes Yes
Mounting Options
PC Vertical Yes Yes Yes Yes

PC Vertical w/ Support Bracket Yes Yes Yes Yes
PC Right Angle Yes Yes Yes Yes
PC Right Angle Vertical Yes Yes Yes Yes

Panel Yes Yes Yes
Termination Options
Solder Lug Yes Yes Yes

PC Mount Yes Yes Yes Yes
PC Mount, Quick Connect Yes Yes
Rocker
Series 47A: Miniature Rocker and Paddle Switches
SERIES 47A
Miniature Rocker and Paddle
Switches
FEATURES
• SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT and 4PDT Circuitry
DIP Switches
• Choice of Actuators and Terminations
• UL Recoginized
MODELS In inches (and millimeters)
Ø.094 .185 .030

(Ø2.39) (4.70) (0.76) .080
SWITCH POSITION SPDT
MODEL (2.03)
NO. 3
SP1 ON NONE ON 2
SP2 ON NONE (ON) 1 3
SP3 ON OFF ON .937 1.156 .500
(29.36) 25˚ 2
(23.80) .155 (12.70)
SP4 (ON) OFF (ON)
(3.96) 1
SP5 ON OFF (ON)
TERM. COMM. 2-3 OPEN 2-1 .376
(9.56)
()=MOMENTARY
.020 .270

02COMM.
.275 .147 (0.50) (6.86)
SCHEMATIC (6.99) (3.70)
1 3
SWITCH POSITION DPDT Ø.094 .030

MODEL (0.76) .190
NO. (Ø2.39) (4.83)
.185
DP1 ON NONE ON (4.70)
DP2 ON NONE (ON) 3
DP3 ON OFF ON 2
(ON) OFF (ON) 1 6 3
DP4 .937 1.156 .500
DP5 ON OFF (ON) (23.80) (29.36) 25˚ (12.70) 5 2
TERM. COMM. 2-3,5-6 OPEN 2-1,5-4 .155 4 1
()=MOMENTARY (3.96)
02COMM. 05COMM. .376

(9.56)
.020 .080
1 3 4 6 .275 (0.50) .450 (2.03)
(6.99) .147
(11.43)
Slide DIP Switches

(3.70)
SCHEMATIC
SWITCH POSITION 3PDT Ø.094 .030 .080

MODEL (Ø2.39) (0.76) (2.03)
.190
NO. .185 (4.83)
3P1 ON NONE ON (4.70)
3P2 ON NONE (ON) 3

3P3 ON OFF ON 2 9 3
6
3P4 (ON) OFF (ON) 1 .500
.937 1.156 8 2
ON OFF (ON) (12.70) 5
3P5 (23.80) (29.36) 25˚ 4
TERM. COMM. 2-3,5-6 OPEN 2-1,5-4 7 1
.155
(3.96)
()=MOMENTARY
.441
02COMM. 05COMM. 08COMM. (11.21)
.275 .020 .650
(6.99) .147 (0.50) (11.43)
1 3 4 6 7 9 (3.70)
SCHEMATIC
Rocker

4PDT .030 .080
Ø.094 (0.76)
SWITCH POSITION (2.03)
MODEL (Ø2.39)
.185
NO. (4.70)
.190
(4.83)
4P1 ON NONE ON
3
4P2 ON NONE (ON) 2
4P3 ON OFF ON 1
.937 12 3
(ON) OFF (ON) 1.156 9 6
4P4 (23.80) .500
(29.36) 25˚
4P5 ON OFF (ON) (12.70) 11 8 5
2
.155 7 4
TERM. COMM. 2-3,5-6 OPEN 2-1,5-4 10 1
(3.96)
()=MOMENTARY .441
02COMM. 05COMM. 08COMM.
(11.21)
.020
.275 (0.50) .850
1 3 4 6 7 9 (6.99) .147 (11.43)
(3.70)
SCHEMATIC
ACTUATOR OPTIONS: For Panel Mount Only In inches (and millimeters)
R1 .531
1.156 .310 (13.49)
(29.36) (7.87)
.365
.275 .937 (9.27) .138
(6.99) (23.80) (3.50)
.375
Ø.094 (9.52) .020
(Ø2.39) (0.50)
R2 .084
1.156 (2.13)
(29.36)
.365
.275 .937 (9.27) .332 R. .740
(6.99) (23.80) (8.43 R.) (18.8)
.875 .138
(22.22) (3.50)
Ø.094
(Ø2.39)
.020
(0.50)
R3 1.625 .595
(41.27) (15.11) .906
1.375 ROCKER (23.01)
(34.92) WIDTH
.320
(8.13)
.576 NOM.
(14.63)
.383
(9.73)
Ø.125 .505
2 PLCS. (12.83)
(Ø3.17) .024 .138
BRACKET WIDTH (0.61) (3.50)
.093
R4 (2.36)
1.625 .595 .888

(41.27) 1.174 1.312
(15.11) (22.56)
(29.82) (33.32)
1.375 ROCKER
(34.92) WIDTH
Ø.125 .505
2 PLCS. .024
(Ø3.17) (12.83) .138
BRACKET (0.61) (3.50)
WIDTH .437
(11.10)
Rocker
ACTUATOR OPTIONS: For Panel Rear Mount Only In inches (and millimeters)
R5
1.875 .595
(41.27) (15.11) .478
ROCKER (12.14) 1.318
1.625 WIDTH (33.4)
(34.92)
DIP Switches
.024
.505 .138
(0.61)
(12.83) (3.50)
BRACKET WIDTH
R6 PANEL THICKNESS
.128 PANEL MOUNTING
(3.25)
.047 TO .125
.765
(1.19 TO 3.18) .600
(19.43)
(15.24)
.615
(15.62)
.090
(2.29)
.280
.450 (7.11) .005 R.(4) .500
(11.43) (0.13 R.) (12.70)
MAX. TYP.
.456
R7 .093 (11.58)
(2.36) PANEL MOUNTING
.765

.600
(19.43)
(15.24)
.615
(15.62)
.090
(2.29)
.280
.450 (7.11) .005 R.(4) .500
(11.43) PANEL THICKNESS (12.70)
.047 TO .125 (0.13 R.)
(1.19 TO 3.18) MAX. TYP.
ACTUATOR OPTIONS: For P.C. Mount Only In inches (and millimeters)
J1
.310 .531
(7.87) (13.49)
.365
(9.27)
Slide DIP Switches

.299
(7.59)
J2
.084
(2.13)
.156
.365 (3.96)
(9.27)
.332 R.
(8.43 R.) .740
(18.80)
Rocker
ACTUATOR OPTIONS: For P.C. Mount Only In inches (and millimeters)
J3 J4 .093
(2.36)
.906 .351
(23.01) (8.92)
.888
(22.55)
1.174
(29.82)
.595 .595
(15.11) .320 (15.11)
(8.13)
1.055
(26.80)
1.055
(26.80)
J5 J6
.432 .125
(10,97) (3,18) .093
.362 (2,36)
(9,19)
.306 .260
.450 (7,77) (7,11)
(11,43) .644
(16,36) .230 R.
(5,84 R.)
.460
(11,68)
.450
(11,43)
J7 J8 .125
.125 .432 (3,18) .093
.432 (3,18) (10,97)
(10,97) .093 (2,36)
(2,36)
.644 .230 R.
(16,36) (5,84 R.)
.894
(22,71) .230 R.
(5,84 R.)
.450
(11,43)
.450
(11,43)
TERMINATION OPTIONS In inches (and millimeters)
M1 Solder Lug M2 P.C. Mount (Std) M3 P.C. Mount, WX

Quick Connect DIM."A"
.078 .156 .250 .075

(3.96) .189 (6.35) (1.91) EPOXY SEAL
(1.98)
(4.80)
.150
(1.91)
.080 .100
(2.03) .062 (1.27)
.050
.047 (1.57)
(1.27) .250
(1.19) OPTION
(6.35) CODE DIM."A"
THK. .030 (0.76) THK. .030 (0.76) W1 .750(19.05)
W2 .964(24.48)
NOTE: Solder lug terminals supplied with mounting tabs standard. W3 .425(10.80)
PC Mount terminals supplied without mounting tabs standard. W4 1.062(26.97)
Rocker
M6 Right Angle P.C. Mount, Horizontal Actuation .062

(1.57) .500
PIVOT EPOXY SEAL (12.70) .270 .185
(6.86) (4.69)
.125
(3.18)
SPDT 1 2 3
.500
(12.70)
.016 .030
(0.41) (0.76)
.048
DIP Switches
(1.22) .169 .185 .200
(4.29) .050 (4.70) (5.08)
.200
.500 (1.27) Ø.073
(5.08)
(12.70) (Ø1.85)
.230
(5.84)
.500 .185
EPOXY SEAL (12.70) (4.69)
PIVOT
.150
4 5 6
(3.81)
.125 .450
DPDT (3.18) (11.45) 1 2 3
.016 .500
(0.41) (12.70)
.048 .050
(1.22) (1.27) .030
.169 .150 (0.76)
.200 (3.81) .200
(5.08) (4.29) (5.08)
.185
.500 (4.70) Ø.073
(12.70) (Ø1.85)
M7 Right Angle P.C. Mount, Vertical Actuation .270

Ø.073 .150

(Ø1.85) (3.81)
EPOXY SEAL (6.86)
3
.100
(2.54) .125 .500
SPDT (3.18)
2
(12.70)
1
.500
1 2 3
(12.70)
.050 .050
(1.27) (1.27) .030 .200
.235 (0.76) .016 (5.08) .200
(5.97) (0.40) (5.08)
.150
.500 (3.81)
(12.70)
.450 .150
EPOXY SEAL (6.86) (3.81)
.190
6 3 (4.83)
.100
(2.54) .125 5 2
.500
(3.18) (12.70)
DPDT 4 1
.500 Ø.073
Slide DIP Switches

4 5 6
(12.70) (Ø1.85)
.190 .050
(1.27) .030 .200
(4.83) (5.08)
.235 (0.76) .016 .200
.050 (5.97) .150 (0.40) (5.08)
(1.27) .500 (3.81)
(12.70)
.650
.100 (16.50) .190
EPOXY SEAL (2.54) (4.83)
9 6 3
.125
(3.18) .500
3PDT 8 5 2
(12.70)
.150
7 4 1
(3.81)
.565
7 8 9
(14.35)
.050
.050 .016
(1.27)
(1.27) .235 (0.40)
(5.97) .030 .200
.190 .565 .200
(0.76) (5.08)
(4.83) (14.35) (5.08)
.150 Ø.073
(3.81) (Ø1.85)
Rocker

.100 .850 .190
EPOXY SEAL (2.54) (21.59) (4.83)
.125
4PDT (3.18) 12 9 6 3
11 8 5 2
.500
(12.70)
10 7 4 1 .150
.565 (3.81)
10 11 12
(14.35)
.050
.050
(1.27)
(1.27) .235 .016
.190 (5.97) .030 (0.40) .200
.565
(4.83) (14.35) (0.76) (5.08)
.150 .200
(5.08) Ø.073
(3.81) (Ø1.85)
.162
V2-V3 Vertical (4.11)
Bracket DIM. "A" .125
(3.18)
P.C. Mount
OPTION
DIM."A"
CODE
SPDT .460 .620
V2 (11,68)
(15.75)
1 2 3 EPOXY SEAL V3
.630
(16,00)
.048 .020
(0.51) .030
(1.22) .185 (0.76) Ø.073
(4.70)
.125 .185 (Ø1.85)
(3.18) (4.70)
.320 .620
(8.13) (15.75)
.162
(4.11)
DIM. "A" .125

(3.18) .370
(9.40)
OPTION
DIM."A"
DPDT CODE
.620
.460
V2 (11,68) (15.75)
4 5 6 EPOXY SEAL
.630
V3 (16,00)
.020
.048 .030
(0.51) .190
(1.22) .185 (0.76)
(4.70) (4.83)
.125 .185 Ø.073
(3.18) (4.70) (1.85)
.320 .620
(8.13) (15.75)
SPECIFICATIONS Contact Resistance: 10 milliohms max. initial

RATINGS @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mA MATERIALS
Contact Rating: Q option - 5A with resistive Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms Case: Diallyl phthalate (DAP) (UL 94V-0)
load @ 125 VAC or 28 VDC; 2A with resistive minimum Rockers: Nylon (UL 94V-0)
load @ 250 VAC. R option - 0.4 VA max @ 20 Dielectic Strength: 1,000 V RMS @ sea Bushing: Stainless steel
Vmax (AC or DC) level Switch Support: Brass, tin-plated
Electrical Life: 40,000 make-and-break Operating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C Terminal/Contacts: Brass with silver or gold
cycles at full load UL Recognition: File number is E35289 plate
Series 47A Minature Rocker and Paddle Switches
Model: SPDT: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5
DPDT: DP1, DP2, DP3, DP4, DP5
3PDT: 3P1, 3P2, 3P3, 3P4, 3P5
4PDT: 4P1, 4P2, 4P3, 4P4, 4P5
(See Model options.)
Actuator: R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7
J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J7, J8 (See actuator options.)
Termination Options: M1, M2, M3, M6, M7, S6, V2, V3, W1, W2, W3, W4
(See Termination options.)
47ASP1J2M6RT
RoHS Compliant
Contact: R = Brass alloy, gold plate over nickel plate
Q = Brass alloy, silver plated
Rocker
Series 47B: Sealed Miniature Rocker and Paddle Switches
SERIES 47B
Sealed Miniature Rocker and
Paddle Switches
FEATURES
• SPDT, DPDT and 3PDT Circuitry
DIP Switches
• Choice of Actuators and
Terminations
• Sealed per IP-67

.078
.345 .260
(1.98)
SWITCH POSITION SPDT (8.76) .030 (6.60)
MODEL Ø.094
(Ø2.39) (0.76)
NO.
EPOXY SEAL
WSP1 ON NONE ON
WSP2 ON NONE (ON)
3
WSP3 ON OFF ON .937 .500
(ON) OFF (ON) 1.156 (23.80)
2
WSP4 (12.70)
(29.36)
WSP5 ON OFF (ON) 1
()=MOMENTARY (4.70)
.156

02COMM.
.356 (3.96)
.059
SCHEMATIC (9.27) .131 (1.50)
1 3 (3.33)
MODEL
SWITCH POSITION DPDT .078
.345 (1.98)
NO. (8.76) .030 .450
Ø.094 (0.76)
ON NONE ON (Ø2.39) (11.43)
WDP1
ON NONE (ON) EPOXY SEAL
WDP2
WDP3 ON OFF ON
WDP4 (ON) OFF (ON) 6 3
WDP5 ON OFF (ON) .937 .500

1.156 (23.80)
5 2
(12.70)
TERM. COMM. 2-3,5-6 OPEN 2-1,5-4 (29.36)
4 1
()=MOMENTARY
.185
02COMM. 05COMM. (4.70)
.156
(3.96) .190
1 3 4 6 .356 .059 (4.83)
(9.27) .131 (1.50)
Slide DIP Switches

(3.33)
SCHEMATIC
SWITCH POSITION 3PDT .078

MODEL (1.98)
.345 .030 .650
NO. (8.76) (0.76) (16.50)
Ø.094
(Ø2.39) EPOXY
W3P1 ON NONE ON
SEAL
W3P2 ON NONE (ON)
W3P3 ON OFF ON 9 6 3
W3P4 (ON) OFF (ON) .500 8 5 2

.937 (12.70)
W3P5 ON OFF (ON) 1.156 (23.80) 7 4 1
TERM. COMM. 2-3,5-6 OPEN 2-1,5-4 (29.36)
.185
()=MOMENTARY (4.70)

.156
(3.96) .190
.059 (4.83)
.356 .131 (1.50)
1 3 4 6 7 9 (9.27) (3.33)
SCHEMATIC
Rocker
ACTUATOR OPTIONS In inches (and millimeters)
R1 .310 .531
.356 (7.87) (13.49)
(9.27) 1.156 .345 .131
(29.36) (8.76) (3.33) .078
(1.98)
Ø.094
(Ø2.39)
.059
.937
(1.50)
(23.80)
.084
R2 (2.13)
25˚ .740
(18.80)
.356
(9.27) 1.156 .345 .933
(29.36) (8.76) .078 (23.72)
(1.98)
Ø.094
(Ø2.39)
.937 .059
.131 (1.50)
(23.80) (3.33)
R3 .283
.457
(7,20)
(11,60)
.453 1.156
(11,50) (29,36) .345 .111
(8.76) .078 (2,83)

(1,98)
.937 ?.095 .059

(23.80) (?2,40) (1,50)
25?
R4
.076
(2,40)
1.156
.457
(29,36) .345
(11,60)
(8.76)
.079 .634
(2,00) (16,10)
.937 ?.095
(23.80) (?2,40) .131
.059
(3,33)
(1,50)
Rocker
J1 .319 .551
(8,10) (14,00)
.370
(9,40)
DIP Switches
.190
(4,83)
J2 .075
(1,90)
.331 R.
(8.40 R.)
.366
(9,30) .713
.193 (18.10)
(4,90)
.114
(2,90)

J3 1.055 .906
(26,80) (23.00)
.169
(4,30)
.630
(16,00) .315
(8.00)
J4
.093
2.36
1.164
1.067
(29.56)
(27,10)
Slide DIP Switches

.529 R.
13.44
.598
(15,20)
.169
(4,30)
J5
1.318
1.346 33.48
(34,20)
.169
(4,30)
.606
(15,40)
Rocker
M1 EPOXY M2 EPOXY M3 EPOXY WX

SEAL SEAL SEAL DIM."A"
.144
(3,65) OPTION
.078 CODE DIM."A"
(1,98)
W1 .750(19.05)
W2 .964(24.48)
.191 .191 .150
W3 .425(10.80)
(4,84) (4,84) (1.91)
W4 1.062(26.97)
.047
(1,20) .100
.080 .050 .062
(1.27)
(2,03) (1.26) (1,57)
THK. .030 (0.76) THK. .030 (0.76) THK. .030 (0.76) THK. .030 (0.76)
M6 Right Angle P.C. Mount,

PIVOT EPOXY SEAL .500 .185
Horizontal Actuation .125 (12.70)
.260
(4.69)
.062 (3.18) (6.60)
(1.57)
1 2 3
.500
(12.70)
.016
(0.41) .030
.048
(1.22) (0.76)
.050 .093 .200
SPDT .200 .178 (1.27) (2.36) (5.08)
(4.52) .200
(5.08) Ø.073
.230 (5.08) .185
(5.84) 12.70 (4.70) (Ø1.85)
(.500)
.500 .185
EPOXY SEAL (12.70) .150 (4.69)
PIVOT
(3.81)
4 5 6
.125 .450
(3.18) (11.45) 1 2 3
.016 .500
.048 (0.41) (12.70)
.050
(1.22) (1.27) .030 .108
.178 .150 (0.76) (2.74)
.200 (4.5) (3.81) .200
(5.08) .200
DPDT (5.08) .185
(5.08)
.500 Ø.073
(12.70) (4.70) (Ø1.85)
.185
EPOXY SEAL .500
(4.69)
(12.70)
PIVOT
7 8 9
.650 4 5 6
(16.50)
1 2 3 .150
(3.81) .565
.016 (12.70)
(0.41)
.048 .050 .030
(.200) (1.27) (0.76)
.178 .125 .108 .200
(4.52) (3.18) .200 (2.74) (5.08)
3PDT (5.08)
.565
.185 Ø.073
(14.35)
(4.70) (Ø1.85)
Ø.073 .150
M7 Right Angle P.C. Mount, Vertical Actuation .260 (Ø1.85)
EPOXY SEAL (3.81)
(6.60)
3
.100
(2.54) .125 2
.500
(3.18) (12.70)
1
.500
(12.70)
1 2 3
.050 .048
(1.27) (1.22) .030 .200
.243 (0.76) .014 (5.08) .200
SPDT (6.17) (5.08)
.150 (0.36)
.500 (3.81)
(12.70)
Rocker
Series 47B; Sealed Miniature Rocker and Paddle Switches
EPOXY SEAL
.190
.450 (4.83)
.100 (11.43)
(2.54)
.125
(3.18) 6 3
5 2
.500 .150
(12.70) .500 (3.81)
4 5 6
4 1 (12.70)
.048
.050
(1.22) .030
(1.27)
(0.76)
DIP Switches
.243
.190 .014 .200
(6.17)
(4.83) .150 (0.36) (5.08)
DPDT .500
(3.81) Ø.073
(12.70) (Ø1.85)
EPOXY SEAL .650 .190

.100 (4.83)
(2.54) (16.50)
.125 9 6 3
(3.18)
8 5 2
.500
(12.70) .150
(3.81)
7 4 1 .565
(14.35)
7 8 9
.048
.050
(1.22) .014
(1.27) .200
.243 (0.36)
.190 .030 (5.08)
(4.83) (6.17) (0.76)
Ø.073
3PDT .565 .150 (Ø1.85)
(14.35) (3.81)
.170
V2-V3 Veritcal (4.32)
OPTION
Bracket DIM. "A" CODE
DIM."A" .125
(3.18)
P.C. Mount .460
V2

(11,68)
.630 .620
V3 (16,00)
(15.75)
1 2 3 EPOXY SEAL
.048 .020
(0.51) .030
(1.22) .185 (0.76)
(4.70)
.185 .073 DIA.
.125 (Ø1.85)
(3.18) (4.70)
.620
.320
(15.75)
SPDT (8.13)
.170
(4.32) OPTION .125
DIM."A"
CODE (3.18)
DIM. "A" .370
V2
.460 (9.40)
(11,68)
.630 .620
V3 (16,00)
(15.75)
4 5 6 EPOXY SEAL
.020 .190
.048 .030 (4.83)
(0.51)
Slide DIP Switches

(1.22) .185 (0.76)
(4.70) Ø.073
.125 .185 (1.85)
(3.18) (4.70)
.620
DPDT .320
(15.75)
(8.13)
.170
(4.32) OPTION .125
DIM."A" .185
CODE (3.18)
DIM. "A" (4.70)
.460
V2 (11,68)
.630 .620
V3 (16,00)
(15.75)
7 8 9 EPOXY SEAL
.020 .190
.048 .030 (4.83)
(1.22) .185 (0.51)
(0.76)
(4.70) Ø.073
.125 .185 (1.85)
3PDT (3.18) (4.70)
.620
.320
(15.75)
(8.13)
Rocker
SPECIFICATIONS Contact Resistance: Below 10 milliohms MATERIALS

RATINGS max. initial @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mA Case and Bushing: Glass-filled nylon 6/6 ,
Contact Rating: Q option - 5A with resistive Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms flame retardant, heat stabilized (UL94V-0)
load @ 125 VAC or 28 VDC; 2A with resistive minimum Actuator: Nylon, black standard. Internal O-
load @ 250 VAC. R option - 0.4 VA max @ 20 Dielectic Strength: 1,500 V RMS @ sea ring seal standard with all actuators.
Vmax (AC or DC) level Frame: Spring steel, black (standard)
Electrical Life: 50,000 make-and-break Operating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C Switch Support: Brass, tin-plated
cycles at full load Actuator Pivot & Mounting Bracket:
Nylon (UL 94V-0)
Actuator Pivot Retainer: Stainless Steel
Terminal/Contacts: Copper alloy with gold
plate over nickel or silver plate
Series Sealed Miniature Rocker and Paddle Switches

Model: SPDT: WSP1, WSP2, WSP3, WSP4, WSP5
DPDT: WDP1, WDP2, WDP3, WDP4, WDP5
3PDT: W3P1, W3P2, W3P3, W3P4, W3P5
Actuator: R1, R2, R3, R4, J1, J2, J3, J4, J5
(See Actuator options)
47BWSP1J2M6RT
RoHS Compliant
Contact: R = Copper alloy, gold plate over nickel plate,
Q = Copper alloy, gold plate over silver plate
Termination Options: M1, M2, M6, M7, V2, V3, W1, W2, W3, W4
(See Termination options)
Rocker
Series 47C: Sub-Miniature Rocker Switches
SERIES 47C
Sub-Miniature Rocker Switches
FEATURES
DIP Switches
Terminations
• UL Recognized
SPDT .250 EPOXY Ø.093

(6.35) .437 .020 .100 (Ø2.36)
SWITCH POSITION SEAL
MODEL (11.10) (0.51) (2.54)
NO. .320
3 (8.13)
MSP1 ON NONE ON 2
MSP2 ON NONE (ON) 1
ON OFF ON 1.095 3
MSP3
MSP4 (ON) OFF (ON) .850 (27.81) 2
(21.59) .160 1
MSP5 ON OFF (ON) (4.06)
.110
()=MOMENTARY (2.79)
.324

(8.23) .332
02COMM.
.016 (8.43) .200
.300 (5.08)
(0.41) .060
1 3 SCHEMATIC (7.62)
(1.52)
.020 Ø.093
DPDT .250 EPOXY (0.51) (Ø2.36)
(6.35) .437 .100
SWITCH POSITION SEAL .360
MODEL (11.10) (2.54)
NO. (9.14)
3
.320
MDP1 ON NONE ON
2
(8.13)
MDP2 ON NONE (ON)
1.095 1
6 3
MDP3 ON OFF ON .850 (27.81) 5 2
MDP4 (ON) OFF (ON) (21.59) .160 4 1
MDP5 ON OFF (ON) (4.06)
TERM. COMM. 2-3,5-6 OPEN 2-1,5-4
.110
()=MOMENTARY
.324 (2.79)
02COMM. 05COMM.
(8.23) .332
Slide DIP Switches

.300 .016 (8.43) .060
1 3 4 6 SCHEMATIC (7.62) (0.41) (1.52)

.475 .350 .475 .350
R1 (8.87) .300 R2 (8.87) .230
(12.07) (12.07)
(7.62) (7.62)
.250 .250
(6.35) (6.35)
.580 .187 .580 .187
(14.73) (4.75) (14.73) (4.75)
STD. ALL MODELS EXCEPT SPDT STD. ON SPDT MODELS
WITH M6 TERMINATIONS WITH M6 TERMINATIONS
Rocker
M1 Solder Lug M2 P.C. Mount (Std)

.060 .110 .110 .130 .130
(2.79) .160 .160 (2.79) (3.30) (3.30)
(1.52) (4.06) (4.06)
EPOXY EPOXY SEAL

SEAL EPOXY SEAL
.030 .030
EPOXY .060 .030 (0.76)
(0.76) (0.76) .200
SEAL (1.52) .060
.030 (1.52) (5.08)
(0.76) THK. .020 (0.51)
.160 THK. .020 (0.51)
SP THK. .020 (0.51) (4.06) THK. .020 (0.51)
SP
Note: Solder lug terminals DP PC mount terminals DP
supplied with mounting ears standard. supplied without mounting ears standard
M6 Right Angle P.C. Mount, .200

.417 .130 .320
Horizontal Actuation EPOXY
(3.30) (5.08)
(10.5) SEAL .020 (8.13)
(0.51)
.230
(5.84)
.016
1 2 3
(0.41)
.030 .020
(0.76) .100
.030 (0.51) .200
Ø.043 (2.54)
.200 .158 (0.76) (5.08)
(4.01) .200 (Ø1.09)
SPDT (5.08) .200
(5.08)
EPOXY
.417
.300 SEAL .320 .100
(10.59)
(7.62) (8.13)
.130 (2.54)
4 5 6
(3.30) .200
.020
(0.51) (5.08)
DPDT 1 2 3
.016 .020
.200
(0.41) (0.51)
(5.08) .100 .200 .100
.200 Ø.043
.030 (2.54) (5.08) (2.54)
.158 (5.08) (Ø1.09)
(0.76)
(3.96) .200
M7 Right Angle P.C. .300 EPOXY .320 Ø.043

Mount, Vertical (7.62) SEAL .020 (8.13) (Ø1.09)
(0.51)
Actuation
.200 3
(5.08) 2
1
.100
(2.54)
.030 .016 .200
SPDT (0.7) (0.41) (5.08) .200
.304 (5.08)
(7.72) .100
.030
.417 (0.76)
(10.59) .200
(5.08)
.200
.417 .360 (5.08)
.300 Ø.043
(10.59) EPOXY (9.14)
(7.62) (Ø1.09)
SEAL .020
(0.51)
.200 6 3
.320
(5.08) 5 2
4 1
(8.13)
DPDT
.100
(2.54)
.016
(0.41) .200
.304 (5.08)
(7.72)
.200 .100 .030
(5.08) .200 (2.54) P.C. MOUNTING
(0.76)
(5.08)
Rocker
V2 Vertical Bracket P.C. Mount

.300 .417
(7.62) (10.59) .400
(10.16)
.352 .100
(8.94) (2.54)
.304
.130 (7.72)
(3.30)
DIP Switches
1 2 3
.016 EPOXY SEAL

(0.41) Ø.043
.200 .020 (Ø0.19)
SPDT (5.08) (0.51)
(0.76) (2.54) .400
(10.16)
.360 Ø.043
V3 Vertical .300 (9.14) .417 (Ø1.09)
Bracket (7.62) (10.59)
P.C. Mount
.352
(8.94)
.304
.130 (7.72)
(3.30)
4 5 6
.200 .400
.016 EPOXY SEAL (5.08) (10.16)
DPDT
.100 (0.4) .020
.200
(2.54) (0.51)

(5.08)
.100
.200 (2.54) .400
.030 (5.08)
(10.16)
P.C. MOUNTING
(0.76)

Contact Rating: Q option - 3A with resistive Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms Case: Diallyl phthalate (DAP) (UL94V-0)
load @ 125 VAC or 28 VDC; 1.5A with minimum Rocker: Nylon
resistive load @ 250 VAC. R option - 0.4 VA Dielectic Strength: 1,000 V RMS @ sea Bushing: Brass, nickel plated
max @ 20 Vmax (AC or DC) level Housing: Stainless steel
Electrical Life: 30,000 make-and-break Operating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C Switch Support: Brass, electrotin plated
cycles at full load UL Recognition: File number is E35289 Terminal/Contacts: Copper alloy with silver
or gold plating
Series 47C Sub-Miniature Rocker Switches
Slide DIP Switches

Model: SPDT: MSP1, MSP2, MSP3, MSP4, MSP5
DPDT: MDP1, MDP2, MDP3, MDP4, MDP4
(See Model for options.)
Actuator Options: R1, R2 (See Actuator options.)
47CMSP1R2M6RT
RoHS Compliant
Type of Contact: R = Copper alloy, gold plate over nickel plate
Q = Copper alloy, silver plated
Termination Options: M1, M2, M6, M7, V2, V3
Rocker
Series 47D: Sealed Sub-Miniature Rocker Switches
SERIES 47D
Sealed Sub-Miniature Rocker
Switches
FEATURES
Terminations
• Sealed per IP-67
SPDT EPOXY SEAL

.020 .320
.353 (0.51) (8.13)
MODEL
SWITCH POSITION (8.96)
NO. 3
3
2
WMSP1 ON NONE ON 2
1
WMSP2 ON NONE (ON) 1
WMSP3 ON OFF ON
WMSP4 (ON) OFF (ON)
.135 .100
WMSP5 ON OFF (ON)
.300 (3.42) (2.54) .200
(7.62) .124 (5.08)
()=MOMENTARY
(3.14) .030
(0.76)
02COMM.
.781
SCHEMATIC (19.84)
1 3
DPDT EPOXY SEAL

.020 .320
SWITCH POSITION
.353 (8.13) .360
MODEL (8.96) (0.51)
NO. (9.14)
6
WMDP1 ON NONE ON 6 3
5
WMDP2 ON NONE (ON) 5 2
4
WMDP3 ON OFF ON 4 1
WMDP4 (ON) OFF (ON)
WMDP5 ON OFF (ON)
.135 .100 .030
TERM. COMM. 2-3,5-6 OPEN 2-1,5-4
.300 (3.42) (2.54) (0.76)
()=MOMENTARY .200
(7.62) .124 (5.08)
02COMM. 05COMM. (3.14)
1 3 4 6 .781
(19.84)
SCHEMATIC
R1 R2
.250 .250
(6.35) .476 .476
.299 (6.35) .228
(12.10) (12.10)
(7.60) (7.60)
.311 .181 .311 .157

(7.90) .579 (4.60) (7.90) .579 (4.00)
(14.70) (14.70)
Rocker
M2 M2 Ø.043
.130 EPOXY SEAL .130 (Ø1.09)
(3.30) Ø.043
(3.30)
(Ø1.09)
.030
EPOXY SEAL (0.76) .200
.030 (5.08)
.200 .100
(0.76) .100 (5.08) (2.54)
DIP Switches
(2.54)
SINGLE POLE P.C. MOUNTING DOUBLE POLE P.C. MOUNTING
.130 .200
M6 .299 .580 EPOXY SEAL .320 (5.08)
(3.30)
(7.60) (14.73) .020 (8.13)
Right (0.51)
Angle P.C.
Mount,
.015
Horizontal (0.38) 1 2 3
.030 .020
Actuation (0.76) .030 .200
.100
.200 (0.51)
(0.76) Ø.043 (2.54)
(5.08) .471 (5.08)
.200 .200 (Ø1.09)
SPDT (11.96)
(5.08) (5.08)
P.C. MOUNTING
.360
EPOXY SEAL (9.14)
.320 .100
.377 .130 (2.54)
(8.13)
.299 .580 (9.58) (3.30)

(7.60) (14.73) .200
.016 4 5 6
(5.08)
(0.40)
.362
(9.20)
.016
(0.41)
1 2 3
2 PL.
.100 .020
.200 .100
(2.54) (0.51) .200 Ø.043
(5.08) .200 (2.54)
DPDT (5.08) (Ø1.09)
.030 .200 (5.08)
(0.76) .471 (5.08) P.C. MOUNTING
(11.96)
M7 EPOXY SEAL .320 Ø.043

.300 (Ø1.09)
(7.62) (8.13)
Right Angle .130

(3.30) 3
P.C. Mount, 2
Vertical 1
.100
Actuation (2.54)
.015 .530
Slide DIP Switches

(0.38) (13.46) .200 .200
.030
SPDT (0.76) .165
(5.08) (5.08)
.200 (5.08)
(5.08)
.320 .200
.300 .100 (5.08)
EPOXY SEAL (8.13) (2.54)
(7.62)
.130 6 3
(3.30) 5 2
4 1
.100
.015 .530 (2.54)
DPDT (0.38) (13.46) .200
.165 (5.08)
.200 (4.19) .030 Ø.043
(5.08) .200 (0.76)
.200 (Ø1.09)
(5.08) TYP.
(10.11)
Rocker
V2 Verical Bracket P.C. Mount

.300 .400
(7.62) (10.16)
.670 .100
.352 (17.02) (2.54)
(8.94)
.130
(3.30) 1 2 3
SPDT .015 EPOXY SEAL

(0.38) .020 Ø.043
.200 .100 (0.51) (Ø0.19)
(5.08) (2.54)
(0.76) (10.16)
.409
(10.40) Ø.043
.392 .115 (Ø1.09)
(9.98) (2.93)
.300
(7.62)
.366
(9.30)
.127 .493
(3.22) (12.52)
.202
DPDT (5.12) 4 5 6 .200
.400
EPOXY SEAL (5.08)
(10.16)
.032 .020 .200
(0.51)
(0.82) .100 (5.08)

.200 (2.54) .400 P.C. MOUNTING
(5.08) (10.16)
SPECIFICATIONS Contact Resistance: 20 milliohms max. MATERIALS

RATINGS initial @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mA Case and Bushings: Glass-filled nylon 6/6 ,
Contact Rating: Q option - 3A with resistive Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms flame retardant, heat stabilized (UL94V-0)
load @ 125 VAC or 28 VDC; 1.5A with minimum Actuator: Nylon, black standard. Internal o-
resistive load @ 250 VAC. R option - 0.4 VA Dielectic Resistance: 1,500 V RMS @ sea ring seal standard with all actuators.
max @ 20 Vmax (AC or DC) level Switch Support: Brass, tin-plated
Electrical Life: 30,000 make-and-break Operating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C Terminal Seal: Epoxy
cycles at full load Terminal/Contacts: Copper alloy with gold
plate or silver plate over nickel
Series 47D Sealed Sub-Miniature Rocker Switch

Model: SPDT: WMSP1, WMSP2, WMSP3, WMSP4, WMSP5
DPDT: WMDP1, WMDP2, WMDP3, WMDP4, WMDP5
Actuator Options: R1, R2
(See Actuator options.)
47DWMSP1R2M6RT
RoHS Compliant
Contact: R= Copper alloy, gold plate over nickel plate
Termination Options: M2, M6, M7, V2
Rocker
Rotary Switches
SingleDeck
Contents: Single DeckRotary
RotarySwitches
Switches
SINGLE DECK
ROTARY SWITCHES
• Minimal Space Behind Panel
.3" up to 1"+ In Diameter
• More Economical Choice Than
Multi Deck Rotary Switches
• High Quality, Enclosed Switches
Including Military Types
• Low Current, Wiping Contacts
Rotary Switches
Page
0.3" Diameter, 200 mA ...................................... Series 75 ......................... 2
0.5" Diameter, 200 mA, .698" Behind Panel .... Series 50 & 51 .................4
0.5" Diameter, 200 mA, .355" Behind Panel .... Series 56 ...................... 11
2.0" Diameter, 15 Amp ...................................... Series 19 ...................... 15
1.0" Diameter, 1 Amp, .470" Behind Panel ...... Series 5000 .................. 16
1.0" Diameter, 1Amp, .580" Behind Panel ....... Series 24....................... 17
Rotary
Single Deck Rotary Switches
SERIES 75
0.3" Diameter, 200 mA
FEATURES
• Small Size
• Flush, Shafted, or Knobbed Shaft
Screwdriver Actuated
.298 ± .010 .539 ± .020
.489 ± .020
(7,57 ± 0,25) .109 ± .010 (13,69 ± 0,51)
(12,42 ± 0,51)
DIA. (2,77 ± 0,25) .109 ± .010
.032 (0,81) (2,77 ± 0,25)
SHOULDER
REF.
DIAMETER
.020 ± .005 Ø .031 ± .002
.125 ± .005 (0,51 ± 0,13)
9
(0,79 ± 0,05)
9
(3,18 ± 0,13) 8
7
9
10
10
5 6
Rear view shown

0 1
on next page.
1
1
2
3 4
2
2
TERMINAL
SCREWDRIVER SLOT Style AP DIAMETER Style AF
.032 ± .010 Ø .015 ± .002 All dimensions not shown and
(0,81 ± 0,25) DEEP (0,38 ± 0,05) front views same as style AP.
.250 .500 ± .020

± .015 (12,7 ± 0,51) .109 ± .010
Shaft Actuated .375 ± .015 (6,35 (2,77 ± 0,25)
(9,53 ± 0,38) ± 0,38)
.032 (0,81) SHOULDER
.250 REF. DIAMETER
± .015
Ø .031 ± .002
(6,35
Rotary Switches
± 0,38) (0,76 ± 0,05)
9
.298 ± .010
(7,57 ± 0,25)
10
Rear view shown
DIA. on next page.
.203 ± .003 1
(5,16 ± 0,08)
2
ACROSS FLATS
OF BUSHING Ø .125 + .001/ - .002 TERMINAL
(3,18 + 0,03/ - 0,51) Style BP DIAMETER
1/4-32 UNF-2A Ø .015 ± .002
108°
THREAD (0,38 ± 0,05)
.550 ± .020
(13,97 ± 0,51)
CL OF .109 ± .010
POSITION 1 (2,77 ± 0,25)
9
.094 ± .015
(2,39 ± 0,38)
10
Rear view shown

on next page.
1
All dimensions not shown and

2
front views same as style BP.

Style BF
Integral Knob Actuated
.298 ± .010 .539 ± .020
.489 ± .020
(7,57 ± 0,25) (13,69 ± 0,51)
(12,42 ± 0,51) .109 ± .010
DIA.
(2,77 ± 0,25) .109 ± .010
.032 (0,81) (2,77 ± 0,25)
SHOULDER
.115 ± .010 REF. DIAMETER
(2,92 ± 0,25)
Ø .031 ± .002
(0,76 ± 0,05)
9
9
10
10
Rear view shown

on next page.
1
1
CLOF
2
2
POSITION 1 TERMINAL
Style CP DIAMETER Style CF
Ø .015 ± .002
All dimensions not shown and
(0,38 ± 0,05)
front views same as style CP.
Grayhill part number and date code marked on label.

Customer part number marked on request.
Rotary
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS AND REAR VIEWS

COMMON LOCATION
Style P FOR A SINGLE POLE
Style F
Circle of terminal centers is SWITCH Circle of terminal centers is
Ø .187 ± .010 (4,75 ± 0,25). Ø .300 ± .010 (7,62 ± 0,25).
.298 ± .010
COMMON LOCATION
(7,57 ± 0,25)
FOR A TWO POLE
SWITCH LOCATED ON
.064 ± .010 (1,63 ± 0,25)
DIA. CIRCLE OF CENTERS
36° ± 3° 36° ± 3°
TYP. TYP.
Screwdriver Actuated Integral Knob Actuated Shaft Actuated
Dot on actuator is next to contacting position of pole 1. Line on knob points to contacting position of pole 1. Shaft flat opposite point of contact of pole 1.
8 8 8 8 8 8
7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7 9
36° ANGLE
OF THROW 6 10 6 10 6 10 6 10 6 10 6 10
Switch is viewed
from actuator end 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1
and shown in
Position 1. 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
3 3 3 3 3 3
ONE POLE TWO POLE ONE POLE TWO POLE ONE POLE TWO POLE
SPECIFICATIONS Voltage Breakdown: 500 Vac between mutually Stop Pin: Stainless steel, passivated
Electrical Ratings insulated parts. Detent Balls: Steel, nickel-plated
Chart shown for non-shorting (break before Life Expectancy: 10,000 cycles at 200 milliamps. Detent and Contact Springs: Tinned music
make) contacts, resistive load. One cycle is 360° rotation and a return through all wire
300
switch positions to the starting position. Rotor Contact: Silver cad-oxide, gold-plated
B Low Level Rating: Make and break a 50 mV, 1 Terminals and Common: Brass, gold plate
(MILLIAMPS)
milliamp, resistive load for 10,000 cycles with a .00002" minimum thickness over silver plate
CURRENT
200
A maximum contact resistance of 50 milliohms. .0003" minimum.
100 Shaft in Style BF or BP: Zinc
Contact Grayhill for information if the life limiting Integral Knob and Detent Rotor in Style CF or
0 criteria is more critical than those listed, if the CP: Red Thermoplastic
0 5 10 15
required cycles of operation are greater than Mounting Hardware for Style BF or BP: One
CYCLES x 1,000
CURVE A: 220 Vac those listed, if a larger make and break current is mounting nut .062" thick by .312" across flats
CURVE B: 115 Vac or 30 Vdc required than the one listed for the desired number and one external tooth lockwasher supplied
Rotary Switches
One cycle is 360° rotation and a return through of cycles, or if elevated temperatures or reduced with each switch. Mounting nut is brass, zinc
all switch positions to the starting position. The pressures are part of the operating environment. plated and lockwasher is spring steel.
data for the curve was measured at sea level,
25°C and 68% relative humidity with the Materials and Finishes Additional Characteristics
following limiting criteria: Switch Base: Diallyl per MIL-M-14 Contact Type: Non-shorting, wiping contacts
Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximum Detent Cover and Detent Rotor in Styles AP, Terminals: Switches are provided with the full
(15 milliohms initially). AF, BP, and BF: Phenolic per MIL-M-14 circle of terminals regardless of the number of
Insulation Resistance: 10,000 Mohms Bushing: Brass, tin zinc plating active positions.
minimum between mutually insulated parts. Stop Strength: 8 ounce-inches minimum
CHOICES AND LIMITATIONS

Style and Designation Number of Decks
Ø 0.187 (4,75) Ø 0.300 (7,62) Angle Poles Non- Number of
Circle of Term. Circle of Term. Of Throw Stops Terminal Per Deck Shorting Shorting Positions/Pole
AP = Screwdriver AF = Screwdriver
Actuated Actuated 36° Fixed Printed 1 Not 1 2 thru 10
BP = Shaft Operated BF = Shaft Operated 2 Available 1 2 thru 5
CP = Integral Knob CF = Integral Knob
Series For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
Style: Letters from Choices and Limitations Chart Office, an authorized local Distributor, or Grayhill.
Angle of Throw: 36° only
75AP36–01–1–10N–C
Stop Arrangement: The suffix C or F must be added to a
one pole per deck switch to indicate continuous rotation (C) or fixed stop
(F) between position 1 and position 10.
Type of Contacts: N=Non-shorting only
Positions per Pole: requires 02 positions as a minimum to
maximum allowable dependent on the poles per deck
Poles per Deck: 1 or 2 poles available
Number of Decks: 1 deck only
Rotary
SERIES 50 SERIES 51
0.5" Diameter, 200mA,
.698" Behind Panel
FEATURES
• Optional Complete Seal for
PC Board Assembly and Cleaning
• Small 1/2" Diameter
• Choice of 22.5°, 30°, 36°, 45°, 60°
and 90° Angles of Throw
• Up to 4 Poles on 1 Deck
• Up to 16 Positions Per Switch
• PC or Solder Lug Termination
• Positive Shaft Grounding for
EMI/RFI Shielding
PC Mount Style .250±.015 DIMENSION "B"

Side View
(6,35±0,38) All others as shown at left
.375±.015
.203 ± .003 (9,53±0,38)
(5,16 ± 0,08) .125±.015
.171 ± .015
ACROSS (3,18±0,38)
(4,34 ± 0,38)
FLATS .250±.015
(6,35±0,38) .125 (3,18)
A REF.
GRAYHILL
TERMINALS ARE
2 1 10 9
.016 ± .003 (0,41 ± 0,08) SQ.

DIMENSION
D COMMON Ø .025 ± .002
(0,64 ± 0,06) AND EXTEND
POS. 1 TO SAME PLANE AS
Rotary Switches
OPTIONAL POSITION TERMINALS

PANEL SEAL Ø.125 +.001- .002
TERMINAL SEALANT
GASKET (3,18 + 0,03 -0,05) TERMINAL
1/4-28 UNF-2A IN STYLE T
THREAD SEALANT
.093 ± .005 IN STYLE "T" PC COMMON DETAIL
(2,36 ± 0,13) PC TERMINAL DETAIL All angles of throw, except 22.5°
All angles of throw, except 22.5°
Grayhill part number and date code
marked on label. Customer part .125 ± .015 .171 ± .015
number marked on request. Military (3,18 ± 0,38) .020 ± .004 (4,34 ± 0,38)
part number marked when required. (0,51 ± 0,10)
.020 ± .003 .062 ± .003 Ø .025 ± .002

(0,51 ± 0,08) (1,57 ± 0,08) (0,64 ± 0,05)
Angle of Angle Angle of Angle
Throw A Throw A
Dimension Series 50 Series 51 Dimension Style T All Others All 22.5°
22.5° 101.25° 45° 112.5°
30° 105° 60° 120° .500 ± .015 .562 ± .015 .576 ± .015 .537 ± .015 .537 ± .015
D B (14,63 ± 0,38) (13,64 ± 0,38) (13,64 ± 0,38)
36° 108° 90° 135° (12,70 ± 0,38) (14,27 ± 0,38)
Solder Lug Style SOLDER LUG TERMINAL DETAIL

All angles of throw, except 22.5°
.250±.015
.658±.015
(6,35±0,38) .064 ± .005 .020 ± .004
(16,71±0,38)
(1,63 ± 0,13) (0,51 ± 0,10)
.375±.015
.234±.015
(9,53±0,38)
(5,94±0,38)
.250±.015 .153±.015
(6,35±0,38) .032 ± .004 .062 ± .004
(3,89±0,38)
(0,81 ± 0,10) (1,57 ± 0,10)
2 1 10 9
GRAYHILL
SOLDER LUG TERMINAL DETAIL 22.5°
.064 ± .005 .016 ± .004

(1,63 ± 0,13) (0,41 ± 0,10)
Ø.125 + .001 - .002 TERMINAL

(3,18 + 0,03 - 0,05) SEALANT
1/4-28 UNF-2A IN STYLE "T"
Front view same as THREAD
.021 ± .004 .046 ± .004
PC Mount style. (0,53 ± 0,10) (1,17 ± 0,10)
Rotary
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS AND REAR VIEWS: Solder Lug and PC Mount

Rear View Circuit as Viewed From Shaft End
SOLDER LUG PC MOUNT
COMMON TERMINAL .500 ± .015
(1 POLE) (12,7 ± 0,13)
.382 ± .015 (9,70 ± 0,13) 12 13 12 13
DIA. CIRCLE 11 14
DIAMETER CIRCLE OF 11 14
OF CENTERS 15 15
TERMINAL CENTERS 10 10
9 C2
16 9 16 22.5° Angle
.156 ± .015
.156 ± .015
(3,96 ± 0,13) 11.25˚ (3,96 ± 0,13)
8 C1 1 8 1 of Throw
11.25˚ 7 2 2
POS. 1 7
POS. 1 6 3 3
22.5˚ 5 4 6
22.5˚ LOCATION 5 4
LOCATION OF COMMONS
OF COMMONS ONE POLE TWO POLES
2 POLES
2 POLES
COMMON TERMINAL
(1 POLE)
COMMON TERMINAL (1 POLE)

.382 ± .005 (9,70 ± 0,13) 9 10 9 10
DIAMETER CIRCLE OF 8 11 8 11
TERMINAL CENTERS 7 12 7 C2 12
.156 ± .005 (3,96 ± 0,13) 6 1 6 C1 1

15˚
POS. 1 5 2 5 2
30˚ LOCATION OF COMMONS 4 3 4 3
2 POLES ONE POLE TWO POLES
30° Angle
8
9 10
11 8
9 10
11
of Throw
.175 ± .005 7 12 C3
C3 7 C4
12
POS. 1 DIM. A ± POS. 1 (4,45 ± 0,13) C2 C2
DIAMETER 6 C1 1 6 C1 1
.005 (0,13)
POLE 1 POLE 1 CIRCLE OF
COMMON 5 2 5 2
4 3 4 3
THREE POLES FOUR POLES CENTERS
Dimension A, diameter circle of common centers, THREE POLES FOUR POLES
is .175 (4,45) for Solder Lug and .232 (5,89) for PC.

8 8
9
Rotary Switches
.320 ± .015 (8,13 ± 0,38) DIAMETER 7 7 9
CIRCLE OF TERMINAL CENTERS 10 10
6 6 C2
36° Angle
.125 ± .015
(3,18 ± 0,38)
5 1 5 C1 1 of Throw
18˚
POS. 1 4 2 4 2
3 3
36˚ LOCATION OF COMMONS
2 POLES ONE POLE TWO POLES

.320 ± .015 (8,13 ± 0,38) DIAMETER 6 7
6 7
CIRCLE OF TERMINAL CENTERS
5 8 8
5
.125 ± .015
C2
45° Angle
22.5˚
(3,18 ± 0,38) 4 1
4
C1
1 of Throw
POS. 1 3 2
LOCATION OF COMMONS 3 2
45˚ 2 POLES ONE POLE TWO POLES

.320 ± .015 (8,13 ± 0,38) DIAMETER 5 5
4 6 4 6
C2
.125 ± .015 60° Angle
(3,18 ± 0,38)
30˚ 3 1 3
C1
1
of Throw
POS. 1 LOCATION OF COMMONS 2
2
60˚ 2 POLES
ONE POLE TWO POLES

LOCATION OF COMMONS
.320 ± .015 (8,13 ± 0,38) 2 POLES 3 4 3 4
DIAMETER CIRCLE OF C2
TERMINAL CENTERS .125 ± .015 90° Angle
(3,18 ± 0,38) C1
of Throw
45˚ 2 1 2 1
POS. 1 ONE POLE TWO POLES

90˚
Rotary
SPECIFICATIONS
Military Qualification Electrical Ratings
The dimensions for qualified switches are the Life Expectancy: With the limiting criteria stated Contact Resistance: 20 milliohms maximum,
same as those indicated in the drawings of here, the Series 50 and 51 with non-shorting (10 milliohms initially).
standard switches. Switches with standard contacts will switch the following loads at Insulation Resistance: 1,000 Mohms
variations, such as shaft and bushing length, atmospheric and reduced pressures for 25,000 minimum between mutually insulated parts.
which do not affect switch performance, can cycles of operations. One cycle is 360° rotation Voltage Breakdown: 600 Vac minimum
be marked as qualified product. Contact clockwise and 360° return. between mutually insulated parts at standard
Grayhill for complete information on variations. atmospheric pressure.
At 85°C, atmospheric pressure Life Expectancy: Listed for the voltage source
36°, 45°, 60°, 90° (Series 50): The C and M 200 mA, 28 Vdc resistive and make and break current levels. Contact
style switches are qualified to MIL-S-3786/20. 150 mA, 115 Vac resistive Grayhill for more information if any of the
They include the following: 30 mA, 28 Vdc inductive following is true: the life limiting criteria are
Solder lug or PC terminals 100 mA, 28 Vdc lamp load more critical than those listed; longer operation
With or without panel seal 75 mA, 220 Vac lamp load is required; a larger make and break current is
Series 50 qualified switches may be ordered required; the operating environment includes
by the ‘M’ number or by the Grayhill part At 25°C, reduced pressure (70,000 feet) elevated temperatures or reduced pressures.
number. 200 mA, 28 Vdc resistive Contact Carry Rating: Switch will carry 6
30° (Series 51): The C and M style switches 150 mA, 115 Vac resistive amperes continuously with a maximum
are qualified to MIL-S-3786/35. They include 75 mA, 220 Vac resistive contact temperature rise of 20°C.
the following:
Solder lug or PC terminals
With or without panel seal
Series 51 qualified switches may be ordered
by the ‘M’ number or by the Grayhill part
number.
SPECIFICATIONS: Other
Additional Characteristics Materials and Finishes Panel Seal: Silicone rubber

Rotary Switches
Contact Type and Forces: Shorting or non- Switch Base: Thermoset Shaft Seal: Fluorosilicone
shorting wiping contacts with over 80 grams of Detent Rotor: Nylon Mounting Nuts: Brass, tin-zinc plated
contact force. Shaft, Stop Blades, Stop Arm, Thrust washer, Mounting Hardware: One mounting nut .089"
Shaft Flat Orientation: Flat opposite contacting and Retaining Ring: Stainless steel thick by .375" across flats and one internal
position of pole number one (see circuit Detent Balls: Steel, nickel-plated tooth lockwasher are supplied with the switch.
diagrams). Bushing: Zinc, tin-zinc plated Maximum Mounting Torque: 15in-lbs
Terminals: Switches have the full circle of Detent and Contact Springs: Stainless steel
terminals, regardless of number of active Common Ring: Brass, gold-plated over silver
position. plate.
Stop Strength: 7.5 pound-inches minimum Terminals: Brass, gold-plated over silver plate
Rotational Torque: 8–24 ounce-inches, and nickel plate
depending on the number of poles. Rotor Contact: Precious metal alloy, gold-
plated
PROCESS SEALED–Style T 1/4" SHAFT: Style K

Switch can be mounted on PC board with other
.250
components and subjected to wave soldering .219 ±.015
and conventional board cleaning techniques. ±.004
.250 +.002
No secondary wiring or soldering is necessary. -.001
Bushing is o-ring sealed; epoxy potting seals

the terminals and the rear of the switch. De-
signed for PC assembly, this sealing technique .250
can also be applied to solder lug terminal .340 ±.015 3/8-32 UNEF-2A
switches. A bushing to panel seal can also be ±.005 .375 THREAD
added to the process sealed versions. Military ±.015
qualified versions are available, see ordering
information.
1/8"Shaft "E" Style "K" Style
CIRCLE SHOWING Ø0.380
DIMENSIONS OF Ø0.254 Ø0.280
HOLE TO BE CUT
IN PANEL. POS. 1 POS. 1 POS. 1
0.208
0.240 0.350
Rotary
SUGGESTED ADJUSTABLE STOP ADJUSTABLE STOPS: Style D

Stop
SUBSTITUTION GUIDE Adjustable stops permit the user to set and Blade
reset the number of positions per poles. Shown Slots
Fixed Adj. Stop Fixed Adj. Stop in the diagram, a plastic washer can be removed
Stop Style Stop Style to reveal slots at the base of the bushing. Stop
Style Equivalent Style Equivalent
blades can be inserted into the appropriate slots
50A 50D 51A 51D
50C 50CD 51C 51CD
to limit switch rotation. Positions per pole
50CP 50CDP 51CP 51CDP configuration can thus be changed to meet the
50M 50CD* 51M 51CD* needs of the application. Dimensions are the Plastic
50MP 50CDP* 51MP 51CDP*
50P 50DP 51P 51DP
same as the fixed stop version, when plastic Washer Stop
50S 50D* 51S 51D* washer is in place. Most desirable for prototype Blades
50SP 50DP* 51SP 51DP* work. Readily available from local distributor.
*Form fit and function equivalents, but not watertight sealed to
the panel.
ACCESSORY: Non-Turn Washers
In Inches (and millimeters)
SHAFT AND PANEL SEAL: Styles S and M .400 .025

± .005 ± .001
DIA. (0,64
Shaft and panel seal switches (10,16 ± 0,03)
are watertight to the panel. They ± 0,13)
90° ± 1°
are not totally process sealed
like the Style “T”. Panel is sealed .250 ± .003
.015
(6,35 ± 0,08)
by a gasket at the base of the (0,38)
bushing. Shaft is sealed by an RADIUS
MAX.
O-ring inside the bushing. After
.125
mounting, seals do not alter .060 ± .001
± .005
switch dimensions. See Style (1,52 ± 0,25)
(3,16
SEAL ± 0,13)
“S” (standard switches) and Part No. 50J1066
Style “M” (military switches) in Cut round hole for the bushing and for the
the Choices and Limitations non-turn tab. Washer fits the double D
chart. bushing flats. Washer is sold only when
accompanied by an order for a like number
of switches. Washer is 302 stainless steel.
SCREWDRIVER SLOTTED SHAFT: Style B
Rotary Switches
Dimensions are in millimeters
Form, fit and function equiva- 11,13 0,64
lent to standard shaft switches. ± 0,13 ± 0,05
.032±.005 .125±.015 The dimensions shown have DIA.
(0,81±0,13) (3,18±0,38)
evolved as the most popular for
"A" this type of switch. See Style “B” 90˚ ± 1˚
in the Choices and Limitations .015
chart. Previous users may have (0,38)
ordered these switches by a RADIUS
CL
MAX.
non-descriptive part number 5,08
.050±.005 containing a “Y”. Contact ± 0,05 2,36
(1,27±0,13) Grayhill, if in doubt about a ± 0,13
1,57 ± 0,08
cross-reference.
Part No. 71J1103
Designed to fit the double flatted bushing
of the metric dimensioned bushing, this
METRIC SHAFT AND BUSHING: Style E non-turn washer permits a round hole for
the bushing and the tab while still prevent-
Metric standard dimensions for ing switch rotation. Washer is only sold
9,53 the shaft and bushing are shown when accompanied by a like number of
±0,38
7,0 in the drawing. Other dimensions switches. Washer is 302 stainless steel.
6,0±0,08 6,35 ±0,51
±0,38)
approximately the same as
"A" shown in dimensional drawing. 0.032
Contact Grayhill for exact
dimensions. See Style “E” in
the Choices and Limitations
chart.
3,15 4,0
M7 x 0,75 0.375
±0,12 ±0,03
0.187
0.125
Part No. 50J5140-4

Designed to fit the single flatted bushing of
the "K" style switches, this non-turn washer
prevents switch rotation when using a full
round hole in the panel. Washer is only sold
when accompanied by a like number of
switches. Washer is 302 stainless steel.
Rotary
CHOICES AND LIMITATIONS: Series 50

A = Standard, 1/8" Shaft E = Metric, 4mm Shaft P = PC Mount Terminals
B = Screwdriver Slot Shaft K = 1/4" Shaft S = Shaft/Panel Seal (S/P Seal)
C = Military, Without Panel Seal M = Military T = Process Sealed
D = Adjustable Stop (Adj. Stop)
Standard Style
Angle Number Number of Shorting or
Style Choices1 of of Positions Non-Shorting
Series Std., 1/8" Shaft 1/4" Shaft Metric, 4mm Shaft Terminals Throw Poles Per Pole Contacts
1 02 thru 10 N or S
A 36° 2 02 thru 05 N or S
K E
AT
KS ES
B 1 02 thru 08 N
KST EST 45°
BS 2 02 thru 04 N
KT ET Solder
BST
KB EB Lug 1 02 thru 06 N
BT
KBS EBS 60° 2 02 or 03 N
D
KBST EBST
S
KT EBT 1 02 thru 04 N
ST
90° 2 02 N
50
BP 1 02 thru 10 N or S
KP EP 36° 2 02 thru 05 N or S
BPT
KPT EPT
BSP 1 02 thru 08 N
KSP ESP
BSPT 45° 2 02 thru 04 N
KSPT ESPT
DP PC Mount
KBP EBP
P 1 02 thru 06 N
KBSP EBSP 60°
PT 2 02 or 03 N
KBSPT KBSPT
SP
KBT EBT 1 02 thru 04 N
SPT
90° 2 02 N
Rotary Switches
Military Style
Style Choices of of Positions Non-Shorting
1 02 thru 10 N or S
C 36° 2 02 thru 05 N or S
CB
CBT KM 1 02 thru 08 N
EM 45°
CD KMB 2 02 thru 04 N
EMB Solder
CT KMBT EMBT Lug 1 02 thru 06 N
M KMT EMT 60° 2 02 or 03 N
MB
MBT
1 02 thru 04 N
MT 90° 2 02 N
50
1 02 thru 10 N or S
CBP 36° 2 02 thru 05 N or S
CBPT
CDP KMBP EMBP 1 02 thru 08 N
CP KMBPT EMBPT 45° 2 02 thru 04 N
CPT KMP EMP PC Mount
MBP KMPT EMPT 1 02 thru 06 N
MBPT 60° 2 02 or 03 N
MP
MPT 1 02 thru 04 N
90° 2 02 N
Rotary

A = Standard, 1/8" Shaft E = Metric, 4mm Shaft P = PC Mount Terminals
B = Screwdriver Slot Shaft K = 1/4" Shaft S = Shaft/Panel Seal (S/P Seal)
C = Military, Without Panel Seal M = Military T = Process Sealed
Standard Style
Style Choices1 of of Positions Non-Shorting
Series Std., 1/8" Shaft 1/4" Shaft Metric, 4mm Shaft1 Terminals Throw Poles Per Pole Contacts
A AT Solder 1 02 thru 16 N or S
B BT SEE BELOW SEE BELOW 22.5°
Lug 2 02 thru 08 N or S
S ST
BS BST
A
AT 1 02 thru 12 N or S
B K E 2 02 thru 06 N or S
BS KS ES 30° 3 02 thru 04 N or S
Solder
BST KST EST Lug 4 02 or 03 N or S
BT KT ET
D
51 S
ST
P PT
BP BPT SEE BELOW SEE BELOW PC Mount 22.5° 1 02 thru 16 N or S
SP SPT 2 02 thru 08 N or S
BSP BSPT
BP
BPT KP
Rotary Switches
EP 1 02 thru 12 N or S
BSP KPT EPT
BSPT 2 02 thru 06 N or S
KSP ESP PC Mount 30°
DP KSPT 3 02 thru 04 N or S
ESPT
P 4 02 or 03 N or S
PT
SP
SPT
Military Style
Style Choices of of Positions Non-Shorting
C
CB
CBT KM EM 1 02 thru 12 N or S
CD KMB EMB Solder 2 02 thru 06 N or S
CT 30°
KMBT EMBT Lug 3 02 thru 04 N or S
M KMT EMT 4 02 or 03 N or S
MB
MBT
MT
51
CBP
CBPT
CDP
KMBP EMBP 1 02 thru 12 N or S
CP
KMBPT EMBPT 2 02 thru 06 N or S
CPT PC Mount 30°
KMP EMP 3 02 thru 04 N or S
MBP
KMPT EMPT 4 02 or 03 N or S
MBPT
MP
MPT
1
Contact Grayhill if 1/4" or metric shaft required with a 22.5° angle of throw.
Rotary
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Economy keylock switch, isolated position,
spring return, and coded switches are available
in similar series. See Keylock and Special
Function Rotary Switch sections.

ORDERING INFORMATION: Series 50
Series: Series 50 (36°, 45°, 60°, or 90°)

Style*: Letters from Choices Chart
Angle of Throw: 36, 45, 60, or 90
50AT36–01–1–10N–F
Stop Arrangement: Needed only with 1 pole switches with
maximum positions. Leave blank for continuous rotation;
add F for fixed stop.
Type of Contacts: N = Non-shorting, S = Shorting
Positions Per Pole: 02 as a minimum to the maximum allowable
for the angle of throw and the number of poles per the Choices Chart.
Use Letters AJ in this location if adjustable stop switch is ordered.
Poles per Deck: See chart
Number of Decks: 01 only
* All rotary switches that are required to have military designated markings and testing adhering to MIL-3786 are to be ordered by specifying
the military part number identified on the appropriate slash sheet.
ORDERING INFORMATION: Series 51

Rotary Switches
Series: Series 51 (30°; 22.5°)

Style*: Letters from Choices Chart
Angle of Throw: Use 22 (for 22.5°), 30
51SPT30–01–1–12S–F
Stop Arrangement: Needed only with 1 pole switches with
maximum positions. Leave blank for continuous rotation;
add F for fixed stop.
Positions Per Pole: 02 as a minimum to the maximum allowable
for the angle of throw and the number of poles per the Choices Chart.
Use Letters AJ in this location if adjustable stop switch is ordered.
Poles per Deck: See chart
Rotary
SERIES 56
0.5" Diameter, 200mA,
.355" Behind Panel
FEATURES
• Requires Minimum Distance Behind
the Panel
• Adjustable Stop Types Provide
Prototypes Immediately
• Industrial Quality, Economically
Priced
• RoHS Compliant
PC Mount Style
.377
.203 ± .003 .250 ± .015 PC TERMINAL DETAIL
± .020
(5,16 ± 0,08) (6,35 ± 0,38) .110 ± .015
(9,58 .016 ± .004
ACROSS .375 ± .015 ± 0,51) (2,79 ± 0,38) (0,4 ± 0,10)
BUSHING (9,53 ± 0,38) .110
FLATS ± .015
.250 ± .015
A (6,35 ± 0,38) (2,79
± 0,38) .016 ± .004 SQ. .046 ± .004
2 1 10 9
GRAYHILL
.500
(0,4 ± 0,10) (1,2 ± 0,10)
Ø
± .015 FOR REAR
(12,70 VIEWS, SEE
± 0,25) POS. 1 FOLLOWING
Ø .125 ± .002 PAGE.
(3,18 ± 0,06) PC COMMON
.110 ± .015
Rotary Switches
(2,79 ± 0,38)
.094 ± .010 1/4-28 UNEF-2A
(2,39 ± 0,25) THREAD
Ø .025 ± .002
ANGLE OF ANGLE (0,64 ± 0,05)
THROW A
30° 105°
36° 108°
Solder Lug Style

SOLDER LUG TERMINAL DETAIL
.203 ± .003 .250 ± .015 .480 ± .020
(5,16 ± 0,08) (6,35 ± 0,38) (12,19 ± 0,51) .063 ± .005 .016 ± .004
ACROSS (1,60 ± 0,13) (0,41 ± 0,10)
BUSHING .375 ± .015
FLATS (9,53 ± 0,38) .125 ± .015
.250 ± .015 (3,18 ± 0,38)
A (6,35 ± 0,38)
2 1 10 9
GRAYHILL
.500 FOR REAR .020 ± .004 .046 ± .004

Ø VIEWS, SEE (0,51 ± 0,10) (1,17 ± 0,10)
± .015 FOLLOWING
(12,70 PAGE.
± 0,38) POS. 1 Ø .125 ± .002
(3,18 ± 0,06) SOLDER LUG COMMON
.125 ± .015
(3,18 ± 0,38)
.094 ± .010 1/4-28 UNF-2A
(2,39 ± 0,25) THREAD
ANGLE OF ANGLE Ø .062 ± .002

THROW A (1,58 ± 0,51)
30° 105°
36° 108° Grayhill part number and date code marked on label.
Rotary
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS AND REAR VIEWS: PC Mountable AND Solder Lug Terminals
Rear View Circuit as Viewed From Shaft End
.366 ± .015 .366 ± .015

(9,30 ± 0,38) (9,30 ± 0,38) 9 10
DIA. CIRCLE DIA. CIRCLE 8 11
OF CENTERS OF CENTERS
7 12 30° Angle
.190 ± .015 (4,83 ± 0,38) .190 ± .015 (4,83 ± 0,38)
DIA. CIRCLE OF CENTERS DIA. CIRCLE OF CENTERS
6 1 of Throw
15° 15°
(PC MOUNT AND (PC MOUNT AND 5 2
POS. 1 SOLDER LUG) POS. 1 SOLDER LUG) 4 3
30° TYP. 30° TYP. ONE POLE
COMMON LOCATION
FOR 2 POLE SWITCH
9 10 9 10
8 11 8 11
C3
7 C2 12 7 C4
12
COMMON LOCATION C2
FOR 1 POLE SWITCH 6 C1 1 6 C1 1
5 2 5 2
4 3 4 3
TWO POLES FOUR POLES

.340 ± .015
(8,64 ± 0,38) DIA.
CIRCLE OF CENTERS 8 8
7 9 7 9
10 10
DIMENSION A
6 6 C2
36° Angle
18° DIA. CIRCLE OF CENTERS
5 1 5 C1 1 of Throw
POS. 1
36° TYP. 4 2 4 2
3 3
COMMON LOCATION PC Mount Solder Lug
FOR 2 POLE SWITCH ONE POLE TWO POLES
Dimension Terminals Terminals
COMMON LOCATION A .184 ± .015 .126 ± .015

FOR 1 POLE SWITCH (4,67 ± 0,38) (3,20 ± 0,38)
Rotary Switches
SPECIFICATIONS
Chart shown for non-shorting (break before make) critical than those listed; longer operation is Housing: Zinc die cast, tin zinc plated
contacts, resistive load. required; a larger make and break current is Mounting Nut: Brass, tin zinc plated
required; the operating environment includes Lockwasher: Spring steel, zinc plated
elevated temperatures or reduced pressures. Panel Seal: Silicone rubber
CURRENT - MILLIAMPS
Contact Carry Rating: Switch will carry 6 Shaft and Stop Arm: Zinc die cast
300
amperes continuously with a maximum Retaining Ring: 302 Stainless steel, passivated
200 contact temperature rise of 20°C. Shaft Seal: Silicone rubber
Stop Pins: 303 Stainless steel, passivated
100
Additional Characteristics Detent Rotor: Molded thermoplastic
0 Contact Type and Forces: Shorting or non- Detent Spring: Tinned music wire
0 10 20 30 shorting wiping contacts with over 25 grams of Detent Balls: Steel, nickel-plated
CYCLES x 1000 contact force. Contact Spring: Stainless steel, passivated
115 Vac 0r 30 Vdc Shaft Flat Orientation: Flat opposite contacting Rotor Contact: Brass, silver over nickel plate
position of pole number one (see circuit diagrams). Common Ring: Brass, gold over silver over
One cycle is 360° rotation clockwise and 360° nickel plate
Terminals: Switches have the full circle of
return. The data for the curve was measured at Terminals: Brass, gold over silver over nickel
terminals, regardless of number of active positions.
sea level, 25°C and 68% relative humidity with plate
Stop Strength: 7.5 lb-in. minimum
the life limiting criteria which follows. Switch Base: Molded thermoset plastic
Rotational Torque: 3.5 to 9 oz-in. (21-53 mN-
Contact Resistance: 100 milliohms maximum, Mounting Hardware: One mounting nut .089"
m), depending on the number of poles.
(15 milliohms initially). thick by .375" across flats and one internal tooth
Bushing Mounting: Required for switches with
Insulation Resistance: 10,000 Mohms lockwasher are supplied with the switch.
stops, and recommended for switches without
minimum between mutually insulated parts
stops.
(50,000 Mohms initially).
Meets MIL-S-3786 for:
Voltage Breakdown: 600 Vac minimum
High and medium shock; Vibration (10 to 2,000
between mutually insulated parts at standard
Hz); Thermal shock (-65° to 85 ° C); Salt spray;
atmospheric pressure.
Explosion; Stop strength (7.5 in-lbs. minimum
Life Expectancy: As determined from the load-
(.85 N-m); Terminal strength; Sealed styles
life curve for the current to be switched. Contact
withstand water pressure of 15 PSI minimum
GRAYHILL for more information if any of the
(103 KPa) without leakage.
following is true: the life limiting criteria are more
Rotary
SHAFT AND PANEL SEAL: Style S
Panel is sealed by a flat rubber

seal washer at the base of bush-
ing. Shaft is sealed by an O-
ring inside the bushing. After
the switch is mounted, seals do
not alter the dimensions of the Shaft and
unsealed style. Panel Seal
SEAL
SCREWDRIVER SLOTTED SHAFT: Option
.125 ± .015
(3,18 ± 0,38) Series 56 rotary switches are
.050 ± .005 available with a screwdriver
(1,27 ± 0,13)
.032 ± .005 slotted shaft with dimensions Screwdriver
(0,81 ± 0,13) A as shown. Available in the Slotted Shaft
styles, angles of throw and pole/
positions combinations shown
in the choice and limitations
chart.
ADJUSTABLE STOP SWITCHES

Adjustable
Two stop pins and an adhesive backed sticker desired to limit the shaft rotation. All dimensions
Rotary Switches
Stop
or seal washer are provided. Sticker is are identical to the fixed stop switch counterpart.
temporarily removed to locate stop pins as
ACCESSORY: Non-Turn Washer

In Inches (and millimeters)
.400 .025
ADJUSTABLE ± .005 ± .001
ADJUSTABLE
STOP PINS DIA. (0,64
STOP PINS
(10,16 ± 0,03)
REMOVABLE REMOVABLE ± 0,13)
90° ± 1°
STICKER FOR SEAL WASHER
ADJUSTMENT FOR ADJUSTMENT .250 ± .003
OF STOPS OF STOPS .015
(6,35 ± 0,08)
(0,38)
RADIUS
MAX.
.125
.060 ± .001
± .005
(1,52 ± 0,25)
(3,16
SUGGESTED ADJUSTABLE STOP SUBSTITUTION GUIDE ± 0,13)
Fixed Stop Adjustable Stop Fixed Stop Adjustable Stop Part No. 50J1066
Style Style Equivalent Style Style Equivalent Cut round hole for the bushing and for the
56A 56D 56B 56BD non-turn tab. Washer fits the double D
56S 56SD 56BS 56BSD bushing flats. Washer is sold only when
56P 56DP 56BP 56BDP accompanied by an order for a like number
56SP 56SDP 56BSP 56BSDP of switches. Washer is 302 stainless steel.
Rotary

A = Standard, 1/8" Shaft P = PC Mount Terminals
B = Screwdriver Slot Shaft S = Shaft/Panel Seal (S/P Seal)
FEATURES Screwdriver Angle Number Number Of Shorting Or

Style Solder Lug PC Mount Shaft/Panel Adjustable Slotted Shaft Of Of Positions Non-Shorting
Designation Terminals Terminals Seal Stops1 Equivalent Throw Poles Per Pole Contacts
A X B
S X X BS 1 02 thru 12 N or S
P X BP 30° 2 02 thru 06 N or S
4 02 or 03 N or S
SP X X BSP
D X X BD
SD X X X BSD 1 02 thru 10 N or S
DP X X BDP 36° 2 02 thru 05 N or S
SDP X X X BSDP
1
Adjustable stop versions allow selection of 2 positions to the maximum number of positions per pole.
STANDARD OPTIONS ORDERING INFORMATION

Available from your local Grayhill Distributor
For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Series
Office, an authorized local Distributor, or Grayhill. Style: Letters from Choices Chart
Not available thru Distributors when Intermixing Angle of Throw: 30 or 36°
of shorting and non-shorting contacts. Contact
Grayhill. 56A36–01–1–10N–F
Stop Arrangement: The suffix C or F must be added to a one pole
per deck switch with the maximum number of positions to indicate
continuous rotation (C) or fixed stops (F) between position 1 and
Rotary Switches
the last position.

Positions Per Pole: 02 as a minimum to the maximum
allowable for the angle of throw and number of poles per the
Choices Chart. Use the letters AJ in this location if adjustable
stop switch is to be ordered.
Poles per Deck: Limited by angle of throw. See chart
Rotary
SERIES 19
2" Diameter, 15 Amp
FEATURES
• UL Recognized
• Choice of Termination
Solder Lug Terminals ‘Faston’ Terminals Circuit Diagram viewed from

HEX MTG NUT shaft end with switch in position #1
BUSHING KEYWAY 9/16 ± .010 (14,29 ± 0,25) 9
ACROSS FLATS 8 10
.066 ± .003 WIDE All dimensions not shown
(1,68 ± 0,08) 3/32 ± .010 (2,38 ± 0,25) are the same as the 7 11
.036 ± .005 DEEP THICK Solder Lug Terminals.
6 12 (COMMON)
(0,91 ± 0,13) 3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD
OF BUSHING
5 1 KEYWAY
.344 ± .010 4 2
(8,74 ± 0,25) 3
1.687 1.687 Non-Turn Washer Detail

± .030 2.00 2.28
.88 .88 ± .030 (57,91) .625 ± .010
(22,4) (42,85 (50,8) (22,4) (42,85 DIA. (15,88 ± 0,25) .025 ± .002
± 0,76) ± 0,76) DIA. (0,64 ± 0,05)
.250 ± .005 DIA. DIA.
(6,35 ± 0,13) DIA. .219 ± .005
(5,56 ± 0,15)
.500 ± .020 .500 ± .005
(12,7 ± 1,27)
(12,7 ± 0,51)
.950
± .060 FOR AMP .250 SERIES .060 ± .010
.375 ± .020 SOLDER TERMINALS
(24,13 OR EQUIVALENT (1,52 ± 0,25)
(9,53 ± 0,51) WIRE HOLE .125 (3,18)
± 1,52) WIRE HOLE .080" (2,03)
.187 ± .003 .093 + .015/ – .000
Rotary Switches
Grayhill part number and date code marked on label. Customer part number marked on request. (4,75 ± 0,08) (2,36 + 0,38/ – 0,00)
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Rating
Rated: UL Recognition: File Number E35289 Detent Mechanism: Brass, silver-plated Part No. SC906-1 .........6-32 Thread
15 Amps, 120 Vac, non-inductive load. “Faston” Terminal: Brass, silver-plated Part No. SC906-2 .........8-32 Thread
One Amp, 120 Vdc, non-inductive load. Solder Terminal: Brass, silver-plated
Additional Grayhill Rating: 7.5 Amps, 220 Vac, Mounting Hardware: One mounting nut 9/16" Non-Turn Washer
non-inductive load. across flats, 3/32" thick and one non-turn washer Brass, tin/zinc-plated washer, detailed above
This rating is based on the following criteria: (see detail) are supplied with each switch. may be purchased as a separate item.
Overload—50 operations at 125% rated ac load Part No. 19C1014.
and 150% rated DC load. Additional Characteristics
Endurance—6000 operations at rated load with Single Pole, Single Deck: 2 to 11 positions
900 Vac dielectric strength before and after test. plus common 30° Indexing. ORDERING INFORMATION
Temperature Rise—Not to exceed 30°C when Contacts: Non-shorting type Part Numbers: Designate as follows, using the
carrying rated ac load after endurance test. Stops: A rivet provides the fixed stop on all 2 digits after the dash to indicate the number of
Contacts will carry 20 Amps at 115 volts AC with switches. Minimum number of positions is 2, positions.
30°C maximum temperature rise. and maximum is 11. Terminal 12, the common, For Faston Terminal:
Contact Resistance: (Measured at 2 Vdc and is isolated from rotation. Use 19101-02UL through 19101-11UL
approximately 100 mA) for new switch Rotational Torque: 30 to 75 ounce-inches on For Solder Terminal:
approximately 10 milliohms. a new switch. Approximately 22 ounce-inches Use 19001-02UL through 19001-11UL
Insulation Resistance: Approximately 100,000 after 25,000 cycles of operation. Specials: Not available through Distributors.
Mohms. Between mutually insulated parts. Contact Force: Approximately 12 ounces For special shafts, bushings, etc. contact Grayhill.
Voltage Breakdown: Approximately 2500 Vac Shaft Flat Orientation: Opposite point of con-
between mutually insulated parts. tact (see circuit diagram). Available from your local Grayhill
Materials and Finishes ACCESSORIES a local Sales Office, an authorized local
Rotor Contact: Silver alloy Screw Terminal Adapter Distributor or Grayhill.
Stator Contact: Silver alloy Spring loaded, plug-in adapters for ‘Faston’
Shaft: 303 Stainless steel Terminals provide excellent mechanical fit and
Stop Rivet: Steel, tin/zinc-plated electrical contact. Adapter material is brass
Mounting Bushing: Brass, tin/zinc-plated tin-plated. The terminal adapters are avail-
Base and Drive Hub: Heat resistant, electrical able with a 6-32 thread (-1) or 8-32 thread
grade phenolic. (-2). A 1/4" panhead screw is provided as
Mounting Nut: Brass, tin/zinc-plated or stain- part of the adapter.
less steel.
Rotary
SERIES 5000
1" Diameter, 1 Amp, .
470" Behind Panel
FEATURES
• High Quality at a Low Price
• High Contact Force Provides Stable
Electrical and Mechanical Operation
• Proven Reliability in Thousands of
Applications
Circuit Diagram
.312 ± .020 .490 ± .020 (Switch is viewed from shaft end.)
(7,93 ± 0,51) (12,45 ± 0,51) Note: Common Terminal is
.250 ± .020 located above Base Terminal 10.
(6,35 ± 0.51)
.250 ± .020
.564 ± .020
(6,35 ± 0.51) (14,33 ± 0,51)
.250 + .001/ – .002
(6,35 + 0,03/ – 0,05) DIA. CL
TERMINAL 9 IN LINE
7 8 OF
WITH KEYWAY
6 9 BUSHING
.823 ± .020 KEYWAY
1.015 ± .015 COMMON
.823 ± .015 (20,90 ± 0,51) 5 C1
(25,78 ± 0,38)
(20,9 ± 0,38) DIA. 10
DIA.
36° ± 5° 4 1
3 2
BUSHING KEYWAY .219 ± .005 ONE POLE

.066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE 3/8-32UNEF-2A
(5,56 ± 0,13)
.036 ± .005 (0,91 ± 0,13) DEEP THREAD
FROM THE .375 (9,53) DIAMETER
Rotary Switches
SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD OPTIONS

Electrical Rating Special Terminals
Rated: To make and break the following loads: Retaining Rings, Stop Arms, and Thrust Not available through distributors.
1 amp at 115 Vac resistive; 0.5 amp at 220 Vac Washers: Stainless steel
resistive; 1/4 amp, 115 Vac inductive; 1/50 amp, Shaft: Stainless steel ORDERING INFORMATION
115 Vdc inductive, 1/10 amp, 6 to 28 Vdc inductive; Terminals (except common): Brass, tin plated The Series 5000 switches are single deck, one
1/10 amp, 115 Vdc resistive; 1 amp, 6 to 28 Vdc Rotor Contact: Phosphor bronze, silver-plated pole switches of two to 10 positions. Ten position
resistive; to carry 10 amps continuously. .0003" minimum switches have continuous rotation. Ten position
Contact Resistance: 10 milliohms initial. After Stator (Base) Contact: Brass, silver-plated fixed stop switches are available by special
25,000 cycles of operation 20 milliohms .0003" minimum order.
maximum. Common Plate: Brass, silver-plated .0003"
Insulation Resistance: 50,000 Mohms minimum The part number is 05001-XX with the number
minimum initially Rotor Mounting Plate: Nylon fabric-based of positions required (02,03, etc.) listed in place
Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac (500 Vac, or laminated Phenolic per MIL-T-1 5047. of the XX. Complete part number by adding N
better after most environmental tests). for non-shorting contacts or S for shorting
Life Expectancy: 100,000 mechanical cycles Additional Characteristics contacts.
of operation normally. Stop Strength: 12 in-lbs
NOTE: Actual life is determined by a number of Rotational Torque: 12 in-ozs. Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
factors, including electrical loading, rate of Contacts: Shorting or non-shorting wiping For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
rotation, and environment, as well as maximum contacts with over 500 grams contact force. Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
contact resistance, minimum insulation Shaft Flat Orientation: Opposite point of
resistance, and minimum voltage breakdown contact (See circuit diagram.)
required at the end of life. Environmental: These switches have passed
the following environmental testing: Altitude
Materials and Finishes and temperature; 100 hour salt spray; Vibration
Switch Base: Melamine per MIL-M-14 (ASTM- 10 to 500 cps; Shock 30-G; Humidity; Fungus.
D-5948) Detent: A formed spring operating against a
Cover, Stop Washers, Bushing: Brass, tin/ formed wave washer.
zinc-plated
Mounting Nut: Brass, tin/zinc-plated or stainless
steel
Rotary
SERIES 24 FEATURES
1" Diameter, 1 Amp, • Positive Detent Provides Operator
.580" Behind Panel Feedback
• Stainless Steel or Plastic Shaft
Option
• Unsurpassed Performance in
Numerous Applications
Solder Lug PC Mountable Circuit Diagram

.312 ± .020 Solder Lug and PC Mount
(7,93 ± 0,51) .250 ± .020 (Switch is viewed from shaft end.)
(6,35 ± 0,51) .109 ± .015
Note: Common Terminal is
.578 ± .030 (2,77 ± 0,38)
located above Base Terminal 10.
.250 ± .020 (14,68 ± 0,76)
(6,35 ± 0,51)
CL
TERMINAL 9 IN LINE
7 8 OF
WITH KEYWAY
.250 + .001/ – .002 6 9 BUSHING

(6,35 + 0,03/ – 0,05) APPROX. KEYWAY
1.015 ± .015
DIA. .750 (19,05) DIA. OVER 5
(25,78 ± 0,38) C1
TERMINAL ENDS AT 10
DIA. INSERTION END
.531 ± .020 4 1
BUSHING KEYWAY (13,49 ± 0,51)
.066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE 3 2
.036 ± .005 (0,91 ± 0,13) DEEP
FROM THE .375 (9,53) DIAMETER ONE POLE
3/8-32UNEF-2A
THREAD Typical Terminal Detail (PC Terminal Location (PC Mount)
.564 ± .020 Mount) BASE TERMINAL .363 (9,22)
(14,33 ± 0,51) .020 ± .002 .525 TYP.
.187 ± .005 (0,51 ± 0,05) (13,34) .294 (7,47)
(4,75 ± 0,13) COMMON TERMINAL TYP. TYP.
.016 ± .002 .347 (8,81)
COMMON .937 ± .020 (0,41 ± 0,05) TYP.
(23,80 ± 0,51)
DIA. .213
36° ± 5° .050 ± .002
(1,27 ± 0,05) (5,41)
36° TYP. TYP.
.096 ± .003 REF.
Rotary Switches
(2,44 ± 0,08) .113 (2,87)
.219 ± .005 TYP.
(5,56 ± 0,13) Grayhill part number and date code marked on label. Customer part number marked on request.
SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD OPTIONS

Electrical Rating Special Terminals
Rated: To make and break the following loads: Retaining Rings, Stop Arms, and Thrust RFI Grounding
1 amp at 115 Vac, resistive; 0.5 amp at 220 Washers: Stainless steel Not available through distributors.
Vac resistive; 1/4 amp, 115 Vac inductive; 1/50 Detent Balls: Steel, nickel-plated
amp, 115 Vdc inductive; 1/10 amp, 6 to 28 Vdc Shafts: Stainless steel, or plastic ORDERING INFORMATION
inductive; 1/10 amp, 115 Vdc resistive; 1 amp, Detent: Opposing spring and ball in a hill and Switches are single deck, one pole switches of
6 to 28 Vdc resistive; to carry 10 amps continu- valley raceway. 2 to 10 positions. They have plastic or steel
ously. Detent Springs: Tinned music wire shaft, with solder lug or PC terminals, with either
Contact Resistance: 10 milliohms initial. Af- Terminals (except common): Brass, tin plated. shorting or non-shorting contacts (plastic shaft
ter 25,000 cycles of operation 20 milliohms Rotor Contact: Steel shaft version—phosphor PC mount in non-shorting only). Ten position
maximum. bronze, silver-plated .0003" minimum. Plastic switches have continuous rotation; fixed stop
Insulation Resistance: 50,000 Mohms shaft version—silver alloy. switch with a metal shaft is available by special
minimum initially Stator (Base) Contact: Brass, silver-plated order. Base part numbers are as follows:
Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac, (500 Vac, or .0003" minimum Lug style, steel shaft: 24001-X*
better after most environmental tests). Common Plate, including Solder Lug or PC Lug style, plastic shaft: 24B36-01-1-X*
Life Expectancy: 100,000 mechanical cycles Tab: Brass, silver-plated .0003" minimum PC style, steel shaft: 24878-X*
of operation normally. NOTE: Actual life is Rotor Mounting Plate: Nylon fabric-based PC style, plastic shaft: 24P36-01-1-X*
determined by a number of factors, including laminated phenolic per MIL-T-15047
electrical loading, rate of rotation, and environ- Mounting Nut: Brass, tin/zinc-plated or The X is replaced with the number of positions
ment, as well as maximum contact resistance, stainless steel. required (02, 03, etc.) Complete the part num-
minimum insulation resistance, and minimum ber by adding N for non-shorting contacts or S
voltage breakdown required at the end of life. Additional Characteristics for shorting contacts.
Stop Strength: 12 in-lbs
Materials and Finishes Rotational Torque: 12 in-ozs Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
Switch Base: Melamine per (MIL-M-14) Shaft Flat Orientation: Opposite point of con- For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
ASTM-D-5948 tact (See circuit diagram.) Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Cover, Stop Washers, Bushing: Brass, tin/ Environmental: These switches have passed
zinc-plated the following environmental testing: Altitude
Contacts: Both shorting and non-shorting and temperature, 100 hour salt spray; Vibration
wiping contacts have over 300 grams 10 to 500 cps; Shock 30-G; Humidity; Fungus.
contact force. PC Mount: PC Switches are furnished with 10
base terminals for mounting purposes.
Rotary
Rotary Switches
Contents: Mulit-Deck Rotary Switches
MULTI-DECK
ROTARY SWITCHES
• Maximal Circuitry Possibilities
• Wide Range of Sizes and
Ratings
Including Military Types
• High Current UL Types
Page
Rotary Switches
.5-.75" DIAMETER, 1/4 AMP
Standard, Military SR39, Metric, PC Mount ...... Series 71 ......................... 2
PC Mount ........................................................... Series 71 ......................... 4
Process Sealed ................................................. Series 71 ......................... 7
Concentric Shaft ................................................ Series 71 ......................... 8
Adjustable Stop, Shaft/Panel Seal, Accessories Series 71 ..................... 12
Choices Chart .................................................... Series 71 ...................... 14
.5" DIAMETER, 1/4 AMP

Standard, Military SR13 .................................... Series 08 & 09 .............. 16
PC Mount ........................................................... Series 08 & 09 .............. 18
Choices Chart .................................................... Series 08 & 09 .............. 21
1" DIAMETER, 1 AMP

Standard, Military SR04, UL.............................. Series 42, 43, 44, 54 .... 22
PC Mount ........................................................... Series 42 ...................... 24
Concentric Shaft, Add-A-Pot ............................. Series 43 & 54 .............. 25
Choices Chart .................................................... Series 42, 43, 44, 54 .... 30
Accessories ....................................................... Series 08, 12, 42 .......... 31
1.125" DIAMETER, 1/4 AMP

Military Qualified SR36 ...................................... Series 53, 57, 59 .......... 32
Choices Chart .................................................... Series 53, 57, 59 .......... 35
Rotary
Multi-Deck Rotary Switches
SERIES 71
.5-.75" Diameter, 1/4 Amp
FEATURES
• Performance and Value Leader
• Molded-In Position Terminals
• Choice of Shaft/Bushing Diameters
• 30° and 36° Angles of Throw
• Military Qualified MIL-DTL-3786/39
DIMENSIONS: Standard and Military In inches (and millimeters)
0.125" Diameter Shaft–Styles A and MA (and sealed versions) Rear Views–Style A, B, MA, MB
(and sealed versions)
30° and 36° Angle of Throw may be
.687 ± .015 .312 ± .020 DIM. A ± .046 (1,17) interposed on either shaft diameter.
(17,45 ± 0,38) (7,92 ± 0,51)
DIA. DIM. B REF. 30° Angle of Throw
.094 ± .010 .375 ± .020 STUD PROJECTION
(9,53 ± 0,51) (SEE CHARACTER- SEE DETAIL
(2,39 ± 0,25)
.250 ± .020 ISTICS) .500 ± .015
(6,35 ± 0,51) (12,7 ± 0,38)
DIA.
SEE .562
CHART ± .015
(14,27 9
10
± 0,38)
GRAYHILL
8
1
1 12 1
C
7
.125 + .001
6
–.002 DIA. 5
2
4
.203 ± .005 (3,18 + 0,25 3
Rotary Switches
(5,16 ± 0,13) –0,05) 1/4 32UNEF-2A THREAD
CL OF POSITION NO. 1
CL OF BUSHING FLATS SEE NOTE
.750 ± .020
(19,05 ± 0,51)
OVER TERMINALS
0.250" Diameter Shaft–Styles B and MB (and sealed versions)
36° Angle of Throw
.687 ± .015 .312 ± .020
(17,45 ± 0,38) (7,92 ± 0,51) SEE DETAIL
DIA.
.375 ± .020 .500 ± .015
.219 ± .004
(9,53 ± 0,51) All dimensions not shown (12,7 ± 0,38)
(5,56 ± 0,10)
are the same as above. DIA.
.250 ± .020
(6,35 ± 0,51)
SEE 8 7
GRAYHILL
CHART
6
109
5
4
1
C 2 3
.250 + .001
–.002 DIA.
(6,36 + 0,25 BUSHING KEYWAY
–0,05) .066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE BY SEE NOTE
CL OF POSITION NO. 1 .750 ± .020
.036 ± .003 (0,91 ± 0,08) DEEP
CL OF BUSHING KEYWAY FROM A .375 (9,53) DIA. (19,05 ± 0,51)
OVER TERMINALS
3/8-32UNEF-2A THREAD
Note: Common location for a single pole per
deck switch. For common location on
Approx. Approx. multipole switches see circuit diagrams.
No. of Dimension Dimension Weight No. of Dimension Dimension Weight
Decks A B Grams Decks A B Grams
1 .761 (19,33) .031 (0,79) 14 7 2.349 (59,66) .312 (7,92) 26 Terminal Detail
2 .979 (24,87) .031 (0,79) 16 8 2.567 (65,20) .312 (7,92) 28
3 1.197 (30,40) .031 (0,79) 18 9 2.785 (70,74) .312 (7,92) 30
4 1.415 (35,94) .031 (0,79) 20 10 3.003 (76,28) .312 (7,92) 32
5 1.633 (41,48) .031 (0,79) 22 11 3.221 (81,81) .312 (7,92) 34
6 2.131 (54,13) .312 (7,92) 24 12 3.439 (87,35) .312 (7,92) 36 .034 ± .003
(0,86 ± 0,08) .068 ± .005
Angle C is 15° in 12 position switches and 36 ° in 10 position switches.
(1,73 ± 0,13)
Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customer part
number marked on request. Military part number marked when required.
Rotary
Mulit-Deck Rotary Switches
DIMENSIONS: Metric All dimensions are in millimeters
4mm Diameter Shaft–Style E and ES Rear Views

DIM. A ± 1,2 30° Angle of Throw
25,00 ± 0,5 DIM. B REF. SEE DETAIL
Ø 17,45
± 0,4 STUD PROJECTION
Ø 12,70
(SEE CHARACTER-
8,00 ± 0,4
ISTICS)
± 0,3
10 9
SEE
GRAYHILL
8
1
1 12 1
CHART 14,27
7
± 0,4
6
5
2
3 4
C
Ø 4,00 ± 0,03
6,00 + 0,00 SEE NOTE

–0,08 M7,0 X 0,75 THREAD 19,05 ± 0,5
OVER TERMINALS
CL OF POSITION NO. 1
CL OF BUSHING FLATS
36° Angle of Throw

Approx. SEE DETAIL
No. of Dim. Dim. Weight
Decks A B Grams Ø 12,70
1 19,33 0,79 12 ± 0,4
2 24,87 0,79 14
3 30,40 0,79 16
Terminal Detail
8 7
4 35,94 0,79 18
GRAYHILL
6
9
5 41,48 0,79 20
10
5
6 54,13 7,92 22
4
1
7 59,66 7,92 24 2 3
8 65,20 7,92 26
9 70,74 7,92 28 0,86 ± 0,07
10 76,28 7,92 30 SEE NOTE
1,73 ± 0,13
11 81,81 7,92 32 19,05 ± 0,5
12 87,35 7,92 34 OVER TERMINALS
Angle C is 15° in 12 position switches and Note: Common location for a single pole per
36° in 10 position switches. deck switch. For common location on
Rotary Switches
multipole switches see circuit diagrams.
Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customer part number marked on request.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS: Standard, Military and Metric

Switch is Viewed From Shaft End and Shown in Position No. 1.
Note: All common terminals are located above base terminals as shown.
CL OF C3 C4 C5
9 10 BUSHING 9 10 9 10 9 9 10 C6
8 11 KEYWAY 8 8 10 11
8 11 11 8
11
7 12 C2 7 12 7 12 C3 7 12 C4 7
30° Angle 12
C1 CL C C C
L L L
of Throw 6 1 6 6
1 C1 6 6
1 C1 1 C1 1 C1
5 5 5
2 5 2 2 5 2 C3 2
C2 4 4 3
4 3 4 3 4 3 3
C2 C2
ONE POLE TWO POLE THREE POLE FOUR POLE FIVE OR SIX POLE
CL OF
BUSHING
7 8 C2 7 8
KEYWAY
9 6 9
6
36° Angle 5 C1 5 10 C
10 L
of Throw
4 1 4 1
C1
3 2 3 2
ONE POLE TWO POLE
Rotary
SERIES 71
.5-.75" Diameter, 1/4 Amp, PC Mount
FEATURES
• Terminals From One Side
• Minimum Board Footprint
• Choice of Shaft/Bushing Diameters
• 30° and 36° Angles of Throw
0.125" Diameter Shaft: Styles AF and MAF (and sealed versions) Rear Views: Styles AF, BF, MAF, MBF
Military Qualified style MAF (and sealed versions)
.875 (30°) includes a spacer deck between
.725 (36°) ± .015 30° and 36° Angle of Throw may be
decks 2 and 3. See dimension chart. interposed on either shaft diameter.
(22,23, 18,42
± 0,38)
SHAFT .312 ± .020 DIM. A ± .046 (1,17) 30° Angle of Throw
.687 ± .015 (7,92 ± 0,51)
SHOWN
(17,45 ± 0,38) DIM. B REF. .500 ± .015
IN POSITION
DIA. STUD PROJECTION (12,7 ± 0,38)
ONE .375 ± .020
(9,53 ± 0,51) (SEE CHARACTER- DIA.
SEE C ISTICS)
CHART C OF
L .250 ± .020
BUSHING (6,35 ± 0,51) 1 12
FLATS 2
11
GRAYHILL
10 9
3
.562
.156 ± .010
4
C ± .015
L (3,96 ± 0,25)
8
.368 (9,35)
5
(14,27 6 7
± 0,38) TYP. REF.
.125 – .002 + .001
(3,18 – 0,05 + 0,03)
DIA.
.094 ± .010 1/4-32 UNEF-2A
(2,39 ± 0,25) THREAD .125 ± .010
(3,18 ± 0,25)
Rotary Switches
TERMINAL .015 SEE NOTE SEE

± .002 TYP.
NO. 1 BELOW NOTE
(0,38 .037 ± .005
.203 ± .005 CL
± 0,05) (0,94 ± 0,13)
(5,16 ± 0,13) .110 ± .010 TYP.
.020 ± .003 CL (2,79 ± 0,25) .075 ± .005
(0,51 ± 0,08) .412 ± .010 TYP. (1,91 ± 0,13)
TYP. (10,46 ± 0,25) TYP. CL CL
CL
TYP.
0.250" Diameter Shaft: Styles BF and MBF (and sealed versions)

Military Qualified style MBF
.875 (30°) includes a spacer deck between decks 36° Angle of Throw
.725 (36°) ± .015 2 and 3. See dimension chart.
(22,23, 18,42
± 0,38) .312 ± .020 All dimensions not shown .500 ± .015
SHAFT are the same as above.
.687 ± .015 SHOWN (7,92 ± 0,51) (12,7 ± 0,38)
(17,45 ± 0,38) IN POSITION DIA.
BUSHING KEYWAY .066 ± .002
DIA. ONE .375 ± .020
(1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE BY .036 ± .003
(9,53 ± 0,51)
C (0,91 ± 0,08) DEEP FROM A
SEE
CL OF .375 (9,53) DIA. 1 10
CHART .250 ± .020
GRAYHILL
2
9
BUSHING (6,35 ± 0,51)

3
KEYWAY .156 ± .010

4
(3,96 ± 0,25) 5 6 .368 (9,35)

TYP. REF.
.250 – .002 + .001

(6,35 – 0,05 + 0,03)
DIA. .125 ± .010
.219 ± .004 (3,18 ± 0,25)
(5,56 ± 0,10) 3/8 32UNEF-2A SEE TYP.
THREAD NOTE
.037 ± .005
Dimension A Dimension A Dimension B Approx. Dimension A Dimension B Approx. (0,94 ± 0,13)
No. of Standard Military All Weight No. of Standard Standard Weight TYP.
.075 ± .005
Decks Style Style Styles Grams Decks Style Style Grams
(1,91 ± 0,13)
1 .761 (19,33) .761 (19,33) .031 (0,79) 12 7 2.349 (59,66) .312 (7,92) 24 TYP. CL CL
2 .979 (24,87) .979 (24,87) .031 (0,79) 14 8 2.567 (65,20) .312 (7,92) 26
3 1.197 (30,40) 1.415 (35,94) .031 (0,79) 16* 9 2.785 (70,74) .312 (7,92) 28
4 1.415 (35,94) 1.633 (41,49) .031 (0,79) 18* 10 3.003 (76,28) .312 (7,92) 30 Note: Common location for a single pole per
5 1.633 (41,48) N.A. .031 (0,79) 20 11 3.221 (81,81) .312 (7,92) 32 deck switch. For common location on
6 2.131 (54,13) N.A. .312 (7,92) 22 12 3.439 (87,35) .312 (7,92) 34 two pole switches see circuit diagrams.
Angle C is 15° in 12 position switches and 18° in 10 position switches. Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customer part
*Military style switch is 18 grams for 3 decks and 20 grams for 4 decks. number marked on request. Military part
Seenumber
pagesmarked
F-39when required.
through F-44 for specifications,
accessories and ordering information.
Rotary
DIMENSIONS: Metric All dimensions are in millimeters
4mm Diameter Shaft: Style EF and ESF Rear Views

interposed on either shaft diameter.
30° Angle of Throw

Ø 12,7
± 0,38
22,23 ± 0,4 25,00 ± 0,51 DIM. A ± 1,17
DIM. B REF.
Ø 17,45 STUD PROJECTION 1 12
2
11
± 0,4
GRAYHILL
(SEE CHARACTER-
10 9
8,00 ± 0,3
3
C OF ISTICS)
L
4
BUSHING 3,96 ± 0,25 8
9,35
5
7
FLATS TYP. 6
REF.
14,27
± 0,38
3,18 ± 0,25
Ø 4,00 ± 0,03 TYP.
SEE 0,94 ± 0,13
NOTE TYP.
M7 X 0,75
1,91 ± 0,13
THREAD
TYP.
TERMINAL CL CL
.0,38 SEE NOTE
NO. 1 ± 0,03 BELOW 7,62 ± 0,25
6,00 + 0,00 –0,08 TYP. CL CL CL
2,79 ± 0,25
0,51 ± 0,08 TYP. CL TYP.
10,46 ± 0,25
36° Angle of Throw
CL Ø 12,7
± 0,38
18,42
Approx. Approx. ± 0,04
No. of Dim. Dim. Weight No. of Dim. Dim. Weight 1 10
GRAYHILL
Decks A B Grams Decks A B Grams 2
9
3
8
1 19,33 0,79 12 7 59,66 7,92 24
7
2 24,87 0,79 14 8 65,20 7,92 26 3,96 ± 0,25 6 9,35
Rotary Switches
5
3 30,40 0,79 16 9 70,74 7,92 28 TYP. REF.
4 35,94 0,79 18 10 76,28 7,92 30
5 41,48 0,79 20 11 81,81 7,92 32
6 54,13 7,92 22 12 87,35 7,92 34
3,18 ± 0,25
TYP.
SEE 0,94 ± 0,13
NOTE TYP.
deck switch. For common location on 1,91 ± 0,13
two pole switches see circuit diagrams. TYP.
CL CL
7,62 ± 0,25
Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customer part number marked on request. CL CL
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS: Standard, Military and Metric PC Mount

Circuit is Viewed From Shaft End and Shown in Position No. 1
CL OF BUSHING CL OF BUSHING
ONE POLE ONE POLE
KEYWAY OR KEYWAY OR
FLATS FLATS
30° Angle 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 36° Angle 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

of Throw C1 of Throw C1
TWO POLE TWO POLE

C
L CL
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
C2 C1 C2 C1
Rotary
SERIES 71: PC Board Pattern In inches (and millimeters)
All Styles Except 71BT
30° Angle of Throw 36° Angle of Throw
COMMON TERMINAL HOLE COMMON TERMINAL HOLE

LOCATION (SEE CHART) LOCATION (SEE CHART)
.300 .300
(7,62) (7,62)
.075 TYP. .075 TYP.
(1,91) (1,91)
.037 (0,94) .037 (0,94)
TYP. TYP.
B A B A
.110 (2,79 )TYP. .110 (2,79 )TYP.
.110 TYP. .110 TYP.

(2,79 ) (2,79 )
SHAFT END C OF COMMON SHAFT END
L
OF SWITCH FOR DECK ONE OF SWITCH
Spacer decks can be supplied to facilitate PC board layouts of Shown for a two deck switch.
three or more decks. A spacer deck does not have any Bushing mount is recommended.
terminals and provides no switching function. Dimensionally, it Number of Poles Common Terminal
requires the same space as one normal switch deck. Spacer Per Deck Hole Location
deck can be placed at any location in the switch, per your 1 A
instructions. Switches which include spacer decks are procured 2 A and B
under a special part number.
SERIES 71: PC MOUNT ACCESSORY

1
/8" and 1/4" Diameter Shaft Styles Metric Mount Styles
Rotary Switches
In inches (and millimeters) In millimeters
DIMENSIONS APPLY TO BOTH WASHERS.
WASHER IS
.032 (0,81) THICK
.255 ±.002 .687

C .375 ± .002 Ø 17.45 C
(6,48 ± 0,05) DIA. L (17,45) L
(9,53 ± 0,05) ±0.08
DIA.
0.368 ± .003 9.35
(9,35 ± 0,08) ±0.08
THICKNESS
0.81 ±0.05
0.030 ±.001 0.76 ±0.03
(0,76 ± 0,03) .130 ±.003 .500
±.002 12.7
(3,30 ± 0,08) ±0.05
.207 ±.005 (12,7
(5,26 ± 0,13) ± 0,05)
FOR USE WITH
FOR USE WITH FOR USE WITH STYLE EF
STYLE AF STYLE BF PART 71C2111
PART 71C2054 PART 71C2053
For printed circuit styles. Mounting bushing provides additional

support for the front end of the switch. Order separately by
appropriate part number. Rotary switch discount applies.
Rotary
SERIES 71
.5-.75" Diameter, 1/4 Amp,
Process Sealed
FEATURES
• No Hand Soldering Required
• Sealed to Resist Intrusion by Flux,
Solder and Cleaning Solutions
• .75" Diameter
• 250 mA for 20,000 Cycles
• 36°, 1 or 2 Poles, Up to 5 Decks
• 10 Positions, Continuous Rotation,
or 2-9 Positions With Fixed Stops
Style BT Rear View

.725 ± .015 .275 ± .020 DIM. A
(18,42 ± 0,38) (6,99 ± 0,51) ± .046(1,17)
Ø .687 ± .015
.375 ± .020
(17,45 ± 0,38) DIM. B
(9,53 ± 0,51)
REF.
.310 ± .010
.250 ± .020
(7,87 ± 0,25)
18° (6,35 ± 0,51)
.562 ± .015
(14,27 ± 0,38)
.368 ± .005
(9,35 ± 0,13)
.250 + .001 1 10
.219 ± .004 –.002 DIA.

(5,56 ± 0,10) (6,36 + 0,25
.030 ± .002 –0,05) .015 ± .002
(0,76 ± 0,05) (0,38 ± 0,05) .156 ± .010 .125 ± .010
3/8-32 .100 ± .010
Rotary Switches
TYP. .015 ± .002 (3,96 ± 0,25) (3,18 ± 0,25)
UNEF-2A (2,5 ± 0,25)
2 PLS. (0,38 ± 0,05)
.020 ± .003 THREAD TYP. .037 ± .005
(0,51 ± 0,08) .428 ± .008 (0,94 ± 0,13)
TYP. (10,87 ± 0,20) .075 ± .005
CL
COMMON TERMINAL .110 ± .010 CL CL (1,91 ± 0,13) TYP.
(2,79 ± 0,25)
TERMINAL NO. 1 CL
TYP.
No. of Dimension Dimension
.449 ± .008
(11,4 ± 0,20) Decks A B
CL
Shaft flat is opposite point of contact for pole 1 0.795 (20,19) 0.031 (0,79)
number one. Shaft is shown here in position 1. 2 1.040 (26,42) 0.053 (1,35)
3 1.285 (32,64) 0.076 (1,93)
4 1.530 (38,86) 0.098 (2,49)
5 1.775 (45,09) 0.120 (3,05)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS STYLE 71BT: PC Board Pattern

Circuit is Viewed From Shaft End Including Integral Front Plate
and Shown in Position No. 1 Standoffs
36° Angle of Throw .029 (0,74) Ø MIN. .440 (11,18)
HOLE 33 PLS. .220 (5,59)
ONE POLE CL OF BUSHING
KEYWAY OR
.036 (0,91)
FLATS .075 (1,91)
Ø MIN. HOLE
9 PLS.
2 PLS.
.0375
SHAFT END OF SWITCH
(0,95)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .250
(6,35)
C1 .500 CL OF
(12,7) SWITCH
TWO POLE POLE
NO. 1
.300 (7,62)
C
L
.428 .110 (2,79) 5 PLS.
(10,87)
CL OF CL OF COMMON
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 STAND- TERMINAL
OFFS
C2 C1
Rotary
SERIES 71
0.5 to 0.75" Diameter, 1/4 Amp,
Concentric Shaft
FEATURES
• Two Switches in the Panel Space
of a Single Shaft Rotary
Solder Lug Terminals: Style C .312 ± .020 DIM. A ± .046 (1,17) Rear Views
.687 ± .015 (7,92 ± 0,51) 30° and 36° Angle of Throw may be
(17,45 ± 0,38) interposed on either shaft diameter.
DIA. .375 ± .020 DIM. B REF.
STUD PROJECTION 30° Angle of Throw
(9,53 ± 0,05)
C .500 ± .015
L
(12,7 ± 0,38)
.250 ± .020
DIA.
SEE (6,35 ± 0,05)
CHART SEE
.562 9
DETAIL 10
± .015
GRAYHILL
8
1
1 12 1
(14,27
7
C
± 0,38)
6
5
2
.125 + .001 .250 + .001 3 4
–.002 DIA. –.002

(3,18 + 0,25 (6,35 + 0,03 SECTION SECTION
.094 ± .010 –0,05) SEE NOTE .750 ± .020
–0,05) A B
(2,39 ± 0,25) DIA. (19,05 ± 0,51)
.219 ± .004 CONTROLLED CONTROLLED OVER TERMINALS
(5,56 ± 0,10) 3/8-32UNEF-2A
THREAD BY .250 (6,35) BY .125 (3,18)
CL OF POSITION NO. 1 DIA. SHAFT DIA. SHAFT 36° Angle of Throw
BUSHING KEYWAY
CL OF BUSHING KEYWAY .066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE BY .500 ± .015
.036 ± .003 (0,91 ± 0,08) DEEP (12,7 ± 0,38)
FROM A .375 (9,53) DIA. DIA.
Approx. SEE
No. of Decks 7
Weight Terminal Detail DETAIL
8
GRAYHILL
6
9
Sec. A Sec. B Dimension A Dimension B Grams
Rotary Switches
10
5
1 1 1.415 (35,94) .032 (0,81) 24
4
1
2 1 1.633 (41,49) .032 (0,81) 26 2 3
3 1 2.131 (54,13) .312 (7,92) 28

1 2 1.633 (41,49) .032 (0,81) 26
2 2 2.131 (54,13) .312 (7,92) 28 .034 ± .003 SEE NOTE .750 ± .020
3 2 2.349 (59,66) .312 (7,92) 30 (0,86 ± 0,08) .068 ± .005 (19,05 ± 0,51)
1 3 2.131 (54,13) .312 (7,92) 28 (1,73 ± 0,13) OVER TERMINALS
2 3 2.349 (59,66) .312 (7,92) 30
3 3 2.567 (65,20) .312 (7,92) 32
Angle C is 15° in 12 position switches and 36 ° in 10 position switches. multipole switches see circuit diagrams.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS: Solder Lug Terminals

CL OF C3 C4 C5
9 10 BUSHING 9 10 9 10 9 9 10
10 11 C6
8 11 KEYWAY 8 11 8 11 8 8
11
7 12 C2 7 12 7 12 C3 7 12 C4 7
30° Angle 12
C1 CL C C CL
L L
of Throw 6 1 6 1 C1
6
1 C1 6 6
1 C1
1 C1
5 5 5 5
2 5 2 2 2 C3 2
C2 4 3
4 3 4 3 4 3 3 4
C2 C2
ONE POLE TWO POLE THREE POLE FOUR POLE FIVE OR SIX POLE
CL OF
BUSHING 7
7 8 C2 8
KEYWAY 6
6 9 9
36° Angle 5 C1 5 10 C
L
10
of Throw
4 1 4 1
C1
3 2 3 2
ONE POLE TWO POLE
ADD-A-POT SWITCHES
Contact Grayhill for Series 71 Concentric Add-A-Pot or Add-A-Switch type switches.
Rotary
PC Mount: Style CF Rear Views

interposed on either shaft diameter.
.875 (30°) 30° Angle of Throw

.725 (36°) ± .015 DIM. A
(22,23, 18,42 .312 ± .020 .500 ± .015
± 0,38) (7,92 ± 0,51) DIM. B REF. (12,7 ± 0,38)
STUD PROJECTION DIA.
.687 ± .015
(17,45 ± 0,38) .375 ± .020
DIA. (9,53 ± 0,05)
1 12
SECTION SECTION 2
11
GRAYHILL
A B
10 9
.250 ± .020
3
(6,35 ± 0,05) .156 ± .010
4
8
(3,96 ± 0,25) .368 (9,35)
5
6 7
.562 TYP. REF.
± .015
(14,27
± 0,38)
.125 + .001 .250 + .001
–.002 DIA. –.002 .125 ± .010
(3,18 + 0,25 (6,35 + 0,03 (3,18 ± 0,25)
–0,05) SEE TYP.
–0,05)
DIA. NOTE
.037 ± .005
POSITION (0,94 ± 0,13)
.020 ± .003 NO. 1 .015 SEE NOTE
3/8-32 UNEF-2A TYP.
(0,51 ± 0,08) ± .002 BELOW
THREAD (0,38 .075 ± .005
TYP. CL (1,91 ± 0,13)
± 0,05)
SEE SOLDER LUG .110 ± .010 TYP. CL CL
VERSION FOR CL (2,79 ± 0,25)
SHAFT FLATS AND TYP.
DIMENSIONS 36° Angle of Throw
.412 ± .010 .656
(10,46 ± 0,25) (16,66) .500 ± .015
CL CL (12,7 ± 0,38)
For additional dimensions and references TYP.
for shafts, flat orientation and bushing COMMON COMMON DIA.
keyway, see drawings for styles 71AF and DECK 1 DECK 1
71BF. SECTION A SECTION B
1 10
GRAYHILL
2
Rotary Switches
3
8
.156 ± .010
7
(3,96 ± 0,25) 5 6 .368 (9,35)
Approx. TYP. REF.
No. of Decks Weight
Sec. A Sec. B Dimension A Dimension B Grams
1 1 1.415 (35,94) .032 (0,81) 24
2 1 1.633 (41,49) .032 (0,81) 26
3 1 2.131 (54,13) .312 (7,92) 28 .125 ± .010
1 2 1.633 (41,49) .032 (0,81) 26 (3,18 ± 0,25)
2 2 2.131 (54,13) .312 (7,92) 28 SEE TYP.
3 2 2.349 (59,66) .312 (7,92) 30 NOTE
.037 ± .005
1 3 2.131 (54,13) .312 (7,92) 28 (0,94 ± 0,13)
2 3 2.349 (59,66) .312 (7,92) 30 TYP.
3 3 2.567 (65,20) .312 (7,92) 32 .075 ± .005
(1,91 ± 0,13)
TYP. CL CL
Note: Common location for a Single Pole Per

Deck Switch. For common location on
Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customer part number marked on request. multipole switches see circuit diagrams.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS: PC Mount Terminals

CL OF BUSHING CL OF BUSHING
KEYWAY OR KEYWAY OR
FLATS C FLATS C
L L
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
C1 C2 C1 C1 C2 C1
ONE POLE TWO POLE ONE POLE TWO POLE
Rotary
SPECIFICATIONS
Military Qualification MIL-DTL-3786/39 Military Shaft and Panel Seal

The military style of the Series 71 rotary switch switch without increasing the number of operative A shaft and panel seal is available to provide
is qualified to MIL-DTL-3786/39. Complete decks. watertight mounting of the Series 71 standard
electrical rating information is listed on the military style rotary switches. Sealing is
following page. The Series 71 rotary switch Another difference in the standard and military accomplished by an O-ring shaft seal and a
qualification includes the 30° and the 36° angles styles is the mounting hardware. Ordered as panel seal washer. Panel seal dimension
of throw, in .125" (3,18) and .250" (6,35) options with a standard style switch these items differences are shown in the dimensional
diameter shafts, with solder lug terminals and are included with the military style switch: non- drawings. When the panel seal is compressed,
printed circuit terminals, in sealed and unsealed turn washer with solder lug style and a non-turn dimensions are approximately the same as an
style switches. Standard variations such as washer plus a mounting bushing washer with unsealed switch. If the non-turn washer
shaft and/or bushing length, etc. that do not the PC terminal style. supplied with the switch is used, it should not
affect the switch performance can also be be allowed to extend entirely through the
marked as qualified product. Contact Grayhill Complete specification drawings are available panel when mounting a sealed switch.
for complete details. from Grayhill, Inc. for the standard military However, the bushing may be used as a non-
qualified products. Military qualified Series 71 turn device instead. Switches are provided
Dimensionally the military style is the same as rotary switches may be ordered by the “M” with a double flat bushing in styles which
the standard style with the exception of the PC number listed in Military Specification Sheet/39 include the letter A and with a bushing which
version of 3 or 4 decks; a spacer deck between or by Grayhill part number. All qualified switches has a keyway in the styles which include the
decks 2 and 3 adds another deck length to the will be marked to the specification. letter B.
SPECIFICATIONS: Materials and Finishes

Standard Style
Cover: Diallyl per (MIL-M-14) ASTM-D- Mounting Hardware: One mounting nut and Detent Rotor: Phenolic per (MIL-M-14)
5948 except for 71 BT (see bushing). one internal tooth lockwasher are supplied with ASTM-D-5948
Base and Deck Separator: Diallyl per each switch. For switches with A in the style Mounting Hardware: One mounting nut and
(MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948 description, the nut is .062" (1,57) thick by one internal tooth lockwasher are supplied
Rotary Switches
Rotor Mounting Plate: Thermoplastic .312" (7,92) across flats. For switches with B or with each Series 71 switch. For switches with
Bushing: Zinc casting, tin/zinc-plated. C in the style description, the nut is .094" (2,39) Style A in the description, the nut is .062"
Through Bolts and Nuts, Shaft and Rear thick by .562" (14,27) across flats. Nuts are (1,57) thick by .312" (7,92) across flats. For
Support Plate, Stop Pins and Stop Arm brass, tin/zinc-plated or stainless steel. switches with Style B or C in the description,
(All Others): Stainless steel the nut is .094" (2,39) thick by .562" (14,27)
Shaft, Stop Plates, Stop Arm (71BT): Materials and Finishes across flats. Nuts are brass, tin/zinc-plated or
Reinforced thermoplastic Military Qualified stainless steel.
Detent Rotor: Reinforced thermoplastic for Additional Hardware: Each switch is
Cover, Base and Deck Separator: Diallyl per
71BT; phenolic per (MIL-M-14) ASTM-D- supplied with a non-turn washer to use if
(MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948
5948 for all others desired. Additionally, each PC mount switch
Rotor Mounting Plate: Thermoplastic
Detent Balls: Steel, nickel-plated is supplied with a mounting bushing washer
Bushing: Zinc casting, tin/zinc-plated
Detent Springs: Tinned music wire (see PC Mount Accessory). For switches
Through Bolts and Nuts, Shaft Extension,
Rotor Contact: Silver alloy and beryllium with Style A in the description, non-turn
Lockwashers, Shaft and Rear Support
copper washer is stainless steel; for switches with
Plate, Stop Pins and Stop Arm (All
Base Contacts, Common Plate and Style B in the description, non-turn washer is
Others): Stainless steel
Terminals: Brass, Gold plate .000005" stainless steel. Mounting bushing washer
Detent Balls: Steel, nickel-plated
minimum over Silver plate .00005" over (PC Mount Accessory) is brass, tin/zinc-
Detent Springs: Tinned music wire
nickel .00002". plated.
Rotor Contact: Silver alloy and beryllium
Front Support Plate (71 BT only): copper
Tempered steel, tin/lead-plated. Base Contacts, Common Plate and Terminals:
Interdeck Seal (71 BT Only): Silicone Brass, gold plate .000005" minimum over silver
Extension: Brass, unplated plate .00005" over Nickel .00002".
Rotary
SPECIFICATIONS: Electrical Ratings, Others

Electrical Ratings Electrical Ratings
General Standard Style
Charts: Charts shown are for non-shorting Curves are based on the following failure Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximum
(break before make) contacts. Measurements criteria: after life.
were made at 25°C and 68% relative humidity. Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximum Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms
The load life curves show the number of (20 milliohms initially). minimum between terminals and shaft.
rotational cycles which can be expected for Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms Dielectric Strength: 500 Vac (atmospheric
the voltage, current and type of load. Thus, minimum between terminals and shaft. (50,000 pressure) and 350 Vac (reduced pressure)
for a standard style switch with a 300 megohms initially). between mutually insulated parts.
milliampere 115 Vac resistive load, the Voltage Breakdown: 500 Vac minimum
expected life is 15,000 cycles. Reducing the between mutually insulated parts. The Series 71 also meets the requirements
load to 200 milliamperes increases the life to Current Rating: These switches will carry 4 of MIL-DTL-3786/39 for moisture resistance,
25,000 cycles. Life limiting or failure criteria amperes with a maximum contact temperature stop strength, rotational torque, vibration (10
are listed in the rating sections which follow. rise of 20°C. If the life limiting characteristics through 2,000 cps), medium and high shock,
Cycles: A cycle is a 360° rotation and a return are less critical than those shown above, if salt spray, explosion, thermal shock (-65°C
through all switch positions to the starting elevated temperatures or reduced pressures to 85°C) and terminal pull. When tested at sea
position. are involved, Grayhill can predict the switch level, 25°C and 68% relative humidity with
Voltage: As listed in charts. life for the application. failure criteria of 50 milliohms maximum
Meet the Following Requirements of MIL- contact resistance and 500 Vac breakdown
Standard DTL-3786: Moisture Resistance: Medium and voltage, these switches will make and break
600 High Shock; Vibration (10 to 2,000 cps); 250 milliamps at 28 Vdc inductive (250
MILLIAMPS
VOLTAGE 115 VAC

CURRENT
500 OR 30 VDC Thermal Shock (-65°C to 85°C); Salt Spray, millihenries) 500 milliamps at 28 Vdc resistive:
400 RESISTIVE
300
Explosion; and Stop Strength (10 in-lb). 500 milliamps at 115 volts Vac, 60 hertz
200 resistive, for 10,000 cycles of operation.
100
Electrical Ratings
10 25 50 Military Style Additional Characteristics
CYCLES x 1000 Standard and Military Styles
Curves are based on the following failure
criteria: Rotational Torque: 4-32 ounce-inches, (28-
VOLTAGE 30 VDC
INDUCTIVE Qualified to the following MIL-DTL-3786/39 230 N•mm) depending on the number of
MILLIAMPS
250
CURRENT
(250 MILLIHENRIES)
200 circuit values: (also see standard style poles per deck and the number of decks.
150 description.) The Series 71 has been tested to Contacts: Shorting or non-shorting wiping
100
50 meet the requirements of MIL-DTL-3786, Style contacts with over 100 grams of contact
Rotary Switches
SR39, the majority of which are listed here. At force.
10 25 50
CYCLES x 1000 85°C approximately 68% relative humidity and Shaft Flat Orientation: Opposite first position
sea level pressure, the switches have been pole no. 1 (See Circuit Diagrams).
Military tested to make and break the following loads, Terminals: Switches are provided with full
VOLTAGE 115 VAC as stated in MIL-DTL-3786/39: 125 circle of terminals regardless of the number
800
MILLIAMPS
OR 30 VDC milliamperes at 28 Vdc resistive; 75 of active positions.

CURRENT
700
600 RESISTIVE
500 milliamperes at 115 Vac resistive. Extended Studs: Switches of 6 or more
400 decks (or concentric switches of 4 or more)
300
200
100
The switches have also been tested at reduced have longer studs and extra stud nuts for
10 25 50
barometric pressure (70,000 feet), 25°C at recommended double end mounting. Stud
CYCLES x 1000 approximately 68% relative humidity to make hole size is 1/16" diameter for #0-80 NF-2A
and break the following loads as stated in MIL- thread.
VOLTAGE 30 VDC DTL-3786/39: 50 milliamperes, 28 Vdc resistive; Stop Strength: 10 pound-inches.
INDUCTIVE
MILLIAMPS
CURRENT
250 (250 MILLIHENRIES) 20 milliamperes, 115 Vac resistive. When Mounting Bushing Strength: 10 pound-
200
150 tested to the above loads at stated conditions, inches.
100 the Series 71 switches meet the following life-
50
limiting criteria after 25,000 cycles of operation
10 25 50 in accordance with MIL-DTL-3786/39.
CYCLES x 1000
Rotary
ADJUSTABLE STOPS
Set and Reset Stops to Limit Rotation

Form, Fit, Function Equivalent to Fixed Stop Styles
The adjustable stop Series 71 rotary switches allow you to
change the number of positions per pole. Simply remove
and relocate stop pins in the holes in the front of the switch.
The pins are held in place by a self adhesive sticker which
fits over the front plate.
This feature is available in the Series 71 single shaft

standard switches with either 1/8" or 1/4" diameter shafts
with either PC or solder lug terminals. It is not available in
military qualified or concentric shaft styles.
All dimensions, ratings and characteristics are the same as

the fixed stop equivalent. The chart shown here describes
STOP PIN HOLES
the adjustable stop style substitutions for the fixed stop
styles. Although Series 71 is not an exact dimensional
equivalent of the fixed stop styles of Series 8 and 9, it most
STOP PINS nearly represents a functional substitution.
STICKER Fixed Stop Adjustable Stop

Style Substitution
08A 71AD
09A 71AD
71A 71AD
71AF 71ADF
71B 71BD
71BF 71BDF
71E 71ED
71EF 71EDF
Rotary Switches
SHAFT AND PANEL SEAL
SHAFT “O” RING
PANEL SEAL
The shaft is sealed by an O-ring inside the bushing. The
panel is sealed by an O-ring at the base of the bushing.
The seals do not alter the dimensions as shown in the

drawings when the switch is mounted.
The panel seal is silicone rubber. The shaft seal is an O-ring

per MIL-P-5516B.
Rotary
ACCESSORIES: Non-Turn Washers In inches (and millimeters)
1
/8" and 1/4" Diameter Shaft Switches
The bushing of the Series 71 switch is designed so the switch will not turn .625 ± .010 DIA.
.032 ± .002
(15,89 ± 0,25)
if the panel has been cut to fit the exact bushing shape. The bushing for (0,81 ± 0,05)
the 1/8" diameter shaft switch has a double flat; the 1/4" diameter shaft
switch has a keyway in the bushing. An alternate means of keeping the
switches from turning is to mount them with optional, non-turn washers. 90˚ ± 1˚
Part number 50J1066 is made of Stainless Steel. It is supplied with .437 + .010 –.000
(11,10 + 0,25 –0,00) .005 ± .003
military switches with Style A in the description. When ordered for (0,38 ± 0,08)
standard product, a like number of switches must be ordered. CL RADIUS
.125 ± .010
Part number 12C1087-1 is Brass, tin/zinc-plated and may be ordered for (3,16 ± 0,25)
standard product. .120 ± .003
(3,05 ± 0,08)
Part number SHH694-5 is Stainless Steel washer supplied with all military PART NO. 12C1087-1
STANDARD
style switches with Style B in the description.
.400 .025 .625 ± .010 DIA. .032 ± .005

± .005 ± .001 (15,89 ± 0,25) (0,81 ± 0,13)
DIA. (0,64
(10,16 ± 0,03)
± 0,13)
90° ± 1°
90° ± 1°
.250 ± .003
.015
(6,35 ± 0,08) .375 ± .005
(0,38)
(9,53 ± 0,13) .015 (0,38)
RADIUS
RADIUS
MAX. CL
MAX.
.125
.060 ± .001
± .005
(1,52 ± 0,25) .125 ± .005
(3,16 .125 ± .002
± 0,13) (3,16 ± 0,13)
(3,18 ± 0,05)
PART NO. 50J1066 PART NO. SHH694-5
MILITARY AND STANDARD MILITARY
FOR 1/8" DIAMETER SHAFT FOR 1/4" DIAMETER SHAFT
Rotary Switches
4mm Diameter Shaft Switches
11,13 0,64
± 0,13 ± 0,05
Non-Turn Washer DIA.
For styles E, ED, EF and EDF.
Mounting bushing washer provides non-turn
90˚ ± 1˚
feature.
302 Stainless Steel. .015
(0,38)
Part No. 71 J1103. Contact Grayhill for price. RADIUS
CL
MAX.
5,08
± 0,05 2,36
1,57 ± 0,08 ± 0,13
Rotary
A = 1/8" Diameter Shaft F = PC Mount Terminals C = Concentric Shaft

B = 1/4" Diameter Shaft T = PC Mount Terminals and Process Sealed 2 Switches with same Style and Angle of
E = Metric Mount Shaft & Bushing Switching Decks & Bushing; no panel seal Throw, one behind the other.
D = Adjustable Stops (Adj. Stop) M = Military Limits below apply to either switch section
S = Shaft and Panel Seal (S/P Seal) (A or B).
All switches without F or T have solder lugs
Style Choices Angle of No. Of Poles Positions Shorting Or
Basic Style With S/P Seal Adj. Stop Throw Decks Per Deck Per Pole1 Non-Shorting
01 thru 12 1 02 thru 123 N or S

01 thru 08 2 02 thru 06 N or S
30° 01 thru 04 4 02 or 03 N or S
A AS AD 01 thru 03 55 02 N or S
B BS BD 01 or 02 65 02 N or S
E ES ED
01 thru 12 1 02 thru 103 N or S
36°
01 thru 12 1 02 thru 123 N or S

30°
AF ASF ADF 01 thru 08 2 02 thru 06 N or S
BF BSF BDF
EF ESF EDF 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 103 N or S
36°
01 thru 05 1 02 thru 103 N or S

BT —— —— 36°
01 thru 054 1 02 thru 123 N or S

01 thru 054 2 02 thru 06 N or S
01 thru 054 3 02 thru 04 N or S
30°
Rotary Switches
01 thru 044 4 02 or 03 N or S
MA MAS ——
01 thru 024 6 02 N or S
MB MBS ——
01 thru 054 1 02 thru 103 N or S
36°
01 thru 054 2 02 thru 05 N or S
01 thru 042,4 1 02 thru 123 N or S

30°
01 thru 042,4 2 02 thru 06 N or S
MAF MASF ——
MBF MBSF ——
01 thru 042,4 1 02 thru 103 N or S
36°
01 thru 042,4 2 02 thru 05 N or S
01 thru 03 1 02 thru 123 N or S

30° 01 or 02 3 02 thru 04 N or S
01 4 02 or 03 N or S
C —— —— 01 5 02 N or S
01 6 02 N or S
01 thru 03 1 02 thru 103 N or S

36° 01 thru 03 2 02 thru 05 N or S
01 thru 03 1 02 thru 123 N or S

30° 01 thru 03 2 02 thru 06 N or S
CF —— —— 01 thru 03 1 02 thru 103 N or S
36°
1 4
For Adjustable Stop styles (with the letter D), length; but use only the number of operative In addition to qualified types (Solder lug–5
use AJ instead of number of positions when decks when creating the part number. decks; PC mount–4 decks), Grayhill can pro-
3
ordering. For 1-pole switches with maximum positions, vide switches with additional decks in the
2
Military Qualified PC mount switches of 3 or specify Fixed stop after last position or materials of the ‘M’ style. Contact Grayhill.
5
4 operative decks have an additional spacer Continuous rotation when ordering. (Note: 1 p, Switches in 30° throw with 5 or 6 poles per
deck after deck 2. Use total decks to calculate 71BT, 10 positions, is available only as deck are not available with adjustable stops.
Continuous).
Rotary
ORDERING INFORMATION: Single Shaft Switches
Series
Style*: Letter(s) from the Choices and Limitations chart
Angle of Throw: 30° or 36°
Number of Decks: As limited by Choices and Limitations chart
71A30–02–1–12N–C
Stop Arrangement: Use suffix only when ordering 1 pole with

maximum positions.
C = Continuous rotation; F = Stop between last and first positions
Type of Contacts: N = Non-shorting; S = Shorting
Positions Per Pole: 02 to 12 per Choices chart.
For adjustable stop switches (D) use AJ here.
Poles Per Deck: As limited by the Choices chart
* All rotary switches that are required to have military designated markings and testing adhering to MIL-DTL-3786
are to be ordered by specifying the military part number identified on the appropriate slash sheet.
ORDERING INFORMATION: Concentric Shaft Switches
Entire Switch
Series and Style: 71C or 71CF
Angle of Throw: 30° or 36°. Both switch sections will be the same.
Rotary Switches
Switch Section A (Front Switch)
Number of Decks: 1 to 3, per Choices and Limitations chart
Poles Per Deck: As limited by the Choices and Limitations chart
Positions Per Pole: 02 to 12 per Choices and Limitations chart
maximum positions.
71C362110NC–3 2 0 2 S
Switch Section B (Rear Switch)

maximum positions.
Positions Per Pole: 02 to 12 per Choices and Limitations chart.

Poles Per Deck: As limited by the Choices and Limitations chart
Number of Decks: 1 to 3, per Choices and Limitations chart

For prices and discounts, contact a Local Sales
Rotary
SERIES 08
SERIES 09
0.5" Diameter, 1/4 Amp,
Standard, Military SR13
FEATURES
• Proven Quality in Thousands of
Applications
• Gold-plated Contact System
• 30°, 36°, 45°, 60° and 90° Angle
of Throw Options
• MIL Qualified Versions MIL-S-3786/13
Standard Style Rear Views

Series 09
Front view shows terminal location 30° Angle of Throw
of Series 8, 36° angle of throw.
Transpose rear view for terminal .562 ± .020
location of other angles of throw. (14,27 ± 0,51)
DIA.
.750 ± .015
.260 ± .015 .312 ± .020 DIM. A + .046 – .020
(19,05 ± 0,38)
(6,60 ± 0,38) (7,92 ± 0,51) (+ 0,05 – 0,51)
CL OF NON-TURN DIM. B REF. OVER TERMINALS
TAB STUD
.375 ± .020
PROJECTION
(9,53 ± 0,51) .135 ± .015 (3,43 ± 0,38) 10 9
11 8
GRAYHILL
.094 ± .010 .250 ± .020 #0 THREAD
1 12
7 6 5
(2,38 ± 0,25) (6,35 ± 0,51)
15° 2
3 4
Rotary Switches
.562 (14,27) SER. 8

.625 (15,88) SER. 9
.125 + .001 – .002 30°
COMMON LUG
(3,18 + 0,03 – 0,05)
SEE NOTE DIA.
.387 (9,83) SER.8 COMMON LUG
.453 (11,51) SER. 9 NON-TURN TAB .062 ± .005 .045 ± .003 (1,14 ± 0,08) DIA. Series 08
± .015 (0,38) (1,58 ± 0,13) WIDE BY HOLE AFTER PLATING 36° Angle of Throw
.020 ± .003 (0,51 ± 0,08) THICK
INTEGRAL ASSEMBLY NUT,
DO NOT REMOVE .687 ± .015
(17,45 ± 0,38)
1/4-32 UNEF-2A THREAD OVER
TERMINALS
multi-pole switches, see circuit diagrams. .500 ± .020
(12,7 ± 0,51)
DIA.
8 7
GRAYHILL
6
10 9
No. Approx. Weight No. Approx. Weight

4
1
of Dimension Dimension Grams of Dimension Dimension Grams 36° 2 3
Decks A B Srs. 08 Srs. 09 Decks A B Srs. 08 Srs. 09

1 .960 (24,38) .062 (1,57) 12 16.0 7 2.818 (71,58) .312 (7,92) 24 31.0 COMMON
2 1.228 (31,19) .062 (1,57) 14 18.5 8 3.086 (78,38) .312 (7,92) 26 33.5 LUG
3 1.496 (38,00) .062 (1,57) 16 21.0 9 3.354 (85,19) .312 (7,92) 28 36.0 .033 ± .002
4 1.764 (44,81) .062 (1,57) 18 23.5 10 3.622 (91,00) .312 (7,92) 30 38.5 (0,84 ± 0,05) DIA.
5 2.032 (51,61) .062 (1,57) 20 26.0 11 3.890 (98,81) .312 (7,92) 32 41.0 HOLE AFTER
PLATING
6 2.550 (64,77) .312 (7,92) 22 28.5 12 4.158 (105,61) .312 (7,92) 34 43.5
For rear view of 45°, 60° and 90°,

Grayhill part number and date code marked on standard style detent cover label. see circuit diagrams.
Customer part number marked on request. Grayhill part number and date code
printed on military style cover. Military number printed when required.
Rotary
Switch is Viewed From Shaft End and Shown in Position No. 1

CL OF C3
9 10 NON-TURN 9 10 9 10
8 11 TAB 8 11 8 11
Series 09 7 12 C2 7 12 7 12
30° Angle C1 CL CL
6 1 6 6
of Throw 1 C1 1 C1
5 5 5
2 2 2
4 3 4 3 C2 4 3
ONE POLE TWO POLE THREE POLE
C4 C5
9 9 10 C6
8 10 11
8
11
C3 7 12 C4 7
12
CL CL
6 6
1 C1 1 C1
5 5
2 C3 2
4 3
3 4
C2 C2
FOUR POLE FIVE OR SIX POLE
CL OF
NON-TURN
7 8 C2 7 8
TAB
6 9 6 9
Series 08
36° Angle 5 C1 5 10 C
L
10
of Throw
4 1 4 1
C1
3 2 3 2
ONE POLE TWO POLE

Rear Views
Rotary Switches
CL OF
C4 COMMON LUG
NON-TURN
6 7 TAB 6 7 6 7 SINGLE POLE 7 6
GRAYHILL
8
Series 09 8 8 C3 5 8
5
5 C2 5
1
45° Angle C1 CL CL 15°
4
1 C1
2
1
3
4 4 1
of Throw 4 C1
45°
3 2 3 2 3 2
C2
ONE POLE TWO POLE THREE OR FOUR POLE
C OF C3
L
5 NON-TURN 5 5 COMMON LUG
6 TAB 6 6 SINGLE POLE 5
Series 09 6
GRAYHILL
4 C2 4 4
4
60° Angle C1 CL CL
1
15°
of Throw 1 1 C1
3
1 C1
2
3 3
3
C2 60°
2 2 2
C OF
L
4 NON-TURN 4 COMMON LUG
TAB SINGLE POLE 4
Series 09 C2 3
GRAYHILL
3
3
90° Angle C1 CL
1
15°
of Throw 1 1 C1 2
2 2
90°
ONE POLE TWO POLE
Rotary
SERIES 08
SERIES 09
.5" Diameter, 1/4 Amp, PC Mount
FEATURES
• 30°, 36°, 60° or 90° Angle of
Throw Options
• Compatible with Logic Level
Voltages and Currents
PC Mount Style Rear Views

Series 09
30° Angle of Throw
Front view shows terminal location of .562 ± .020 .070 ± .010

36° angle of throw. Transpose rear (14,27 ± 0,51) (1,78 ± 0,25)
view for terminal location of 30° angle DIA. TYP.
of throw. See Circuit Diagrams for 60° .140 ± .015
and 90° angles of throw. DIM. A + .046 – .020 12 (3,56 ± 0,38)
.312 ± .020 1 11
(+ 0,05 – 0,51) TYP.
2
GRAYHILL
(7,92 ± 0,51)
10
DIM. B REF.
3
.135 ± .015 (3,43 ± 0,38) STUD
9
.260 ± .015
.588 ± .020 PROJECTION
8
(6,60 ± 0,38) .134
6 7
CL OF NON- (14,73 ± 0,51)
TURN .134 ± .010 ± .010
TAB .375 ± .020 (3,40 ± 0,25) (3,40
.094 ± .010
(9,53 ± 0,51) ± 0,25)
(2,38 ± 0,25)
Rotary Switches
CL CL CL .187 ± .015
.250 ± .020 #0 THREAD (4,75 ± 0,38)
(6,35 ± 0,51) TYP.
1.200 ± .020
.562 (14,27) SER. 8
(30,48 ± 0,51)
.625 (15,88) SER. 9
TYP.
± .015 (0,38)
.125 + .001 – .002
(3,18 + 0,03 – 0,05)
DIA. Series 08
COMMON LUG
36° Angle of Throw
NON-TURN TAB .062 ± .005
(1,58 ± 0,13) WIDE BY INTEGRAL ASSEMBLY NUT, TERMINAL DIMENSIONS AT
.020 ± .003 (0,51 ± 0,08) THICK DO NOT REMOVE THIS POINT ARE .032 + .000 – .010
(0,81 + 0,00 – 0,25) WIDE
SEE NOTE 1/4-32 UNEF-2A THREAD BY .015 + .000 – .003
(0,38 + 0,00 – 0,08) THICK
.140 ± .015
deck switch. For common location on .500 ± .020 (3,56 ± 0,38)
multi-pole switches, see circuit diagrams. (12,7 ± 0,51) TYP.
DIA.
*Termination 1 10
A standard switch uses the entire 360° of each deck as required by the circuitry.
GRAYHILL
9
2
Thus one-sided termination is standard for Series 08, 36°, 1 pole switches with 1 to
3
5 positions per pole; it is also standard for Series 09, 30°, 1 pole switches with 1 to
7
4
6
6 positions per pole. Two-sided termination is standard for 1 pole switches with more 5
positions per pole and for switches of 2 or more poles per deck.
Special switches with one-sided termination can be made for circuitry which would
require two-sided termination in standard switches. Contact Grayhill for a special .187 ± .015
part number. See also Special Options, page J-10. (4,75 ± 0,38)
TYP.
1.125 ± .020
Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customer (28,58 ± 0,51)
part number marked on request. TYP.
Rotary
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS: PC Mount

CL OF CL OF
12 1 NON-TURN 12 1 NON-TURN
11 TAB 11 2 6 TAB 6
2 1 1
Series 09 3 10 3
Series 09
10
30° Angle 60° Angle 5 5
C1 C2 C1 CL C1 C2 C1 CL
of Throw 9 4 9 4 of Throw 2 2
8 5 8 5 4 4
7 6 7 6 3 3
C OF CL OF
L
NON-TURN NON-TURN
10 1 10 1
TAB 1 TAB 1
9 2 2
9 Series 09
Series 08
90° Angle 4 4
36° Angle 8
3
C1 C2 8 C1 CL C1 C2 C1 CL
3
of Throw of Throw 2 2
7 4 4
7
6 5 6 5 3 3
PC BOARD MOUNTING PATTERN
36° Angle of Throw 30°, 60° and 90° Angle of Throw
Rotary Switches
.134 (3,40) TYP.
.210 .134 (3,40) TYP.

.134 (3,40) TYP.
.280 (5,33) BASE TERMINAL
.134 (3,40) TYP. Number of Poles Common Terminal
(7,11) TYP. ROW HOLE LOCATION
Per Deck Hole Location
TYP. (SEE CHART)
E
C 1 Pole Per Deck A
SHAFT END D 2 Poles Per Deck A
OF SWITCH F
.140 A
(3,56) .140
SHAFT END B E
TYP. (3,56)
OF SWITCH C Base Terminals
D .070 TYP. Angle of Throw Hole Location
(1,78)
30° All
60° E and F
COMMON TERMINAL ROW
90° D and F
HOLE LOCATION (SEE CHART)
Diagrams shown for a two deck switch. Bushing mounting is

recommended for all PC mount rotary switches.
SHAFT AND PANEL SEAL

A shaft and panel seal is available to provide watertight mounting of the Series 08
and 09. Standard and Military Style rotary switches. Sealing is accomplished by
O-ring shaft seal and panel seal washer. When the panel seal is compressed,
dimensions are approximately the same as an unsealed switch. Sealed switches are
provided with a double flat bushing. Non-turn feature can be accomplished by proper
fit of this bushing into panel hole and/or by allowing non-turn tab to extend into (but
not through) panel. Military Style rotary sealed switches do not have a non-turn tab.
Rotary
MILITARY QUALIFIED
Series 08 and 09 military switches are qualified Front view shows terminal location of Series 09 Series 08
to MIL-DTL-3786/13. They include 30°, 36°, 45° Series 09, 30° angle of throw. 30° Angle of Throw 36° Angle of Throw
Transpose rear view for terminal location .562 ± .020
and 60° angles of throw with solder lug terminals of other angles of throw. .718 ± .020
(14,27 ± 0,51)
in sealed and unsealed styles. See front and (18,24 ± 0,51)
DIA.
.260 ± .015 OVER
rear views at right. Standard variations which do (6,60 ± 0,38) .781 ± .020 TERMINALS
CL OF NON-TURN (19,83 ± 0,51)
not affect switch performance can also be marked TAB .500 ± .020
OVER TERMINALS
as qualified product–contact Grayhill. (12,7 ± 0,51)
DIA.
10 9 8 7
The military style is dimensionally the same as 11 8
GRAYHILL
GRAYHILL
6
10 9
1 12
the standard except for the solder lug. Convert
7 6 5
5
15°
standard style switch drawings to military style
4
1
2
4
36°
3 2 3
drawings by including this terminal detail and
changing the over-terminal dimensions shown SEE NOTE 30°
here. Grayhill can provide complete specification .094 ± .010
(2,38 ± 0,25) Terminal Detail
drawings. Qualified switches can be ordered by .034 ± .003
the Grayhill number or the "M" number; they will deck switch. For common location on (0,86 ± 0,08) .068 ± .005
be marked per MIL-DTL-3786/13. multi-pole switches, see circuit diagrams. (1,73 ± 0,13)
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximum after Materials and Finishes
Electrical Ratings
life Military Qualified
Standard Style Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms Deck Separators, End Plate and Switch Bases:
Rated: To make and break the following loads: minimum between terminals and shaft Diallyl per (MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948
1/4 amp, 115 Vac resistive; 1/4 amp, 6-28 Vdc Dielectric Strength: 500 Vac (atmospheric Rotor Mounting Plate: Thermoplastic
resistive; 20 mA, 115 Vdc resistive; 50 mA, 115 pressure) and 350 Vac (reduced pressure) Mounting Bushing: Brass, tin/zinc-plated.
Vac inductive; 20 mA, 28 Vdc inductive; to carry between mutually insulated parts. Shaft, Cover, Stop Plate, Retaining Ring,
4 amps continuous.
Through Bolts, Shaft Extension, Stop Arm,
Contact Resistance: After 25,000 cycles of
The Series 08M and 09M also meet the Thrust Washers, Cover Plate and Rear Support
operation, 50 milliohms maximum
requirements of MIL-DTL-3786 SR13 for moisture Plate, Lockwashers and Nuts: Stainless steel
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms
resistance, stop strength, rotational torque, Detent Balls: Steel, nickel-plated
minimum between terminals and shaft
vibration (10 to 2,000 cps), medium and high Detent Springs: Tinned music wire
Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac initially
shock, salt spray, explosion, thermal shock (- Terminals, Stator (Base) Contacts and
Rotary Switches
(500 Vac or better after most environmental tests)

65°C to 85°C) and terminal pull. When tested at Common Plate: Brass, gold plate .00001"
Life Expectancy: 50,000 mechanical cycles of
sea level, 25°C and 68% relative humidity with minimum over silver plate .0003" minimum
operation. Note: Actual life is determined by a
failure criteria of 50 milliohms maximum contact Rotor Contact: Silver alloy, gold-plated .00001"
number of factors, including electrical loading,
resistance and 500 Vac breakdown voltage, these minimum
rate of rotation and environment, as well as
switches will make and break 250 mA at 28 Vdc Mounting Hardware: Two mounting nuts .062"
maximum contact resistance, minimum insulation
inductive (250 millihenries): 1/2 amp: at 28 Vdc (1,57) thick by .312" (7,92) across flats and one
resistance and minimum voltage breakdown
resistive: 1/2 amp; at 115 Vac: 60 Hz resistive for internal tooth lockwasher are supplied with this
required at the end of life.
10,000 cycles of operation. switch.
Mounting Nuts, Washers: Brass, tin/zinc-
Electrical Ratings plated and or stainless steel.
Military Qualified
Qualified to the following MIL-DTL-3786/13
Standard Style
Switch Bases: Melamine per (MIL-M-14) ASTM- ADDITIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
Circuit Values: (Also see Standard Style
D-5948 Standard Style and Military Qualified
description.) The Series 08M and 09M have been
Cover, Deck Separators and End Plate: Phenolic Contacts: Shorting or Non-shorting contacts
tested to meet the requirements of MIL-S-3786,
per (MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948 available in 30°, 36° and 45° angle of throw rotary
Style SR13, the majority of which are listed. At
Rotor Mounting Plate: Thermoplastic switches. Non-shorting contacts available in 60°
85°C, approximately 68% relative humidity and
Mounting Bushing: Brass, tin/zinc-plated. and 90° angle of throw switches. All are wiping
sea level pressure, the switches have been tested
Shaft, Retaining Rings, Through Bolts, Shaft contacts with over 100 grams of contact force.
to make and break the following loads, as stated
Extension, Stop Washers, Stop Arm, Thrust Stop Strength: 12 lb-inches minimum
in MIL-DTL-3786/SR13: 125 milliamperes at 28
Washers, Nuts, Cover Plate and Rear Support Rotational Torque: 8-64 oz-in depending upon
Vdc resistive: 75 milliamperes at 115 Vac resistive. the number of poles per deck and the number of
Plate: Stainless steel
Detent Balls: Steel, nickel-plated decks
The switches have also been tested at reduced Extended Studs: Switches of six decks or more
barometric pressure (70,000 feet), 25°C at Detent Springs: Tinned Music wire
Terminals, Stator (Base) Contacts and have longer studs with extra stud nuts for
approximately 68% relative humidity to make and recommended double end mounting.
break the following loads as stated in MIL-DTL- Common Plate: Brass, gold plate .00001"
3786/SR13. 50 milliamperes 28 Vdc resistive; 20 minimum over silver plate .0003" minimum
milliamperes 115 Vac resistive. When tested to Rotor Contact: Silver alloy, gold-plated .00001"
the above loads at the stated conditions, the minimum
Series 08M and 09M switches meet the following Mounting Hardware: Two mounting nuts .062"
life-limiting criteria after 25,000 cycles of operation (1,57) thick by .312" (7,92) across flats and one
in accordance with MIL-DTL-3786. internal lockwasher are supplied with switch.
Lockwasher: Stainless steel
Mounting Nuts, Washers: Brass, tin/zinc-
plated and or stainless steel.
Rotary

Angle Number of Decks Poles Number of
Series Style and Designation of Throw Stops Terminals Shorting Non-Shorting Per Deck Positions/Pole
A = Standard
S = Standard, Shaft/Panel Seal 01 thru 12 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 10
M = Military Style Solder 01 thru 09 01 thru 09 2 02 thru 05
MS = Style M, Shaft/Panel Seal
08 36° Fixed
P = Standard, PC Mount
SP = Style P, Shaft/Panel Seal Printed 01 thru 12 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 10
MP = Military Style, PC Mount Circuit 01 thru 09 01 thru 09 2 02 thru 05
MSP = Style MP, Shaft/Panel Seal
01 thru 12 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 12
A = Standard 01 thru 09 01 thru 09 2 02 thru 06
S = Standard, Shaft/Panel Seal 01 thu 06 01 thru 06 3 02 thru 04
Solder
M = Military Style 01 thru 04 01 thru 04 4 02 or 03
MS = Style M, Shaft/Panel Seal 01 thru 03 01 thru 03 5 02
30° 01 thru 03 01 thru 03 6 02
SP = Style P, Shaft/Panel Seal Printed 01 thru 12 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 12
MP = Military Style, PC Mount Circuit 01 thru 09 01 thru 09 2 02 thru 06
A = Standard, 01 thru 12 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 08
S = Standard, Shaft/Panel Seal 01 thru 06 01 thru 06 2 02 thru 04
09 45° Fixed
Rotary Switches
M = Military Style 01 thru 04 01 thru 04 3 02
MS = Style M, Shaft/Panel Seal 01 thru 03 01 thru 03 4 02
Solder
A = Standard,
S = Standard, Shaft/Panel Seal Not 01 thru 06 1 02 thru 006
M = Military Style Available 01 thru 03 2 02 or 03
MS = Style M, Shaft/Panel Seal 01 or 02 3 02
60°
SP = Style P, Shaft/Panel Seal Printed Not 01 thru 06 1 02 thru 06
MP = Military Style, PC Mount Circuit Available 01 thru 03 2 02 or 03
A = Standard Not 01 thru 06 1 02 thru 04
Solder
S = Standard, Shaft/Panel Seal Available 01 thru 03 2 02
90°
P = Standard, PC Mount Printed Not 01 thru 06 1 02 thru 04
SP = Style, Shaft/Panel Seal Circuit Available 01 thru 03 2 02
Series: determined by the angle of throw
Angle of Throw: Must agree with Series Number
09A30–03–1–12N–F
Stop Arrangement: Add letter C or F to a one pole per deck switch with the maximum number of positions
for a stop between position 1 and the last position.
Positions Per Pole: Requires 02 positions as a minimum to the maximum allowable dependent on the angle
of throw and poles per deck
Poles Per Deck: As limited by angle of throw and switch style
Number of Decks: As limited by the angle of throw, the poles per deck, switch style and types of contacts
Available from your local Grayhill Distributor For prices and discounts, contact a Local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Rotary
SERIES 42, 43, 44 and 54

1" Diameter, 1 Amp, Standard,
Military SR04
FEATURES
• Rugged Construction Insures
Switch Operation for the Life of
Your Equipment
• Many Circuitry Options
• MIL Qualified Versions MIL-S-3786/04
• Features Choice Include: Shaft/
Panel Seal, Adjustable Stops, PC
Termination, UL Recognized

Standard, UL Recognized and Rear Views
Military Qualified Solder Lug Styles
Series 42
1.015 ± .015
(25,78 ± 0,38) DIA.
OVER TERMINALS
DIM. D .437 DIM. A + .046 –.020

.437 8 7
± .010 (0,25) DIA. ± .020 (+ 0,05 –0,51)
± .020 9
6
GRAYHILL
C OF NON-TURN (11,10 (11,10
L
TAB ± 0,51) ± 0,51) DIM. B REF.
10
5
.375
± .015 .250 STUD
4
(9,53 DIM. F ± .015 (0,38) PROJECTION
± .020 36° 2 3
± 0,38) (6,35 #1 THREAD
± 0,51)
Rotary Switches
.064 (1,63) MIN. DIA.

DIM. E HOLE AFTER PLATING
.219 ± .010 (0,25)
± .005
(5,56 Series 44
± 0,13) .250 + .001 –.002
(6,35 + 0,03 –0,05) 1.170 ± .015
DIA. (29,72 ± 0,38) DIA.
DIM. C OVER TERMINALS
± .015 (0,38) C INTEGRAL ASSEMBLY NUT,
L OF BUSHING
KEYWAY DO NOT REMOVE
SEE NOTE BUSHING KEYWAY 10 9
NON-TURN TAB .066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE BY 11
8
GRAYHILL
.125 ± .003 (3,18 ± 0,08) WIDE BY .036 ± .003 (0,91 ± 0,08) DEEP
12
.031 ± .003 (0,79 ± 0,08) THICK 7

FROM A .375 (9,53) DIA.
1
6
15°
5

2
3 4
(MTG. HOLE = 3/8 DIA. MIN.)
30°
multi-pole switches, see circuit .064 (1,63) MIN. DIA.
diagrams. HOLE AFTER PLATING
For rear view of 45°, 60° and 90°,

see circuit diagram.
No. Dimension B Approx. Weight No. Dimension B Approx. Weight

of Dimension Style Style Grams of Dimension Style Style Grams
Decks A A M or H 42 44 Decks A A M or H 42 44
1 1.025 (26,04) .062 (1,57) .030 (0,76) 40.0 48 7 3.351 (85,16) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 73.0 90
2 1.371 (34,82) .062 (1,57) .030 (0,76) 45.5 55 8 3.697 (93,90) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 78.5 97
3 1.717 (43,61) .062 (1,57) .030 (0,76) 51.0 62 9 4.043 (102,69) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 84.0 104
4 2.063 (52,40) .062 (1,57) .030 (0,76) 56.5 69 10 4.389 (111,48) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 89.5 111
5 2.409 (61,19) .062 (1,57) .030 (0,76) 62.0 76 11 4.735 (120,27) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 95.0 118
6 3.005 (76,33) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 67.5 83 12 5.081 (129,06) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 100.5 125
Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label.
Dimension C D E F
Customer part number marked on request. Military part number
marked when required. UL recognized markings as required. Series 42 .562 (14,27) 1.000 (25,4) .830 (21,08) .093 (2,36)
Series 44 .642 (16,31) 1.162 (29,51) 1.000 (25,4) .121 (3,07)
Rotary

CL OF
C3 C3
9 10 BUSHING 9 9 9 10
10 10
8 11 KEYWAY 8 11 8 11 8 11
Series 44 & 54 7 12 C2 7 12 7 12 7 12
30° Angle C1 CL CL C2 CL
6 1 6 6 6 1
of Throw 1 C1 1 C1
5 5 5 5
2 2 2 2
4 3 4 3 C2 4 3 4 3
C1
ONE POLE TWO POLE THREE POLE THREE POLE
Styles A, D and S Styles M, MS, H and HS
C4 C5
9 9 10 C6
8 10 11
8
11
C3 7 12 C4 7 12
CL CL
6 6
1 C1 1 C1
5
5 2 C3 2
4 3
3 4
C2 C2
FOUR POLE FIVE OR SIX POLE
CL OF
BUSHING
7 8 C2 7 8
KEYWAY
9 6 9
6
Series 42 & 43
5 C1 5 10 C
36° Angle 10 L
of Throw 4 1 4 1
C1
3 2 3 2
ONE POLE TWO POLE

Rear Views
Rotary Switches
CL OF
C4
BUSHING
6 7 KEYWAY 6 7 6 7 7 6
8
8 8
GRAYHILL
Series 44 5 C2 5 C3 5 8
5
45° Angle C1 CL CL
1
1 4 1 C1 1 15°
of Throw 4
4
4 C1
2 3
3 2 3 2 3 2
C2 45°
C OF
L C3
5 BUSHING 5 5 5
6 KEYWAY 6 6
6
GRAYHILL
Series 44 4 C2 4
4
4
60° Angle C1 CL C
L
1
1 15°
1 C1
3
of Throw 1 C1
3 3 3 2
2 2 C2 2
60°
CL OF
4 BUSHING 4
KEYWAY 4
Series 44 C2 3
GRAYHILL
3
3
C1 CL
90° Angle
1
1 1 C1 15°
of Throw 2
2 2
ONE POLE TWO POLE 90°
Rotary
SERIES 42
1" Diameter, 1 Amp, PC Mount
FEATURES
• Satisfies High Current Board Level
Applications
• 36° Angle of Throw Permits up to
Ten Positions
• UL Recognized Versions

Standard Style DIM. A + .046 – .020
.437 ± .020 (+1,17 –0,00)
1.000 ± .010 (11,10 ± 0,51) DIM. B REF.
(25,4 ± 0,25) C C C STUD .786 ± .010
L L L
DIA. .600 ± .031 PROJECTION (19,96 ± 0,25)
(15,24 ± 0,79) .174 .174 ± .010 DIA.
± .010 (4,42 ± 0,25)
(4,42
.250 ± .020 ± 0,25) #1 THREAD
(6,35 ± 0,51) .500 ± .015
.219
(12,7 ± 0,38)
± .005 .830 1 10
TYP.
(5,56 .750 ± .010
GRAYHILL
9
± .010
± 0,13) (19,05 ± 0,25) (21,08
8
TYP. ± 0,25)
7
4
5 6
.250 + .001 –.002
(6,35 + 0,03 –0,05)
.375 ± .015 DIA. COMMON LUG
(9,53 ± 0,38) TYP. .250 ± .015
INTEGRAL ASSEMBLY NUT,
DO NOT REMOVE (6,35 ± 0,38) TYP.
TERMINAL DIMENSIONS AT THIS
POINT ARE .050 ± .005 (1,27 ± 0,13) BUSHING KEYWAY .187 ± .015
WIDE BY .020 ± .003 (0,51 ± 0,08) THICK .066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE BY (4,75 ± 0,38) TYP.
.036 ± .003 (0,91 ± 0,08) DEEP .735 ± .010
C
L OF BUSHING FROM A .375 (9,53) DIA. (18,67 ± 0,25) TYP.
KEYWAY 1.470 ± .020
Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customer part 3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD (37,34 ± 0,51)
number marked on request. UL recognized marking as required. (MTG. HOLE=3/8 DIA. MIN.) TYP.
Rotary Switches
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM: PC Mount PC BOARD MOUNTING PATTERN SHAFT AND PANEL SEAL: Srs. 42 & 44
Switch is Viewed From Shaft End Shown for a two deck switch Standard Style
and Shown in Position No. 1 The Series 42/44 Styles, which include the letter "S" with the
Note: All common terminals are located above CL OF FRONT SUPPORT exception of style "HS", are watertight sealed to the mounting
PLATE MOUNTING CL OF BASE
base terminals as shown. panel by utilizing the panel seal kit. These switches are built
HOLES TERMINAL
.375 MOUNTING with a front plate that does not have a non-turn tab. The
Termination panel seal kit consists of a grooved hex nut, a keyed washer
SHAFT END
One-sided termination is standard for switches with 2 to 5 (9,53) HOLES

TYP. and a keyed panel seal. The grooved hex nut is assembled
positions per pole. Two-sided termination is standard for CL OF REAR to the switch bushing. The keyed washer is slid down the
switches with 6 thru 10 positions per pole. .500
SUPPORT bushing slot and seated into the hex nut groove. The seal
(12,7)
PLATE is likewise assembled to the bushing and hex nut. The
CL OF TYP.
MOUNTING keyed washer is required to provide seal integrity in the
6 thru 10 positions 10 1 BUSHING .750 HOLES bushing slot. When assembled to the panel, the grooved
per pole and 2 KEYWAY (19,05) .250
9 nut, backing washer and seal require the same space as a
terminals from one TYP. (6,35) CL COMMON
TERMINAL normal mounting nut. Hence, the seal kit does not alter the
side of switch are C1 TYP.
8 3 MOUNTING dimensions. Panel seal kit includes a non-turn washer to be
available on special .174 (4,42) used into a blind hole in the back panel. For panel seal kit
order. See Special HOLES
7 4 TYP. part dimensions, see Accessories. Style "HS" switches use
Options, page F-10 .492 a similar sealing method, except the integral assembly nut
or contact Grayhill. 6 5 (12,50) .110 (2,79)
retains the panel seal. All sealed style switches are provided
.174 (4,42) TYP. with a shaft to bushing internal seal.
ONE POLE
ADJUSTABLE STOP SWITCHES: Series 42 and 44

Equivalent Styles
The standard and UL recognized switches are For style 42A36, use 42D36,
also available with adjustable stops. Two For style 44A30, use 44D30
For style 42M36, use 42D36 initially
removable stop washers allow you to limit the For style 44M30, use 44D30 initially
number of switch positions as needed. A knurled For style 42U36, use 42UD36
For style 44U30, use 44UD30
nut is supplied to secure the washers if desired.
These switches have no bushing keyway. All Front Views
other dimensions, ratings and characteristics 6 8 8 9 10
are the same as the standard fixed stop styles.

11
7
5
Although not military qualified, the adjustable

6
4
ST RST
FI
styles are useful in military equipment

5
S
OP
FI TO
3 RS P 4 3
2
USE OF KNURLED
prototypes. However, when submitting the
T
NUT IS OPTIONAL
equipment for government approval, the fixed ADJUSTABLE STOP
stop qualified style should be substituted. Series 42 Series 44 WASHERS
Rotary
SERIES 43
SERIES 54
1" Diameter, 1 Amp, Concentric
Shafts
FEATURES
• Two Switches in the Panel Space
of a Single Shaft Rotary
• Military Qualified Versions
MIL-3786/04
• Choice of 10 Positions (Series 43)
or 12 Positions (Series 54)

Standard Style and Military Qualified Rear Views
1.162 (29,51) DIA. DIM. A + .046 –.020

.375 .375 Series 43
SER. 54 (+0,05 –0,51)
± .020 ± .020
1.000 (25,4) DIA. (9,53 (9,53
SER. 43 ± 0,51) ± 0,51) 1.015 ± .015
.250 ± .020 (6,35 ± 0,51)
C OF NON-TURN DIM. B REF. (25,78 ± 0,38)
L
.375 TAB .093 ± .015 (2,36 ± 0,38) STUD OVER TERMINALS
± .015 .250 ± .020 SER. 43 PROJECTION
(9,53 (6,35 ± 0,51) .121 ± .015 (3,07 ± 0,38)
± 0,25) .250 ± .020 SER. 54 #1 THREAD
(6,35 ± 0,51)
8 7
.830 (21,08)
SER. 43 9
6
GRAYHILL
Rotary Switches
1.000 (25,4)
10
5
SER. 54
.125 + .001 –.002 ± .010 (0,25)
4
1
.094 ± .004 (3,18 + 0,03 –0,05) DIA. 36° 2 3
(2,39 ± 0,10)
.642 (16,31) .250 + .001 –.002
.219 ± .005 (6,35 + 0,03 –0,05) DIA.
SER. 54 SECTION SECTION
(5,56 ± 0,13)
.562 (14,27) A B
SER. 43 CONTROLLED BY .064 (1,63) MIN. DIA.
C
L OF BUSHING .250 (6,35) .125 (3,18) HOLE AFTER PLATING
±.015(0,38) KEYWAY
DIA. SHAFT
SEE NOTE
MILITARY NUMBER MARKED ON ALL
NON-TURN TAB QUALIFIED SWITCHES
.125 ± .003 (3,18 ± 0,08) WIDE BY
INTEGRAL ASSEMBLY NUT, DO NOT REMOVE
.031 ± .003 (0,79 ± 0,08) THICK
BUSHING KEYWAY .066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05)
WIDE BY .036 ± .003 (0,91 ± 0,08) DEEP FROM Series 54
Note: Common location for a single pole per A .375 (9,53) DIA.
deck switch. For common location on 3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD
multi-pole switches, see circuit 1.170 ± .015
diagrams. (29,72 ± 0,38) DIA.
OVER TERMINALS
Number of Approx. Weight

Decks Dimension A Dimension B Grams 9
10
Section Section Style Style Style Series Series 11
8
GRAYHILL
12
“A” “B” A, M or H A M or H 43 54
7
1
1 1 1.818 (46,18) .062 (1,57) .030 (0,76) 48 60 15°

5
2 1 2.164 (54,97) .062 (1,57) .030 (0,76) 54 67 2

3 4
3 1 2.510 (63,75) .062 (1,57) .280 (7,11) 60 74
1 2 2.164 (54,97) .062 (1,57) .030 (0,76) 54 67 30°
2 2 2.510 (63,75) .062 (1,57) .280 (7,11) 60 74
3 2 3.105 (78,87) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 66 81
1 3 2.510 (63,75) .062 (1,57) .280 (7,11) 60 74 .064 (1,63) MIN. DIA.
2 3 3.105 (78,87) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 66 81 HOLE AFTER PLATING
3 3 3.451 (87,66) .312 (7,92) .280 (7,11) 72 88
Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customer part number
marked on request. Military part number marked when required.
Rotary
SERIES 43 and 54
1" Diameter, 1 Amp, Add-A-Pot
FEATURES
• Central Shaft Designed to Operate
an Add-On Potentiometer
• Potentiometer Mounting Plates
Provided
• Adjustable Stop Standard, Fixed
Stop by Order
• Choice of 10 Positions (Series 43)
or 12 Positions (Series 54)

Standard Style Rear Views
Series 43
1.000 ± .010 DIM. A + .046 –.020 .625 ± .046
.375 .375
(25,4 ± 0,25)
± .020 ± .020 (+0,05 –0,51) (15,88 ± 1,17) Series 43
DIA. (9,53 (9,53 .093 ± .015 (2,36 ± 0,38)
± 0,51) ± 0,51) SER. 43 1.015 ± .015
C OF NON-TURN .121 ± .015 (3,07 ± 0,38) (25,78 ± 0,38)
.375 L SER. 54
TAB OVER TERMINALS
± .015
(9,53 .250 ± .020 (6,35 ± 0,51)
± 0,38) .250 ± .020 .140 ± .062
(6,35 ± 0,51) (3,56 ± 1,57) #1 THREAD
.250 ± .020
7 (6,35 ± 0,51) 8 7
6 8
9
6
.830 (21,08) SER. 43
5
10
1.000 (25,4) SER. 54
5
Rotary Switches
± .010 (0,25)
4
1
S
FI TOP
3
2 RS .125 + .001 –.002 36° 2 3
.094 ± .004 T
(3,18 + 0,03 –0,05) DIA.
(2,39 ± 0,10)
.562 .250 + .001 –.002
.219 ± .005 (6,35 + 0,03 –0,05) DIA.
± .015
(5,56 ± 0,13)
(14,27 .064 (1,63) MIN. DIA.
STOP WASHERS
± 0,38) HOLE AFTER PLATING
SEE NOTE USE OF KNURLED NUT
NON-TURN TAB OPTIONAL
.125 ± .003 (3,18 ± 0,08) WIDE BY
.031 ± .003 (0,79 ± 0,08) THICK 3/8-32 UNEF-2A THREAD
Note: Common location for a single pole per Series 54

Series 54 deck switch. For common location on
multi-pole switches, see circuit
1.162 ± .010 1.170 ± .015
diagrams.
(29,51 ± 0,25) (29,72 ± 0,38)
DIA. OVER TERMINALS
Number Approx. Weight
9 10 of Dimension Grams
8 10 9
Decks A Series 43 Series 54 11
11
7
8
12
1 .974 (24,74) 48 60
6
7
ST IRST
2 1.320 (33,53) 54 67
6
5
15°
F
OP
2
3 1.666 (42,32) 60 74
4 3 2 5
3 4
30°
.642 ± .015
(16,31 ± 0,38)
Two potentiometer mounting plates are Plated brass spacers for ease of positioning Standard style, concentric shaft, add-a-pot
supplied. Mounting plates have .261 (6,63) mounting plate driving assembly are available switches have adjustable stops. See
and .380 (9,65) diameter holes respectively on special request (sold only with switches). The Adjustable Stop description.
for mounting potentiometers with 1/4" and 3/8" use of spacers is recommended for other than
bushings. Additional nuts for the through bolts prototype requirements. When ordering switches
of the switch are provided for adjustment of with spacers, give full details regarding special Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover
mounting plate location. Tapered tongue on length, potentiometer being used, etc. label. Customer part number marked on request. Military
1 part number marked when required.
/8" shaft provides coupling to screwdriver
slots in potentiometer shafts.
Rotary
SERIES 54
1" Diameter, 1 Amp, Add-A-Pot
FEATURES
• Military Qualified MIL-3786/04
• Central Shaft Designed to Operate
MIL Potentiometer
• Mounting Plate Options Provide
Choice of Potentiometer
• Fixed Distance from Switch to
Mounting Plate
Military Qualified Style
1.162 ± .010 DIM. A + .046 –.020 .575

(29,51 ± 0,25) .375 .375
(+ 0,05 –0,51) (14,61)
± .020 ± .020
DIA. REF. 1.170 ± .015
(9,53 (9,53
C
L OF NON-TURN ± 0,51) ± 0,51) .140 ± .062 (29,72 ± 0,38)
TAB .250 ± .020 (3,56 ± 1,57) OVER TERMINALS
.375
± .015 (6,35 ± 0,51)
(9,53 .121 ± .015
± 0,38) (3,07 ± 0,38) #1
.250 ± .020
THREAD
(6,35 ± 0,51)
10 9
11
1.000
8
12
± .010
7
(25,4
6
1
15°
Rotary Switches
± 0,25) 5
.125 + .001 –.002 2
3 4
(3,18 + 0,03 –0,05) DIA.
.250 + .001 –.002 30°
.219 ± .005 .642 SEE
(5,56 ± 0,13) (6,35 + 0,03 –0,05) DIA. .018 ± .005 (0,46 ± 0,13) POTENTIOMETER
± .015
(16,31 .052 ± .005 (1,32 ± 0,13) MOUNTING
± 0,38) GRAYHILL OR CUSTOMER PART NUMBER
MARKED ON SWITCH COVER UPON REQUEST.
MILITARY NUMBER MARKED ON ALL
QUALIFIED SWITCHES
NON-TURN TAB
.125 ± .003 (3,18 ± 0,08) WIDE BY INTEGRAL ASSEMBLY NUT,
.031 ± .003 (0,79 ± 0,08) THICK DO NOT REMOVE
3/8-32 NEF-2A THREAD
BUSHING KEYWAY .066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05)
Note: Common locations for a single pole per WIDE BY .036 ± .003 (0,91 ± 0,08) DEEP FROM
deck switch. For common location on A .375 (9,53) DIA.
multiple switches, see circuit diagram.
Number Approximate Potentiometer Mounting

of Dimension Weight The two mounting plates shown below are supplied with
Decks A Grams each switch.
1 1.024 (26,01) 60 .130 ± .003
2 1.370 (34,80) 67 (3,30 ± 0,08)
27.5
3 1.716 (43,59) 74 DIA. (2)
±2 15 ± 2
.245 ± .003 .098 ± .003 .437 ± .003
(6,22 ± 0,08) R. (11,10 ± 0,08) R. .380 ± .003
Series 54M Add-A-Pot Switch is a concentric (2,49 ± 0,08) DIA. (3)
(9,65 ± 0,08)
shaft unit with provision for potentiometer THROUGH BOLT DIA. (1)
mounting. Outer shaft operates switch decks. HOLE (2 EA.)
Inner shaft terminates in tapered tongue, .261 ± .003

(6,63 ± 0,08) DIA. (1)
which allows any desired potentiometer to be 15 .375 ± .003 9 .531 ± .003
mounted. The Series 54M Add-A-Pot is ±2 (9,53 ± 0,08) R. ±2 (13,49 ± 0,08) R.
qualified to MIL-DTL-3786/4-3. Patent No. 1.265 1.265
3,297,830. (32,13) (32,13)
DIA. DIA.
Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent
cover label. Customer part number marked on Mounting Plate A Mounting Plate B
request. Military part number marked when required.
Rotary
MILITARY QUALIFIED specifically SR04-2. Unsealed switches are following pages. Standard variations such as
Single Shaft Switches qualified for -65°C to 85°C in 30°, 36°, 45°, 60° terminals, shaft and/or bushing length etc., which
The military styles of the single shaft Series 42 and 90° throws. The standard and military do not affect performance, can be marked as
and 44 rotary switches are qualified to MIL-DTL- styles of the concentric switches have the qualified product. Adjustable stops cannot be
3786/4, specifically SR04-1. Qualification same dimensions with the exception of the qualified. Contact Grayhill for details about
includes two temperature ranges. Unsealed location of the 3 pole common (see circuit variations.
styles M, MB, MG and MBG are qualified for -65 diagrams). The 30° and 36° throws are described
to 85°C. Unsealed styles H, HB, HG and HBG, in the ordering information. If the 45°, 60° and Military qualified switches may be ordered by
plus sealed styles HS, HBS, HGS and HBGS are 90° throws are required, they can be provided in the military M number listed in MIL-DTL-3786/4
qualified for -65°C to 125°C. Qualification includes Section A of the Series 54 Rotary Switches; see or by the Grayhill part number. They will be
low level switching and shaft grounding as Standard Options, page J-9. marked to specifications.
specified in MIL-DTL-3786. Qualification includes
30°, 36°, 45°, 60° and 90° angles of throw with Add-A-Pot Switches
solder lug terminals. The military styles are The military style of the add-a-pot Series 54 MILITARY QUALIFIED SHAFT AND
dimensionally the same as the standard styles switch is qualified to MIL-DTL-3786/4, specifically PANEL SEAL:
with two exceptions. The location of the common SR04-3. These unsealed switches are qualified Styles HS, HBS, HGS and HBGS
for the 3-pole switch differs (see circuit diagrams) for -65°C to 85°C in 30°, 45°, 60° and 90° throws. The shaft is sealed to the bushing by an internal
and the non-turn tab for styles HS, HBS, HGS The dimensions of the military style add-a-pot O-ring per MIL-P-5516B. The bushing is sealed
and HBGS differs per the Shaft and Panel Seal switches are not the same as the standard add- to the panel with a silicone rubber washer and a
description following. a-pot switches; see drawings. stainless steel backing washer. The combined
uncompressed thickness is 0.055" (1,40). Since
Two Switches, Concentric Shafts All Qualified Switches this switch has a flat cover, a non-turn washer is
The M style of the concentric shaft Series 43 Complete electrical ratings and characteristics supplied (see Panel Seal Kit). If using it, mount
and 54 switches is qualified to MIL-DTL-3786/4, for all of these qualified switches are listed on the it in front of the panel.
SPECIFICATIONS:
Electrical Ratings
Standard Style Rating based on the following criteria: before make)
Rated: To make and break the following Overload: 50 operations at 150% rated AC Voltage and Load: As listed in the chart
loads: load One cycle is 360° rotation and a return
Endurance: 6000 operations at the rated load through all switch positions to the starting
Angle of Throw
with 1000 Vac dielectric strength before and position. The data for the curves was
30° or 36° 45° or 60° 90°
Rotary Switches
115 Vac resistive 1 amp 5 amps 5 amps after test measured at sea level, 25°C and 68% relative
6-28 Vdc resistive 1 amp 1 amp 2 amps Temperature Rise: Not to exceed 30°C when humidity.
115 Vac inductive 0.25 amp 2 amps 2 amps
carrying rated AC load after test.
115 Vdc inductive 0.02 amp — —
6-28 Vdc inductive 0.10 amp — — Note: all dimensional drawings for the standard The Series 42, 43, 44 and 54, style M, H and
115 Vdc resistive 0.10 amp — — style Series 42, 43, 44 and 54 also apply to HS switches are made to meet requirements
To carry 10 amps continuously. these switches, with the exception that switches of MIL-DTL-3786, style SR04. Diallyl phthalate
are marked per specifications. molded parts and the design of internal
Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximum switching elements provide exceptional
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms Electrical Ratings performance.
minimum Military Style
Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac initially (500 General Rating: This rating is based on Curves shown are typical load-life curves for
Vac or better after most environmental tests) standard Grayhill tests of the Military style Series 42, 43, 44 and 54, style M, H and HS
Life Expectancy: 100,000 mechanical cycles switch done at ambient conditions. It is provided switches with 30° or 36° angles of throw.
of operation. Note: Actual life is determined for comparison to the Standard Style switch. They show the numbers of cycles of rotational
by a number of factors, including electrical Charts shown for non-shorting contacts (break life expectancy for the types of loads shown.
loading, rate of rotation and environment, as Thus, with a 5 amp, 115 Vac resistive load,
well as maximum voltage breakdown required 7
10,000 cycles of life is expected. If the load
at the end of life. 6
CURRENT (AMPS)
is reduced to 3 amps, life is increased to

5 VOLTAGE 115 VAC 25,000 cycles. The larger angles of throw
RESISTIVE
UL Recognition– 4 (45°, 60° or 90°) switch larger currents for a
Styles UA, UD, UM, UP, US and USP 3 like number of cycles.
Grayhill styles A and M and their variations 2
(D, P, S and SP) of the Series 42, 43, 44 and 1 Life limiting or failure criteria for these curves
54 rotary switches have been tested by 0 are:
0 10 25 50
Underwriters Laboratories. The letter U in the Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximum
CYCLES x 1,000
style indicates proper marking as required by 1.7 Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms
Underwriters Laboratories. These switches 1.5
minimum between mutually insulated parts
CURRENT (AMPS)
are recognized under file number E35289. 1.2 VOLTAGE 30 VDC Voltage Breakdown: 1,000 Vac minimum
The UL rating for the Series 42, 43, 44 and 54 RESISTIVE between mutually insulated parts. These
1.0
is as follows: switches will carry 10 amps with maximum
.75 INDUCTIVE
Electrical Parameters: style UA = 1.0 ampere (2.8 HENRIES) contact temperature rise of 20°C. Life can be
.50
at 125 Vac. Style UM = 1.0 ampere at 125 Vac predicted by Grayhill if less critical life
.20
and also .5 ampere at 125 Vac, inductive characteristics, elevated temperature or
0
load, 0.75 to 0.8 power factor. 0 10 25 50 reduced pressure is involved.
CYCLES x 1,000
Rotary
SPECIFICATIONS:
MIL-S-3786 Electrical Values
Military Style
Style M switches, at 85°C, approximately These switches also meet MIL-DTL-3786/SR04 Mounting Bushings: Brass, tin/zinc-plated.
68% humidity and sea level pressure and for moisture resistance, medium and high shock, Shaft, Cover Plate, Retaining Rings,
style H and HS at 125°C have been tested to vibration (10 to 2000 cps), thermal shock (- Through Bolts, Shaft Extensions, Stop
make and break the following loads as stated 65°C to 125°C), salt spray, explosion and Arm, Stop Washers, Thrust Washers and
in MIL-DTL-3786/SR04; 250 milliamperes at terminal pull. Rear Support Plate: Stainless steel
28 Vdc resistive, 100 milliamperes at 28 Vdc Detent Balls: Steel, nickel-plated
inductive (2.8 henries); 75 milliamperes at Materials and Finishes Detent Springs: Tinned music wire
115 Vac resistive. Standard Style Rotor Contact: Silver alloy
Bases: Melamine per (MIL-M-14) ASTM-D- Terminals, Common Plate including
These switches have also been tested at 5948 Solder Lug: Brass, silver-plated .0003"
reduced barometric pressure (70,000 feet), Cover, Deck Separators, End Plate and Rotor minimum
25°C at approximately 68% relative humidity Mounting Plate: Phenolic per (MIL-M-14) Mounting Hardware: Two mounting nuts
to make and break the following loads as ASTM-D-5948 .094" thick by .562" across flats and one
stated in MIL-DTL-3786/SR04; 200 Mounting Bushings: Brass, tin/zinc-plated. internal tooth lockwasher are supplied with
milliamperes, 28 Vdc resistive; 25 milliamperes, Shaft, Cover Plate, Retaining Rings, Through each switch.
28 Vdc inductive (2.8 henries); 20 Bolts, Shaft Extensions, Stop Arm, Thrust Stud Nuts, Mounting Nuts, Lock Washers:
milliamperes, 115 Vac resistive. When tested Washers Stop Washers and Rear Support Tin/zinc-plated or stainless steel.
to these loads and conditions the style M, H Plate: Stainless Steel
and HS switches meet the following life limiting Detent Balls: Steel, nickel-plated Additional Characteristics
or failure criteria after 25,000 cycles in Detent Springs: Tinned music wire Standard Style and Military Qualified
accordance with MIL-S-3786. Rotor Contact, Stator (Base) Contacts: Silver Contact: Shorting or non-shorting wiping
alloy contacts with over 150 grams of contact
Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximum Terminals (Except Common): Brass, tin plated force
Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms Common Plate, Including Solder Lug: Brass, Rotational Torque: 8-115 ounce-inches
minimum between terminals and shafts silver-plated .0003" minimum depending upon the number of poles per
Dielectric Strength: 1,000 Vac (atmospheric Mounting Hardware: Two mounting nuts .094" deck, number of decks and angle of throw
pressure) and 450 Vac (reduced pressure) (2,39) thick by .562" (14,27) across flats and Mechanical Life Expectancy: 100,000
minimum between mutually insulated parts. one internal tooth lockwasher are supplied cycles of operation
with each switch. Shaft Flat Orientation: Flat opposite
When tested at sea level 25°C and 68% Stud Nuts, Mounting Nuts, Lock Washers: contacting position of pole number one (See
Rotary Switches
relative humidity with failure criteria of 50 Tin/zinc-plated or stainless steel. circuit diagram).
milliohms max. and 750 Vac breakdown Stop Strength: For Standard style: 15 pound-
voltage, these switches will make and break Materials and Finishes inches minimum. For Adjustable stop styles:
the following loads: 250 mA at 28 Vdc, 12 pound-inches
Military Qualified
inductive (2.8 henries); 1.25 amps at 28 Vdc Extended Stud: Single shaft switches of six
Bases: Diallyl per (MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948
resistive; 2.0 amps at 115 Vac, 60 Hz resistive, or more decks and concentric shaft switches
Cover, Deck Separators, End Plate and Rotor
for 10,000 cycles. of a combination of five or more decks
Mounting Plate: Diallyl per (MIL-M-14) ASTM-
D-5948 (Standard style) or four or more decks (Military
style) have longer studs with extra mounting
nuts for recommended double end mount.
Rotary
CHOICES AND LIMITATIONS: Series 42, 43, 44 and 54

A = Standard, Solder Lugs S = Shaft and Panel Seal H = Military Qualified, 125°C
P = Standard, PC Mount Terminals U = UL Recognized B = Military, Grounded Shaft
D = Standard, Adjustable Stops M = Military Qualified 85°C4 G = Military, Low Level Rating
SINGLE SHAFT SWITCHES
Style Choices Angle of Number of Poles Positions Shorting or
Series Unsealed Shaft/Panel Seal Throw Decks Per Deck Per Pole1,3 Non-Shorting
01 thru 12 1 02 thru 103 N or S
42 36°
01 thru 12 1 02 thru 123 N or S
A S
UA US 30°
01 thru 06 4 02 or 03 N or S
UM5 —
01 thru 04 5 02 N or S
M MS4
01 thru 04 6 02 N or S
MB MBS4
MG MGS4 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 083 N or S
44 MBG MBGS4 01 thru 06 2 02 thru 04 N or S
45°
H HS 01 thru 04 3 02 N
HB HBS 01 thru 03 4 02 N
HG HGS 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 063 N
HBG HBGS 60° 01 thru 06 2 02 or 03 N
01 thru 04 3 02 N
01 thru 12 1 02 thru 043 N
90°
01 thru 06 2 02 N
01 thru 12 1 AJ (2 thru 12)1 N or S
44 30°
D — 01 thru 08 3 AJ (2 thru 4)1 N or S
UD — 01 thru 06 4 AJ (2 or 3)1 N or S
42 36°
Rotary Switches
42 P SP 36° 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 103 N or S

UP USP
Concentric Shaft Switches

Style Angle of Section A (Front) Section B (Rear)
Series Choices Throw Decks Poles Position N or S Decks Poles Position N or S
CONCENTRIC SHAFT, 2 SWITCHES
01 thru 03 1 02 thru 123 N or S
01 thru 03 1 02 thru 123 N or S 01 or 02 3 02 thru 04 N or S
54 30° 01 thru 03 2 02 thru 06 N or S 01 4 02 or 03 N or S
A2
UA2 01 5 02 N or S
M2 01 6 02 N or S
01 thru 03 1 02 thru 103 N or S
43 36° 01 thru 03 1 02 thru 105 N or S
ADD-A-POT SWITCHES
54 01 thru 03 1 AJ (2-12)1 N or S
D 30° 01 thru 03 2 AJ (2-6)1 N or S
UD Second shaft operates a potentiometer
43 36° 01 thru 03 1 AJ (2-10)1 N or S supplied by the customer.
Rear mounting plates are provided.
01 thru 03 1 02 thru 125 N or S
54 M 30° 01 thru 03 2 02 thru 06 N or S
1
For Adjustable Stop (with the letter D), use AJ rotation.
instead of number of positions when ordering. 4
Styles which include both M and S are not
2
For 45°, 60° or 90° throws in Series 54 switches qualified but are made of the same materials and
of these styles, see Standard Options. construction as qualified types. For qualified
3
For single pole switches with the maximum switches with shaft and panel seal, use equivalent
positions per pole, continuous rotation is HS style.
possible. Specify fixed stop or continuous 5
UM switches are made of the same materials
rotation when ordering single shaft switches. and construction as the M style switches. For
Concentric shaft switches have continuous military switch UM is not required; use M style.
Rotary
ACCESSORIES
Internal Tooth Lockwasher–Figure A bushing to the panel. The kit consists of four .060 ± .002 .625 ± .010
(1,52 ± 0,05) (15,88 ± 0,25)
For a 3/8" bushing. Approximately 0.500" (12,7) items: a grooved hex nut, a keyed washer, a DIA.
outside diameter, .022" (0,56) thickness. Material keyed seal and a non-turn washer. Assembly is .376 + .003 –.000
described on Page J-53. Dimensions of panel .154 (9,55 + 0,08 –0,00)
is cadmium-plated steel. Part No. 12Q1272-1 + .004 DIA. .032 ± .002
For a 1/4" bushing. Approximately seal kit items are shown in Figure C. This kit –.000 (0,81 ± 0,05)
.437 ± .010
0.400" (10,16) outside diameter, .018" seals the bushing to the panel; it does not seal (3,91
(11,10 ± 0,25)
the shaft to the bushing. Not usable with + 0,10
(0,46) thickness. Material is steel, tin/ –0,00)
.120 ± .003 .125 ± .010
zinc plated. FIGURE A adjustable stop switches. Part No. 42-24 DIA. (3,18 ± 0,25)
(3,18 ± 0,08)
Non-Turn Washer–Figure B .625 ± .010

FIGURE B
Can be ordered as extra hardware for the (15,88 ± 0,25) DIA. .045 ± .003 .010 ± .002 .562 (14,27)
.375 + .004 – .000 .032 (1,14 ± 0,08) (0,25 ± 0,05) ACROSS
Series 5000, 24, 42, 43, 44, 54, 71B, 53, 57 and ± .002 FLATS
(9,53 + 0,10) DIA.
59 rotary switches. The internal key of the (0,81
washer slides into the bushing keyway. The ± 0,05)
right angle tab locks into a predrilled hole on .375 ± .005

(9,53 ± 0,13)
the back side of the mounting panel. Material is C
L
brass, tin/zinc plated. Part No. 12C1087-1 .187 ± .010 .088 (2,24)/
.125 ± .003 (4,75 ± 0,25) .093 (2,36)
(3,18 ± 0,08)
Panel Seal Kit–Figure C
Non-Turn Washer Seal Keyed Washer Hex Nut
Sold as a separate item to seal the switch FIGURE C
ORDERING INFORMATION: Single Shaft Switches, Add-A-Pot Switches

Series: Determined by the type of switch and
the angle of throw
Number of Decks: As limited by the angle of throw, the poles per deck, switch style and type of contacts
44M30–02–1–12N–F
Stop Arrangement: Add letter F to a one pole per deck switch with the maximum number of positions for
a stop between position 1 and the last position. Leave blank for continuous rotation
Rotary Switches
Positions Per Pole: Requires 02 positions as a minimum to maximum allowable dependent on the angle
of throw and poles per deck. Use AJ for adjustable stops (Styles D and UD).
Poles Per Deck: As limited by angle of throw, switch series and style
ORDERING INFORMATION: Concentric Shaft Rotary Switches

Series: Determined by the angle of throw, applicable to both sections
Section A (front)
Number of Decks: As limited by the number of poles per deck
Poles Per Deck: As limited by the angle of throw
Positions Per Pole: Requires 02 positions as a minimum to the maximum allowable dependent on the angle
of throw and the poles per deck
Type of Contacts: N=Non-shorting, S=Shorting. All one pole per deck switches with the maximum number
of positions are continuous rotation
43M02110N–M03203S
Section B (rear)
The limitations listed for Section A apply to Section B
Type of Contacts
Positions Per Pole
Poles Per Deck
Number of Decks
Style
Available from your local Grayhill Distributor For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Rotary
SERIES 53, 57 and 59

1.125" Diameter, 1/4 Amp
FEATURES
• Smallest Diameter Rotary Switch
with this Number of Positions and
Current Capacity
Compatible with Logic Circuitry

Military Style
Ser. 53—1.281 (32,54) + .046 (1,17)
Ser. 57 & 59— .437 .437 DIM. A
– .020 (0,51)
1.125 ± .010 (28,58 ± 0,25) ±.020 ±.020
DIM. B REF. STUD
(11,10 (11,10
±0,51) ±0,51) PROJECTION
.250 ± .020
(6,35 ± 0,51)
Rear views
1.000 (25.4) SER. 57 & 59
CL shown with circuit
1.156 (29.36) SER. 53
diagrams
± .010 (0,25)
45°
.250 + .001
–.002 DIA.
SEE CL OF BUSHING (6,35 + 0,03
.219 ± .004 CL CIRCUIT KEYWAY –0,05) MILITARY NUMBERS MARKED HERE
(5.56 ± 0,10) DIAGRAM BUSHING KEYWAY
C OF POSITION
L
NO. 1 .066 ± .002 (1,68 ± 0,05) WIDE
BY .036 ± .003 (0,91 ± 0,08)
DEEP FROM A .375 (9,53) DIA. INTEGRAL ASSEMBLY NUT. DO NOT REMOVE.
Rotary Switches
Approx. Approx. Non-Turn Washer Detail D

No. of Dimension Dimension Weight No. of Dimension Dimension Weight
.375 ± .005
Decks A B Grams Decks A B Grams (9,53 ± 0,13)
1 .916 (23,27) .032 (0,81) 50 7 3.164 (80,37) .281 (7,14) 110
2 1.249 (31,72) .032 (0,81) 60 8 3.497 (88,82) .281 (7,14) 120
3 1.582 (40,18) .032 (0,81) 70 9 3.830 (97,28) .281 (7,14) 130
4 1.915 (48,64) .032 (0,81) 80 10 4.163 (105,74) .281 (7,14) 140 .125
5 2.248 (57,10) .032 (0,81) 90 11 4.496 (114,20) .281 (7,14) 150 ± .003
6 2.831 (71,91) .281 (7,14) 100 12 4.829 (122,66) .281 (7,14) 160 (3,18 .032 ± .003
± 0,08) (0,81 ± 0,08)
Mounting Hardware: Two mounting nuts, .094" (2,39) thick by .562" (14,27) across flats, one internal tooth lockwasher STYLE M—.187 (4,75)
and one non-turn washer (see detail D for dimensions), are supplied with switch. STYLE HS—.125 (3,18)
± .010 (0,25)
Grayhill part number and date code marked on detent cover label. Customer part number marked on request. Military
part number marked when required.
STANDARD STYLE The line drawings shown above are applicable The qualification of the Series 53, 57 and 59
to the Style M and Style HS. The only difference rotary switches does not extend to all possible
MILITARY QUALIFIED combinations listed in the Choices and
The Series 53, 57 and 59 rotary switches are all between the two is the length of the tab of the
non-turn washer. The shorter tab for the HS is Limitations chart. The limitations on the
military type switches. Grayhill manufactures qualification are described in the chart shown
these switches in two styles: M and HS. Style M explained in the following paragraph.
below.
is unsealed and is not qualified; Style HS is shaft
and panel sealed and is qualified. The non- The Series 53, 57 and 59 Style HS rotary
switches are qualified to MIL-DTL-3786/36. The Standard variations, such as shaft and/or
qualified Style M can be regarded as our bushing length, etc., that do not affect switch
Standard Style for types of switches. Although Style HS is shaft and panel sealed. The panel is
sealed by an O-ring at the base of the bushing. performance can also be marked as qualified
it is not qualified, Style M is constructed of the product. For complete details contact Grayhill.
same military grade materials and will provide The shaft is sealed by an O-ring inside the
bushing. These seals do not alter the dimensions Military qualified Series 53, 57 and 59 Style HS
comparable performance in all areas. For rotary switches may be ordered by the ‘M’
example, the Style ‘M’ switches, in addition to shown in the line drawings when the switch is
mounted. number listed in MIL-DTL-3786/36 or by the
the electrical ratings listed elsewhere in these Grayhill part number. Military style switches
pages, will meet the following requirements of will be marked to the specification.
MIL-DTL-3786: A non-turn washer, supplied with the mounting
Moisture Resistance: Medium and High Shock; hardware, may be used with the Style HS Style HS Switches are MIL-DTL-3786/36
Vibration (10 to 500 cps); Thermal Shock (-65 switches. It is suggested that the non-turn washer Qualified for the Following Characteristics
°C to 125 °C); Salt Spray; Explosion; Terminal be mounted in the following manner to preserve
Max. No. Max. No. Max. No.
Strength (pull, 2 lbs. minimum); and Stop the seal: from the front of the panel into a hole Series of Decks Poles/Deck Total Poles/Switch
Strength (15 pound-inches minimum). that does not go through the panel.
53 5 8 24
57 5 4 20
59 5 5 20
Rotary
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS: Series 53
Switch is Viewed From Shaft End and Shown in Position No. 1 Rear View
1.350 ± .015
C3 (34,29 ± 0,38)
14 15 1617 151617 C2 C2 141516 14 151617
13 18 13 14 18 13 1718 13 18 C4
OVER TERMINALS
12 19 12 19 12 19 12 19
11 20 11 20 11 20 C3 11 20
10 21 10 21 10 21 10 21
9 9 9 16 15 14
22 9 22 22 22 17 13
18
8 23 8 23 8 23 8 23 SEE
12
19
7 24 45˚ 7 24 7 24 7 24
11
C2 DETAIL
22 21 20
6 6 6
5 4 3 2 1 C1 6
5 4 3 2 1 C 5 4 3 2 1 C 5 4 3 2 1 C
ILLINOIS
10 9 8
LA GRANGE
C1 L L C1 L
GRAYHILL
C OF BUSHING C1
71/2˚
23
L
KEYWAY
7
24
6
ONE POLE TWO POLE THREE POLE FOUR POLE
1
C OF 3 2 4 5
L
POSITION
15° Angle C4 NO. 1 C5 C6
C9 C10
of Throw 1415 1617 C8 17 18 19 20 C11
14 151617 C5 13 18 16 21 SEE NOTE
13 18
12 C4 12 19 C7 15 22 7.5°
19
C3 11 20 11 20 C7 14 23 C12
10 21 10 21 13 24
9 22 9 22 deck switch. For common location on
12 1
8 23 C6 C3 8 23 CL OF POSITION #1 multipole switches see circuit diagrams.
C8 C6 11 2 C1
7 24 7 24
6 6 1 10 3
5 4 3 2 1 C 5 4 3 2
C 9 4
C2 37.5°
L
C2 C1
L C5 8 7 6 5 C2 Terminal Detail
C1
C4 C3
CL OF BUSHING
KEYWAY
.034 ± .003
FIVE OR SIX POLE SEVEN OR EIGHT POLE NINE THRU TWELVE POLE (0,86 ± 0,08) .068 ± .005
(1,73 ± 0,13)
Rotary Switches
Switch is Viewed From Shaft End and Shown in Position No. 1 Rear View
C3
11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 11
12 13 14
10 15 10 15 C2 10 15
1.190 ± .015
9 16 9 16 9 16
(30,23 ± 0,38)
8 17 8 17 8 17
C2 OVER TERMINALS
7 18 7 18 7 18
C4
6 19 6 19 6 19
45˚
5 20 5 20 5 20 12 1
C1 13
4 3 2 1 C1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 14 1
10
18˚ C OF BUSHING C C 15
L L SEE
18° Angle L C1 9
16
KEYWAY DETAIL 8
ILLINOIS
of Throw
18 17
C OF POSITION LA GRANGE
L GRAYHILL
7
NO. 1
C7
19
C4 C6
20
11 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 C8 1 3
4
15
2
C3 10 C5 10 15
9 16 9 16
C5 SEE NOTE
8 17 8 17 C9
7 18 C4 7 18
6 19 6 19 C10 Note: Common location for a single pole per
5 20 5 20 deck switch. For common location on
C2 4 3 2 1 C3 4 3 2 1 multipole switches see circuit diagrams.
C1 CL C1 CL
C2
FIVE POLE SIX THRU TEN POLE
Rotary
Switch is Viewed From Shaft End and Shown in Position No. 1. Rear View
10 11 10 11
9 12 9 12 C2
1.190 ± .015
8 13 8 13 (30,23 ± 0,38)
7 14 7 14 OVER TERMINALS
6 15 6 15
5 16 5 16
11-15° 11 10
4 1 C1 4 1 C 9
3 2 C1 3 2 12
L
13
8
1 C OF BUSHING SEE
22 /2° Angle ONE POLE L TWO POLE DETAIL
KEYWAY
14
7
ILLINOIS
of Throw
LA GRANGE
C OF POSITION GRAYHILL
15
L C5
6
C3 NO. 1 C6
10 11 10 11
16
5
9 12 9 12 4
C4 C4 8
1
2 3
8 13 13 C7
7 14 7 14
6 15 6 15
SEE NOTE
5 16 16 C8
C3 5
C2 4 1 4 1
3 2 3 2 Note: Common location for a single pole per
C1 CL C
L deck switch. For common location on
C2 C1
multipole switches see circuit diagrams.
THREE OR FIVE THRU
FOUR POLE EIGHT POLE
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Ratings types of loads shown. Thus, with a 250 high shock, vibration, thermal, thermal shock,
General milliamperes, 30 Vdc resistive load, 10,000 salt spray, explosion, terminal strength and
Switch rating for break before make contacts. cycles of life can be expected. Life limiting or stop strength.
Voltage: As listed in the chart. failure criteria for these curves are: Materials and Finishes
Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximum Cover, Base, Spacer and Rotor Mounting
(20 milliohms initially). Plate: Diallyl per (MIL-M-14) ASTM-D-5948
400 Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms Mounting Bushing: Brass, tin/zinc-plated.
CURRENT MILLIAMPS
Rotary Switches
VOLTAGE 115 VAC minimum between mutually insulated parts. Shaft, Stop Pins, Retaining Rings, Through
300 Voltage Breakdown: 500 Vac minimum Bolts, Shaft Extension, Stop Arm, Thrust
between mutually insulated parts. These Washers, Lockwashers, Nuts, Non-turn
200
switches will carry 4 amperes with a maximum Washer, Cover Plate and Rear Support
100 contact temperature rise of 20°C. If the life Plate: Stainless steel
limiting characteristics are less critical than Detent Balls: Steel, nickel-plated
0 those shown above or if elevated temperatures
0 5 10 15 20 25 Detent Springs: Tinned music wire
or reduced pressures are involved, Grayhill can Rotor Contact: Silver alloy, gold-plated
CYCLES x 1,000
predict the switch life for the application. .00001" minimum.
Terminals and Common Plate Including
400 Electrical Ratings
CURRENT MILLIAMPS
Solder Lug: Brass, gold plate .00002"

300
Military Qualified minimum over silver plate .0003" minimum.
30 VDC RESISTIVE The Series 53, 57 and 59 Style HS, Rotary Panel Seal: Silicone rubber.
200 Switches have been tested to make and break Shaft Seal: O-ring per MIL-M-5516B.
the following loads as stated in MIL-DTL-3786/ Mounting Nut, Lock Washer: Brass, tin/zinc-
100 36: 70,000 ft. altitude for 10,000 cycles: 10mA, plated or stainless steel.
30 VDC
INDUCTIVE 28 Vdc, inductive (250 mH); 50 mA, 28 Vdc,
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 resistive; 20 mA, 115 Vac, resistive. Atmospheric Additional Characteristics
CYCLES x 1,000 pressure, 125°C for 10,000 cycles: 25 mA, Rotational Torque: 20-80 in-ozs., depending
28 Vdc inductive (250 mH); 75 mA, 28 Vdc, on the number of poles per deck and the
resistive; 50 mA, 115 Vac resistive. Atmospheric number of decks.
pressure, 25°C for 10,000 cycles: 75 mA, Contacts: Shorting or non-shorting wiping
28 Vdc, inductive (250 mH); 250 mA, 28 Vdc contacts with over 100 grams of contact force.
Curve data based on test data conducted at resistive; 150 mA, 115 Vac, resistive. Life limiting Shaft Flat Orientation: Flat opposite
sea level, 25°C and relative humidity. Cycle criteria for these loads are: contacting position pole #1 (See Circuit
equals 360° rotation and 360° return. Cycling Contact Resistance: 50 milliohms maximum. Diagrams).
rate is 10 cycles per minute. The curves Dielectric Strength: 500 Vac (350 Vac— Extended Studs: Switches of 6 decks or
shown are typical load life curves for a Series reduced pressure). more have longer studs with extra stud nuts
53M, 57M and 59M Rotary Switch. They show Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megohms for recommended double end mounting.
the number of cycles of rotational life that can minimum. These switches also meet MIL-DTL- Terminals: Switch is provided with full
be expected for the voltages, currents and 3786/36 for moisture resistance, medium and complement of base or position terminals
regardless of the number of active positions.
Rotary

Style and Angle of Number of Decks Poles Number of
Series Designation Throw Stops Terminals Shorting Non-Shorting Per Deck Positions/Pole
01 thru 12 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 24

01 thru 12 01 thru 12 2 02 thru 12
M = Military Style
01 thru 08 01 thru 08 3 02 thru 08
53 15° Fixed Solder 01 thru 06 01 thru 06 4 02 thru 06
HS = Military Qualified,
Lug 01 thru 04 01 thru 04 5 or 6 02 thru 04
Shaft/Panel Seal
01 thru 03 01 thru 03 7 or 8 02 or 03
01 or 02 01 or 02 9, 10, 11 or 12 02
M = Military Style 01 thru 12 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 16

57 221/2° Fixed Solder 01 thru 12 01 thru 12 2 02 thru 08
HS = Military Qualified, Lug 01 thru 06 01 thru 06 3 or 4 02 thru 04
Shaft/Panel Seal 01 thru 03 01 thru 03 5, 6, 7 or 8 02
01 thru 12 01 thru 12 1 02 thru 20

M = Military Style 01 thru 12 01 thru 12 2 02 thru 10
59 18° Fixed Solder 01 thru 06 01 thru 06 3 or 4 02 thru 05
HS = Military Qualified, Lug 01 thru 04 01 thru 04 5 02 thru 04
Shaft/Panel Seal 01 or 02 01 or 02 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 02
MIL Spec. provides for qualification up to and including five decks. Switches of longer length,
although not specifically qualified, are built of the same materials and are of the same construction.
Series
Rotary Switches
Number of Decks: As limited by Choices and Limitations chart
57M22–01–1–16N–F

maximum positions.
F = Stop between last and first positions; C = Continuous Rotation
Positions Per Pole: requires 02 as a minimum to the maximum allowable
dependent on the angle of throw and poles per deck
Poles Per Deck: As limited by angle of throw
* All rotary switches that are required to have military designated markings and testing adhering to MIL-DTL-3786
are to be ordered by specifying the military part number identified on the appropriate slash sheet.
Available from your local Grayhill Distributor For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Rotary
Keylock Rotary Switches
Rotary Switches
F-65 Grayhill, Inc. • 561 Hillgrove Avenue • LaGrange, Illinois 60525-5997 • USA • Phone: 708-354-1040 • Fax: 708-354-2820 • www.grayhill.com
Contents: Keylock Rotary Switches
KEYLOCK ROTARY SWITCHES

• Protection From Unauthorized
Use
• Static Damage Protection
Rotary Switches
• Choices of Size, Circuitry,
Rating
Page
SINGLE DECK..................................................... Series 58 ....................... 2

MULTI-DECK ...................................... Series 71J and 71L ....................... 5
HIGH CURRENT ............................................... Series 44L ....................... 7
Rotary
SERIES 58
Single Deck, Antistatic
LOCK FEATURES SWITCH FEATURES

• Minimum Space Behind Panel • Economical
• 15,000 Vdc Static Protection • Solder Lug or PC Mount
• 5 Tumbler-Plate Security • 36°, 45°, 60°, or 90° Throws
• In-Panel Key Recoding • 1 or 2 Poles Per Switch
• Up to 10 Positions for 1 Pole
Standard Style LOCKWASHER 36°, 45°, 60°, or 90°

Ø 1.062 ± .020 (Ø 26,97 ± 0,51)
SHOWN IN THIS VIEW ONLY
Angle of Throw
Ø .900
(Ø 22,86) MOUNTING NUT
.875 (22,23) ACROSS FLATS TERMINAL FOR
A .125 (3,18) THICK POSITION 1
POSITION SHOWN IN THIS VIEW ONLY
COMMON
INDICATOR TERMINAL
ARROW
2 1
4 3
.268 ± .015
(6,81 ± 0,38)
.260 ± .020 .792 ± .020 .625 ± .010
Keyslot is shown in (6,60 ± 0,51) (20,12 ± 0,51)
switch position 1. .187 ± .015 (15,88 ± 0,25)
Key removal position A. (4,75 ± 0,38)
Rotary Switches
Key is inserted cut edge down. All terminals are provided

1.957 ± .062 regardless of the number of
(49,71 ± 1,57) active switch positions.
PC Mount Style
36°, 45°, 60, or 90°
Dimensions not shown are
the same as above. Angle of Throw
2 1
4 3
.125 ± .015
(3,18 ± 0,38)
1.875 ± .062
(47,63 ± 1,57)
TERMINAL DETAIL RECOMMENDED PANEL CUT

Solder Lug Solder Lug Common PC Mount
A G E G .629 + .010 –.000

(15,98 + 0,25)
C
B H D F H
A = .064 ± .005 (1,63±0,13) C = .050 ± .010 (1,27±0,25) E = .125 ± .015 (3,18 ±0,38)
B = .032 ± .004 (0,81±0,10) D = .062 Ø ± .002 (1,57 Ø ±0,05) F = .020 ± .003 (0,51 ±0,08)
.750 + .015 –.000
(19,05 + 0,38)
G = .020 ± .003 (0,51 ±0,08)
H = .062 ± .004 (1,57 ±0,10)
Rotary
CIRCUITRY
REAR REAR
VIEW VIEW
COMMON TERMINAL (1 POLE) COMMON TERMINAL (1 POLE)

.320 ± .015 (8,13 ± 0,38) DIAMETER
.320 ± .015 (8,13 ± 0,38) DIAMETER CIRCLE OF TERMINAL CENTERS
.125 ± .015
.125 ± .015
(3,18 ± 0,38)
18˚ (3,18 ± 0,38) 22.5˚
POS. 1 POS. 1
LOCATION OF COMMONS LOCATION OF COMMONS
36˚ 45˚
2 POLES 2 POLES
VIEWED FROM FRONT END; SHOWN IN POSITION 1. VIEWED FROM FRONT END; SHOWN IN POSITION 1.
10 1 10 1 8 1 8 1
9 2 9 2
7 2 7 2
8 8 C2 C2 C1
3 C1 3
6 3 6 3
7 4 7 4
6 5 6 5 5 4 5 4
REAR 60° Angle of Throw REAR 90° Angle of Throw

VIEW VIEW
COMMON TERMINAL (1 POLE) COMMON TERMINAL (1 POLE)

.320 ± .015 (8,13 ± 0,38) DIAMETER LOCATION OF COMMONS
CIRCLE OF TERMINAL CENTERS 2 POLES
.320 ± .015 (8,13 ± 0,38)
DIAMETER CIRCLE OF
.125 ± .015 TERMINAL CENTERS .125 ± .015
(3,18 ± 0,38) (3,18 ± 0,38)
30˚
45˚
POS. 1 LOCATION OF COMMONS
2 POLES POS. 1
Rotary Switches
60˚
90˚
VIEWED FROM FRONT END; SHOWN IN POSITION 1. VIEWED FROM FRONT END; SHOWN IN POSITION 1.
6 1 6 1
4 1 4 1
C2 C1 C2
2 C1
5 2 5
4 4 3 3 2 3 2
3
LOCK SPECIFICATIONS SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS

General Characteristics Materials & Finishes Electrical Characteristics
Mounting: By bushing, nut and lockwasher Keys: Brass; 2 supplied Chart is shown for non-shorting contacts and
Keying: All locks keyed alike except by Lock Barrel & Plug: Zinc, clear chromate resistive load and for the life limiting criteria
special order Lockwasher: Steel, tin zinc plated indicated below. The data for the curve was
Orientation of Keylock Switch: Lock flats Mounting Nut: Steel, nickel-plated measured at sea level, 25°C and 68% relative
on both sides with key upright (cut side Tumbler Plates: Brass humidity. Contact Grayhill for more information
down) in position 1. if any of the following is true: life limiting
Key Removals: criteria are more critical than those listed;
36° Throw Switch At every position or more cycles of operation are required; a
At 0° & 180° larger make and break current is required;
45° Throw Switch At every position or the operating environment includes elevated
At 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° temperatures or reduced pressures.
60° Throw Switch At every position or
At 0°, 180° 300 Curve A: 220 Vac all angles
B of throw.
90° Throw Switch At every position or
CURRENT
MILLIAMPS
A Curve B: 115 Vac and 30

At 0°, 180° 200
Vdc for all angles of throw.
Optional pulls Contact Grayhill 100
0
0 10 20 30
CYCLES x 1000
Rotary
SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS Continued

Contact Resistance: Anti-Static Voltage: Anti-static types tested Materials and Finishes
Initially: less than 10 mΩ to withstand 15,000 Vdc Switch Base: Thermoset plastic
End of life: less than 50 mΩ Switch Housing: Nylon
Insulation Resistance: (Between mutually Mechanical Characteristics Detent Rotor: Nylon
insulated parts) Switching Mode: Shorting (make before break) Detent Balls: Steel, nickel-plated
Initially: 50,000 MΩ or non-shorting (break before make) as limited Detent Springs, and Contact Springs:
Minimum: 10,000 MΩ by the Choices chart Stainless steel
Breakdown Voltage: (Between mutually Type of Contact: Wiping Common Ring: Brass, gold plate over silver
insulated parts) more than 600 Vac Number of Terminals: All switches are provided plate
Life Expectancy: Per chart; cycle is 1 with the full circle of terminals regardless of the Terminals: Brass, gold over silver and
rotation thru all active positions plus a full number of active positions nickel plate
return. Stop Strength: 1.70 Nm maximum (15.0 in-lbs) Rotor Contact: Precious metal, gold alloy
Carry Current: 6A; maximum temperature Switching Torque: 8 to 16 in-ozs
rise 20°C

Lock Style and Switch Style and Angle of No. Of Poles/ Positions Shorting or
Description* Description Throw Decks Deck Per Pole** Non-Shrtg.
Series 58J Switches
J4: Standard–Key pulls at Position 1 A = Standard, Solder Lugs 1 02 to 08 N or S

and at 90 Degree Increments P = Standard, PC Mount 45° 1 2 02 to 04 N or S
1 02 to 10 N or S
36° 1
2 02 to 05 N or S
A = Standard, Solder Lugs 1 02 to 08 N or S

J8: Standard–Key Pulls at Each 45° 1
P = Standard, PC Mount 2 02 to 04 N or S
Position
1 02 to 04 N
90° 1
Rotary Switches
2 02 N
1 02 to 10 N or S
36° 1 2 02 to 05 N or S
1 02 to 08 N or S
45° 1 2 02 to 04 N or S
J9: Standard–Key Pulls at Position 1 A = Standard, Solder Lugs
and at 180 Degrees P = Standard, PC Mount 1 02 to 06 N
60° 1
2 02 to 03 N
1 02 to 04 N
90° 1
2 02 N
*Standard Keylock has anti-static protection. All keylock versions available without anti-static protection, with a reduced overall body length. Contact
Grayhill for more information.
**For single pole switches with maximum positions, specify continuous rotation or fixed stop when ordering.
Series Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Lock Style: per Choices Chart J4, J8, J9
Switch Style: per Choices Chart A or P
Angle of Throw: 36, 45, 60 or 90 (per Choices chart)
Number of Decks: 01
Poles per Deck: = 1 or 2 (per Choices chart)
Positions per Pole: 02 thru 10 (per Choices chart)
Type of Contacts: (per Choices chart)
N = Non-shorting
S = Shorting
Stop Arrangement Suffix:
(needed only for 1-pole switches with maximum positions)
F = Fixed stop between last and first positions
*Leave blank for continuous rotation
58J8A36-01-1-10N-F
Rotary
SERIES 71 J and L
Multi-Deck, Standard &
Anti-Static
LOCK FEATURES SWITCH FEATURES

• Economical • Economical
• Standard or Anti-Static Style • 36° or 30° Throws
• 5-Plates, 1-Sided Key • Up to 16 Poles Per Switch
Key slot shown in position 1. 30° 36°

Key to be inserted with cut
side down. 3/4-24 UNS-2A
THREAD
10 9 8 7
GRAYHILL
GRAYHILL
8
1
6
9
1 12 1
10
5
6
5
4
1
2
3 4 3
2
0.687 ± .010 DIM. B

.685 ± .015 .685 ± .015
(17,45 ± 0,25) (17,4 ± 0,4) (17,4 ± 0,4)
0.900 ± .005 OVER TERMINALS OVER TERMINALS
DIMENSION A
(22,86 ± 0,13)
Note: Switch/key positions are not aligned with terminal positions.
Rotary Switches
Number of decks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Dim. A, Style J (In.) 2.441 2.659 2.877 3.095 3.313 3.811 4.029 4.247 4.465 4.683 4.901 5.119
Dim. A, Style L (In.) 1.811 2.029 2.247 2.465 2.683 3.181 3.399 3.617 3.835 4.053 4.271 4.489
Dim. B Style J & L(In.) .031 .031 .031 .031 .031 .312 .312 .312 .312 .312 .312 .312
Dim. A, Style J (mm) 62,00 67,54 73,08 78,61 84,15 96,80 102,34 107,87 113,41 118,95 124,49 130,02
Dim. A, Style L (mm) 46,00 51,54 57,07 62,61 68,15 80,80 86,33 91.87 97,41 102,95 108.48 114,02
Dim. B Style J & L(mm) 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 0,79 7,92 7,92 7,92 7,92 7,92 7,92 7,92
For switch specifications and additional dimensions, see Standard Switch Pages. Grayhill part number and date code marked on label.
LOCK DETAIL RECOMMENDED PANEL CUT
LOCKWASHER
LOCKWASHER IS MOUNTING NUT A = .218 (5,54)
1.062 ± .022 B = .875 ± .020 (22,23 ± 0,51)
(26,97 ± 0,56) DIA. BY 3/4-24 UNS-2A NUT IS APPROXIMATELY
THREAD .875 (22,23) ACROSS FLATS .691 + .010 –.000
.022 (0,56) THICK
LOCK ANTI-STATIC (17,55 + 0,25)
ADAPTOR ADAPTOR
.730
(18,54)
.750 + .015 –.000

A B B (19,05 + 0,38)
1.0 (25,4) 1.050 (26,25) 1.680 (42,67)

REF. REF.
Rotary
CHOICES
Style Description Angle of No. Of Poles/ Positions Shorting or

Throw Decks Deck Per Pole Non-Shrtg.
Series 71 Switches
30° 01 to 12 1 02 to 12* N or S
01 to 08 2 02 to 06 N or S
01 to 05 3 02 to 03 N or S
L Standard, Solder Lugs 01 to 04 4 02 to 03 N or S
J Anti-static, Solder Lugs 01 to 03 5 02 N or S
01 or 02 6 02 N or S
36° 01 to 12 1 02 to 10* N or S
01 to 08 2 02 to 05 N or S
*For single pole switches with maximum positions, specify continuous rotation or fixed stop when ordering.
LOCK SPECIFICATIONS LOCK MATERIALS & FINISHES

Mounting: By bushing, nut and lockwasher Key Removal Keys: Brass; 2 supplied
Static Voltages: Anti-static style withstands 30° Throw: Position 1 and 180° Lock Bezel: Stainless steel
15,000 Vdc Special key removal: Every 90° Lock Barrel & Plug: Zinc treated with chromate
Keying: All locks have identical keys unless Lock Adaptor/Extension: Thermoplastic
36° Throw: All positions
specially ordered otherwise Special key removal: Position 1 only
Orientation of Keylock Switch: Bushing flats
are on both sides of the mounting thread with
the key upright in the first position with cut side
down.
ORDERING INFORMATION STANDARD SWITCH PAGES

For additional switch dimensions, ratings, circuitry,
Series and specifications, see Series 71. Switches
Rotary Switches
Style Letter: L for standard; J for anti-static beginning on page J-31.

Angle of Throw: 30 or 36
Number of Decks: 01 thru 12 (per Choices chart) Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.
Poles per Deck: 1 thru 6 (per Choices chart) For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales
Positions per Pole: 02 thru 12 (per Choices chart) Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Type of Contacts:
N = Non-shorting
S = Shorting
Stop Arrangement Suffix:
(needed only for 1-pole switches with maximum positions)
F = Fixed stop between last and first positions
71 L 30-03-1-12N-F
Rotary
SERIES 44L
High Current, 5 Amp
LOCK FEATURES
• 8-Pin, Round Key Security
• Options for Flat Keys, Special
Keying, and Key Removals
SWITCH FEATURES
• High, 5 Amp Current Switching
• 45°, Up to 8 Poles Per Switch
• RoHS Compliant
DIM. A
SWITCH POSITION 1 .283 ± .062
(KEY REMOVAL A) (7,19 ± 1,57)
1.575 ± .015 .522 ± .020 1-3/8-32
(40,0 ± 0,38) (13,26 ± 0,51) UNS-2A 15˚
H B DIA. THREAD 45˚
DIM. B
HOLE DIA.
1 ≥ .064 (1,63)
2 AFTER
8
1.170 ± .015
G C (29,72 ± 0,38) PLATING
7
3
OVER TERMINALS
6
4
5
F D
E Note: Switch/key positions are not
1.332 ± .002 LOCK SWITCH aligned with terminal positions.
(33,83 ± 0,05)
² 1.950 (49,53) DIA. KNURLED NUT 1.800 (45,72) DIA.;
Rotary Switches
ACROSS FLATS
LOCKWASHER .281 (7,14) THICK; PIN HOLES
90¡ APART
No. of decks 1 2 3 4 5 6 No. of Decks 1 2 3 4 5 6

Approx. Weight
Dim. A (In.) 1.556 1.902 2.248 2.594 2.940 3.536 123 120 127 144 151 158
in Grams
Dim. B (in.) .062 .062 .062 .062 .062 .312
Dim. A (mm) 39,52 48,31 57,10 65,89 74,68 89,81 Grayhill part number and date code marked on label.
Dim. B (mm) 1,57 1,57 1,57 1,57 1,57 7,92 Customer part number marked on request.
RECOMMENDED PANEL CUT LOCK SPECIFICATIONS LOCK MATERIALS AND FINISHES

Keying: Each lock is keyed differently Bushing and Knurled Spanner Nut:
1.335 + .010 – .000 Key Removal: All positions (45°, etc) Aluminum, black anodized
(33,91 + 0,25 – 0,00)
Special Options: Flat key with 90° or 180° Keying Washer, Cover Support Plate,
increment key removals; 7 thru 12 decks Shaft Extension: 302 Stainless steel
. Internal and External Lockwashers: Brass,
tin/zinc-plated or stainless steel.
Keys, Cylindrical: Stainless steel; 2 supplied
1.375 + .015 – .000

(34,93 + 0,38 – 0,00)
Angle of No. Of Poles/ Positions Shorting or

Style Description
Throw Decks Deck Per Pole Non-Shrtg.
Series 44 Switches
01 to 06 1 02 to 08 N or S
L Standard, Solder Lugs 45° 01 to 03 2 02 to 04 N or S
01 or 02 3 01 or 02 N
01 or 02 4 01 or 02 N
Rotary
SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Characteristics Breakdown Voltage: Materials and Finishes: Switch

Industrial Grade Switch (Between mutually insulated parts) Switch Bases: Melamine per MIL–M–14, 4
Initially: 1,000 Vac Switch Bases:
Switching Current and Life
End of life: 500 Vac Industrial Grade: Melamine per MIL–M–14
The load-life values indicate the number of
cycles of operation expected for the voltage, Carry Current: 10A; maximum temperature Military: Diallyl per MIL–M–14
current and type of load. End of life is defined rise 20°C Cover, Deck Separators, End Plate, and
using the resistance and breakdown failure Rotor Mounting Plate: Phenolic per
criteria listed below. Mechanical Characteristics MIL–M–14
Switching Mode: Shaft, Shaft Extension, Stop Arm, Stop
5A at 115 Vac, resistive Washers, Rear Support Plate, Cover
45°, 1 or 2 poles: Shorting or non-shorting
1A at 6 to 28 Vdc, resistive Plate, Retaining Ring, Studs, Nuts:
45°, 3 or 4 poles: Non-shorting
2A at 115 Vac, inductive Stainless steel
Type of Contact: Wiping contacts
Cycle of Operation: 360° rotation plus a 360° Contact Force: greater than 150g Detent Balls: Steel, nickel-plated
return Number of Terminals: Switches are provided Detent Springs: Tinned music wire
with only the number of terminals needed Rotor Contact, and Stator (Base)
Test Conditions: 25°C, 68% relative humidity, Contacts: Silver alloy
atmospheric pressure Stop Strength: greater than 15 in-lbs (1.70
Nm) Common Plate, and Common Terminal:
Life Expectancy: Brass, 300µ inch, (7.6 µm) silver plate
With loads above: 25,000 cycles Switching Torque: 8-115 in-ozs (28 to 230
mNm), depending on the number of poles, Base Terminals: Brass, tin plated
Without load: 100,000 cycles
number of decks, and angle of throw
Contact Resistance:
End of life: less than 20 mΩ Additional Characteristics
Switches of 6 or more decks have longer studs
Insulation Resistance:
with extra mounting nuts for recommended
(Between mutually insulated parts)
double end mount
Initially: 50,000 MΩ
Rotary Switches

Series Office, an authorized local Distributor or Grayhill.
Style Letter: L
Angle of Throw: 45°
Number of Decks: 01 thru 06 (per Choices chart)
Poles per Deck: 1 thru 4 (per Choices chart)
Positions per Pole: 02 thru 08 (per Choices chart)
Type of Contacts:
N = Non-shorting
S = Shorting (per Choices chart)
Stop Arrangement Suffix: (needed only for 1-pole switches with
maximum positions)
F = Fixed stop between positions 8 and 1
44 L 45-02-1-08N-F
Rotary
Special Function Rotary Switches
SERIES 09, 42, 44, 50, 51

Isolated Position
FEATURES
• Protected Switch Positions For
Safety, Calibration, or Stand-by
• Choice of Push- or Pull-To-Turn
• 1/2" Diameter, 200 mA and
1" Diameter, 1 Amp Switch
DESCRIPTION
An isolated position is one which cannot be reached by the normal rotation. An additional action is
required by the operator. It could be either Push-To-Turn, or Pull-To-Turn. After the switch is rotated
to the isolated position, releasing the shaft locks the switch in that position. Push or pull again to
rotate the switch again.
Use isolated positions to protect a switch position from indiscriminate rotation. Such safety positions
might include “calibrate”, “off” and/or “stand-by”.
DIMENSIONS
Series 09 Series 50 & 51 Series 42 & 44
DIM. A + .046 (1,17) DIM. A + .046 –.020

–.020 (0,51) SOLDER (+ 0,05 –0,51)
DIM. A
LUGS
.062 (1,57)
Rotary Switches
PC
DIM. A TERMINALS
Dimension A Dimension A
1 Deck 1.228 (31,19) Dimension A 1 Deck 1.371 (34,82)
2 Decks 1.496 (38,0) 2 Decks 1.717 (43,61)
3 Decks 1.764 (44,81) Solder Lug .893 ± .025 (22,68 ± 0,64) 3 Decks 2.063 (52,40)
4 Decks 2.032 (51,61) PC Style .897 ± .025 (22,78 ± 0,64) 4 Decks 2.409 (61,19)

Customer number marked on request.
EXTERNAL DIFFERENCES SPECIFICATIONS

The isolated position mechanism increases the Electrical Ratings Materials and Finishes
depth of the Series 50 and 51 by 0.217" (5,51 The switching elements, and therefore ratings, Materials and finishes for the isolation
mm). All other dimensions remain unchanged. are the same in an isolated position switch as in mechanism are listed here.
In Series 9, 42 and 44, it has the appearance of a conventional rotary switch. Mechanical life is Series 50 and 51
an additional deck section without terminals, also the same. Housing: Zinc casting, tin/zinc-plated
located directly behind the detent system. Shaft: 303 stainless steel
Additional Characteristics Stop Pin and Stop Post: 303 stainless steel
Shaft Movement or Vertical Travel: Spring: Tinned music wire
Series 09 .062 ± .020 (1,57 ± 0,51) Series 09
Series 42 & 44 .070 ± .020 (1,78 ± 0,51) Housing: Phenolic for style A; Diallyl, for M
Series 50 & 51 .080 ± .020 (2,03 ± 0,51) Shaft: 303 stainless steel, electro-polished
Push or Pull Force Required: Stop Pin and Stop Post: 303 stainless steel
Series 09 1.75 ± .5 lbs Spring: Tinned music wire
Series 42 & 44 2 ± .5 lbs Series 42 and 44
Series 50 & 51 2 ± .5 lbs Housing: Diallyl per MIL-M-14
Stops: Single pole per deck switches with the Shaft: 303 stainless steel
maximum number of positions are supplied with Lock Plate: 302 stainless steel
stops only on request: 12 positions in 30° throw, Lock Arm: 316 stainless steel
10 in 36°, and 8 in 45°. Lock Post: Brass, tin/zinc-plated
Stop Strength: Approximately 7.5 pound-inches Compression Spring: Tinned music wire
for the isolated position stop.
Rotary
Special Function Rotary Switches

Standard Military Style Angle Of No. Of Poles Per Positions Shorting Or
Style Style** Description Throw Decks Deck Per Pole Non-Shorting
01 to 04 1 02 to 12 N or S
01 to 04 2 02 to 06 N or S
09A 09M Solder Lug 30° 01 to 04 3 02 to 04 N or S
01 to 04 4 02 or 03 N or S
01 to 04 5 02 N or S
01 to 03 6 02 N or S
42A 42M Solder Lug

42S — Sealed 36° 01 to 04 1 02 to 10 N or S
— 42H 125° Temperature Rating 01 to 04 2 02 to 05 N or S
— 42HS 125° Temp Rating, Sealed
01 to 04 1 02 to 12 N or S
01 to 04 2 02 to 06 N or S
30° 01 to 04 3 02 to 04 N or S
44A 44M Solder Lug 01 to 04 4 02 or 03 N or S
44S — Sealed 01 to 04 5 02 N or S
— 44H 125° Temperature Rating 01 to 04 6 02 N or S
— 44HS 125° Temp Rating, Sealed
45° 01 to 04 1 02 to 08 N or S
01 to 03 2 02 to 04 N or S
01 or 02 3 02 N or S
01 or 02 4 02 N
-- 50C Solder Lug

-- 50CP PC Mount 36° 01 1 02 to 10 N or S
-- 50M* Solder Lug, Sealed 2 02 to 05 N or S
-- 50MP* Sealed, PC
-- 51C Solder Lug 1 02 to 12 N or S
Rotary Switches
-- 51CP PC Mount 30° 01 2 02 to 06 N or S
-- 51M* Solder Lug, Sealed 3 02 or 03 N or S
-- 51MP* PC Mount, Sealed 4 02 or 03 N or S
*(Pull-to-Turn only) **For specifics on military qualified products, see Standard Switch Pages.
CONVENTIONAL NUMBERS Let's isolate position 1 and position 2 from all ORDERING INFORMATION
Start by creating a conventional switch number other positions and from each other. We indicate Indicate this as a SPECIAL switch to ensure
in the manner which follows: isolation posts as shown here: that no error is made when the order is entered.
12P1P2P3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Sample part number:
Series & Style To isolate just position 1, describe like this:
Angle of Throw 12P1P2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Number of Decks To isolate positions 1 and 2 from all other SPECIAL
positions, but not from each other, do this: 09A30-04-1-12N
09A30-01-1-12N 12P1 2P3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PULL 12P1P2P3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Type of Contacts DESCRIBING STOPS
Shorting = S When a 1-pole switch has less than the maximum
Non-Shorting = N number of positions, consider also the stop This sample part number orders a Series 9
Positions Per Pole system. Following is the arrangement for a 6 standard style, four deck, one pole per deck,
Poles Per Deck position switch with the position 1 isolated. twelve positions per pole rotary switch with non-
STOP 1P2 3 4 5 6 STOP shorting contacts and isolation posts between
Note: No stop arrangement suffix is needed. The word “STOP” indicates the conventional positions 12 and 1, between 1 and 2, and
See Describing Stops. switch stops, which limit rotation to positions 1 between 2 and 3.
through 6. To isolate position 1 we insert only
DESCRIBING POSITIONS one isolation post–between terminals 1 and 2. This lengthy order number is required to prevent
The Grayhill system for isolating positions lets The stop system already prevents rotation any possible confusion in ordering the switch.
you choose the positions to be isolated. Grayhill beyond terminal 1. When we receive your order, we will assign a
inserts isolation posts next to the positions to be In multi-pole switches, the stop system and special “short form” part number to facilitate
isolated. Consider a continuous rotation switch isolation system described for the first pole, future identification of this special switch. This
of the Series 09A with a 30° angle of throw. The automatically affects the other poles. In the number is sequentially assigned as the need
terminals are listed here from 1 through 12 with example above, isolating position #1 on the first arises, and is non-descriptive. A typical “short
a space between each to indicate where isolation pole isolates the first position (terminal #7) of form” special part number might be 09YY12345.
posts might be inserted. the second pole. See Standard Switch Pages Contact Grayhill for price.
12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 for a 2 pole circuit diagram for a 30° throw
switch. Not available through Distributors.
Rotary
Tact Switches
Contents: Tactile Switches
TACT SWITCHES
• Excellent tactile feedback
• Washable and non-washable
versions
• Insert molded terminals to
prevent flux buildup during
soldering
• Ultraminiature and lightweight
design suitable for high
Tact Switches
density mounting
• RoHS Compliant
Page
Selection Chart ............................................................................................. 2
NON-WASHABLE TACTILE SWITCHES
6mm x 3.5mm ................................................................................................ 3

6mm Square .................................................................................................. 4
12mm Square ................................................................................................ 7
5mm Square .................................................................................................. 9
WASHABLE TACTILE SWITCHES
6mm ............................................................................................................. 10
TACT
Selection Chart
Description Actuation Forces Actuator Heights Series Page

Available (grams) Available (inch)
Non Washable Tactile Switches
Surface Mount-Gullwing Leads 3.5mm x 6mm 160 .169, .197 95C04 C-4
320 .169, .197 95C04 C-4
5 mm square 160 0.059 95C05 C-10
6mm Square 100 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5
160 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5
260 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5
320 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5
520 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5
6mm Square for use with actuator cap 100 0.287 95C06 C-5
160 0.287 95C06 C-5
260 0.287 95C06 C-5
320 0.287 95C06 C-5
520 0.287 95C06 C-5
12mm Square 160 .169, .335 95C12 C-8
260 .169, .335 95C12 C-8
260 0.287 95C12 C-8
Thru-Hole 3.5mm x 6mm 160 .169, .197 95C04 C-4

320 .169, .197 95C04 C-4
6mm Square 100 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5
160 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5
260 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5
320 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5
520 .169, .197, .276, .374, .512 95C06 C-5
160 0.287 95C06 C-5
260 0.287 95C06 C-5
320 0.287 95C06 C-5
Tact Switches
520 0.287 95C06 C-5

12mm Square 160 .169, .335 95C12 C-8
260 .169, .335 95C12 C-8
260 0.287 95C12 C-8
Right Angle Thru-Hole 6mm Square 100 .124, .152, .230, .329, .467 95C06 C-5
160 .124, .152, .230, .329, .467 95C06 C-5
260 .124, .152, .230, .329, .467 95C06 C-5
160 0.287 95C06 C-5
260 0.287 95C06 C-5
Description Actuation Forces Actuator Heights Series Page

Washable Tactile Switches Available (grams) Available (inch)
Surface Mount-Gullwing Leads 6mm square 160 0.091, .122 95CW06 C-11
180 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11
260 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11
360 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11
520 .150, .205 95CW06 C-11
Surface Mount-J Leads 6mm square 160 0.091, .122 95CW06 C-11
180 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11
260 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11
360 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11
520 .150, .205 95CW06 C-11
Thru-Hole 6mm square 160 0.091, .122 95CW06 C-11

180 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11
260 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11
360 .138, .150, .205 95CW06 C-11
520 .150, .205 95CW06 C-11
Surface Mount-Right Angle 6mm square 260 .031, .039, .091 95CW06 C-11
TACT
Non-Washable Tactile Switches
SERIES 95C
6mm x 3.5mm
• Excellent Tactile Feedback Used in applications such as consumer
• Thru-hole and Gull Wing Versions electronics, audio equipment, PCs, VCRs,
• Surface Mount Versions Compatible cable boxes, modems, communications
with SMT Assembly Including equipment, controls, security and alarm
Infrared and Vapor Phase equipment, and test and measurement Gull Wing, 320g,
Orange Actuator
• Ultraminiature and Lightweight equipment.
Structure Suitable for High Density
Mounting Thru-Hole, 160g,
• Insert Molded Terminals to Prevent Brown Actuator
Flux Build-Up During Soldering
Thru-Hole Top View Front View Side View

.118 .059 (1,50)
.236 (6,00) (3,00) C
L .020
.138 C
L
CL (3,50) (0,50) MAX.
.256 ± .004
"H" DIM. ± .008 (6,50 ± 0,10)
("H" DIM. ± 0,20) .138
(3,50)
P.C.B. LAYOUT 2xØ.051

.010 (0,25) .138 ±0.20 ±.002
(3,50 ±0,50) (2xØ1,30
.071 +0.0-0.20
±0,05)
(1,80 +0,0-0,50)
.256 ±0.20 .020 (0,51)
.311 ± 0.20 (6,50 ±0,50) .039 (1,00)
(7,90 ± 0,50)
.118 .002 .059 (1,50)

Gull Wing .236 (6,00)
.138 (0,05) .291 (7,40)
(3,00) CL
CL CL
MAX.
Tact Switches
(3,50) .063
"H" DIM. ± .008 30˚ (1,60) .134 (3,40)
("H" DIM. ± 0,20) .002
See .138 (0,05)
Ordering (3,50) MAX.
Information
.283 (7,20) .039 (1,00) P.C.B. LAYOUT

.035 (0,90)
Unless otherise specified, dimension tolerances are ±0.010.
SPECIFICATIONS Dielectric Strength: No dielectric breakdown CIRCUITRY

Materials after 250V after one minute
Contact Arrangement: single pole, single T1
Base: UL94V-0 Nylon thermoplastic
Cover: Stainless steel throw
Actuator: UL94V-0 Nylon thermoplastic
Terminal: Brass with silver-plating Environmental
Contact: Stainless steel with silver-plating Operating Temperature Range: -25 to 70°C
Storage Temperature Range: -30 to 80°C T2
Electrical Mechanical Shock: MIL-STD-202F, Method
Rating: 50mA, 12 Vdc 213B, Test Condition A. Gravity: 50G (peak value), Soldering Process
Life: 50,000 cycles 11 msec. Direction and times: 6 sides and 3 times Hand Soldering: Use a soldering iron of 30
Actuator Travel: .010” + .008”/ - .004” in each direction. High reliability. watts, controlled at 350°C for 5 seconds
Contact Resistance: 100 mΩ max. Vibration: MIL-STD-202F, Method 201A. Passed maximum while applying solder.
Insulation Resistance: 100 MΩ min. at 500Vdc 6 hours (2 hours in each) of three perpendicular Reflow Soldering (surface mount versions only):
planes at a cycle of 10-55-10Hz/minute. Peak temperature 260°C (500°F).
Wave Soldering: 260°C (500°F) max. for 5
Series seconds. Subject to P.C.B. .063 in. (1,6mm)
Size: 04 = 3.5mm x 6mm thickness.
Height (“H”): A = .169 (4,30), B = .197 (5,00)
95C04A3GWRT RoHS compliant Packaging
Packaging: Blank = Tube, R = Tape and Reel (see pkg note) Thru-Hole: 135 pcs/tube. Surface Mount: 135
Terminal Style: Blank = Thru-Hole, GW = Gull Wing pcs/tube, 1800 pcs/reel (.169" height), 1600
Operating Force: 3 = 160g (brown), 5 = 320g (orange) pcs/reel (.197" height).
For prices and discounts, contact a local Sales Office, an authorized local distributor, or Grayhill.
TACT
SERIES 95C
6mm Square, Non-washable
• Excellent Tactile Feedback • Ultraminiature and Lightweight Used in applications such as
• Thru-hole, Gull Wings, and Right Structure Suitable for High Density consumer electronics, audio
Angle Versions Mounting equipment, PCs, VCRs, cable boxes,
• Surface Mount Versions • Insert Molded Terminals to modems,communications equipment,
Compatible with SMT Assembly Prevent Flux Build-up During controls, security and alarm
Including Infrared and Vapor Soldering
equipment, and test and
Phase measurement equipment.
DIMENSIONS: Non-Washable Switches In inches (and millimeters)
Top View Thru-hole Front View Side View

.020 Ø.138 (Ø3,50)
.244 (6,20) (0,50) MAX.
C
L C
L C .256 ±.004
L
.177 (6,50 ± 0,10)
(4,50) "H" DIM. .177 ±.004
.138 See Ordering (4,50 ± 0,10)
C (3,50) Information
L
.012 (0,30) 4xØ .040 ±.002

(4xØ 1,00 ±0,05)
.071
+0-0.02 .256 ±.020 .138 P.C.B. LAYOUT
(1,80 (6,50 ±0,50) ±.020
Thru-Hole (3,50 .028 (0,70)
+0,0-0,5) .311 ±.020
T1 T2 (7,90 ±0,50) ±0,50)
.138
Tact Switches
T3 T4 DIA.
CL
.020 MAX. .067
.287
.170
.138
.138±.020
.012
+.000
.071
-.020 .256
±.020 Actuactor Style "F"
.311 for use with decorative caps. See page C-7
±.020
.374 (9,50)
C C
L .252 (6,40)
Gull Wing L
"H" DIM.
T1 T2 See Ordering
0˚ 10˚
Information .177 (4,50)
.051 (1,30)
T3 T4 .354 (9,00) .008 ±.004 P.C.B. LAYOUT
(0,20 ±0,10)
Front View
Gull Wing
.138
DIA.
CL
.020 MAX. .067
.287 Actuactor Style "F"

.170
.138 for use with decorative caps. See page C-7
0˚ 10˚
.008±.004
.354
TACT
DIMENSIONS: Non-Washable Switches In inches (and millimeters)
Side View
Top View .258
Right Angle CL (6,55) .276 ±.004
(7,00 ±0,10)
.157 Ø.138
(4,00) (Ø3,50) 4x.039
.012 C
L .283 ±.002
(0,30) (7,20) (4xØ1,0
.098 ±.004
MAX. (2,50 ±0,10) ±0,05)
.01
(0,40 6 .177 ±.004
.291 ) (4,50 ±0,10)
.012
(7,40) (0,30)
.028 0.071
(0,70) P.C.B. LAYOUT
+0.00-.020 .100 .028 (0,70)
.177 (4,50) .138 (1.800 (2,55)
.276 ±.020 ±.020 +0,00-0,50) .098 (2,50)
(7,00 ± 0,50) .335 ±.016 (3,50 "H" DIM.
Right Angle (8,50 ±0,40) ±0,50) See Ordering
Information
F1 F2
.258
Ground
T1 T2 Terminal
.095 .063
.067
Actuactor Style "F"
.012 for use with caps. See page
.100 .028
.124 .098
.242
Tact Switches
REFLOW TEMPERATURE PROFILE:
MAX 260°
255°
230°
150°
Room
Temperature
120-150 sec. 5-10 sec.
60 sec.
TACT
ORDERING INFORMATION: Non-Washable Switches

Thru-Hole and Gull Wing
Series
Size: 06 = 6mm Square
Height (“H”): A = .169 (4,29), B = .197 (5,00), C = .276 (7,01), D = .374 (9,50), E = .512 (13,00)
95C06A2GWRT F = .287 (7,29) for use with decorative caps
RoHS compliant
Packaging: Blank = Tube or bulk, R = Tape and Reel (see pkg note)
Terminal Style: Blank = Thru-hole, GW = Gull Wing
Operating Force (Actuator Color): 2 = 100g (Black), 3 = 160g (Brown), 4 = 260g (Red),
Right Angle
5 = 320g (Orange), 6 = 520g (Yellow)
Series
Height (“H”): A = .124 (3,14), B = .152 (3,86), C = .230 (5,84), D = .329 (8,36), E = .467 (11,86)
95C06A2RAT F = .242 (6,15) for use with decorative caps
RoHS compliant
Terminal Style: RA = Right Angle
Operating Force (Actuator Color): 2 = 100g (Black), 3 = 160g (Brown), 4 = 260g (Red)
Packaging Thru-Hole: Bulk,1000 pcs/bag. Surface Mount: 77 pcs/tube, 1000 pcs/reel (.169" height), 900 pcs/reel (.197" height), 500 pcs/reel
(.276" and .287” height), 380 pcs/reel (.374" height). Right Angle: Bulk, 1000 pcs/bag.
SPECIFICATIONS:
Non-Washable Switches
Materials
Base: UL94V-0 Nylon thermoplastic Dielectric Strength: No dielectric breakdown Soldering Process
Cover: Stainless steel, tin-plated steel after 250V for one minute Hand Soldering: Use a soldering iron of 30
Actuator: UL94V-0 Nylon thermoplastic Contact Arrangement: single pole, single watts, controlled at 350°C for 5 seconds
Terminal: Brass with silver-plating throw maximum while applying solder.
Contact: Stainless steel with silver-plating Environmental Reflow Soldering (surface mount versions
Cap: Thermoplastic ABS Operating Temp. Range: -25 to 70°C only): Peak temperature 260°C (500°F).
Electrical Storage Temp. Range: -30 to 80°C Wave Soldering: 260C° (500°F) maximum
Rating: 50mA, 12 Vdc Mechanical Shock: MIL-STD-202F, Method for 5 seconds subject to PCB .063 in.
Life: 100g, 160g: 1,000,000 cycles; 213B, Test Condition A. Gravity: 50G's (peak (1,6mm) thickness.
Tact Switches
260g: 500,000 cycles value), 11 msec. Direction and times: 6 sides and Available from your local Grayhill
320g, 520g, 300,000 cycles 3 times in each direction. High reliability. Component Distributor.
Actuator Travel: .010” + .008”/ - .004” Vibration: MIL-STD-202F, Method 201A. Passed
For prices and discounts, contact a local
Contact Resistance: 100 mΩ max. 6 hours (2 hours in each) of three perpendicular
Insulation Resistance: 100 MΩ min. planes at a cycle of 10-55-10Hz/minute. High Sales Office, an authorized local
at 500Vdc reliability. distributor, or Grayhill.
DECORATIVE CAPS (for use with “F” style square actuators)

B'
"B"
PART SWITCH
NUMBER SIZE SHAPE COLOR FIGURE
95CAP-000 6mm SQUARE YELLOW 1
.217 .217
95CAP-001 6mm SQUARE BLUE 1
95CAP-002 6mm SQUARE RED 1
95CAP-003 6mm SQUARE NATURAL 1
B
"B" SEC "B-B" SEC B-B' 95CAP-004 6mm SQUARE BLACK 1
.157
95CAP-005 6mm SQUARE GREEN 1
.177
"A" "A"
A'
DIA.
95CAP-006 6mm SQUARE ORANGE 1
, A
95CAP-010 6mm ROUND YELLOW 2
95CAP-011 6mm ROUND BLUE 2
.110 95CAP-012 6mm ROUND RED 2
.110
95CAP-013 6mm ROUND NATURAL 2
6mm SQUARE SEC "A-A" 95CAP-014 6mm ROUND BLACK 2

SEC A-A'
6mm ROUND 95CAP-015 6mm ROUND GREEN 2
95CAP-016 6mm ROUND ORANGE 2
figure 1 figure 2
TACT
SERIES 95C
12mm Square
• Surface Mount Versions Compatible electronics, audio equipment, PCs, VCRs,
with SMT Assembly Including cable boxes, modems, communications
Infrared and Vapor Phase
equipment, controls, security and alarm
• Ultraminiature and Lightweight
equipment, and test and measurement
Structure Suitable for High Density
Mounting equipment. Thru-Hole
• Insert Molded Terminals to Prevent

Gull Wing
Thru-Hole .020
Top View Front View Side View .492 ±0.004
(0,50)
.472 (11,99) Ø.278 .138 (3,50) (12,50 ±0,10)
MAX.
CL CL (Ø7,10) CL
"H" DIM.
See
Ordering .197 ±.004
Information (5,00 ±0,10)
C
L .012 (0,30) 4x Ø.047 ±.002
.138 ±.020 (4x Ø1,20 ±0,05)
.197 .071 .492 ±.020 (3,50 ±0,50)
.040 (1,00)
(5,00) +0-0.02 (12,50 ±0,50) P.C.B. LAYOUT
(1,80
+0-0,5) .547 ±.020
(13,90 ±0,50)
Tact Switches
.278
DIA.
C
L
.020 MAX. .067
.287
.138 .169
.012 .138±.020
.071 +.000 .492±.020
-.020 .547±.020
Gull Wing .020 .610 (15,50)

(0,50) .488 (12,40)
MAX. Ø.278 .138 (3,50) .063
C
L (Ø7,10) "H" DIM. C
L (1,60)
See .197
Ordering (5,00)
0˚ 10˚ Information
.590
(15,00) .004 ±.004 P.C.B. LAYOUT
(0,10 ±0,10)
.278
DIA.
C
L
.020 MAX.
.067
.287
.138 .169
0˚ 10˚
.590 .004±.004
TACT
Materials Insulation Resistance: 100 MΩ min. at 500Vdc
Base: UL94V-0 Nylon thermoplastic Dielectric Strength: No dielectric breakdown T1 T2
Cover: Stainless steel, tin-plated after 250V for one minute
Actuator: UL94V-0 Nylon thermoplastic Contact Arrangement: single pole, single
throw T3 T4
Terminal: Brass with silver-plating
Contact: Stainless steel with silver-plating
Cap: Thermoplastic ABS Environmental
Operating Temp. Range: -25 to 70°C perpendicular planes at a cycle of 10-55-10Hz/1
Electrical Storage Temp. Range: -30 to 80°C minute.
Rating: 50mA, 12 Vdc Mechanical Shock: MIL-STD-202F, Method, Stop Strength: Place the switch such that
Life: 160g: 1,000,000 cycles/ 213B, Test Condition A. Gravity: 50G's (peak vertical, a static load of 3kg shall be applied in
260g: 500,000 cycles value), 11 msec. Direction and times: 6 sides the direction of stem operation for a period of 15
Actuator Travel: .014” ± .004” and 3 times in each direction. High reliability. seconds.
Contact Resistance: 100 mΩ max. Vibration: MIL-STD-202F, Method 201A.
Passed 6 hours (2 hours in each) of three Soldering Process
Hand Soldering: Use a soldering iron of 30
ORDERING INFORMATION watts, controlled at 350°C for 5 seconds
maximum while applying solder.
Series
Reflow Soldering (surface mount versions only):
Peak temperature 260°C (500°F).
Height (“H”): A = .169 (4,29); B = .335 (8,51); C = Square .287 (7,29)
Wave Soldering: 260C° (500°F) maximum
95C12A3GWRT
for 5 seconds subject to PCB .063 in. (1,6mm)
RoHS compliant
thickness.
Packaging: Blank = Tube or Bulk, R = Tape and Reel (see pkg note)
Terminal Style: Blank = Thru-hole, GW = Gull Wing Packaging
Operating Force (Actuator Color): 3 = 160g (Brown), 4 = 260g (Red)
Thru-Hole: Bulk, 500 pcs/bag.
Surface Mount: 40 pcs/tube, 700 pcs/reel
Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor. (.169" height), 500 pcs/reel (.335" and .287”
height).
DECORATIVE CAPS (for use with “C” style square actuators)

Tact Switches
.452 DIA.
.157 PART SWITCH

NUMBER SIZE SHAPE COLOR FIGURE
.059 .059
.224
95CAP-100 12mm SQUARE YELLOW 3
95CAP-101 12mm SQUARE BLUE 3
.079 95CAP-102 12mm SQUARE RED 3
.472
95CAP-103 12mm SQUARE NATURAL 3
.512 DIA. 95CAP-104 12mm SQUARE BLACK 3

95CAP-105 12mm SQUARE GREEN 3
95CAP-106 12mm SQUARE ORANGE 3
95CAP-110 12mm ROUND YELLOW 4
95CAP-111 12mm ROUND BLUE 4
95CAP-112 12mm ROUND RED 4
95CAP-113 12mm ROUND NATURAL 4
95CAP-114 12mm ROUND BLACK 4
95CAP-115 12mm ROUND GREEN 4
12mm Square 95CAP-116 12mm ROUND ORANGE 4
12mm Round
figure 3 figure 4
TACT
SERIES 95C
5mm Square
• Compatible with SMT Assembly electronics, audio equipment, PCs,
Including Infrared and Vapor Phase
VCRs, cable boxes, modems,
• Ultraminiature and Lightweight
Structure Suitable for High Density communications equipment, controls,
Mounting security and alarm equipment, and test
• Insert Molded Terminals to Prevent and measurement equipment.
Top View Front View
.205 (5,20) .059 (1,49)

.315 (8,00)
.002 (0,50) .004 (0,10)
Ø.079 .173 (4,40)
(Ø2,00)
Side View
.205
(5,20) .189
(4,80)
.241
(6,12)
.102 (2,60)
Tact Switches
P.C.B. LAYOUT
.146 (3,70)
Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are ±.010 (0,25)
Materials
Base: UL94V-0 LCP thermoplastic Dielectric Strength: No dielectric breakdown
Cover: Nickel silver after 250V for one minute.
Actuator: Brass with nickel-plating Contact Arrangement: single pole, single T1 T2
Terminal: Brass with silver-plating throw
Contact: Stainless steel with silver-plating
Environmental T3 T4
Electrical Operating Temp. Range: -25 to 70°C
Rating: 50mA, 12 Vdc Storage Temp. Range: -30 to 80°C
Life: 160g: 1,000,000 cycles; Mechanical Shock: MIL-STD-202F, Method
260g: 200,000 cycles 213B, Test Condition A. Gravity: 50G (peak
perpendicular planes at a cycle of 10-55-10Hz/
Actuator Travel: .010” + .008”/ - .004” value), 11 msec. Direction and times: 6 sides
minute.
Contact Resistance: 100 mΩ max. and 3 times in each direction.
Insulation Resistance: 100 MΩ min. at 500Vdc Vibration: MIL-STD-202F, Method 201A. Soldering Process
Passed 6 hours (2 hours in each) of three
Hand Soldering: Use a soldering iron of 30
ORDERING INFORMATION watts, controlled at 350°C for 5 seconds
maximum while applying solder.
Series
Reflow Soldering: Peak temperature 260°C
(500°F).
Height: B = .059 (1,49)
95C05B3GWRT Packaging
RoHS compliant
Tape and Reel: 4000 pcs/reel.
Packaging: R = Tape and Reel (see pkg note)
Terminal Style: GW = Gull Wing
Operating Force: 3 = 160g, 4 = 260g

TACT
Washable Tactile Switches
SERIES 95C
6mm Square, Washable
• Designed to Allow Submersed Washing • Surface Mount Versions Compatible with Used in applications such as consumer
After Soldering SMT Assembly Including Infrared and electronics, audio equipment, PCs, VCRs,
• Excellent Tactile Feedback Vapor Phase cable boxes, modems, communications
• Thru-hole, Gull Wings, Right Angle, • Ultraminiature and Lightweight Structure equipment, controls, security and alarm
and J-Lead Versions Suitable for High Density Mounting equipment, and test and measurement
• Insert Molded Terminals to Prevent Flux equipment.
Build-up During Soldering
DIMENSIONS: Washable Switches In inches (and millimeters)
Top View Front View Side View

.256 ±.004
.244 (6,20) .027 Thru-Hole Ø.118 (Ø3,00) (6,50 ±0,10)
(0,70) C
L C
L
CL .248 "H" DIM.
(6,30) .071 See Ordering .157 ±.004
+0.0-.02 Information (4,00 ±0,10)
.236 (1,80
CL +0,0-0,5) .138 ±.020
(6,00) (3,50 ±0,50) 4xØ.040 ±.002
(4xØ1,00 ±0,05)
Thru-hole .311 ±.020 .256 ±.020
(6,50 ±0,50) P.C.B. LAYOUT
.157 (7,90 ±0,50)
(4,00)
Ø.118 .433 (11,00)
(Ø3,00) CL CL
"H" DIM. .267
See Ordering .102 (2,60)
T1 T2 Gull Wing (6,80)
Information
.212 (5,40)
T3 T4 0˚
.228
Gull Wing CIRCUITRY 10˚ .004 ±.004 (5,80)
P.C.B. LAYOUT
(0,10 ±0,10)
Ø.118 (Ø3,00) .339 (8,60)

J-Lead CL C
L
Tact Switches
"H" DIM. .157 .102 (2,60)

See Ordering (4,00)
0˚ Information
.212 (5,40)
.177 (4,50)
10˚ .016
J-Lead (0,40)
.268 (6,80) "H" DIM. ±0,008 P.C.B. LAYOUT
("H" DIM. ±0,20)
See Ordering
0.297 ±0.02 Information
F1 (7,55 ±0,50) 0.157 ±0.02
T1 (4,00 ±0,50) .228 ±0.004
(5,80 ±0,10) .146 (3,70)
0.098
.276 ±0.004
(7,02) 0.154 .354 ±0.004 0.031 (2,50
(3,90) (9,00 ±0,10) (0,80) ±0,10)
T2 0.197
F2 0.181 ±0.004
Ø.118 0.067 .165 (5,00
(Ø3,00) (4,61) 0.136 ±0.012 (4,20) ±0,10)
.028 (1,70)
Right Angle (0,70) (3,45 ±0,30)
.240 (6,10) P.C.B. LAYOUT
CIRCUITRY
Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are ±.010 (0,25).
SPECIFICATIONS:
Washable Switches
Materials Insulation Resistance: 100 MΩ min. at 500Vdc Passed 6 hours (2 hours in each) of three
Base: UL94V-0 Nylon thermoplastic Dielectric Strength: No dielectric breakdown perpendicular planes at a cycle of 10-55-
Cover: Stainless steel,nickel silver after 250V for one minute 10Hz/minute. High reliability.
Actuator: Silicone rubber Contact Arrangement: single pole, single
Terminal: Brass with silver-plating throw Soldering Process
Contact: Stainless steel with silver-plating Hand Soldering: Use a soldering iron of 30
Environmental watts, controlled at 350°C for 5 seconds
Electrical Operating Temp. Range: -25 to 70°C maximum while applying solder.
Rating: 50mA, 12 Vdc Storage Temp. Range: -30 to 80°C Reflow Soldering (surface mount versions
Life: See table, page C-12 Mechanical Shock: MIL-STD-202F, Method only): Peak temperature 260°C (500°F).
Actuator Travel: .018” ± .008” 213B, Test Condition A. Gravity: 50G's (peak Wave Soldering: 260C° (500°F) maximum
Contact Resistance: 100 mΩ max. value), 11 msec. Direction and times: 6 sides for 5 seconds subject to PCB .063 in. (1,60
and 3 times in each direction. High reliability. mm) thickness.
Vibration: MIL-STD-202F, Method 201A.
TACT
Washable Tactile Switches
ORDERING INFORMATION: Washable Switches

Thru-Hole
Part Number Height (“H”) in (mm) Force (Grams) Actuator Color Electrical Life (Cycles) Tube Packaging
95CW06A1T .091 (2,3) 160 Silver 100,000 75PCS/Tube
95CW06B1T .122 (3,1) 160 Brown 100,000 75PCS/Tube
95CW06C2T .138 (3,5) 180 Brown 500,000 75PCS/Tube
95CW06C3T .138 (3,5) 260 Red 500,000 75PCS/Tube
95CW06C5T .138 (3,5) 360 Clear 500,000 75PCS/Tube
95CW06D2T .150 (3,8) 180 Brown 500,000 75PCS/Tube
95CW06D3T .150 (3,8) 260 Red 500,000 75PCS/Tube
95CW06D4T .150 (3,8) 520 Yellow 50,000 75PCS/Tube
95CW06D5T .150 (3,8) 360 Clear 500,000 75PCS/Tube
95CW06E2T .205 (5,2) 180 Brown 500,000 77PCS/Tube
95CW06E3T .205 (5,2) 260 Red 500,000 77PCS/Tube
95CW06E4T .205 (5,2) 520 Yellow 50,000 77PCS/Tube
95CW06E5T .205 (5,2) 360 Clear 500,000 77PCS/Tube
Gull Wing
Part Height (“H”) Force Actuator Electrical Tube Tape & Reel*
Number in (mm) (Grams) Color Life (Cycles) Packaging Packaging
95CW06A1GWT .091 (2,29) 160 Silver 100,000 75PCS/Tube 2000PCS/Reel
95CW06B1GWT .122 (3,10) 160 Brown 100,000 75PCS/Tube 2000PCS/Reel
95CW06C2GWT .138 (3,51) 180 Brown 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1900PCS/Reel
95CW06C3GWT .138 (3,51) 260 Red 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1900PCS/Reel
95CW06C5GWT .138 (3,51) 360 Clear 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1900PCS/Reel
95CW06D2GWT .150 (3,81) 180 Brown 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1900PCS/Reel
95CW06D3GWT .150 (3,81) 260 Red 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1900PCS/Reel
95CW06D4GWT .150 (3,81) 520 Yellow 50,000 75PCS/Tube 1900PCS/Reel
Tact Switches
95CW06D5GWT .150 (3,81) 360 Clear 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1900PCS/Reel
95CW06E2GWT .205 (5,21) 180 Brown 500,000 77PCS/Tube 900PCS/Reel
95CW06E3GWT .205 (5,21) 260 Red 500,000 77PCS/Tube 900PCS/Reel
95CW06E4GWT .205 (5,21) 520 Yellow 50,000 77PCS/Tube 900PCS/Reel
95CW06E5GWT .205 (5,21) 360 Clear 500,000 77PCS/Tube 900PCS/Reel
J-Lead
Part Height (“H”) Force Actuator Electrical Tube Tape & Reel *
Number in (mm) (Grams) Color Life (Cycles) Packaging Packaging
95CW06A1JT .091 (2,29) 160 Silver 100,000 75PCS/Tube 2000PCS/Reel
95CW06B1JT .122 (3,10) 160 Brown 100,000 75PCS/Tube 1900PCS/Reel
95CW06C2JT .138 (3,51) 180 Brown 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1800PCS/Reel
95CW06C3JT .138 (3,51) 260 Red 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1800PCS/Reel
95CW06C5JT .138 (3,51) 360 Clear 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1800PCS/Reel
95CW06D2JT .150 (3,81) 180 Brown 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1800PCS/Reel
95CW06D3JT .150 (3,81) 260 Red 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1800PCS/Reel
95CW06D4JT .150 (3,81) 520 Yellow 50,000 75PCS/Tube 1800PCS/Reel
95CW06D5JT .150 (3,81) 360 Clear 500,000 75PCS/Tube 1800PCS/Reel
95CW06E2JT .205 (5,21) 180 Brown 500,000 77PCS/Tube 900PCS/Reel
95CW06E3JT .205 (5,21) 260 Red 500,000 77PCS/Tube 900PCS/Reel
95CW06E4JT .205 (5,21) 520 Yellow 50,000 77PCS/Tube 900PCS/Reel
95CW06E5JT .205 (5,21) 360 Clear 500,000 77PCS/Tube 900PCS/Reel
Right Angle
Part Number Height in (“H”) (mm) Force (Grams) Actuator Color Electrical Life (Cycles) Tape & Reel Packaging
95CW06A3RART .031 (0,79) 260 Red 500,0000 700PCS/Reel
95CW06B3RART .039 (0,99) 260 Red 500,0000 700PCS/Reel
95CW06C3RART .091 (2,31) 260 Red 500,0000 700PCS/Reel
Available from your local Grayhill Component Distributor. *Insert “R” before “T” for tape and reel packaging.
TACT
Toggle Switches
Contents: Toggle Switches
DIP Switches
Toggle Switches
TOGGLE SWITCHES
• SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, and
4DPT Circuitry
• Choice of Actuators, Bushings
and Terminations
• PC and Panel Mount Versions
Page
TOGGLE SWITCHES
Selection Chart .............................................................................................. 3
Miniature .............................................................. Series 34A ....................... 4
Sealed Miniature .................................................. Series 34B ..................... 10
Sub-Miniature ...................................................... Series 34C .................... 14
Sealed Sub-Miniature ......................................... Series 34D .................... 18
Sealed Surface Mount ........................................ Series 34E .................... 21
Typical Applications:
• Computers and Peripherals
• Instrumentation
• Telecommunications
• Test and Measurement Equipment
Toggle
Selection Chart
TOGGLE SWITCHES
Series 34A 34B 34C 34D 34E

Page Number 4-9 10-13 14-17 18-20 21-24
Size Miniature Miniature Sub-Miniature Sub-Miniature Sub-Miniature
Circuitry SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, 4PDT SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT SPDT, DPDT SPDT, DPDT SPDT
Max Contact Rating 5A 5A 3A 3A 0.4VA
Process Sealed Yes Yes Yes
Mounting Options
Toggle Switches
PC Vertical Yes Yes Yes Yes

PC Vertical w/ Support Bracket Yes Yes Yes Yes
PC Right Angle Yes Yes Yes Yes
PC Right Angle Vertical Yes Yes Yes Yes
Surface Mount Yes
Panel Yes Yes Yes
Termination Options
Solder Lug Yes Yes Yes
PC Mount Yes Yes Yes Yes
PC Mount, Quick Connect Yes
Gullwing Yes
Toggle
Series 34A: Miniature Toggle Switches
SERIES 34A
Miniature Toggle Switches
FEATURES
• SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, and 4DPT Circuitry
• Choice of Actuators, Bushings and Terminations
DIP Switches
• UL Recognized
Toggle Switches
SPDT
.155
(3.94)
KEYWAY .350 KEYWAY
MODEL NO. SWITCH POSITION .030
.270 (8.89) THIS SIDE
SP1 ON NONE ON (0.76)
(6.86)
SP2 ON NONE (ON) .410
SP3 ON OFF ON (10.41) 3
SP4 (ON) OFF (ON) .500 2

SP5 ON OFF (ON) (12.7)
TERM. COMM. 2-3 OPEN 2-1 1
.185
()=MOMENTARY 1/4-40 UNS-2A (4.70)
.350
02COMM. Ø.115 (8.89)
(Ø 2.92) EPOXY SEAL
SCHEMATIC
1 3
DPDT .505
(12.83) KEYWAY
SWITCH POSITION KEYWAY .350 THIS SIDE
MODEL NO.
(8.89) .060
DP1 ON NONE ON
.410 (1.52)
DP2 ON NONE (ON) 6 3
DP3 ON OFF ON (10.41)
(ON) OFF (ON) .500 5 2
DP4
DP5 ON OFF (ON) (12.7)
4 1
2-3, 2-1,
TERM. COMM. OPEN .185 .190
5-6 5-4
.450 (4.70) (4.83)
()=MOMENTARY (11.43) .350 .030
02COMM. 05COMM. (8.89) (0.76)
Ø.115
1/4-40 UNS-2A EPOXY SEAL
(Ø 2.92)
1 3 4 6
SCHEMATIC
.570
3PDT .030
(14.48) KEYWAY
(0.76)
THIS SIDE
KEYWAY .415
(10.54)
3P1 ON NONE ON 9 6 3
3P2 ON NONE (ON)

ON OFF ON
.500 8 5 2
3P3
(12.7)
3P4 (ON) OFF (ON) 7 4 1
3P5 ON OFF (ON)

.185
2-3,5-6 2-1,5-4 .650 .350 (4.70) .190
TERM. COMM. OPEN
8-9 8-7 (16.51) Ø.115 (8.89) (4.83)
()=MOMENTARY 1/4-40 UNS-2A (Ø 2.92) .410 EPOXY SEAL
(10.41)
.060
(1.52)
1 3 4 6 7 9
SCHEMATIC
Toggle
4PDT SCALE:1.5:1 .570

.030
(14.48) KEYWAY
SWITCH POSITION
(0.76)
MODEL NO. KEYWAY THIS SIDE
4P1 ON NONE ON .415
4P2 ON NONE (ON) (10.54) 12 9 6 3
4P3 ON OFF ON
.500 11 8 5 2
4P4 (ON) OFF (ON) (12.7)
4P5 ON OFF (ON)
10 7 4 1
2-3,5-6 2-1,5-4
TERM. COMM. 8-9,11-12 OPEN 8-7,11-10 .185
.850 (4.70)
.350 .190
()=MOMENTARY (21.59)
(8.89) (4.83)
1/4-40 UNS-2A Ø.115
Toggle Switches
(Ø 2.92) .410
EPOXY SEAL
02COMM. 05COMM. 08COMM. 011COMM. (10.41)
.060
(1.52)
1 3 4 6 7 9 10 12
SCHEMATIC
1 Std 2 3 4 5
.200 .131
.115 .107 (5.08) .134 .131 (3.32)
DIA. DIA. DIA. DIA.
(Ø3.01) (Ø3.40) .550 (Ø3.32) .840
.410 (Ø2.71) .640
(13.97) (21.32)
(10.41) (16.26)
6 7 8 9 Nylon Black L THD. (STD.)

N NON-THD
.240 .240
DIA. .487 DIA.
.200 (Ø6.09) L THD.(STD.)
(12.37) (Ø6.09) Ø.129
DIA. N NON-THD.
(Ø5.08) (Ø3.28)
Ø.214
.687 (Ø5,44)
(17.45)
.840
KEYWAY KEYWAY (21.34)
.465 .645
.450 (11.80) (16.38) .640 .579
(11.43) (16,26) (14,73)
UNLOCKED LOCKED
.465
1/4-40 UNS-2A
(11.80)
15/32-32NS 15/32-32NS
Use with Bushing Options

T1, T2, T5 and T6 only. Use T7 Bushing Option only. Use T7 Bushing Option only.
Actuators 1-5 shown with standard B1 bushing. Add .070 (1.78) for B3, subtract .020 (0.51) for B6 bushing.
Toggle
BUSHING OPTIONS In inches (and millimeters)
B1 Thd (Std) B3 Thd B5 High Torque B6 High Torque

B2 Non-Thd B4 Non-Thd
.225
.040 .040 Ø.314
(5.72)
(1.02) Ø.244 (1.02) (Ø7.98)
.040
(Ø6.20) (1.02) Ø.244
(Ø6.20) Ø.314
(Ø7.98)
.028 .296 .028
(0.71) .028
(7.52) (0.71)
DIP Switches
(0.71)
1/4-40 UNS-2A
1/4-40 UNS-2A
1/4-40 UNS-2A 1/4-40 UNS-2A .315
(8.00)
Toggle Switches
.350 .280 .020 .040 .020 .040
(8.89) (7.10) (0.51) (0.51) (1.02)
(1.02)
B7 Long B8 Metric B9 Splash-Proof .465 DIA.

(Ø11.81)
.040
(1.02)
.225
(5.72)
.225 .028 .296
(5.72) (0.71) SEALS
1/4-40 UNS-2A (7.52)
M6P
1/4-40 UNS-2A 0.75
.350 THD.
(8.89)
.350
(8.89) .020 .057
(0.51) (1.44)
.031
T1 .040 T2 1/4-40 T5 T6 1/4-40
T7 (0.79) *FOR USE
WITH
(1.02) UNS-2A UNS-2A .065
(1.65) .448 ACTUATORS
(11.38) 7 AND 8
KEYWAY ONLY.
.225
.028 .057 .297 (5,72) .057 .297 .020
(0.71) (1,44) (7,55) (1,44) (7,55) 15/32-32
UNS-2A (0.51)
PANEL MOUNTING In inches (and millimeters)
Ø.078
Ø.250 Ø.250 Ø.094 (Ø1.98)
(Ø6.35) (Ø6.35) (Ø2.38)
Ø.250 Ø.250
1/4" BUSHING (Ø6.35) (Ø6.35)
.234 .022
.240 .187
(5.95) .033 (0.56)
(6.10) (4.75)
(0.85)
Ø.496 Ø.496
(Ø11.91) .065 (Ø11.91)
Ø.150 (1.65)
(Ø3.81)
15/32" BUSHING
.378 .031
(9.60) (0.79)
Ø.250 Ø.094
(Ø6.35) (Ø2.38)
Ø.250
METRIC BUSHING (Ø6.35)
.028 .248
.031 (0.70) (6.30)
(0.80)
Toggle

DIM."A"
M1 Solder Lug (Std) M2 P.C. Mount M3 P.C. Mount, Quick Connect WX
EPOXY SEAL
.078 .156
(1.98) (3.96) .189 .189
(4.80) (4.80)
.075
1.91
.250 .250
(6.36) (6.35) .050
1.27
.080 OPTION
(2.03) CODE DIM."A"
.047 .050 W1 .750(19.05)
(1.19) (1.27) W2 .964(24.48)
.062 W3 .425(10.80)
THK. .030 (0.76) THK. .030 (0.76) (1.57) W4 1.062(26.97)
Toggle Switches
.030 (0.76) THK. WIRE WRAP

Ø.073
M6 Right Angle P.C. Mount, (Ø1.85)
Ø.245
Horizontal Actuation (Ø6.22) .200
.185
(4.69)
.500 .270 (5.08)
(12.7) Ø.105 (6.86)
.125 (Ø2.67) .185
(3.17)
(4.70)
1 2 3
.500
.254 (12.7)
SPDT .106
(6.46) .050
(2.69) KEYWAY P.C. MOUNTING
(1.27) THIS SIDE
.030 .288
(0.76) (7.31) .500
(12.7)
Ø.073
(Ø1.85)
Ø.245
(Ø6.22) .185
.500 .200 (4.70)
(12.7) Ø.105 (5.08)
(Ø2.67) .185
(4.70)
.126 .106
(3.17) (2.69) .450 4 5 6
(11.43) 1 2 3
.500
DPDT .254 (12.7) .150
.050
(6.46) (1.27) (3.81)
KEYWAY
.030 .288
.150 THIS SIDE
(0.76) (7.31) P.C. MOUNTING
.500 (3.81)
(12.7)
M7 Right Angle P.C. Mount, .500

.270 Ø.245 KEYWAY (12.7)
Vertical Actuation (6.86) (Ø6.22) THIS SIDE
.125 .150
3
.500 (3.18) (3.81)
2
(12.7)
1
.254
(6.46) .073 DIA.
.288 .048 .200 (Ø1.85)
.050 (7.31) .030 (1.22) (5.08)
(1.27) .500 (0.76) P.C. MOUNTING
SPDT (12.7) .200
.150
(3.81) (5.08)
.150
.254 (3.81)
(6.46)
.450 KEYWAY .500 .190
(11.43) Ø.245 (12.7) (4.83)
THIS SIDE
(Ø6.22)
.125 .125 6 3
(3.17) .500 (3.18)
5 2
(12.70)
4 1
.200 .073 DIA.

.288 .048 (5.08) (Ø1.85)
.050 (7.31) (1.22)
DPDT (1.27) .500 .030
.200 P.C. MOUNTING
.190 (12.7) (0.76)
.150 (5.08)
(4.83)
(3.81)
Toggle
M7 Right Angle P.C. Mount, Vertical Actuation

.254 .150
.650 (6.46) (3.81)
.565
(16.51) KEYWAY (14.35)
Ø.245 .190
THIS SIDE
(Ø6.22) (4.83)
.125
9 6 3
(3.18) 8 5 2
DIP Switches
7 4 1
3PDT .500 .288 .200

(12.7) (5.08) .073 DIA.
(7.31) .200 (Ø1.85)
.050 .565 .030 (5.08) P.C. MOUNTING
Toggle Switches
(1.27) (14.35) (0.76)
.190 .048
(4.83) .150 (1.22)
(3.81)
.254 .150
(6.46) .565 (3.81)
.850
KEYWAY (14.35)
(21.59) Ø.245 THIS SIDE .190
(Ø6.22)
.125 (4.83)
4PDT 12 9 6 3
(3.18) 11 8 5 2 .500
10 7 4 1 12.7
.288 .200
.190 (7.31) .200 (5.08) .073 DIA.
(4.83) .030 (5.08) (Ø1.85)
.050 .565 (0.76)
(1.27) (14.35) .048
.150 (1.22)
V2-V3 Vertical Bracket P.C. Mount

DIM. "A" .280 .125
(7.11) (3.18)
OPTION
DIM."A" .185
CODE
(4.70)
.185 .460
V2 (11,68)
(4.70) .254 .620
SPDT (6.46) .630 (15.75)
V3 (16,00)
1 2 3
.048 EPOXY SEAL

.020
(1.22) (0.51) .073 DIA.
.030 (Ø1.85)
(0.76)
.125 .185
(3.18) (4.70) P.C. MOUNTING
.320
(8.13) .620
(15.75)
DIM. "A" .125

OPTION
DIM."A" (3.18) .185
CODE
DPDT (4.70)
.460
V2 (11,68)
.254 .620
.450 (6.46) .630 (15.75)
(11.43) .280 V3 (16,00)
(7.11) 5 6
4
EPOXY SEAL .073 DIA.
.020 (Ø1.85)
.048 .030
(0.51) .190
(1.22) .185 (0.76)
(4.70) (4.83)
(3.18) (4.70)
.320 .620
(8.13) (15.75)
Toggle
SPECIFICATIONS Contact Resistance: 10 milliohms max. UL Recognition: File number is E35289

RATINGS initial @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mA for both gold &
Contact Rating: Q option - 5A with resistive silver contacts MATERIALS
load @ 125VAC or 28 VDC; 2A with resistive Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms Case: Diallyl phthalate (DAP) (UL94V-0)
load @ 250 VAC. R option-0.4 VA max @ 20 minimum Toggle Handle: Brass, chrome-plated
Vmax (AC or DC) Dielectic Strength: 1,000 V RMS @ sea Bushing: Brass, nickle-plated
cycles at full load Operating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C
Series 34A Miniature Toggle Switch
Toggle Switches
Model: SPDT: SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5,

DPDT: DP1, DP2, DP3, DP4, DP5
3PDT: 3P1, 3P2, 3P3, 3P4, 3P5
4PDT: 4P1, 4P2, 4P3, 4P4, 4P5
(See Model options)
Actuator Options: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, L, N
(See Actuator options.)
Bushing Options: B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, B7, B8, B9, T1, T2, T5, T6
(See Bushing options.)
34ASP12B4M2RT
RoHS Compliant
Contact: R: Copper alloy, gold plate over nickel plate;
Q: Copper alloy, silver plated;
G: Copper alloy over gold plate over silver plate
Termination Options: M1, M2, M3, M6, M7, V2, V3, W1, W2, W3, W4
or Grayhill.
HARDWARE In inches (and millimeters)
NUTS
Series 34A (Std) Dress Nut For Actuator Options 7, 8 (Std) Knurled Nut (Sealed)
( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( )
( )
( ) ( )
( )
HDW2 HDW3 HDW4 HDW5
LOCKING RINGS LOCK WASHERS
Series 34A (Std) For Actuator Options 7, 8 Series 34A (Std) For Actuator Options 7, 8
( ) ( )
( )
( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( )
HDW15 HDW16 HDW17 HDW11 HDW12
Toggle
Series 34B: Sealed Miniature Toggle Switches
SERIES 34B
Sealed Miniature Toggle Switches
FEATURES
• SPDT, DPDT, and 3PDT Circuitry
• Choice of Actuators, Bushings and
DIP Switches
Terminations
• Sealed per IP67
Toggle Switches
SPDT Switching Position

.250
Model .050
No. Ø.220 (6.35) .250
Ø5.60 (6.35) (1.27)
WSP1 ON NONE ON
3
WSP2 ON NONE (ON)
WSP3 ON OFF ON .504 2

(12.8) .030
WSP4 (ON) OFF (ON)
Ø.107 (0.76) 1
WSP5 ON OFF (ON)
(Ø2.72)
Term. .663
2-3 OPEN 2-1
Comm. .268 .297 .185
(16.85)
(6.8) (7.54) (4.7)
()=MOMENTARY
02COMM.
EPOXY SEAL
SCHEMATIC
1 3
DPDT .250
Ø.220 (6.35) .250 .050
Model Switching Position
No.
(Ø5.60) (6.35) (1.27)
6 3
WDP1 ON NONE ON
WDP2 ON NONE (ON) .504 5 2

WDP3 ON OFF ON (12.8) .030
WDP4 (ON) OFF (ON) Ø.107 (0.76) 4 1
WDP5 ON OFF (ON) (Ø2.72)

.663
.457 .185 .190
Term. 2-3
OPEN
2-1 .297 (16.85)
Comm. 5-6 5-4 (11.6) (4.7) (4.83)
(7.54)
()=MOMENTARY EPOXY SEAL
02COMM. 05COMM.
SCHEMATIC
1 3 4 6
.250 .030
3PDT Ø.220 (6.35) .250 (0.76) .050
Model Switching Position (Ø5.60) (1.27)
(6.35)
No.
9 6 3
W3P1 ON NONE ON
.500
W3P2 ON NONE (ON) 8 5 2
(12.7)
W3P3 ON OFF ON
Ø.107 7 4 1
W3P4 (ON) OFF (ON) (Ø2.72)
W3P5 ON OFF (ON) .650 .722
.185 .190
Term. 2-3 2-1 (16.5) .297 (18.35)
OPEN (4.7) (4.83)
Comm. 5-6 5-4 (7.54)
()=MOMENTARY
EPOXY SEAL
1 3 4 6 7 9
SCHEMATIC
Toggle
1 2 Std
Ø.115 Ø.107
(Ø2.92) (Ø2.72)
.496
(12.60)
.299
(7.60)
SUBTRACT .079 (2.00) FOR SUBTRACT .083 (2.10) FOR
BUSHING OPTION B1 BUSHING OPTION B1
Toggle Switches
B1 B4 Std
.350 .250
(8.90) (6.35)
1/4-40 UNS
M1 EPOXY SEAL M2 EPOXY SEAL

.078 .156 .189 .220
Solder Lug (1.98) (3.96) P.C. Mount (4.80) (5.60)
(Std)
.080
.047 (2.03) .050
(1.19) THK. .030 (0.76) (1.27) THK. .030 (0.76)
M6 Right Angle P.C. Mount, Horizontal Actuation

.663
.504 Ø.107 (16.85) EPOXY SEAL .030 .185
(12.8) Ø.220 (Ø2.72) (0.76) (4.70)
.106 .185
(Ø5.60) .125
(2.70) (4.70)
(3.18)
.500 Ø.073
1 2 3 (12.7) (Ø1.85)
.050
.050 .297 (1.27)
(1.26) .200
.200 (7.54) .050 (5.08)
(5.08) (1.26) P.C. MOUNTING
.500
SPDT (12.7)
DPDT .663
(16.85)
.504 EPOXY SEAL .185 .185
(12.8) Ø.107 (4.70) (4.70)
Ø.220 (Ø2.72) .030
(Ø5.60) (0.76)
.106
(2.70) .125
4 5 6 .500
(3.18) Ø.073 .150
(12.7) (Ø1.85)
1 2 3 (3.81)
.050 .297 .050 .200

(1.26) (7.54) (1.26) (5.08)
.050
.200 P.C. MOUNTING
.500 (1.26)
(5.08)
(12.7)
Toggle
.720
(16.85) EPOXY SEAL
.185 .565 .185
.504 (4.70)
(12.8) (4.70) (14.35)
.030
Ø.107
Ø.220 (0.76)
(Ø2.72)
(Ø5.60) Ø.073
7 8 9
.106 (Ø1.85)
.125
(2.70) (3.18) 4 5 6 .050
.200 .150
(1.26)
(5.08)
DIP Switches
1 2 3 (3.81)
.297
3PDT (1.26) .565
.200 (14.35) .050
Toggle Switches
(5.08) (1.26)
M7 Right Angle P.C. Mount, Vertical Actuation

EPOXY SEAL
.663
Ø.107 (16.85) .500
Ø.220 (Ø2.72) .050
(Ø5.60) (1.26) (12.7)
.150
3 (3.81)
.106 .125
.504
(2.70) (3.18) 2
(12.8)
SPDT .030 Ø.073
1 (0.76) .200
.297 (Ø1.85)
(7.54) 1 2 3 (5.08)
.050
(12.7)
.150
.200 (3.81)
(5.08)
.150
.663 EPOXY SEAL .190 (3.81)
Ø.107 (16.85)
(Ø2.72) (4.83) .500
Ø.220 .050 (12.7)
(Ø5.60) (1.26)
6 3
.504 .106 .125
(2.70) (3.18) 5 2
DPDT (12.8) .030 Ø.073
4 1 .200 (Ø1.85) .190
.297 (0.76) (4.83)
(5.08)
(7.54) 4 5 6
.050 P.C. MOUNTING

(1.26) .200
(5.08) .500
(12.7) .150
.457
(11.6) (3.81)
.720 EPOXY SEAL

Ø.107 (18.30)
.650 (Ø2.72)
(12.8) .565
Ø.220 .190
(Ø5.60) (14.35)
9 6 3 (4.83)
3PDT .500 .125
(12.7) (3.18) 8 5 2 Ø.073
(Ø1.85)
7 4 1
.297
(7.54) 7 8 9 .200 .150
.048 (5.08) (3.81)
.050
(1.22)
(1.27) .200
.190 .565 (5.08) P.C. MOUNTING
(4.83) (14.35) .150
(3.81)
V2-V3 Vertical Bracket P.C. Mount

.230 .125
(5.84) (3.18)
Ø.107 OPTION
DIM."A" .185
(Ø2.72) CODE
(4.70)
.460
V2 (11,68)
.297 .620
(7.54) .630 (15.75)
SPDT DIM. "A" V3 (16,00)
1 2 3
.020
.048 .030 .073 DIA.
(0.51)
(1.22) .125 (0.76) (Ø1.85)
(3.18) .185
.320
(8.13) (4.70) P.C. MOUNTING
.620
(15.75)
Toggle
Ø.107 .230 .125

(Ø2.72) (5.84) (3.18) .185
DIM. "A"
OPTION (4.70)
DIM."A"
CODE
DPDT .297 .460 .620
V2 (11,68)
(7.54) (15.75)
4 5 6 .630
V3 (16,00)
.030 Ø.073
.048 .020 (Ø1.85)
.125 (0.51) (0.76)
(1.22) .190
(3.18) (4.83)
.320
Toggle Switches
.185
(8.13) (4.70) P.C. MOUNTING
.620
(15.75)
Ø.073
Ø.107 .230 (Ø1.85)
(Ø2.72) (5.84)
.185
DIM. "A" (4.70)
OPTION
DIM."A"
CODE
.297 .620
3PDT V2
.460
(15.75)
(7.54) (11,68)
4 5 6 .630
V3 (16,00)
.048 .020 .030
(1.22) .125 (0.51) (0.76)
.190
(3.18)
.320 (4.83)
.185 P.C. MOUNTING
(8.13)
(4.70) .620
(15.75)
SPECIFICATIONS initial @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mA flame retardant, heat stabilized (UL94V-0)
RATINGS Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms Actuator: Brass, chrome plated. Internal O-
Contact Rating: Q option - 5A with resistive minimum ring seal standard with all actuators.
load @ 125VAC or 28 VDC; 2A with resistive Dielectic Strength: 1,500 V RMS @ sea Frame: Spring steel
load @ 250 VAC. R option-0.4 VA max @ 20 level Switch Support: Brass, tin-plated
Vmax (AC or DC) Operating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C Actuator Pivot & Mounting Bracket:
Electrical Life: 50,000 make-and-break Nylon
cycles at full load MATERIALS Actuator Pivot Retainer: Stainless Steel
Contact Resistance: 10 milliohms max. Case and Bushings: Glass-filled nylon 6/6, Terminal and Contacts: Copper alloy with
plated over nickel or silver plate
ORDERING INFORMATION Terminal Seal: Epoxy
Series 34B Sealed Miniature Toggle Switches

Model: SPDT: WSP1, WSP2, WSP3, WSP4, WSP5
DPDT: WDP1, WDP2, WDP3, WDP4, WDP5
3PDT: W3P1, W3P2, W3P3, W3P4, W3P5
Actuator: 1, 2 (See Actuator options)
Bushing Option: B1, B4 (See Bushing options.)
34BWSP12B4M2RT
RoHS Compliant
NUT LOCKING RING ( ) LOCK WASHER

( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( )
( )
Toggle
Series 34C: Sub-Miniature Toggle Switches
SERIES 34C
Sub-Miniature Toggle Switches
FEATURES
DIP Switches
Terminations
• UL Recoginized
Toggle Switches
SPDT Ø.236
(Ø6.00) .220
.320 .110
(5.59)
(8.13) .173 (2.79) .020 3
(4.39) .370 (0.51) 2
MSP1 ON NONE ON
ON NONE (ON)
(9.40)
MSP2 1
MSP3 ON OFF ON
MSP4 (ON) OFF (ON)
ON OFF (ON)
.060
MSP5
(1.52)
()=MOMENTARY .200 .100

(5.08) (2.54)
02COMM.
Ø.100
(Ø2.54) .340
SCHEMATIC (8.64) .160
1 3 (4.06)
Ø.236
DPDT .160
(Ø6.00) .220
.320 .110 (4.06)
(8.13) (5.59)
(2.79) .020
MODEL NO. SWITCH POSITION .173 6 3
(4.39) .370 (0.51)
MDP1 ON NONE ON 5 2
(9.40)
MDP2 ON NONE (ON)
4 1
MDP3 ON OFF ON
MDP4 (ON) OFF (ON)
MDP5 ON OFF (ON) .060
2-3, 2-1, (1.52)
TERM. COMM. OPEN
5-6 5-4 .360 .100
()=MOMENTARY (9.14) Ø.100 (2.54)
(Ø2.54) .340
(8.64) .160
02COMM. 05COMM.
(4.06)
SCHEMATIC
1 3 4 6
1 2 3 4 5
Ø.100 .290 Ø.100
.210 .220
(Ø2.54) (7.37) (Ø2.54)
(5.33) (5.59)
Ø.100
Ø.100 (Ø2.54) Ø.100
.370 (Ø2.54)
(Ø2.54)
(9.40)
.410
(10.41)
Actuator options 1, 2 and 3 shown with B1 to B4 bushing, subtract 0.90 (2.29) for bushing B5,
subtract 0.40 (1,02) for B7 bushing.
Actuators 4 and 5 shown with B5 and B6 bushing, add 0.90 (2.29) for bushing B1 to B3,
add 0.50 (1,27) for B7 bushing.
Toggle
B1 Thd (Std) Ø.236 .220 B3 Thd (Std) Ø.236 .220

(Ø6.00) .030
(Ø6.00) (5.59) (5.59)
B2 Non-Thd B4 Non-Thd (0.76)
10-48 UNS 10-48 UNS
.173 .015
FLAT .020 .020
(4.39) (0.38)
(0.51) (0.51)
Ø.280 .310 .260

B5 Thd (Std) (Ø7.10) (7.87) B7 Thd (Std) Ø.280 .040
(6.60)
B6 Non-Thd B8 Non-Thd (Ø7.10) (1.02)
1/4-40 UNS 1/4-40 UNS
Toggle Switches
.225 FLAT .020 .244 .028 .020

(5.72) (0.51) (6.20) (0.71) (0.51)
PANEL MOUNTING In inches (and millimeters)
10-48 Bushing 1/4" Bushing

.023 Ø.195 Ø.250 Ø.250
Ø.195 .240 (Ø6.35) Ø.094 Ø.250
(0.58) (Ø4.95) (Ø6.35)
(Ø4.95) (6.10) (Ø2.38) (Ø6.35)
.179 .234 .022

.010 .240
(4.55) Ø.094 Ø.195 (5.94) .033 (0.55)
(0.25) (6.10)
(Ø2.38) (Ø4.95) (0.85)
WITHOUT LOCKING RING WITH STD. LOCKING RING WITHOUT LOCKING RING WITH STD. LOCKING RING
M1 Solder Lug .160

.110 M2 P.C. Mount (Std) .130
.060 .110 (2.79)
.160 (4.06) (3.30)
(1.52) (2.79) .130
(4.06) (3.30)
EPOXY EPOXY
SEAL SEAL
EPOXY
.030 SEAL .030
EPOXY (0.76) (0.76)
.060 .060 .200
SEAL .030
(1.52) (1.52) (5.08)
.030 (0.76)
.160
(0.76) (4.06)
THK. .020 (0.51) SP THK. .020 (0.51) DP
THK. .020 (0.51) SP THK. .020 (0.51) DP
M6 Right Angle P.C. Mount, Horizontal Actuation

.220 EPOXY SEAL
.320 (5.59)
.020 P.C. MOUNTING
(8.13)
.194 (0.51) .130 .200
(4.93) (5.08)
(3.30)
.016 .100
(0.41) 1 2 3
(2.54)
SPDT .030 .030 .100 Ø.048
.200 (0.7) .158 (0.76) (2.54) (Ø1.09)
(5.08) (4.01)
.020
.200 P.C. MOUNTING
(0.51)
(5.08)
Toggle
M6 .320 .220
(8.13) (5.59) EPOXY SEAL .200
4 5 6 (5.08)
DPDT .194 .020 Ø.043
(4.93) (0.51) .130 (Ø1.09)
.360
(3.30) (9.14)
.016 .200
1 2 3 (5.08)
DIP Switches
(0.41)
.200 .158 .020 .100
(5.08) (4.01) .030 (0.51) (2.54)
.030 .200 (0.76) .100 P.C. MOUNTING
(0.76) (5.08) .100 (2.54)
Toggle Switches
(2.54)
M7 Right Angle EPOXY SEAL .320 .100

.200 .194 (2.54)
P.C. Mount, (5.08) (4.93)
(8.13)
.020
Vertical (0.51) 3
Actuation 2
1
SPDT .030
.220
(5.59)
(0.76) Ø.043
.016 .130 (Ø1.09)
(0.41) (3.30) .200
.200 (5.08)
.158
(5.08) .030
.200 (0.76)
(5.08) .100
(2.54)
.194 .360 .100

EPOXY SEAL .320 (9.14)
(4.93) .200 (2.54)
(8.13)
(5.08)
.020
(0.51) 6 3
5 2
4 1
DPDT .220 Ø.043
(5.59) (Ø1.09)
.030 .016 .130 .200 .100
(0.76) (0.41) (3.30) (5.08) (2.54)
.200
.158 P.C. MOUNTING
(5.08)
(4.01)
.200 .200 .100 .030
(5.08) (5.08) (2.54) (0.76)
V2 Vertical Bracket P.C. Mount V3 Vertical Bracket P.C. Mount .194

.220
.194 (4.93)
(5.59)
(4.93)
.360 .220
(9.14) (5.59)
.130
.355 (3.30)
(9.02)
.130
.352 EPOXY
(3.30) 4 5 6
1 2 3 EPOXY (8.94) SEAL
SEAL .020
.030 .020 (0.51)
(0.76) (0.51)
.016 .100 .016
.200 .100
(0.41) (2.54) (0.41)
(5.08) (2.54) .100
.400 .400
(2.54) .200 (10.16)
(10.16)
(5.08) Ø.043
Ø.043
(Ø1.09) (Ø1.09)
.100
(2.54)
.400 .400
(10.16) (10.16)
SPDT DPDT
.100 .100
(2.54) P.C. MOUNTING (2.54)
.200
P.C. MOUNTING (5.08)
Toggle

Contact Rating: Q option - 3A with resistive Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms Case: Diallyl phthalate (DAP) (UL 94V-0)
load @ 125VAC or 28 VDC; 1.5A with minimum Toggle Handle: Brass, chrome plated
resistive load @ 250 VAC. R option-0.4 VA Dielectic Strength: 1,000 V RMS @ sea Bushing: Brass, nickel plated
max @ 20 Vmax (AC or DC) level Housing: Stainless steel
Electrical Life: 30,000 make-and-break Operating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C Terminal/Switch Support: Brass, electrotin
cycles at full load UL Recognition: File number is E35289 plated
Series 34C Sub-Miniature Toggle Switches
Toggle Switches
Model: SPDT: MSP1, MSP2, MSP3, MSP4, MSP5

DPDT: MDP1, MDP2, MDP3, MDP4, MDP5
Actuator: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (See Actuator options.)
Bushing Option: B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, B7, B8
(See Bushing options.)
34CWSP12B4M2RT
RoHS Compliant
Q = Copper alloy over silver plate
NUT ( )
LOCK WASHER
( ) ( )
( )
10-48 UNS-2B
( )
HDW21 HDW22
Toggle
Series 34D: Sealed Sub-Miniature Toggle Switches
SERIES 34D
Sealed Sub-Miniature Toggle
Switches
FEATURES
DIP Switches
Terminations
• Sealed per IP67
Toggle Switches
SPDT
Switching Position
EPOXY SEAL
Model .185
No.
(4.70) .020
.416 TYP.
WMSP1 ON NONE ON .148 (0.51)
(10.57) .200
(3.76)
WMSP2 ON NONE (ON) (5.08)
WMSP3 ON OFF ON 3 .320
WMSP4 (ON) OFF (ON) 2 (8.13)
1
WMSP5 ON OFF (ON)
Ø.180
Term.
2-3 OPEN 2-1 .543 .100 .029
Comm. (Ø4.58) Ø.100
(13.80) (2.54) (0.75)
(Ø2.52)
()=MOMENTARY
.130
02COMM. (3.30)
SCHEMATIC
1 3
DPDT EPOXY SEAL

.185 .200
Model Switching Position
(4.70) .020 (5.08)
.416 TYP.
No.
.148 (0.51)
WMDP1 ON NONE ON (3.76) (10.57) .364
(5.08)
WMDP2 ON NONE (ON) 6 .320
WMDP3 ON OFF ON 5 (8.13)
WMDP4 (ON) OFF (ON) 4
WMDP5 ON OFF (ON) Ø.180

(Ø4.58) .543 .100 .029
Term. 2-3 2-1 Ø.100
Comm. 5-6
OPEN
5-4 (13.80) (2.54) (0.75)
(Ø2.52)
()=MOMENTARY
.130
(3.30)
02COMM. 05COMM.
1 3 4 6
SCHEMATIC
1 2 Std 3 4 5 ESD Resistant 6 ESD Resistant

Ø.100 Plastic Toggle Plastic Toggle
Ø.100 Ø.100 Ø.100
Ø.100 (Ø2.52) Ø.100
(Ø2.52) (Ø2.52) (Ø2.52)
(Ø2.52) (Ø2.52)
.240 .264
(6.10) (6.70)
.421 .550
.342 .421
(10.70) (13.97)
(8.70) (10.70)
Toggle
BUSHING OPTION In inches (and millimeters)
B4 M1
EPOXY SEAL EPOXY SEAL

.059 .110 .039
Ø.180 .110
(1,50) (2,80) (1,00) (2,80)
(Ø4.57)
.177 THK. .020 (0.51)
(4.50) SP THK. .020 (0.51)
DP
.061 .150 .061
(1,55) .150
(3,80) (1,55) .158 (3,80)
.028 (4,00)
Toggle Switches
(0,70)
TERMINATION OPTIONS M2 M2 .100 P.C. MOUNTING

In inches (and millimeters) P.C. MOUNTING (2.54)
.130
(3.30) .130
(3.30)
Ø.043 Ø.043
EPOXY SEAL (Ø1.09) .030 (Ø1.09)
.030 .100 (0.76) .200
(0.76) (2.54) (5.08)
.200
SINGLE POLE (5.08) DOUBLE POLE
P.C.MOUNT P.C. MOUNT
M6 Right Angle P.C. Mount, Horizontal Actuation .159 .370

(4.05) (9.40)
.162 EPOXY SEAL EPOXY
SPDT (4.11)
.148 .020 .240 SEAL
(3.78) .240 .130 (6.10)
(0.51)
(6.10) (3.30) .142
(3.61)
.015
(0.38) .200
.030 (5.08) .031
.165 (0.76) (0.81) .016
.030 (4.19) (0.42)
.200 (0.76) .200
(5.08) (5.08) .163
.100
(4.15)
.035 (2.54)
4 5 6
.320 .200 .200 (0.90)
(8.13) (5.08) (5.08)
Ø.043 .200
(Ø1.09) (5.08)
.100
DPDT Ø.043 (2.54) 1 2 3
1 2 3 (Ø1.09)
.020 .200 .200
(5.08) .031
.200 (0.51) P.C. MOUNTING (0.80) (5.08) P.C. MOUNTING
.100
(5.08)
(2.54)
M7 Right Angle P.C. .019

.240 (0.48) .320
.236 (6.10) EPOXY SEAL (8.13)
Mount, (6.00) Ø.100 .100
Vertical (Ø2.52) (2.54)
.130
(3.30) 3
Actuation
2
1
.162
.336 (4.11)
(8.53) .015 .530
(0.38) (13.46) Ø.043
SPDT (Ø1.09)
.165 .200
(4.19) (5.08) P.C. MOUNTING
.030 .200 .100
(0.76) (5.08) (2.54)
Toggle

Ø.194
M7 (Ø4.91) Ø.100 .240 .019
.391 (Ø2.52) (6.10) (0.48) .364
(9.94) (9.25) .100
.130 (2.54)
(3.30) 6 3
.200
.320
(8.13) 5 2 (5.08)
4 1
.162
DPDT (4.11)
.336 .015 .530
DIP Switches
(8.53) (0.38) (13.46)
Ø.043
.165 .200 (Ø1.09)
(4.19) (5.08) P.C. MOUNTING
.030 .200 .200 .100
Toggle Switches
(0.76) (5.08) (5.08) (2.54)
V2 Vertical Bracket P.C. Mount

.240
.230 (6.10) .165
(5.84) .240 (4.20)
(6.10) .165
(4.20)
.130
.366
(3.30)
(9.30)
.130
.366
(3.30)
(9.30)
1 2 3 EPOXY
.030 SEAL
1 2 3 EPOXY (0.76) .020
.030 SEAL .200 (0.51)
(0.76) .020 (5.08) .015
.200 (0.51)
.100 (0.38)
(5.08) .015 (2.54)
.100 (0.38) Ø.043
(2.54) (Ø1.09) .400
Ø.043 (10.16)
(Ø1.09) .400
(10.16)
.400
SPDT (10.16) P.C. MOUNTING
.400
(10.16)
P.C. MOUNTING DPDT
.100
.200 .100
(2.54)
(5.08) (2.54)
SPECIFICATIONS Contact Resistance: 20 milliohms max. MATERIALS

RATINGS initial @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mA Case: Diallyl phthalate (DAP) (UL94V-0)
Contact Rating: Q option - 3A with resistive Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms Toggle Handle: Brass, chrome plated
load @ 125VAC or 28 VDC; 1.5A with minimum Bushing: Brass, nickel plated
resistive load @ 250 VAC. R option-0.4 VA Dielectic Strength: 1,500 V RMS @ sea Housing: Stainless steel
max @ 20 Vmax (AC or DC) level Terminal/Switch Support: Brass, electrotin
Electrical Life: 30,000 make-and-break Operating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C plated
cycles at full load Contacts & Terminals: Copper alloy, gold
plate over nickel plate or silver plate
ORDERING INFORMATION Terminal Seal: Epoxy
Series 34B Sealed Sub-Miniature Toggle Switches
DPDT: WMDP1, WMDP2, WMDP3, WMDP4, WMDP5
(See model no. for switching positions)
Actuator: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (See Actuator options)
Bushing Option: B4 (See Bushing option)
34DWMSP12B4M2RT
RoHS Compliant
Termination Options: M1, M2, M6, M7, V2
(See termination options)
Toggle
Series 34E: Sealed Surface Mount Toggle Switches
SERIES 34E
Sealed Surface Mount Toggle Switches
FEATURES
• SPDT Circuitry
• Choice of Actuators and Terminations
• Sealed per IP67

Toggle Switches
M6 .240 EPOXY
(6.10) .162
(4.11) SEAL
.020
SPDT .148 (0.51)
(3.78) .320
SWITCH POSITION
(8.13)
MODEL NO.
WMSP1 ON NONE ON
WMSP2 ON NONE (ON) .100 .030
ON OFF ON (2.52) (0.76)
WMSP3
WMSP4 (ON) OFF (ON)
WMSP5 ON OFF (ON) .410 .300 .140
TERM. COMM. 2-3 OPEN 2-1 (10.40) (7.62) (3.56)
()=MOMENTARY
02COMM.
SCHEMATIC .080
1 3 .200 (2.03)
.020
(5.08) .150
(0.62)
.100 (3.81)
.290 .080
(2.54)
(7.37) (2.03)
.040
(1.02)
S6
.240 EPOXY
(6.10) .162
.315 SEAL
(4.11)
SPDT (8.00)
Ø.179
(Ø4.55) .100
(2.52)
MODEL NO. SWITCH POSITION .323
ON NONE ON (8.20) .071
WMSP1 .280
WMSP2 ON NONE (ON) (1.80)
(7.10)
WMSP3 ON OFF ON
WMSP4 (ON) OFF (ON)
WMSP5 ON OFF (ON) .276
TERM. COMM. 2-3 OPEN 2-1 (7.00) .059
.100 .366 (1.50)
()=MOMENTARY
(2.54) (9.30)
.100
02COMM. 05COMM.
(2.54)
1 3 4 6
SCHEMATIC .079 .032
(2.00) (0.80)
Toggle
M7 Ø.100 .640
(Ø2.54) .240 (16.26)
(6.10) .335
(8.51)
Ø.099
.175 (Ø2.52)
Ø.180 (4.46)
(Ø4.60)
DIP Switches
.105
(2.70) .080 .020
(1.98) (0.50)
.030
Toggle Switches
(0.76)
SPDT
.030 .561
(0.76) (14.25)
.173
.215 (4.39)
(5.50) .125
.221 (3.18)
(5.60) .063
MODEL NO. SWITCH POSITION .079 (1.60)
WMSP1 ON NONE ON (2.00)
WMSP2 ON NONE (ON)
WMSP3 ON OFF ON
WMSP4 (ON) OFF (ON)
WMSP5 ON OFF (ON)
.120 (3.18) .100
()=MOMENTARY 02COMM. (3.00) (2.54)
SCHEMATIC .325
1 3 (8.27)

For S6, M7 Termination ESD Resistant ESD Resistant
1 Options Only 2 3 4 Plastic Toggle
Plastic Toggle
Ø.100 Ø.100
(Ø2.52) Ø.100 (Ø2.52) Ø.100
(Ø2.52) (Ø2.52)
.425
(10.80)
.240 .425 .264

(6.10) (10.80) (6.70)
TERMINATION OPTIONS
M6 S6 M7
Toggle
TAPE AND REEL PACKAGING In inches (and millimeters)
For M6 Termination
Option Only
.260 .071 .079
(6.60) 1.260 .157 .016
(1.80) (2.00) (0.40)
(32.00) (4.00) Ø.059
.618 .197 (Ø1.50)
(15.70) (5.00)
.421
(10.7)
Ø.059
(Ø1.50) .882
(22.40)
Toggle Switches
.559
(14.20)
.339
(8.60) .039 1.118 .244
(1.00) (28.40) .630 (6.20)
.472 30˚ (16.00)
(12.00) .291
(7.40)
For S6 Termination
Option Only
.071 .079
1.260 (1.80) .157 (2.00) .014
.331 (4.00) (0.35)
(32.00)
.819 (8.40) Ø.059
(20.80) .228 (Ø1.50)
(5.80)
.415
(10.55)
.559
(12.40)
.453
(11.5) .098
(2.50) 1.118 .630 .248
(28.40) 5˚ (16.00) (6.30)
For M7 Termination
Option Only
.272
(6.90) .305 1.732 .157 Ø.063 1.598
(7.75) (44.00) (4.00) (Ø1.60) (40.)
.071 .394
(1.80) (10.00)
.354
(9.00) .610
(15.50)
1.114
(28.30)
.504
(12.80)
.386
(9.80) .252
.197 .014
.866 (6.40)
(5.00) (0.35)
.591 (22.00)
(15.00) .634 .315
.098 (16.10) (8.00)
(2.50)
.236
(6.00)
Toggle
SPECIFICATIONS Insulation Resistance: 1,000 megaohms flame retardant, heat stabilized (UL94V-0)
RATINGS minimum Actuator: Brass, chrome plated
Contact Rating: 0.4 VA max. @ 20V max. Dielectic Strength: 1,500 V RMS @ sea Contacts: Copper alloy, gold plate over
(AC or DC) level nickel plate
Mechanical and Electrical Life: 30,000 Operating Temperature: -30°C to 85°C Terminals: Copper alloy, tin plate over nickel
make-and-break cycles at full load plate
Contact Resistance: 20 milliohms max. typ. MATERIALS Terminal Seal: Epoxy
initial @ 2-4 VDC, 100 mA Case and Bushings: Glass-filled nylon 4/6, Tape and Reel: 500 pcs/per reel
DIP Switches
Toggle Switches
Series 34E Sealed Surface Mount Toggle Switches
Actuator: 1, 2, 3, 4 (See Actuator options.)
Termination Options: M6, S6, M7 (See Termination options.)
34EWMSP12M6RT
RoHS Compliant
Contact: R = Copper alloy, gold plate over nickel plate
or Grayhill.
Toggle

Grayhill Catalog

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Grayhill Catalog

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Contents: Surface Mount and Thru-Hole DIP Switches

THRU-HOLE DIP SWITCHES

SURFACE MOUNT SWITCHES

Circuitry Description Type of Series No. of Positions No. of Page

Half-Pitch Top Actuated, Recessed Slide 97 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1/Station 4

Standard, Octal, BCD & Hex Rotary 94 8, 10 & 16 1 20

THRU-HOLE DIP SWITCHES

Circuitry Description Type of Series No. of Positions No. of Page

SINGLE THROW SWITCHES

Single Pole, Recessed Rocker 76 2-10 & 12 1/Station 10

MULTIPLE THROW SWITCHES

Raised Rocker 76 1&2 1/Station 13

BINARY CODED OUTPUT SWITCHES

Fig. 1 Series 97C DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)

Fig. 2 Series 97R DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)

DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)

Top View–Gull Wing

.100 (2,54) TYP.

Packaging: R = Tape and reel packaging (750 switches/reel)

Number of Positions: 02 through 10

Available from your local Grayhill Distributor.

SERIES 78H FEATURES

DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)

SPDT, DPST, Top Actuated, Slide Operated Recommended PC Pad Dimensions

Initial: 750 volts; After Life: 500 volts Method 106

Current Carry Rating: 4 amps, maximum rise

Switch Capacitance: 2 pF at 1megahertz 16 & 24mm

Solderability: Per MIL-STD-202, Method 208

Soldering Heat Resistance: Per MIL-S-83504,

six second test

Recommended Processing Temperature:

position 220°C–230°C (1 pass—260°C maximum)

Mechanical Shock: Per Method 213, Test shipped. 4 4 4

Condition A. 1 mS opening (10 mS allowed)

SERIES 76HP FEATURES

.380 Recommended PC Pad Dimensions`

.100 ± .005 .303 ± .015

Mechanical Life: 2,000 operations per switch Materials and Finishes

No. of Length Length Carrier Width Part

SERIES 90B FEATURES

DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters) CIRCUITRY

As viewed from the top of the switch in the

DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)

.020 + .005 –.000

Typical circuit diagram with actuator

Series No. of Pos. Length (Inches) Length (Metric) No./Tube

DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters)

.020 A (7,49 –0,51) ± .002

CIRCUITRY ORDERING INFORMATION

DIMENSIONS: Series 76 In inches (and millimeters) CIRCUITRY: Series 76

.020 + .005 –.000 .295 + .000 –.020

DIMENSIONS: Series 78 In inches (and millimeters) CIRCUITRY: Series 78

SPDT 1 0.280" 7,1mm 35 78J01T — —

DIMENSIONS: Series 76 In inches (and millimeters) CIRCUITRY: Series 76

DIMENSIONS: Series 78 In inches (and millimeters) CIRCUITRY: Series 78

DPDT 1 0.480" 12,2mm 21 78K01T — —

SPECIFICATIONS: Standard Styles

Mechanical Ratings Soldering Information Materials and Finishes

Recommended Soldering Conditions:

Reflow REFLOW TEMPERATURE PROFILE:

WAVE SOLDERING: 260°C maximum solder temperature for 5 seconds max.

DIMENSIONS In inches (and millimeters) CIRCUITRY

.012 ± .001 .190 ± .010